Image not available
Illustrative purposes only
FR-E740-016SC-ENE
FREQ INVERTER W/ENET, 3-PH, 400W, 1.6A
⚠️ Reference pricing provided. In case of supply shortages, we will connect you with our trusted procurement partners to ensure your project's continuity.
- Manufacturer: MITSUBISHI
- Product type:
- Available until stocks are exhausted
- SVHC: No SVHC (15-Jan-2018)
- IP Rating: IP20
- Power Rating: 400W
- No. of Phases: Three Phase
- Product Range: FR-E700 SC
- Supply Frequency: 50Hz / 60Hz
- Output Current Max: 1.6A
- Supply Voltage Max: 480VAC
- Supply Voltage Min: 380VAC
- Control / Drive Type: Variable Frequency Drive
- Compatible Motor Type: Induction / Asynchronous Motors
| Delivery and price | |
|---|---|
| Units per pack | 1 |
| Price | 423.64 € |
| Current stock | 10+ |
| Lead time | 30 days |
Datasheet
## **FR-E700**
## Inverters
## Instruction Manual
# **FR-E720S SC EC/ENE FR-E740 SC EC/ENE**
Art.No. 412411 30012019 Version B
DelLiEseae
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
**Versionsprüfung**
|**Instruction Manual**<br>**Inverter FR-E700 SC EC/ENE**<br>**Art. no.: 412411**|**Instruction Manual**<br>**Inverter FR-E700 SC EC/ENE**<br>**Art. no.: 412411**|
|---|---|
|**Version**|**Changes / Additions / Corrections**|
|A<br>05/2011<br>akl/rwi|—|
|B<br>01/2019<br>rwi|Additions:<br>�FR-E700 SC ENE (Ethernet communication function built-in type)<br>�Symbols used in the manual<br>Changes:<br>�The positive (source) control logic is given priority in all<br>descriptions, diagrams etc.<br>�General correction of version A|
|||
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi inverter.
This instruction manual provides instructions for advanced use of the FR-E700 SC series inverters. Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always read this instruction manual to use the equipment to its optimum.
## **Safety Instructions**
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter until you have read through this instruction manual carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions. In this instruction manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
**P**
**E**
## **WARNING:**
_**Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.**_
## **CAUTION:**
_**Assumes that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury, or may cause physical damage only.**_
Note that even the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow strictly the instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
I
## **Electric Shock Prevention**
## **WARNING:**
- _**While power is on or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you**_
- **P** _**may get an electric shock.**_
- _**Do not run the inverter with the front cover removed. Otherwise, you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.**_
- _**Even if power is off, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may access the charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.**_
- _**Before starting wiring or inspection, check to make sure that the operation panel indicator is off, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched off, and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after power off and it is dangerous.**_
- _**This inverter must be earthed. Earthing must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)**_
- _**Use a neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400 V class inverter in compliance with EN standard.**_
- _**Any person who is involved in the wiring or inspection of this equipment should be fully competent to do the work.**_
- _**Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or be injured.**_
- _**If your application requires by installation standards an RCD (residual current device) as up stream protection please select according to DIN VDE 0100-530 as following: Single phase inverter type A or B Three phase inverter only type B**_
- _**Perform setting dial and key operations with dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.**_
- _**Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.**_
- _**Do not replace the cooling fan while power is on. It is dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is on.**_
- _**Do not touch the printed circuit board with wet hands. You may get an electric shock.**_
- _**When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity, the DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1 s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off to prevent an electric shock.**_
II
## **Fire Prevention**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Mount the inverter to incombustible material. Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall**_
- **E** _**without holes (so that nobody can touch the inverter heatsink on the rear side, etc.). Mounting it to or near combustible material can cause a fire.**_
- _**If the inverter has become faulty, switch off the inverter power. A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire.**_
- ● _**When using a brake resistor, make up a sequence that will turn off power when an alarm signal is output. Otherwise, the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire.**_
- _**Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+, N/–. This could cause a fire and destroy the inverter. The surface temperature of braking resistors can far exceed 100 °C for brief periods. Make sure that there is adequate protection against accidental contact and a safe distance is maintained to other units and system parts.**_
- _**Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual. If a product is used without any inspection, a burst, breakage, or a fire may occur.**_
## **Injury Prevention**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Apply only the voltage specified in the instruction manual to each terminal. Otherwise,**_
- **E** _**burst, damage, etc. may occur.**_ ● _**Ensure that the cables are connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur.**_
- ● _**Always make sure that polarity is correct to prevent damage, etc. Otherwise, burst, damage, etc. may occur.**_
- ● _**While power is on or for some time after power-off, do not touch the inverter as it is hot and you may get burnt.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
III
## **Additional Instructions**
Also note the following points to prevent an accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
## **Transport and Installation**
- **CAUTION:** ● _**Any person who is opening a package using a sharp object, such as a knife and cutter, must**_
- **E** _**wear gloves to prevent injuries caused by the edge of the sharp object.**_
- ● _**Transport the product using the correct method that corresponds to the weight. Failure to observe this could lead to injuries.**_
- _**Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.**_
- ● _**Ensure that installation position and material can withstand the weight of the inverter. Install according to the information in the instruction manual.**_
- _**Do not install the product on a hot surface.**_
- ● _**The inverter must be installed on a strong surface securely with screws so that it will not drop.**_ ● _**Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has parts missing. This can result in breakdowns.**_
- ● _**When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or setting dial; it may fall off or fail.**_
- ● _**During installation, caution must be taken not to drop the inverter as doing so may cause injuries.**_
- _**Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.**_
- _**Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.**_
- _**Prevent other conductive bodies such as screws and metal fragments or other flammable substance such as oil from entering the inverter.**_
- ● _**As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.**_
- _**If halogen-based materials (fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, etc.) infiltrate into a Mitsubishi Electric product, the product will be damaged. Halogen-based materials are often included in fumigant, which is used to sterilize or disinfect wooden packages. When packaging, prevent residual fumigant components from being infiltrated into Mitsubishi Electric products, or use an alternative sterilization or disinfection method (heat disinfection, etc.) for packaging. Sterilization of disinfection of wooden package should also be performed before packaging the product.**_
- _**Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions. Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.**_
|**Operating Condition**|**Specifications**|
|---|---|
|Ambient temperature|10 °C to +50 °C (non-freezing)|
|Ambient humidity<br>a|90 % RH or less (non-condensing)<br>|
|Storage temperature<br>~~pf~~<br>LR|20 °C to +65 °C<br>~~pf~~|
|Atmosphere<br>LR|Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)|
|Altitude<br>LR|Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation.<br>After that derate by 3% for every extra 500 m up to 2500 m (91%)|
|Vibration<br>A|5.9 m/s² or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)<br> G|
Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
IV
## **Wiring**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Do not install assemblies or components (e. g. power factor correction capacitors) on the**_
- **E** _**inverter output side, which are not approved from Mitsubishi. These devices on the inverter output side may be overheated or burn out.**_
- _**The direction of rotation of the motor corresponds to the direction of rotation commands (STF/STR) only if the phase sequence (U, V, W) is maintained.**_
## **Trial Run**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Before starting operation, confirm and adjust the parameters. A failure to do so may cause**_
- **E** _**some machines to make unexpected motions.**_
## **Operation**
## **WARNING:**
- _**When you have chosen the retry function, stay away from the equipment as the motor will**_
- **P** _**restart suddenly after an alarm stop.**_ ● _**Since pressing the STOP/RESET-key may not stop output depending on the function setting status, provide a circuit and switch separately to make an emergency stop (power off, mechanical brake operation for emergency stop, etc.).**_
- _**Make sure that the start signal is off before resetting the inverter alarm. A failure to do so may restart the motor suddenly.**_
- ● _**The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only. Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter output may damage the equipment.**_
- ● _**Do not modify the equipment.**_ ● _**Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
V
## **CAUTION:**
||**CAUTION:**|
|---|---|
|**E**|**CAUTION:**<br>●**_The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee protection of the motor from_**<br>**_overheating. It is recommended to install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for_**|
||**_overheat protection._**|
||●**_Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the_**|
||**_inverter. Otherwise, the life of the inverter decreases._**|
||●**_Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference and follow the accepted_**|
||**_EMC procedures for proper installation of frequency inverters. Otherwise nearby electronic_**|
||**_equipment may be affected._**|
||●**_Take appropriate measures regarding harmonics. Otherwise this can endanger compensa-_**|
||**_tion systems or overload generators._**|
||●**_When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, the motor must be an insulation-enhanced_**|
||**_motor or measures must be taken to suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage attributable to_**|
||**_the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the_**|
||**_motor._**|
||●**_Use a motor designed for inverter operation. (The stress for motor windings is bigger than_**|
||**_in line power supply)._**|
||●**_When parameter clear or all clear is performed, set again the required parameters before_**|
||**_starting operations. Each parameter returns to the initial value._**|
||●**_The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before changing its setting, fully_**|
||**_examine the performances of the motor and machine._**|
||●**_The DC braking function of the frequency inverter is not designed to continuously hold a_**|
||**_load. Use an electro-mechanical holding brake on the motor for this purpose._**|
||●**_Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long period, always perform inspec-_**|
||**_tion and test operation._**|
||●**_For prevention of damage due to static electricity, touch nearby metal before touching this_**|
||**_product to eliminate static electricity from your body._**|
||●**_The DC braking function of the frequency inverter is not designed to continuously hold a_**|
||**_load. Use an electro-mechanical holding brake on the motor for this purpose._**|
||●**_If you are installing the inverter to drive a three-phase device while you are contracted for_**|
||**_lighting and power service, consult your electric power supplier._**|
||●**_In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external_**|
||**_systems via network, take security measures including firewall settings._**|
||●**_Depending on the network environment, the inverter may not operate as intended due to_**|
||**_delays or disconnection in communication. Carefully consider the conditions and safety for_**|
||**_the inverter on site._**|
## **Emergency Stop**
## **CAUTION:**
||**CAUTION:**|
|---|---|
|**E**|**CAUTION:**<br>●**_A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided for devices or equipment in_**<br>**_a system to prevent hazardous conditions in case of failure of the inverter or an external_**|
||**_device controlling the inverter._**|
||●**_When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit),_**|
||**_damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the_**|
||**_cause and power on the breaker._**|
||●**_When the protective function is activated (i. e. the frequency inverter switches off with an_**|
||**_error message), take the corresponding corrective action as described in the inverter man-_**|
||**_ual, then reset the inverter, and resume operation._**|
VI
## **Maintenance, Inspection and Parts Replacement**
**E**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.**_
## **Disposing the Inverter**
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Treat as industrial waste.**_
## **General Instructions**
Many of the diagrams and drawings in instruction manuals show the inverter without a cover, or partially open. Never run the inverter in this status. Always replace the cover and follow this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
VII
## **Symbols used in the manual**
Use of instructions
Instructions concerning important information are marked separately and are displayed as follows:
**NOTE** Text of instruction
## **Use of examples**
Examples are marked separately and are displayed as follows:
> **Example** V Example text
## **Use of numbering in the figures**
Numbering within the figures is displayed by white numbers within black circles and is explained in a table following it using the same number, e.g.:
## **Use of handling instructions**
Handling instructions are steps that must be carried out in their exact sequence during startup, operation, maintenance and similar operations.
They are numbered consecutively (black numbers in white circles):
Text.
Text.
Text.
## **Use of footnotes in tables**
Instructions in tables are explained in footnotes underneath the tables (in superscript). There is a footnote character at the appropriate position in the table (in superscript).
If there are several footnotes for one table then these are numbered consecutively underneath the table (black numbers in white circle, in superscript):
Text
Text
Text
VIII
Contents
## **Contents**
|**1**|**Product checking and part identification**|
|---|---|
|1.1|Inverter type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1|
|1.2|Description of the case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2|
||1.2.1<br>FR-E700 SC EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2|
||1.2.2<br>FR-E700 SC ENE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3|
||1.2.3<br>Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4|
|**2**|**Installation**|
|2.1|Removal and reinstallation of the front cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1|
||2.1.1<br>FR-E720S SC and FR-E740-016SC to FR-E740-170SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1|
||2.1.2<br>FR-E740-230SC and FR-E740-300SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2|
|2.2|Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4|
|2.3|Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5|
|2.4|Enclosure design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7|
||2.4.1<br>Inverter installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7|
||2.4.2<br>Inverter placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11|
|**3**|**Wiring**|
|3.1|Inverter and peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1|
||3.1.1<br>Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3|
|3.2|Terminal connection diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4|
||3.2.1<br>FR-E700 SC EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4|
||3.2.2<br>FR-E700 SC ENE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5|
|3.3|Main circuit connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7|
||3.3.1<br>Specification of main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7|
||3.3.2<br>Terminal layout and wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8|
|3.4|Control circuit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15|
||3.4.1<br>Control circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18|
||3.4.2<br>Wiring instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23|
||3.4.3<br>Safety stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24|
||3.4.4<br>Changing the control logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27|
|3.5|PU connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30|
||3.5.1<br>Connecting the parameter unit using a connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30|
||3.5.2<br>Connection to the PU connector at FR-E700 SC ENE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31|
||3.5.3<br>RS-485 communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31|
|3.6|USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32|
|3.7|System configuration for Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33|
||3.7.1<br>Ethernet communication overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33|
||3.7.2<br>Ethernet connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34|
||3.7.3<br>LED indicator for communication status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35|
||3.7.4<br>Removal of the Ethernet board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
IX
Contents
|3.8|Connection of stand-alone option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37|Connection of stand-alone option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37|
|---|---|---|
||3.8.1|Magnetic contactors (MC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37|
||3.8.2|Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor FR-ABR|
|||(FR-E720S-030SC or more, FR-E740-016SC or more) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39|
||3.8.3|Connection of a brake unit FR-BU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42|
||3.8.4|Connection of the high power factor converter FR-HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45|
||3.8.5|Connection of the power regeneration common converter FR-CV . . . . . . . . . . 3-46|
||3.8.6|Connection of the power improving DC reactor FFR-HEL-(H)-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47|
||3.8.7|Installation of a reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47|
|3.9|Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48||
||3.9.1|Leakage currents and countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48|
||3.9.2|Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52|
||3.9.3|Power supply harmonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55|
||3.9.4|Inverter-driven 400 V class motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56|
|**4**|**Operation**||
|4.1|Precautions for use of the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1||
||4.1.1|Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4|
|4.2|Drive the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7||
|4.3|Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8||
||4.3.1|Parts of the operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8|
||4.3.2|Basic operation (factory setting). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10|
||4.3.3|Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11|
||4.3.4|Operation lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13|
||4.3.5|Monitoring of output current and output voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15|
||4.3.6|First priority monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15|
||4.3.7|Digital dial push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15|
||4.3.8|Change the parameter setting value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16|
||4.3.9|Parameter clear/All Parameter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17|
||4.3.10|Initial value change list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18|
|**5**|**Basic settings**||
|5.1|Simple mode parameter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1||
||5.1.1|Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2|
||5.1.2|When the rated motor frequency is 60 Hz (Pr. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4|
||5.1.3|Increase the starting torque (Pr. 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5|
||5.1.4|Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7|
||5.1.5|Change the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9|
||5.1.6|Operation mode (Pr. 79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11|
||5.1.7|Large starting torque and low speed torque are necessary|
|||(Advanced magnetic flux control, General-purpose magnetic flux vector|
|||control) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12|
||5.1.8|To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance|
|||(offline auto tuning) (Pr. 9, Pr. 71, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15|
|5.2|PU operation mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20||
||5.2.1|Set the set frequency to operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21|
||5.2.2|Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23|
||5.2.3|Use switches to give the frequency command (multi-speed setting). . . . . . . . 5-24|
||5.2.4|Perform frequency setting by analog voltage input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26|
||5.2.5|Perform frequency setting by analog current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28|
X
Contents
|5.3|External operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30|External operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30|
|---|---|---|
||5.3.1|Use the set frequency set by PU (Pr. 79 = 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30|
||5.3.2|Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command|
|||(multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32|
||5.3.3|Perform frequency setting by analog voltage input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35|
||5.3.4|Change the frequency (40 Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer|
|||(at 5 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38|
||5.3.5|Perform frequency setting by analog current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39|
||5.3.6|Change the frequency (40 Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer|
|||(at 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41|
|**6**|**Parameter**||
|6.1|Parameter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1||
|6.2|Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32||
||6.2.1|Change the control method (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33|
|6.3|Adjust|the output torque (current) of the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35|
||6.3.1|Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35|
||6.3.2|Advanced magnetic flux vector control|
|||(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89, Pr. 800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38|
||6.3.3|General-purpose magnetic flux vector control|
|||(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41|
||6.3.4|Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43|
||6.3.5|Stall prevention operation|
|||(Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 277). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44|
|6.4|Limit the output frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52||
||6.4.1|Maximum and minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52|
||6.4.2|Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) . . . . 6-54|
|6.5|Set V/F pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56||
||6.5.1|Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56|
||6.5.2|Load pattern selection (Pr. 14). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58|
|6.6|Frequency setting by external terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60||
||6.6.1|Multi-speed setting operation|
|||(Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60|
||6.6.2|Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63|
||6.6.3|Remote setting function (Pr. 59). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67|
|6.7|Acceleration and deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71||
||6.7.1|Acceleration and deceleration time|
|||(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71|
||6.7.2|Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75|
||6.7.3|Acceleration and deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77|
||6.7.4|Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration)|
|||(Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, Pr. 292, Pr. 293) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79|
|6.8|Selection and protection of a motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82||
||6.8.1|Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51). . . . . . 6-82|
||6.8.2|Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87|
||6.8.3|To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance|
|||(offline auto tuning) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96, Pr. 859). . . 6-90|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
XI
Contents
|6.9|Motor brake and stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100|Motor brake and stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100|
|---|---|---|
||6.9.1|DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100|
||6.9.2|Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103|
||6.9.3|Stop selection (Pr. 250). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105|
||6.9.4|Stop-on contact control function(Pr. 6, Pr. 48, Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276) . . . .6-107|
||6.9.5|Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 283, Pr. 292) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-111|
|6.10|Function assignment of external terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116||
||6.10.1|Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 184) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116|
||6.10.2|Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119|
||6.10.3|Condition selection of function validity by second function selection|
|||signal (RT, Pr. 155) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121|
||6.10.4|Start signal selection (Terminal STF, STR, STOP, Pr. 250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122|
||6.10.5|Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192/Pr. 313 to Pr. 315) . . .6-126|
||6.10.6|Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-131|
||6.10.7|Output current detection function (Y12, Y13, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153) . . . . . . . . . . .6-133|
||6.10.8|Remote output function (REM, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-135|
|6.11|Monitor display and monitor output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-138||
||6.11.1|Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-138|
||6.11.2|Monitor display selection of DU/PU and terminal AM|
|||(Pr. 52, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-140|
||6.11.3|Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) . . . . . .6-148|
||6.11.4|Terminal AM calibration [calibration parameter Pr. 645, C1 (Pr. 901)]. . . . . . .6-150|
|6.12|Operation selection at power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-153||
||6.12.1|Automatic restart|
|||(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611) . . . . . . . .6-153|
||6.12.2|Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-165|
|6.13|Operation setting at alarm occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-169||
||6.13.1|Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-169|
||6.13.2|Input/output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) . . . . . . . . . .6-172|
||6.13.3|Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-173|
|6.14|Energy saving operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-174|Energy saving operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-174|
||6.14.1|Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-174|
|6.15|Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-175||
||6.15.1|PWM carrier frequency and soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-175|
||6.15.2|Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-176|
|6.16|Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-177||
||6.16.1|Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-177|
||6.16.2|Input filter time constant (Pr. 74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-182|
||6.16.3|Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)|
|||[Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-183|
|6.17|Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-190||
||6.17.1|Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) . . . . .6-190|
||6.17.2|Parameter write selection (Pr. 77). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-195|
||6.17.3|Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-197|
||6.17.4|User groups (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-198|
||6.17.5|Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-201|
XII
Contents
|6.18|Selection of operation mode and operation location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-206|Selection of operation mode and operation location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-206|
|---|---|---|
||6.18.1|Operation mode selection (Pr. 79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-206|
||6.18.2|Operation mode at power on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-218|
||6.18.3|Start command source and frequency command source during|
|||communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-220|
|6.19|Communication operation and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-229||
||6.19.1|PU connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-229|
||6.19.2|Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication|
|||(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-234|
||6.19.3|Communication E²PROM write selection (Pr. 342) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-245|
||6.19.4|Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication). . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-246|
||6.19.5|Modbus®-RTU communication|
|||(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 549). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-265|
||6.19.6|Initial settings and specifications of Ethernet communication|
|||(FR-E700 SC ENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-283|
||6.19.7|MELSOFT / FA product connection (FR-E700 SC ENE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-291|
||6.19.8|USB communication (Pr. 547, Pr. 548). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292|
|6.20|Special|operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-293|
||6.20.1|PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-293|
||6.20.2|Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-305|
||6.20.3|Droop control (Pr. 286 to Pr. 287) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-313|
||6.20.4|Regeneration avoidance function|
|||(Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-314|
|6.21|Useful functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317||
||6.21.1|Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317|
||6.21.2|Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-318|
||6.21.3|Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-323|
||6.21.4|Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-324|
||6.21.5|Free parameters (Pr. 888, Pr. 889). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-328|
|6.22|Setting|for the parameter unit, operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-329|
||6.22.1|RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-329|
||6.22.2|PU display language selection (Pr. 145) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-329|
||6.22.3|Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161) . .6-330|
||6.22.4|Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-331|
||6.22.5|Buzzer control (Pr. 990) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-332|
||6.22.6|PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-332|
|6.23|MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-333||
|6.24|CC-Link IE Field Network Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-349||
||6.24.1|Programming examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-364|
||6.24.2|Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-373|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
XIII
Contents
|**7**|**Troubleshooting**|**Troubleshooting**|
|---|---|---|
|7.1|List of alarm display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2||
|7.2|Causes and corrective actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4||
|7.3|Reset method of protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19||
|7.4|LED display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20||
|7.5|Check and clear of the fault history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21||
|7.6|Check first when you have troubles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23||
||7.6.1|Motor does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23|
||7.6.2|Motor or machine generates abnormal noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25|
||7.6.3|Inverter generates abnormal noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25|
||7.6.4|Motor generates heat abnormally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25|
||7.6.5|Motor rotates in opposite direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26|
||7.6.6|Speed greatly differs from the setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26|
||7.6.7|Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26|
||7.6.8|Speed varies during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27|
||7.6.9|Operation mode is not changed properly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28|
||7.6.10|Operation panel display is not operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28|
||7.6.11|Motor current is too large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28|
||7.6.12|Speed does not accelerate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29|
||7.6.13|Unable to write parameter setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29|
|7.7|Meters and measuring methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30||
||7.7.1|Measurement of powers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31|
||7.7.2|Measurement of voltages and use of PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32|
||7.7.3|Measurement of currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32|
||7.7.4|Use of CT and transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33|
||7.7.5|Measurement of inverter input power factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33|
||7.7.6|Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ and N/–) . . 7-33|
|**8**|**Maintenance and inspection**||
|8.1|Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1||
||8.1.1|Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1|
||8.1.2|Periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1|
||8.1.3|Daily and periodic inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2|
||8.1.4|Display of the life of the inverter parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4|
||8.1.5|Checking the inverter and converter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5|
||8.1.6|Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6|
||8.1.7|Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6|
||8.1.8|Inverter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10|
|8.2|Measurements on the main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11||
||8.2.1|Insulation resistance test using megger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11|
||8.2.2|Pressure test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11|
||8.2.3|Measurement of voltages and currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12|
XIV
Contents
|**A**|**Appendix**|**Appendix**|
|---|---|---|
|A.1|Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1||
||A.1.1|1-phase, 200 V class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1|
||A.1.2|3-phase, 400 V class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2|
|A.2|Common specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3||
|A.3|Outline|dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5|
||A.3.1|FR-E720S-008SC-EC to 030SC-EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5|
||A.3.2|FR-E720S-050SC-EC and 080SC-EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6|
||A.3.3|FR-E720S-110SC-EC and FR-E740-016SC-EC to 095SC-EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7|
||A.3.4|FR-E740-120SC-EC and 170SC-EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8|
||A.3.5|FR-E740-230SC-EC and 300SC-EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8|
||A.3.6|FR-E720S-008SC-ENE to 030SC-ENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9|
||A.3.7|FR-E720S-050SC-ENE, 080SC-ENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10|
||A.3.8|FR-E720S-110SC-ENE, FR-E740-016SC-ENE to 095SC-ENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11|
||A.3.9|FR-E740-120SC-ENE, 170SC-ENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12|
||A.3.10|FR-E740-230SC-ENE, 300SC-ENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-13|
||A.3.11|Parameter unit FR-PU07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-14|
||A.3.12|Parameter unit FR-PA07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-15|
|A.4|Parameter list with instruction codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-16||
|A.5|Specification change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-26||
||A.5.1|SERIAL number check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-26|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
XV
Contents
XVI
Product checking and part identification
Inverter type
## **1 Product checking and part identification**
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
## **1.1 Inverter type**
**==> picture [381 x 94] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR - E740 - 016 SC - E NE<br>Symbol Voltage Class Symbol Type Number Symbol Function<br>E720S Single-phase 230 V 008 NE Ethernet<br>to 3-digit display communication<br>E740 Three-phase 400 V 300<br>C Standard<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [91 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700SC-ENE-Product identification<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 1-1:** Inverter type FR-E700 SC EC/ENE_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
1 - 1
Description of the case
Product checking and part identification
## **1.2 Description of the case**
## **1.2.1 FR-E700 SC EC**
**==> picture [393 x 356] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation panel<br>(refer to section 4.3) Cooling fan<br>(refer to section 8.1.7)<br>PU connector<br>(refer to section 3.5) —_—- a[=3_ [a]<br>Voltage/current input switch USB connector<br>(refer to section 3.4) (mini-B connector)<br>(refer to section 3.6)<br>Connector for plug-in<br>option connection<br>(refer to the instruction<br>manual of options.)<br>USB connector cover<br>(refer to section 3.6)<br>Front cover Control circuit terminal<br>block<br>(refer to section 3.4)<br>PU connector cover<br>(refer to section 3.5)<br>Changing the control logic<br>jumper connector<br>(refer to section 3.4.4)<br>Main circuit terminal<br>block<br>(refer to section 3.3)<br>Comb shaped wiring cover<br>(refer to section 2.2)<br>0<br>a Rating plate ° MITSUBISHI IWERTER<br>Inverter type MODEL FR-E740-095SC-EC<br>Input rating<br>Capacity plate Output rating<br>FR-E740-095SC-EC <_ Inverter type Serial number SERIAL<br>Serial number<br>I002121E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 1-2:** Appearance and structure of FR-E700 SC EC_
Location of the capacity plate and the rating plate differs according to the inverter capacity. Refer to the outline dimension drawing. (Refer to section A.3.)
## **NOTE**
For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to section 2.1.
1 - 2
Product checking and part identification
Description of the case
## **1.2.2**
## **FR-E700 SC ENE**
**==> picture [458 x 106] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
LL Rating plate ©<br>INVERTER<br>PASSED<br>Inverter model MODEL FR-E740-016SC-ENE<br>Capacity plate ® a INPUT XXXXX<br>Input rating OUTPUT XXXXX<br>FR-E740-016SC-ENE Inverter model Output rating<br>SERIAL<br>—________~ " Serial number Serial number —___________ SAMPLE<br>SERIANE XOXXXXK — Country of origin MADE IN JAPAN MITSUBISH] ELECTRIC CORPORATION 4#9<br>FR-E700SC-ENE-parts identification<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 1-3:** Appearance and structure of FR-E700 SC ENE_
|**Sym-**<br>**bol**<br>**Name**<br>**Refer to**<br>**section**||**Sym-**<br>**bol**<br>**Name**<br>**Refer to**<br>**section**|
|---|---|---|
|Cooling fan<br>8.1.7<br>PU connector cover<br>3.5<br>USB connector (mini-B connector)<br>3.6<br>Ethernet board<br>3.7.2<br>Operation panel<br>4.3<br>Combed shaped wiring cover<br>2.2<br>PO<br>eeO~~r~~de<br>aOe|||
|PU connector<br>3.5<br>PO||Ethernet board connector<br>3.7.2<br> Ee|
|LED indicator for communication status<br>3.7.3<br>Ethernet communication connector<br>3.7.2<br>USB connector cover<br>3.6<br>aOe <br>seO~~r~~<br>aOe||Voltage/current input switch<br>3.4<br>Control logic switchover jumper connector<br>3.4.4<br>Control circuit terminal block<br>3.4<br> Od<br> =|
|Front cover<br>2.3<br>afe||Main circuit terminal block<br>3.3|
_**Tab.1-1:**_
_Inverter component names from fig. 1-3_
Location of the capacity plate and the rating plate differs according to the inverter capacity. Refer to the outline dimension drawing. (Refer to section A.3)
The jumper connector is set in the source logic (SOURCE) position when shipped from the factory.
|
**NOTE** For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to section 2.1.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
1 - 3
Description of the case
Product checking and part identification
## **1.2.3 Accessory**
## **Fan cover fixing screws**
|**Capacity**|**Screw Size [mm]**|**Number**|
|---|---|---|
|FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC<br>~~po~~<br>Re|M3 35<br>~~po~~<br>~~GC~~|1<br>~~po~~<br>~~GC~~|
|FR-E740-040SC to 095SC<br>Re|M3 35<br>~~GC~~|1<br>~~GC~~|
|FR-E740-120SC to 300SC<br>Re<br>a|M3 35<br>~~GC~~|2<br>~~GC~~|
_**Tab. 1-2:** Fan cover fixing screws_
**NOTES** Inverters FR-E720S-008SC to 030SC and FR-E740-026SC or less are not provided with the cooling fan. Therefore the fan cover fixing screws are not delivered with these models.
For removal and reinstallation of the cooling fans, refer to section 8.1.7.
1 - 4
Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
Installation
## **2 Installation**
## **2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover**
## **2.1.1 FR-E720S SC and FR-E740-016SC to FR-E740-170SC**
## **Removal**
Remove the front cover by pulling it toward you in the direction of arrow (refer to the figure below).
**Example: FR-E740-095SC**
**==> picture [362 x 173] intentionally omitted <==**
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I002050E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-1:** Removal of the front cover_
## **Reinstallation**
To reinstall, match the cover to the inverter front and install it straight.
**Example: FR-E740-095SC**
**==> picture [383 x 178] intentionally omitted <==**
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001908E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-2:** Reinstallation of the front cover_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
2 - 1
Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
Installation
## **2.1.2 FR-E740-230SC and FR-E740-300SC**
## **Removal**
Loosen the installation screws of the front cover 1. Remove the front cover 1 by pulling it toward you in the direction of arrow.
Remove the front cover 2 by pulling it toward you in the direction of arrow (refer to the figure below).
## **Example: FR-E740-230SC**
**==> picture [394 x 162] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Loosen the screw Remove front cover 1 Remove front cover 2<br>of front cover 1<br>Front<br>Front cover 2<br>cover 1<br>Installation<br>screws<br>I002051E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-3:** Removal of the front cover_
2 - 2
Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
Installation
## **Reinstallation**
Match the front cover 2 to the inverter front and install it straight.
Insert the two fixed hooks on the lower side of the front cover 1 into the sockets of the inverter.
Tighten the screw of the front cover 1.
**==> picture [392 x 325] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Example: FR-E740-230SC<br>Press front cover 2 Insert hooks into the sockets Tighten the<br>against the inverter installation screws<br>Installation<br>screws<br>Front cover 1<br>Front cover 2<br>Fixed hook<br>Socket of the<br>inverter<br>I001705E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-4:** Reinstallation of the front cover_
## **NOTES**
Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
2 - 3
Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover
Installation
## **2.2**
## **Removal and reinstallation of the wiring cover**
The cover can be removed easily by pulling it toward you.
To reinstall, fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.
**==> picture [363 x 233] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC<br>FR-E720S-008SC to 030SC FR-E740-016SC to 095SC<br>— ——— A ILO O | |”<br>fm 9) || Steed<br>Guides<br>Guides<br>:| |<J ) ZoL S SS i al i gs \ @ Wiring cover<br>Wiring cover<br>)<br>)<br>ad aT )<br>) Example: FR-E740-095SC<br>Example: FR-E720S-030SC<br>FR-E740-120SC and 170SC FR-E740-230SC and 300SC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [359 x 189] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Guides<br>Wiring cover Guides<br>La % Wiring cover<br>{J SERESERREREREEE] ei manieieniss| (© Example: FR-E740-230SC<br>Dent<br>For removal, push the dent on the wiring cover with your<br>finger and pull toward you.<br>Example: FR-E720S-120SC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [95 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I002052E, I002053E, I002054E, I002055E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-5:** Removing the wiring cover_
2 - 4
Installation
Mounting
## **2.3 Mounting**
**NOTE**
Install the inverter vertically. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.
Remove the front cover and wiring cover to fix the inverter to the surface.
**==> picture [398 x 188] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-050SC or more<br>FR-E720S-008SC to 030SC<br>FR-E740-016SC or more<br>Front cover<br>Front cover<br>Wiring cover<br>Wiring cover<br>I002150E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-6:** Installation of the FR-E700 SC EC on the panel_
**==> picture [376 x 363] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-008SC to 030SC FR-E720S-050SC or more, FR-E740-016SC or more<br>Front cover<br>Front cover<br>Wiring cover Wiring cover<br>FR-E740-230SC, 300SC<br>Front cover 1<br>Wiring cover<br>FR-E700SC-ENE_Installation_of_the_inverter and covers_1/2<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-7:** Installation of the FR-E700 SC ENE on the panel_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
2 - 5
Installation
Mounting
## **NOTE**
When encasing multiple inverters, install them in parallel as a cooling measure. Leave enough clearances around the inverter (refer to page 2-11).
## _**Fig. 2-8:**_
_Good heat dissipation is achieved through the vertical alignment of the frequency inverter, the side-by-side mounting and maintenance of minimum clearances._
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I002151E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
The inverter consists of precision mechanical and electronic parts. Never install or handle it in any of the following conditions as doing so could cause an operation fault or failure.
**==> picture [385 x 132] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
High temperature,<br>Direct sunlight Vibration ( 5.9 m/s²) high humidity Horizontal placement<br>Zl W t em)»<br>Sy SSS bi<br>om S ca ay<br>Ec iY<br>(When mounted inside enclosure.) Transportation by holding Oil mist, flammable gas, Mounting to<br>the front cover or dial corrosive gas, fluff, dust, etc. combustible material<br>I001708E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-9:** Conditions that could cause an operation fault or failure_
nT 2 - 6
Installation
Enclosure design
## **2.4**
## **Enclosure design**
When an inverter enclosure is to be designed and manufactured, heat generated by contained equipment, etc., the environment of an operating place, and others must be fully considered to determine the enclosure structure, size and equipment layout. The inverter unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of operation, operate the inverter in the ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.
## **2.4.1 Inverter installation environment**
As the inverter installation environment should satisfy the standard specifications indicated in the following table, operation in any place that does not meet these conditions not only deteriorates the performance and life of the inverter, but also causes a failure. Refer to the following points and take adequate measures.
|**Item**|**Specification**|
|---|---|
|Ambient temperature|�10 °C to +50 °C (non-freezing)|
|Ambient humidity|90% RH or less (non-condensing)|
|Storage temperature|-20 °C to +65 °C�|
|Atmosphere|Free from corrosive and explosive gases, dust and dirt|
|Maximum altitude|1000 m or less|
|Vibration|5.9 m/s² or less (0,6 g) at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)|
_**Tab. 2-1:** Environmental standard specifications of inverter_
- Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
## **Temperature**
� The permissible ambient temperature of the inverter FR-E700 SC is between 10 and +50 °C. Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the following measures so that the ambient temperature of the inverter falls within the specified range.
- Measures against high temperature
- Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 2-10.)
- Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electrical chamber.
- Block direct sunlight.
- Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
- Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.
- Measures against low temperature
- Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
- Do not power off the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter off.)
- Sudden temperature changes
- Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
- Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
- If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
2 - 7
Enclosure design
Installation
## **Humidity**
Normally operate the inverter within the 45 to 90% range of the ambient humidity. Too high humidity will pose problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may produce a spatial electrical breakdown. The insulation distance specified in JEM1103 "Control Equipment Insulator" is defined as humidity 45 to 85%.
- Measures against high humidity
- Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
- Take dry air into the enclosure from outside.
- Provide a space heater in the enclosure
- Measures against low humidity
What is important in fitting or inspection of the unit in this status is to discharge your body (static electricity) beforehand and keep your body from contact with the parts and patterns, besides blowing air of proper humidity into the enclosure from outside.
- Measures against condensation
Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside air temperature changes suddenly. Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
-
- Take the measures against high humidity.
- Do not power off the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter off.)
## **Dust, dirt, oil mist**
Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contact of contact points, reduced insulation or reduced cooling effect due to moisture absorption of accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to clogged filter.
In the atmosphere where conductive powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in a short time.
Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.
- Measures against dust, dirt, oil mist
- Place in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 2-10.)
-
- Purge air.
- Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure pressure higher than the outside-air pressure.
## **Corrosive gas, salt damage**
If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the relays and switches will result in poor contact. In such places, take the measures against dust, dirt, oil mist.
2 - 8
Installation
Enclosure design
## **Explosive, flammable gases**
As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges).
The best way is to avoid installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.
## **Highland**
Use the inverter at the altitude of within 1000 m.
If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric strength.
## **Vibration, impact**
The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9 m/s² at 10 to 55 Hz frequency and 1mm amplitude for the directions of X, Y, Z axes.
Vibration or impact, if less than the specified value, applied for a long time may make the mechanism loose or cause poor contact to the connectors.
Especially when impact is imposed repeatedly, caution must be taken as the part pins are likely to break.
- Countermeasures
- Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators.
- Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance.
-
- Install the enclosure away from sources of vibration.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
2 - 9
Enclosure design
Installation
## **Cooling system types for inverter enclosure**
From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors, etc.) and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature lower than the permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter.
The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
- Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (totally enclosed type)
- Cooling by heat sink (aluminium fin, etc.)
- Cooling by ventilation (forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type)
- Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
**==> picture [406 x 399] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Cooling System Enclosure Structure Comment<br>Natural Natural ventilation Low in cost and generally used, but the enclosure size<br>cooling (Enclosed, open type) increases as the inverter capacity increases. For rela-<br>tively small capacities.<br>J<br>+ 7<br>I001000E<br>Natural ventilation Being a totally enclosed type, the most appropriate for<br>(Totally enclosed type) hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil mist, etc. The<br>enclosure size increases depending on the inverter<br>capacity.<br>I001001E<br> jd d f<br>Forced Heatsink cooling Having restrictions on the heatsink mounting position<br>cooling and area, and designed for relative small capacities.<br>heatsink<br>I001002E<br>Forced ventilation For general indoor installation. Appropriate for enclo-<br>V ey sure downsizing and cost reduction, and often used.<br>tt<br>I001003E<br>Heat pipe Totally enclosed type for enclosure downsizing.<br>No0 tth e heat pipe<br>I001004E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 2-2:** Cooling system types for inverter enclosure_
2 - 10
Installation
Enclosure design
## **2.4.2 Inverter placement**
## **Clearances around the inverter**
Always observe the specified minimum clearances to ensure good heat dissipation and adequate accessibility of the frequency inverter for servicing.
**==> picture [400 x 196] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Ambient temperature and humidity Clearances (side) Clearances (front)<br>x = Measurement<br>position � 10 cm<br>5 cm 5 cm<br>� 1 cm [�] � 1 cm [�]<br>5cm<br>� 1 cm [�]<br>Temperature: � 10 °C to +50 °C<br>Humidity: 90% RH maximum<br>� 10 cm<br>Leave enough clearances and take cooling � When using the inverters at the ambient � � 5cm for the FR-E740-120SC and<br>measures. temperature of 40 °C or less, the inverters can more<br>be installed without any clearance between<br>them (0 cm clearance).<br>When ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C,<br>clearances between the inverters should be<br>1 cm or more (5 cm or more for the FR-E740-<br>120SC or more).<br> I002152E<br>Inverter<br>Inverter<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-10:** Clearances_
## **Inverter mounting orientation**
Mount the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.
## **Above the inverter**
Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be heat resistant.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
2 - 11
Enclosure design
Installation
## **Arrangement of multiple inverters**
When multiple inverters are placed in the same enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown in the figure (a). When it is inevitable to arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as to provide guides since heat from the bottom inverters can increase the temperatures in the top inverters, causing inverter failures.
**==> picture [324 x 165] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter<br>Guide Guide Guide<br>Inverter Inverter<br>Enclosure Enclosure<br>!<br>a) Horizontal arrangement b) Vertical arrangement<br>I001006E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-11:** Arrangement of multiple inverters_
**NOTE** When mounting multiple inverters, fully take caution not to make the ambient temperature of the inverter higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure size.
## **Placement of ventilation fan and inverter**
Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)
**==> picture [275 x 104] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Inverter<br>Good example! Bad example!<br>I001007E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 2-12:** Placement of ventilation fan and inverter_
2 - 12
Inverter and peripheral devices
Wiring
## **3 Wiring**
## **3.1 Inverter and peripheral devices**
**==> picture [383 x 540] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
AC power supply<br>Use within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. To ensure safety, USB connector<br>use a moulded case circuit breaker, earth A personal computer can be<br>leakage circuit breaker or magnetic contactor connected with a USB<br>to switch power ON/OFF.(Refer to Appendix A.) Enclosure surface (Ver. 1.1) cable.<br>operation panel<br>i The breaker must be selected carefully Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), fuse since an in-rush current flows in the inverter at power on. (Refer to section 3.1.1.) Parameter unitFR-PU07 (FR-PA07) By connecting the con-nection cable (FR-A5CBL) to the PU connector, operation can be performed from FR-PU07 or FR-PA07. Approved safety relay module<br>Required for<br>compliance with<br>safety standard.<br>Magnetic contactor (MC)<br>Install the magnetic contactor to ensure S1<br>safety. Do not use this magnetic S2<br>contactor to start and stop the inverter. PC<br>Doing so will cause the inverter life to be<br>shorten.<br>(Refer to section 3.1.1.)<br>Inverter (FR-E700SC EC)<br>AC reacto<br>(FR-BAL-B)<br>Brake resistor (FR-ABR)<br>DC reactor Braking capability can be<br>(FFR-HEL-(H)-E) improved. (FR-E720S-030SC or<br>more, FR-E740-016SC or more).<br>Install this as required. Always<br>install a thermal relay when using<br>a brake resistor whose capacity is<br>11K or more.<br>P/+<br>PR<br>P/+ P1<br>EMC filter R/L1 S/L2 T/L3<br>(FFR-CS / FFR-MSH) (optional) Earth U V W<br>Install this as required. P/+ N/–<br>Brake unit<br>(FR-BU2/BU-UFS)<br>P/ PR<br>P/<br>PR Earth<br>“|; ] 2 tw<br>Devices connected to the output<br>Do not install a power factor correction<br>High power factor Power regeneration Resistor unit (FR-BR) capacitor, surge suppressor, arrester or radio<br>converter (FR-HC) common converter Discharging resistor noise filter on the output side of the inverter.<br>Power supply harmonics can (FR-CV) (GZG, GRZG) When installing a moulded case circuit<br>be greatly suppressed. Install Greater braking capability The regenerative braking breaker on the output side of the inverter,<br>this as required. is obtained. capability of the inverter can contact each manufacturer for selection of<br>Install this as required. be exhibited fully. the moulded case circuit breaker.<br>Install this as required.<br>Earth<br>Reactor (FR-BAL-B, FFR-HEL-(H)-E) To prevent an electric shock, always earth<br>Reactors (option) should be used when power harmonics measures are taken, the power the motor and inverter.<br>factor is to be improved or the inverter is installed near a large power supply system<br>(500kVA or more). The inverter may be damaged if you do not use reactors.<br>Select the reactor according to the model. Remove the jumpers across terminals P/+ FFR-DT = Output filter<br>and P1 to connect to the DC reactor. (Refer to section 3.8.6). FFR-SI = Sine wave filter<br>I002122E_N<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-1:** System configuration overview_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 1
Inverter and peripheral devices
Wiring
## **NOTES**
The life of the inverter is influenced by ambient temperature. The ambient temperature should be as low as possible within the permissible range. Especially when mounting the inverter inside an enclosure, take cautions of the ambient temperature. (Refer to section 2.4.2.)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main circuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to section 3.2.)
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge suppressor on the inverter output side. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected, immediately remove them.
## Electromagnetic Compatibility
Operation of the frequency inverter can cause electromagnetic interference in the input and output that can be propagated by cable (via the power input lines), by wireless radiation to nearby equipment (e.g. AM radios) or via data and signal lines.
Activate the integrated EMC filter (and an additional optional filter if present) to reduce air propagated interference on the input side of the inverter. Use AC or DC reactors to reduce line propagated noise (harmonics). Use shielded motor power lines to reduce output noise (refer also to section 3.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility).
Refer to the instruction manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
3 - 2
Inverter and peripheral devices
Wiring
## **3.1.1**
## **Peripheral devices**
Check the motor capacity of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:
||**Motor Output [kW]**|**Applicable Inverter Type**|**Breaker Selection**�|**Breaker Selection**�|**Input Side Magnetic**<br>**Contactor**�|**Input Side Magnetic**<br>**Contactor**�|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Reactor Connection**||**Reactor Connection**||
||||**Without**|**With**|**Without**|**With**|
|200 V class|0.1|FR-E720S-008SC|NF32 xx 3P 5 A||S-N10||
||0.2|FR-E720S-015SC|||||
||0.4|FR-E720S-030SC|NF32 xx 3P 10 A||||
||0.75|FR-E720S-050SC|NF32 xx 3P 15 A|NF32 xx 3P 10 A|||
||1.5|FR-E720S-080SC|NF63 xx 3P 20 A||||
||2.2|FR-E720S-110SC|NF32 xx 3P 40 A|NF32 xx 3P 32 A|S-N20, S-N21|S-N10|
|400 V class|0.4|FR-E740-016SC|NF32 xx 3P 5 A||S-N10||
||0.75|FR-E740-026SC|||||
||1.5|FR-E740-040SC|NF32 xx 3P 10 A||||
||2.2|FR-E740-060SC|NF32 xx 3P 15 A|NF32 xx 3P 10 A|||
||3.7|FR-E740-095SC|NF63 xx 3P 20 A|NF32 xx 3P 15 A|||
||5.5|FR-E740-120SC|NF63 xx 3P 30 A|NF63 xx 3P 20 A|S-N20|S-N11|
||7.5|FR-E740-170SC|NF63 xx 3P 30 A|NF63 xx 3P 30 A|S-N20||
||11|FR-E740-230SC|NF63 xx 3P 50 A|NF63 xx 3P 40 A|||
||15|FR-E740-300SC|NF125 xx 3P 100 A|NF63 xx 3P 50 A|S-N25|S-N20|
## _**Tab. 3-1:** Breakers and contactors_
� Select the MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity. Install one MCCB per inverter. The places with "xx" refer to the breaking capacity in case of short circuit. The correct selection must be done depending on the design of the power input wiring.
**==> picture [318 x 66] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-2:<br>MCCB Inverter Installation of the breakers<br>3<br>MCCB Inverter<br>3<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001332E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
- When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
## **NOTES**
- When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter type and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 3
Terminal connection diagram
Wiring
## **3.2 Terminal connection diagram**
**==> picture [148 x 10] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
3.2.1 FR-E700 SC EC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [462 x 555] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Source Logic<br>Main circuit terminal *1 DC reactor<br>When connecting a DC reactor, remove the jumper<br>Control circuit terminal across P1 and P/+. *6 FR-E720S-008SC to 110SC EC: +, –<br>FR-E740-016SC to 300SC EC: P/+, N/–<br>8 e ee<br>Single-phase power input<br>Brake unit<br>MCCB MC (Option) *7 A brake transistor is not built-in to the FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.<br>1-phase AC L1 *1 R *8 Brake resistor (FR-ABR)<br>power supply N Earth *8 Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheatand burnout of the brake resistor.<br>(The brake resistor can not be connected to the<br>Jumper PR N/- *6 FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.)<br>MCCB MC P1 P/+ *7<br>*6<br>R/L1<br>Inrush current<br>3-phase AC S/L2 limit circuit V M<br>power supply T/L3 W 3~ Motor<br>Earth Main circuit<br>Control circuit Earth<br>Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) Control terminal block<br>STF<br>Terminal functions vary with the input terminal assign- rotation startForward C Relay output<br>ment set in Pr. 178 to 182 and STR Terminal functions vary with<br>184. rotation startReverse B Relay output(Alarm output) the input terminal assignment set in Pr. 192.<br>RH<br>High speed A<br>RM<br>Multi-speed selection Middle speed<br>Open collector output<br>*2 When using terminalsPC-SD as a 24 V DC RL<br>power supply, takecare not to shortacross terminals PC-SD. | Low speed tor RES L] L k |e d RUN Running Terminal functions vary with the output terminal assignment set in Pr. 190 and 191.<br>Reset<br>Contact input common (sink*) SD FU<br>24V Frequency detection<br>24 V DC power supply/<br>max. 100 mA load current PC [*2]<br>Contact input common (source*) Shortingwire S1 SE Open collector output commonSink/source common<br>Safety stop input (Channel 1) Output shutoff<br>S2 circuit<br>Safety stop input (Channel 2)<br>*(Common for external power supply transistor)<br>Frequency setting signal (analog)<br>3 10(+5V)<br>*3 Terminal input specifica- AM (+)<br>tions can be changed by *4 Analog signal output<br>analog input specifica-tions switchover (Pr. 73) Frequencysetting 2 2 0–5 V DC *3 5 (-) (0–10 V DC)<br>(initial settings in frame). potentiometer (0–10 V DC)<br>*4 It is recommended to use 1/2W, 1k 1 5 (Analog common) PU<br>2 W/1 k when the connector<br>frequency setting signal is<br>changed frequently. Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4–20 mA DC<br>(Current input) (-) 0–5 V DC<br>0–10 V DC *5<br>USB<br>*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input connector<br>specifications switchover (Pr. 267) (initial settings in frame). Set<br>the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select<br>voltage input (0 to 5 V/0 to10 V) and "I" (initial value) to select V I<br>current input (4 to 20 mA). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is Voltage/current input<br>current input), set "4" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 (input terminal switch<br>function selection)to assign the function, and turn ON AU<br>signal. *5<br>Connector for plug-in<br>option connection Option connector<br>U<br>SINK<br>SOURCE<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I002123E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-3:** Terminal connection diagram of the inverter FR-E700 SC EC_
3 - 4
Terminal connection diagram
Wiring
## **3.2.2 FR-E700 SC ENE**
**==> picture [466 x 559] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Source Logic<br>Main circuit terminal *1 DC reactor<br>When connecting a DC reactor, remove the jumper<br>Control circuit terminal across P1 and P/+.<br>Single-phase power input<br>Brake unit<br>MCCB MC (Option) *6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.<br>1-phase AC L1 *1 R *7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR)<br>power supply N Earth *7 Install a thermal relay to prevent an overheatand burnout of the brake resistor.<br>(The brake resistor can not be connected to the<br>Jumper PR N/- *6 FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.)<br>MCCB MC P1 P/+ *6<br>*6<br>R/L1<br>Inrush current<br>3-phase AC S/L2 limit circuit V M<br>power supply T/L3 W 3~ Motor<br>Earth Main circuit<br>Control circuit Earth<br>Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)<br>STF<br>Terminal functions vary with Forward C Relay output<br>the input terminal assign- rotation start<br>ment set in Pr. 178 to 182 and STR Terminal functions vary with<br>184. rotation startReverse B Relay output(Alarm output) the input terminal assignment set in Pr. 192.<br>RH<br>High speed A<br>RM<br>Multi-speed selection Middle speed<br>Open collector output<br>*2 When using terminalsPC-SD as a 24 V DC RL<br>power supply, takecare not to shortacross terminals PC-SD. Low speed RES RUN Running Terminal functions vary with the output terminal assignment set in Pr. 190 and 191.<br>Reset<br>Contact input common (sink*) SD FU<br>24V Frequency detection<br>24 V DC power supply/<br>max. 100 mA load current PC [*2]<br>Contact input common (source*) Shortingwire S1 SE Open collector output commonSink/source common<br>Safety stop input (Channel 1) Output shutoff<br>S2 circuit<br>Safety stop input (Channel 2)<br>*(Common for external power supply transistor)<br>Frequency setting signal (analog)<br>3 10(+5V)<br>*3 Terminal input specifica- AM (+)<br>tions can be changed by *4 Analog signal output<br>analog input specifica-tions switchover (Pr. 73). Frequencysetting 2 2 0–5 V DC *3 5 (-) (0–10 V DC)<br>potentiometer (0–10 V DC)<br>*4 It is recommended to use 1/2W, 1k � 1 5 (Analog common) PU<br>2 W/1 k � when the connector<br>frequency setting signal is<br>changed frequently. Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4–20 mA DC<br>(Current input) (-) 0–5 V DC<br>0–10 V DC *5<br>USB *8 A personal computer can be connected via the<br>*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specifications switchover (Pr. 267) Set the voltage/current input connector You can perform parameter setting and USB mini B connector (USB 1.1).<br>switch in the "V" position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V/0 to10 monitoring with the commissioning software<br>V) and "I" (initial value) to select current input (4 to 20 mA). To V I *8 tool FR Configurator2.<br>use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" in any of Voltage/current input<br>Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 (input terminal function selection)to assign the switch<br>function, and turn ON AU signal. *5 Ethernetconnector<br>I002123E_ENE<br>U<br>SINK<br>SOURCE<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-4:** Terminal connection diagram of the inverter FR-E700 SC ENE_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 5
Terminal connection diagram
Wiring
## **NOTES**
To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10 cm away from the power cables. Also separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
The output of the single-phase power input specification is three-phase 230 V.
3 - 6
Wiring
Main circuit connection
## **3.3 Main circuit connection**
## **3.3.1 Specification of main circuit terminals**
|**Terminal**|**Name**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|R/L1,<br>S/L2,<br>T/L3�|AC power input|Connect to the commercial power supply.<br>Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) or<br>power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).|
|U, V, W|Inverter output|Voltage output of the inverter<br>(3~, 0 V–power supply voltage, 0.2–400 Hz)|
|P/+�, PR|Brake resistor<br>connection|Connect a brake resistor (FR-ABR) across terminals P/+ and PR.<br>(The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.)|
|P/+�, N/–�|Brake unit connection|Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)<br>or high power factor converter (FR-HC).|
|P/+�, P1|DC reactor connection|Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.|
||PE|For earthing the inverter chassis. Must be earthed.|
_**Tab. 3-2:** Specification of main circuit terminal_
- When using single-phase power input, terminals are L1, N.
- Indicated as "+" on the terminal block of the single-phase power input model.
- Indicated as "–" on the terminal block of the single-phase power input model.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 7
Main circuit connection
Wiring
## **3.3.2 Terminal layout and wiring**
## **Single-phase, 200 V class**
**==> picture [370 x 174] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-008SC to 030SC FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC<br>Jumper<br>Jumper<br>Screw size (M3.5)<br>—| LO [+ ] y<br>Screw size (M4)<br>eleiete|<br>(ellen | are<br>i Hane ay! lel/8f cao U vw<br> PSP TT PLS Om |®i®l/elel|lelele<br>ite NI x ws UPR) (Pats Ik i 7<br>Screw size M<br>(M3.5) M Screw size 3~<br>i OOH 3~ DN. op L1 N so'o'} (M4)<br>‘ra L1 N ae Motor<br>Power supply<br>Power supply Motor<br>I002032E I002033E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Tab. 3-3:** Terminal layout and wiring_
## **Three-phase, 400 V class**
**==> picture [398 x 356] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E740-016SC to 095SC FR-E740-120SC and 170SC<br>Jumper<br>Jumper<br>N /- P / + Screw size (M4)<br>Screw size (M4)<br>‘Tella _ RiswTaUww<br>N/- P /+<br>[ I PR] [PS L R SB 2TH 3i{u =<br>Screw size (M4)<br>CO M<br>) ie n | TORO L e |<br>3~<br>M L1 L2 L3<br>Screw size (M4) 3~ Motor<br>L1L2 L3 Power supply<br>Power supply Motor<br>I002034E I002035E<br>FR-E740-230SC and 300SC<br>Screw size (230: M4, 300: M5)<br>| _ OF N/- P/+ RRL Ov wy<br>[el (2) EC)<br>Jumper<br>ine oem<br>—<br>Screw size M<br>ELa i [ol (230: M4, 300: M5) ~ © T_{6: 3~ —o n<br>L1 L2 L3 Motor<br>Power supply<br>I002058E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 3-4:** Terminal layout and wiring_
3 - 8
Wiring
Main circuit connection
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Before wiring cables to the main circuit terminals, remove the wiring cover. For the FR-E740-**_
- **E** _**170SC-ENE or lower or FRE720S-110SC-ENE or lower inverter, additionally remove the Ethernet board. To remove the Ethernet board, refer to section 3.7.4. To remove the wiring cover, refer to section 2.3.**_
- ● _**The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Never connect the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.)**_
● _**Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning on the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the counter clockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 9
Main circuit connection
Wiring
## **Cables and wiring length**
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% max. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following tables indicate a selection example for the wiring length of 20 m.
200 V class (when input power supply is 230 V)
|**Applicable Inverter Type**<br>oe|**Terminal**<br>**Screw**<br>**Size**<br><br>‘||**Tightening**<br>**Torque**<br>**[Nm]**<br>7|**Crimping**<br>**Terminal**<br>~~ee~~<br>ttey|**Crimping**<br>**Terminal**<br>~~ee~~<br>ttey|**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||**Cable Size**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>|<br>||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||**HIV etc. [mm²]**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>eyey|||**AWG**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>ey||**PVC [mm²]**<br>~~ee~~<br>||||
||||**L1, N,**<br>**P1, +**<br>~~ee~~<br>tt|**U, V, W**<br>~~ee~~<br>ttey|**L1, N,**<br>**P1, +**<br>~~ee~~<br>ey|**U, V, W**<br>~~ee~~<br>ey|**Earth**<br>**cable**<br>**gauge**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>ey|**L1, N,**<br>**P1, +**<br>~~ee~~<br>ey|**U, V, W**<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>ey|**L1, N,**<br>**P1, +**<br>~~ee~~|**U, V, W**<br>~~ee~~|**Earth**<br>**cable**<br>**gauge**<br>~~ee~~<br>||
|FR-E720S-008SC to 030SC<br>oe <br>p|M3.5<br> <br>‘|<br>p|1.2<br> 7<br>p|2-3.5<br>~~ee~~<br>tt<br>p|2-3.5<br>~~ee~~<br>tt ey<br>p~~o~~|2<br>~~ee~~<br>ey<br>~~o~~|2<br>~~ee~~<br>ey <br>~~o~~|2<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br> ey<br>~~o~~|14<br>~~ee~~<br>ey<br>~~o~~|14<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>ey<br>~~o~~|2.5<br>~~ee~~<br>~~o~~|2.5<br>~~ee~~<br>~~o~~|2.5<br>~~ee~~<br>|<br>~~o~~|
|FR-E720S-050SC<br>po|M4<br>po|1.5<br>po|2-4<br>po|2-4<br>po|2<br>po|2<br>po|2<br>po|14<br>po|14<br>po|2.5<br>po|2.5<br>po|2.5<br>po|
|FR-E720S-080SC<br>po|M4<br>po|1.5<br>po|2-4<br>po|2-4<br>po|2<br>po|2<br>po|2<br>po|14<br>po|14<br>po|2.5<br>po|2.5<br>po|2.5<br>po|
|FR-E720S-110SC<br>po<br>po|M4<br>po<br>po|1.5<br>po<br>po|5.5-4<br>po<br>po|2-4<br>po<br>po|3.5<br>po<br>po|2<br>po<br>po|2<br>po<br>po|12<br>po<br>po|14<br>po<br>po|4<br>po<br>po|2.5<br>po<br>po|2.5<br>po<br>po|
_**Tab. 3-5:** Cable size_
400 V class (when input power supply is 440 V)
|**Applicable Inverter Type**<br>po|**Terminal**<br>**Screw**<br>**Size**|**Tightening**<br>**Torque**<br>**[Nm]**|**Crimping**<br>**Terminal**<br>a|**Crimping**<br>**Terminal**<br>a|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|**Cable Size**<br>~~pO~~<br>eeeeee|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||**HIV etc. [mm²]**<br>~~pO~~<br>eee|||**AWG**<br>~~pO~~<br>eee||**PVC [mm²]**<br>~~pO~~<br>eee|||
||||**R/L1,**<br>**S/L2,**<br>**T/L3,**<br>**P1, P/+**|**U, V, W**|**R/L1,**<br>**S/L2,**<br>**T/L3,**<br>**P1, P/+**<br>eee|**U, V, W**<br>eee|**Earth**<br>**cable**<br>**gauge**<br>eee|**R/L1,**<br>**S/L2,**<br>**T/L3,**<br>**P1, P/+**<br> eee|**U, V, W**<br>eee|**R/L1,**<br>**S/L2,**<br>**T/L3,**<br>**P1, P/+**<br>eee|**U, V, W**<br>eee|**Earth**<br>**cable**<br>**gauge**<br>eee|
|FR-E740-016SC to 095SC<br>po<br>po|M4|1.5|2-4|2-4|2|2|2|14|14|2.5|2.5|2.5|
|FR-E740-120SC<br>po<br>po<br>po|M4|1.5|5.5-4|5.5-4|3.5|2|3.5|12|14|4|2.5|4|
|FR-E740-170SC<br>po<br>po<br>po|M4<br>|1.5<br>|5.5-4<br>|5.5-4<br>|3.5<br>|3.5<br>|3.5<br>|12<br>|12<br>|4<br>|4<br>|4<br>|
|FR-E740-230SC<br>po<br>po|M4<br>|1.5<br>|5.5-4<br>|5.5-4<br>|5.5<br>|5.5<br>|5.5<br>|10<br>|10<br>|6<br>|6<br>|10<br>|
|FR-E740-300SC<br>popo|M5<br>po|2.5<br>po|8-5<br>po|8-5<br>po|8<br>po|8<br>po|5.5<br>po|8<br>po|8<br>po|10<br>po|10<br>po|10<br>po|
## _**Tab. 3-6:** Cable size_
The recommended cable size is that of the HIV cable (600 V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75 °C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 50 °C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or less.
The recommended cable size is that of the THHW cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75 °C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40 °C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States or Canada.)
The recommended cable size is that of the PVC cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70 °C. Assumes that the ambient temperature is 40 °C or less and the wiring distance is 20 m or less. (Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, P/+, N/– and P1 and a screw for earthing. (For single-phase power input, the terminal screw size indicates the size of terminal screw for L1, N, U, V, W, PR, +, – and P1 and a screw for earthing (grounding).)
3 - 10
Wiring
Main circuit connection
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following expression:
= -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3 � wire resistance [m � /m � � wiring distance [m] � current [A] **-** Line voltage drop [V] 1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque reduction) in the low speed range.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque. A screw that has been tightened too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction. A screw that has been tightened too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.**_
- _**Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 11
Main circuit connection Wiring
**Notes on earthing**
**CAUTION:** _**Leakage currents flow in the inverter or the EMC filter respectively. To prevent an electric shock,**_ **P** _**the inverter, input filter and motor must be earthed. (This inverter must be earthed. Earthing must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)).**_ a Use the dedicated earth terminal to earth the inverter. (Do not use the screw in the casing, chassis, etc.)
Use the thickest possible earth cable. Use the cable whose size is equal to or greater than that indicated in Tab. 3-6, and minimize the cable length. The earthing point should be as near as possible to the inverter.
Always earth the motor and inverter.
- Purpose of earthing
- Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use.
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flow into the case. The purpose of earthing the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from getting an electric shock from this leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, this earthing is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast.
- Earthing methods and earthing work
As described previously, earthing is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noise affected malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be discriminated clearly, and the following work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components from entering the malfunction prevention type earthing:
- Where possible, use independent earthing for the inverter. If independent earthing (I) is impossible, use joint earthing (II) where the inverter is connected with the other equipment at an earthing point. Joint earthing as in (III) must be avoided as the inverter is connected with the other equipment by a common earth cable.
- Also a leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the earth cables of the inverter and inverter-driven motor. Therefore, they must use the independent earthing method and be separated from the earthing of equipment sensitive to the aforementioned noises.
In a tall building, it will be a good policy to use the noise malfunction prevention type earthing with steel frames and carry out electric shock prevention type earthing in the independent earthing method.
- This inverter must be earthed. Earthing must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
- Use the thickest possible earth cable. The earth cable should be of not less than the size indicated in Tab. 3-6.
- The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter, and the ground wire length should be as short as possible.
– Run the earth cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run them in parallel in the minimum distance.
**==> picture [409 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Other Inverter Other Inverter Other<br>equipment equipment equipment<br>TT<br>(I) Independent earthing (II) Common earthing (III) Common earthing<br>(best solution) (good solution) (not allowed)<br>U r e y<br>I001016E<br> Fig. 3-5: Earthing the drive<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
3 - 12
Wiring
Main circuit connection
## **Total wiring length**
The maximum possible length of the motor cables depends on the capacity of the inverter and the selected carrier frequency.
The lengths in the following table are for unshielded cables. When shielded cables are use divide the values listed in the table by 2.
## **200 V class**
|**Pr. 72 "PWM frequency**<br>**selection" Setting**<br>**(carrier frequency)**|**FR-E720S-**|**FR-E720S-**|**FR-E720S-**|**FR-E720S-**|**FR-E720S-**|**FR-E720S-**|**FR-E720S-**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**008SC**|**015SC**|**030SC**|**050SC**|**080SC**|**110SC**|�**175SC**|
|�1 (1 kHz)|200 m|200 m|300 m|500 m|500 m|500 m|500 m|
|2 to 15 (2 kHz to 14.5 kHz)|30 m|100 m|20 0m|300 m|500 m|500 m|500 m|
_**Tab. 3-7:** Total wiring length_
## **400 V class**
|**Pr. 72 "PWM frequency**<br>**selection" Setting**<br>**(carrier frequency)**|**FR-E740-**|**FR-E740-**|**FR-E740-**|**FR-E740-**|**FR-E740-**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**016SC**|**026SC**|**040SC**|**060SC**|�**095SC**|
|�1 (1 kHz)|200 m|200 m|300 m|500 m|500 m|
|2 to 15 (2 kHz to 14.5 kHz)|30 m|100 m|200 m|300 m|500 m|
_**Tab. 3-8:** Total wiring length_
**==> picture [171 x 193] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
� 500 m<br>300 m<br>300 m<br>300 m + 300 m = 600 m<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 3-6:**_
_Remember that in the table above the total wiring length is what is being referred to. In parallel connections of several motors every motor wire must be counted. In this example, for the frequency inverter with an output capacity of 3.7 kW the permissible wiring length is exceeded by the two parallel motor lead wires._
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001904E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 13
Main circuit connection
Wiring
When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. Take the following measures © or ® in this case.
Use a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 “PWM frequency selection” according to wiring length.
|a<br>a|**Wiring Length**<br>~~es~~<br>aa|**Wiring Length**<br>~~es~~<br>aa|**Wiring Length**<br>~~es~~<br>aa|
|---|---|---|---|
||**50 m**<br>~~es~~<br>aa|**50 m to 100 m**<br>~~es~~|**100 m**<br>~~es~~|
|Carrier frequency<br>a<br>a|14.5 kHz<br>aa|8 kHz|2 kHz|
Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) on the inverter output side.
**NOTES** Note that the motor windings are subjected to significantly higher loads when the motor is operated by inverter than with normal mains operation. The motors must be approved for inverter operation by the manufacturer (refer also to section 3.9.4).
Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function, fast response current limit function, or stall prevention function or a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected on the inverter output side.
If fast-response current limit malfunctions, disable this function. When the stall prevention function misoperates, increase the stall level. (Refer to Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level" and Pr. 156 "Stall prevention operation selection".)
Refer to section 6.15.1 for details of Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection". Refer to the manual of the option for details of surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT).
When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with wiring length exceeding than 100 m, select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11").
3 - 14
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **3.4**
## **Control circuit specifications**
The functions of the terminals highlighted in grey can be adjusted with parameters 178 to 184 "Input terminal function assignment" and parameters 190 to 192 "Output terminal function assignment" (refer to section 6.10). The listed settings show the default configuration as shipped, which you can restore by resetting to the factory defaults.
## **Input signals**
||**Terminal**|**Name**|**Description**|**Description**|**Rated**<br>**Specifications**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Contact input|STF|Forward rotation<br>start|Turn on the STF signal to start<br>forward rotation and turn it<br>off to stop.|When the STF<br>and STR signals<br>are turned on<br>simultaneously,<br>the stop com-<br>mand is given.|Input resist-<br>ance: 4.7 k�<br>Voltage at open-<br>ing:<br>21 V to 26 V DC<br>Contacts at<br>short-circuited:<br>4 to 6 mA DC|6-116|
||STR|Reverse rotation<br>start|Turn on the STR signal to start<br>reverse rotation and turn it off<br>to stop.||||
||RH, RM, RL|Multi-speed<br>selection|Multi-speed can be selected according to the<br>combination of RH, RM and RL signals.||||
||RES|Reset|Used to reset alarm output provided when pro-<br>tective function is activated.<br>Turn on the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then<br>turn it off.<br>Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75,<br>reset can be set to enabled only at an inverter<br>alarm occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is<br>cancelled.||||
|Reference point|SD|Contact input com-<br>mon (sink)<br>24 V DC power sup-<br>ply common|A determined control function is activated, if the<br>corresponding terminal is connected to the ter-<br>minal SD (sink logic). The SD terminal is isolated<br>from the digital circuits via opto couplers.<br>The terminal is isolated from the reference poten-<br>tial of the analog circuit (terminal 5).||—|—|
||PC|24 V DC<br>power supply,<br>contact input<br>common<br>(source)|24 V DC/0.1 A output<br>With negative logic and control via open collector<br>transistors (e.g. a PLC) the positive pole of an<br>external power source must be connected to the<br>PC terminal. With positive logic the PC terminal is<br>used as a common reference for the control<br>inputs. This means that when positive logic is<br>selected (default setting of the EC units) the cor-<br>responding control function is activated by con-<br>necting its terminal to the PC terminal.||Power supply<br>voltage range:<br>22 V to<br>26.5 V DC<br>Permissible load<br>current: 100 mA|3-27|
|Safety stop|S1|Safe stop input<br>(Channel 1)|S1/S2 are safe stop signals for use with in con-<br>junction with an approved external safety unit.<br>Both S1/S2 must be used in dual channel form.<br>Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorten-<br>ing/opening between S1 and PC, S2 and PC. In<br>the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted<br>with terminal PC by shortening wire. Remove the<br>shortening wire and connect the safety relay<br>module when using the safety stop function.||Input resist-<br>ance: 4.7 k�<br>Voltage when<br>contacts are<br>open:<br>21 V to 26 V DC<br>When contacts<br>are shortcir-<br>cuited:<br>4 to 6 mA DC|3-24|
||S2|Safe stop input<br>(Channel 2)|||||
_**Tab. 3-9:** Input signals (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 15
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
||**Terminal**|**Name**|**Description**|**Rated**<br>**Specifications**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Frequency setting|10<br>(Output<br>voltage<br>5 V DC)|Frequency setting<br>power supply|Used as power supply when connecting potenti-<br>ometer for frequency setting (speed setting) from<br>outside of the inverter.<br>Rated output voltage: 5 V DC<br>Recommended potentiometer: 1 k<br>2 W linear,<br>multi turn potentiometer|5.2 V DC ± 0.2 V,<br>Permissible load<br>current 10 mA|6-177|
||2|Frequency setting<br>(voltage)|Inputting 0 to 5 V DC (or 0 to 10 V) provides the<br>maximum output frequency at 5 V (10 V) and<br>makes input and output proportional. Use Pr. 73<br>to switch from among input 0 to 5 V DC (initial<br>setting), 0 to 10 V DC.|Input resistance:<br>10 k ± 1 k<br>Maximum<br>permissible<br>voltage:<br>20 V DC||
||4|Frequency setting<br>(current)|Inputting 4 to 20 mA DC (or 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V)<br>provides the maximum output frequency at 20<br>mA and makes input and output proportional.<br>This input signal is valid only when the AU signal<br>is on (terminal 2 input is invalid).<br>To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input),<br>set "4" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 (input terminal<br>function selection), and turn AU signal ON.<br>Use Pr. 267 to switch from among input 4 to<br>20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 V DC and 0 to<br>10 V DC. Set the voltage/current input switch in<br>the "V" position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V/0<br>to 10 V).<br>Voltage input<br>Current input<br>(initial status)<br>[=i |<br>[a||Current input:<br>Input resistance:<br>233 ± 5<br>Maximum<br>permissible cur-<br>rent: 30 mA<br>Voltage input:<br>Input resistance:<br>10 k ± 1 k<br>Maximum<br>permissible<br>voltage:<br>20 V DC<br>QQ<br>QQ||
||5|Frequency setting<br>common|Terminal 5 provides the common reference<br>potential (0 V) for all analog set point values and<br>for the analog output signals AM (voltage). The<br>terminal is isolated from the digital circuit’s refer-<br>ence potential (SD). This terminal should not be<br>grounded. If local regulations require grounding<br>of the reference potential note that this can prop-<br>agate any noise in the ground potential to the<br>control electronics, thus increasing sensitivity to<br>interference.|—||
_**Tab. 3-9:** Input signals (2)_
## **NOTE**
Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input analog signals in accordance with the settings.
Applying a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch in "V" position (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output devices. Refer to section 6.16 for details.
3 - 16
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **Output signals**
||**Terminal**|**Name**|**Description**|**Description**|**Rated**<br>**Specifications**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Relay|A, B, C|Relay output<br>(alarm output)|The alarm is output via relay contacts. The block<br>diagram shows the normal operation and voltage<br>free status. If the protective function is activated,<br>the relay picks up.<br>B<br>C<br>A||Contact<br>capacity:<br>230 V AC/0.3 A<br>(Power factor:<br>0.4) or<br>30 V DC/0.3 A|6-126|
|Open collector|RUN|Inverter running|Switched low when the inverter output fre-<br>quency is equal to or higher than the starting fre-<br>quency (initial value 0.5 Hz).<br>Switched high during stop or DC injection brake<br>operation.||Permissible<br>load:<br>24 V DC (max.<br>27 V DC), 0.1 A<br>(A voltage drop<br>is 3.4 V maxi-<br>mum when the<br>signal is on.)||
||FU|Frequency<br>detection|The output is switched low once the output fre-<br>quency exceeds a value preset in Pr. 42 (or 43).<br>Otherwise the FU output is switched high.||||
||SE|Open collector<br>output common|Reference potential for the signals RUN and FU.<br>This terminal is isolated from the reference poten-<br>tial of the control circuit SD.||—|—|
|Analog output|AM|Analog voltage out-<br>put|Select one e.g. output fre-<br>quency from monitor items.<br>The output signal is propor-<br>tional to the magnitude of the<br>corresponding monitoring<br>item.<br>Not output during inverter<br>reset.|Output item:<br>Output<br>frequency<br>(initial setting)|Output signal:<br>0–10 V DC<br>Permissible load<br>current:<br>1 mA<br>(load imped-<br>ance:<br>�10 k��<br>Resolution:<br>8 bit|6-148|
_**Tab. 3-10:** Output signals_
## Communication
||**Name**|**Description**|**Specification**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|RS-485|PU connector|With the PU connector, communication can be<br>made through RS-485.|Conforming standard:<br>EIA-485 (RS-485)<br>Transmission format:<br>Multidrop<br>Communication speed:<br>4800 to 38400 bps<br>Overall length: 500 m|3-30,<br>6-229|
|USB|USB connector|The FR Configurator can be operated by connect-<br>ing the inverter to the personal computer<br>through USB.|Interface: conforms to USB1.1<br>Transmission speed: 12 Mbps<br>Connector: USB mini B connec-<br>tor (receptacle mini B type)|3-32,<br>6-292|
|Ethernet|Ethernet connector|Communication with network devices can be<br>made via Ethernet by connecting an Ethernet<br>cable to the Ethernet connector on the Ethernet<br>board.|Interface:<br>100BASE-TX/10BASE-T<br>Transmission speed:<br>10 or 100 Mbps<br>Connector: RJ45|3-34|
_**Tab. 3-11:** Communication signals_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 17
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **3.4.1**
## **Control circuit terminals**
**==> picture [268 x 179] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
CY Recommended wire size:<br>0.3 mm [2] to 0.75 mm [2]<br>10 2 5 4<br>RUN FU SE S1 S2 PC<br>PLILI CL Ld o F<br>AM RES RL RM RH PC SD STF STR<br>ee ee eee<br>A B C<br>Boo<br>I002125E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [115 x 10] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-7: Terminal layout<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **Wiring method**
Use a bar terminal and a cable with a sheath stripped off for the control circuit wiring. For a single wire, strip off the sheath of the cable and apply directly.
Remove about 10 mm of the cable insulation. Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.
**==> picture [278 x 19] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 mm<br>I002126E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-8:** Preparation of the cable_
Insert wires to a bar terminal, and check that the wires come out for about 0 to 0.5 mm from a sleeve.
_**Fig. 3-9:** Fixing of bar terminals_
**==> picture [148 x 50] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Cable<br>Sleeve<br>Shell<br>0–0.5 mm<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001984E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
3 - 18
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
- Check the condition of the bar terminal after crimping. Do not use a bar terminal of which the crimping is inappropriate, or the face is damaged.
**==> picture [329 x 108] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unstranded wires<br>Wires are not inserted<br>Damaged<br>into the shell<br>Crumpled tip<br>I001985E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-10:** Incorrectly crimped bar terminals_
|**Wire Size [mm²]**|**Bar Terminal Model**|**Bar Terminal Model**|**Bar Terminal Model**|**Bar Terminal**<br>**Crimping Tool**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**With**<br>**Insulation Sleeve**|**Without**<br>**Insulation Sleeve**|**For UL Wire**�||
|0.3|AI 0,34-10TQ|—|—|CRIMPFOX 6|
|0.5|Al 0.5-10WH||AI 0.5-10WH-GB||
|0.75|Al 0.75-10GY|A 0.75-10|AI 0.75-10GY-GB||
|1|Al 1-10RD|A 1-10|AI 1-10RD/1000GB||
|1.25/1.5|Al 1.5-10BK|A 1.5-10|AI 1.5-10BK/1000GB�||
|0.75 (for two cables)|Al-TWIN 2 × 0.75-10GY|—|—||
_**Tab. 3-12:** Recommended bar terminals (Maker: Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd, as of Jan. 2017)_
- A bar terminal with an insulation sleeve compatible with MTW wire which has a thick wire insulation
- Applicable for terminal ABC
|**Wire Size [mm²]**|**Blade Terminal Poduct Number**|**Insulation Product Number**|**Bar Terminal**<br>**Crimping Tool**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0.3 to 0.75|BT 0.75-11|VC 0.75|NH 69|
_**Tab. 3-13:** Recommended bar terminals (Maker: NICHIFU Co., Ltd, as of Jan. 2017)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 19
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
**==> picture [118 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Insert the wire into a socket.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [201 x 116] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-11:<br>Cable connection<br>I001986E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When using a single wire or a stranded wire without a bar terminal, push an open/close button all the way down with a flathead screw driver, and insert the wire.
**==> picture [221 x 59] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-12:<br>Open/close button Connection of a stranded wire<br>Flathead screwdriver<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001987E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [41 x 35] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
- _**When using a stranded wire without a bar terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or wires.**_
- _**During wiring, pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open/close button all the way down may damage the terminal block.**_
- _**Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause to damage of inverter or injury.**_
Ts 3 - 20
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **Wire removal**
Pull the wire with pushing the open/close button all the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver
**E**
**==> picture [265 x 147] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-13:<br>Wire removal<br>Open/close button<br>Flathead screwdriver<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001988E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Use a small flathead screwdriver (tip thickness: 0.4 mm/tip width: 2.5 mm, such as SZF 0- 0.4x2.5 of Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.). If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal block may be damaged.**_
- _**Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause to damage of inverter or injuries.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 21
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **Common terminals of the control circuits PC, 5, SE**
Terminals PC, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0 V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Avoid connecting the terminal PC and 5 and the terminal SE and 5. Terminal PC is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL and RES).
The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal RUN and FU.
The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
## **Signal inputs by contactless switch**
The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL and RES) can be controlled using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown below. According to the adjusted control logic, PNP transistors (positive logic) or NPN transistors (negative logic) must be used to activate the inputs.
## _**Fig. 3-14:**_
**==> picture [351 x 59] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter External signal input in source logic using transistor<br>©) PC <] (initial setting)<br>STF, etc.<br>-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001020E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
3 - 22
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **3.4.2 Wiring instructions**
- Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 230 V relay sequence circuit).
- Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
**==> picture [398 x 85] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-15:<br>Contacts<br>Micro signal contacts Twin contacts I001021E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
- Always apply a voltage to the alarm output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc. In no way must a voltage be short-circuited by these relay contacts.
- It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3 mm² to 0.75 mm² gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
- The wiring length should be 30 m maximum.
- Do not short terminal PC and SD. Inverter may be damaged.
- When using an external power supply for transistor output, note the following points to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable current.
- Do not connect any terminal SD on the inverter and the 0 V terminal of the external power supply (when the sink logic is selected).
- Do not connect terminal PC on the inverter and the +24 V terminal of the external power supply (when the source logic is selected).
- Do not install an external power source in parallel with the internal 24 V DC power source (connected to terminals PC and SD) to use them together.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 23
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **3.4.3 Safety stop function**
The terminals related to the safety stop function are shown below. For the rated specification of each terminal refer to Tab. 3-9.
|**Terminal**|**Terminal**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
|S1<br>a||For input of safety stop channel 1.|Between S1 and PC / S2 and PC<br>Open: In safety stop state.<br>Short: Other than safety stop state.|
|S2<br>a||For input of safety stop channel 2.<br>ee||
|PC<br>a||Common terminal for terminal S1 and S2.<br> ee|—|
|FU<br>®<br>ep|SAFE<br>signal<br>eppe|Outputs the safety stop status<br>The signal is output when inverter output is shut off<br>due to the safety stop function.<br>pe|OFF: Drive enabled or drive stop<br>(at an internal safety circuit failure<br>)<br>ON: Drive stop<br>(no internal safety circuit failure<br>)<br>2)<br>2)|
|RUN<br>@ep|SAFE2<br>signal<br>eppe|Outputs when an alarm or failure is detected.<br>The signal is output when no internal safety circuit<br>failure<br>exists.<br>pe|OFF: Internal safety circuit failure<br>ON: No internal safety circuit failure<br>2)|
|SE<br>ep pe||Common terminal for open collector outputs<br>(terminal RUN and FU)<br>pe|—|
## _**Tab. 3-14:** Safety stop function terminals_
In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC by shortening wire. Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay module when using the safety stop function.
In the initial setting, output frequency detection (FU signal) is assigned to terminal FU. Set "80" to Pr. 191 "FU terminal function selection" to assign SAFE signal. The function can be assigned to other terminals by setting "80" (positive logic) or "180" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (Output terminal function selection).
In the initial setting, inverter running (RUN signal) is assigned to terminal RUN. Set "81" to Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" to assign SAFE2 signal. The function can be assigned to other terminals by setting "81" (positive logic) or "181" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (Output terminal function selection).
At an internal safety circuit failure, one of E.SAF, E.6, E.7, and E.CPU is displayed on the operation panel.
**NOTES** Hold the ON or OFF status for 2 ms or longer to input signal to terminal S1 or S2. Signal input shorter than 2ms is not recognized.
Use SAFE signal to monitor safety stop status. SAFE signal cannot be used as safety stop input signal to other devices (other than the safety relay module).
SAFE 2 signal can only be used to output an alarm or to prevent restart of an inverter. The signal cannot be used as safety stop input signal to other devices.
3 - 24
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **Wiring connection diagram**
To prevent restart at fault occurrence, connect terminals RUN (SAFE 2 signal) and SE to terminals XS0 and XS1, which are the feedback input terminals of the safety relay module.
By setting Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" = "81 (SAFE2 signal)", terminal RUN is turned OFF at fault occurrence.
**==> picture [382 x 256] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter R S T<br>FU (SAFE) [�]<br>Monitor<br>RUN (SAFE2) [�]<br>START/RESET<br>SE<br>STF [�]<br>I/O control<br>STR (STOP) [�]<br>Emergency stop button<br>STOP S1<br>Output shutoff<br>S2 circuit<br>+24V X0 COM0 X1 COM1 XS0 XS1 Z00 Z10 Z20 PC<br>PC<br>Internal Safety K1<br>24 V DC Circuit U V W<br>K2<br>M<br>3~<br>24G Z01 Z11 Z21<br>� Output signals differ by the setting of Pr. 190 and Pr. 191<br>Safety relay module (Output terminal function selection).<br>QS90SR2SN-Q � Input signals differ by the setting of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182<br>(Input terminal function selection).<br>I002074E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-16:** Connecting the Safety relay module QS90SR2SN-Q of Mitsubishi_
## **NOTE**
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 25
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **Safety stop function operation**
|**Input Power**<br>a|**Input Signal**<br>es|**Input Signal**<br>es|**Internal**<br>**Safet**<br>**ircuit**|**Output Signal**|**Output Signal**|**Inverter Operation Enable**<br>**Signal**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**S1-PC**<br>es<br>a|**S2-PC**<br>es||**SAFE**<br>P82)|**SAFE2**<br>P82)||
|OFF<br>a<br>~~pO~~|—<br>es<br>~~pO~~<br>pf|—<br>es<br>~~pO~~<br>pf|—<br>~~pO~~<br>~~+~~|OFF<br>~~pO~~<br>~~+~~|OFF<br>~~pO~~<br>~~+~~|Output shutoff (Safe state)<br>~~pO~~|
|ON<br>~~pO~~|Short<br>~~pO~~<br>pf<br>——————|Short<br>~~pO~~<br>pf<br>——————|No failure<br>~~pO~~<br>~~+~~<br>ee|OFF<br>~~pO~~<br>~~+~~<br>ee|ON<br>~~pO~~<br>~~+~~|Drive enabled<br>~~pO~~|
||||Failure<br>~~+~~<br>ee<br>——————|OFF<br>~~+~~<br>ee<br>——————|OFF<br>~~+~~<br>——————|Output shutoff (Safe state)<br>ee|
||Open<br>pf<br>——————|Open<br>pf<br>——————|No failure<br>~~+~~<br>ee<br>——————<br>ee|ON<br>~~+~~<br>ee<br>——————|ON<br>~~+~~<br>——————|Output shutoff (Safe state)<br>ee|
||||Failure<br>——————<br>ee|OFF<br>——————|OFF<br>——————|Output shutoff (Safe state)<br>ee|
||Short<br>——————<br>~~se~~|Open<br>——————<br>~~se~~|Failure<br>——————<br>ee<br>~~se~~|OFF<br>——————<br>~~se~~|OFF<br>—————— <br>~~se~~|Output shutoff (Safe state)<br> ee<br>~~se~~|
||Open<br>~~p~~|Short<br>~~p~~|Failure<br>~~p~~|OFF<br>~~po~~|OFF<br>~~o~~|Output shutoff (Safe state)<br>~~o~~|
_**Tab. 3-15:** Description of Safety stop function operation_
At an internal safety circuit failure, one of E.SAF, E.6, E.7, and E.CPU is displayed on the operation panel.
SA is displayed when both of the S1 and S2 signals are in open status and no internal safety circuit failure exists.
ON: Transistor used for an open collector output is conducted.
OFF: Transistor used for an open collector output is not conducted.
**NOTE**
For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-004). (Please contact your sales representative for the manual.)
3 - 26
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **3.4.4 Changing the control logic**
FR-E700SC frequency inverters offer the possibility of choosing between two types of control logic. Depending on the direction of the flowing current, one distinguishes between:
- In source logic, a signal switches on when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal. Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
- In sink logic, a signal switches on when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal. Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
**==> picture [392 x 255] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Current flow concerning the input/output Current flow concerning the input/output<br>signals when source logic is selected signals when sink logic is selected<br>Current<br>Current +<br>SINK<br>SOURCE<br>+<br>–<br>FR-E700SC DC input (source type) FR-E700SC DC input (sink type)<br>Example: AX80 Example: AX40<br>RUN RUN<br>Current Current<br>I001029E_Logiktausch<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-17:** Changing the control logic_
The input signals are set to source logic (SOURCE) when shipped from the factory. To change the control logic, the jumper connector above the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
**==> picture [194 x 129] intentionally omitted <==**
_**Fig. 3-18:** Changing the control logic_
_I002127E_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 27
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
**NOTES** Using the SOURCE/SINK jumper (and the particular connection of the PC/SD terminal as a reference point), the input terminals can be changed between positive switching (source logic) or negative switching (sink logic) depending on regional requirements.
Turn off the inverter power before switching a jumper connector.
The sink-source logic change-over jumper connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is fitted in both positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged.
The capacity plate is placed on the front cover and the rating plate is on the inverter. Since these plates have the same serial numbers, always reinstall the removed cover onto the original inverter.
Terminal PC is always the common terminal for the safety stop input terminals (S1 and S2) of the inverter with safety stop function regardless of sink/source logic.
3 - 28
Control circuit specifications
Wiring
## **Using an external power supply**
- Source logic type
When using an external power supply for transistor output, use terminal SD as a common to prevent misoperation caused by undesirable current.
**==> picture [412 x 195] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-19:<br>AY80 Inverter Using an external power supply in connection with<br>the outputs of a PLC<br>Current<br>I001031E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001031E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Sink logic type
Use terminal PC as a common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable current. (Do not connect terminal SD of the inverter with terminal 0 V of the external power supply. When using terminals PC-SD as a 24 V DC power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction due to undesirable current.)
**==> picture [412 x 195] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-20:<br>AY40 Inverter Using an external power supply in connection with<br>the outputs of a PLC<br>Current<br>I001030E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 29
PU connector
Wiring
## **3.5 PU connector**
Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from the FR-PU07, the FR-PA07 or a personal computer. Refer to the figure below to open the PU connector cover.
**==> picture [381 x 188] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
To open the cover<br>Place a flathead screwdriver, etc. in a slot<br>and push up the cover to open.<br>a es V o<br>PU connector D ET ai l wef E Z<br>Bab) L V<br>| 7 : hen dawns i<br>fo 1<br>I001919E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-21:** To open the cover of the PU connector_
## **3.5.1 Connecting the parameter unit using a connection cable**
> Use the optional FR-CB oo or connector and cable available on the market. Insert the cable plugs securely into the PU connector of the inverter and the connection connector of the FR-PU07/FR-PA07 along the guide until the tabs snap into place.
Overall wiring length when the parameter unit is connected: max. 20 m.
**==> picture [357 x 206] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PU connector<br>a ,¥ 2 > AC S<br>f e el w ey 6<br>Cable FR-CB a (option) sp Ufp c : 3 a ) ao<br>ID |<br>[oom<br>—— mm am |<br>0m) y s [ | efs<br>FR-PA07 FR-PU07<br>II002059E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-22:** Connecting the parameter unit FR-PU07/FR-PA07 using a connection cable_
3 - 30
PU connector
Wiring
## **3.5.2 Connection to the PU connector at FR-E700 SC ENE**
The PU connector can be used to connect the parameter unit (FR-PU07), enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07), personal computer, etc. for the inverter operation.
**==> picture [340 x 157] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
How to open the cover<br>Put a finger on top of the front<br>cover and pull it open.<br>PU connector<br>FR-E700SC-ENE PU connector<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-23:** Access to the PU connector of the FR-E700 SC ENE_
## **3.5.3 RS-485 communication**
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
The protocol can be selected from Mitsubishi inverter and Modbus®-RTU. For detailed information refer to section 6.19.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 31
USB connector
Wiring
## **3.6 USB connector**
Inverter setup can be easily performed using the FR Configurator by connecting the inverter and personal computer with a USB cable (version 1.1).
|**Specification**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|Interface|USB 1.1|
|Transmission speed|12 MBps|
|Wiring length|5 m|
|Connector|USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)|
|Power supply|Self-power supply|
_**Tab. 3-16:** USB connector specifications_
**==> picture [317 x 208] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
USB cable USB connector<br>oe<br>WU Gey a=<br>0 A<br>Pull the cover in the direction of<br>the arrow. Then turn it upward.<br>I001921E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-24:** Connection to the USB connector_
**==> picture [485 x 17] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
A 3 - 32<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
System configuration for Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Wiring
## **3.7 System configuration for Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE)**
## **3.7.1 Ethernet communication overview**
The FR-E700 SC ENE inverter is equipped with an Ethernet board. Communication with network devices can be made via Ethernet by connecting an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the Ethernet board.
**==> picture [346 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Hub<br>E l e<br>Personal computer Programmable GOT Frequency Frequency<br>(FR Configurator2) controller inverter inverter<br>I003104E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-25:** Systemconfiguration for Ethernet communication_
- Precautions for Ethernet communication
- In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems via network, take security measures including firewall settings.
- Depending on the network environment, the inverter may not operate as intended due to delays or disconnection in communication. Carefully consider the conditions and safety for the inverter on site.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 33
System configuration for Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Wiring
## **3.7.2 Ethernet connector**
- Ethernet communication specifications
|**Item**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|Categorie|100BASE-TX/10BASE-T|
|Data transmission speed|100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)/10 Mbps (10BASE-T)|
|Transmission method|Baseband|
|Maximum segment length|100 m between the hub and the inverter|
|Number of cascade connection stages|Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T)|
|Interface|RJ-45|
|Number of interfaces available|1|
|IP version|IPv4|
_**Tab. 3-17:** Ethernet communication specifications of FR-E700 SC ENE_
**==> picture [120 x 41] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Ethernet connector<br>FR-E700SC-ENE Ethernet connector<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-26:** Position of the Ethernet connector_
- Connection cable
Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards.
|**Communication**<br>**speed**<br>pf|**Cable**<br>pf|**Connector**<br>||**Standard**<br>||
|---|---|---|---|
|100 Mbps<br>pf<br>———————————Ee|Category 5 or higher, (shielded / STP<br>) straight cable<br>pf<br>———————————Ee|RJ-45<br>connector<br>||100BASE-TX<br>|<br>a|
|10 Mbps<br>pf<br>———————————Ee|Category 3 or higher, (shielded / STP<br>) straight cable<br>pf<br>———————————Ee||10BASE-T<br>|<br>a|
||Category 3 or higher, (UTP ) straight cable<br>———————————Ee|||
_**Tab. 3-18:** Speczfication of the Ethernet cable_
STP = shielded twisted pair
UTP = unshielded twisted pair
## ● Hub
Use a hub that supports transmission speed of the Ethernet.
3 - 34
System configuration for Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Wiring
- Handling of the Ethernet cable
- Do not touch the conductors of the cable or the connector on the inverter. Keep the conductors free of dust or dirt. Handling the conductors with oily hands or dust/dirt adhesion to the conductors may cause transmission losses and impair normal data link operation.
- Check the Ethernet cable for the following points before use.
- The cable is not broken.
- The cable does not have a short circuit.
- The connector is properly installed.
- Do not use an Ethernet cable with a broken latch. Doing so may cause the cable to come off or malfunction.
- Do not connect the Ethernet cable to the PU connector. The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
- The maximum distance between stations is specified as 100 m. However, the maximum distance may be shorter depending on the environment. For details of the cable, contact your cable manufacturer.
- Connecting and disconnecting of the Ethernet cable
Hold the cable connector when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling a cable connected to the inverter may damage the inverter or cable, or result in malfunction due to poor contact.
- Network configuration
Check the network configuration before wiring, and perform correct wiring.
## **3.7.3 LED indicator for communication status**
Check the LED indicator for communication status to confirm the Ethernet communication status.
**==> picture [285 x 95] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
SD/RD<br>FR-E700SC-ENE LED indicator communication<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-27:** LED indicator for Ethernet communication_
|**LED indicator**<br>|**Description**|
|---|---|
|SD/RD (LED indicator for communication status)<br>|ON (green): Transmitting/receiving data via Ethernet|
_**Tab. 3-19:** Description of the LEDs SD/RD_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 35
System configuration for Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Wiring
## **3.7.4 Removal of the Ethernet board**
The Ethernet board is installed in the initial status. Before wiring cables to the control circuit terminals or to the main circuit terminals on the FR-E740-170SC or lower or FR-E720S-050SC or lower inverter, remove the Ethernet board as follows.
**==> picture [369 x 181] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Junction connector Ee<br>Ethernet board<br>connector<br>Hexagon spacer<br>Mounting<br>screw ——— > [&] ce Oo p Rag tay<br>-<br>Oo a o o ; Hy<br>Ethernet board<br>Ethernet board spacer<br>c o k —— oP<br>Ethernet connector<br>o e<br>Mounting<br>screw Ze<br>FR-E700SC-ENE Ethernet board removal<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-28:** Components of the Ethernet board_
- Remove the inverter front cover. (Refer to fig. 2-7 to remove the front cover.)
- Remove the three mounting screws to remove the Ethernet board, Ethernet board spacer, junction connector, and hexagon spacer.
## **NOTES**
After the installation of the inverter or the wiring of the cables to the main or control circuit terminals, ensure to reinstall the Ethernet board to the inverter in the reverse order. The tightening torque for the mounting screws of the Ethernet board is 0.2 to 0.4 Nm.
Plug-in options cannot be used with this inverter.
## **Earthing (grounding) for Ethernet board**
To reduce noise of the Ethernet cable, connect an earth (ground) cable from the lower left M3 mounting screw on the Ethernet board to the inverter enclosure (the earth cable must be as short as possible).
**==> picture [122 x 14] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
For earth (ground) connection to the<br>enclosure<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [96 x 7] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700SC-ENE Ethernet board earthing<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-29:** Earthing of the Ethernet board_
3 - 36
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **3.8**
## **Connection of stand-alone option units**
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.**_
## **3.8.1 Magnetic contactors (MC)**
## **Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)**
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
- To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency stop operation). For example, MC avoids overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
- To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure.
- To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
## **NOTE**
Since repeated inrush currents at power on will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times.), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn on/off the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 37
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **Example**
As shown below, always use the start signal (ON or OFF across terminals STF or STR-PC) to make a start or stop. (Refer to section 6.10.4.)
**==> picture [313 x 216] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Power _ - MCCB MC © R/L1 Ue To the<br>supply i ; © S/L2 Ve motor<br>: ? T/L3 Ww?<br>T 0)<br>Cc<br>Operation preparation O<br>OFF ON<br>mw a RA 7<br>MC 0 STF(STR)<br>o O PC<br>Start/Stop Operation<br>Start<br>Stop<br>RA<br>I001922E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-30:** Example for connection of an inverter_
When the power supply is 400 V class, install a step-down transformer.
## **Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor**
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it on/off after the inverter and motor have stopped.
3 - 38
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **3.8.2 Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor FR-ABR (FR-E720S-030SC or more, FR-E740-016SC or more)**
Install a dedicated brake resistor (FR-ABR) outside when the motor is made to run by the load, quick deceleration is required, etc. Connect a dedicated brake resistor (FR-ABR) to terminal + and PR (resp. P/+ and PR). (For the locations of terminal + and PR (resp. P/+ and PR), refer to the terminal block layout (section 3.3.2).)
Set parameters below (refer to section 6.9.2).
|**Connected Brake**<br>**Resistor**||**Parameter Setting**|**Parameter Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**Pr. 30 "Regenerative**<br>**function selection"**|**Pr. 70 "Special regenerative brake duty"**||
|FR-ABR|1|FR-E720S-110SC or less<br>FR-E740-170SC or less|10 (%)|
|||FR-E740-230SC or more|6 (%)|
_**Tab. 3-20:** Setting of parameter 30 and 70 when connecting an external brake resistor_
## **E**
## _**CAUTION:**_
- _**The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor.**_
- _**Do not remove a jumper across terminal + and P1 (resp. P/+ and P1) except when connecting a DC reactor.**_
- _**The shape of jumper differs according to capacities.**_
## **FR-E720S-030SC**
**==> picture [412 x 188] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-31:<br>Jumper Connection of a brake resistor to the terminals +<br>and PR for the inverter FR-E720S-030SC<br>Terminal +<br>Terminal PR<br>I002036E<br>Brake resistor<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 39
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC**
## _**Fig. 3-32:**_
**==> picture [384 x 176] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Jumper Connection of a brake resistor to the terminals +<br>and PR for the inverters FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC<br>Terminal +<br>Terminal PR<br>A )<br>OP I001923E<br>Brake resistor<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001923E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **FR-E740-016SC to 095SC**
## _**Fig. 3-33:**_
**==> picture [388 x 180] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Jumper Connection of a brake resistor to the terminals P/+<br>and PR for the inverters FR-E740-016SC to<br>FR-E740-095SC<br>Terminal P/+<br>Terminal PR<br>OP<br>Brake resistor<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001923E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**FR-E740-120SC to 300SC**
**==> picture [28 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Jumper<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [139 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal P/+<br>Terminal PR<br>( thf y ,<br>=<br>Brake resistor<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 3-34:**_
_Connection of a brake resistor to the terminals P/+ and PR for the inverters FR-E740-120SC to FR-E740-300SC_
_I001924E_
3 - 40
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
It is recommended to configure a sequence, which shuts off power in the input side of the inverter by the external thermal relay as shown below, to prevent overheat and burnout of the high duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) in case the regenerative brake transistor is damaged. (The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.)
**==> picture [397 x 104] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Example 1 Example 2<br>Inverter Thermo relay (OCR) [�] resistorBrake Inverter Thermo relay (OCR) [�] resistorBrake<br>Power Power<br>supply supply<br>T [�] T [�]<br>ON OFF ON OFF<br>OCR OCR<br>contact contact<br>I002043E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-35:** Protection circuits_
- Refer to Tab. 3-21 for the type number of each capacity of thermal relay and the diagram for the connection.
- When the power supply is 400 V class, install a step-down transformer.
|**Power Supply**<br>**Voltage**|**Type**<br>**Hi**<br>**Br**|**gh-duty**<br>**ake Resistor**|**Thermal Relay Type**<br>**(Mitsubishi Product)**|**Contact Rating**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|230 V|FR-ABR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR<br>FR|-ABR-0.4K|TH-N20CXHZKP-0.7A|110 V AC/5 A<br>220 V AC/2 A (AC 11 class),<br>110 V DC/0.5 A<br>220 V DC/0.25 A (DC 11 class)|
|||-ABR-0.75K|TH-N20CXHZKP-1.3A||
|||-ABR-2.2K|TH-N20CXHZKP-2.1A||
|400 V||-ABR-H0.4K|TH-N20CXHZKP-0.24A||
|||-ABR-H0.75K|TH-N20CXHZKP-0.35A||
|||-ABR-H1.5K|TH-N20CXHZKP-0.9A||
|||-ABR-H2.2K|TH-N20CXHZKP-1.3A||
|||-ABR-H3.7K|TH-N20CXHZKP-2.1A||
|||-ABR-H5.5K|TH-N20CXHZKP-2.5A||
|||-ABR-H7.5K|TH-N20CXHZKP-3.6A||
|||-ABR-H11K|on request||
|||-ABR-H15K|on request||
_**Tab. 3-21:** Resistor and thermal relay combination_
**==> picture [412 x 95] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-36:<br>Connecting the thermal relay<br>To the inverter P/+ To a resistor<br>terminal<br>I001458E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**CAUTION:**_
- _**Brake resistor can not be used with the brake unit (FR-BU2), high power factor converter (FR-HC), power supply regeneration converter (FR-CV), etc.**_
- _**Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/–. This could cause a fire.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 41
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **3.8.3 Connection of a brake unit FR-BU2**
When connecting a brake unit to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection as shown below.
## **Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor**
**==> picture [387 x 239] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
ON<br>OFF<br>| nn | T ® _<br>a MC<br>soo Discharging<br>Inverter resistor ©<br>Motor<br>.MCCE .. paaMCtelan [RHR @<br>3-phase AC M<br>power supply 3~<br>@| FR - BU2<br>©PR<br>© A 0 )<br>© © N/ - N/- 4<br>a ° BUE<br>|< 5 m o_]ye e<br>I002044E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-37:** Connection with the brake unit FR-BU2_
If the control contacts are only specified for 230 V control power you must install a transformer when using a 400 V power supply.
_ Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/ ) and brake unit terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and resistor unit should be within 5m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10 m.
If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverters input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.
|**Brake Unit**|**Discharging Resistor**<br>Sn|**Recommended External Thermal**<br>**Relay**|
|---|---|---|
|FR-BU2-1.5K<br>es|GZG 300W-50 (one)<br>es<br>Sn|TH-N20CXHZKP-1.3A<br>es|
|FR-BU2-3.7K<br>es|GRZG 200-10 (three in series)<br>Sn<br>es<br><n|TH-N20CXHZKP-3.6A<br>es|
|FR-BU2-7.5K<br>ns|GRZG 300-5 (four in series)<br>ns<br><n|on request<br>ns|
|FR-BU2-15K<br>es<br>ns|GRZG 400-2 (six in series)<br><n<br>es<br><n|on request<br>es|
|FR-BU2-7.5K<br>ns<br>FP|GRZG 200-10 (six in series)<br><n<br>|TH-N20CXHZKP-3.6A<br>|
|FR-BU2-15K<br>ns <br>FPOr—SY|GRZG 300-5 (eight in series)<br> <n<br>Or—SY|on request<br>Or—SY|
_**Tab. 3-22:** Recommended external relay_
3 - 42
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
**E**
## _**CAUTION:**_
- _**If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverters input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.**_
- _**Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.**_
**NOTE**
Set "1" in Pr. 0 "Brake mode selection" of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 43
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **Connection example with the FR-BR(-H) type resistor**
**==> picture [383 x 239] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
ON<br>OFF<br>cra Tss T ® a<br>i MC<br>oes<br>FR - BR<br>Inverter<br>Motor<br>3-phase AC a S i e ion Gan M bP} jt?<br>power supply 3~<br>e e \ : 1 e 1o _ }: 1+—O S IL2 v o—{ ) C]O<br>Ta O T L W O OL e ne<br>piaieieieieieied piaieieieieieied = ©<br>1<br>FR - BU2<br>© PR<br>O<br>b q we ONny - I<br>L Pf BUE@<br> 5 m<br>J—_< ©] > SD<br>002045E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-38:** Connection with the brake unit FR-BU2_
If the control contacts are only specified for 230 V control power you must install a transformer when using a 400 V power supply.
Normal: across TH1-TH2 ... close, Alarm: across TH1-TH2 ... open
> Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/ _ ) and brake unit terminals so that their terminal signals match with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the initial status.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and resistor unit should be within 5m. If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10 m.
## **E**
## _**CAUTION:**_
- _**If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a magnetic contactor on the inverters input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.**_
- _**Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.**_
3 - 44
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **3.8.4 Connection of the high power factor converter FR-HC**
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Perform wiring of the high power factor converter (FR-HC) securely as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.**_
**==> picture [386 x 155] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External box High power factor<br>(FR-HCB) converter (FR-HC) Inverter<br>Motor<br>Reactor 1 Reactor 2 � M<br>(FR-HCL01) (FR-HCL02) 3~<br>3-phase AC �<br>power supply<br>� �<br>�<br>Phase<br>detection<br>I002060E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-39:** Connection of the high power factor converter FR-HC_
- Keep input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
- Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ and N/ � (between P and P/+, between N and N/ � ). Opposite polarity of terminals N/ � , P/+ will damage the inverter.
- Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the terminals used for the X10, RES signal. (Refer to section 6.10).
- Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-HC will be damaged.
## **NOTES**
The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
Use sink logic when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC cannot be connected when source logic (factory setting) is selected.
Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 45
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **3.8.5 Connection of the power regeneration common converter FR-CV**
When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/ ) and the terminals P/L+ and N/L– of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
**==> picture [396 x 208] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>© RIL1 UO Motor<br>M<br>5 si.2© [ L<br>3~<br>OTIL3 Wov ian<br>Dedicated stand-alone Power regeneration common<br>reactor FR-CVL converter FR-CV<br>MCCB MC1<br>3-phase AC a y oR R2/L12o- ? R2/L1<br>power supply<br>S e L e siizt Saag © $2/L2 PIL+ © © P +<br>es Lt, 2 b — T2/L3 N/L - 6—__—__4 N/ - °<br>© RILI P24 0 td OPC<br>[Po ® spo OSD<br>tin c PMTt eoyghROYAQ 2 5 x49® S o<br>= SEQ O SD<br>I002061<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-40:** Connection of the power regeneration common converter FR-CV_
Always keep the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ and N/– (between P/L+ and P/+, between N/ L and N/–). Opposite polarity of terminals N/–, P/+ will damage the inverter.
Always connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the terminals used for the X10, RES signal. (Refer to section 6.10).
Be sure to connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-CV will be damaged.
## **NOTES**
The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
Use sink logic when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic (factory setting) is selected.
Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1.
3 - 46
Connection of stand-alone option units
Wiring
## **3.8.6 Connection of the power improving DC reactor FFR-HEL-(H)-E**
When using the DC reactor (FFR-HEL-(H)-E), connect it between terminals P1 and P/+. In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P1 and P/+ must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its performance.
**==> picture [409 x 113] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 3-41:<br>Connection of a DC reactor<br>P1 P/+<br>FFR-HEL-(H)-E<br>Remove the<br>jumper.<br>I002048E_N<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTES**
- The wiring distance should be within 5m.
The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
## **3.8.7 Installation of a reactor**
When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (500 kVA or more) or when a power capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent this, always install the optional DC reactor (FFRHEL-(H)-E) or AC reactor (FR-BAL-B).
**==> picture [393 x 249] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Single-phase power input<br>AC reactor Inverter<br>(FR-BAL-B)<br>Power Installation<br>supply M range of reactor<br>3~<br>DC reactor Wiring length [m]<br>(FFR-HEL-(H)-E) [�]<br>Three-phase power input<br>AC reactor Inverter<br>(FR-BAL-B)<br>Power M<br>supply 3~<br>DC reactor<br>(FFR-HEL-(H)-E) [�]<br>I002038E<br>Power supplycapacity [kVA]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-42:** Installation of a reactor_
- When connecting the FFR-HEL-(H)-E, remove the jumper across terminals + (resp. P/+) and P1. The wiring length between the FFR-HEL-(H)-E and inverter should be 5 m maximum and minimized.
Use the same wire size as that of the power supply wire (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 3-10.)
**NOTE**
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 47
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **3.9 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)**
## **3.9.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures**
Mains filters, shielded motor cables, the motor, and the inverter itself cause stationary and variable leakage currents to PE. Since its value depends on the capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following measures. Select the earth leakage breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier frequency setting.
## **To-earth (ground) leakage currents**
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the earth (ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
- Countermeasures
- If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" setting. Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM operation selection" makes the sound inoffensive.
- By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line and other line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
- To-earth leakage currents
- Take caution as long wiring will increase the leakage current. Decreasing the carrier frequency of the inverter reduces the leakage current.
- Increasing the motor capacity increases the leakage current.
- Shielded motor cables significantly increase the leakage current to PE (approx. double the value generated with unshielded motor cables of the same length).
-
- The leakage current of the 400 V class is larger than that of the 200 V class.
## **Line-to-line leakage currents**
Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacities between the inverter output cables may operate the external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50 m or more) for the 400 V class small-capacity model (FR-E700-170SC or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases.
3 - 48
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **Example** �
Line-to-line leakage current data example Dedicated motor: SF-JR 4P Carrier frequency: 14.5 kHz Used wire: 2 mm², 4 cores, cab tyre cable
|**Motor Capacity [kW]**|**Motor Capacity [kW]**|**Rated Motor Current [A]**|**Rated Motor Current [A]**|**Rated Motor Current [A]**|**Rated Motor Current [A]**||**Leakage Currents [mA]**|**Leakage Currents [mA]**|**Leakage Currents [mA]**|**Leakage Currents [mA]**|**Leakage Currents [mA]**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||||**Wiring Length 50 m**||||**Wiring Length 100 m**|
|0.4||1.1|||||620||||1000|
|0.75||1.9|||||680||||1060|
|1.5||3.5|||||740||||1120|
|2.2||4.1|||||800||||1180|
|3.7||6.4|||||880||||1260|
|5.5||9.7|||||980||||1360|
|7.5||12.8|||||1070||||1450|
|**_Tab. 3-23:_** _Line-to-line leakage current data example_|||||||�|||||
|Power<br>supply||||Inverter|||_I001043E_<br>Line-to-line<br>leakage currents<br>path<br>Line-to-line static<br>capacitances<br>M<br>3~<br>Thermal<br>relay<br>Motor|||||
|||||||||||||
|||||||||||||
|||||||||||||
|||||||||||||
_**Fig. 3-43:** Line-to-line leakage currents_
- Countermeasures
- Use Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay".
- If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" setting. Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM operation selection" makes the sound inoffensive. To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor (e.g. PTC element) to directly detect motor temperature.
- Selecting a power supply circuit breaker: You can also use a circuit breaker (MCCB) to protect the power supply lines against short circuits and overloads. However, note that this does not protect the inverter (rectifiers, IGBT). Select the capacity of the circuit breaker on the basis of the cross-sectional area of the power supply lines. To calculate the required mains current trip point you need to know the power required by the inverter (Refer to rated input capacity in Appendix A.1, Specifications) and the mains supply voltage. Select a circuit breaker with a trip point that is slightly higher than calculated, particularly in the case of breakers with electromagnetic tripping, since the trip characteristics are strongly influenced by the harmonics in the power supply line.
## **NOTE**
The earth leakage breaker must be either a Mitsubishi earth leakage breaker (ELB, for harmonics and surges) or an ELB with breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression that is approved for use with frequency inverters.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 49
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **Note on selecting a suitable power supply ELCB**
If your application requires by installation standards an RCD (residual current device) as up stream protection please select according to DIN VDE 0100-530 as following: Single phase inverter type A or B
Three phase inverter only type B
Additionally, when selecting a residual current device (RCD), leakage current caused by the mains filter, the length of the shielded motor cable and the carrier frequency must be taken into consideration.
When connecting AC current using switches without a step function, brief asymmetrical loads may result in unwanted triggering of the residual current device (RCD). It is recommendable here to use a Type B residual current device (RCD) with delayed actuation or to switch on all three phases simultaneously using a main contactor.
Calculate the trip current sensitivity of the ELB as follows:
- Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression: I A> n 10 (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + lg2 + lgm) x
- Standard breaker:
I A2> n 10 [Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 (Ig2 + lgm)] x x Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply operation Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
**==> picture [397 x 170] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Example of leakage current per 1km Leakage current example of 3-phase Example of leakage current per 1km Leakage current example of 3-phase<br>during the commercial power supply induction motor during the during the commercial power supply induction motor during the<br>operation when the CV cable is routed commercial power supply operation operation when the CV cable is routed commercial power supply operation<br>in metal conduit in metal conduit<br>(200 V/60 Hz) (200 V/60 Hz) (Three-phase three-wire delta (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type<br>connection 400 V/60 Hz) motor 400 V/60 Hz)<br>too TIM P SS EERE ag Or TAT<br>10080 TTT eeoS Eeea ea 10080 mat HLBeauriii | OyVo EEEAR [4]<br>eg a oy CUA<br>oo | alll 0.07 SeerHS SeerTT eT ATE T TH eee a3 HHH sine<br>20 setn TTT ons' FH or PTTL TI 0: -H HHH<br>rT TMCTECIn 23 . 5 8142238 80150 = °°0.10 PRPS. 2 0 . 75 2 . 2 55 11 20 2 23 . 5 ° 8142238 80150 E : EL 1 . 5 EIT 3 . 7 75 15<br>5 . 5 3060100 04 15 3 . 7 7 . 5 15 5.5 3060100 22 55 11 20<br>Power supply size [mm²] Motor capacity [kW] Power supply size [mm²] Motor capacity [kW]<br>I002037E<br>Leakage current [mA] Leakage current [mA] Leakage current [mA] Leakage current [mA]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-44:** Leakage currents_
**NOTE** For star connection, the amount of leakage current is 1/3.
3 - 50
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **Example** �
||3<br>ELB|Inverter<br>5.5 mm²�5 m<br>Ig1<br>Ign<br>Igi<br>Noise filter<br>(optional)|Inverter<br>5.5 mm²�5 m<br>Ig1<br>Ign<br>Igi<br>Noise filter<br>(optional)|M<br>3~<br>3~, 400 V, 2.2k W<br>5.5 mm²�60 m<br>Ig2<br>Igm|M<br>3~<br>3~, 400 V, 2.2k W<br>5.5 mm²�60 m<br>Ig2<br>Igm|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Breaker Designed for Harmonic and**<br>**Surge Suppression**||**Standard Breaker**|
|Leakage current Ig1 [mA]|||1<br>3-**-**<br>66<br>�<br>5 m<br>1000 m<br>------------------**-**<br>�<br>0.11<br>=|||
|Leakage current Ign [mA]|||0 (without noise filter)|||
|Leakage current Igi [mA]|||1 (with noise filter)|||
|Leakage current Ig2 [mA]|||1<br>3-**-**<br>66<br>�<br>60 m<br>1000 m<br>------------------**-**<br>�<br>1,32<br>=|||
|Motor leakage current Igm [mA]|||0.36|||
|Total leakage current [mA]|||2.79||6.15|
|Rated sensitivity current [mA]|||30||100|
_**Tab. 3-24:** Estimation of the permanent flowing leakage current_
�
**NOTES** The frequency inverter monitors its own output for ground faults up to a frequency of 120 Hz. However, it is important to understand that this feature only protects the inverter itself. It cannot be used to provide protection against shock hazards for personnel.
In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is purified against an earth fault in the inverter output side. Earthing must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (JIS, NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective value is less than the rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
The following models are standard breakers: BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA and NV-2F earth leakage relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection. The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression: NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-C2, earth leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 51
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **3.9.2 Inverter-generated noises and their reduction techniques**
Some noises enter the inverter to malfunction it and others are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to be insusceptible to noises, it handles low-level signals, so it requires the following basic techniques. Also, since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency, that could generate noises. If these noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, measures should be taken to suppress noises.
These techniques differ slightly depending on noise propagation paths.
- Basic techniques
- Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
- Use twisted pair shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables. Earth the shield.
- Earth the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
- Techniques to reduce noises that enter and malfunction the inverter When devices that generate many noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunctioned by noises, the following measures must be taken:
- Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many noises to suppress noises.
- Fit data line filters to signal cables.
- Earth the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
- Techniques to reduce noises that are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into:
- those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter and inverter main circuits (I/O),
- those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply,
- and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
3 - 52
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
**==> picture [414 x 453] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter generated noise Air propagated noise Noise directly radiated from inverter ... Path �<br>Noise radiated from ... Path �<br>power supply cable<br>Noise radiated from<br>motor connection cable ... Path �<br>Electromagneticinduction noise ... Path ��<br>Electrostatic ... Path �<br>induction noise<br>Electrical path propagated noise Noise propagated through power supply cable ... Path �<br>Ground wire by leakage current ... Path �<br>I001048E<br> Fig. 3-45: Noise propagation<br>� Telephone<br>� �<br>�<br>� Sensor<br>power<br>supply<br>Inverter<br>Instrument Receiver �<br>�<br>� �<br>�<br>Sensor<br>Motor M �<br>3~<br>I001049E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-45:** Noise propagation_
_**Fig. 3-46:** Noise paths_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 53
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
**Noise Measures Propagation Path** When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to noises, e.g. instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal cables are run near the inverter, the devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated noises. The following measures must be taken: Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables. Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. Inserting a filter (dV/dt, sine wave filter) into the output suppresses the radiation noise from the cables. Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects. ~~Pp~~ When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken: Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter. Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the I/O cables of the inverter. Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them. Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects. Te When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same line, inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken: Use additional (optional) noise filters as required. Install output filters to the power cables of the inverter after you consulted MITSUBISHI. Pk When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may flow through the earth cable of the inverter to malfunction the device. In such a case, disconnection of the earth cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly. a
_**Tab. 3-25:** Noise and countermeasures_
**==> picture [346 x 194] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Install an input filter after you Decrease carrier<br>consulted MITSUBISHI. Enclosure frequency. Install an output filter after you consulted MITSUBISHI.<br>Inverter<br>power Inverter M Motor<br>supply I IES BSFO1 3~<br>Use a shielded motor<br>power cable.<br>T: el | BIF /|<br>Separate the inverter, power line,<br>and sensor circuit by more than 30 cm.<br>(at least 10 cm) Use a twisted pair shielded cable<br>imi no |<br>Control — ~ 7 Power Sensor<br>power supply supply for<br>sensor<br>Do not earth Do not earth shield<br>enclosure directly but connect it to signal common cable.<br>I001881E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-47:** Noise reduction examples_
3 - 54
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **3.9.3 Power supply harmonics**
The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power capacitor etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and transmission path. Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
|**Item**|**Harmonics**|**Noise**|
|---|---|---|
|Frequency|Maximum 50 (�3 kHz)|Several 10 kHz to 1 GHz|
|Environment|To electric channel, power impedance|To-space, distance, wiring path|
|Quantitative understanding|Theoretical calculation possible|Random occurrence, quantitative grasp-<br>ing difficult|
|Generated amount|Nearly proportional to load capacity|Depending on the current fluctuation<br>ratio (larger as switching is faster)|
|Affected equipment immunity|Specified in standard per equipment|Different depending on maker's equip-<br>ment specifications|
|Suppression example|Provide reactor|Increase distance|
_**Tab. 3-26:** Differences between harmonics and noises_
- Measures
The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the input side differs according to various conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side.
For the output frequency and output current, we understand that they should be calculated in the conditions under the rated load at the maximum operating frequency.
**==> picture [350 x 143] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
DC reactor<br>(FFR-HEL-(H)-E)<br>Power M<br>supply 3~<br>AC reactor Inverter<br>(FR-BAL-B) Do not insert power<br>factor improving capacitor<br>I002049E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 3-48:** Reduction of power supply harmonics_
## **CAUTION:**
_**The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be**_ **E** _**overheated or damaged by the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate over current protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter. For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
3 - 55
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Wiring
## **3.9.4 Inverter-driven 400 V class motor**
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially for a 400 V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:
- Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length. For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
- Specify the "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
- For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".
|~~ee~~|**Wiring Length**<br>~~ee~~<br>ee<br>eee|**Wiring Length**<br>~~ee~~<br>ee<br>eee|**Wiring Length**<br>~~ee~~<br>ee<br>eee|
|---|---|---|---|
||**50 m**<br>~~ee~~|**50 m to 100 m**<br>~~ee~~<br>ee|**100 m**<br>~~ee~~<br>eee|
|Parameter 72<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|15 (14.5 kHz)<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|8 (8 kHz)<br>~~ee~~<br>ee<br>~~a~~|2 (2 kHz)<br>~~ee~~<br>eee<br>~~a~~|
## _**Tab. 3-27:** Setting of Pr. 72 according to the wiring length_
- Limiting the voltage rise speed of the frequency inverter output voltage (dV/dT): If the motor requires a rise speed of 500 V/µs or less you must install a filter in the output of the inverter. Please contact your Mitsubishi dealer for more details.
**NOTE**
For details of Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection", refer to section 6.15.
3 - 56
Precautions for use of the inverter
Operation
## **4 Operation**
## **4.1 Precautions for use of the inverter**
The FR-E700SC series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/ handling method may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
- Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
- Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
- After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter. Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes in a control box etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
- Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% maximum. If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. (Refer to page 3-10 for the recommended cable sizes.)
● The overall wiring length should be within the prescribed length. Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may be reduced or the equipment connected to the inverter output side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 3-13.)
- Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install a line noise filter to minimize interference.
- Electrical corrosion of the bearing
When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring, load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter settings (e. g. high carrier frequencies).
- Decrease the carrier frequency.
- Consider the use of a sine wave output filter.
- Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the inverter output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged.
- For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor.
When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is no more than 30 V DC using a tester.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 1
Precautions for use of the inverter
Operation
- A short circuit or earth fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
- Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation resistance may damage the inverter modules.
- Fully check the to-earth insulation and inter-phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on.
- Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
- Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter. Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter.
- Across P/+ and PR terminals, connect only an external brake resistor. Do not connect a mechanical brake.
- The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC. Leave terminals + and PR open. Also, never short between P/+ and PR.
- Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits. Contact to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected incorrectly to short terminals 10-5.
- Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 which are used for commercial power supply-inverter switch-over.
- When the wiring is incorrect or if there is a commercial power supply-inverter switch-over circuit as shown below, the inverter will be damaged by leakage current from the power supply due to arcs generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence error. Miswiring may also damage the inverter.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [201 x 92] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 4-1:<br>Mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2<br>I001042E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [178 x 41] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M<br>3~<br>Power S/L2RIL1 VU _ *MC2 C | O<br>supply<br>Undesirable current<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.**_
_**If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the power is restored.**_
4 - 2
Precautions for use of the inverter
Operation
- Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, connect a MC for the following purposes.
- To release the inverter from the power supply when a fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency stop operation). For example, MC avoids overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
- To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure.
- To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work. If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.
- Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it ON/OFF after the inverter and motor have stopped.
- Countermeasures against inverter-generated EMI
When the motor speed is unstable, due to change in the frequency setting signal caused by electromagnetic noises from the inverter, take the following measures when applying the motor speed by the analog signal.
- Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
- Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
- Use shield cables as signal cables.
- Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).
- Instructions for overload operation
When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough allowance for current (up to 2 rank larger in capacity).
- Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 3
Precautions for use of the inverter
Operation
## **4.1.1 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter**
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products, provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter, without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
## **Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals**
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be detected.
|**Interlock Method**|**Check Method**|**Used Signals**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Inverter protective<br>function operation|Operation check of an alarm contact<br>Circuit error detection by negative logic|Fault output signal<br>(ALM signal)|6-130|
|Inverter running<br>status|Operation ready check signal|Operation ready signal<br>(RY signal)|6-129|
||Logic check of the start signal and running<br>signal|Start signal<br>(STF signal, STR signal)<br>Running signal<br>(RUN signal)|6-105<br>6-129|
||Logic check of the start signal and output<br>current|Start signal<br>(STF signal, STR signal)<br>Output current detection signal<br>(Y12 signal)|6-105<br>6-133|
_**Tab. 4-1:** Different output signals of the frequency inverter can be used for interlocks_
## **Check by the output of the inverter fault signal**
When the fault occurs and trips the inverter, the fault output signal (ALM signal) is output (ALM signal is assigned to terminal ABC in the initial setting). Check that the inverter functions properly. In addition, negative logic can be set (on when the inverter is normal, off when the fault occurs).
**==> picture [388 x 178] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter fault occurrence<br>(trip)<br>Time<br>Fault output signal (ALM) ; OFF ; ON (no alarm) ,<br>(when output at NC contact)<br>ON OFF<br>Reset (RES) [an]<br>rn<br>Reset ON Reset processing<br>(about 1s)<br>I001877E<br>Output<br>frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-2:** Contact B-C opens when a fault occurs (initial setting)_
4 - 4
Precautions for use of the inverter
Operation
## **Checking the inverter operating status by the inverter operation ready completion signal**
Operation ready signal (RY signal) is output when the inverter power is on and the inverter becomes operative. Check if the RY signal is output after powering on the inverter.
## **Checking the inverter operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter running signal**
The inverter running signal (RUN signal) is output when the inverter is running (RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN in the initial setting).
Check if RUN signal is output when inputting the start signal to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse signal is STR signal). For logic check, note that RUN signal is output for the period from the inverter decelerates until output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time.
**==> picture [292 x 194] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power supply ON OFF<br>ON OFF<br>STF<br>RH ON<br>DC injection brake<br>operation point<br>DC injection<br>brake operation<br>Pr. 13 "Starting frequency"<br>Time<br>Reset processing<br>RY ON OFF<br>RUN ON OFF<br>I001878E<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-3:** Ready status and motor running_
## **Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal**
The output current detection signal (Y12 signal) is output when the inverter operates and currents flows in the motor. Check if Y12 signal is output when inputting the start signal to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse signal is STR signal).
Note that the current level at which Y12 signal is output is set to 150% of the inverter rated current in the initial setting, it is necessary to adjust the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with Pr. 150 "Output current detection level".
For logic check, as same as the inverter running signal (RUN signal), the inverter outputs for the period from the inverter decelerates until output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 5
Precautions for use of the inverter
Operation
## **Output terminal function assignment**
When using various signals, assign functions to Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (output terminal function selection) referring to the table below.
|**Output Signal**|**190 to 192 Setting**|**190 to 192 Setting**|
|---|---|---|
||**Positive Logic**|**Negative Logic**|
|ALM|99|199|
|RY|11|111|
|RUN|0|100|
|Y12|12|112|
## _**Tab. 4-2:** Setting in positive and negative logic_
## **NOTE**
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
## **Backup method outside the inverter**
Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure status of the inverter itself. For example, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter fault output signal, start signal and RUN signal output, there is a case where a fault output signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output even if an inverter fault occurs. Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
- Start signal and actual operation check
Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
- Command speed and actual operation check
Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command and detected speed of the speed detector.
**==> picture [366 x 166] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Controller<br>System failure<br>eL_]e<br>Sensor<br>Inverter (speed,<br>temperature,<br>air volume, etc.)<br>To the alarm detection sensor<br>PL<br>I001879E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-4:** Backup method outside the inverter_
4 - 6
Drive the motor
Operation
## **4.2**
## **Drive the motor**
The inverter needs frequency command and start command. Refer to the flow chart below to perform setting.
**==> picture [399 x 374] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Step of operation<br>Installation/mounting<br>Frequency command<br>Frequency [Hz]<br>Wiring of the power<br>Output supply and motor<br>frequency<br>Time [s]<br>System examination<br>Start command ON<br>Start command using the PU connector and plug-in<br>How option (communication). (Refer to section 3.5.3.)<br>to give a start<br>command?<br>Start command with RUN on the operation RUN Connect a switch, relay, etc. to the control circuit terminal block of the<br>panel (PU). inverter to give a start command.<br>(External)<br>How to How to<br>give a frequency command? give a frequency command?<br>Set from the operation Change frequency with Perform frequency setting by a Perform frequency setting by a<br>panel and the PU ON/OFF switches current output device voltage output device<br>(FR-PU04/FR-PU07). connected to terminals (connection across terminals (connection across terminals 2-<br>(multi-speed setting). 4-5). 5).<br>(PU) (PU)/(External) (PU)/(External) (PU)/(External)<br>(Refer to page 5-20) (Refer to page 5-24) (Refer to page 5-28) (Refer to page 5-26)<br>Set from the operation Change frequency with Perform frequency setting by a Perform frequency setting by a<br>panel and the PU ON/OFF switches current output device voltage output device<br>(FR-PU04/FR-PU07). connected to terminals (connection across terminals (connection across terminals<br>(multi-speed setting). 4-5). 2-5).<br>(PU)/(External) (External) (External) (External)<br>(Refer to page 5-30) (Refer to page 5-32) (Refer to page 5-39) (Refer to page 5-35)<br>I001732E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 4-5:** Steps of operation_
Check the following items before powering on the inverter:
- Check that the inverter is installed correctly in a correct place. (Refer to section 2.3.)
- Check that wiring is correct. (Refer to section 3.2.)
- Check that no load is connected to the motor.
## **NOTES**
- When protecting the motor from overheat by the inverter, set Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay". (Refer to section 5.1.1.)
When the rated frequency of the motor is 60 Hz, set Pr. 3 "Base frequency" (Refer to section 5.1.2.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 7
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3 Operation panel**
## **4.3.1**
**Parts of the operation panel**
**==> picture [287 x 348] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pe LED-Display<br>4-digit 7-segment display for operational<br>values, parameter numbers, etc.<br>Unit indication<br>LED to indicate the current unit<br>Hz: Frequency<br>A: Current<br>Off: Voltage<br>Flicker: Set frequency<br>Rotation direction indication<br>Lit or flicker during inverter operation<br>RUN is lit: Forward rotation<br>RUN flickering slowly: Reverse rotation<br>RUN flickering fast: Start command is<br>given but the frequency command is<br>missing<br>Monitor indication<br>Lit to indicate the monitoring mode.<br>Parameter setting mode<br>— Lit to indicate the parameter setting mode.<br>RUN WON Pi (] Operation mode indication<br>A PU EXT NET LED to indicate the operation mode<br>PU operation mode (PU)<br>STOP External operation mode (EXT)<br>RUN| RESET (lit at power-ON at initial setting.)<br>Network operation mode (NET)<br>Combined operation mode<br>(PU and EXT)<br>These turn OFF when command source is<br>not on operation panel (Refer to section<br>6.18.3).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001732E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 4-6:** Operation panel of the FR-E700SC_
The number of digits displayed on the operation panel is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed and set. If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals can not be displayed nor set. When 50 Hz is set, 50.00 is displayed. When 120 Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed and second decimal place is not displayed nor set.
4 - 8
Operation panel
Operation
**==> picture [413 x 330] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Key Function Description<br>et<br>Used to change the frequency setting and parameter values.<br>Press to display the following.<br>Displays the set frequency in the monitor mode<br>bet Digital dial<br>Currently set value is displayed during calibration<br>Displays the order in the faults history mode<br>@ -. RUN command for forward/reverse rotation.<br>Rotation direction<br>The rotation direction can be selected by setting Pr. 40.<br>C e<br>Stop operation/ Used to stop RUN command.<br>Fault reset<br>Fault can be reset when protective function is activated (fault).<br>@ | Fo<br>Used to change each setting mode.<br>Mode switch over Pressing PU/EXT simultaneously changes the operation mode (refer<br>to section 4.3.3).<br>Pressing for a while (2 s) can lock operation (refer to section 4.3.4).<br>If pressed during operation, monitor changes as below:<br>ep [op]<br>Write settings frequencyRunning currentOutput voltageOutput<br>Used to switch between the PU and external operation mode. When<br>le, [(] [Sos]<br>using the external operation mode (operation using a separately con-<br>nected frequency setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key<br>Operation mode<br>switch over to light up the EXT indication. (Press MODE simultaneously (0.5 s) or<br>change Pr. 79 setting to change to combined mode.)<br>PU: PU operation mode<br>Tab. 4-3: eo) Keys of the operation panel | EXT: External operation mode (Cancels PU stop also.)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 9
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.2 Basic operation (factory setting)**
**==> picture [463 x 610] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Gi Operation mode switch over =»<br>At powering on (external operation mode)<br>PU Jog operation mode<br>(Refer to page 4-16.)<br>fe ony<br>Example<br>e fe on<br>PU operation mode Value change<br>(output frequency monitor) and frequency flicker<br>Frequency setting has been<br>written and completed!<br>Output current monitor Output voltage monitor<br>, =a<br>;<br>Display the<br>Parameter setting mode current setting<br>Example<br>Value change Parameter and a setting value<br>flicker alternately.<br>[|<br>Parameter write is completed!<br>Parameter clear All Parameter clear Faults history clear<br>ik m7 ) oe ) om<br>L<br>Initial value<br>change list<br>ae<br>The operation for displaying the alarm history is explained in section 7.5.<br>The past eight alams can be displayed.<br>(The latest alarm is ended by ".".)<br>When no alarm history exists, is displayed.<br>ec<br>I001736E<br>Monitor/frequency setting<br>Parameter setting<br>Alarm history<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-7:** Overview of the basic functions of the operation panel_
4 - 10
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.3 Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)**
A frequency inverter can be controlled alone via the control unit, through external signals (switch, SPC outputs, external setpoint sources, etc.) or through a combination of external signals and inputs to the control unit. The choice of operation mode is done by setting parameter 79. (Refer to section 5.1.6.)
Setting of Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" according to combination of the start command and speed command can be easily made.
In the following example the parameter is set to the value "3" so that the motor is started by signals to the STF and STR terminals and the speed can be adjusted using the digital dial on the operator device.
**==> picture [387 x 285] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering ON<br>The monitor display appears.<br>Flickering<br>� Press PU/EXT and MODE for 0.5 s.<br>Flickering<br>� Turn the digital dial, until "3" appears.<br>(Refer to the table on the next page for<br>other settings.)<br>Flickering<br>� Press SET to set.<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>The monitor display appears after 3s.<br>I001737E, I001738E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-8:** One can immediately change parameter 79 by simultaneously pressing the PU/EXT and MODE buttons._
## **NOTES**
If MODE is pressed before pressing SET, the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display.
If the easy setting mode is terminated while Pr. 79 = "0" (initial setting), the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode. Check the operation mode.
Reset can be made with STOP/RESET.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 11
Operation panel
Operation
**==> picture [411 x 238] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Method<br>Operation Panel<br>Indication Operation Panel Indication<br>Start Command Frequency Command<br>a ee<br>Flickering<br>PU Modes<br>Flickering<br>we Oo e@ ee<br>Flickering<br>External<br>External (Analog signal at<br>External operation mode<br>(STF-, STR) terminal 2 (voltage) or<br>4 (current))<br>Flickering<br>Flickering<br>Combined operation External<br>mode 1 (STF-, STR)<br>Flickering<br> = _—= —( a<br>Flickering<br>External<br>Combined operation (Analog signal at<br>mode 2 terminal 2 (voltage) or<br>4 (current))<br>Flickering<br>z s Oo<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Tab. 4-4:** Operation modes and operation panel indication_
## **Possible faults:**
- "Er1" is displayed ... Why?
- Parameter write is disabled with "1" set in Pr. 77.
- Pr. 79 is not registered in user group with "1" in Pr. 160 "User group read selection".
- "Er2" is displayed ... Why?
- Setting can not be made during operation. Stop the motor with the STOP/RESET key or by switching off the STR/STF signal.
- The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/ RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
4 - 12
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.4**
## **Operation lock**
Operation using the digital dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change and unexpected start and stop.
## **Operation lock**
- Set "10" or "11" in Pr. 161, then press the MODE key for 2 s to make the digital dial key operation invalid.
- When the digital dial and key operation is made invalid, "HOLD" appears on the operation panel.
- When the digital dial and key operation is invalid, "HOLD" appears if the digital dial or key operation is performed. (When the digital dial or key operation is not performed for 2 s, the monitor display appears.)
## **Operation unlock**
To make the digital dial and key operation valid again, press the MODE key for 2 s.
## **NOTES**
The STOP/RESET key is valid even in the operation lock status.
Set "0" (extended mode parameter valid) in Pr. 160 "User group read selection".
Set "10" or "11" (key lock mode valid) in Pr. 161 "Frequency setting/key lock operation selection".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 13
Operation panel
Operation
**==> picture [369 x 335] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>Leeeas ext<br>PU indication is lit.<br>Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode. i<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>Press the MODE key to choose the parameter 9<br>setting mode. ©<br>The parameter number read previously<br>appears.<br>.<br>Turn the digital dial until P.161 (Pr. 161) appears. @ » HE<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "0" appears.<br>@© » ii<br>Turn the digital dial clockwise to change it 7<br>to the setting value of "10".<br>@ my<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>© iiK_Tam<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>Press the MODE key for 2 s to show the key lock<br>mode.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001739E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-9:** Operation lock_
suri 4 - 14
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.5 Monitoring of output current and output voltage**
Monitor display of output frequency, output current and output voltage can be changed by pushing the SET key during monitoring mode.
**==> picture [375 x 166] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Press the MODE key during operation to choosethe output frequency monitor. conn eS a<br>(Hz indication is lit.) a et —<br>Independently of whether the inverter is running<br>in any operation mode or at a stop, the outputcurrent monitor appears by pressing the SET key. = LLoan a atEXT<br>(A indication is lit.)<br>Press the SET key to show the output voltage -~--—-<br>monitor.<br>> Pe a<br>(Hz and A indication are turned off.) ee ee eu<br>I001740E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-10:** Monitoring of output current and output voltage_
## **4.3.6 First priority monitor**
Hold down the SET key for 1 s to set monitor description to be appeared first in the monitor mode. (To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down the SET key for 1 s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
## **4.3.7 Digital dial push**
Appears when PU operation mode or external/PU combined operation mode 1 is selected (Pr. 79 = "3").
Push the digital dial to display the set frequency currently set.
_**Fig. 4-11:** Display the set frequency currently set I001067E_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 15
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.8 Change the parameter setting value**
## **Example**
Change the Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" setting from 120 Hz to 50 Hz.
**==> picture [370 x 358] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>| [aaa"] = |<br>PU indication is lit.<br>Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode.<br>> E i<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>© Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>The parameter number<br>read previously appears.<br>Turn the digital dial until P.1 (Pr. 1) appears. @ - iii<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "120.0" appears.<br>© » Bag<br>Turn the digital dial counter clockwise to change it<br>to the setting value of "50.00".<br>@ - aE<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>© iii<br>K__T<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>Turn the digital dial to read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>Press the MODE key twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001462E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-12:** Setting the maximum output frequency_
## **Possible faults:**
- "Er1" to "Er4" is displayed ... Why?
- The error indication means:
- Er1: Write disable error
- Er2: Write error during operation Er3: Calibration error Er4: Mode designation error
For details refer to section 7.1.
4 - 16
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.9**
## **Parameter clear/All Parameter clear**
- Set "1" in Pr.CL "Parameter clear" or ALLC "All parameter clear" to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".)
- Parameter clear returns all parameters except calibration parameters C1 (Pr. 901) to C7 (Pr. 905) and the terminal function selection parameters to the initial values.
- Refer to the extended parameter list Tab. 6-1 for parameters cleared with this operation.
**==> picture [387 x 439] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>PU indication is lit.<br>� Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode.<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>� Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>The parameter number<br>read previously appears.<br>� Turn the digital dial until "PR.CL" or "ALLC" appears<br>� Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "0" appears.<br>� Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting<br>value of "1".<br>� Press the SET key to set.<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>� By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>� Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>� Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>I001742E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-13:** Parameter clear_
## **Possible faults:**
- "1" and "Er4" are displayed alternately.
- The inverter is not in the PU operation mode. Press the PU/EXT key. The PU indication is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "1". (When Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)). Carry out operation from step � again.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 17
Operation panel
Operation
## **4.3.10 Initial value change list**
Displays and sets the parameters changed from the initial value.
## **NOTES**
Calibration parameters (C1 (Pr. 901) to C7 (Pr. 905)) are not displayed even they are changed from the initial settings.
Only simple mode parameter is displayed when simple mode is set (Pr. 160 = 9999).
Only user group is displayed when user group is set (Pr. 160 = "1").
Pr. 160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
When parameter setting is changed after creating the initial value change list, the setting will be reflected to the initial value change list next time.
4 - 18
Operation panel
Operation
**==> picture [388 x 512] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>PU indication is lit.<br>� Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode.<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>� Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>The parameter number<br>read previously appears..<br>� Turn the digital dial until "Pr.CH" appears.<br>It may take several<br>� Pressing the SET key changes to the initial value seconds for creating the initial value change<br>change list screen. list. "P.--- " flickers while<br>creating the list.<br>� Turning the digital dial displays the parameter<br>number changed.<br>� Press the SET key to read the currently set value.<br>� Turn the digital dial and press the SET key to<br>change the setting.<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>� Turn the digital dial to read another parameter.<br>� The display returns to "P.---" after all parameters<br>are displayed.<br>� Pressing the SET key in status "P.---" returns to the<br>parameter setting mode.<br>� Turning the digital dial sets other parameters.<br>� Pressing the SET key displays the change list again.<br>I001743E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 4-14:** Initial value change list_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
4 - 19
Operation panel
Operation
4 - 20
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5 Basic settings**
## **5.1 Simple mode parameter list**
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel. For details of parameters, refer to chapter 6.
**NOTE** Only simple mode parameter can be displayed using Pr. 160 "User group read selection". All parameters are displayed with the initial setting. Set Pr. 160 "User group read selection" as required. (Refer to section 6.17.4.)
|**Pr. 160**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|9999|Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.|
|0 (initial value)|Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be displayed.|
|1|Only parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.|
## _**Tab. 5-1:** Setting of parameter 160_
|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Range**|**Description**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|0|Torque boost||0.1%|6/4/3/2%�|0–30%|Set to increase a starting torque or<br>when the motor with a load will not<br>rotate, resulting in an alarm (OL) and<br>a trip (OC1).|5-5|
|1|Maximum frequency||0.01 Hz|120 Hz|0–120 Hz|Set when the maximum output fre-<br>quency need to be limited.|5-7|
|2|Minimum frequency||0.01 Hz|0 Hz||Set when the minimum output fre-<br>quency need to be limited.||
|3|Base frequency||0.01 Hz|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Check the motor rating plate.|5-4|
|4|Multi-speed<br>setting|RH|0.01 Hz|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set when changing the preset speed<br>in the parameter with a terminal.|5-32|
|5||RM||30 Hz||||
|6||RL||10 Hz<br>||||
|7|Acceleration time||0.1 s|5/10/15 s�<br>|0–3600 s|Acceleration/deceleration time can<br>be set.|5-9|
|8|Deceleration time|||5/10/15 s�||||
|9|Electronic thermal O/L<br>relay||0.01 A|Rated invert-<br>er current|0–500 A|Protect the motor from overheat by<br>the inverter.<br>Set the rated motor current.|5-2|
|79|Operation mode selection||1|0|0/1/2/3/4/<br>6/7|Select the start command location<br>and frequency command location.|5-11|
|12<br>5|Frequency<br>setting gain<br>frequency|Terminal 2|0.01 Hz|50Hz|0–400 Hz|Frequency for the maximum value of<br>the potentiometer (at 5 V) can be<br>changed.|5-38|
|12<br>6||Terminal 4||||Frequency at 20 mA input can be<br>changed.|5-41|
|16<br>0|User group read selection||1|0|0/1/9999|Make extended parameters valid|6-198|
## _**Tab. 5-2:** Simple mode parameters_
- Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity: 6%: FR-E720S-050SC or less, FR-E740-026SC or less 4%: FR-E720S-080SC and 110SC, FR-E740-040SC to 095SC 3%: FR-E740-120SC and 170SC 2%: FR-E740-230SC and 300SC
- Initial values differ according to the inverter capacity: 5 s: FR-E720S-110SC or less, FR-E740-095SC or less 10 s: FR-E740-120SC and 170SC 15 s: FR-E740-230SC and 300SC
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 1
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.1 Overheat protection of the motor by the inverter**
Set this parameter when using a motor other than the Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR) and Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-HRCA). Set the rated motor current in Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" to protect the motor from overheat.
**Pr. No. Name Initial Value Setting Range Description** ~~e~~ **9** Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated inverter current ~~e~~ 0–500 A Set the rated motor current. ~~PT~~ a ©) The initial value of the FR-E720S-050SC or less and FR-E740-026SC or less, is set to 85% of the rated inverter current.
Refer to appendix A for the rated inverter current value.
> **Example** V Change the Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" setting to 5 A according to the motor rated current.
**Operation Display** Screen at powering on The monitor display appears. ° ~~|[aco"]~~ PU indication is lit. Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU ® operation mode. > i ~~o~~ m PRM indication is lit. ~~©~~ Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. The parameter number read previously appears. ~~-~~ © Turn the digital dial until P.9 (Pr. 9) appears. ~~@~~ >» Zz Refer to appendix A for ~~:~~ Press the SET key to show the currently set value. ~~-~~ the rated inverter The setting 6.00 A for FR-E740-060SC appears. ~~°~~ current value. Turn the digital dial clockwise to change the set value to "5.00" (5 A). ~~:~~ Press the SET key to set. o- ms K__1 Flicker ... Parameter setting complete! By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter. Press the SET key to show the setting again. Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001744E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-1:** Setting of the electronic thermal O/L relay_
5 - 2
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **NOTES**
Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-off.
When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic over current protection will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use an external thermal relay.
Electronic thermal relay does not work when 5% or less of inverter rated current is set to electronic thermal relay setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 3
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.2**
## **When the rated motor frequency is 60 Hz (Pr. 3)** x **V/F**
First, check the motor rating plate. If a frequency given on the rating plate is "60 Hz" only, always set Pr. 3 "Base frequency" to "60 Hz". Leaving the base frequency unchanged from "50 Hz" may make the voltage low and the torque insufficient. It may result in an inverter trip due to overload.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**3**|Base frequency|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the rated motor frequency.|
> **Example** V Change Pr. 3 "Base frequency" to 60 Hz according to the motor rated frequency.
**==> picture [386 x 358] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>" | aco " e<br>PU indication is lit.<br>Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>® operation mode. > Et m m<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>® Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>The parameter number<br>read previously appears.<br>© Turn the digital dial until P.3 (Pr. 3) appears.<br>- iz<br>@<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "50.00" appears. © - in<br>Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting<br>value of "60.00".<br>° @ » za<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>® © - iii maz<br>K__T<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>I001745E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-2:** Setting the base frequency_
5 - 4
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.3 Increase the starting torque (Pr. 0)** EE **V/F**
Set this parameter when the motor with a load does not rotate, an alarm OL is output, resulting in an inverter trip due to OC1, etc.
|**Pr.**<br>**No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**0**|Torque boost|FR-E720S-008SC to 050SC<br>FR-E740-016SC and 026SC|6%|0–30%|Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the<br>load to increase the starting motor torque.|
|||FR-E720S-080SC and 110SC<br>FR-E740-040SC to 095SC|4%|||
|||FR-E740-120SC and 170SC|3%|||
|||FR-E740-230SC and 300SC|2%|||
**Example**
When the motor with a load does not rotate, increase the Pr. 0 value 1% by 1% unit by looking at the motor movement. (The guideline is for about 10% change at the greatest.)
## _**Fig. 5-3:**_
**==> picture [161 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Setting<br>range<br>Pr. 0, Pr. 46<br>0 Base<br>frequency<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>Output voltage<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_Relation between output frequency and output voltage_
_I001098E_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 5
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
**==> picture [377 x 343] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>PU indication is lit.<br>Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode.<br>> EE<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode. > i<br>The parameter number read previously appears.<br>Turn the digital dial until P.0 (Pr. 0) appears. Ls<br>@ » ii<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value. The initial value differs<br>"6.0" (initial value is 6% for motors up to 0.75 kW) according to the<br>capacity.<br>appears. @) > al<br>Turn the digital dial to change it<br>to the setting value of "7.0" (7.0%).<br>@ - ia<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>= - Ea ia<br>K__T<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>I001746E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-4:** Setting the starting torque_
## **NOTES**
A too large setting will cause the motor to overheat, resulting in an over current trip (OL (over current alarm) then E.OC1 (over current shutoff during acceleration)), thermal trip (E.THM (Motor overload shutoff), and E.THT (Inverter overload shutoff)).
When an error (E.OC1) occurs, release the start command, and decrease the value 1% by 1%. (Refer to page 7-9.)
If the inverter still does not operate properly after the above measures, adjust the acceleration/ deceleration setting or activate the vector control function by Pr. 80 "Motor capacity". (Refer to section 6.3.2.)
5 - 6
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.4 Limit the maximum and minimum output frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2)**
|**Pr.**<br>**No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**1**|Maximum frequency|120 Hz|0–120 Hz|Set the upper limit of the output frequency.|
|**2**|Minimum frequency|0 Hz|0–120 Hz|Set the lower limit of the output frequency.|
## **Example** �
You can limit the motor speed. Limit the frequency set by the potentiometer, etc. to 50 Hz maximum. (Set "50" Hz to Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency".)
**==> picture [187 x 121] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>frequency [Hz] Clamped at the<br>maximum frequency<br>Pr. 1<br>Pr. 18<br>Frequency<br>Pr. 2 setting<br>0 5, 10 V<br>(4 mA) (20 mA)<br>Clamped at the<br>minimum frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-5:**_
_Minimum and maximum output frequency_
_I001100E_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 7
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
**==> picture [377 x 339] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>| [acc"] & |<br>PU indication is lit.<br>Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode. > AR e m<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode. > i a z<br>The parameter number read previously appears.<br>-<br>Turn the digital dial until P.1 (Pr. 1) appears.<br>@- =z<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "120.0" appears.<br>©) > EG<br>Turn the digital dial to change it<br>to the setting value of "50.00".<br>@ » ii<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>«= » ii Gam<br>K__T<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>I001747E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-6:** Setting the maximum frequency_
**NOTES** The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.) Note that Pr. 15 "Jog frequency" has higher priority than the minimum frequency.
When the Pr. 1 setting is changed, frequency higher than the Pr. 1 setting can not be set by the digital dial.
When performing a high speed operation at 120 Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 "High speed maximum frequency" is necessary. (Refer to section. 6.4.1.)
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without entry of the command frequency.**_
5 - 8
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.5 Change the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8)**
Set in Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" a larger value for a slower speed increase and a smaller value for a faster speed increase.
Set in Pr. 8 "Deceleration time" a larger value for a slower speed decrease and a smaller value for a faster speed decrease.
**==> picture [405 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
No.Pr. Name Initial Value SettingRange Description<br> FR-E720S-110SC<br>5 s<br> FR-E740-095SC<br>eo 0–3600 s/<br>7 Acceleration time Set the motor acceleration time.<br>FR-E740-120SC and 170SC 10 s 0–360 s<br>o ePo FR-E740-230SC and 300SC < 15 s P op<br> FR-E720S-110SC<br>5 s<br> FR-E740-095SC<br>eo 0–3600 s/<br>8 Deceleration time Set the motor deceleration time.<br>FR-E740-120SC and 170SC 10 s 0–360 s<br>o oee FR-E740-230SC and 300SC < ee 15 s p op<br>Depends on the Pr. 21 "Acceleration/deceleration time increments" setting. The initial value for<br>the setting range is "0 to 3600 s" and setting increments is "0.1 s".<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTE**
Too short acceleration/deceleration times may lead to an inverter shutoff with error message (E.THT, E.THM, E.OCT, E.OVT ...).
> **Example** V Change the Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" setting from "5 s" to "10 s".
_**Fig. 5-7:** Acceleration/deceleration time_
**==> picture [9 x 60] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000006C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 9
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
**==> picture [378 x 331] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>: | [cace] & |<br>PU indication is lit.<br>Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>° operation mode. > i a m<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>© Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>The parameter number read previously<br>appears.<br>® Turn the digital dial until P.7 (Pr. 7) appears.<br>@ » Zi<br>The initial value differs<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value. according to the<br>° The initial value "5.0" appears. @) » if capacity.<br>° Turn the digital dial to change it to the setting a<br>value of "10.0".<br>@ » i<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>® c) 9 i Gi<br>K__1<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001748E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-8:** Setting the acceleration time_
5 - 10
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.6 Operation mode (Pr. 79)**
Select the operation command location and frequency command location.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**LED Indication**<br>: OFF<br>: ON|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**79**|Operation<br>mode selection|0|0|External/PU switch over mode<br>Press the PU/EXT key to switch between the PU and external<br>operation mode. (Refer to section 4.3.3.)<br>At power on, the inverter is in the external operation mode.||External operation mode<br>PU operation mode|
||||1|PU operation mode|||
||||2|Fixed to external operation mode<br>Operation can be performed by switching between the external and<br>Net operation mode.||External operation mode<br>NET operation mode|
||||3|External/PU combined operation mode 1|||
|||||Running frequency|Start signal||
|||||Operation panel and PU (FR-<br>PU04/FR-PU07) setting or<br>external signal input (multi-<br>speed setting, across terminals 4-<br>5 (valid when AU signal turns<br>on)).|External signal input<br>(terminal STF-, STR)||
||||4|External/PU combined operation mode 2|||
|||||Running frequency|Start signal||
|||||External signal input (Terminal 2,<br>4, JOG, multi-speed selection,<br>etc.)|Input using the RUN-key of the<br>operation panel or FWD/REV of<br>the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)||
||||6|Switch-over mode<br>Switch among PU operation, external operation, and NET operation<br>while keeping the same operation status.||External operation mode<br>NET operation mode<br>PU operation mode|
||||7|External operation mode (PU operation interlock)<br>X12 signal ON�:<br>Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode.<br>(output stop during external operation)<br>X12 signal OFF�:<br>Operation mode can not be switched to the PU operation mode.||External operation mode<br>PU operation mode|
- For the terminal used for the X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, assign "12" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign functions. For Pr. 178 to Pr. 184, refer to section 6.10.1. When the X12 signal is not assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to PU operation interlock signal.
## **NOTE**
Setting value "1" to "4" can be changed in the easy operation mode. (Refer to section 4.3.3.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 11
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.7 Large starting torque and low speed torque are necessary (Advanced magnetic flux control, General-purpose magnetic flux vector control) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800)** S= **AD MFVC** =z **GP MFVC**
Advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the capacity, poles and type of the motor used in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
## **Advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control?**
The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation so that the motor current which meets the load torque to flow. Output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is made so that the motor actual speed approximates a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates drastically, etc.
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as it is for the FR-E500 series. Select this control when operation characteristics as similar as possible are required when replacing from the FR-E500 series. For other cases, select advanced magnetic flux vector control.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**9**|Electronic thermal<br>O/L relay|Rated inverter<br>current|0–500 A|Set the rated motor current.|
|**71**|Applied motor|0|0/1/3–6/13–16/23/24/40/43/44/<br>50/53/54|By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor, thermal<br>characteristic and motor constants of each motor are set.|
|**80**|Motor capacity|9999|0.1–55 kW<br>a|Set the applied motor capacity.|
||||9999<br>ee|V/F Control<br>ee|
|**81**|Number of motor poles|9999|2/4/6/8/10<br>ee<br>a|Set the number of motor poles.<br>ee|
||||9999<br>ee|V/F Control<br>ee|
|**800**|Control method selection|20|20<br>es|Advanced magnetic flux vector control<br>es|
||||30<br>ee|General-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br>ee|
Refer to appendix A for the rated inverter output current.
Set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
## **NOTES**
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven rotation may occur.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (Note that the capacity should be 0.1 kW or more.)
- Motor to be used is any of Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2 kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.4 kW to 15 kW). When using a motor other than the above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30 m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30 m.)
5 - 12
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **Selection method of advanced magnetic flux vector control**
**==> picture [386 x 546] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Perform secure wiring.<br>(Refer to section 3.2.)<br>Set the motor. (Pr. 71) (Refer to page 5-12.)<br>Motor Pr. 71 [�] Remarks<br>SF-JR 0 Initial value<br>Standard motor,<br>high efficiency SF-HR 40 —<br>motor<br>Others 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary. [�]<br>Mitsubishi<br>SF-JRCA 4P 1 —<br>Constant-torque SF-HRCA 4P 50 —<br>motor<br>Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary. [�]<br>Other Standard motor — 3<br>manufac-turer's Constant-torque motor — 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary. [�]<br>� For other settings of Pr. 71, refer to section 6.8.2.<br>� Refer to section 5.1.8 for offline auto tuning.<br>Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles.<br>(Pr. 80, Pr. 81) (Refer to page 5-12.)<br>Set motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and the number of motor<br>poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 "Number of motor poles".<br>(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).<br>Select the control method. (Pr. 800)<br>(Refer to page 5-12.)<br>Set "20" (initial value) in Pr. 800 to make advanced magnetic flux vector<br>control valid.<br>Set the operation command. (Refer to section 5.2.)<br>Select the start command and speed command.<br>1) Start command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the RUN key of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse<br>rotation command (terminal STF or STR)<br>2) Speed command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the digital dial of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External analog command (terminal 2 or 4):<br>Give a speed command using the analog signal input to<br>terminal 2 (or terminal 4).<br>–<br>Multi-speed command:<br>The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give<br>speed command.<br>Test run<br>� Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to section 5.1.8.)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-9:** Selection method of advanced magnetic flux vector control_
## **NOTES**
Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. (It is not suitable for machines such as grinding machine and wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.)
Use Pr. 89 to adjust the motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation. (Refer to page 6-38.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 13
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **Selection method of general-purpose magnetic flux vector control**
**==> picture [376 x 584] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Perform secure wiring.<br>(Refer to section 3.2.)<br>¥<br>Set the motor. (Pr. 71) (Refer to page 5-12.)<br>EE Motor Pr. 71 Remarks<br>SF-JR 0 Initial value<br>Standard motor,<br>high efficiency ee SF-HR 40 —<br>motor<br>Mitsubishi eea Others 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary.<br>a SF-JRCA 4P 1 —<br>Constant-torque SF-HRCA 4P 50 —<br>motor<br>eea Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary.<br>Other Standard motor — 3<br>manufac-turer's Constant-torque motor — 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary.<br>e e<br>ee For other settings of Pr. 71, refer to section 6.8.2. es<br>@ Refer to section 5.1.8 for offline auto tuning.<br>Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles.<br>(Pr. 80, Pr. 81) (Refer to page 5-12.)<br>Set motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and the number of motor<br>poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 "Number of motor poles". (V/F control is<br>performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).<br>Select the control method. (Pr. 800)<br>(Refer to page 5-12.)<br>Set "30" in Pr. 800 to make general-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br>valid.<br>Set the operation command. (Refer to section 5.2.)<br>Select the start command and speed command.<br>1) Start command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the RUN key of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse<br>rotation command (terminal STF or STR)<br>2) Speed command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the digital dial of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External analog command (terminal 2 or 4):<br>Give a speed command using the analog signal input to<br>terminal 2 (or terminal 4).<br>–<br>Multi-speed command:<br>The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give<br>speed command.<br>Test run<br>Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to section 5.1.8.)<br>Set slip compensation. (Pr. 245, Pr. 246, Pr. 247, refer to section 6.3.4).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-10:** Selection method of general-purpose magnetic flux vector control_
5 - 14
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **5.1.8 To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning) (Pr. 9, Pr. 71, Pr. 83, Pr. 84, Pr. 96)**
The motor performance can be maximized with offline auto tuning.
## **What is offline auto tuning?**
When performing advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, the motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by automatically measuring the motor constants (offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring length is long.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**9**|Electronic thermal<br>O/L relay|Rated inverter<br>current�|0–500 A|Set the rated motor current.|
|**71**|Applied motor|0|0/1/3–6/ 13–16/ 23/24/40/43/<br>44/50/53/54|By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor, thermal<br>characteristic and motor constants of each motor are set.|
|**83**|Motor rated voltage|200 V/400 V�|0–1000 V|Set the rated motor voltage (V).|
|**84**|Rated motor frequency|50 Hz|10–120 Hz|Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).|
|**96**|Auto tuning setting/status|0|0|Offline auto tuning is not performed|
||||1|Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running<br>(all motor constants)|
||||11|For general-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running (motor constant<br>(R1) only)|
||||21|Offline auto tuning for V/F control<br>(automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (with frequency<br>search)) (refer to section 6.12.1)|
- Refer to appendix A for the rated inverter output current.
- The initial value differs according to the voltage class: 200 V/400 V
## **NOTES**
This function is made valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 and advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control is selected.)
You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-PU07).
Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC, etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2kW or more), and Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.2 kW to 15 kW) are used or the wiring length is long, using the offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics.
Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
Reading/writing/copy of motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled.
The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 15
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **Before performing offline auto tuning**
- Make sure advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80, Pr. 81) is selected (refer to section 5.1.7). (Tuning can be performed even under V/F control selected by turning on X18.)
- A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (Note that the capacity should be 0.1 kW or more.)
- The maximum frequency is 120 Hz.
- A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned.
- As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
## **Setting**
Select advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control. (Refer to section 5.1.7.)
- Set "1" or "11" in Pr. 96 "Auto tuning setting/status".
- When the setting is "1":
Tune all motor constants without running the motor.
When performing advanced magnetic flux vector control, set "1" to perform tuning. Depending on the motor type and the inverter capacity it takes approximately 25 to 75 s until tuning is completed.
(Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
- When the setting is "11":
- Tune motor constants (R1) only without running the motor.
- When performing general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, set "11" to perform tuning. It takes approximately 9 s until tuning is completed.
Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay". (Refer to page 5-2.)
Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200 V) in Pr. 83 "Rated motor voltage" and rated motor frequency (initial value is 60 Hz) in Pr. 84 "Rated motor frequency".
© Set Pr. 71 "Applied motor" according to the motor used. **Motor Parameter 71** ~~es~~ SF-JR 3 ~~i~~ Standard motor, ~~i~~ SF-JR 4P-1.5 kW or less 23 high efficiency motor SF-HR 43 ~~a~~ Mitsubishi Others 3 i i SF-JRCA 4P 13 Constant-torque motor a SF-HRCA 53 ee Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 Other Standard motor 3 manufacturer's Constant-torque motor 13 —_——ee
## _**Tab. 5-3:**_
## _Motor selection_
For other settings of Pr. 71, refer to the section 6.12.2.
5 - 16
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **Execution of tuning**
## **CAUTION:**
_**Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit**_ **E** _**(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) if the inverter is in the status for tuning (refer to Tab. 5-4). When the start command is turned on under V/F control, the motor starts.**_
When performing tuning or PU operation, press the RUN key of the operation panel or the FWD or REV key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-DU07).
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
## **NOTES**
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press the STOP key of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)
During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value) – Input terminal <valid signal> MRS, RES, STF, STR
– Output terminal RUN, AM, A, B, C
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output from AM when speed and output frequency are selected.
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto tuning. Auto tuning is not executed properly.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 17
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
## **Monitor display during auto tuning**
Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below. The value displayed corresponds to the value of parameter 96.
**==> picture [378 x 216] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Parameter Unit<br>Operation Panel Indication<br>(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) Display<br>Parameter 96 1 11 1 11<br>Setting<br>READ:List READ:List mt<br>1 11 a4<br>STOP PU STOP PU<br>Tuning in<br>progress TUNE TUNE > ue 13<br>STF FWD 2PU STF FWD12 PU c E x ic<br>Normal end Flickering Flickering<br>TUNE 3 TUNE 13<br>COMPLETION COMPETION a] pi pon 7 "RUN<br>STF STOP PU STF STOP PU om] 009 E XT t a] ae)<br>Error end (when<br>inverter protec-<br>tive function operation is acti- STFERRORTUNESTOP9 PU a!o oc ay<br>vated)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 5-4:** Monitor display_
## **NOTE**
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Reference: Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)
|**Offline Auto Tuning Setting**<br>**Time**||
|---|---|
|Tune all motor constants (Pr. 96 = 1)<br>Approximately 25 to 75 s<br>(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and<br>motor type.)|Approximately 25 to 75 s<br>(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and<br>motor type.)|
|Tune motor constants (R1) only (Pr. 96 = 11)<br>Approximately 9 s|Approximately 9 s|
_**Tab. 5-5:** Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)_
## **Return to the normal operation mode**
When offline auto tuning ends, press the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
## **NOTE**
Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (3 or 13). If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
5 - 18
Simple mode parameter list
Basic settings
If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
|**Error Display**|**Error Cause**|**Remedy**|
|---|---|---|
|8|Forced end|Set "1" or "11" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.|
|9|Inverter protective function operation|Make setting again.|
|91|Current limit (stall prevention) function was acti-<br>vated.|Set "1" in Pr. 156.|
|92|Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated<br>value.|Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.|
|93|– Calculation error<br>– A motor is not connected.|Check the motor wiring and make setting again.|
## _**Tab. 5-6:** Value of parameter 96_
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing the STOP-key or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
When using the motor corresponding to the following specifications and conditions, reset Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay as below after tuning is completed.
- When the rated power specifications of the motor is 200/220 V(400/440 V) 60 Hz, set 1.1 times rated motor current value in Pr. 9.
- When performing motor protection from overheat using a PTC thermistor or motor with temperature detector such as Klixon, set "0" (motor overheat protection by the inverter is invalid) in Pr. 9.
## **NOTES**
- The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**As the motor may run slightly during offline auto tuning, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 19
PU operation mode
Basic settings
## **5.2 PU operation mode**
When operating the inverter via the parameter unit, the motor is started or stopped by the RUN key or the STOP/RESET key on the unit. The rated frequency value can thereby originate from various sources:
- A fixed set value
Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the PU. (Refer to section 5.2.1.)
- Operation using the digital dial as the volume.
The frequency is set by the digital dial, used here as a potentiometer. (Refer to section 5.2.2.)
- Selection of stored set values by external signals
Change of frequency with ON/OFF switches connected to terminals. (Refer to section 5.2.3.)
- Setpoint setting made by external analog signals
Frequency setting with a voltage output device (refer to section 5.2.4) or with a current output device (refer to section 5.2.5).
**==> picture [263 x 45] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Fig. 5-11:<br>PU operation mode<br>Power 6 R/L1 Us<br>© S/L2 Vo Motor<br>supply<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_I001897E_
5 - 20
PU operation mode
Basic settings
## **5.2.1 Set the set frequency to operate**
**Example** � Performing operation at 30 Hz
**==> picture [375 x 358] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>PU indication is lit.<br>� Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode.<br>� Turn the digital dial to show the<br>The frequency flickers for about 5 s.frequency you want to set. Flickers for about 5s.<br>� While the value is flickering press the<br>SET key to set the frequency.<br>(If you do not press the SET key, the<br>value flickers for about 5 s and the<br>display returns to 0.00 (display) Hz. Flicker ... Frequency setting complete!<br>At this time, return to step � and set<br>the frequency again.)<br>3s later<br>� After the value flickered for about 3 s,<br>the display returns to 0.00 (monitor<br>display). Press the RUN key<br>to start operation.<br>� To change the set frequency, perform<br>the operation in above steps � and �.<br>(Starts from the previously set<br>frequency.)<br>� Press the STOP/RESET key to stop.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001767E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-12:** Frequency setting with the digital dial_
�
## **Possible faults:**
- Operation cannot be performed at the set frequency.
- Did you press the SET key within 5 s after turning the digital dial?
- The frequency does not change by turning the digital dial.
- Check to see if the operation mode selected is the external operation mode. (Press the PU/EXT key to change to the PU operation mode.)
- Operation does not change to the PU operation mode.
- Check that "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection".
- Check that the start command is not on.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 21
PU operation mode
Basic settings
Change the acceleration time using Pr. 7 (refer to section 5.1.5) and the deceleration time using Pr. 8 (refer to section 5.1.5).
The maximum output frequency is set in Pr. 1. (Refer to section 5.1.4.)
## **NOTES**
Press the digital dial to show the set frequency.
The digital dial can also be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. (Refer to section 5.2.2).
Use Pr. 295 "Magnitude of frequency change setting" to change the frequency setting increments of the digital dial.
5 - 22
PU operation mode
Basic settings
## **5.2.2 Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation**
- Set "1" (setting dial potentiometer mode) in Pr. 161 "Frequency setting/key lock operation selection".
**Example** � Change the frequency from 0 Hz to 50 Hz during operation.
**==> picture [387 x 209] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>PU indication is lit.<br>� Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU<br>operation mode.<br>� Change the PR. 161 setting to "1".<br>(Refer to page 4-16.)<br>� Press the RUN key to start the inverter.<br>� Turn the digital dial until "50.00" appears.<br>The flickering frequency is the set frequency.<br>You don’t need to press the SET key.<br>The frequency flickers for about 5s<br>I001768E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 5-13:** Use the digital dial like a potentiometer to perform operation_
**NOTES** If flickering "50.00" turns to "0.0", the Pr. 161 "Frequency setting/key lock operation selection" setting may not be "1".
Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning the digital dial.
Use Pr. 295 "Magnitude of frequency change setting" to change the frequency setting increments of the digital dial.
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 23
PU operation mode
Basic settings
## **5.2.3 Use switches to give the frequency command (multi-speed setting)**
In frequency inverters of the FR-E700 SC series up to 15 frequency setpoints (and thus rpms and speeds) can be selected via the RH, RM, RL and REX terminals. Manually activated switches or relay outputs of a programmable logic controller (PLC), for example, can be used to select a frequency.
- Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2).
- Use the RUN key to give a start command.
- The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 50 Hz, 30 Hz, and 10 Hz. (Refer to section 5.3.2 to change frequencies using Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6.)
- Three setpoints can be selected by separately switching on the signals to the RH, RM and RL terminals. The selection of the fourth to the seventh fixed frequency is possible through the combination of signals of these inputs (see diagram below). The setpoints are determined by parameters 24 to 27. The REX terminal is used to select the 8th to the 15th rpm/speed (section 6.6.1).
**==> picture [309 x 162] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>@ R/L1 Uo<br>Power supply o S/L2 Ve? Motor<br>° T/L3 wf<br>High speed O RH<br>Middle speed o RM<br>Low speed O RL<br>> PC<br>a O O.<br>5.95<br>I001769E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-14:** Use switches to give the frequency command_
**==> picture [381 x 179] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Speed 1 (high speed)<br>Speed 5<br>Speed 6<br>Speed 2<br>(middle speed)<br>Speed 4<br>Speed 3<br>(low speed)<br>Speed 7<br>t<br>ON ee ON ON ON<br>ON i ON { ON | ON<br>ON ON ON<br>I000004aC<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-15:** Multi-speed selection by external terminals_
5 - 24
PU operation mode
Basic settings
**==> picture [387 x 316] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>� Change the Pr. 79 setting to "4".<br>(Refer to section 4.3.3 for change of the setting.)<br>"PU" display and "EXT" display are lit.<br>Flickering<br>� Turn on the start switch RUN.<br>When the frequency command is not given,<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>� Turn on the low speed signal (RL). The output<br>frequency increases to 10 Hz according to Pr. 7<br>"Acceleration time".<br>"RUN" display is lit during forward rotation<br>operation and flickers slowly during reverse<br>rotation operation.<br>Flickering<br>� Turn off the low speed switch (RL). The output<br>frequency decreases to 0 Hz according to Pr. 8<br>"Deceleration time".<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>� Press the STOP/RESET key.<br>"RUN" turns off.<br>I001770E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-16:** Operate the inverter by using multi-speed setting_
## **Possible faults:**
- 50 Hz for the RH, 30 Hz for the RL and 10 Hz for the RL are not output when they are turned on.
- Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
- Check for the setting of Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency" once again. (Refer to section 5.1.4.)
- Check that Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection" = "0", Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection" = "1", Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection" = "2" and Pr. 59 "Remote function selection" = "0" (all are initial values).
- RUN lamp is not lit.
- Check that wiring is correct.
- Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "4".) (Refer to section 5.1.6.)
## **NOTE**
Refer to section 5.3.2 to change the running frequency at each terminal in Pr. 4 "Multi-speed setting (highspeed)", Pr. 5 "Multi-speed setting (middle speed)", and Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 25
PU operation mode
Basic settings
## **5.2.4 Perform frequency setting by analog voltage input**
In this type of setpoint selection a potentiometer is connected to the frequency inverter. The potentiometer is supplied with a voltage of 5 V through terminal 10 of the frequency inverter.
**==> picture [313 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>» R/L1 Us<br>Power supply © S/L2 Vo Motor<br>® T/L3 W °¢<br>> 10<br>Frequency setting<br>potentiometer<br>(1 k /2 W) 0 5<br>a OO<br>renee<br>I001772E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-17:** Frequency setting by analog voltage input_
- Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2).
- Use the RUN key to give a start command.
5 - 26
PU operation mode
Basic settings
**==> picture [387 x 400] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>� Change the Pr. 79 setting to "4".<br>(Refer to section 4.3.3 for change of the setting.)<br>"PU" display and "EXT" display are lit.<br>Flickering<br>� Turn on the start switch RUN.<br>When the frequency command is not given,<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>� Acceleration � constant speed<br>Turn the volume (frequency setting potentiometer)<br>clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the<br>indication increases according to Pr. 7<br>"Acceleration time" until 50 Hz is displayed.<br>� Deceleration Flickering<br>Turn the potentiometer counter clockwise to full<br>slowly. The frequency value on the indication<br>decreases according to Pr. 8 "Deceleration time"<br>and displays "0.00" (0.00 Hz) when the motor is<br>stopped.<br>"RUN" flickers fast. Stop<br>� Press the STOP/RESET key.<br>"RUN" turns off.<br>I001772E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-18:** Operate the inverter by using the analog voltage input_
## **NOTES**
Change the frequency (50 Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5 V) by adjusting the frequency in Pr. 125 "Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency". (Refer to section 5.3.4.).
Change the frequency (0 Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0 V) by adjusting the frequency in calibration parameter C2 "Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency". (Refer to section 6.16.3.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 27
PU operation mode
Basic settings
## **5.2.5 Perform frequency setting by analog current input**
An external current source is connection to the frequency inverter for setpoint default setting.
**==> picture [285 x 168] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>o R/L1 U 6<br>Power supply ® S/L2 V 9 Motor<br>° T/L3 Ww®<br>AU signal |dG° AU<br>Current signal<br>source<br>(0/4–20 mA DC)<br>or O O.<br>eee<br>I001773E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 5-19:** Frequency setting by analog current input_
- Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" must be set to "4" (external/PU combined operation mode 2).
- Turn the AU signal on.
- Use the RUN key to give a start command.
## **NOTE**
For the analog current input (0/4 to 20 mA) to become effective for setpoint default setting, the AU signal on the AU terminal must be activated. This is done, for example, by means of a bridge as shown in Fig. 5-19.
5 - 28
PU operation mode
Basic settings
**==> picture [400 x 404] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>� Change the Pr. 79 setting to "4".<br>(Refer to section 4.3.3 for change of the setting.)<br>"PU" display and "EXT" display are lit.<br>� Check that the terminal 4 input selection signal (AU) Flickering<br>is on.<br>Turn on the start switch RUN.<br>When the frequency command is not given,<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>� Acceleration � constant speed<br>Current signal<br>Perform 20 mA input. The frequency value on theindication increases according to Pr. 7 source<br>(0/4–20 mA DC)<br>"Acceleration time" until 50 Hz is displayed.<br>� Deceleration Flickering<br>Perform 4mA input. The frequency value on the<br>indication decreases according to Pr. 8 Current signal<br>"Deceleration time" and displays "0.00" (0.00 Hz) source<br>when the motor is stopped. (0/4–20 mA DC)<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>Stop<br>� Press the STOP/RESET key<br>"RUN" turns off.<br>I001774E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-20:** Operate the inverter by using the analog current input_
## **NOTES**
One of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to section 6.10.1.)
Change the frequency (50 Hz) at the maximum value of potentiometer (at 20 mA) by adjusting the frequency in Pr. 126 "Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency". (Refer to section 5.3.6).
Change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4 mA) by adjusting the frequency in calibration parameter C5 "Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency". (Refer to section 6.16.3.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 29
External operation
Basic settings
## **5.3 External operation**
When operating the inverter via external signals, the motor is started or stopped by external signals connected to terminals STF and STR of the inverter. Just as when operating using the parameter unit, the set frequency value may originate from various sources:
- A fixed set value
Operation at the frequency set in the frequency setting mode of the PU. (Refer to section 5.3.1.)
- Selection of stored set values by external signals Give a frequency command by switch (multi-speed setting). (Refer to section 5.3.2).
- Setpoint setting made by external analog signals Frequency setting with a voltage output device (refer to section 5.3.3) or with a current output device (refer to section 5.3.4)
## **5.3.1**
## **Use the set frequency set by PU (Pr. 79 = 3)**
- Set "3" in Pr. 79 (External/PU combined operation mode 1).
- Switch terminal STF (STR)-PC on to give a start command.
- Refer to section 5.2.1 for the set frequency by the operation panel.
**==> picture [321 x 172] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>T RIM Ud<br>Power supply $ S/L2 ve Motor<br>® TIL3 Ww?<br>Forward rotation start > STF<br>Reverse rotation start > STR<br>> PC<br>a O O.<br>RIES<br>Set frequency<br>I001775E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-21:** External operation_
5 - 30
External operation
Basic settings
**==> picture [398 x 373] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>� Change the Pr. 79 setting to "3".<br>(Refer to section 4.3.3 for change of the setting.)<br>"PU" display and "EXT" display are lit.<br>Forward<br>� Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. rotation<br>The motor runs at the frequency set in the set<br>frequency mode of the operation panel. Reverserotation<br>ON<br>� Turn the digital dial to change running frequency.<br>Display the frequency you want to set. Flickers for about 5s<br>The frequency flickers for about 5 s.<br>� While the value is flickering, press the SET key<br>to set the frequency<br>(If you do not press the SET key, the value flickers<br>for about 5 s and the display then returns<br>to 0.00 (display) Hz. At this time, return to<br>"Step � " and set the frequency again)<br>Flicker ... Frequency setting complete!<br>Forward<br>� Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off. rotation<br>The motor decelerates according to Pr. 8 Stop<br>"Deceleration time" to stop. Reverserotation<br>OFF<br>I001776E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-22:** Operate the inverter by using external signals_
- **NOTES** Pr. 178 "STF terminal function selection" must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 "STR terminal function selection" must be set to "61"). (All are initial values.)
When Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" is set to "3", multi-speed operation is also made valid. (Refer to section 5.3.2.)
## **Possible faults:**
- Pressing the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel changed the
display .
- Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off.
- The display can be reset by STOP/RESET.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 31
External operation
Basic settings
## **5.3.2 Use switches to give a start command and a frequency command (multi-speed setting) (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)**
Up to 15 set frequency values can be selected via terminals RH, RM, RL and REX of the frequency inverter. Manually operated switches or relay outputs of a programmable logic controller (PLC), for instance, can be used.
- Start command by terminal STF (STR)-PC.
- Frequency command by terminal RH, RM, RL and STR-PC.
- "EXT" must be lit. When "PU" is lit, switch it to "EXT" with the PU/EXT key.
- The initial values of the terminals RH, RM, RL are 50 Hz, 30 Hz, and 10 Hz. Use Pr. 4, Pr. 5 and Pr. 6 to change.
- Three set values can be selected by separately switching on the signals at terminals RH, RM and RL. The fourth to seventh fixed frequencies are selected by combining the signals from these inputs (see figure below). The set values are determined by parameters 24 to 27. The REX terminal is used to select the 8th to 15th speed (refer to section. (Refer to section 6.6.1.)
**==> picture [333 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>© R/L1 U s<br>Power supply © S/L2 Ve Motor<br>? T/L3 W &<br>Forward rotation start 0 STF<br>Reverse rotation start o O STR<br>High speed o RH<br>Middle speed O RM<br>Low speed O RL<br>O PC<br>I0001086E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-23:** Frequency and start command by switches_
**==> picture [381 x 178] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Speed 1 (high speed)<br>Speed 5<br>Speed 6<br>Speed 2<br>(middle speed)<br>Speed 4<br>Speed 3<br>(low speed)<br>Speed 7<br>t<br>ON i ON ON ON<br>ON ' ON { ON | ON<br>ON ON ON<br>I000004aC<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-24:** Multi-speed selection by external terminals_
5 - 32
External operation
Basic settings
**Example** � Set "40 Hz" in Pr. 4 "Multi-speed setting (high speed)" and turn on terminals RH and STF (STR)-PC to operate.
**==> picture [398 x 392] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Power on � operation mode check<br>For the initial setting, the inverter operates in the ON<br>external operation mode "EXT" when powering<br>on. Check that the operation command<br>indication is "EXT". If not displayed, press the<br>PU/EXT key to change to the external "EXT"<br>operation mode.<br>If the operation mode still does not change, set<br>Pr. 79 to change to the external operation mode.<br>(Refer to section 5.1.6).<br>� Change the Pr. 4 setting to "40.00" (40.00 Hz).<br>(Refer to section 4.3.8 for change of the setting.)<br>High speed<br>Middle speed<br>� Turn on the high speed switch (RH). Low speed<br>ON<br>� Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. Forward rotation<br>40Hz appears (30 Hz appears when RM is on Reverse rotation<br>and 10 Hz appears when RL is on.)<br>"RUN" display is lit during forward rotation<br>operation and flickers during reverse rotation<br>operation. ON<br>� Stop Forward rotation<br>Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off. Reverse rotation<br>The motor stops according to Pr. 8<br>"Deceleration time". Stop<br>OFF<br>I001778E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-25:** Operate the inverter by using external signals_
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 33
External operation
Basic settings
## **Possible faults:**
- The EXT lamp is not lit even when the PU/EXT key is pressed.
- Switchover of the operation mode with is valid when Pr. 79 = 0 (initial value).
- 50 Hz, 30 Hz and 10 Hz are not output from RH, RM and RL respectively when they are turned on.
- Check for the setting of Pr. 4, Pr. 5, and Pr. 6 once again.
- Check for the setting of Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency" once again. (Refer to section 5.1.4.)
- Check for the Pr. 79 setting once again. (Pr. 79 must be set to "0" or "2".) (Refer to section 5.1.6.)
- Check that Pr. 180 "RL terminal function selection" = "0", Pr. 181 "RM terminal function selection" = "1", Pr. 182 "RH terminal function selection" = "2" and Pr. 59 "Remote function selection" = "0". (All are initial values.)
- The RUN lamp is not lit.
-
- Check that wiring is correct.
- Check that "60" is set in Pr. 178 "STF terminal function selection" (or "61" is set in Pr. 179 "STR terminal function selection"). (All are initial values.)
## **NOTE**
External operation is fixed by setting "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" when you do not want to take time pressing the PU/EXT key or when you want to use the current start command and frequency command.
5 - 34
External operation
Basic settings
## **5.3.3 Perform frequency setting by analog voltage input**
The frequency setting potentiometer is supplied with 5 V of power from the inverter (terminal 10).
**==> picture [346 x 164] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Power supply Motor<br>Forward rotation start<br>Reverse rotation start<br>Frequency setting<br>potentiometer<br>(1 k � /2 W)<br>I001090E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-26:** Frequency setting by analog voltage input_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 35
External operation
Basic settings
**==> picture [387 x 485] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Power on > operation mode check —<br>For the initial setting, the inverter operates in theexternal operation mode "EXT" when powering ON + S °<br>on. Check that the operation command indication<br>Sy<br>is "EXT". If not displayed, press the PU/EXT key to<br>change to the external "EXT" operation mode.<br>If the operation mode still does not change, set<br>Pr. 79 to "0" to change to the external operation<br>mode. (Refer to section 5.1.6).<br>Flickering<br>Forward rotation<br>Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. Reverse rotation<br>When the frequency command is not given,<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>ON<br>x ee Cheer ° fee<br>Turn the potentiometer (frequency settingAcceleration constant speed 8 > — — .—, RUN MON<br>potentiometer) clockwise slowly to full.<br>The frequency value on the indication increases<br>according to Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" until 50 Hz<br>is displayed.<br>Deceleration<br>Turn the potentiometer (frequency setting Flickering<br>potentiometer) counterclockwise slowly to full.<br>The frequency value on the indication decreases es mh Im) ue sRUN E MON<br>according to Pr. 8 "Deceleration time" and<br>displays "0.00" (0.00 Hz) to stop the motor.<br>"RUN" flickers fast.<br>Stop<br>Stop Forward rotation<br>Turn the start switch (STF or STR) off. Reverse rotation<br>"RUN" turns off.<br>OFF Ay<br>I001779E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-27:** Operate the inverter by using the analog voltage input_
## **NOTES**
When you want to operate in the external operation mode always at powering on or when you want to save the trouble of input, set "2" (external operation mode) in Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" to choose external operation mode always.
Pr. 178 "STF terminal function selection" must be set to "60" (or Pr. 179 "STR terminal function selection" must be set to "61"). (All are initial values.)
Change the frequency (0 Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 0 V) by adjusting the frequency in calibration parameter C2 "Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency". (Refer to section 6.16.3.)
5 - 36
External operation
Basic settings
## **Possible faults:**
- The motor will not rotate.
- Check that the EXT lamp is lit. The external operation mode is valid when Pr. 79 = 0 (initial value). Use the PU/EXT key to change into the external operation mode.
- Check that wiring is correct.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 37
External operation
Basic settings
## **5.3.4 Change the frequency (40 Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 5 V)**
> **Example** V The frequency of the maximum analog voltage of the potentiometer (at 5 V) has to be changed from the initial setting of 50 Hz to 40 Hz. Set 40 Hz in Pr. 125.
**==> picture [365 x 219] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Turn the digital dial until P.125 (Pr. 125) appears. @® GEE<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "50.00" (50.00 Hz) appears.<br>© -ip<br>Turn the digital dial to change the set value to<br>"40.00" (40.00 Hz). ® Tam<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>© -a<br>n__T<br>Flicker ... 40Hz output at 5V<br>input complete!<br>Press the MODE key twice to choose monitor/<br>frequency monitor.<br>Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on and turn the<br>volume (frequency setting potentiometer)<br>clockwise to full slowly. (Refer to Fig. 5-27,<br>step @ to © ).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001780E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-28:** Change the frequency of the maximum analog value_
## **NOTES**
Set the frequency at 0 V using calibration parameter C2.
**==> picture [406 x 160] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Initial value<br>50 Hz<br>Gain<br>Bias Pr. 125<br>C2 (Pr. 902)<br>_ :<br>0 Frequency setting signal 100%<br>0 5 V<br>0 10 V<br>C3 (Pr. 902) C4 (Pr. 903)<br>As other adjustment methods of frequency setting voltage gain, there are methods to adjust with<br>a voltage applied to across terminals 2-5 and adjust at any point without a voltage applied. (Refer<br>to section 6.16.3 for the setting method of calibration parameter C4.)<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
5 - 38
External operation
Basic settings
## **5.3.5 Perform frequency setting by analog current input**
An external current source is connection to the frequency inverter for setpoint default setting.
- Switch terminal STF (STR)-PC on to give a start command.
- Turn the AU signal on.
- Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" must be set to "2" (external operation mode).
**==> picture [357 x 149] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Power supply Motor<br>Forward rotation start<br>Reverse rotation start<br>AU signal<br>Current signal<br>source<br>(0/4–20 mA DC)<br>I001094E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-29:** Frequency setting by analog current input_
## **NOTE**
For the analog current input (0/4 to 20 mA) to become effective for setpoint default setting, the AU signal on the AU terminal must be activated. This is done, for example, by means of a bridge as shown in Fig. 5-29.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 39
External operation
Basic settings
**==> picture [388 x 389] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Power on > operation mode check —<br>For the initial setting, the inverter operates in the<br>external operation mode "EXT" when powering 4 SS °<br>on. Check that the operation command indication<br>ON Sy<br>is "EXT". If not displayed, press the PU/EXT key<br>to change to the external "EXT" operation mode.<br>If the operation mode still does not change, set<br>Pr. 79 to change to the external operation<br>mode. (Refer to section 5.1.6).<br>Start<br>Turn the start switch (STF or STR) on. Forward rotation Flickering<br>Reverse rotation<br>When the frequency command is not given, "RUN" flickers fast. mem) ue RUNS<br>fy M ON<br>ON<br>Acceleration = constant speed<br>Perform 20 mA input. The frequency value on the Current signal<br>indication increases according to Pr. 7 source<br>"Acceleration time" until 50.00 Hz is displayed. (0/4–20 mA DC)<br>Td — = 5“) 1 | a, RUN MON<br>Deceleration Flickering<br>Perform 4mA input. The frequency value on the Current signal a Ss. oO<br>indication decreases according to Pr. 8 source<br>"Deceleration time" and displays "0.00" (0.00 Hz) (0/4–20 mA DC)<br>when the motor is stopped. [i RUN, MON<br>"RUN" flickers fast. Stop<br>Stop Forward rotation<br>Turn the start switch STF or STR off. Reverse rotation<br>OFF<br>I001782E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-30:** Operate the inverter by using the analog current input_
## **NOTE**
One of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "AU terminal function selection" must be set to "4" (AU signal) (initial value). (Refer to section 6.10.1.)
## **Possible faults:**
- The motor will not rotate.
- Check that the EXT lamp is lit. The external operation mode is valid when Pr. 79 = 0 (initial value) or 2. Use the PU/EXT key to change into the external operation mode.
- The AU signal must be turned on.
- Check that wiring is correct.
## **NOTE**
Change the frequency (0 Hz) of the minimum value of potentiometer (at 4 mA) by adjusting the frequency in calibration parameter C5 "Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency". (Refer to section 6.16.3.)
5 - 40
External operation
Basic settings
## **5.3.6 Change the frequency (40 Hz) of the maximum value of potentiometer (at 20 mA)**
**Example** � The frequency of the maximum analog current of the potentiometer (at 20 mA) has to be changed from the initial setting of 50 Hz to 40 Hz. Set 40 Hz in Pr. 126.
**==> picture [398 x 254] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Turn the digital dial until P.126 (Pr. 126) appears.<br>� Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "50.00" (50.00 Hz) appears.<br>� Turn the digital dial to change the set value to<br>"40.00" (40.00 Hz).<br>� Press the SET key to set.<br>Flicker ... 40 Hz output at 20 mA<br>input complete!.<br>� Press the MODE key twice to choose monitor/<br>frequency monitor.<br>� Turn the start switch STF or STR on to allow 20 mA<br>current to flow.<br>(Refer to Fig. 5-30, step � to �).<br>I001783E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 5-31:** Change the frequency of the maximum analog value_
�
**NOTES** Set the frequency at 4 mA using calibration parameter C5.
**==> picture [406 x 162] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Initial value<br>50 Hz<br>Gain Pr. 126<br>Bias C5 (Pr. 904)<br>0 20 Frequency 100%<br>0 4 setting signal 20 mA<br>C6 (Pr. 904) C7 (Pr. 905)<br>As other adjustment methods of frequency setting current gain, there are methods to adjust with<br>a current flowing in the terminals 4-5 and adjust at any point without a current flowing. (Refer to<br>section 6.16.3 for the setting method of calibration parameter C7.)<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When performing a high speed operation at 120 Hz or more, setting of Pr. 18 "High speed maximum frequency" is necessary. (Refer to section 6.4.1.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
5 - 41
External operation
Basic settings
5 - 42
Parameter
Parameter overview
## **6 Parameter**
## **6.1 Parameter overview**
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the operation panel.
indicates simple mode parameters (initially set to extended mode).
The abbreviations in the explanations below are as follows:
=x **V/F** V/F control =x **AD MFVC** Advanced magnetic flux vector control = **GP MFVC** General-purpose magnetic-flux vector control
Parameters without any indication are valid for all control. The half-tone screened parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Manual torque boost<br>**V/F**<br>POP|0<br>46<br>ee<br>POP||Torque boost|0.1%|6/4/3/2 *|0–30%|Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %<br>_* Initial values differ according to the inverter_<br>_capacity:_<br>_FR-E720S-050SC or less,_<br>_FR-E740-026SC or less/_<br>_FR-E720S-080SC and 110SC,_<br>_FR-E740-040SC to 095SC/_<br>_FR-E740-120SC and 170SC/_<br>_FR-E740-230SC and 300SC_|✔|✔|✔|6-35|
|||46<br>ee<br>POP|Second torque boost<br>ee<br>POP|0.1%<br>ee|9999<br>ee|0–30%<br>ee|Set the torque boost when the RT signal is<br>on.<br>ee~~e~~|✔<br>~~e~~|✔<br>~~e~~|✔<br>~~e~~||
|||||||9999<br>ee|Without second torque boost<br>ee~~e~~|||||
|Minimum/maximum frequency<br>POP|1<br>POP||Maximum frequency<br>POP|0.01 Hz|120Hz|0–120 Hz|Set the upper limit of the output frequency|✔|✔|✔|6-52|
||2<br>18<br>POP||Minimum frequency<br>POP|0.01 Hz|0Hz|0–120 Hz|Set the lower limit of the output frequency|✔|✔|✔||
|||18|High speed maximum<br>frequency|0.01 Hz|120Hz|120–400 Hz|Set when performing operation at 120 Hz or<br>more|✔|✔|✔||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 1
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Base frequency, voltage<br>**V/F**|3<br>19<br>47<br>a)a||Base frequency<br>a|0.01 Hz|50Hz|0–400 Hz<br>ee|Set the frequency when the motor rated<br>torque is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)<br>ee|✔|✔|✔|6-56|
|||19|Base frequency voltage<br>a|0.1 V|8888|0–1000 V<br>ee<br>ee|Maximum inverter output voltage<br>ee<br>ee|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||8888<br>ee<br>ee|95% of power supply voltage<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||9999<br>ee|Same as power supply voltage<br>ee|||||
|||47<br>a)a|Second V/F (base frequency)<br>a|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz|Set the base frequency when the RT signal is<br>on.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Second V/F is invalid.|||||
|Multi-speed setting operation|4<br>a)a<br>a)||Multi-speed setting<br>(high speed)<br>a<br>|0.01 Hz<br>|50Hz<br>|0–400 Hz|Set frequency when the RH signal is on.|✔|✔|✔|6-60|
||5<br>a)a<br>a)||Multi-speed setting<br>(middle speed)<br>a<br>|0.01 Hz<br>|30Hz<br>|0–400 Hz|Set frequency when the RM signal is on.|✔|✔|✔||
||6<br>24<br>–<br>27<br>232<br>–<br>239<br>a)~~e~~||Multi-speed setting<br>(low speed)<br>~~e~~A|0.01 Hz<br>A|10Hz<br>A|0–400 Hz|Set frequency when the RL signal is on.|✔|✔|✔||
|||24<br>–<br>27<br>~~e~~|Multi-speed setting<br>4 speed to 7 speed<br>~~e~~A|0.01 Hz<br>A|9999<br>A|0–400 Hz/<br>9999|Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be<br>set according to the combination of the RH,<br>RM, RL and REX signals.<br>9999: not selected|✔|✔|✔||
|||232<br>–<br>239<br>~~e~~|Multi-speed setting<br>8 speed to 15 speed<br>~~e~~A|0.01 Hz<br>A|9999<br>A|0–400 Hz/<br>9999||✔|✔|✔||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (2)_
6 - 2
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Acceleration/deceleration time setting|7|�|Acceleration time|0.1/<br>0.01 s|5/10/15 s *|0–3600/<br>360 s|Set the motor acceleration time<br>_* Initial values differ according to the inverter_<br>_capacity:_<br>_FR-E720S-110SC or less,_<br>_FR-E740-095SC or less/_<br>_FR-E740-120SC and 170SC/_<br>_FR-E740-230SC and 300SC_||✔|✔|✔|6-71|
||8|�|Deceleration time|0.1/<br>0.01 s|5/10/15 s *|0–3600/<br>360 s|Set the motor deceleration time<br>_* Initial values differ according to the inverter_<br>_capacity:_<br>_FR-E720S-110SC or less,_<br>_FR-E740-095SC or less/_<br>_FR-E740-120SC and 170SC/_<br>_FR-E740-230SC and 300SC_||✔|✔|✔||
|||20|Acceleration/deceleration<br>reference frequency|0.01 Hz|50 Hz|1–400 Hz|Set the frequency referenced as<br>acceleration/deceleration time. As<br>acceleration/deceleration time, set the<br>frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20.||✔|✔|✔||
|||21|Acceleration/deceleration<br>time increments|1|0|0|Increments:<br>0.1 s<br>Range:<br>0–3600 s|Increments and setting<br>range of acceleration/<br>deceleration time<br>setting can be<br>changed.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Increments:<br>0.1 s<br>Range:<br>0–3600 s||||||
|||44|Second acceleration/<br>deceleration time|0.1/<br>0.01 s|5/10/<br>15 s *|0–3600/<br>360 s|Set the acceleration/deceleration time when<br>the RT signal is on.<br>_* Initial values differ according to the inverter_<br>_capacity:_<br>_FR-E720S-110SC or less,_<br>_FR-E740-095SC or less/_<br>_FR-E740-120SC and 170SC/_<br>_FR-E740-230SC and 300SC_||✔|✔|✔||
|||45|Second deceleration time|0.1/<br>0.01 s|9999|0–3600/<br>360 s|Set the deceleration time when the RT signal<br>is on.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Acceleration time = deceleration time||||||
|||147|Acceleration/deceleration<br>time switching frequency|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz|Frequency when automatically switching to<br>the acceleration/deceleration time of Pr. 44<br>and Pr. 45.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No function||||||
|Motor protection from overheat<br>(electronic thermal relay function)|9|�|Electronic thermal O/L relay|0.01 A|Rated<br>inverter out-<br>put current *|0–500 A|Set the rated motor current.<br>_* The initial value of the 026SC or less is set to_<br>_85% of the rated inverter current._||✔|✔|✔|6-82|
|||51|Second electronic<br>thermal O/L relay|0.01 A|9999|0–500 A|Made valid when the RT signal is on. Set the<br>rated motor current.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (3)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 3
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|DC injection brake|10||DC injection brake operation<br>frequency|0.01 Hz|3Hz|0–120 Hz|Set the operation frequency of the DC<br>injection brake.||✔|✔|✔|6-100|
||11||DC injection brake operation<br>time|0.1 s|0.5s|0|DC injection brake disabled||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||0.1–10 s|Set the operation time of the DC injection<br>brake.||||||
||12||DC injection brake operation<br>voltage|0.1%|6/4/2% *|0|DC injection brake disabled||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||0.1–30 %|Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).<br>_* Initial values differ according to the inverter_<br>_capacity:_<br>_FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC/_<br>_FR-E720S-030SC to 110SC,_<br>_FR-E740-016SC to 170SC/_<br>_FR-E740-230SC and 300SC_||||||
|Starting<br>frequency|13<br>571||Starting frequency|0.01 Hz|0.5Hz|0–60 Hz|Starting frequency can be set.||✔|✔|✔|6-75|
|||571|Holding time at a start|0.1 s|9999|0.0–10.0 s|Set the holding time of Pr. 13 "Starting<br>frequency".||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Holding function at start is invalid.||||||
|V/F pattern matching<br>applications<br>**V/F**|14||Load pattern selection|1|0|0<br>a|For constant torque load||✔|✔|✔|6-58|
|||||||1|For variable-torque load||||||
|||||||2<br>||For constant<br>torque elevators<br>|—|at reverse rotation<br>boost of 0%<br>|—|||||
|||||||3||at forward rotation<br>boost of 0%<br>|—|||||
|Jog operation|15||Jog frequency|0.01 Hz|5Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency for jog operation.||✔|✔|✔|6-63|
||16||Jog acceleration/<br>deceleration time|0.1/<br>0.01 s|0.5s|0–3600/<br>360 s|Set the acceleration/deceleration time for<br>jog operation. Set the time taken to reach<br>the frequency set in Pr. 20 "Acceleration/<br>deceleration reference frequency" for<br>acceleration/deceleration time (initial value<br>is 50 Hz).<br>In addition, acceleration/deceleration time<br>can not be set separately.||✔|✔|✔||
|MRS input<br>selection|17<br>eS||MRS input selection|1|0|0|Open input always||✔|✔|✔|6-119|
|||||||2|Normally closed input<br>(NC contact input specifications)||||||
|||||||4|External terminal: Normally closed input<br>(NC contact input specifications)<br>Communication: Normally open input||||||
|—|18<br>eS||Refer to Pr. 1 and Pr. 2||||||||||
||19<br>eS||Refer to Pr. 3||||||||||
||20<br>21<br>a||Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8||||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (4)_
6 - 4
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Stall prevention operation|22||Stall prevention<br>operation level|0.1%|150%|0|Stall prevention operation selection<br>becomes invalid.|✔|✔|✔|6-44|
|||||||0.1–200%|The stall prevention operation level can be<br>set.|||||
||23||Stall prevention operation<br>level compensation factor at<br>double speed|0.1%|9999|0–200%|The stall operation level can be reduced<br>when operating at a high speed above the<br>rated frequency.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Constant according to Pr. 22|||||
|||48|Second stall prevention<br>operation current|0.1%|9999|0|Second stall prevention operation invalid|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||0.1–200%|The stall prevention operation level can be<br>set.|||||
|||||||9999|Same level as Pr. 22.|||||
|||66|Stall prevention operation<br>reduction starting frequency|0.01 Hz|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency at which the stall<br>operation level is started to reduce.|✔|✔|✔||
|||156|Stall prevention<br>operation selection|1|0|0–31/100/101|Pr. 156 allows you to select whether to use<br>stall prevention or not according to the<br>acceleration/deceleration status.|✔|✔|✔||
|||157|OL signal output timer|0.1 s|0 s|0–25 s|Set the output start time of the OL signal<br>output when stall prevention is activated.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Without the OL signal output|||||
|||277|Stall prevention operation<br>current switchover|1|0|0|When the output current exceeds the limit<br>level, output frequency is limited to limit<br>current. The inverter rated current is the<br>reference to the limit level.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|When the output torque exceeds the limit<br>level, output frequency is limited to limit<br>current. The rated motor torque is the<br>reference to the limit level.|||||
|—|24<br>–<br>27||Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6|||||||||
|Acceleration/<br>deceleration pattern|29||Acceleration/deceleration<br>pattern selection|1|0|0|Linear acceleration/deceleration|✔|✔|✔|6-77|
|||||||1|S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A|||||
|||||||2|S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B|||||
|Selection of regeneration unit|30||Regenerative function<br>selection|1|0|0|Brake unit FR-BU2,<br>High power factor converter FR-HC,<br>Power regeneration common converter FR-CV|✔|✔|✔|6-103|
|||||||1|High-duty brake resistor FR-ABR|||||
|||||||2|High power factor converter FR-HC<br>(when an automatic restart after<br>instantaneous power failure is selected)|||||
|||70|Special regenerative brake<br>duty|0.1%|0%|0–30%|Set this parameter when a high duty brake<br>resistor or power regeneration converter is<br>used.|✔|✔|✔||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (5)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 5
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Avoid mechanical resonance points|31||Frequency jump 1A|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz/<br>9999|1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B are frequency<br>jumps<br>9999: Function invalid|✔|✔|✔|6-54|
||32||Frequency jump 1B|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz/<br>9999||✔|✔|✔||
||33||Frequency jump 2A|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz/<br>9999||✔|✔|✔||
||34||Frequency jump 2B|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz/<br>9999||✔|✔|✔||
||35||Frequency jump 3A|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz/<br>9999||✔|✔|✔||
||36||Frequency jump 3B|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz/<br>9999||✔|✔|✔||
|Speed display and<br>speed setting|37||Speed display|0.001|0|0|Frequency display, setting|✔|✔|✔|6-138|
|||||||0.01–9998|Set the machine speed at 60 Hz.|||||
|RUN key rotation<br>direction selection|40||RUN key rotation direction<br>selection|1|0|0|Forward rotation|✔|✔|✔|6-329|
|||||||1|Reverse rotation|||||
|Detection of output<br>frequency (SU, FU)|41||Up-to-frequency<br>sensitivity (SU output)|0.1%|10%|0–100%|Set the level where the SU signal turns on.|✔|✔|✔|6-131|
||42||Output frequency detection<br>(FU output)|0.01 Hz|6Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency where the FU signal turns<br>on.|✔|✔|✔||
||43||Output frequency detection<br>for reverse rotation|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency where the FU signal turns<br>on in reverse rotation.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Same as Pr. 42 setting|||||
|—<br>a|44<br>45<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8|||||||||
||46<br>ee<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 0|||||||||
||47<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 3|||||||||
||48<br>ee<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 22|||||||||
|—<br>a|51<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 9|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (6)_
6 - 6
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Display functions|52||DU/PU main display data<br>selection|1|0|0/5/7–12/<br>14/20/23–25/<br>52–57/61/62/<br>100|Selects monitor to be displayed on the<br>operation panel and parameter unit and<br>monitor to be output to the terminal AM.<br>0:<br>Output frequency (Pr. 52)<br>1:<br>Output frequency (Pr. 158)<br>2:<br>Output current (Pr. 158)<br>3:<br>Output voltage (Pr. 158)<br>5:<br>Frequency setting value<br>7:<br>Motor torque<br>8:<br>Converter output voltage<br>9:<br>Regenerative brake duty<br>10:<br>Electronic thermal relay<br>function load factor<br>11:<br>Output current peak value<br>12:<br>Converter output voltage<br>peak value<br>14:<br>Output power<br>20:<br>Cumulative energization<br>time(Pr. 52)<br>21:<br>Reference voltage output<br>(Pr. 158)<br>23:<br>Actual operation time (Pr. 52)<br>24:<br>Motor load factor<br>25:<br>Cumulative power (Pr. 52)<br>52:<br>PID set point<br>53:<br>PID measured value<br>54:<br>PID deviation (Pr. 52)<br>55:<br>I/O terminal status (Pr. 52)<br>56:<br>Option input terminal status<br>(Pr. 52)<br>57:<br>Option output terminal status<br>(Pr. 52)<br>61:<br>Motor thermal load factor<br>62:<br>Inverter load factor<br>100: Set frequency is displayed<br>during a stop and output<br>frequency is displayed during<br>operation (Pr. 52).|✔|✔|✔|6-140|
||158||AM terminal function<br>selection|1|1|1–3/5/7–12/<br>14/21/24/52/<br>53/61/62||✔|✔|✔||
|||170|Watt-hour meter clear|1|9999|0|Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter<br>monitor.|✔|—|✔||
|||||||10|Set the maximum value when monitoring<br>from communication to 0 to 9999 kWh.|||||
|||||||9999|Set the maximum value when monitoring<br>from communication to 0 to 65535 kWh.|||||
|||171|Operation hour meter clear|1|9999|0/9999|Set "0" in the parameter to clear the watt<br>hour monitor.<br>Setting "9999" has no effect.|✔|✔|✔||
|||268|Monitor decimal digits<br>selection|1|9999|0|Displays the monitor as integral value.|✔|—|✔||
|||||||1|Displays the monitor in increments of 0.1.|||||
|||||||9999|No fixed decimal position|||||
|||563|Energizing time<br>carrying-over times|1|0|0–65535|The numbers of cumulative energizing time<br>monitor exceeded 65535 h is displayed.<br>Reading only|—|—|—||
|||564|Operating time<br>carrying-over times|1|0|0–65535|The numbers of operation time monitor<br>exceeded 65535 h is displayed.<br>Reading only|—|—|—||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (7)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 7
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Change of the monitor<br>output from terminal AM|55||Frequency monitoring<br>reference|0.01 Hz|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the full-scale value to output the output<br>frequency monitor value to terminal AM.||✔|✔|✔|6-148|
||56||Current monitoring reference|0.01|Rated<br>inverter out-<br>put current|0–500|Set the full-scale value to output the output<br>current monitor value to terminal AM.||✔|—|✔||
|Restart operation after instantaneous power failure|57||Restart coasting time|0.1 s|9999|0|The coasting time is as follows:<br>FR-E720S-080SCor less,<br>FR-E740-040SC or less:..................1 s,<br>FR-E720S-110SC,<br>FR-E740-060SC to 170SC:..............2 s,<br>FR-E740-230SC and 300SC:...........3 s||✔|✔|✔|6-153|
|||||||0.1–5 s|Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered<br>restart after an instantaneous power failure.||||||
|||||||9999|No restart||||||
||58<br>162<br>165<br>298<br>299<br>611||Restart cushion time|0.1 s|1s|0–60s|Set a voltage starting time at restart.||✔|✔|✔||
|||162|Automatic restart after<br>instantaneous power failure<br>selection|1|1|0|With frequency<br>search|When using the<br>frequency search,<br>consider the wiring<br>length limit.<br>(Refer to page 3-13.)|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Without<br>frequency search<br>(Reduced voltage<br>system)||||||
|||||||10|Frequency search<br>at every start||||||
|||||||11|Reduced voltage<br>system at every<br>start||||||
|||165|Stall prevention operation<br>level for restart|0.1%|150%|0–200%|Consider the rated inverter current as 100%<br>and set the stall prevention operation level<br>during restart operation.||✔|✔|✔||
|||298|Frequency search gain|1|9999|0–32767|When offline auto tuning is performed<br>under V/F control, frequency search gain<br>necessary for frequency search for automatic<br>restart after instantaneous power failure is<br>set as well as the motor constants (R1).||✔|—|✔||
|||||||9999|Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA)<br>constants||||||
|||299|Rotation direction detection<br>selection at restarting|1|9999|0<br>a|Without rotation direction detection<br> ee||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|With rotation direction detection||||||
|||||||9999<br>Pf|When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is<br>detected.<br>When Pr. 78 = "1", "2", the rotation direction<br>is not detected.<br>Pf||||||
|||611|Acceleration time at a restart|0.1 s|9999|0–3600 s|Set the acceleration time to reach the set<br>frequency at a restart.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Acceleration time for restart is the normal<br>acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (8)_
6 - 8
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Remote setting function|59||Remote function selection|1|0|0|RH, RM, RL signal<br>function|Frequency setting<br>storage function|✔|✔|✔|6-67|
||||||||Multi-speed<br>setting|—|||||
|||||||1|Remote setting|Yes|||||
|||||||2|Remote setting|No|||||
|||||||3|Remote setting|No (Turning STF/STR off<br>clears remote setting<br>frequency.)|||||
|Energy saving control<br>selection<br>**V/F**|60||Energy saving<br>control selection|1|0|0|Normal operation mode||✔|✔|✔|6-174|
|||||||9|Optimum excitation control mode (OEC)||||||
|Automatic acceleration/deceleration|61||Reference current|0.01 A|9999|0–500 A|Setting value (rated motor current) is<br>referenced||✔|✔|✔|6-79|
|||||||9999|Rated inverter current is referenced||||||
||62||Reference value at<br>acceleration|1%|9999|0–200%|Setting value is a limit value||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|150% is a limit value||||||
||63<br>292<br>293||Reference value at<br>deceleration|1%|9999|0–200%|Setting value is a limit value||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|150% is a limit value||||||
|||292|Automatic acceleration/<br>deceleration|1|0|0|Normal mode||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Shortest<br>acceleration/<br>deceleration<br>mode|Without brake|||||
|||||||11||With brake|||||
|||||||7|Brake sequence mode 1||||||
|||||||8|Brake sequence mode 2||||||
|||293|Acceleration/deceleration<br>separate selection|1|0|0|Calculates acceleration/deceleration time of<br>both acceleration and deceleration for the<br>shortest acceleration/deceleration mode.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Calculates only acceleration time for the<br>shortest acceleration/deceleration mode.||||||
|||||||2|Calculates only deceleration time for the<br>shortest acceleration/deceleration mode||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (9)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 9
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>po|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>po|**Name**<br>po|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>po||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Retry function at alarm occurrence|65<br>67<br>68<br>69<br>po||Retry selection<br>po|1|0|0–5|An alarm for retry can be selected.|✔|✔|✔|6-169|
|||67<br>po|Number of retries at alarm<br>occurrence<br>po|1|0|0|No retry function|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1–10|Set the number of retries at alarm<br>occurrence. An alarm output is not provided<br>during retry operation.|||||
|||||||101–110|Set the number of retries at alarm<br>occurrence. (The setting value minus 100 is<br>the number of retries.) An alarm output is<br>provided during retry operation.|||||
|||68|Retry waiting time|0.1 s|1 s|0.1–360 s|Set the waiting time from when an inverter<br>alarm occurs until a retry is made.|✔|✔|✔||
|||69|Retry count display erase|1|0|0|Clear the number of restarts succeeded by<br>retry.|✔|✔|✔||
|—<br>i|66<br>i||Refer to Pr. 22 and Pr. 23|||||||||
||67<br>–<br>69<br>i||Refer to Pr. 65|||||||||
|—<br>a|70<br>a||Refer to Pr. 30|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (10)_
6 - 10
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Applied motor|71||Applied motor|1|0|0|Thermal characteristics of a standard motor||✔|✔|✔|6-87|
|||||||1|Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi<br>constant-torque motor||||||
|||||||40|Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi high<br>efficiency standard motor (SF-HR)||||||
|||||||50|Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi constant<br>torque motor (SF-HRCA)||||||
|||||||3|Standard motor|Select "offline auto<br>tuning setting"|||||
|||||||13|Constant-torque<br>motor||||||
|||||||23|Mitsubishi<br>standard motor<br>SF-JR 4P<br>(�1.5 kW)||||||
|||||||43|Mitsubishi high<br>efficiency motor<br>(SF-HR)||||||
|||||||53|Mitsubishi<br>constant-torque<br>motor (SF-HRCA)||||||
|||||||4|Standard motor|Auto tuning data can<br>be read, changed, and<br>set.|||||
|||||||14|Constant-torque<br>motor||||||
|||||||24|Mitsubishi<br>standard motor<br>SF-JR 4P<br>(�1.5 kW)||||||
|||||||44|Mitsubishi high<br>efficiency motor<br>(SF-HR)||||||
|||||||54|Mitsubishi<br>constant-torque<br>motor (SF-HRCA)||||||
|||||||5|Standard motor|Star connection Direct<br>input of motor<br>constants is enabled|||||
|||||||15|Constant-torque<br>motor||||||
|||||||6|Standard motor|Delta connection Direct<br>input of motor<br>constants is enabled|||||
|||||||16|Constant-torque<br>motor||||||
|||450|Second applied motor|1|9999|0|Thermal characteristics of a standard motor||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi<br>constant-torque motor||||||
|||||||9999|Second motor is invalid (thermal<br>characteristic of the first motor (Pr. 71))||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (11)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 11
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Carrier frequency and<br>Soft-PWM selection|72<br>240||PWM frequency selection|1|1|0–15|PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The<br>setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 0<br>indicates 0.7 kHz, 15 indicates 14.5 kHz.||✔|✔|✔|6-175|
|||240|Soft-PWM operation<br>selection|1|1|0|Soft-PWM invalid||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5", Soft-PWM is valid.||||||
|Analog input selection|73<br>267||Analog input selection|1|1|0<br>ae<br>ee|Terminal 2 input<br>ee|Polarity reversible<br>ee|✔|—|✔|6-177|
||||||||0–10 V<br>ee<br>ee|Not used<br>ee<br>~~a~~|||||
|||||||1<br>ee|0–5 V<br>ee||||||
|||||||10<br>**e**|0–10 V<br>**e**~~s~~|With<br>~~s~~|||||
|||||||11<br>**e**|0–5 V<br>**e**~~s~~<br>s||||||
|||267|Terminal 4 input selection|1|0|0<br>e|Terminal 4 input 4 to 20 mA<br>e~~s~~||✔|—|✔||
|||||||1<br>es|Terminal 4 input 0 to 5 V<br>es||||||
|||||||2<br>ee|Terminal 4 input 0 to 10 V<br>ee||||||
|Noise elimination at<br>the analog input|74||Input filter time constant|1|1|0–8|The primary delay filter time constant for the<br>analog input can be set.<br>A larger setting results in a larger filter.||✔|✔|✔|6-182|
|Reset selection/<br>disconnected PU/PU stop|75||Reset selection/<br>disconnected PU/PU stop|1|14|0–3/14–17|You can select the reset input acceptance,<br>disconnected PU (operation panel/FR-PU04/<br>FR-PU07) connector detection function and<br>PU stop function. For the initial value, reset<br>always enabled, without disconnected PU<br>detection, and with PU stop function are set.||✔|—|—|6-190|
|Prevention of<br>parameter rewrite|77||Parameter write selection|1|0|0<br>es|Write is enabled only during a stop<br>es||✔|✔|✔|6-195|
|||||||1<br>es|Parameter write is disabled.<br>es||||||
|||||||2<br>||Parameter write is enabled in any operation<br>mode regardless of operation status.<br>_Note:_<br>_Parameters that can generally be written_<br>_during operation should not be written as well_<br>_with this setting._<br>|||||||
|Prevention of reverse<br>rotation of the motor|78||Reverse rotation prevention<br>selection|1|0|0<br>||Both forward and reverse rotations allowed<br>|||✔|✔|✔|6-197|
|||||||1<br>—|Reverse rotation disallowed<br>—||||||
|||||||2|Forward rotation disallowed||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (12)_
6 - 12
Parameter Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**<br>~~|~~|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>~~|~~|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>~~|~~|**Name**<br>~~|~~|**Incre-**<br>**ments**<br>~~|~~|**Initial**<br>**Value**<br>~~|~~|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>~~|~~|**Description**<br>~~|~~|**Description**<br>~~|~~|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**<br>~~|~~|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**<br>~~|~~|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**<br>~~|~~|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**<br>~~|~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>~~|~~|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**<br>~~|~~||||
|Operation mode selection<br>~~|~~|79<br>340<br>~~|~~||Operation mode selection<br>~~|~~|1<br>~~|~~|0<br>~~|~~|0<br>~~|~~|External/PU switch over mode<br>~~|~~||✔<br>~~|~~|✔<br>~~|~~|✔<br>~~|~~|6-206<br>~~|~~|
|||||||1<br>~~|~~|Fixed to PU operation mode<br>~~|~~||||||
|||||||2|Fixed to External operation mode||||||
|||||||3|External/PU combined operation mode 1||||||
|||||||4|External/PU combined operation mode 2||||||
|||||||6|Switch-over mode||||||
|||||||7|External operation mode<br>(PU operation interlock)||||||
|||340|Communication start-up<br>mode selection|1|0|0|As set in Pr. 79.||✔|✔|✔|6-218|
|||||||1|Started in the network operation mode.||||||
|||||||10|Started in the network operation mode.<br>Operation mode can be changed between<br>the PU operation mode and network<br>operation mode from the operation panel.||||||
|Selection of control method<br>**AD MFVC**<br>**GP MFVC**|80||Motor capacity|0.01 kW|9999|0.1–15 kW|Set the applied motor capacity.||✔|✔|✔|6-38|
|||||||9999|V/F control is performed||||||
||81<br>89<br>800||Number of motor poles|1|9999|2/4/6/8/10|Set the number of motor poles.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||12/14/16/18/<br>20|X18 signal ON:<br>V/F control|Set 10 + number of<br>motor poles|||||
|||||||9999|V/F control is performed||||||
|||89|Speed control gain (advanced<br>magnetic flux vector)|0.1%|9999|0–200%|Motor speed fluctuation due to load<br>fluctuation is adjusted during advanced<br>magnetic flux vector control.<br>100% is a referenced value.||✔|—|✔||
|||||||9999|Gain matching with the motor set in Pr. 71.||||||
|||800|Control method selection|1|20|20|Advanced<br>magnetic flux<br>vector control|Set a value other than<br>"9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr.<br>81.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||30|General-purpose<br>magnetic flux<br>vector control||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (13)_
These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to section 6.19 for RS-485 communication).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 13
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Offline auto tuning|82||Motor excitation current|0.01 A*|9999|0–500 A *|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to the_<br>_Pr. 71 setting._|✔|—|✔|6-90|
|||||||9999|Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA)<br>constants|||||
||83||Motor rated voltage|0.1 V|200 V/<br>400 V *|0–1000 V|Set the rated motor voltage (V).<br>_* The initial value differs according to the_<br>_voltage class: 200 V/400 V_|✔|✔|✔||
||84<br>90<br>91<br>92<br>93||Rated motor frequency<br>ee|0.01 Hz<br>ee|50 Hz|10–120 Hz<br>=OO|Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).<br>GO<br>OO|✔<br>GO|✔|✔||
|||90|Motor constant (R1)<br>ee|0.001*<br>ee|9999<br>poe|0–50 *<br>=OO|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to_<br>_the Pr. 71 setting._<br>GO<br>OO|✔<br>GO|—|✔||
|||||||9999<br>=OO<br>poepo|Use constants of the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA)<br>OO<br>po|||||
|||91|Motor constant (R2)|0.001*|9999<br>poe|0–50 *<br>poepo|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to_<br>_the Pr. 71 setting._<br>po|✔|—|✔||
|||||||9999<br>poepo|Use constants of the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA)<br>po|||||
|||92|Motor constant (L1)|0.1 mH *|9999|0–1000 mH *|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to_<br>_the Pr. 71 setting._|✔|—|✔||
|||||||9999|Use constants of the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA)|||||
|||93|Motor constant (L2)|0.1 mH *|9999|0–1000 mH *|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to_<br>_the Pr. 71 setting._|✔|—|✔||
|||||||9999|Use constants of the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA)|||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (14)_
6 - 14
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Offline auto tuning||94|Motor constant (X)|0.1% *|9999|0–100% *|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to the Pr. 71_<br>_setting._|✔|—|✔|6-90|
|||||||9999|Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA)<br>constants|||||
|||96|Auto tuning setting/status|1|0|0|Offline auto tuning is not performed|✔|—|✔||
|||||||1|For advanced magnetic flux vector control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without<br>motor running (all motor constants)|||||
|||||||11|For general-purpose magnetic flux vector<br>control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without<br>motor running (motor constant (R1) only)|||||
|||||||21|Offline auto tuning for V/F control<br>(automatic restart after instantaneous<br>power failure (with frequency search))|||||
|||859|Torque current|0.01 A *|9999|0–500 A *|Tuning data (The value measured by offline<br>auto tuning is automatically set.)<br>_* The range differs according to the Pr. 71_<br>_setting._|✔|—|✔||
|||||||9999|Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HRCA)<br>constants|||||
|—|89||Refer to Pr. 81|||||||||
||90<br>–<br>94||Refer to Pr. 82 to 84|||||||||
||96||Refer to Pr. 82 to 84|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (15)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 15
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Communication initial setting|117||PU communication station|1|0|0–31<br>(0–247)|Set the inverter station numbers when two<br>or more inverters are connected to one<br>personal computer.<br>When "1" (Modbus®-RTU protocol) is set in<br>Pr. 549, the setting range within parenthesis<br>is applied.|✔|✔|✔|6-234|
||118||PU communication speed|1|192|48/96/<br>192/384|Set the communication speed. The setting<br>value 100 equals the communication<br>speed.<br>For example, the communication speed is<br>19200bps when the setting value is "192".|✔|✔|✔||
||119||PU communication stop bit<br>length|1|1|0|Stop bit length: 1 bit<br>data length: 8 bits|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Stop bit length: 2 bits<br>data length: 8 bits|||||
|||||||10|Stop bit length: 1 bit<br>data length: 7 bits|||||
|||||||11|Stop bit length: 2 bits<br>data length: 7 bits|||||
||120||PU communication parity<br>check|1|2|0|Without parity check<br>(for Modbus®-RTU: stop bit length: 2bits)|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|With odd parity check<br>(for Modbus®-RTU: stop bit length: 1 bits)|||||
|||||||2|With even parity check<br>(for Modbus®-RTU: stop bit length: 1 bits)|||||
||121||Number of PU communication<br>retries|1|1|0–10|If the number of consecutive errors exceeds<br>the permissible value, E.PUE (computer<br>link)/E.ESR (Modbus®-RTU) will cause an<br>alarm stop.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|If a communication error occurs, the inverter<br>will not come to an alarm stop.|||||
||122||PU communication check<br>time interval|0.1 s|9999<br>—|0|No PU connector communication|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||0.1–999.8 s|Set the communication check time interval.<br>If a no-communication state persists for<br>longer than the permissible time, the<br>inverter will come to an alarm stop.|||||
|||||||9999<br>—|No communication check<br>|||||
||123||PU communication waiting<br>time setting|1|9999<br>—|0–150 ms<br>—fo|Set the waiting time between data<br>transmission to the inverter and response.<br>fo|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999<br>—|Set with communication data.<br>|||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (16)_
These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to section 6.19 for RS-485 communication).
6 - 16
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Communication initial setting|124||PU communication<br>CR/LF presence/absence<br>selection|1|1|0|Without CR/LF||✔|✔�|✔�|6-234|
|||||||1|With CR||||||
|||||||2|With CR/LF||||||
|||342|Communication E²PROM write<br>selection|1|0|0|Parameter values written by communication<br>are written to the E²PROM and RAM.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1|Parameter values written by communication<br>are written to the RAM.||||||
|||343|Communication error count|1|0|Read only|Display the number of communication errors<br>during Modbus®-RTU communication. Read<br>only.<br>Displayed only when Modbus®-RTU protocol<br>is selected.||—|—|—||
|||349�|Communication reset<br>selection|1|0|0, 1|In the External operation mode or the PU<br>operation mode, use this parameter to<br>disable an error reset command sent<br>through the Ethernet network (CC-Link IE<br>Field Network Basic).||✔|✔|✔||
|||501�|Communication error<br>occurrence count display|1|0|0|Displays the communication error<br>occurrence count.||✔|✔|✔||
|||502|Stop mode selection at<br>communication error|1|0|0/3|You can select the<br>inverter operation<br>if a<br>communication<br>error occurs.|Coasts to stop|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||1/2||Decelerates to stop|||||
|||549|Protocol selection|1|0|0|Mitsubishi<br>inverter<br>(computer link)<br>protocol)|After setting change,<br>reset (switch power off,<br>then on) the inverter.<br>The setting change is<br>reflected after a reset.|✔|✔�|✔�||
|||||||1|Modbus®-RTU<br>protocol||||||
## _**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (17)_
- These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to section 6.19 for RS-485 communication).
- This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 17
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**<br>PS|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>PSe|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>PSe|**Name**<br>e|**Incre-**<br>**ments**<br>e|**Initial**<br>**Value**<br>ee|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>e|**Description**<br>ee|**Description**<br>ee|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>PSe|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**<br>e||||
|Change of analog input frequency,<br>adjustment of voltage, current input and frequency (calibration)<br>PS|125<br>PSe||Terminal 2 frequency setting<br>gain frequency<br>e|0.01 Hz<br>e|50 Hz<br>ee|0–400 Hz<br>e|Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain<br>(maximum).<br>ee||✔<br>e|—<br>e|✔<br>e|6-183|
||126<br>241<br>C2<br>(902)<br>C3<br>(902)<br>C4<br>(903)<br>C5<br>(904)<br>C6<br>(904)<br>C7<br>(905)<br>PSe<br>f<br>fo||Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>gain frequency<br>e<br>fo|0.01 Hz<br>e<br>||50 Hz<br>ee<br>|e|0–400 Hz<br>e<br>e|Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain<br>(maximum).<br>ee<br>e~~s~~||✔<br>e<br>dt|—<br>e<br>dt|✔<br>e||
|||241<br>PSe<br>f<br>fo|Analog input display unit<br>switch over<br>e<br>f<br>fo|1<br>e<br>f<br>|<br>PP|0<br>ee<br>f~~o~~<br>|e<br>PP|0<br>e<br>~~o~~<br>e|Displayed in %<br>e<br>~~o~~<br>e~~s~~|Select the unit for<br>analog input display.<br>ee<br>~~o~~f<br>~~s~~|✔<br>e<br>f<br>dt|✔<br>e<br>f<br>dt|✔<br>e<br>f||
|||||||1<br>~~o~~<br>e<br>PP|Displayed in V/mA<br>~~o~~<br>e~~s~~||||||
|||C2<br>(902)<br>f<br>fo|Terminal 2 frequency setting<br>bias frequency<br>f<br>fo|0.01 Hz<br>f<br>|<br>PP|0 Hz<br>f~~o~~<br>| e<br>PP|0–400 Hz<br>~~o~~<br>e<br>PP|Set the frequency on the bias side of<br>terminal 2 input.<br>~~o~~f<br>e~~s~~||✔<br>f<br>dt|—<br>f<br>dt|✔<br>f||
|||C3<br>(902)|Terminal 2 frequency setting<br>bias|0.1%<br>PP|0%<br>PP|0–300%<br>PP|Set the converted % of the bias side voltage<br>(current) of terminal 2 input.||✔|—|✔||
|||C4<br>(903)|Terminal 2 frequency setting<br>gain|0.1%|100%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the gain side voltage<br>of terminal 2 input.||✔|—|✔||
|||C5<br>(904)|Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>bias frequency|0.01 Hz|0 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency on the bias side of<br>terminal 4 input.||✔|—|✔||
|||C6<br>(904)|Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>bias|0.1%|20%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the bias side current<br>(voltage) of terminal 4 input.||✔|—|✔||
|||C7<br>(905)|Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>gain|0.1%|100%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the gain side current<br>(voltage) of terminal 4 input.||✔|—|✔||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (18)_
**NOTE** The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07).
6 - 18
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|PID control|127||PID control automatic<br>switchover frequency|0.01 Hz|9999|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency at which the control is<br>automatically changed to PID control.||✔|✔|✔|6-293|
|||||||9999|Without PID automatic switchover function||||||
||128||PID action selection|1|0|0|PID control invalid||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||20|PID reverse action|Measured value input<br>(terminal 4)<br>Set value<br>(terminal 2 or Pr. 133)|||||
|||||||21|PID forward action||||||
|||||||40–43|Dancer control||||||
|||||||50|PID reverse action|Deviation value signal<br>input<br>(CC-Link<br>communication)|||||
|||||||51|PID forward action||||||
|||||||60|PID reverse action|Measured value and set<br>point input<br>(CC-Link<br>communication)|||||
|||||||61|PID forward action||||||
||129||PID proportional band|0.1%|100%|0.1–1000%|If the proportional band is narrow<br>(parameter setting is small), the<br>manipulated variable varies greatly with a<br>slight change of the measured value.<br>Hence, as the proportional band narrows,<br>the response sensitivity (gain) improves but<br>the stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting<br>occurs. Gain Kp = 1/proportional band||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No proportional control.||||||
||130||PID integral time|0.1 s|1 s|0.1–360 0s|Time required for only the integral (I) action<br>to provide the same manipulated variable as<br>that for the proportional (P) action. As the<br>integral time decreases, the set point is<br>reached earlier but hunting occurs more<br>easily.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No integral control.||||||
||131||PID upper limit|0.1%|9999|0–100%|Set the upper limit value.<br>If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the<br>FUP signal is output. The maximum input<br>(20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value<br>(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No function||||||
||132||PID lower limit|0.1%|9999|0–100%|Set the lower limit value.<br>If the process value falls below the setting<br>range, the FDN signal is output. The<br>maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the<br>measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to<br>100%||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No function||||||
||133||PID action set point|0.01%|9999|0–100%|Used to set the set point for PID control in<br>the PU operation mode.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No function||||||
||134||PID differential time|0.01 s|9999|0.01–10.00 s|Time required for only the differential (D)<br>action to provide the same manipulated<br>variable as that for the proportional (P)<br>action. As the differential time increases,<br>greater response is made to a deviation<br>change.||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No differential control.||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (19)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 19
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>ee|**Description**<br>ee|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Parameter unit<br>language switchover|145||PU display language selection|1|1|0<br>ee<br>ee|Japanese<br>ee<br>ee|✔|—|—|6-329|
|||||||1<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|English<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||2<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|German<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||3<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|French<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||4<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|Spanish<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||5<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|Italian<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||6<br>ee<br>ee|Swedish<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|||||||7<br>ee<br>ee|Finnish<br>ee<br>ee|||||
|—<br>a|146||Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.|||||||||
|—<br>a|147||Refer to Pr. 7 and Pr. 8|||||||||
|Detection of output current (Y12 signal)<br>and Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)|150||Output current detection level|0.1%|150%|0–200%|Set the output current detection level. 100%<br>is the rated inverter current.|✔|✔|✔|6-133|
||151||Output current detection<br>signal delay time|0.1 s|0 s|0–10 s|Set the output current detection period. Set<br>the time from when the output current has<br>risen above the setting until the output<br>current detection signal (Y12) is output.|✔|✔|✔||
||152||Zero current detection level|0.1%|5%|0–200%|Set the zero current detection level. Suppose<br>that the rated inverter current at the<br>specified overload capacity is 100%.|✔|✔|✔||
||153||Zero current detection time|0.01 s|0.5 s|0–1 s|Set this parameter to define the period from<br>when the output current drops below the Pr.<br>152 value until the zero current detection<br>signal (Y13) is output.|✔|✔|✔||
|—|156<br>157||Refer to Pr. 22|||||||||
|—|158||Refer to Pr. 52|||||||||
|User group function|160<br>172<br>173<br>174<br>|||User group read selection|1|0|0|Simple mode and extended mode<br>parameters can be displayed.|✔|✔|✔|6-198|
|||||||1|Only parameters registered in the user group<br>can be displayed.|||||
|||||||9999|Only the simple mode parameters can be<br>displayed|||||
|||172|User group registered display/<br>batch clear|1<br>||0<br>||(0–16)|Displays the number of cases registered as a<br>user group (reading only).|✔|—|—||
|||||||9999|Batch clear the user group registration|||||
|||173<br>||User group registration<br>||1<br>|<br>||9999<br>|<br>||0–999/9999<br>|~~|~~|Set the parameter numbers to be registered<br>to the user group.<br>Read value is always "9999".<br>~~|~~|—<br>~~|~~|—<br>~~|~~|—<br>~~|~~||
|||174|User group clear|1<br>||9999<br>||0–999/9999|Set the parameter numbers to be cleared<br>from the user group.<br>Read value is always "9999".|—|—|—||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (20)_
6 - 20
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Operation selection<br>of the operation panel|161||Frequency setting/key lock<br>operation selection|1|0|0|Setting dial<br>frequency setting<br>mode|Key lock mode invalid|✔|—|✔|6-330|
|||||||1|Setting dial<br>potentiometer<br>mode||||||
|||||||10|Setting dial<br>frequency setting<br>mode|Key lock mode valid|||||
|||||||11|Setting dial<br>potentiometer<br>mode||||||
|—|162<br>165||Refer to Pr. 57||||||||||
||168<br>169||Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.||||||||||
||170<br>171||Refer to Pr. 52||||||||||
||172<br>–<br>174||Refer to Pr. 160||||||||||
|Function assignment of input terminal|178||STF terminal function<br>selection|1|60|0–5/7/8/10/<br>12/14–16/18/<br>24/25/60/62/<br>65–67/9999|0:<br>Low-speed operation command<br>1:<br>Middle-speed operation command<br>2:<br>High-speed operation command<br>3:<br>Second function selection<br>4:<br>Terminal 4 input selection<br>5:<br>Jog operation selection<br>7:<br>External thermal relay input<br>8:<br>Fifteen speed selection<br>10:<br>Inverter operation enable signal<br>(FR-HC/FR-CV connection)<br>12:<br>PU operation external interlock<br>14:<br>PID control valid terminal<br>15:<br>Brake opening completion signal<br>16:<br>PU-external operation switchover<br>18:<br>V/F switchover<br>24:<br>Output stop<br>25:<br>Start self-holding selection<br>60:<br>Forward rotation command<br>(assigned to STF terminal<br>(Pr. 178 only)<br>61:<br>Reverse rotation command<br>(assigned to STR terminal<br>(Pr. 179 only)<br>62:<br>Inverter reset<br>65:<br>NET/PU operation switchover<br>66:<br>External/NET operation switchover<br>67:<br>Command source switchover<br>9999: No function||✔|—|✔|6-116|
||179||STR terminal function<br>selection|1|61|0–5/7/8/10/<br>12/14–16/18/<br>24/25/61/62/<br>65–67/9999|||✔|—|✔||
||180||RL terminal function selection|1|0|0–5/7/8/10/<br>12/14–16/18/<br>24/25/62/<br>65–67/9999|||✔|—|✔||
||181||RM terminal function<br>selection|1|1||||✔|—|✔||
||182||RH terminal function<br>selection|1|2||||✔|—|✔||
||183||MRS bit function selection|1|24||||✔|—|✔||
||184||RES terminal function<br>selection|1|62||||✔|—|✔||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (21)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 21
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Function assignment of output terminal|190||RUN terminal function<br>selection|1|0|0/1/3/4/7/8/<br>11–16/20/25/<br>26/46/47/64/<br>80/81/90/91/<br>93/95/96/98/<br>99/100/101/<br>103/104/107/<br>108/111–116/<br>120/125/126/<br>146/147/164/<br>180/181/190/<br>191/193/195/<br>196/198/199/<br>9999|0/100:<br>Inverter running<br>1/101:<br>Up to frequency<br>3/103:<br>Overload alarm<br>4/104:<br>Output frequency detection<br>7/107:<br>Regenerative brake pre-alarm<br>8/108:<br>Electronic thermal relay<br>function pre-alarm<br>11/111:<br>Inverter operation ready<br>12/112:<br>Output current detection<br>13/113:<br>Zero current detection<br>14/114:<br>PID lower limit<br>15/115:<br>PID upper limit<br>16/116:<br>PID forward/reverse<br>rotation output<br>20/120:<br>Brake opening request<br>25/125:<br>Fan fault output<br>26/126:<br>Heatsink overheat pre-alarm<br>46/146:<br>During deceleration at<br>occurrence of power failure<br>(retained until release)<br>47/147:<br>PID control activated<br>64/164:<br>During retry<br>80/180:<br>Safety monitor output<br>81/181:<br>Safety monitor output 2<br>90/190:<br>Life alarm<br>91/191:<br>Alarm output 3<br>(power-off signal)<br>93/193:<br>Current average monitor<br>95/195:<br>Maintenance timer alarm<br>96/196:<br>Remote output<br>98/198:<br>Minor fault output<br>99/199:<br>Alarm output<br>9999:<br>No function<br>0–99:<br>Source logic<br>100–199: Sink logic|✔|—|✔|6-126|
||191||FU terminal function selection|1|4|||✔|—|✔||
||192||ABC terminal function<br>selection|1|99|0/1/3/4/7/8/<br>11–16/20/25/<br>26/46/47/64/<br>80/81/90/91/<br>95/96/98/99/<br>100/101/103/<br>104/107/108/<br>111–116/120/<br>125/126/146/<br>147/164/180/<br>181/190/191/<br>195/196/198/<br>199/9999||✔|—|✔||
|—|232<br>–<br>239||Refer to Pr. 4 to Pr. 6|||||||||
||240||Refer to Pr. 72|||||||||
||241<br>a||Refer to Pr. 125 and Pr. 126|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (22)_
6 - 22
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Increase cooling<br>fan life|244||Cooling fan operation<br>selection|1|1|0|Operates at power on<br>Cooling fan on/off control invalid<br>(The cooling fan is always on at power on.)||✔|✔|✔|6-317|
|||||||1|Cooling fan on/off control valid||||||
|Slip compensation<br>**GP MFVC**<br>**V/F**|245||Rated slip|0.01%|9999|0–50%|Used to set the rated motor slip.||✔|✔|✔|6-43|
|||||||9999|No slip compensation||||||
||246||Slip compensation time<br>constant|0.01 s|0.5 s|0.01–10 s|Used to set the response time of slip<br>compensation. When the value is made<br>smaller, response will be faster. However, as<br>load inertia is greater, a regenerative<br>overvoltage (E.OV<br>) error is more liable to<br>occur.||✔|✔|✔||
||247||Constant-output region slip<br>compensation selection|1|9999|0|Slip compensation is not made in the<br>constant output range (frequency range<br>above the frequency set in Pr. 3)||✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Slip compensation is made in the constant<br>output range.||||||
|Ground fault detection|249||Earth (ground) fault detection<br>at start|1|0|0|Without ground fault detection||✔|✔|✔|6-173|
|||||||1|With ground fault detection||||||
|Selection of motor stopping method|250||Stop selection|0.1 s|9999|0–100 s|The motor is<br>coasted to a stop<br>when the preset<br>time elapses after<br>the start signal is<br>turned off.|STF signal:<br>Forward rotation start<br>STR signal:<br>Reverse rotation start|✔|✔|✔|6-105|
|||||||1000–1100 s|The motor is<br>coasted to a stop<br>(Pr. 250 1000) s<br>after the start<br>signal is turned<br>off.|STF signal:<br>Start signal<br>STR signal:<br>Forward/reverse signal|||||
|||||||8888|When the start<br>signal is turned<br>off, the motor<br>decelerates to<br>stop.|STF signal:<br>Start signal<br>STR signal:<br>Forward/reverse signal|||||
|||||||9999||STF signal:<br>Forward rotation start<br>STR signal:<br>Reverse rotation start|||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (23)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 23
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**<br>a|**Incre-**<br>**ments**<br>ea|**Initial**<br>**Value**<br>ea|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>cec|**Description**<br>c~~e~~|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**<br>~~e~~e||||
|Input/output phase failure<br>protection selection|251<br>872||Output phase failure<br>protection selection<br>a|1<br>ea|1<br>ea|0<br>cec<br>ee|Without output phase failure protection<br>c~~e~~<br>ee|✔<br>~~e~~e|✔<br>e|✔<br>e|6-172|
|||||||1<br>cec<br>ee|With output phase failure protection<br>c~~e~~<br>ee|||||
|||872|Input phase failure<br>protection selection<br>a|1<br> ea|1<br>ea|0<br> cec<br>ee<br>ee|Without input phase failure protection<br>c~~e~~<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>~~e~~e|✔<br>e|✔<br>e||
|||||||1|With input phase failure protection|||||
|Display of the life of the inverter parts|255||Life alarm status display|1|0|(0–15)|Display whether the control circuit capacitor,<br>main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each<br>parts of the inrush current limit circuit has<br>reached the life alarm output level or not.<br>(Reading only)|—|—|—|6-318|
||256||Inrush current limit<br>circuit life display|1%|100%|(0–100%)|Display the deterioration degree of the<br>inrush current limit circuit. (Reading only)|—|—|—||
||257||Control circuit<br>capacitor life display|1%|100%|(0–100%)|Display the deterioration degree of the<br>control circuit capacitor.<br>(Reading only)|—|—|—||
||258||Main circuit capacitor life<br>display|1%|100%|(0–100%)|Display the deterioration degree of the main<br>circuit capacitor.<br>(Reading only)<br>The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.|—|—|—||
||259||Main circuit capacitor life<br>measuring|1|0|0/1<br>(2, 3, 8, 9)|Setting "1" and switching the power supply<br>off starts the measurement of the main<br>circuit capacitor life. When the Pr. 259 value<br>is "3" after powering on again, the<br>measuring is completed. Displays the<br>deterioration degree in Pr. 258.|✔|✔|✔||
|Operation at instantaneous<br>power failure|261||Power failure stop selection|1|0|0|Coasting to stop<br>When under voltage or power failure occurs,<br>the inverter output is shut off.|✔|✔|✔|6-165|
|||||||1|When under voltage or a power failure<br>occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a<br>stop.|||||
|||||||2|When under voltage or a power failure<br>occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a<br>stop. If power is restored during a power<br>failure, the inverter accelerates again.|||||
|—<br>I|267<br>a||Refer to Pr. 73|||||||||
||268<br>a<br>I||Refer to Pr. 52|||||||||
||269<br>I||Parameter for manufacturer setting: Do not set.|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (24)_
Available only for the three-phase power input model.
6 - 24
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Stop-on contact control<br>**AD MFVC**<br>**GP MFVC**|270||Stop-on contact<br>control selection|1|0|0|Without stop-on contact control|✔|✔|✔|6-107|
|||||||1|Stop-on contact control|||||
||275||Stop-on contact<br>excitation current<br>low-speed multiplying factor|0.1%|9999|0–300%|Usually set a value between 130% and<br>180%.<br>Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on<br>contact control.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|No compensation.|||||
||276||PWM carrier<br>frequency at stop-on contact|1|9999|0–9|Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on<br>contact control.<br>(Valid at the output frequency of 3 Hz or<br>less.)|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|As set in Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection".|||||
|—|277||Refer to Pr. 22|||||||||
|Brake sequence function<br>**AD MFVC**<br>**GP MFVC**|278||Brake opening frequency|0.01 Hz|3 Hz|0–30 Hz|Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor<br>+ about 1.0 Hz.<br>This parameter may be set only if Pr. 278<br>Pr. 282.|✔|✔|✔|6-111|
||279||Brake opening current|0.1%|130%|0–200%|Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to<br>90%. If the setting is too low, the load is<br>liable to drop due to gravity at start.<br>Suppose that the rated inverter current is<br>100%.|✔|✔|✔||
||280||Brake opening current<br>detection time|0.1 s|0.3 s|0–2 s|Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to<br>0.3s.|✔|✔|✔||
||281||Brake operation time at start|0.1 s|0.3 s|0–5 s|Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time<br>until the brake is loosened.<br>Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time<br>until the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to<br>0.2 s.|✔|✔|✔||
||282||Brake operation frequency|0.01 Hz|6 Hz|0–30 Hz|At this frequency, the brake opening request<br>signal (BOF) is switched off. Generally, set<br>this parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3 to<br>4 Hz.This parameter may be set only if Pr.<br>278 Pr. 282.|✔|✔|✔||
||283<br>292||Brake operation time at stop|0.1 s|0.3 s|0–5 s|Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time<br>until the brake is closed + 0.1 s.<br>Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time<br>until the brake is closed + about 0.2 to 0.3<br>seconds.|✔|✔|✔||
|||292|Automatic acceleration/<br>deceleration|1|0|0/1/7/8/11|Brake sequence function is made valid when a setting is "7 or 8".|||||
|Droop control<br>**AD MFVC**|286||Droop gain|0.1%|0%|0|Droop control is invalid|✔|✔|✔|6-313|
|||||||0.1–100%|Set the drooping amount at the rated torque<br>as a percentage with respect to the rated<br>motor frequency.|||||
||287||Droop filter time constant|0.01 s|0.3 s|0–1 s|Set the time constant of the primary delay<br>filter applied to the torque current.|✔|✔|✔||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (25)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 25
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**<br>a|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>ee|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>ee|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**<br>ee||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|—<br>a|292<br>293<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 61|||||||||
|Setting of the magnitude of<br>frequency change by the setting dial<br>a|295<br>ee||Magnitude of frequency<br>change setting|0.01|0|0|Invalid|✔|✔|✔|6-331|
|||||||0/0.01/<br>0.1/1/10|The setting increments when the set<br>frequency is changed by the setting dial can<br>be set.|||||
|Password function<br>ee|296<br>ee<br>P|||Password lock level<br>ee<br>P|<br>||1<br>ee<br>||9999<br>ee<br>|0–6/99/<br>100–106/<br>199<br>ee|Select restriction level of parameter reading/<br>writing when a password is registered.<br>ee~~t~~|✔<br>~~t~~<br>fey|—<br>~~t~~<br>fey|✔<br>~~t~~<br>fey|6-201|
|||||||9999<br>ee<br>Ep|No password lock<br>ee~~t~~<br>Ep|||||
||297<br>ee<br>P|||Password lock/unlock<br>ee<br>P|<br>||1<br>ee<br>||9999<br>ee<br>|1000–9998<br>ee<br>Ep|Register a 4-digit password<br>ee~~t~~<br>Ep|✔<br>~~t~~<br>fey|✔<br>~~t~~<br>fey|✔<br>~~t~~<br>fey||
|||||||(0–5)<br>ee<br>Ep|Displays password unlock error count.<br>(Reading only)<br>(Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to "106")<br>ee~~t~~<br>Ep|||||
|||||||9999<br>ee<br>Ep<br>ee|No password lock<br>ee~~t~~<br>Ep<br>ee|||||
|—<br>ee<br>ee}|298<br>299<br>P|<br>ee<br>ee}||Refer to Pr. 57<br>P|<br>|<br>| Ep<br>fey<br>n~~s~~<br>ee}<br>ae|||||||||
|Function assignment of digital<br>output terminal<br>ee<br>ee}<br>ee]<br>eof]|313<br>ee<br>ee}<br>ee]||DO0 output selection<br>n<br>ee}<br>ee]<br>ft|1<br>n<br>ft<br>||9999<br>n|0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8,<br>11 to 16, 20, 25,<br>26, 46, 47, 64,<br>90, 91, 93, 95,<br>96, 98, 99, 100,<br>101, 103, 104,<br>107, 108, 111 to<br>116, 120, 125,<br>126, 146, 147,<br>164, 190, 191,<br>193, 195, 196,<br>198, 199, 9999<br>n|The description of the settings of Pr. 313 to<br>Pr. 315 is the same as of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192.<br>n~~s~~|✔<br>~~s~~<br>ae<br>||—<br>~~s~~<br>ae<br>||✔<br>~~s~~<br>ae<br>||6-126<br>~~s~~|
||314<br>ee}<br>ee]<br>eof]||DO1 output selection<br>ee}<br>ee]<br>ft<br>eof]|1<br>ft<br>|<br>eof]fT|9999<br>fT|||✔<br>ae<br>|<br>aaa|—<br>ae<br>|<br>aaa|✔<br>ae<br>|<br>aaa||
||315<br>ee]<br>eof]||DO2 output selection<br>ee]<br>ft<br>eof]|1<br>ft<br>|<br>eof]fT|9999<br>fT|||✔<br>|<br>aaa|—<br>|<br>aaa|✔<br>|<br>aaa||
|Communication<br>eof]<br>Le|338<br>eof]<br>Le||Communication operation<br>command source<br>eof]<br>Le|1<br>eof] fT|0<br>fT|0<br>e|Operation command source<br>communication<br>e~~e~~|✔<br>aaa<br>~~e~~e|✔<br>aaa<br>e|✔<br>aaa<br>e|6-220<br>e|
|||||||1<br>e|Operation command source external (start/<br>stop)<br>e~~e~~|||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (26)_
Available only for the three-phase power input model.
These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to section 6.19 for RS-485 communication). This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
6 - 26
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**|||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Communication|339||Communication speed<br>command source|1|0|0|Speed command source communication||✔|✔�|✔�|6-220|
|||||||1|Speed command source external (Frequency<br>setting from communication is invalid,<br>terminal 2 setting from external is valid)||||||
|||||||2|Speed command source external (Frequency<br>setting from communication is valid,<br>terminal 2 setting from external is invalid)||||||
|||550|NET mode operation<br>command source selection|1|9999|0|Communication option valid||✔|✔�|✔�||
|||||||2|PU connector valid||||||
|||||||9999|Automatic recognition of the<br>communication option<br>Normally, PU connector is<br>valid.Communication option is valid when<br>the communication option is mounted.||||||
|||551|PU mode operation command<br>source selection|1|9999|2|Selects the PU connector as the PU operation<br>mode control source||✔|✔�|✔�||
|||||||3|Selects the USB connector as the PU<br>operation mode control source.||||||
|||||||4|Selects the operation panel as the PU<br>operation mode control source.||||||
|||||||9999|USB connection FR- PU07 connection<br>automatic recognition<br>Priorities: USB > FR-PU07 > operation panel||||||
|—|340||Refer to Pr. 79||||||||||
||342<br>343||Refer to Pr. 117 to Pr. 124||||||||||
||349||Refer to Pr. 124||||||||||
||442<br>–<br>445||Refer to Pr. 852||||||||||
||450||Refer to Pr. 71||||||||||
|Remote output function (REM signal)|495||Remote output selection|1|0|0|Remote output<br>data clear at<br>powering off|Remote output data<br>clear at inverter reset|✔|✔|✔|6-135|
|||||||1|Remote output<br>data retention at<br>powering off||||||
|||||||10|Remote output<br>data clear at<br>powering off|Remote output data<br>retention at inverter<br>reset|||||
|||||||11|Remote output<br>data retention at<br>powering off||||||
||496||Remote output data 1|1|0|0–4095|Output terminal can be switched on and off.||—|—|—||
||497||Remote output data 2|1|0|0–4095|||—|—|—||
|—|501<br>502||Refer to Pr. 124||||||||||
## _**Tab. 6-1:**_
## _Parameter overview (27)_
- These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to section 6.19 for RS-485 communication.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 27
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Maintenance of parts<br>(ee|503||Maintenance timer|1|0|0 (1–9998)|Display the cumulative energizing time of<br>the inverter in 100h increments. Reading<br>only<br>Writing the setting of "0" clears the<br>cumulative energizing time.|—|—|—|6-323<br>~~e~~|
||504<br>(ee||Maintenance timer alarm<br>output set time<br>(ee|1<br>(ee|9999|0–9998|Set the time taken until when the<br>maintenance timer alarm output signal<br>(Y95) is output.|✔<br>ee|—<br>ee~~e~~|✔<br>~~e~~||
|||||||9999|No function<br>ee|||||
|CC-Link IEF Basic<br>(ee|541<br>(ee||Frequency command sign<br>selection<br>(ee|1<br>(ee|0|0, 1|The start command (forward/reverse<br>rotation) can be inverted by adding a plus or<br>minus sign to the value of the frequency<br>command.<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee~~e~~|✔<br>~~e~~|6-349<br>~~e~~|
||544<br>,<br>(ee<br>a||CC-Link extended setting<br>(ee<br>ee|1<br>(ee<br>ee|0<br>ee|0, 1, 12, 14, 18<br>es|Use this parameter to select the function of<br>the remote registers for the CC-Link IE Field<br>Network Basic.<br>ee<br>en|✔<br>ee<br>Ge|✔<br>ee~~e~~<br>ed|✔<br>~~e~~<br>ed||
|Inverter setup using USB communication<br>(ee|547<br>(ee<br>a||USB communication station<br>number<br>(ee<br>ee|1<br>(ee<br>ee|0<br>ee|0–31<br>es<br><br>a|Specifies the inverter station number.<br>ee<br>en<br>~~|~~<br>|✔<br>ee<br>Ge<br>~~|~~|✔<br>ee~~e~~<br>ed<br>tl,|✔<br>~~e~~<br>ed<br>tl,|6-292<br>~~e~~|
||548<br>551<br>a<br>e||USB communication check<br>time interval<br>ee|0.1 s<br> ee|9999<br> ee|0<br>es<br>fo<br>a|USB communication is enabled. However,<br>the inverter will come to an alarm stop<br>(E.USB) if operation is changed to PU<br>operation mode.<br>en <br>fo~~|~~<br>|✔<br> Ge<br>~~|~~|✔<br>ed<br>tl,|✔<br>ed<br>tl,||
|||||||0.1–999.8 s<br><br>a|Set the interval of communication check<br>time.<br>~~|~~<br> eee|||||
|||||||9999|No communication check|||||
|||551<br>e|Refer to Pr. 338 to Pr. 339<br>e~~e~~|||||||||
|—<br>~~_~~|549<br>~~_~~<br>ae||Refer to Pr. 117 to Pr. 124<br>~~_~~|||||||||
||550<br>551<br>~~_~~<br>ae<br>a||Refer to Pr. 338 and Pr. 339<br>~~_~~<br>aeeeeeee<br>eeee|||||||||
|Current average<br>monitor signal<br>_|555<br>ae<br>a||Current average time<br>ae|0.1 s<br>ee|1 s<br>ee|0.1–1.0 s<br>ee|Set the time taken to average the current<br>during start bit output (1 s).<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔|✔|6-324<br>eeeeeEeE|
||556<br>a <br>~~a~~<br>||Data output mask time<br> ae <br>~~a~~<br>|0.1 s<br> ee <br>~~a~~<br>|0 s<br> ee <br>~~a~~<br>|0.0–20.0 s<br> ee<br>~~a~~<br>|Set the time for not obtaining (mask)<br>transient state data.<br>ee <br>~~a~~<br>|✔<br> ee<br>~~a~~<br>|✔<br>~~a~~<br>|✔<br>~~a~~<br>||
||557<br>~~a~~<br>ee||Current average value<br>monitor signal output<br>reference current<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|0.01 A<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|Rated<br>inverter cur-<br>rent<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|0–500 A<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|Set the reference (100%) for outputting the<br>signal of the current average value<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|✔<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|✔<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|✔<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE||
|—<br>_|563<br>564<br>~~a~~<br>ee<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 52<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|||||||||
||571<br>~~a~~<br>ee<br>ee<br>es||Refer to Pr. 13<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|||||||||
||611<br>~~a~~<br>ee<br>ee<br>es||Refer to Pr. 57<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|||||||||
||645<br>~~a~~<br>ee<br>es||Refer to Pr. C1 (901)<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|||||||||
|Reduce mechanical<br>resonance<br>_ <br>a|653<br>~~a~~<br> ee <br>ee||Speed smoothing control<br>~~a~~<br> eeeeeEeE|0.1%<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|0<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|0–200%<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|The torque fluctuation is reduced to reduce<br>vibration due to mechanical resonance.<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|✔<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|✔<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|✔<br>~~a~~<br>eeeeeEeE|6-176<br>eeeeeEeE|
|—<br>a|665<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 882|||||||||
|a<br>a|800<br>ee||Refer to Pr. 80|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (28)_
This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
The setting is applied after an inverter reset or power-ON.
These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to section 6.19 for RS-485 communication.)
6 - 28
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Ethernet Communication|805�,�||Ethernet IP address 1|1|192|0–255|Enter the IP address of the inverter to be<br>connected to Ethernet.|—|✔ �|✔ �|6-283|
||806�,�||Ethernet IP address 2|1|168|0–255||—|✔ �|✔ �||
||807�,�||Ethernet IP address 3|1|50|0–255||—|✔ �|✔ �||
||808�,�||Ethernet IP address 4|1|1|0–255||—|✔ �|✔ �||
||809�,�||Subnet mask 1|1|255|0–255|Enter the subnet mask of the network to<br>which the inverter belongs|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||810�,�||Subnet mask 2|1|255|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||811�,�||Subnet mask 3|1|255|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||812�,�||Subnet mask 4|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||830�,�||Ethernet communication<br>network number|1|1|1–239|Enter the network number.|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||831�,�||Ethernet communication<br>station number|1|1|1–120|Enter the station number.|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||832�,�||Link speed and duplex mode<br>selection|1|0|0–4|Set the communication speed and the<br>communication mode (full-duplex/half-<br>duplex).|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||833�,�||Ethernet function selection 1|1|31|0, 10, 20, 30,<br>31, 36, 38, 9999|Set the application, protocol, etc.|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||834�,�||Ethernet function selection 2|1|20|||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||835�,�||Ethernet function selection 3|1|9999|||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||837�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 1|1|0|0–255|Set the range of connectable IP addresses for<br>the network devces.<br>(When Pr. 837 to Pr. 840 = "0 (initial value)",<br>the function is invalid.)|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||838�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 2|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||839�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 3|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||840�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 4|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||841�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 2<br>range specification|1|9999|0–255, 9999||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||842�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 3<br>range specification|1|9999|0–255, 9999||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||843�,�||Ethernet IP filter address 4<br>range specification|1|9999|0–255, 9999||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||844�,�||Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 1|1|0|0–255|To limit the network devices that send the<br>operation or speed command through the<br>Ethernet network (MODBUS®/TCP or CC-Link<br>IE Field Network Basic), set the range of IP<br>addresses of the devices.<br>When Pr. 844 to Pr.847 = "0 (initial value)",<br>no IP address is specified for sending<br>commands through the Ethernet network. In<br>this case, operation through the Ethernet<br>network (MODBUS®/TCP or CC-Link IE Field<br>Network Basic) is not available.<br>When four or more clients attempt a<br>connection to the inverter during MODBUS®/<br>TCP communication, the connection<br>attempted from outside of the IP address<br>range set for Ethernet command source<br>selection may be forcibly closed.|✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||845�,�||Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 2|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||846�,�||Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 3|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||847�,�||Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 4|1|0|0–255||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||848�,�||Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 3 range<br>specification|1|9999|0–255, 9999||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
||849�,�||Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 4 range<br>specification|1|9999|0–255, 9999||✔|✔ �|✔ �||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (29)_
- This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
- The setting is applied after an inverter reset or power-ON.
- These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (All parameter clear) is executed from Ethernet network (MODBUS®/TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic).
- (Refer to page 6-333 for the details of the MODBUS®/TCP, and page 6-349 for the details of the CCLink IE Field Network Basic.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 29
Parameter overview
Parameter
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Parameter**<br>**Related**<br>**Parameters**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Ethernet Communication|850||Ethernet TCP disconnection<br>time coefficient|1|3600|1–7200|When the inverter does not receive a packet<br>within the time calculated by multiplying<br>the Pr. 850 setting by 8 in seconds from the<br>devices with the TCP connection established,<br>the connection will be forcibly closed.|✔|✔|✔|6-283|
||851<br>ee||Ethernet signal loss detection<br>function selection<br>ee|1<br>ee|3<br>ee|0, 2, 3<br>ee|Set the availability of the signal loss<br>detection and select the action when<br>Ethernet communication is interrupted by<br>physical factors.<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee||
||852<br>442<br>,<br>443<br>,<br>444<br>,<br>445<br>,<br>Ss<br>cof<br>ef<br>ef||Ethernet communication<br>check time interval|0.1 s|1.5 s|0, 0.1–999.8 s,<br>9999|Set the interval of the communication check<br>(signal loss detection) time for all devices<br>with IP addresses in the range specified for<br>Ethernet command source selection (Pr. 844<br>to Pr. 849). If a no-communication state<br>persists for the permissible time or longer,<br>the inverter output is shut off.|✔<br>=|✔<br>=|✔<br>=||
|||442<br>,<br>Ss<br>cof|Default gateway address 1<br>cof<br>||1<br>||0|0–255|Enter the IP address of the default gateway,<br>which is a device connecting the different<br>networks, to establish a communication<br>between the inverter and the devices<br>outside the inverter network.|✔<br>=<br>TT|✔<br>=<br>TT|✔<br>=<br>TT||
|||443<br>,<br>Ss<br>cof<br>ef|Default gateway address 2<br>cof<br>|<br>ef<br>||1<br>||0|0–255||✔<br>=<br>TT<br>TT|✔<br>=<br>TT<br>TT|✔<br>=<br>TT<br>TT||
|||444<br>,<br>cof<br>ef<br>ef|Default gateway address 3<br>cof<br>|<br>ef<br>|<br>ef<br>>|1<br>||0|0–255||✔<br>TT<br>TT<br>Te|✔<br>TT<br>TT<br>Te|✔<br>TT<br>TT<br>Te||
|||445<br>,<br>ef<br>ef|Default gateway address 4<br>ef<br>|<br>ef<br>>|1|0|0–255||✔<br>TT<br>Te|✔<br>TT<br>Te|✔<br>TT<br>Te||
|—<br>~~a~~|859<br>ef<br>~~a~~||Refer to Pr. 84<br>ef<br>><br>Te<br>~~a~~|||||||||
||872<br>~~a~~<br>a||Refer to Pr. 251<br>~~a~~|||||||||
|Regeneration avoidance function|882||Regeneration<br>avoidance operation selection|1|0|0|Regeneration avoidance function invalid|✔|✔|✔|6-314|
|||||||1|Regeneration avoidance function is always<br>valid|||||
|||||||2|Regeneration avoidance function is valid<br>only during a constant speed operation|||||
||883||Regeneration<br>avoidance operation level|0.1 V|400 V/<br>780 V *|300–800 V|Set the bus voltage level at which<br>regeneration avoidance operates. When the<br>bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage<br>error will be less apt to occur. However, the<br>actual deceleration time increases.<br>The set value must be higher<br>than the "power supply<br>voltage x 2.<br>_* The initial value differs according to the_<br>_voltage class: 200 V/400 V_|✔|✔|✔||
||885||Regeneration avoidance<br>compensation frequency limit<br>value|0.01 Hz|6 Hz|0–10 Hz|Set the limit value of frequency which rises<br>at activation of regeneration avoidance<br>function.|✔|✔|✔||
|||||||9999|Frequency limit invalid|||||
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (30)_
This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
The setting is applied after an inverter reset or power-ON.
These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (All parameter clear) is executed from Ethernet network (MODBUS®/TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic).
(Refer to page 6-333 for the details of the MODBUS®/TCP, and page 6-349 for the details of the CCLink IE Field Network Basic.)
6 - 30
Parameter
Parameter overview
|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Parameter**|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Incre-**<br>**ments**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Para-**<br>**meter-**<br>**Copy**|**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**All**<br>**Para-**<br>**meter**<br>**Clear**|**Refer**<br>**to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Related**<br>**Parameters**||||||✔**: Enabled**<br>**—: Disabled**||||
|Regeneration avoidance<br>function|886||Regeneration avoidance<br>voltage gain|0.1%|100%|0–200%|Adjusts responsiveness at activation of<br>regeneration avoidance. A larger setting of<br>Pr. 886 will improve responsiveness to the<br>bus voltage change. However, the output<br>frequency could become unstable.<br>When the load inertia of the motor is large,<br>decrease the Pr. 886 setting.When vibration<br>is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886<br>setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665.|✔|✔|✔|6-314|
|||665|Regeneration avoidance<br>frequency gain|0.1%|100%|0–200%||||||
|Free parameter|888||Free parameter 1|1|9999|0–9999|Parameters you can use for your own<br>purposes.<br>Used for maintenance, management, etc. by<br>setting a unique number to each inverter<br>when multiple inverters are used.<br>Data is held even if the inverter power is<br>turned off.|✔|—|—|6-328|
||889||Free parameter 2|1|9999|0–9999||✔|—|—||
|Adjustment of terminal<br>AM output (calibration)|C1<br>(901)||AM terminal calibration|—|—|—|Calibrate the scale of the analog meter<br>connected to terminal AM.|✔|—|✔|6-150|
|||645|AM 0 V adjustment|1|1000|970–1200|Calibrates the scale of the meter when<br>analog output is 0.|✔|—|✔||
|—|C2<br>(902)<br>–<br>C7<br>(905)||Refer to Pr. 125 and Pr. 126|||||||||
|—|C22<br>(922)<br>–<br>C25<br>(923)||Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.|||||||||
|Buzzer control of<br>the operation panel|990||PU buzzer control|1|1|0|Without buzzer|✔|✔|✔|6-332|
|||||||1|With buzzer|||||
|Contrast adjustment of<br>the parameter unit|991||PU contrast adjustment|1|58|0–63|Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the<br>parameter unit (FR-PU04) can be performed.<br>0 (light)�63 (dark)|✔|✔|✔|6-332|
|Clear parameters,<br>Initial value change list|Pr.CL||Parameter clear|1|0|0/1|Setting "1" returns all parameters except calibration parameters to the initial<br>values.||||4-17|
||ALLC||All parameter clear|1|0|0/1|Setting "1" returns all parameters to the initial values.||||4-17|
||Er.CL||Fault history clear|1|0|0/1|Setting "1" will clear eight past alarms.||||7-21|
||Pr.CH||Initial value change list|1|0|0|Displays the parameters changed from the initial value.||||4-18|
_**Tab. 6-1:** Parameter overview (31)_
**NOTE**
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 31
Control mode
Parameter
## **6.2 Control mode**
V/F control (initial setting), advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control are available with the inverter FR-E700SC.
## **V/F control**
It controls frequency and voltage so that the ratio of frequency (f) to voltage (V) is constant when changing frequency.
## **Advanced (general-purpose) magnetic flux vector control**
- This control divides the inverter output current into an excitation current and a torque current by vector calculation and makes voltage compensation to flow a motor current which meets the load torque. Before operation of a motor in advanced magnetic flux vector control, the self-setting of motor data must occur.
- General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as the FR-E500 series. For other cases, select advanced magnetic flux vector control.
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven rotation may occur.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
- Motor to be used is any of Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2 kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.2 kW to 15 kW). When using a motor other than the above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
- Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
- Wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30 m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30 m.)
6 - 32
Control mode
Parameter
## **6.2.1 Change the control method (Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800)**
Set when selecting the control method for advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control. The initial value is V/F control.
- Select a control mode using Pr. 800 "Control method selection".
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting Range**|**Descripton**|**Descripton**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**80**|Motor capacity|9999|0.1–15 kW|Set the applied motor capacity.||
||||9999|V/F control||
|**81**|Number of motor poles|9999|2/4/6/8/10|Set the number of motor poles.||
||||9999|V/F control||
|**800**|Control method selection|20|20|V/F control|Advanced<br>magnetic flux<br>vector control �|
||||30||General-purpose<br>magnetic flux<br>vector control�|
|||||||
- Set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
## **Setting of the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr. 80, Pr. 81)**
- Motor specifications (motor capacity and number of motor poles) must be set to select advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
- Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and set the number of motor poles in Pr. 81 "Number of motor poles".
## **Selection of control method**
Select the inverter control method for V/F control, advanced magnetic flux vector control, and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
|**Pr. 80, Pr. 81**|**Pr. 800**|**Control Method**|
|---|---|---|
|�9999|20<br>(Pr. 800 initial value)|Advanced magnetic flux vector con-<br>trol|
||30|General-purpose magnetic flux vector<br>control|
|9999<br>(Pr. 80, Pr. 81 initial value)|—�|V/F control|
## _**Tab. 6-2:** Selection of control method_
- Control method is V/F control regardless of the setting value of Pr. 800 when "9999" is set in Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" or Pr. 81 "Number of motor poles".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 33
Control mode
Parameter
## **Control method switching by external terminals (X18 signal)**
- Use the V/F switchover signal (X18) to change the control method (between V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control (General-purpose magnetic flux vector control)) with external terminal.
- Turn the X18 signal on to change the currently selected control method (advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control) to V/F control.
For the terminal used for X18 signal input, set "18" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
## **NOTES**
Switch the control method using external terminal (X18 signal) during an inverter stop. If control method between V/F control and Advanced (General-purpose) magnetic flux vector control is switched during the operation, the actual switchover does not take place until the inverter stops. In addition, if control method is switched to V/F control during the operation, only second function becomes valid as V/F control and second functions are selected simultaneously in V/F control.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 34
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor**
## **6.3**
**Refer to Purpose Parameter that must be set Section** Set starting torque manually Manual torque boost Pr. 0, Pr. 46, 6.3.1 Automatically control output current Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Pr. 71, Pr. 80, 6.3.2 according to load General-purpose magnetic flux vector control Pr. 81, Pr. 90, 6.3.3 Pr. 450, Pr. 800 Compensate for motor slip to secure Slip compensation (V/F control and generalPr. 245–Pr. 247 6.3.4 low-speed torque purpose magnetic flux vector control only) Limit output current to prevent Stall prevention operation Pr. 22, Pr. 23, 6.3.5 inverter trip Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157 ~~—~~ **Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) V/F** You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low-frequency region to improve motor torque reduction in the low-speed range. Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
## **6.3.1 Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)**
|Switch-over between parameters 0 and 46 is possible via the RT input signal.|
|---|
|The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.<br>**Pr.**<br>**No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>**0**<br>Torque boost<br>FR-E720S-008SC to 050SC,<br>FR-E740-016SC and 026SC<br>6%<br>0–30%<br>Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.<br>3<br>19<br>71<br>178–184<br>Base frequency<br>Base frequency voltage<br>Applied motor<br>Input terminal function<br>selection<br>6.5.1<br>6.5.1<br>6.8.2<br>6.10.1<br>FR-E720S-080SC and 110SC,<br>FR-E740-040SC to 095SC<br>4%<br>FR-E740-120SC and 170SC<br>3%<br>FR-E740-230SC and 300SC<br>2%<br>**46**<br>Second torque<br>boost<br>9999<br>0–30%<br>Set the torque boost value when the<br>RT signal is on.<br>9999<br>Without second torque boost<br>~~po~~|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 35
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Starting torque adjustment**
The set value indicates the percentage of the maximum output voltage at 0 Hz by which the output voltage is increased. The voltage increases in direct proportion to the frequency from the time of startup until the operating frequency and voltage have been reached..
_**Fig. 6-1:** Relationship between output frequency and output_ [%] _voltage_ 100 ee | | 50 30 | ({ | {B Setting range Pr. 0, Pr. 46
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000001C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**This setting should be made with great care.**_
_**If the set value is too high then the motor is operated with overvoltage and reaches magnetic saturation. The current consumption rises dramatically in a saturated motor without any concomitant improvement in torque. Adjust the parameter little by little (about 0.5%), and check the motor status each time. If the setting is too large, the motor will overheat. The guideline is about 10% at the greatest.**_
_**The requirements of the motor manufacturer must also be observed.**_
## **Set multiple base frequencies (RT signal, Pr. 46)**
Use the second torque boost when changing the torque boost according to application or when using multiple motors by switching between them by one inverter.
Pr. 46 "Second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on. For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184.
6 - 36
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **NOTES**
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to section 6.10.3.)
The amount of current flows in the motor may become large according to the conditions such as the motor characteristics, load, acceleration/deceleration time, wiring length, etc., resulting in an overcurrent trip (OL (overcurrent alarm) then E.OC1 (overcurrent trip during acceleration), overload trip (E.THM (motor overload trip), or E.THT (inverter overload trip). (When a fault occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 setting 1% by 1% to reset.)
The Pr. 0, Pr. 46 settings are valid only when V/F control is selected.
When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant torque motor) with the FR-E740-120SC and 170SC, set torque boost value to 2%. When Pr. 0 = 3% (initial value), if Pr. 71 value is changed to the setting for use with a constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting changes to 2%.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 37
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **6.3.2 Advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 89, Pr. 800)** ak **AD MFVC**
Advanced magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the capacity, poles and type of the motor used in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
- Advanced magnetic flux vector control? The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation so that the motor current which meets the load torque to flow. Output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is made so that the motor actual speed approximates a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates drastically, etc.
When the FR-E500 series used for general-purpose magnetic flux vector control was replaced, select general-purpose magnetic flux vector control only when the same operation characteristic is necessary.
|**Pr. No.**<br>~~e~~|**Name**<br>~~e~~e|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**71**<br>~~e~~|Applied motor<br>~~e~~e|0|0/1/3–6/13–16/<br>23/24/40/43/44/<br>50/53/54|By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor,<br>thermal characteristic and motor constants of each motor<br>are set.|
|**80**<br>~~e~~|Motor capacity<br>~~e~~e<br>~~e~~<br>~~e~~e|9999<br>~~e~~<br>e|0.1–15 kW<br>~~e~~ee|Set the applied motor capacity.<br>ee|
||||9999<br>~~e~~ee<br>a<br>eeee|V/F control<br>ee<br>ee|
|**81**<br>~~|~~|Number of motor<br>poles<br>~~e~~<br>~~e~~e<br>~~|~~{||9999<br>~~e~~<br>e<br>{||2/4/6/8/10<br>~~e~~ee<br>a<br>eeee|Set the number of motor poles.<br>ee<br>ee|
||||9999<br>eeee<br>|<br>fe|V/F control<br>ee<br>fe|
|**89**<br>~~|~~|Speed control gain<br>(advanced magnetic<br>flux vector)<br>~~e~~e<br>~~|~~{|<br>~~2~~|9999<br>e <br>{|<br>eee|0–200%<br> eeee<br>|<br>fe|Motor speed fluctuation due to load fluctuation is<br>adjusted during advanced magnetic flux vector control.<br>100% is a referenced value.<br>ee<br>fe|
||||9999<br>|<br>fe<br>es<br>eee|Gain matching with the motor set in Pr. 71.<br>fe<br>ee<br>ee~~e~~|
|**800**<br>~~|~~|Control method<br>selection<br>~~|~~ {|<br>~~2~~|20<br>{|<br>eee|20<br>|<br>fe<br>es<br>eee|Advanced magnetic flux vector control<br>fe<br>ee<br>ee~~e~~|
||||30<br>es <br>eee|General-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br> ee<br>ee~~e~~|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven rotation may occur.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
- Motor to be used is any of Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2 kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.2 kW to 15 kW). When using a motor other than the above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
- Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
- The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30 m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30 m.)
- Permissible wiring length between inverter and motor differs according to the inverter capacity and setting value of Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" (carrier frequency) (refer to page 3-13).
6 - 38
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Selection method of advanced magnetic flux vector control**
**==> picture [381 x 561] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Perform secure wiring.<br>(Refer to section 3.2.)<br>Set the motor. (Pr. 71)<br>Motor Pr. 71 [�] Remarks<br>0<br>Mitsubishi standard SF-JR<br>(initial value)<br>motor<br>Mitsubishi high effi- SF-HR 40<br>ciency motor Others 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary [�]<br>SF-JRCA 4P 1<br>Mitsubishi constant-<br>SF-HRCA 4P 50<br>torque motor<br>Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary [�]<br>Other manufacturer's standard motor — 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary [�]<br>Other manufacturer's — 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary [�]<br>constant-torque motor<br>� Refer to section 6.8.2, for other settings of Pr. 71.<br>� Refer to section 6.8.3 for offline auto tuning.<br>Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles.<br>(Pr. 80, Pr. 81) (Refer to section 6.2.1.)<br>Set motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and the number of motor<br>poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 "Number of motor poles".<br>(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).<br>Select the control method. (Pr. 800)<br>(Refer to section 6.3.2.)<br>Set "20" (initial value) in Pr. 800 to make advanced magnetic flux vector<br>control valid.<br>Set the operation command.<br>(Refer to section 6.18.1.)<br>Select the start command and speed command.<br>1) Start command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the RUN key of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse<br>rotation command (terminal STF or STR)<br>2) Speed command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the digital dial of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External analog command (terminal 2 or 4):<br>Give a speed command using the analog signal input to<br>terminal 2 (or terminal 4).<br>–<br>Multi-speed command:<br>The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give<br>speed command.<br>Test run<br>� Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to section 6.8.3.)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-2:** Selection method of advanced magnetic flux vector control_
**NOTES** Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. It is not suitable for machines such as grinding machine and wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.
When a surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) is connected between the inverter and motor, output torque may decrease.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 39
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Adjust the motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation**
The motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation can be adjusted using Pr. 89. (It is useful when the speed command does not match the motor speed after the FR-E500 series inverter is replaced with the FR-E700 SC series inverter, etc.)
**==> picture [330 x 102] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-3:<br>Adjustment of speed fluctuations<br>Speed<br>Load torque<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001544E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 40
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **6.3.3 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800)** ak **GP MFVC**
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as the FR-E500 series. Select this control when the same operation characteristic is necessary. For other cases, select advanced magnetic flux vector control.
|**Pr. No.**<br>~~e~~|**Name**<br>~~e~~|**Initial Value**<br>~~ee~~|**Setting Range**<br>~~e~~|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**71**<br>~~e~~|Applied motor<br>~~e~~<br> ———<br>~~P~~E|0<br>~~ee~~<br>———<br>E|0/1/3–6/13–16/23/24/<br>40/43/44/50/53/54<br>~~e~~<br>—————|By selecting a standard motor or constant torque motor,<br>thermal characteristic and motor constants of each motor<br>are set.<br>po<br>——|
|**80**<br>~~e~~|Motor capacity<br>~~e~~<br> ———<br>~~P~~E|9999<br>~~ee~~<br>———<br>E|0.1–15 kW<br>~~e~~<br>—————|Applied motor capacity.<br>po<br>——|
||||9999<br>~~e~~<br>—————|V/F control<br>po<br>——|
|**81**<br>~~e~~|Number of motor<br>poles<br>~~e~~<br> ———<br>~~P~~E<br>~~e~~n|9999<br>~~ee~~<br>———<br>E<br>n|2/4/6/8/10<br>~~e~~<br>—————|Number of motor poles.<br>po<br>——|
||||9999<br>——|V/F control<br>——<br>]<br>e~~e~~|
|**800**|Control method<br>selection<br><br>~~P~~E<br>~~e~~n|20<br><br>E<br>n|20<br>——|Advanced magnetic flux vector control<br>——<br>]<br>e~~e~~|
||||30<br>ee|General-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br>e~~e~~<br>ee|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and uneven rotation may occur.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
- Motor to be used is any of Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2 kW or more) or Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.2 kW to 15 kW). When using a motor other than the above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
- Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
- The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30 m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30 m.)
- Permissible wiring length between inverter and motor differs according to the inverter capacity and setting value of Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" (carrier frequency) (refer to page 3-13).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 41
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Selection method of general-purpose magnetic flux vector control**
**==> picture [372 x 558] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Perform secure wiring.<br>(Refer to section 3.2.)<br>Set the motor. (Pr. 71)<br>a Motor Pr. 71 Remarks<br>0<br>Mitsubishi standard SF-JR<br>(initial value)<br>motor<br>Mitsubishi high effi- eS SF-HR 40<br>SS ciency motor Others 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary<br>SF-JRCA 4P 1<br>Mitsubishi constant-<br>SF-HRCA 4P 50<br>torque motor<br>ee Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary<br>SS a————a<br>Other manufacturer's standard motor — 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary<br>es Other manufacturer's a — a 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary<br>constant-torque motor<br>ee ee 2)<br>Refer to section 6.8.2, for other settings of Pr. 71.<br>Refer to section 6.8.3 for offline auto tuning.<br>v<br>Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles.<br>(Pr. 80, Pr. 81) (Refer to section 6.2.1.)<br>Set motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and the number of motor<br>poles (number of poles) in Pr. 81 "Number of motor poles".<br>(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).<br>Select the control method. (Pr. 800)<br>(Refer to section 6.3.2.)<br>Set "30" in Pr. 800 to make general-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br>valid.<br>Set the operation command.<br>(Refer to section 6.18.1.)<br>Select the start command and speed command.<br>1) Start command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the RUN key of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse<br>rotation command (terminal STF or STR)<br>2) Speed command<br>–<br>Operation panel: Setting by pressing the digital dial of the<br>operation panel<br>–<br>External analog command (terminal 2 or 4):<br>Give a speed command using the analog signal input to<br>terminal 2 (or terminal 4).<br>–<br>Multi-speed command:<br>The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give<br>speed command.<br>Test run<br>Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to section 6.8.3.)<br>Set slip compensation. (Pr. 245, Pr. 246, Pr. 247) (Refer to section 6.3.4.)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-4:** Selection method of general-purpose magnetic flux vector control_
**NOTES** Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. It is not suitable for machines such as grinding machine and wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.
When a surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) is connected between the inverter and motor, output torque may decrease.
6 - 42
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **6.3.4 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)** = **V/F** Lak **GP MFVC**
||When V/F control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control is performed, the inverter output|
|---|---|
||current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed constant.|
|The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.<br>**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting Range**<br>**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>**245**<br>Rated slip<br>9999<br>0.01–50%<br>Rated motor slip.<br>1<br>3<br>Maximum frequency<br>Base frequency<br>6.4.1<br>6.5.1<br>0/9999<br>No slip compensation<br>**246**<br>Slip compensation time constant<br>0.5 s<br>0.01–10 s<br>Slip compensation response time. When the<br>value is made smaller, response will be<br>faster. However, as load inertia is greater, a<br>regenerative overvoltage fault (E.OV<br>) is<br>more liable to occur.<br>**247**<br>Constant-output region slip<br>compensation selection<br>9999<br>0<br>Slip compensation is not made in the<br>constant power range (frequency range<br>above the frequency set in Pr. 3)<br>9999<br>Slip compensation is made in the constant<br>power range.<br>~~e~~e ee **e**e<br>pe<br>e<br>~~pf~~<br>|fe<br>P| Ee}||
||Slip compensation is validated when the motor rated slip calculated by the following formula is set to|
||Pr. 245. Slip compensation is not made when Pr. 245 = 0 or 9999.|
||Rated slip<br>Synchronous speed at base frequency<br>Rated speed<br>–<br>Synchronous speed at base frequency<br>---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------**-**<br>100%<br>=|
## **NOTES**
When performing slip compensation, the output frequency may become greater than the set frequency. Set the Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" value a little higher than the set frequency.
Slip compensation is always valid when advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected, the Pr. 245 to Pr. 247 settings are invalid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 43
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **6.3.5 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157, Pr. 277)**
This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from coming to trip due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. In addition, simple torque limit which limits the output torque to the predetermined value can be selected.
It can also limit stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration, driving or regeneration.
- Stall prevention
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to reduce the output current.
- Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
## ● Torque limit
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**<br>||**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**22**|Stall prevention operation level<br>|<br>P||150%<br>P|[LE|0|Stall prevention operation invalid|
||||0.1–200%<br>[LE|Set the current value to start the stall<br>prevention operation.<br>[LE|
|**23**|Stall prevention operation level<br>compensation factor at double speed<br>|<br>P||9999<br>P|[LE|0–200%<br>[LE|The stall operation level can be reduced<br>when operating at a high speed above the<br>rated frequency.<br>[LE|
||||9999<br>[LE|Constant according to Pr. 22.<br>[LE|
|**48**|Second stall prevention operation<br>current<br>|<br>P|<br>a|9999<br>P| [LE<br>ee|0<br>[LE<br>rs|Stall prevention operation invalid<br>[LE<br>rs|
||||0.1–200%<br>es|Second stall prevention operation level<br>es|
||||9999<br>ee|Same level as Pr. 22.<br>ee|
|**66**|Stall prevention operation reduction<br>starting frequency<br>a|50Hz<br>ee|0–400 Hz<br>ee|Set the frequency at which the stall<br>operation level is started to reduce.<br>ee|
|**156**|Stall prevention operation selection<br>a|0<br>ee|0–31/<br>100/101<br>ee|Select whether stall prevention operation<br>and fast-response current limit operation<br>will be performed or not.<br>ee|
|**157**|OL signal output timer<br>||0s|0–25 s|Output start time of the OL signal output<br>when stall prevention is activated.|
||||9999|Without the OL signal output|
|**277**|Stall prevention operation current<br>switchover<br>a|0<br>eee|0<br>eee|Output current is the limit level<br>eee|
||||1<br>eee|Output torque (torque current) is the limit<br>level<br>eee|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
6 - 44
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Block diagram**
**==> picture [351 x 94] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
RT = OFF<br>Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation invalid<br>RT = ON<br>Pr. 48 Stall prevention operation level<br>Output frequency<br>Pr. 23, Pr. 66<br>I001883E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-5:** Stall prevention block diagram_
## **Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22)**
Set in Pr. 22 the percentage of the output current to the rated inverter current at which stall prevention operation will be performed. Normally set this parameter to 150% (initial value).
Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration during constant speed, and stops deceleration (makes acceleration) during deceleration.
When stall prevention operation is performed, the OL signal is output.
**==> picture [322 x 135] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output current<br>Pr. 22<br>Output frequency<br>Constant speed<br>Time<br>OL<br>I001120E<br>Acceleration Deceleration<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-6:** Stall prevention operation example_
## **NOTE**
If an overload status lasts long, an inverter trip (e.g. electronic thermal relay function "E.THM") may occur.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 45
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **A machine protection and load limit by torque limit (Pr. 277)**
When Pr. 277 "Stall prevention current switchover" = 1, torque limit can be set.
When output torque (torque current) exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency is controlled to limit the output torque. For the stall prevention operation level at this time, the motor rated torque is defined as reference.
## **NOTES**
When driving multiple motors with one inverter, torque limit does not function properly.
Since magnetic flux decreases in the constant output range (Pr. 3 "Base frequency" or more), the inverter operate with lower torque than the stall prevention operation level.
When torque limit is activated during regeneration, the output frequency is increased up to the maximum frequency.
Torque limit does not function at 5 Hz or less during deceleration.
Note the following when using torque limit under V/F control.
Capacity of the inverter and motor should be the same.
Stall prevention operation level (torque limit level) is the rated torque reference of the motor whose capacity is equivalent to the inverter.
When Pr. 0 "Torque boost" setting is large, torque limit is likely to occur in the low speed range.
Use the advanced magnetic flux vector control when more appropriate torque limit is necessary.
6 - 46
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Stall prevention operation signal output and output timing adjustment (OL signal, Pr. 157)**
When the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, the stall prevention operation signal (OL signal) turns on for longer than 100 ms. When the output current falls to or below the stall prevention operation level, the output signal turns off. Use Pr. 157 "OL signal output timer" to set whether the OL signal is output immediately or after a preset period of time.
This operation is also performed when the regeneration avoidance function or oL (overvoltage stall) is executed.
For the OL signal, set "3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" and assign functions to the output terminal.
|**Pr. 157 Setting**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|0|Output immediately.|
|0.1–25 s|Output after the set time (s) has elapsed.|
|9999|Not output.|
## _**Tab. 6-3:** Setting of parameter 157_
## **NOTES**
**==> picture [305 x 95] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-7:<br>Overload state Output of the OL signal<br>OL output signal<br>Pr. 157<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001330E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
If the frequency has fallen to 1 Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3 s, a fault (E.OLT) appears to trip the inverter output.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 47
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Setting of stall prevention operation in high frequency range (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)**
During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the current at motor lockup becomes smaller than the rated output current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not executed if the motor is at a stop.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high frequency region. This function is effective for performing operation up to the highspeed range on a centrifugal separator etc.
Pr. 23 sets the change in the current limiting in the frequency range starting at the frequency set by Pr. 66. For example, if Pr. 66 is set to 75 Hz the motor stall prevention operation level at an output frequency of 150 Hz will be reduced to 75% when Pr. 23 is set to 100%, and to 66% when Pr. 23 is set to 50% (see the formula below). Generally Pr. 66 is set to 50 Hz and Pr. 23 to 100%.
**==> picture [351 x 149] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 23 = 9999<br>Current limiting if the current limit was set at higher<br>frequency (Pr. 23).<br>Pr . 66 400 Hz<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>I001900E<br>Current [%]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-8:** Stall prevention operation level_
**==> picture [401 x 141] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-9:<br>Setting example Pr. 22 = 150%Pr. 23 = 100% Stall prevention operation level when<br>| Pr. 66 = 50Hz | Pr. 22 = 150%, Pr. 23 = 100% and Pr. 66 = 50 Hz<br>150 1<br>75 oe<br>37.5 OS<br>la es ee ee<br>0 60 100 200 300 400<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>I001545C<br>Current [%]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Formula for stall prevention operation level:
Stall prevention operation level [%] = A + B Pr. 22-----------------------– A **-** Pr. 23-----------------------------– 100 **-** ~~“~~ Pr. 22 L – B ~~x~~ 100 where A = -----------------------------Output frequency [Hz]Pr. 66 [Hz] x -------------------------Pr. 22 [%] **-** , B = Pr. 66 [Hz]---------------------------400Hz x -------------------------Pr. 22 [%]
When Pr. 23 "Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed" = 9999 (initial value), the stall prevention operation level is kept constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400 Hz.
6 - 48
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Set two types stall prevention operation levels (Pr. 48)**
Turning RT signal on makes Pr. 48 "Second stall prevention operation current" valid.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
## **NOTES**
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 49
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
## **Limit the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit operation according to the operating status (Pr. 156)**
Refer to the following table and select whether fast-response current limit operation will be performed or not and the operation to be performed at OL signal output:
|**Pr. 156**<br>**Setting**<br>~~ee~~|**Fast-Respons**<br>**Current Limit**<br>~~ee~~|**Stall Prevention Operation Level**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|**Stall Prevention Operation Level**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|**Stall Prevention Operation Level**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|**OL Signal Output**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~ee|**OL Signal Output**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~ee|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Acceleration**<br>~~ee~~|**Constant speed**<br>~~ee~~|**Deceleration**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|**Without Alarm**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|**Stop with Alarm**<br>**"E.OLT"**<br>~~ee~~<br>ee|
|0<br>~~pO~~<br>po|✔<br>~~pO~~|✔<br>~~pO~~|✔<br>~~pO~~|✔<br>~~ee~~<br>~~pO~~|✔<br>~~ee~~ <br>~~pO~~|—<br> ee<br>~~pO~~|
|1<br>po<br>po|—|✔|✔|✔|✔|—|
|2<br>po<br>po<br>LR|✔<br>se|—<br>se|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔|—|
|3<br>po<br>LR|—<br>se|—<br>se|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔|—|
|4<br>LR<br>pO|✔<br>se<br>pO|✔<br>se <br>pO|—<br> GG<br>pO|✔<br>GG<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|
|5<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|
|6<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|
|7<br>pO<br>pO<br>LR|—<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|
|8<br>pO<br>LR<br>po|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|
|9<br>LR<br>po<br>pO|—|✔|✔|—|✔|—|
|10<br>po<br>pO<br>LR|✔<br>Ce|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|
|11<br>pO<br>LR|—<br>Ce|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|
|12<br>LR <br>pO<br>LR|✔<br> Ce<br>pO<br>se|✔<br>GG<br>pO<br>se|—<br>GG<br>pO<br>GG|—<br>GG<br>pO<br>GG|✔<br>GG<br>pO|—<br>GG<br>pO|
|13<br>LR|—<br>se|✔<br>se|—<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔|—|
|14<br>LR<br>Cs|✔<br>se<br>Cs|—<br>se|—<br> GG<br>GG|—<br>GG<br>GG|OT|OT|
|15<br>po|—<br>po|—<br>po|—<br>po|—<br>po|po<br>OT|po<br>OT|
|16<br>pO|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>OT<br>pO|✔<br>OT<br>pO|
|17<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|—<br>pO<br>pO|✔<br>pO<br>pO|
|18<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|
|19<br>pO<br>LR|—<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|
|20<br>LR<br>po|✔|✔|—|✔|—|✔|
|21<br>LR<br>po<br>pO|—|✔|—|✔|—|✔|
|22<br>po<br>pO<br>LR|✔<br>Ce|—<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|
|23<br>pO<br>LR|—<br>Ce|—<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|
|24<br>LR <br>pO<br>po|✔<br> Ce<br>pO|✔<br>GG<br>pO|✔<br>GG<br>pO|—<br>GG<br>pO|—<br>GG<br>pO|✔<br>GG<br>pO|
|25<br>po<br>po|—|✔|✔|—|—|✔|
|26<br>po<br>po<br>LR|✔<br>se|—<br>se|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|—|✔|
|27<br>po<br>LR|—<br>se|—<br>se|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|—|✔|
|28<br>LR<br>pO|✔<br>se<br>pO|✔<br>se <br>pO|—<br> GG<br>pO|—<br>GG<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|
|29<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|—<br>pO|—<br>pO|—<br>pO|✔<br>pO|
|30<br>po<br>LR|✔<br>po<br>|—<br>po<br>|—<br>po<br>|—<br>po<br>|po<br>|po<br>|
|31<br>LR|—<br>|—<br>|—<br>|—<br>|||
|100 D<br>LRGG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|
|100 R<br>GG|—<br>GG|—<br>GG|—<br>GG|—<br>GG|GG|GG|
|101 D<br>GG|—<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|✔<br>GG|—<br>GG|
|101 R<br>a|—|—|—|—|||
_**Tab. 6-4:** Setting of parameter 156 (D = Driving, R = Regeneration)_
® Since both fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not activated, OL signal and E.OLT are not output.
® The settings "100" and "101" allow operations to be performed in the driving and regeneration modes, respectively. The setting "101" disables the fast-response current limit in the driving mode. © OL signal is not output at fast-response current limit operation.
6 - 50
Adjust the output torque (current) of the motor
Parameter
**NOTES** When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention is activated and acceleration/deceleration may not be made according to the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Set Pr. 156 and stall prevention operation level to the optimum values.
In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit is not activated. Torque may not be produced, causing a drop due to gravity.
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current. Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.**_
● _**Always perform test operation. Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time. Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes.**_
_**Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration distance.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 51
Limit the output frequency
Parameter
## **6.4 Limit the output frequency**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Set upper limit and lower limit of output<br>frequency|Maximum/minimum frequency|Pr. 1, Pr. 2,<br>Pr. 18|6.4.1|
|Perform operation by avoiding machine<br>resonance points|Frequency jump|Pr. 31–Pr. 36|6.4.2|
## **6.4.1 Maximum and minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)**
You can limit the motor speed. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
|**Pr.**<br>**No.**<br>e|**Name**<br>e<br>a|**Initial Value**<br>ee<br>ee|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>e|**Description**<br>e|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**1**|Maximum frequency<br>a|120 Hz<br>ee|0–120 Hz|Set the upper limit of the output<br>frequency.|
|**2**|Minimum frequency<br>a<br>a|0 Hz<br>ee|0–120 Hz|Set the lower limit of the output<br>frequency.|
|**18**|High speed maximum frequency<br>a|120 Hz|120–400 Hz|Set when performing the operation at<br>120 Hz or more|
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Set the maximum frequency**
Set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency". If the frequency of the frequency command entered is higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
When you want to perform operation above 120 Hz, set the upper limit of the output frequency to Pr. 18 "High speed maximum frequency". (When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 automatically switches to the frequency of Pr. 18. When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 18 automatically switches to the frequency of Pr. 1.)
_**Fig. 6-10:**_
**==> picture [375 x 118] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output Clamped at the<br>frequency [Hz] maximum frequency Maximum and minimum output frequency<br>Pr. 1<br>Pr. 18<br>Frequency<br>Pr. 2 setting<br>0 5, 10 V<br>Clamped at the (4 mA) (20 mA)<br>minimum frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001100E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**NOTE** When performing operation above 50 Hz using the frequency setting analog signal, change Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) "Frequency setting gain". (Refer to section 6.16.3.) If only Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 is changed, operation above 50 Hz cannot be performed.
6 - 52
Limit the output frequency
Parameter
## **Set the minimum frequency**
Use Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency" to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
**NOTES**
When Pr. 15 "Jog frequency" is equal to or less than Pr. 2, the Pr. 15 setting has precedence over the Pr. 2 setting.
The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The frequency will not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
**E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" value, note that the motor will run at the set frequency according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal on, without entry of the command frequency.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 53
Limit the output frequency
Parameter
## **6.4.2 Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)**
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**31**|Frequency jump 1A|9999|0–400 Hz/9999|1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is<br>frequency jumps<br>9999: Function invalid|
|**32**|Frequency jump 1B|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**33**|Frequency jump 2A|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**34**|Frequency jump 2B|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**35**|Frequency jump 3A|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**36**|Frequency jump 3B|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area.
The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump areas.
_**Fig. 6-11:** Definition of the jump areas_
**==> picture [407 x 111] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
______pr.34 (28)<br>; ________pr.-33(2A)<br>pr 32(1B)<br>Sa (1A)<br>Set frequency I000019C<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 54
Limit the output frequency
Parameter
The following diagrams show how the jump point is selected. The diagram on the left shows a sequence in which the jump takes place at the end of the area to be jumped, for which the lower frequency must be entered first. In the diagram on the right the jump takes place at the beginning of the frequency area to be jumped, for which the higher frequency must be entered first.
**==> picture [392 x 121] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
96} -------------(f <———_._ Pr.82((1B) $9 }-------- +——_ Pr.31(1A)<br>B2,..-.5-+ > ———_ Pr.31(1A) 32, ------- fy —_—. Pr.32(1B)<br>Set frequency Set frequency<br>I00019aC<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-12:** Selection of the jump point_
## **NOTE**
During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 55
Set V/F pattern
Parameter
## **6.5 Set V/F pattern**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Set motor ratings|Base frequency, Base frequency voltage|Pr. 3, Pr. 19,<br>Pr. 47|6.5.1|
|Select a V/F pattern according to<br>applications|Load pattern selection|Pr. 14|6.5.2|
## **6.5.1 Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)** == **V/F**
Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**3**|Base frequency|50Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency when the motor rated torque<br>is generated. (50 Hz/60 Hz)|
|**19**|Base frequency voltage|8888|0–1000 V<br>es|Set the rated motor voltage.<br>es|
||||8888<br>es|95% of power supply voltage<br>es|
||||9999<br>ee|Same as power supply voltage<br>ee|
|**47**|Second V/F<br>(base frequency)<br>©|9999<br>©<br>||0–400 Hz<br>©<br>|~~|~~|Set the base frequency when the RT signal is on.<br>©<br>|~~|~~|
||||9999<br>©<br>|~~|~~|Second V/F invalid<br>©<br>|~~|~~|
® The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Setting of base frequency (Pr. 3)**
When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 "Base frequency".
When running the motor using commercial power supply-inverter switch-over operation, set Pr. 3 to the same value as the power supply frequency.
If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "60 Hz" only, always set to "60 Hz". It may result in an inverter trip due to overload. Caution must be taken especially when Pr. 14 "Load pattern selection" = "1" (variable torque load)
**==> picture [329 x 173] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 3 = 50 Hz, Pr. 19 = 9999<br>8,00k Sater meena ne<br>|<br>|<br>|<br>Pr. 3 = 60 Hz, Pr. 19 = 220 V<br>|<br>|<br>! |<br>| |<br>[Hz]<br>50 60 120<br>|,_—____,]<br>Base frequency setting range<br>I000003aC<br>Setting range Pr. 19<br>power supply voltage<br>Output voltage related to the<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-13:** Output voltage related to the output frequency_
6 - 56
Set V/F pattern
Parameter
## **Set two kinds of base frequencies (Pr. 47)**
Use the second base frequency when you want to change the base frequency, e.g. when using multiple motors by switching between them by one inverter.
Pr. 47 "Second V/F (base frequency)" is valid when the RT signal is on.
## **NOTES**
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid.
Set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" and assign the RT signal.
## **Base frequency voltage setting (Pr. 19)**
Use Pr. 19 "Base frequency voltage" to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage). If the setting is less than the power supply voltage, the maximum output voltage of the inverter is as set in Pr. 19.
Pr. 19 can be utilized in the following cases:
- When regeneration frequency is high (e.g. continuous regeneration) During regeneration, the output voltage becomes higher than the reference and may cause an overcurrent trip (E.OC�) due to an increased motor current.
- When power supply voltage variation is large
When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, speed variation or motor overheat may be caused by excessive torque or increased motor current.
## **NOTES**
When advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control is selected, Pr. 3, Pr. 47 and Pr. 19 are invalid and Pr. 83 and Pr. 84 are valid. Note that Pr. 3 or Pr. 47 value is made valid as inflection points of S-pattern when Pr. 29 "Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection" = 1 (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A).
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Note that the output voltage of the inverter cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 57
Set V/F pattern
Parameter
## **6.5.2 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)**
You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application and load characteristics.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||0|For constant torque load||0|Torque boost|6.3.1|
||||1|For variable torque load||46<br>3|Second torque boost<br>Base frequency|6.3.1<br>6.5.1|
|**14**|Load pattern selection|0|2<br>3|For constant torque elevators (at reverse<br>rotation boost of 0%)<br>For constant torque elevators (at forward<br>rotation boost of 0%)||178–184|Input terminal function<br>selection<br>General-purpose<br>magnetic flux vector<br>control|6.10.1<br>6.3.3|
||||||||Advanced magnetic flux|6.3.2|
||||||||vector control||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **For constant-torque load (Pr. 14 = 0, initial value)**
At or less than the base frequency voltage, the output voltage varies linearly with the output frequency. Set this value when driving the load whose load torque is constant if the speed varies, e.g. conveyor, cart or roll drive.
**==> picture [406 x 129] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
[%] Fig. 6-14:<br>Constant-torque load<br>: Hz<br>Pr. 3 Base frequency<br>Output frequency I001322C<br>Output voltage<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **For variable-torque load (Pr. 14 = 1)**
At or less than the base frequency voltage, the output voltage varies with the output frequency in a square curve. Set this value when driving the load whose load torque varies in proportion to the square of the speed, e.g. fan or pump.
**==> picture [84 x 22] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-15:<br>Variable-torque load<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [406 x 89] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
: Hz<br>Pr. 3 Base frequency<br>Output frequency I001323C<br>Output voltage<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 58
Set V/F pattern
Parameter
## **Constant-torque load application (Pr. 14 = 2 or 3)**
Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power driving load at forward rotation and regenerative load at reverse rotation.
Pr. 0 "Torque boost" is valid during forward rotation and torque boost is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse rotation. Pr. 46 "Second torque boost" is made valid when the RT signal turns on.
Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during reverse rotation and in the regenerative load mode during forward rotation according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight system.
**==> picture [394 x 190] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 14 = 2 Pr. 14 = 3<br>For vertical lift loads For vertical lift loads<br>At forward rotation boost......... Pr. 0 (Pr. 46) setting, At forward rotation boost..........0%,<br>At reverse rotation boost .......... 0% At reverse rotation boost...........Pr. 0 (Pr. 46) setting<br>(Lifts, hoists, elevators) (Lifts, hoists, elevators)<br>Forward Reverse<br>rotation rotation<br>Reverse Forward<br>Pr. 0 rotation Pr. 0 rotation<br>Pr. 46 Hz Pr. 46 Hz<br>Base frequency Pr. 3 Base frequency Pr. 3<br>Output frequency Output frequency<br>I001547E<br>Output voltage Output voltage<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-16:** Characteristic with manual torque boost_
## **NOTES**
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load, it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr. 19 "Base frequency voltage" to prevent trip due to current at regeneration.
In addition, when the RT signal is on, the other second functions are also valid.
Load pattern selection does not function under advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 59
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
## **6.6**
## **Frequency setting by external terminals**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Make frequency setting by combina-<br>tion of terminals|Multi-speed operation|Pr. 4–Pr. 6,<br>Pr. 24–Pr. 27<br>Pr. 232–Pr. 239|6.6.1|
|Perform jog operation|Jog operatio|Pr. 15, Pr. 16|6.6.2|
|Infinitely variable speed setting by ter-<br>minals|Remote setting function|Pr. 59|6.6.3|
## **6.6.1 Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)**
The frequency inverters have 15 fixed setting frequencies (speeds) which can be preset by the user as required via parameters 4, 5, 6, 24 to 27 as well as via parameters 232 to 239.
Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
|**Pr.**<br>**No.**<br>r|**Name**<br>r<br>ee|**Initial Value**<br>rr<br>ee|**Setting Range**<br>r<br>ee|**Description**<br>r<br>ee|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**4**|Multi-speed setting<br>(high speed)<br>ee<br>a|50 Hz<br>ee<br>ee|0–400 Hz<br>ee|Set the frequency when RH turns on.<br>ee<br>ee|
|**5**|Multi-speed setting<br>(middle speed)<br>ee <br>ee<br>a|30 Hz<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|0–400 Hz<br>ee<br>ee|Set the frequency when RM turns on.<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|
|**6**|Multi-speed setting<br>(low speed)<br>ee<br>a|10 Hz<br>ee<br>ee|0–400 Hz<br>ee|Set the frequency when RL turns on.<br>ee<br>ee|
|**24**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 4)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999|Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can<br>be set according to the combination of the<br>RH, RM, RL and REX signals.<br>9999: not selected|
|**25**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 5)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**26**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 6)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**27**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 7)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**232**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 8)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**233**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 9)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**234**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 10)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**235**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 11)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**236**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 12)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**237**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 13)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**238**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 14)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
|**239**|Multi-speed setting<br>(speed 15)|9999|0–400 Hz/9999||
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
6 - 60
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
Operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 4 when the RH signal turns on, Pr. 5 when the RM signal turns on, and Pr. 6 when the RL signal turns on.
Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the running frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239. (In the initial value setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are unavailable.)
**==> picture [413 x 414] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-17:<br>Multi-speed selection by external terminals<br>Speed 1 (high speed)<br>Speed 2 (middle speed)<br>Speed 3 (low speed)<br>time<br>ON<br>ON<br>I002062E<br>ON<br>Speed 10<br>Speed 5 Speed 11<br>Speed 6 Speed 12<br>Speed 9<br>Speed 13<br>Speed 4 Speed 8 Speed 14<br>Speed 7 Speed 15<br>time<br>ON ON ON ON ON ON ON<br>ON ON ON ON ON ON ON<br>ON ON ON ON ON ON<br>ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON<br>a<br>I002063E<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-18:** Multi-speed selection by external terminals_
- When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 "Multi-speed setting (speed 8)", operation is performed at frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned off and REX is turned on.
## **NOTES**
In the initial setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency of the lower signal. For example, when the RH and RM signals turn on, the RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
The RH, RM, RL signals are assigned to the terminal RH, RM, RL in the initial setting. By setting "0 (RL)", "1 (RM)", "2 (RH)" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function assignment", you can assign the signals to other terminals.
For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 to assign the function.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 61
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
**==> picture [400 x 134] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-19:<br>Connection example<br>Forward<br>rotation STF<br>REX 10<br>RH 9<br>RM<br>RL<br>PC<br>I001127E<br>potentiometer<br>selection Frequency setting<br>Multi-speed<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**NOTES** The priorities of the frequency commands by the external signals are "jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4 analog input > terminal 2 analog input". (Refer to section 6.16 for the frequency command by analog input.)
Valid in external operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = 3 or 4).
Multi-speed parameters can also be set in the PU or external operation mode.
Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
When a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 59 "Remote function selection", the RH, RM and RL signals are used as the remote setting signals and the multi-speed setting becomes invalid.
The RH, RM, RL, REX signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 "Input terminal function selection". When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 62
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
## **6.6.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)**
Jog operation is used to setup the machine.The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for Jog operation can be set. As soon as the frequency inverter receives the start signal, the motor is accelerated at the frequency entered in parameter 15 (jog frequency) using the preset acceleration/brake time (parameter 16). Jog operation can be performed in either of the external and the PU operation mode.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**15**|Jog frequency|5 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency for jog operation.||13<br>29<br>20<br>21<br>79<br>178–184<br>Starting frequency<br>Acceleration/<br>deceleration pattern<br>selection<br>Acceleration/<br>deceleration reference<br>frequency<br>Acceleration/<br>deceleration time<br>increments<br>Operation mode<br>selection<br>Input terminal<br>function selection|6.7.2<br>6.7.3<br>6.7.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.18.1<br>6.10.1|
|**16**|Jog acceleration/<br>deceleration time|0.5 s|0–3600/360 s|Acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation.<br>This setting is related to to the reference frequency set<br>in Pr. 20 and the increments set in Pr. 21.<br>Pr. 21 = 0 (Initial setting)<br>Setting range: 0–3600 s<br>Increments: 0.1s<br>Pr. 21 = 1<br>Setting range: 0–360 s<br>Increments: 0.01 s<br>The acceleration and deceleration times cannot be set<br>separately.||||
These parameters are displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07) is connected. When the parameter unit is not connected, the above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Jog operation from outside**
When the jog signal is on, a start and stop can be made by the start signal (STF, STR). For the terminal used for Jog operation selection, set "5" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
**==> picture [357 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Power<br>supply Motor<br>Forward rotation start<br>Reverse rotation start<br>Jog operation<br>� When assigning the jog signal to the<br>terminal RH<br>I001788E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-20:** Connection diagram for external jog operation_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 63
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
**==> picture [406 x 484] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-21:<br>Hz Jog operation signal timing chart<br>Jog<br>Forward rotation frequency<br>Pr.15<br>iPr.16 H<br>Reverse<br>rotation<br>aoa<br>ON<br>JOG | | 1 \ | t<br>ON<br>STF | .<br>ON<br>STR | | t<br>I001324C<br>Operation Display<br>: Screen at powering on<br>Confirm that the external operation mode is<br>selected. (EXT indication is lit) a Ex<br>If not displayed, press the PU/EXT key to change<br>to the external operation mode If the operation<br>mode still does not change, set Pr. 79 to change<br>to the external operation mode.<br>JOG<br>ON<br>Turn the JOG switch on.<br>® ad<br>Forward<br>rotation<br>Turn the start switch STF or STR on. ON<br>The motor rotates while the start switch is ON.<br>It rotates at 5Hz (initial value of Pr. 15).<br>° 4ay Reverse pa Rotates while ON. es<br>rotation<br>Forward<br>rotation <><br>Turn the start switch STF or STR off.<br>OFF Reverse rotation Stop<br>QL<br>I001789E<br>Output frequency<br>Input signals<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-22:** Jog operation in the external operation mode_
6 - 64
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
## **JOG operation from PU**
Selects Jog operation mode from the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Operation is performed only while the start button is pressed.
**==> picture [413 x 620] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-23:<br>Inverter<br>Connection example for jog operation performed<br>Power from PU<br>supply Motor<br>Operation panel<br>I001790E<br>Operation Display<br>� Confirmation of the RUN indication and operation<br>mode indication.<br>The monitor mode must have been selected.<br>The inverter must be at a stop.<br>� Press the PU/EXT key to choose the<br>PU JOG operation mode.<br>� Press the RUN key.<br>The motor rotates while the key is pressed.<br>It rotates at 5 Hz (initial value of Pr. 15). Hold down<br>Stop<br>� Release the RUN key to stop the motor.<br>Release<br>When changing the frequency of PU JOG operation: "PRM" indication is lit.<br>� Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>The parameter number read previously<br>appears.<br>� Turn the digital dial until Pr. 15 "JOG frequency"<br>appears.<br>� Press the SET key to show the currently set value<br>(5 Hz).<br>� Turn the digital dial to set the value to "10.00"<br>(10.00 Hz).<br>� Press the SET key to set.<br>� Perform the operations in steps � to �<br>The motor rotates at 10 Hz. Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>I001791E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-24:** JOG operation performed from PU_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 65
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
- **NOTES** When Pr. 29 "Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection" = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/ deceleration A), the acceleration/deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 "Base frequency".
The Pr. 15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr. 13 "Starting frequency setting".
The JOG signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection". When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
During jog operation, the second acceleration/deceleration via the RT signal cannot be selected. (The other second functions are valid (refer to section 6.10.3)).
When Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" = 4, push the RUN key of the operation panel or the FWD/ REV key of the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to make a start or push the STOP/RESET key to make a stop.
This function is invalid when Pr. 79 = 3.
6 - 66
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
## **6.6.3 Remote setting function (Pr. 59)**
Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**RH, RM and RL**<br>**Signal Function**<br>**F**<br>**S**|**requency Setting**<br>**torage Function**|
|**59**|Remote function<br>selection|0|0|Multi-speed setting<br>|—|
||||1|Remote setting<br>|✔|
||||2|Remote setting<br>|—|
||||3|Remote setting<br><br>(<br>r|—<br>Turning STF/STR off clears<br>emote setting frequency.)|
|||||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Pr. 59 can be used to select a digital motor potentiometer. Setting Pr. 59 to a value of "1" activates the frequency setting storage function, so that the stored value is also stored when the power is switched off. The last frequency value is stored in the E²PROM. The delete instruction only applies to the data stored in RAM.
**==> picture [412 x 124] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-25:<br>Inverter<br>Connection diagram for remote setting<br>Forward rotation<br>Acceleration<br>Deceleration<br>Clear<br>I001132E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When Pr. 59 is set to any of "1 to 3" (remote setting function valid), the functions of the RH, RM and RL signals are changed: RH � acceleration, RM � deceleration and RL � clear.
**==> picture [391 x 142] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 59 = 1, 2 Pr. 59 = 1<br>Pr. 59 = 3<br>Pr. 59 = 2, 3<br>Time<br>ON ON<br>Acceleration RH ON<br>Deceleration RM ON<br>Clear RL ON<br>Forward rotation STF ON EIN ON ON<br>Power supply ON ON<br>I001133E<br>Output<br>frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-26:** Example of the remote setting function_
* External operation frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 67
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
## **Remote setting function**
When using the remote setting function, following frequencies can be compensated to the frequency set by RH and RM operation according to the operation mode.
During external operation (including Pr. 79 = 4): External frequency command other than multi-speed settings During external operation and PU combined operation (Pr. 79 = 3): PU frequency command or terminal 4 input. During PU operation: PU frequency command
## **Frequency setting storage**
The frequency setting storage function stores the remotely-set frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) into the memory (E²PROM). When power is switched off once, then on, operation is resumed with that output frequency value. (Pr. 59 = 1)
The frequency is stored at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns off or every one minute after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) signals. (The frequency is written if the present frequency setting compared with the past frequency setting every one minute is different. The state of the RL signal does not affect writing.)
6 - 68
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
**NOTES** The range of frequency changeable by RH (acceleration) and RM (deceleration) is 0 to maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting). Note that the maximum value of set frequency is (main speed + maximum frequency).
**==> picture [269 x 133] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
The set frequency is clamped at<br>(main speed + Pr. 1)<br>Output frequency is Set frequency<br>clamped at Pr. 1<br>Pr. 1<br>Output frequency<br>Main speed setting<br>Time<br>Acceleration (RH) ON<br>Deceleration (RM) ON<br>Forward rotation (STF) ON<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches on, acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 44 and Pr. 45. Note that when long time has been set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8, the acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8 (when RT signal is off).
When the RT signal is on, acceleration/deceleration is made in the time set to Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, regardless of the Pr. 7 or Pr. 8 setting.
If the start signal (STF or STR) is off, turning on the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal varies the preset frequency.
When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency setting value storage function (write to E²PROM) invalid (Pr. 59 = 2 or 3). If set valid (Pr. 59 = 1), frequency is written to E²PROM frequently, this will shorten the life of the E²PROM.
The RH, RM, RL signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection". When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Also available for the network operation mode.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 69
Frequency setting by external terminals
Parameter
During jog operation or PID control operation, the remote setting function is invalid.
## **Set frequency = 0Hz**
- Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied before one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
**==> picture [362 x 148] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Remotely-set frequency stored last time<br>< 1 minute<br>Remotely-set frequency stored last time<br>Lf Time<br>Acceleration RH ON<br>Deceleration RM OFF<br>Clear RL ee ON<br>Forward rotation STF Hl ON : 1 ON<br>Power supply i ON ON<br>I001134C<br>Output<br>frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-27:** Outputting the remotely-set frequency stored last time_
- When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning on the RL (clear) signal after turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals, the inverter operates at the frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied after one minute has elapsed since turn off (on) of both the RH and RM signals.
**==> picture [370 x 163] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Remotely-set frequency stored last time<br>> 1 minute<br>Operation is performed at the set<br>frequency 0 Hz.<br>Time<br>Acceleration RH ON<br>Deceleration RM OFF<br>Clear RL ON<br>Forward rotation STF ON ON<br>Power supply ON ON<br>I001135C<br>Output<br>frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-28:** Outputting the current set frequency_
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**When Pr. 59 is set to "1" the motor will restart automatically after a power failure if there is an active rotation direction signal.**_
6 - 70
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **6.7 Acceleration and deceleration**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Motor acceleration/deceleration time<br>setting|Acceleration/deceleration times|Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20,<br>Pr. 21, Pr. 44,<br>Pr. 45, Pr. 147|6.7.1|
|Starting frequency|Starting frequency and start-time hold|Pr. 13, Pr. 571|6.7.2|
|Set acceleration/deceleration<br>pattern suitable for application|Acceleration/deceleration pattern|Pr. 29|6.7.3|
|Automatically set optimum<br>acceleration/deceleration time|Automatic acceleration/deceleration|Pr. 61–Pr. 63,<br>Pr. 292|6.7.4|
## **6.7.1 Acceleration and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147)**
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time. Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**7**|Acceleration time|FR-E720S-110SC or less,<br>FR-E740-095SC or less|5 s|0–3600 s/<br>0–360 s�|Set the motor acceleration time.|||3<br>29<br>125<br>126<br>178–184<br>Base frequency<br>Acceleration/deceleration<br>pattern selection<br>Frequency setting gain<br>frequency<br>Frequency setting gain<br>frequency<br>Input terminal function<br>selection|6.5.1<br>6.7.3<br>6.16.3<br>6.16.3<br>6.10.1|
|||FR-E740-120SC and 170SC|10 s|||||||
|||FR-E740-230SC and 300SC|15 s|||||||
|**8**|Deceleration time|FR-E720S-110SC or less,<br>FR-E740-095SC or less|5 s|0–3600 s/<br>0–360 s�|Set the motor deceleration time.|||||
|||FR-E740-120SC and 170SC|10 s|||||||
|||FR-E740-230SC and 300SC|15 s|||||||
|**20**|Acceleration/<br>deceleration<br>reference<br>frequency�|50 Hz||1–400 Hz|Set the frequency that will be the basis<br>of acceleration/deceleration time.<br>As acceleration/deceleration time, set<br>the frequency change time from stop to<br>Pr. 20.|||||
|**21**|Acceleration/<br>deceleration time<br>increments�|0||0|Increments:<br>0.1 s<br>Range:<br>0–3600 s|Increments and<br>setting range of<br>acceleration/<br>deceleration time<br>setting can be<br>changed.||||
|||||1|Increments:<br>0.01 s<br>Range:<br>0–360 s|||||
|**44**|Second<br>acceleration/<br>deceleration time<br>�|FR-E720S-110SC or less,<br>FR-E740-095SC or less|5 s|0–3600 s/<br>0–360 s�|Set the acceleration/deceleration time<br>when the RT signal is on.|||||
|||FR-E740-120SC and 170SC|10 s|||||||
|||FR-E740-230SC and 300SC|15 s|||||||
|**45**|Second<br>deceleration time<br>�|9999||0–3600 s/<br>0–360 s�|Set the deceleration time when the RT<br>signal is on.|||||
|||||9999|Acceleration time = deceleration time|||||
|**147**|Acceleration/<br>deceleration time<br>switching<br>frequency�|9999||0–400 Hz|Frequency when automatically<br>switching to the acceleration/<br>deceleration time of Pr. 44 and Pr. 45.|||||
|||||9999|No function|||||
- The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- Depends on the Pr. 21 "Acceleration/deceleration time increments" setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600 s" and the setting increments is "0.1 s".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 71
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **Acceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 20)**
Use Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" to set the acceleration time required to reach Pr. 20 "Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency" from 0 Hz.
**==> picture [9 x 60] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [201 x 141] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-29:<br>Acceleration/deceleration time<br>I000006C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Set the acceleration time according to the following formula:
Acceleration = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pr. 20 x Acceleration time from stop to time setting Maximum operating frequency – Pr. 13 maximum operating frequency
> **Example** V When Pr. 20 = 50 Hz (initial value), Pr. 13 = 0.5 Hz
The acceleration can be made up to the maximum operating frequency of 40 Hz in 10 s.
Pr. 7 = ------------------------------------50 Hz **-** x 10 s = 12.7 s 40 Hz – 0.5 Hz
## **Deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 20)**
Use Pr. 8 "Deceleration time" to set the deceleration time required to reach 0 Hz from Pr. 20 "Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency".
Set the deceleration time according to the following formula:
Deceleration = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pr. 20 x Deceleration time from maximum time setting Maximum operating frequency – Pr. 10 operating frequency to stop
## **Example**
When Pr. 20 = 120 Hz, Pr. 10 = 3 Hz
The deceleration can be made up from the maximum operating frequency of 40 Hz to a stop in 10 s.
Pr. 8 = -------------------------------120 Hz **-** x 10 s = 32.4 s 40 Hz – 3 Hz
6 - 72
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **Change the setting range and increments of the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 21)**
Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting range. Setting "0" (initial value).............0 to 3600 s (minimum setting increments 0.1 s) Setting "1" ..........................0 to 360 s (minimum setting increments 0.01 s)
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**Changing the Pr. 21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).**_
_**(The Pr. 611 "Acceleration time at a restart" setting is not affected.)**_
## _**Example:**_
_**When Pr. 21 = 0, setting "5.0" s in Pr. 7 and "1" in Pr. 21 automatically changes the Pr. 7 setting to "0.5" s.**_
## **Set two kinds of acceleration/deceleration times (RT signal, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147)**
Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is on, or the output frequency reaches or exceeds the setting of Pr. 147. Switching the parameter sets allows you to operate motors with different specifications and capabilities with the frequency inverter.
When "9999" is set to Pr. 45, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44).
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
Acceleration/deceleration time changes when the RT signal turns ON or the output frequency reaches the Pr. 147 setting or higher.
|**Pr. 147**|**Acceleration/Deceleration Time**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|9999 (Initial value)|Pr. 7, Pr. 8|No automatic switching of the accelera-<br>tion/deceleration time|
|0.00 Hz|Pr. 44, Pr. 45|Second acceleration/deceleration time<br>from a start|
|0.00 Hz�Pr. 147�Set frequency|Output frequency < Pr. 147:<br>Pr. 7, Pr. 8<br>Pr. 147�Output frequency:<br>Pr. 44, Pr. 45|Acceleration/deceleration time auto-<br>matic switching�|
|Set frequency < Pr. 147|Pr. 7, Pr. 8|No automatic switching, since output<br>frequency will not reach the switching<br>frequency|
_**Tab. 6-5:** Acceleration/deceleration times in dependence on Parameter 147_
- When the RT signal turns on, the acceleration/deceleration time switches to the second acceleration/deceleration time even when the output frequency is not reached to Pr. 147 setting.
**==> picture [335 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency [Hz]<br>Set frequency<br>t<br>Slope set Slope set Slope set by Slope set by<br>by Pr. 7 by Pr. 44 Pr. 44 (Pr. 45) Pr. 8<br>Acceleration time Deceleration time<br>I001929E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-30:** Automatic switching of the acceleration/deceleration time_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 73
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern**
If a S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A is selected in Pr. 29, the set time is the period required to reach the base frequency set in Pr. 3 "Base frequency".
Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher.
**==> picture [108 x 28] intentionally omitted <==**
- T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting value (s)
- f: Set frequency (Hz)
- **NOTE** You will find a detailed description of this parameter in section 6.7.3.
Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time when Pr. 3 "Base frequency" = 50 Hz (0 Hz to set frequency).
|**Acceleration/Deceleration time [s]**|**Frequency Setting [Hz]**|**Frequency Setting [Hz]**|**Frequency Setting [Hz]**|**Frequency Setting [Hz]**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**50**|**120**|**200**|**400**|
|5|5|16|38|145|
|15|15|47|115|435|
_**Tab. 6-6:** Acceleration/deceleration time at a base frequency of 50 Hz_
## **NOTES**
Changing terminal assignment may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to section 6.10.3.)
If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change. Set Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 to adjust the gains.
When the Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 settings are 0.03 s or less, the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04 s. At that time, set Pr. 20 to "120 Hz" or less.
If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (inertia moment) and motor torque.
6 - 74
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
**6.7.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)**
|||You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.|You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.|
|---|---|---|---|
|||Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want to smooth motor drive at a start.||
|**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting Range**<br>**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>**13**<br>Starting frequency<br>0.5 Hz<br>0–60 Hz<br>Frequency at start can be set in the<br>range 0 to 60 Hz.<br>You can set the starting frequency at<br>which the start signal is turned on.<br>2<br>Minimum frequency<br>6.4.1<br>**571**<br>Holding time at start<br>9999<br>0.0–10.0 s<br>Set the holding time of Pr. 13 "Starting<br>frequency".<br>9999<br>Holding function at a start is invalid<br>~~==.~~||||
|||The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.||
|||**Starting frequency setting (Pr. 13)**||
|||The motor is started with the specified start frequency as soon as the frequency inverter receives a||
|||start signal and a frequency setting that is greater than or equal to the preset starting frequency.||
|||**_Fig. 6-31:_**||
|||_Starting frequency parameter_<br>Hz||
|||Output||
|||frequency [Hz]||
|||Setting range||
|||t||
|||ON<br>Forward rotation||
||||_I000008C_|
**NOTE**
The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
**Example** When 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the frequency setting signal reaches 5 Hz. **WARNING:** _**Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value lower than Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency", simply turning**_ **P** _**on the start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not input.**_ ~~a~~
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 75
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **Start-time hold function (Pr. 571)**
This function holds the time set in Pr. 571 and the output frequency set in Pr. 13 "Starting frequency". This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start.
**==> picture [369 x 138] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Forward rotation OFF ON<br>Output<br>frequency [Hz]<br>Pr.13 | | t<br>__<br>' Pr571_ |<br>I000399C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-32:** Holding time at start_
## **NOTES**
When the start signal was turned off during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.
At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is invalid.
When Pr. 13 = 0 Hz, the starting frequency is held at 0.01 Hz.
6 - 76
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
**6.7.3 Acceleration and deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)**
You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for application.
|**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>**29**<br>Acceleration/deceleration<br>pattern selection<br>0<br>0<br>Linear acceleration/deceleration<br>3<br>7<br>8<br>20<br>Base frequency<br>Acceleration time<br>Deceleration time<br>Acceleration/<br>deceleration reference<br>frequency<br>6.5.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.7.1<br>1<br>S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A<br>2<br>S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B<br>~~‘=~~|
|---|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr. 29 = "0", initial value)**
For the inverter operation, the output frequency is made to change linearly (linear acceleration/deceleration) to prevent the motor and inverter from excessive stress to reach the set frequency during acceleration, deceleration, etc. when frequency changes. Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope (refer to 6-33).
_**Fig. 6-33:** Characteristic for parameter 29 = "0"_
**==> picture [395 x 92] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
linear<br>Time<br>I000015C<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 77
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr. 29 = "1")**
For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
Used when acceleration/deceleration must be made in a short time to a high-speed range of not lower than base frequency. In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, Pr. 3 "Base frequency" (fb) is the inflection point of the S-pattern (refer to 6-34) and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time appropriate for motor torque reduction in a constant-output operation region of base frequency or higher.
**==> picture [340 x 133] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-34:<br>Hz S-pattern acceleration/ Characteristic for parameter 29 = "1"<br>deceleration A<br>: '<br>fmSf<br>t<br>Time<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000016C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr. 29 = "2")**
When a setting of "2" is entered frequency changes are executed with an S-pattern. For example, if a drive is accelerated from 0 to 30 Hz and then re-accelerated to 50 Hz then each acceleration sequence (i.e. the first sequence from 0 to 30 Hz and the second from 30 Hz to 50 Hz) will be executed with an S-pattern. The time for the S-pattern is not longer than that for linear acceleration (refer to 6-35). This prevents jolts in drive operation, for example for conveyor belt and positioning drive systems.
**==> picture [352 x 134] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-35:<br>S-pattern acceleration/ Characteristic for parameter 29 = "2"<br>deceleration B<br>ff, presencesages<br>|<br>3 ; | t<br>Time<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000017C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTE**
As the acceleration/deceleration time of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time taken until Pr. 3 "Base frequency" is reached, not Pr. 20 "Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency".
6 - 78
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **6.7.4 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) (Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, Pr. 292, Pr. 293)**
The inverter operates in the same conditions as when appropriate values are set in each parameter even if acceleration/deceleration time and V/F pattern are not set. This function is useful when you just want to operate, etc. without fine parameter setting.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**61**|Reference current|9999|0–500 A|Set the reference current during shortest acceleration/<br>deceleration.||0<br>7<br>8<br>22<br>Torque boost<br>Acceleration time<br>Deceleration time<br>Stall prevention<br>operation level|6.3.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.3.5|
||||9999|Rated inverter output current value is reference||||
|**62**|Reference value at<br>acceleration|9999|0–200%|Set the limit value during shortest acceleration.||||
||||9999|150% is a limit value||||
|**63**|Reference value at<br>deceleration|9999|0–200%|Set the limit value during shortest deceleration.||||
||||9999|150% is a limit value||||
|**292**|Automatic<br>acceleration/<br>deceleration|0|0|Normal mode||||
||||1|Shortest acceleration/deceleration (without brake)||||
||||11|Shortest acceleration/deceleration (with brake)||||
||||7/8|Brake sequence mode 1, 2<br>(Refer to section 6.9.5.)||||
|**293**|Acceleration/<br>deceleration separate<br>selection|0|0|Both acceleration and deceleration are made in the<br>shortest acceleration/deceleration mode||||
||||1|Only acceleration is made in the shortest acceleration/<br>deceleration mode||||
||||2|Only deceleration is made in the shortest acceleration/<br>deceleration mode||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 79
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 292 = 1, 11, Pr. 293)**
- Set when you want to accelerate/decelerate the motor for the shortest time. It is desired to make acceleration/deceleration in a shorter time for a machine tool etc. but the design values of machine constants are unknown.
- Acceleration/deceleration speed is automatically adjusted at a start of acceleration/deceleration from the value of the setting value of Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" and Pr. 8 "Deceleration time" so that acceleration/deceleration is made with the maximum torque the inverter can output. (The setting values of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 are not changed.)
- Either acceleration or deceleration can be made in the shortest time using Pr. 293 "Acceleration/ deceleration separate selection". When the setting value is "0" (initial value), both acceleration and deceleration can be made in the shortest time.
- Set "11" when an optional high-duty brake resistor or brake unit is connected. Deceleration time can be further shortened.
- When the shortest/acceleration mode is selected, the stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration from the value of becomes 150% (adjustable using Pr. 61 to Pr. 63). Setting of Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level" is used only during a constant speed operation.
- It is inappropriate to use for the following applications.
- Machine with a large inertia such as a fan (more than 10 times). Since stall prevention operation will be activated for a long time, this type of machine may be brought to an alarm stop due to motor overloading, etc.
- It is desired to always perform operation with a constant acceleration/deceleration time.
## **NOTES**
- Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration mode has been selected, inputting the jog signal (jog operation) or RT signal (second function selection) during an inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to jog operation or second function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during operation in automatic acceleration/deceleration mode.
Since acceleration/deceleration is made with the stall prevention operation being activated, the acceleration/deceleration speed always varies according to the load conditions.
Note that when proper values are set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8, acceleration/deceleration time may be shorter than selecting shortest acceleration/deceleration mode.
6 - 80
Acceleration and deceleration
Parameter
## **Adjustment of shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 61 to Pr. 63)**
By setting the adjustment parameters Pr. 61 to Pr. 63, the application range can be made wider.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
|61|Reference current|0–500 A|For example, when the motor and inverter are different in capacity, set<br>the rated motor current value.<br>Set reference current (A) of the stall prevention operation level during<br>acceleration/deceleration.|
|||9999<br>(initial<br>value)|The rated inverter current is defined as reference.|
|62<br>63|Reference value at<br>acceleration<br>Reference value at<br>deceleration|0–200%|Set when it is desired to change the reference level of acceleration and<br>deceleration.<br>Set the stall prevention operation level (ratio to the current value of<br>Pr. 61) during acceleration/deceleration.|
|||9999<br>(initial<br>value)|The 150% value during shortest acceleration/deceleration is judged as<br>the stall prevention operation level.|
## _**Tab. 6-7:** Adjustment parameter setting_
## **NOTE**
Since the Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 settings automatically return to the initial value (9999) if the Pr. 292 setting is changed, set Pr. 292 first when you need to set Pr. 61 to Pr. 63.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 81
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **6.8 Selection and protection of a motor**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Motor protection from overheat|Electronic thermal O/L relay|Pr. 9, Pr. 51|6.8.1|
|Use the constant torque motor|Applied motor|Pr. 71, Pr. 450|6.8.2|
|The motor performance can be maxi-<br>mized for operation in magnetic flux<br>vector control method.|Offline auto tuning|Pr. 71,<br>Pr. 80–Pr. 84,<br>Pr. 90–Pr. 94,<br>Pr. 96, Pr. 859|6.8.3|
## **6.8.1 Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51)**
The FR-E700SC EC/ENE frequency inverters have an internal electronic motor protection function that monitors the motor frequency and motor current. Overload conditions are identified and the motor protection function is triggered on the basis of these two factors, in combination with the rated motor current. The electronic motor protection function is primarily for protection against overheating at intermediate speeds and high motor torques. The reduced cooling performance of the motor fan under these conditions is also taken into account.
|**Pr.**<br>**No.**|**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to Sec-**<br>**tion**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**9**<br>**51**|The initial value of the FR-E720S-050SC or less and FR-E740-026SC or less is set to 85% of the<br>Electronic thermal O/L relay<br>Rated inverter<br>current<br>0–500 A<br>Set the rated motor current.<br>71<br>72<br>178–184<br>190–192<br>Applied motor<br>PWM frequency<br>selection<br>Input terminal function<br>selection<br>Output terminal<br>function selection<br>6.8.2<br>6.15.1<br>6.10.1<br>6.10.5<br>Second electronic<br>thermal O/L relay<br>9999<br>0–500 A<br>Made valid when the RT signal is on.<br>Set the rated motor current.<br>9999<br>Second electronic thermal O/L relay<br>invalid<br>~~p~~o<br>poe |<br>0)|||||
||rated inverter current.|||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.
6 - 82
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Electronic thermal O/L relay (Pr. 9)**
Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr. 9. (When the power supply specification is 400 V/440 V 60 Hz, set the 1.1 times the rated motor current.)
Set "0" to Pr. 9 when you do not want to activate the electronic thermal relay function, e.g. when using an external thermal relay with the motor. (Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).)
When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor set "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53 or 54" to Pr. 71. (This provides a 100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range.) After this set the rated current of the motor to Pr. 9.
The figure below shows the electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic. The region on the right of the characteristic curve is the operation region. The region on the left of the characteristic curve is the non-operation region.
**==> picture [327 x 258] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 9 = 50% setting of<br>Pr. 9 = 100% setting of<br>the inverter rating % [��]<br>the inverter rating [�]<br>o r more [�]<br>or more [�]<br>Operation range<br>– Range on the right of characteristic curve<br>Non operation range<br>– Range on the left of characteristic curve<br>Characteristic when electronic thermal<br>relay function for motor protection is<br>turned off (When Pr. 9 setting is 0 (A)).<br>Range for<br>transistor<br>protection<br>Inverter output current (%)<br>(% to the rated inverter current)<br>I001792E<br>(min) unit display in this region Operation time (min)<br>this region<br>Operation time (s)<br>(s) unit display in<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-36:** Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic_
- When a value 50% of the inverter rated output current (current value) is set to Pr. 9.
- The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
- When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies to operation at 6 Hz or higher.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 83
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **NOTES**
Fault by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-off.
When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal relay function. Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use the external thermal relay.
The operation time of the transistor protection thermal relay shortens when the Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" setting increases.
Electronic thermal relay does not work when 5% or less of inverter rated current is set to electronic thermal relay setting.
6 - 84
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Set two different electronic thermal O/L relays (Pr. 51)**
Use this function when running two motors of different rated currents individually by a single inverter. (When running two motors together, use external thermal relays.)
Set the rated current of the second motor to Pr. 51. When the RT signal is on, thermal protection is provided based on the Pr. 51 setting.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
## _**Fig. 6-37:**_
**==> picture [7 x 49] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
M<br>3~<br>M<br>3~<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [159 x 10] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Running two motors by a single inverter<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001137C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
|**Pr. 450**<br>**Second Applied**<br>**Motor**|**Pr. 9**<br>**Electronic Thermal**<br>**O/L Relay**|**Pr. 51**<br>**Second Electronic**<br>**Thermal O/L Relay**|**RT = OFF**|**RT = OFF**|**RT = ON**|**RT = ON**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**1. Motor**|**2. Motor**|**1. Motor**|**2. Motor**|
|9999|0|9999|—|—|—|—|
|||0|—|—|—|—|
|||0.01–500|—|�|—|�|
|9999|�0|9999|�|—|�|—|
|||0|�|—|�|—|
|||0.01–500|�|�|�|�|
|�9999|0|9999|—|—|—|—|
|||0|—|—|—|—|
|||0.01–500|—|�|—|�|
|�9999|�0|9999|�|�|�|�|
|||0|�|—|�|—|
|||0.01–500 (0.1–3600)|�|�|�|�|
## _**Tab. 6-8:** Switching the electronic thermal O/L relay_
- Output current value is used to perform integration processing.
- Output current is assumed as 0 A to perform integration processing. (cooling processing)
- Electronic thermal relay function is not activated.
## **NOTE**
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to section 6.10.3.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 85
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Electronic thermal relay function prealarm (TH) and alarm signal (THP signal)**
The alarm signal (THP) is output and electronic thermal relay function prealarm (TH) is displayed when the electronic thermal O/L relay cumulative value reaches 85% of the level set in Pr. 9 or Pr. 51. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay setting", a motor overload trip (E.THM) occurs.
## **NOTE**
The prealarm signal "THP" is also issued as soon as the thermal load of the IGBT output stages of the frequency inverter is 85%. If the load rises further up to 100%, then the thermal overload protection of the frequency inverter responds and the "E.THT" error message is shown.
For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
**==> picture [381 x 68] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Electronic thermal relay function 85%<br>operation level<br>Time<br>Electronic thermal O/L relay prealarm THP ON ON<br>I001138E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-38:** Prealarm signal output_
**NOTE** Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
## **External thermal relay input (OH signal)**
To protect the motor against overheat, use the OH signal (refer to 6-39) when using an external thermal relay or the built-in thermal protector of the motor.
When the thermal relay operates, the inverter trips and outputs the fault signal (E.OHT).
For the terminal used for OH signal input, assign the function by setting "7" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection".
**==> picture [201 x 122] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-39:<br>Connection of an external thermal relay<br>I000553C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTE**
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 86
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **6.8.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450)**
Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor. Setting is required to use a constant-torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function suitable for the motor is set.
When general-purpose magnetic flux vector or advanced magnetic flux vector control is selected, the motor constants (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA, etc.) necessary for control are selected as well.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**71**|Applied motor|0|0/1–3–6/<br>13–16/23/24/40/<br>43/44/50/53/54|Selecting the standard motor or<br>constant-torque motor sets the<br>corresponding motor thermal<br>characteristic.||0<br>12<br>80<br>81<br>82–84<br>90–94<br>96<br>800<br>Torque boost<br>DC injection brake<br>operation voltage<br>Motor capacity<br>Number of motor poles<br>Motor constants<br>Control method<br>selection|6.3.1<br>6.9.1<br>6.8.3<br>6.8.3<br>6.8.3<br>6.2.1|
|**450**|Second applied motor|9999|0/1|Set when using the second motor.||||
||||9999|Second motor is invalid<br>(thermal characteristic of the first motor<br>(Pr. 71))||||
|||||||||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 87
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Set the motor to be used**
Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
|**Pr. 71**<br>Pt|**Pr. 450**<br>Ptfo|**Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal**<br>**Relay Function**<br>fo|**Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal**<br>**Relay Function**<br>fo|**Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal**<br>**Relay Function**<br>fo|**Motor**|**Motor**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||**Standard**<br>**(SF-JR, etc.)**|**Constant Torque**<br>**(SF-JRCA, etc.)**|
|0<br>(initial value)<br>Pt||Thermal characteristics of a standard motor<br>|||✔|—|
|1<br>a||Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque<br>motor<br>|||ce<br>|✔<br>|
|40<br>a <br>a<br>a|—<br> a<br>ae|Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor<br>(SF-HR)<br>es<br>es|||✔<br>es<br>ce<br>s<br>ee|es<br>s|
|50<br>a <br>a|—<br> ae<br>ee|Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi constant torque motor<br>(SF-HRCA)<br>es<br>ee|||ce<br>s<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>s<br>ee|
|3<br> <br>a|—<br> ae<br>ee|Standard motor<br>e<br>ee|Select "Offline auto tun-<br>ing setting"<br>es<br>ee<br>~~e~~||✔<br>s<br>ee<br>ee|s<br>ee|
|13<br>ee|—<br>ee<br>ee|Constant-torque motor<br>ee<br>eee|||ee<br>SE|✔<br>ee<br>SE|
|23<br>ee<br>eee|—<br>ee<br>eee|Mitsubishi standard motor<br>(SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or less)<br>eee<br>eee|||✔<br>SE<br>FO|SE<br>FO|
|43<br>ee<br>eee|—<br>ee<br>eee|Mitsubishi high efficiency motor<br>(SF-HR)<br>eee<br>eee|||✔<br>SE<br>FO|SE<br>FO|
|53<br>eee<br>Pf<br>ee|—<br>eee<br>Pf<br>ee|Mitsubishi constant-torque<br>motor (SF-HRCA)<br>eee<br>e~~e~~|||FO<br>|?<br>ee|✔<br>FO<br>|?<br>ee|
|4<br>Pf<br>ee|—<br>Pf<br>ee|Standard motor<br>e~~e~~|Auto tuning data can be<br>read, changed, and set.<br>~~e~~||✔<br>|?<br>ee||?<br>ee|
|14<br>ee<br>PE|—<br>ee<br>PE|Constant-torque motor<br>e~~e~~|||ee<br>PE|✔<br>ee<br>PE|
|24<br>PE<br>Pf|—<br>PE<br>Pf|Mitsubishi standard motor<br>(SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or less)|||✔<br>PE<br>2|||PE<br>|||
|44<br>PE<br>Pf<br>ee|—<br>PE<br>Pf<br>ee|Mitsubishi high efficiency motor<br>(SF-HR)<br>ee|||✔<br>PE<br>2||<br>FL|PE<br>||<br>FL8|
|54<br>Pf<br>ee<br>SS|—<br>Pf<br>ee<br>SS|Mitsubishi constant-torque<br>motor (SF-HRCA)<br>ee<br>SS|||2 ||<br>FL<br>ee|✔<br>||<br>FL8<br>ee|
|5<br>ee<br>SS<br>a|—<br>ee<br>SS<br>ee|Standard motor<br>ee<br>SS<br>e~~e~~|Star connec-<br>tion<br>~~e~~|Direct<br>input of<br>motor<br>con-<br>stants is<br>enabled|✔<br>FL<br>ee<br>ee|FL 8<br>ee<br>ee|
|15<br>SS<br>a|—<br>SS<br>ee|Constant-torque motor<br>SS<br>e~~e~~|||ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|
|6<br>a<br>~~a~~|—<br>ee<br>~~a~~|Standard motor<br>e~~e~~<br>~~a~~|Delta<br>connection<br>~~e~~<br>~~a~~||✔<br>ee|ee|
|16<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~|Constant-torque motor<br>~~a~~||||✔|
|—|9999<br>(initial<br>value)|Without second applied motor|||||
_**Tab. 6-9:** Setting of parameter Pr. 71 and Pr. 450_
Motor constants of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR.
Motor constants of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA.
## **NOTE**
For the FR-E740-120SC and 170SC, the Pr. 0 "Torque boost" and Pr. 12 "DC injection brake operation voltage" settings are automatically changed according to the Pr. 71 setting as follows.
|**Pr. 71**|**0, 3–6, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44**|**1, 13–16, 50, 53, 54**|
|---|---|---|
|Pr. 0|3%|2%|
|Pr. 12|4%|2%|
_**Tab. 6-10:** Changes of parameter 0 and 12 related to parameter 71_
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Set the electronic thermal relay function to the thermal characteristic for the constant-torque motor when using a geared motor (GM-S, GM-D, GM-SY, GM-HY2 series) to perform Advanced magnetic flux vector control or General-purpose magnetic-flux vector control.**_
6 - 88
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Use two motors (Pr. 450)**
- Set Pr. 450 "Second applied motor" to use two different motors with one inverter.
- When "9999" (initial value) is set, no function is selected.
- When a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 450, the second motor is valid when the RT signal turns on.
- For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
## **NOTES**
The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to section 6.10.3.)
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
**E**
## **CAUTION:**
- _**Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.**_
- _**Set the electronic thermal relay function to the thermal characteristic for the constanttorque motor when using a geared motor (GM-G, GM-D, GM-SY, GM-HY2 series) to perform advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic-flux vector control.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 89
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **6.8.3 To exhibit the best performance of the motor performance (offline auto tuning) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 96, Pr. 859)**
The motor performance can be maximized with offline auto tuning.
What is offline auto tuning?
- When performing advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, the motor can be run with the optimum operating characteristics by automatically measuring the motor constants (offline autotuning) even when each motor constants differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring length is long.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**71**|Applied motor|0||0/1–3–6/13–16/<br>23/24/40/43/44/<br>50/53/54|By selecting a standard motor or constant-<br>torque motor, thermal characteristic and<br>motor constants of each motor are set.|
|**80**|Motor capacity<br>~~2~~ <br>~~2~~|9999<br> ee<br>||0.1–15 kW<br>ee<br>ee<br>|Applied motor capacity.<br>ee<br>ee<br>|
|||||9999<br>ee<br>ee<br>|V/F control<br>ee<br>ee<br>|
|**81**|Number of motor poles<br>~~2~~|9999<br> ee||2/4/6/8/10<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|Number of motor poles.<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|
|||||9999<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|V/F control<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|
|**82**|Motor excitation current|9999||0–500 A<br>ee|Tuning data<br>(The value measured by offline auto tuning<br>is automatically set.)<br>ee|
|||||9999|Uses the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.|
|**83**|Rated motor voltage<br>~~a~~ <br>||200 V class<br>ee<br>||200 V<br>ee<br>|0–1000 V|Rated motor voltage (V).|
|||400 V class<br> ee<br>|||400 V<br>ee<br>||||
|**84**|Rated motor frequency<br>|<br>~~a~~|50 Hz<br>|||10–120 Hz|Rated motor frequency (Hz).|
|**90**|Motor constant (R1)<br>~~e~~|9999<br>~~e~~e||0–50 /9999<br>e|Tuning data<br>(The value measured by offline auto tuning<br>is automatically set.)<br>9999: Uses the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.|
|**91**|Motor constant (R2)<br>~~a~~|9999<br>~~a~~||0–50 /9999<br>~~a~~||
|**92**|Motor constant (L1)<br>~~a~~|9999<br>~~a~~||0–1000 mH/9999<br>~~a~~||
|**93**|Motor constant (L2)<br>~~a~~|9999<br>~~a~~||0–1000 mH/9999<br>~~a~~||
|**94**|Motor constant (X)<br>~~a~~|9999<br>~~a~~||0–100%/9999<br>~~a~~||
|**96**|Auto tuning setting/status<br>aa<br>~~P~~||0<br>a<br>|i}||0|Offline auto tuning is not performed|
|||||1|For advanced magnetic flux vector control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without<br>motor running (all motor constants).|
|||||11|For general-purpose magnetic flux vector<br>control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without<br>motor running.<br>(motor constant (R1) only)|
|||||21<br>i}|Offline auto tuning for V/F control<br>(automatic restart after instantaneous<br>power failure (with frequency search))|
|**859**|Torque current<br>~~P~~||9999<br>|i}||0–500 A<br>i}|Tuning data<br>(The value measured by offline auto tuning<br>is automatically set.)|
|||||9999<br>i}|Uses the Mitsubishi motor<br>(SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
6 - 90
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
The setting range and increments of Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 and Pr. 859 changes according to the setting value of Pr. 71 and Pr. 96.
|**Applied Motor**|**Applied Motor**|**Internal Stored Value**�|**Internal Stored Value**�|**Direct Input Value**�|**Direct Input Value**�|**Auto Tuning**<br>**Measured Value**�|**Auto Tuning**<br>**Measured Value**�|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Pr.**|**Function Name**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Setting**<br>**Increments**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Setting**<br>**Increments**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Setting**<br>**Increments**|
|82|Motor excitation<br>current|0–500 A,<br>9999|0.01 A|0–500 A,<br>9999|0.01 A|0–****,<br>9999|1|
|90|Motor constant R1|0–50�,<br>9999|0.001�|0–50�,<br>9999|0.001�|0–****,<br>9999|1|
|91|Motor constant R2|0–50�,<br>9999|0.001�|0–50�,<br>9999|0.001�|0–****,<br>9999|1|
|92|Motor constant L1|0–1000 mH,<br>9999|0.1 mH|0–50�,<br>9999|0.001�|0–****,<br>9999|1|
|93|Motor constant L2|0–1000 mH,<br>9999|0.1 mH|0–50�,<br>9999|0.001�|0–****,<br>9999|1|
|94|Motor constant X|0–100%,<br>9999|0.1%|0–500�,<br>9999|0.01�|0–****,<br>9999|1|
|859|Torque current|0–500 A,<br>9999|0.01 A|0–500 A,<br>9999|0.01 A|0–****,<br>9999|1|
## _**Tab. 6-11:** Parameter setting ranges_
- When Pr. 71 = "0, 1, 40 or 50", or setting value of Pr. 96 read after performing offline auto tuning is not "3, 13, 23".
- When Pr. 71 = "5, 6, 15, or 16"
- When Pr. 71 = "3, 13, 23, 43 or 53" and setting value of Pr. 96 read after performing offline auto tuning is "3, 13, 23". Or when Pr. 71 = "4, 14, 24, 44 or 54".
- This function is made valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 and advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control is selected.
- You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-PU07).
- Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor (SF-JR 0.2 kW or more), high efficiency motor (SF-HR 0.2 kW or more) and Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA four-pole, SF-HRCA 0.2 kW to 15 kW) are used or the wiring length is long (30 m or more), using the offline auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics.
- Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.**_
- Reading/writing/copy of motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled.
- The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07).
- Do not connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) between the inverter and motor.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 91
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Before performing offline auto tuning**
Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.
- Make sure advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80, Pr. 81) is selected. (Tuning can be performed even under V/F control selected by turning on X18.)
- A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
- The maximum frequency is 120 Hz.
- A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned.
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.**_
- Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
## **Setting**
- Select advanced magnetic flux vector control (refer to section 6.3.2) or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control (refer to section 6.3.3).
- Set "1" or "11" in Pr. 96 "Auto tuning setting/status".
- When the setting is "1": Tune all motor constants without running the motor. When performing advanced magnetic flux vector control, set "1" to perform tuning. It takes approximately 25 to 75 s (depending on the inverter inverter capacity and motor type) until tuning is completed. (Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
- When the setting is "11": Tune motor constants (R1) only without running the motor. When performing general-purpose magnetic flux vector control, set "11" to perform tuning. It takes approximately 9 s until tuning is completed.
- Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay". (Refer to section 6.8.)
- Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 400 V) in Pr. 83 "Motor rated voltage" and rated motor frequency (initial value is 50 Hz) in Pr. 84 "Rated motor frequency".
- Set Pr. 71 "Applied motor" according to the motor used.
|**Motor**|**Motor**|**Pr. 71**|
|---|---|---|
|Mitsubishi standard motor,<br>Mitsubishi high efficiency motor|SF-JR|3|
||SF-JR 4P-1.5 kW or less|23|
||SF-HR|43|
||Others|3|
|Mitsubishi constant-torque motor|SF-JRCA 4P|13|
||SF-HRCA|53|
||Others (SF-JRC, etc.)|13|
|Other manufacturer's standard motor|—|3|
|Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor|—|13|
## _**Tab. 6-12:** Motor selection_
Refer to section 6.8.2, for other settings of Pr. 71.
6 - 92
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Execution of tuning**
## **CAUTION:**
_**Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit**_ **E** _**(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) if the inverter is in the status for tuning (refer to Tab. 6-13). When the start command is turned on under V/F control, the motor starts.**_
When performing tuning or PU operation, press the RUN key of the operation panel or the FWD or REV key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
## **NOTES**
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)
During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value) – Input terminal (valid signal): MRS, RES, STF, STR – Output terminal: RUN, AM, A, B, C
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in eight steps from AM when speed and output frequency are selected.
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline autotuning. Auto tuning is not executed properly.
Do not connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) between the inverter and motor.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 93
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Display during tuning**
Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below. The value displayed corresponds to the value of parameter 96.
**==> picture [410 x 216] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Parameter Unit<br>Operation Panel Indication<br>(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) Display<br>Pr. 96 1 11 1 11<br>Setting<br>READ:List READ:List<br>1 11<br>STOP PU STOP PU<br>Tuning in pro-<br>gress TUNE TUNE<br>2 12<br>STF FWD PU STF FWD PU<br>Normal end Flickering Flickering<br>TUNE 3 TUNE 13<br>COMPLETION COMPETION<br>STF STOP PU STF STOP PU<br>eS = =<br>Error end (when<br>inverter protec-<br>TUNE<br>tive function ERROR 9<br>operation is acti- STF STOP PU<br>vated)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-13:** Display during tuning (monitor display)_
|**Offline Auto Tuning Setting**<br>**Time**||
|---|---|
|Tune all motor constants (Pr. 96 = 1)<br>Approximately 25 to 75 s<br>(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and<br>motor type.)|Approximately 25 to 75 s<br>(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and<br>motor type.)|
|Tune motor constants (R1) only (Pr. 96 = 11)<br>Approximately 9 s|Approximately 9 s|
_**Tab. 6-14:** Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)_
## **NOTE**
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
## **Return to normal operation**
When offline auto tuning ends, press the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once. This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
## **NOTE**
Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (3 or 13). If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
6 - 94
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
|**Pr. 96 Setting**|**Error Cause**|**Remedy**|
|---|---|---|
|8|Forced end|Set "1" or "11" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.|
|9|Inverter protective function operation|Make setting again.|
|91|Current limit (stall prevention) function was acti-<br>vated.|Set "1" in Pr. 156.|
|92|Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated<br>value.|Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.|
|93|– Calculation error<br>– A motor is not connected.|Check the motor wiring and make setting again.<br>Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.|
## _**Tab. 6-15:** Parameter 96 setting_
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing the STOP/RESET key or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline autotuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
When using the motor corresponding to the following specifications and conditions, reset Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay as below after tuning is completed.
- When the rated power specifications of the motor is 200/220 V(400/440 V) 60 Hz, set 1.1 times rated motor current value in Pr. 9.
- When performing motor protection from overheat using a PTC thermistor or motor with temperature detector such as Klixon, set "0" (motor overheat protection by the inverter is invalid) in Pr. 9.
## **NOTES**
- The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if a fault retry has been set, retry is ignored.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 95
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Utilizing or changing offline auto tuning data for use**
The data measured in the offline auto tuning can be read and utilized or changed.
0) Set Pr. 71 according to the motor used: ~~a~~ **Motor Pr. 71** SF-JR 4 Mitsubishi standard motor, SF-JR 4P (1.5 kW or less) 24 Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR 44 Others 4 SF-JRCA 4P 14 Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 4P 54 Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 14 ~~a~~ ————— a Other manufacturer's standard motor — 4 a Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor — 14
## _**Tab. 6-16:** Motor selection_
For other settings of Pr. 71, refer to section 6.8.2.
In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values.
|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Setting Range**|**Setting Increments**|**Initial Value**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|82|Motor excitation<br>current|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
|90|Motor constant R1|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
|91|Motor constant R2|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
|92|Motor constant L1|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
|93|Motor constant L2|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
|94|Motor constant X|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
|859|Torque current|0–**** , 9999|1|9999|
_**Tab. 6-17:** Parameter setting ranges_
## **NOTES**
When "9999" is set in Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 859, Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants are used.
As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following setting example when making setting: Setting example:
To slightly increase Pr. 90 value (5%) When Pr. 90 is displayed as "2516", set 2642, i.e. 2516 × 1.05 = 2641.8, in Pr. 90.
(The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Hence, simple addition of a given value to the displayed value has no significance.)
IT 6 - 96
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **Method to set the motor constants without using the offline auto tuning data**
The Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 motor constants may either be entered in [ � , m � ] or in [mH]. Before starting operation, confirm which motor constant unit is used.
**To enter the Pr. 90 to Pr. 94 motor constants in [** � **]/[m** � **]**
- Set Pr. 71 according to the motor used:
||**Star Connection Motor**|**Delta Connection Motor**|
|---|---|---|
|Standard motor|5|6|
|Constant-torque motor|15|16|
_**Tab. 6-18:** Setting of parameter 71_
- In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values. Iq = torque current, I100 = rated current, I0 = no load current
**==> picture [75 x 17] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2 2<br>I = I – I<br>q 100 0<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Setting Range**|**Setting Increments**|**Initial Value**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|82|Motor excitation current<br>(no load current)|0–500 A, 9999|0.01 A|9999|
|90|Motor constant R1|0–50�, 9999|0.001�|9999|
|91|Motor constant R2|0–50�, 9999|0.001�|9999|
|92|Motor constant L1|0–50�, 9999|0.001�|9999|
|93|Motor constant L2|0–50�, 9999|0.001�|9999|
|94|Motor constant X|0–500�, 9999|0.01�|9999|
|859|Torque current|0–500 A, 9999|0.01 A|9999|
_**Tab. 6-19:** Setting of parameter 82, 90 to 94 and 859_
- Refer to the following table and set Pr. 83 and Pr. 84.
|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Setting Range**|**Setting Increments**|**Initial Value**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|83|Rated motor voltage|0–1000 V|0.1 V|400 V|
|84|Rated motor frequency|10–120 Hz|0.01 Hz|50 Hz|
## _**Tab. 6-20:** Setting of parameter 83 and 84_
## **NOTES**
- When "9999" is set in Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 859, Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants are used.
If "star connection" is mistaken for "delta connection" or vice versa during setting of Pr. 71, advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control cannot be exercised properly.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 97
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
## **To enter the Pr. 90 and Pr. 94 motor constants in [mH]**
|**Motor**<br>|**Motor**<br>|**Pr. 71**<br>|
|---|---|---|
|Mitsubishi standard motor,<br>Mitsubishi high efficiency motor<br>~~eG~~<br>~~re~~|SF-JR<br>~~eG~~|0<br>~~eG~~|
||SF-HR<br>~~eG~~<br>~~a~~<br>~~re~~|40<br>~~eG~~<br>~~a~~|
|Mitsubishi constant-torque motor<br>~~re~~|SF-JRCA 4P<br>~~re~~|1|
||SF-HRCA<br>~~re~~<br>a|50<br>a|
## _**Tab. 6-21:** Motor selection_
For other settings of Pr. 71, refer to section 6.8.2.
In the parameter setting mode, read the following parameters and set desired values. Calculate the Pr. 94 value from the following formula.
Pr. 94 = 1 – -------------------M[2] 100 [%] L1 L2
**==> picture [318 x 61] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-40:<br>R1 l1 l2<br>Motor equivalent circuit diagram<br>U<br>M R2/S<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001556E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- R1: Primary resistance
- R2: Secondary resistance
- l1: Primary leakage inductance
- l2: Secondary leakage inductance
- M: Excitation inductance S: Slip
- L1 = l1 + M: Primary inductance
- L2 = l2 + M: Secondary inductance
6 - 98
Selection and protection of a motor
Parameter
|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Setting Range**|**Setting Increments**|**Initial Value**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|82|Motor excitation current<br>(no load current)|0–500 A, 9999|0.01 A|9999|
|90|Motor constant R1|0–50�, 9999|0.001�|9999|
|91|Motor constant R2|0–50�, 9999|0.001�|9999|
|92|Motor constant L1|0–1000 mH, 9999|0.1 mH|9999|
|93|Motor constant L2|0–1000 mH, 9999|0.1 mH|9999|
|94|Motor constant X|0–100%, 9999|0.1%|9999|
|859|Torque current|0–500 A, 9999|0.01 A|9999|
_**Tab. 6-22:** Setting of parameter 82, 90 to 94 and 859_
## � Refer to the following table and set Pr. 83 and Pr. 84.
|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Setting Range**|**Setting Increments**|**Initial Value**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|83|Rated motor voltage|0–1000 V|0.1 V|400 V|
|84|Rated motor frequency|10–120 Hz|0.01 Hz|50 Hz|
_**Tab. 6-23:** Setting of parameter 83 and 84_
**NOTE**
When "9999" is set in Pr. 82, Pr. 90 to Pr. 94, Pr. 859, Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants are used.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 99
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **6.9 Motor brake and stop operation**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Motor braking torque adjustment|DC injection brake|Pr. 10–Pr. 12|6.9.1|
|Improve the motor braking torque with<br>an option|Selection of a regenerative brake|Pr. 30, Pr. 70|6.9.2|
|Coast the motor to a stop|Selection of motor stopping method|Pr. 250|6.9.3|
|Used to stop the motor with a mechani-<br>cal brake<br>(vibration restraint at stop-on-contact)|Stop-on-contact control|Pr. 6, Pr. 48,<br>Pr. 270, Pr. 275,<br>Pr. 276|6.9.4|
|Used to stop the motor with a mechani-<br>cal brake (operation timing of a<br>mechanical brake)|Brake sequence function|Pr. 278–Pr. 283,<br>Pr. 292|6.9.5|
## **6.9.1 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)**
The FR-E700 SC EC/ENE frequency inverter has an adjustable DC brake function.
This function uses the eddy current brake principle, stopping the motor by applying a pulsed DC voltage to the motor stator.
The pulsed DC voltage applied to the motor stator can achieve stopping torques of around 25 to 30% of the motor’s rated torque.
|**Pr.**<br>**No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**10**|DC injection brake<br>operation frequency|3 Hz||0–120 Hz|Set the operation frequency of the DC<br>injection brake.|
|**11**|DC injection brake<br>operation time|0.5 s||0|DC injection brake disabled|
|||||0.1–10 s|Set the operation time of the DC injection<br>brake.|
|**12**|DC injection brake<br>operation voltage|FR-E720S-008SC to 015SC|6%|0–30%|Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque).<br>When "0" is set, DC injection brake is disabled.|
|||FR-E720S-030SC to 110SC,<br>FR-E740-016SC to 170SC|4%|||
|||FR-E740-230SC and 300SC|2%|||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
6 - 100
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **Operation frequency setting (Pr. 10)**
When the frequency at which the DC injection brake operates is set to Pr. 10, the DC injection brake is operated when this frequency is reached during deceleration.
**==> picture [405 x 196] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-41:<br>When Pr. 11 is set to a value between 0.1 and 10 s<br>Pr. 10<br>Pr. 12<br>I000007C<br>Pr. 11<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>voltage<br>DC injection brake<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **Operation time setting (Pr. 11)**
Use Pr. 11 to set the duration period the DC injection brake is applied.
When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increasing the setting produces an effect.
When Pr. 11 = 0 s, the DC injection brake is not operated. (At a stop, the motor coasts.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 101
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **Operation voltage (torque) setting (Pr. 12)**
Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage to the power supply voltage.
When Pr. 12 = 0%, the DC injection brake is not operated. (At a stop, the motor coasts.)
When using the constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA) and energy saving motor (SF-HR, SF-HRCA), change the Pr. 12 setting as follows:
Constant-torque motor: FR-E720S-110SC or less, FR-E740-095SC or less ......................4% FR-E740-120SC or more ....................................................................2% Energy saving motor SF-HR, SF-HRCA: FR-E720S-110SC or less, FR-E740-095SC or less .......................4% FR-E740-120SC and 170SC...............................................................3% FR-E740-230SC and 300SC...............................................................2%
**NOTES** For the FR-E740-120SC and 170SC, when the Pr. 12 setting is the following, changing the Pr. 71 "Applied motor" setting automatically changes the Pr. 12 setting. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the Pr. 12 setting.
## **Parameter 12 = 4% (initial value)**
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 2% if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the standard motor (0, 3 to 6, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44) to the value selecting the constant torque motor (1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54).
## **Parameter 12 = 2%**
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 4% (initial value) if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the constant torque motor (1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54) to the value selecting the standard motor (0, 3 to 6, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44).
Even if the Pr. 12 setting is increased, braking torque is limited so that the output current is within the rated inverter current.
As stop holding torque is not produced, install a mechanical brake.
6 - 102
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **6.9.2**
## **Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)**
- When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) and brake unit (FR-BU2) to increase the regenerative brake duty.
- Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) for continuous operation in regeneration status.
Use the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or continuously use the regenerative status.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**30**|Regenerative function<br>selection|0|0|Inverter without regenerative function<br>Brake unit (FR-BU2)<br>Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)<br>High power factor converter (FR-HC)||57<br>178–184<br>190–192<br>Restart coasting time<br>Input terminal function<br>selection<br>Output terminal<br>function selection|6.12.1<br>6.10.1<br>6.10.5|
||||1|High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)||||
||||2|High power factor converter (FR-HC) when automatic<br>restart after instantaneous power failure is selected||||
|**70**|Special regenerative brake<br>duty|0%|0–30%|Brake duty when using the high-duty brake resistor<br>(FR-ABR)(10%)||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **When using the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), and high power factor converter (FR-HC)**
Set Pr. 30 to "0" (initial value). The Pr. 70 setting is made invalid. At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows.
- FR-E720S-030SC or more ................. 3%
- FR-E740-016SC or more.................... 2%
- Assign the inverter operation enable signal (X10) to the contact input terminal. To make protective coordination with the FR-HC and FR-CV, use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output.
- Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC (RDYB signal of the FR-CV).
- For the terminal used for X10 signal input, assign its function by setting "10" (X10) to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184.
## **When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) (FR-E720S-030SC or more, FR-E740-016SC or more)**
Set "1" in Pr. 30. Set Pr. 70 as follows.
- FR-E720S-100SC or less, FR-E740-170SC or less.................10%
- FR-E740-230SC and 300SC ........................................................6%
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 103
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **When a high power factor converter (FR-HC) is used and automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is made valid.**
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function of both the FR-HC and inverter is made valid (when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 57 "Restart coasting time"), set "2" in Pr. 30.
- Set Pr. 70 to "0%" (initial value).
- When the FR-HC detects power failure during inverter operation, the RDY signal turns on, resulting in the motor coasting. Turning the RDY signal off after power restoration, the inverter detects the motor speed (depends on the Pr. 162 "Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection") and restarts automatically after instantaneous power failure.
## **Regenerative brake duty alarm output and alarm signal (RBP signal)**
- [RB] appears on the operation panel and an alarm signal (RBP) is output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100% of the Pr. 70 setting, a regenerative overvoltage (E.OV1 to E.OV3) occurs. Note that [RB] is not displayed when Pr. 30 = "0".
- The inverter does not trip even when the alarm (RBP) signal is output.
- For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign the function by setting "7 (positive logic) or 107 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
**==> picture [328 x 112] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
100%: Overvoltage tripping<br>Ratio of the brake 100%<br>duty to the Pr. 70 85%<br>setting (%)<br>Regenerative brake<br>pre-alarm (RBP)<br>OFF ON ON<br>Time<br>I001566E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-42:** Regenerative overload_
## **NOTES**
The MRS signal can also be used instead of the X10 signal.
Refer to section 3.8 for connecting the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), brake unit (FR-BU2), high power factor converter (FR-HC), and power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the other functions may be affected. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
## **E**
## **CAUTION:**
_**The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used. Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.**_
6 - 104
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **6.9.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250)**
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off. Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal. You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR). (Refer to section 6.10.4 for start signal selection.)
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**Start Signal**<br>**(STF/STR)**|**Stop Operation**||||
|**250**|Stop selection|9999|0–100 s|STF:<br>Forward<br>rotation start<br>STR:<br>Reverse rotation<br>start|The motor is coasted to a stop<br>when the preset time elapses<br>after the start signal is turned<br>off.||7<br>8<br>13<br>Acceleration time<br>Deceleration time<br>Starting frequency|6.7.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.7.2|
||||1000 s<br>–<br>1100 s|STF:<br>Start signal<br>STR:<br>Forward/reverse<br>signal|The motor is coasted to a stop<br>(Pr. 250�1000) s after the<br>start signal is turned off.||||
||||9999|STF:<br>Forward<br>rotation start<br>STR:<br>Reverse<br>rotation start|When the start signal is turned<br>off, the motor decelerates to<br>stop.||||
||||8888|STF:<br>Start signal<br>STR:<br>Forward/reverse<br>signal|||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Set Pr. 250 to "9999" (initial value) or "8888". The motor decelerates to a stop when the start signal (STF/STR) turns off.
**==> picture [325 x 120] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>frequency [Hz] Deceleration starts when start signal turns off<br>Deceleration time (Time set to Pr. 8, etc.)<br>DC brake<br>Time<br>Start signal ON OFF<br>RUN signal ON OFF<br>I001143E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-43:** Stop operation when parameter 250 = 9999_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 105
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
Use Pr. 250 to set the time from when the start signal turns off until the output is shut off. When any of "1000" to "1100" is set, the output is shut off after (Pr. 250 1000) s.
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has elapsed after the start signal had turned off. The motor coasts to a stop.
**==> picture [325 x 116] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output is shut off when set time elapses after start<br>Output<br>signal turned off<br>frequency [Hz] Pr. 250<br>Motor coasts to stop<br>Time<br>Start signal<br>ON OFF<br>RUN signal ie ON OFF<br>I001144E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-44:** Stop operation when parameter 250 ¹ 8888 or 9999_
## **NOTES**
The RUN signal turns off when the output stops.
Stop selection is invalid when the following functions are activated. Power failure stop function (Pr. 261)
PU stop (Pr. 75)
Deceleration stop because of communication error (Pr. 502)
Emergency stop by LonWorks communication
When setting of Pr. 250 is not 9999 nor 8888, acceleration/deceleration is performed according to the frequency command, until start signal is OFF and output is shutoff.
When the start signal is turned on again during motor coasting, the motor starts at Pr. 13 "Starting frequency".
6 - 106
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **6.9.4 Stop-on contact control function**
## **(Pr. 6, Pr. 48, Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276)** >: **AD MFVC GP** Sz **MFVC**
To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc. of a lift, stop-on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed while the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper etc. This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications, ensuring steady precise positioning.
**==> picture [482 x 426] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Without stop-on-contact control With stop-on-contact control<br>Vibration Complete stop<br>A hb<br>Lift Lift<br>I001567E<br> Fig. 6-45: Suppressing vibration in vertical motion applications<br>Refer to<br>Pr. No. Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Section<br>6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10 Hz 0–400 Hz Sets the output frequency for stop-on-contact control. 24–274–6 Multi-speed setting 6.6.1<br>es a 15 Jog frequency 6.6.2<br>48 Second stall prevention 9999 0–200% Sets the stall prevention operation level for stall prevention operation level. 48 Second stall prevention operation current 6.3.5<br>operation current 9999 Pr. 22 setting 59 Remote function selection 6.6.3<br>r ee ee e e ee 72 PWM frequency selection 6.15.1<br>Stop-on contact control 0 Normal operation 79 Operation mode selection 6.18.1<br>270 e selection 0 e e 1 Stop-on-contact control eee 178–184128 PID action selectionInput terminal 6.20.16.10.1<br>function selection<br>Set the force (holding torque) for stop- 292 Automatic acceleration/ 6.7.4<br>Stop-on contact excitation 0–300% on-contact control.<br>deceleration<br>275 current low-speed multiplying 9999 Normally set 130% to 180%.<br>factor<br>9999 Without compensation<br>. | LEes<br>0–9 Sets a PWM carrier frequency for stop-<br>PWM carrier frequency at stop- on-contact control.<br>276 9999<br>on contact 9999 As set in Pr. 72 "PWM frequency<br>selection".<br>of<br>pe | ee-; ee<br>‘O) The parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.<br>@ This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in<br>Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 107
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
**==> picture [370 x 230] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
MC<br>Mechanical<br>brake<br>MCCB<br>— x OR/L1 UO<br>Power supply Motor<br>— OT/L3 wO<br>Forward rotation command o STF<br>High-speed operation command 6 RH®<br>Middle-speed operation command o RM<br>Stop-on contact selection 0 6 RLO<br>Stop-on contact selection 1 bRT®<br>o O PC<br>I001568E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-46:** Connection example_
The input signal terminal used differs according to the Pr. 180 to Pr. 184 settings.
**==> picture [236 x 227] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Normal mode Stop-on-contact control mode<br>Pr. 4<br>Pr. 5<br>Pr. 6<br>etch Time<br>(Q) (b) ()<br>RH ON<br>RM OFF ON<br>RL OFF ON<br>RT OFF ON<br>* Goes into stop-on-contact control when both RL and RT<br>switch on. RL and RT may be switched on in any order with any<br>time difference.<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
(a): Acceleration time (Pr. 7)
- (b): Deceleration time (Pr. 8)
- (c): Second deceleration time (Pr. 44/Pr. 45)
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001569E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-47:** Switching to the stop-on contact control mode_
6 - 108
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **Set stop-on-contact control**
- Make sure that the inverter is in external operation mode. (Refer to section 6.18.1.)
- Select advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
- Set "1" in Pr. 270 "Stop-on contact control selection".
- Set output frequency during stop-on-contact control in Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)". The frequency should be as low as possible (about 2 Hz). If it is set to more than 30 Hz, the operating frequency will be 30 Hz.
- When both the RT and RL signals are switched on, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact mode, in which operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 6 independently of the preceding speed.
- For the terminal used for X18 signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" and "0" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
**NOTES**
- By increasing the Pr. 275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but overcurrent fault (E.OCT) may occur or the machine may oscillate in a stop-on-contact state.
The stop-on-contact function is different from servo-lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period, this function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately change to a mechanical brake to hold the load.
Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is made invalid: � PU operation (Pr. 79)
- Jog operation (JOG signal)
- PU+external operation (Pr. 79)
- PID control function operation (Pr. 128)
- remote setting function operation (Pr. 59)
- automatic acceleration/deceleration operation (Pr. 292)
## **Function switching of stop-on-contact control selection**
|**Main Functions**|**Normal Operation**<br>**(either RL or RT is off or both are off)**|**With Stop-on-contact Control**<br>**(both RL and RT are on)**|
|---|---|---|
|Output frequency|Multi-speed<br>0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA etc.|Pr. 6|
|Stall prevention operation level|Pr. 22|Pr. 48<br>(Pr. 22 when Pr. 48 = 9999)|
|Excitation current low speed scaling<br>factor|—|Only Pr. 275 (0 to 300%) is compen-<br>sated from normal operation|
|Carrier frequency|Pr. 72|Pr. 276 setting when output<br>frequency is 3 Hz or less<br>(Pr. 72 when Pr. 276 = 9999)|
|Fast-response current limit|Valid|Invalid|
_**Tab. 6-24:** Function switching of stop-on-contact control selection_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 109
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **Set frequency when stop-on-contact control (Pr. 270 = 1) is selected**
The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together. Stop-on-contact control is invalid when remote setting function is selected (Pr. 59 = 1 to 3).
|**Input Signal**<br>~~e~~<br>ee<br>eeee|**Input Signal**<br>~~e~~<br>ee<br>eeee|**Input Signal**<br>~~e~~<br>ee<br>eeee|**Input Signal**<br>~~e~~<br>ee<br>eeee|**Input Signal**<br>~~e~~<br>ee<br>eeee|**Stop-on-**<br>**contact**<br>~~e~~e|**Set Frequency**<br>e|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**RH**<br>~~e~~<br>ee|**RM**<br>~~e~~<br>ee|**RL**<br>~~e~~<br>ee|**RT**<br>~~e~~<br>ee|**JOG**<br>~~e~~<br>ee|||
|ON<br>ee<br>a<br>OO|ee<br>a<br>OO|ee|ee|ee||Pr. 4 "Multi-speed setting (high speed)"|
|a <br>OO|ON<br> a<br>OO|||||Pr. 5 "Multi-speed setting (middle speed)"|
|OO<br>aOO|OO<br>OO|ON||||Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)"|
|aOO|OO||ON|||By 0 to 5 V (0 to 10 V), 4 to 20 mA input|
|OO<br>aOO|OO<br>OO|||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>aOO|ON<br>OO|||||Pr. 26 "Multi-speed setting (speed 6)"|
|ON<br>OO<br>aOO|OO<br>OO|ON||||Pr. 25 "Multi-speed setting (speed 5)"|
|ON<br>aOO|OO||ON|||Pr. 4 "Multi-speed setting (high speed)"|
|ON<br>OO<br>aOO|OO<br>OO|||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|aOO|ON<br>OO|ON||||Pr. 24 "Multi-speed setting (speed 4)"|
|OO<br>aOO|ON<br>OO<br>OO||ON|||Pr. 5 "Multi-speed setting (middle speed)"|
|OO|ON<br>OO|||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|OO<br>a<br>OO|OO<br>OO|ON|ON||Valid|Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)"|
|OO|OO|ON||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|OO<br>a<br>OO|OO<br>OO||ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|OO|OO|ON|ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|OO<br>a<br>OO|ON<br>OO<br>OO||ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|OO|ON<br>OO|ON||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|OO<br>a<br>OO|ON<br>OO<br>OO|ON|ON||Valid|Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)"|
|ON<br>OO|OO||ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO<br>a<br>OO|OO<br>OO|ON||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO|OO|ON|ON||Valid|Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)"|
|ON<br>OO<br>a<br>OO|ON<br>OO<br>OO|||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO|ON<br>OO||ON|||Pr. 26 "Multi-speed setting (speed 6)"|
|ON<br>OO<br>a<br>OO|ON<br>OO<br>OO|ON||||Pr. 27 "Multi-speed setting (speed 7)"|
|OO|ON<br>OO|ON|ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO<br>a<br>OO|OO<br>OO|ON|ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO|ON<br>OO||ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO<br>a<br>OO|ON<br>OO<br>OO|ON||ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|ON<br>OO|ON<br>OO|ON|ON||Valid|Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting (low speed)"|
|ON<br>OO<br>a|ON<br>OO|ON|ON|ON||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency"|
|a|ee|ee|ee|ee|ee|By 0 to 5 V (0 to 10 V), 4 to 20 mA input<br>ee|
_**Tab. 6-25:** Frequency and combined input signals_
## **NOTE**
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 110
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **6.9.5 Brake sequence function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 283, Pr. 292)** EE LE **AD MFVC GP MFVC**
This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical brake operation timing signal in vertical lift and other applications.This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at a start due to the operation timing error of the mechanical brake or an overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation.
|**Pr. No.**<br>~~e~~|**Name**<br>~~e~~e|**Initial Value**<br>ee|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>ee|**Description**<br>eee|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**278**<br>~~e~~|Brake opening frequency<br>~~e~~e|3 Hz<br>ee|0–30 Hz<br>ee|Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + about<br>1.0 Hz.<br>This parameter may be set only if Pr. 278 Pr. 282.<br>eee|
|**279**<br>~~e~~|Brake opening current<br>~~e~~e|130%<br>ee|0–200%<br>ee|Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 90%. If<br>the setting is too low, the load is liable to drop due<br>to gravity at start.<br>Suppose that the rated inverter current is 100%.<br>eee|
|**280**<br>~~e~~|Brake opening current detection<br>time<br>~~e~~e|0.3 s<br>ee<br>||0–2 s<br>ee<br>||Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 0.3 s.<br>eee|
|**281**<br>~~e~~|Brake operation time at start<br>~~e~~e <br>Pt|0.3 s<br> ee <br>Pt<br>||0–5 s<br> ee <br>Pt<br>||When Pr. 292 = 7, set the mechanical delay time<br>until the brake is loosened.<br>Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is<br>loosened + about 0.1 to 0.2 s when Pr. 292 = 8.<br> eee<br>Pt|
|**282**|Brake operation frequency|6 Hz<br>||0–30 Hz<br>||Set the frequency to activate the mechanical brake<br>by turning off the brake opening request signal<br>(BOF). Generally, set this parameter to the Pr. 278<br>setting + 3 to 4 Hz.<br>This parameter may be set only if Pr. 278 Pr. 282.|
|**283**|Brake operation time at stop|0.3 s|0–5 s<br>ee|Set the mechanical delay time until the brake is<br>closed + 0.1 s when Pr. 292 = 7.<br>Sets the mechanical delay time until the brake is<br>closed + 0.2 to 0.3 s when Pr. 292 = 8.|
|**292**|Automatic acceleration/<br>deceleration|0|0<br>ee|Normal operation mode|
||||1/11<br>ee<br>a<br>es|Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode<br>(Refer to page 6-80.)|
||||7<br>es|Brake sequence mode 1|
||||8<br>es<br>a|Brake sequence mode 2|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 111
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
**==> picture [397 x 228] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Mechanical<br>brake<br>MC -<br>MCCB<br>Power<br>supply = — s ee© S/L2 V eo Motor<br>24 V DC<br>Start signal ° STF<br>Multi-speed signal ¢ RH © ®<br>RUN (BOF) »-(MC) BOF signal<br>BRI signal ° RL(BRI)© Ba<br>O PC SE ©<br>BOF signal: Brake opening request signal<br>BRI signal: Brake opening completion signal<br>I001793E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-48:** Connection example with mechanical brake (Pr. 184 = 15, Pr. 190 = 20)_
The input signal terminal used differs according to the Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 settings.
The output signal terminal used differs according to the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 settings.
The current should be within the permissible current of transistor in the inverter. (24 V/ 0.1 A DC)
- **NOTES** When brake sequence mode is selected, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is invalid.
When using this function, set the acceleration time to 1 s or longer.
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 112
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **Set the brake sequence mode**
- Select advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose magnetic flux vector control. The brake sequence function is valid only when the external operation mode, external/PU combined operation mode 1 or network operation mode is selected.
- Set "7 or 8" (brake sequence mode) in Pr. 292. To ensure more complete sequence control, it is recommended to set "7" (brake opening completion signal input) in Pr. 292.
- Set "15" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" and assign the brake opening completion signal (BRI) to the input terminal.
- Set "20 (positive logic)" or "120 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" and assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the output terminal.
## **CAUTION:**
_**In lift applications where an inadvertent lifting of the holding brake can lead to personal injury**_ **E** _**or property damage, the BOF signal may be used for safety reasons only in positive logic, that is, setting "20".**_
## **With brake opening completion signal input (Pr. 292 = 7)**
- When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the internal speed command reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed.
- When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening completion signal (BRI) was activated, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed.
- When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set in Pr. 282 during deceleration, the inverter turns OFF the BOF signal and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr. 278. After electromagnetic brake operation completes and inverter recognizes the turn OFF of BRI signal, the inverter holds the frequency set in Pr. 278 for the time set in Pr. 283. And after the time set in Pr. 283 passes, the inverter decelerates again. The inverter finally stops when its frequency reaches to Pr. 13 "Starting frequency setting" or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower.
**==> picture [360 x 164] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>frequency<br>Pr. 280 Pr. 13 setting or 0.5 Hz,<br>Pr. 282 whichever is lower<br>Pr. 281<br>Pr. 278<br>Pr. 13<br>Time<br>STF ON Pr. 283<br>Output current Pr. 279<br>BOF signal<br>ON<br>BRI signal<br>ON<br>Electromagnetic brake<br>operation<br>Closed Opened Closed<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001571E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-49:** Operation when Pr. 292 = 7_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 113
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **With brake opening completion signal input (Pr. 292 = 8)**
- When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running. When the internal speed command reaches the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280 has elapsed.
- When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the BOF signal is output, the inverter increases the output frequency to the set speed.
- When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set in Pr. 282 during deceleration, the inverter turns OFF the BOF signal and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr. 278. After the turn OFF of BOF signal, the inverter holds the frequency set in Pr. 278 for the time set in Pr. 283. And after the time set in Pr. 283 passes, the inverter decelerates again. The inverter finally stops when its frequency reaches to Pr. 13 "Starting frequency setting" or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower.
**==> picture [387 x 188] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output<br>frequency<br>Pr. 280 Pr. 13 setting or 0.5 Hz,<br>Pr. 282 Pr. 281 whichever is lower<br>Pr. 278<br>Pr. 13<br>Time<br>STF EIN Pr. 283<br>Output current<br>Pr. 279<br>aay<br>BOF signal esns EIN<br>Electromagnetic brake<br>Closed Opened Closed<br>operation<br>I001572E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-50:** Operation when Pr. 292 = 8_
**NOTE**
- If brake sequence mode has been selected, inputting the jog signal (jog operation) or RT signal (second function selection) during an inverter stop will make brake sequence mode invalid and give priority to jog operation or second function selection. Note that JOG and RT signal input is invalid even if JOG signal and RT signal are input during operation in brake sequence mode.
OF 6 - 114 UITSUBISHI ELECTRI
Motor brake and stop operation
Parameter
## **Protective functions**
If any of the following errors occurs in the brake sequence mode, the inverter results in a fault, trips, and turns off the brake opening request signal (BOF).
|**Fault**<br>**Display**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|E.MB4|Although more than 2 s have elapsed after the start command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, the<br>brake opening request signal (BOF) does not turn on.|
|E.MB5|Although more than 2 s have elapsed after the brake opening request signal (BOF) turned on, the brake<br>opening completion signal (BRI) does not turn on.|
|E.MB6|Though the inverter had turned on the brake opening request signal (BOF), the brake opening completion<br>signal (BRI) turned off midway.|
|E.MB7|Although more than 2 s have elapsed after the brake opening request signal (BOF) turned off at a stop, the<br>brake opening completion signal (BRI) does not turn off.|
## _**Tab. 6-26:** Protective functions_
**NOTES** During deceleration, inverter output is shut OFF when the frequency reaches Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower. For Pr. 278 "Brake opening frequency", set Pr. 13 or a frequency equal to or higher than 0.5 Hz.
A too large setting of Pr. 278 "Brake opening frequency" activates stall prevention operation and may cause E.MB4.
If the sum of the time between Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" and Pr. 278 "Brake opening frequency" + Pr. 280 "Brake opening current detection time" is more than 2 s, E.MB4 occurs.
**==> picture [287 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency [Hz]<br>Time<br>Brake opening request ON<br>(BOF signal)<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 115
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **6.10 Function assignment of external terminals**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Assign function to input terminal|Input terminal function selection|Pr. 178–Pr. 184|6.10.1|
|Set MRS signal (output shutoff) to nor-<br>mally closed contact specification|MRS input selection|Pr. 17|6.10.2|
|Assign start signal and forward/reverse<br>command to other signals|Start signal (STF/STF) operation selection|Pr. 250|6.10.4|
|Assign function to output terminal|Output terminal function selection|Pr. 190–Pr. 192|6.10.5|
|Detect output frequency|Up-to-frequency sensitivity<br>Output frequency detection|Pr. 41–Pr. 43|6.10.6|
|Detect output current|Output current detection<br>Zero current detection|Pr. 150–Pr. 153|6.10.7|
|Remote output function|Remote output|Pr. 495–Pr. 497|6.10.8|
## **6.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 184)**
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
|**Pr. No.**<br>~~r~~|**Name**<br>~~r~~r|**Initial Value**|**Initial Signal**|**Setting Range**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**178**<br>~~r~~|STF terminal<br>function selection<br>~~r~~r|60|STF (forward rotation command)|0–5/7/8/10/12/14–16/18/<br>24/25/60/62/65–67/9999|
|**179**<br>~~r~~|STR terminal<br>function selection<br>~~r~~r<br>a<br>ee|61<br>ee|STR (reverse rotation command)<br>ee|0–5/7/8/10/12/14–16/18/<br>24/25/61/62/65–67/9999|
|**180**|RL terminal<br>function selection<br>ee|0<br>ee|RL (low-speed operation command)<br>ee|0–5/7/8/10/12/14–16/18/<br>24/25/62/65–67/9999|
|**181**|RM terminal<br>function selection<br>ee<br>ee|1<br>ee<br>ee|RM (middle-speed operation command)<br>ee<br>ee||
|**182**|RH terminal<br>function selection<br>a|2<br>ee|RH (high speed operation command)||
|**183**|MRS bit<br>function selection<br>a<br>ee|24<br>ee<br>ee|MRS (output stop)<br>eee||
|**184**|RES terminal<br>function selection<br>a<br>ee|62<br>ee<br>ee|RES (inverter reset)<br>eee||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
This setting is active only during the communication operation (refer to section 6.19).
6 - 116
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **Input terminal function assignment**
|**Setting**|**Terminal**|**Function**|**Function**|**Related Parameters**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|0|RL|Pr. 59 = 0<br>(initial value)|Low-speed operation command|Pr. 4–Pr. 6, Pr. 24–Pr. 27,<br>Pr. 232–Pr. 239|6-60|
|||Pr. 59 = 1, 2�|Remote setting (setting clear)|Pr. 59|6-67|
|||Pr. 270 = 1�|Stop-on contact selection 0|Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276|6-107|
|1|RM|Pr. 59 = 0<br>(initial value)|Middle-speed operation command|Pr. 4–Pr. 6, Pr. 24–Pr. 27,<br>Pr. 232–Pr. 239|6-60|
|||Pr. 59 = 1, 2�|Remote setting (deceleration)|Pr. 59|6-67|
|2|RH|Pr. 59 = 0<br>(initial value)|High-speed operation command|Pr. 4–Pr. 6, Pr. 24–Pr. 27,<br>Pr. 232–Pr. 239|6-60|
|||Pr. 59 = 1, 2�|Remote setting (acceleration)|Pr. 59|6-67|
|3|RT|Second function selection||Pr. 44–Pr. 51|6-121|
|||Pr. 270 = 1�|Stop-on contact selection 1|Pr. 270, Pr. 275, Pr. 276|6-107|
|4|AU|Terminal 4 input selection||Pr. 267|6-177|
|5|JOG|Jog operation selection||Pr. 15, Pr. 16|6-63|
|7|OH|External thermal relay input�||Pr. 9|6-82|
|8|REX|15 speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH)||Pr. 4–Pr. 6, Pr. 24–Pr. 27,<br>Pr. 232–Pr. 239|6-60|
|10|X10|Inverter operation enable signal<br>(FR-HC-, FR-CV connection)||Pr. 30, Pr. 70|6-103|
|12|X12|PU operation external interlock||Pr. 79|6-206|
|14|X14|PID control valid terminal||Pr. 127–Pr. 134|6-293|
|15|BRI|Brake opening completion signal||Pr. 278–Pr. 285|6-111|
|16|X16|PU-external operation switchover<br>(turning on X16 selects external operation)||Pr. 79, Pr. 340|6-215|
|18|X18|V/F switchover (V/F control is exercised when X18 is on)||Pr. 80, Pr. 81, Pr. 800|6-33, 6-38,<br>6-41, 6-90|
|24|MRS|Output stop||Pr. 17|6-119|
|25|STOP|Start self-holding selection||—|6-122|
|60|STF|Forward rotation command<br>(assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only)||—|6-122|
|61|STR|Reverse rotation command<br>(assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only)||—|6-122|
|62|RES|Inverter reset||—|—|
|65|X65|PU/NET operation switchover<br>(turning on X65 selects PU operation)||Pr. 79, Pr. 340|6-218|
|66|X66|External/NET operation switchover<br>(turning on X66 selects NET operation)||Pr. 79, Pr. 340|6-218|
|67|X67|Command source switchover<br>(turning on X67 makes Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 commands valid)||Pr. 338, Pr. 339|6-220|
|9999|—|No function||—|—|
## _**Tab. 6-27:** Input terminal function assignment_
- When Pr. 59 "Remote function selection" = 1 or 2, the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals are changed as given in the table.
- When Pr. 270 "Stop-on contact control selection" = 1, functions of RL and RT signals are changed as in the table.
- The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 117
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **NOTES**
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR.
The priorities of the speed commands are in order of jog, multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) and PID (X14).
When the X10 signal (FR-HC, FR-CV connection - inverter operation enable signal) is not set, the MRS signal shares this function.
When the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned at the Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" setting of "7", the MRS signal shares this function.
Use common terminals to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually. (Common terminals are used since these functions are designed for speed setting and need not be set at the same time.)
Switch the control method using external terminal (X18 signal) during an inverter stop. If control method between V/F control and Advanced (General-purpose magnetic) flux vector control is switched during the operation, the actual switchover does not take place until the inverter stops. In addition, if control method is switched to V/F control during the operation, only second function becomes valid as V/F control and second function are selected simultaneously in V/F control.
Turning the AU signal on makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
## **Response time of each signal**
The response time of the X10 signal and MRS signal is within 2 ms. The response time of other signals is within 20 ms.
6 - 118
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
**6.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)**
|||The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be se-|The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be se-|The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be se-|The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be se-|The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be se-|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||lected.|||||
|**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>**Description**<br>**17**<br>MRS input selection<br>0<br>0<br>Normally open input<br>2<br>Normally closed input (NC contact input<br>specifications)<br>4<br>External terminal: Normally closed input (NC<br>contact input specifications) Communication:<br>Normally open input<br>~~iC~~|||||**Parameters referred to**<br>178–184<br>Input terminal<br>function selection|**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>6.10.1|
|||The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.|||The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.||
## **Output shutoff signal**
Turning on the output shutoff signal (MRS) during inverter running shuts off the output immediately.
**==> picture [396 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Motor coasts to Fig. 6-51:<br>stop Output shutoff signal<br>= Time<br>MRS ON<br>STF (STR) ON<br>I001325C<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Terminal MRS may be used as described below:
- When mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) is used to stop motor. The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
- To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter.
- With the MRS signal on, the inverter cannot be operated if the start signal is entered into the inverter.
- Coast the motor to a stop.
When the start signal is turned off, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS signal is turned on, the motor coasts to a stop.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 119
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **MRS signal logic inversion**
When Pr. 17 is set to "2", the MRS signal (output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC contact) input specification. When the MRS signal turns on (opens), the inverter shuts off the output.
|Pr. 17 = 0|Pr. 17 = 0|Pr. 17 = 0|Pr. 17 = 2|**_Fig. 6-52:_**||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||_Connection of the MRS signal in source logic_||
|||PC|PC|||
||||||_I000011C_|
## **Assign a different action for each MRS signal input from communication and external terminal (Pr. 17 = 4)**
When Pr. 17 is set to "4", the MRS signal from external terminal (output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC contact) input, and the MRS signal from communication can be changed to the normally open (NO contact) input.
This function is useful to perform operation by communication with MRS signal from external terminal remained on.
|**External MRS**|**Communication MRS**|**Pr. 17**|**Pr. 17**|**Pr. 17**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**0**|**2**|**4**|
|OFF|OFF|Operation enabled|Output shutoff|Output shutoff|
|OFF|ON|Output shutoff|Output shutoff|Output shutoff|
|ON|OFF|Output shutoff|Output shutoff|Operation enabled|
|ON|ON|Output shutoff|Operation enabled|Output shutoff|
_**Tab. 6-28:** Activating the output shutoff by external signal or communication_
## **NOTES**
For MRS signal, assign the function by setting "24" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection".
When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 120
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **6.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT, Pr. 155)**
You can select the second function using the RT signal. For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
The second function has the following applications:
- Switching between normal use and emergency use.
- Switching between heavy load and light load.
- Changing of acceleration/deceleration time by broken line acceleration/deceleration.
- Switching of characteristic between main motor and sub motor.
**==> picture [412 x 285] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-53:<br>Inverter<br>Second functions connection diagram<br>Start<br>Second functions selection<br>High speed<br>Middle speed<br>I001145C<br>Fig. 6-54:<br>Second acceleration/deceleration time example<br>Acceleration time<br>is reflected<br>Time<br>I001794E<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Following functions that can be set as second functions:
|**Function**|**Parameter Number as**|**Parameter Number as**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**1st Function**|**2nd Function**||
|Torque boost|Pr. 0|Pr. 46|6-35|
|Base frequency|Pr. 3|Pr. 47|6-56|
|Acceleration time|Pr. 7|Pr. 44|6-71|
|Deceleration time|Pr. 8|Pr. 44, Pr. 45|6-71|
|Electronic thermal relay function|Pr. 9|Pr. 51|6-82|
|Stall prevention|Pr. 22|Pr. 48|6-44|
|Applied motor|Pr. 71|Pr. 450|6-87|
_**Tab. 6-29:** Functions that can be set as second functions_
## **NOTES**
When the RT signal is on, the above second function is selected at the same time.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 121
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **6.10.4 Start signal selection (Terminal STF, STR, STOP, Pr. 250)**
You can select the operation of the start signal (STF/STR).
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns off. Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching off of the start signal. (Refer to section 6.9.3 for stop selection.)
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**Start Signal (STF/STR)**|**Stop Operation**|
|**250**|Stop selection|9999|0–100 s|STF:<br>Forward<br>rotation start<br>STR:<br>Reverse rotation<br>start|The motor is coasted to a stop<br>when the preset time elapses<br>after the start signal is turned<br>off.|
||||1000 s<br>–<br>1100 s|STF:<br>Start signal<br>STR:<br>Forward/reverse<br>signal|The motor is coasted to a stop<br>(Pr. 250 1000)s after the start<br>signal is turned off.|
||||9999|STF:<br>Forward<br>rotation start<br>STR:<br>Reverse<br>rotation start|When the start signal is turned<br>off, the motor decelerates to<br>stop.|
||||8888|STF:<br>Start signal<br>STR:<br>Forward/reverse<br>signal||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **2-wire type (terminals STF and STR)**
A two-wire type connection is shown below.
In the initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) are used as start and stop signals. Turn on either of the forward and reverse rotation signals to start the motor in the corresponding direction. If both are turned off (or on) during operation, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
The speed setting signal may either be given by entering 0 to 10 V DC across the speed setting input terminal 2-5, by setting the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 "Multi-speed setting" (high, middle, low speeds), etc. (For multi-speed operation, refer to section 6.6.1).
When Pr. 250 is set to any of "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal becomes a start command and the STR signal a forward/reverse command.
**==> picture [358 x 161] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Fig. 6-55:<br>2-wire type connection (Pr. 250 = 9999)<br>Forward rotation start STF<br>Reverse rotation start STR<br>PC<br>10<br>2<br>5<br>Time<br>ON<br>STF 2 |<br>sr____- ON<br>Forward rotation<br>Reverse rotation<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_I001148E_
6 - 122
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
**==> picture [412 x 179] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Fig. 6-56:<br>2-wire type connection (Pr. 250 = 8888)<br>Start signal<br>Forward/reverse signal<br>Time<br>ON<br>ON<br>I001149E<br>Forward rotation<br>Reverse rotation<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTES**
When Pr. 250 is set to any of "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", the motor coasts to a stop if the start command is turned off. (Refer to section 6.9.3.)
The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial setting. The STF signal can be assigned to Pr. 178 "STF terminal function selection" and the STR signal to Pr. 179 "STR terminal function selection" only.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 123
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **3-wire type (terminals STF, STR and STOP)**
A three-wire type connection is shown below.
The start self-holding selection becomes valid when the STOP signal is turned on. In this case, the forward/reverse rotation signal functions only as a start signal.
If the start signal (STF or STR) is turned on and then off, the start signal is held and makes a start. When changing the direction of rotation, turn STR (STF) on once and then off. To stop the inverter, turning off the STOP signal once decelerates it to a stop. When using the STOP signal, set "25" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 to assign function.
**==> picture [398 x 451] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Fig. 6-57:<br>3-wire type connection (Pr. 250 = 9999)<br>Stop<br>S T F<br>Forward<br>rotation<br>——9 S TR<br>Reverse<br>rotation start<br>o (STOP<br>OPC<br>Time<br>ON<br>STR ON<br>STOP ON ON ON<br>I001150E<br>Inverter Fig. 6-58:<br>3-wire type connection (Pr. 250 = 8888)<br>Stop Start<br>S T F<br>> STOP<br>O STR<br>Forward/<br>reverse rotation<br>O PC<br>Time<br>STF ON ON |<br>STR ON<br>|<br>STOP ON ON<br>Forward rotation<br>Reverse rotation<br>Output frequency<br>Forward rotation<br>Reverse rotation<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001151E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTES**
When the JOG signal is turned on to enable jog operation, the STOP signal becomes invalid.
If the MRS signal is turned on to stop the output, the self-holding function is not cancelled.
6 - 124
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **Start signal selection**
|**STF**|**STR**|**Setting Inverter Status**|**Setting Inverter Status**|
|---|---|---|---|
|||**Pr. 250 = 0–100 s/9999**|**Pr. 250 = 1000–1100 s/8888**|
|OFF|OFF|Stop|Stop|
|OFF|ON|Reverse rotation||
|ON|OFF|Forward rotation|Forward rotation|
|ON|ON|Stop|Reverse rotation|
_**Tab. 6-30:** Start signal selection_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 125
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **6.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 192/Pr. 313 to Pr. 315)**
You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and relay output terminal. For the FR-E700 SC ENE the functions of the output virtual terminals of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic can be changed.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Signal**|**Setting Range**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**190**|RUN terminal<br>function selection|Open<br>collector<br>output<br>terminal|0|RUN (inverter running)|0/1/3/4/7/8/11–16/20/<br>25/26/46/47/64/80/81/<br>90/91/93/95/96/98/99/<br>100/101/103/104/107/<br>108/111–116/120/125/<br>126/146/147/164/180/<br>181/190/191/193/195/<br>196/198/199/9999|
|**191**|FU terminal<br>function selection||4|FU (output frequency detection)||
|**192**|ABC terminal<br>function selection|Relay<br>output<br>terminal|99|ALM (alarm output)|0/1/3/4/7/8/11–16/20/<br>25/26/46/47/64/80/81/<br>90/91/95/96/98/99/100/<br>101/103/104/107/108/<br>111–116/120/125/126/<br>146/147/164/180/181/<br>190/191/195/196/198/<br>199/9999|
|**313**|DO0 output selection|Virtual<br>output|9999<br>a|No function|0/1/3/4/7/8/11–16/20/<br>25/26/46/47/64/90/91/<br>93/95/96/98/99/100/101/<br>103/104/107/108/111–<br>116/120/125/126/146/<br>147/164/190/191/193/<br>195/196/198/199/999|
|**314**|DO1 output selection||9999<br>a|||
|**315**|DO2 output selection||9999<br>a<br>a|||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
6 - 126
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
You can set the functions of the output terminals. Refer to the following table and set the parameters: 0–99: Source logic 100–199: Sink logic
|**Setting**|**Setting**|**Terminal**|**Function**|**Operation**|**Related Parameters**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Source**<br>**Logic**|**Sink**<br>**Logic**||||||
|0|100|RUN|Inverter running|Output during operation when<br>the inverter output frequency<br>rises to or above Pr. 13 "Starting<br>frequency".|—|6-129|
|1|101|SU|Up to frequency�|Output when the output fre-<br>quency is reached to the set fre-<br>quency.|Pr. 41|6-131|
|3|103|OL|Overload alarm|Output while stall prevention<br>function is activated.|Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66|6-44|
|4|104|FU|Output frequency detection|Output when the output<br>frequency reaches the<br>frequency setting in Pr. 42<br>(Pr. 43 for reverse rotation).|Pr. 42, Pr. 43|6-131|
|7|107|RBP|Regenerative brake prealarm|Output when 85% of the regen-<br>erative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is<br>reached.|Pr. 70|6-103|
|8|108|THP|Electronic thermal O/L relay<br>pre-alarm|Output when the electronic<br>thermal relay function cumula-<br>tive value reaches 85%.<br>(Electronic thermal relay func-<br>tion protection (E.THT/E.THM)<br>activates, when the value<br>reached 100%.)|Pr. 9|6-86|
|11|111|RY|Inverter operation ready|Output when the inverter can<br>be started by switching the<br>start signal on or while it is run-<br>ning.|—|6-129|
|12|112|Y12|Output current detection|Output when the output cur-<br>rent is higher than the Pr. 150<br>setting for longer than the time<br>set in Pr. 151.|Pr. 150, Pr. 151|6-133|
|13|113|Y13|Zero current detection|Output when the output power<br>is lower than the Pr. 152 setting<br>for longer than the time set in<br>Pr. 153.|Pr. 152, Pr. 153|6-133|
|14|114|FDN|PID lower limit|Output when the feedback<br>value falls below the lower limit<br>of PID control.|Pr. 127–Pr. 134|6-293|
|15|115|FUP|PID upper limit|Output when the feedback<br>value rises above the upper<br>limit of PID control.|||
|16|116|RL|PID forward/reverse rotation<br>output|Output when forward rotation<br>is performed in PID control.|||
|20|120|BOF|Brake opening request|Output to open the brake when<br>the brake sequence function is<br>selected.|Pr. 278–Pr. 283,<br>Pr. 292|6-111|
|25|125|FAN|Fan fault output|Output at the time of a fan<br>fault.|Pr. 244|6-317|
|26|126|FIN|Heatsink overheat prealarm|Output when the heatsink tem-<br>perature reaches about 85% of<br>the heatsink overheat protec-<br>tion providing temperature.|—|7-12|
|46|146|Y46|During deceleration at occurrence<br>of power failure (retained until<br>release)|Output when the power failure-<br>time deceleration function is<br>executed.|Pr. 261|6-165|
|47|147|PID|During PID control activated|Output during PID control.|Pr. 127–Pr. 134|6-293|
|64|164|Y64|During retry|Output during retry processing.|Pr. 65–Pr. 69|6-169|
_**Tab. 6-31:** Output terminal function assignment (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 127
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
|**Setting**|**Setting**|**Terminal**|**Function**|**Operation**|**Related Parameters**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Source**<br>**Logic**|**Sink**<br>**Logic**||||||
|80|180|SAFE|Safety monitor output|Output while safety stop func-<br>tion is activated.|—|3-24|
|81|181|SAFE2|Safety monitor output 2|The signal is output when no<br>internal safety circuit failure<br>(E.SAF, E.6, E.7, E.CPU) exists.|—|3-24|
|90|190|Y90|Life alarm|Output when any of the control<br>circuit capacitor, main circuit<br>capacitor and inrush current<br>limit circuit or the cooling fan<br>approaches the end of its ser-<br>vice life.|Pr. 255–Pr. 259|6-319|
|91|191|Y91|Alarm output 3 (power-off signal)|Output when an error occurs<br>due to the circuit failure or con-<br>nection alarm of the inverter.|—|6-130|
|93|193|Y93|Current average value monitor<br>signal|Average current value and<br>maintenance timer value are<br>output as pulses. The signal can<br>not be set in Pr. 192 "ABC termi-<br>nal function selection".|Pr. 555–Pr. 557|6-324|
|95|195|Y95|Maintenance timer signal|Output when Pr. 503 rises to or<br>above the Pr. 504 setting.|Pr. 503, Pr. 504|6-323|
|96|196|REM|Remote Output|Output to the terminal when a<br>value is set to the parameter.|Pr. 495–Pr. 497|6-135|
|98|198|LF|Minor fault output|Output when a minor fault (fan<br>failure or communication error<br>warning) occurs.|Pr. 121, Pr. 244|6-234,<br>6-317|
|99|199|ALM|Alarm output|Output when the inverter's pro-<br>tective function is activated to<br>stop the output (major fault).<br>The signal output is stopped<br>when a reset turns on.|—|6-130|
|9999<br>se||—<br>se|No function<br>se|—<br>se|—<br>se|—<br>se|
_**Tab. 6-31:** Output terminal function assignment (2)_
**NOTES** The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
When the function is executed, the terminal conducts at the setting of any of "0" to "99", and does not conduct at the setting of any of "100" to "199".
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
Do not assign signals which repeat frequent ON/OFF to A, B, and C. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact decreases.
6 - 128
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **Inverter operation ready signal (RY) and inverter running signal (RUN)**
When the inverter is ready to operate, the output of the operation ready signal (RY) is on. It is also on during inverter running.
When the output frequency of the inverter rises to or above Pr. 13 "Starting frequency", the output of the inverter running signal (RUN) is turned on. During an inverter stop or DC injection brake operation, the output is off.
When using the RY or RUN signal, set "11 (source logic)" or "111 (sink logic)" (RY) or "0 (source logic)" or "100 (sink logic)" (RUN) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" to assign the function to the output terminal.
**==> picture [365 x 210] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power supply ON OFF<br>ON OFF<br>ON<br>DC injection brake operation point<br>DC injection brake operation<br>Starting frequency Pr. 13<br>Time<br>Reset processing<br>ON OFF<br>ON OFF<br>I001796E<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-59:** Ready and motor running signals_
|**Output**<br>**Signal**|**Resetting**|**Start**<br>**Signal**<br>**OFF**<br>**(during**<br>**stop)**|**Start**<br>**Signal ON**<br>**(during**<br>**stop)**|**Start**<br>**Signal ON**<br>**(during**<br>**opera-**<br>**tion)**|**Under DC**<br>**Injection**<br>**Brake**|**Output**<br>**Shutoff**�|**Automatic Restart after**<br>**Instantaneous Power Failure**|**Automatic Restart after**<br>**Instantaneous Power Failure**|**Automatic Restart after**<br>**Instantaneous Power Failure**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||||**Coasting**||**Restart-**<br>**ing**|
||||||||**Start**<br>**Signal ON**|**Start**<br>**Signal**<br>**OFF**||
|RY|OFF|ON|ON|ON|ON|OFF|ON�||ON|
|RUN|OFF|OFF|OFF|ON|OFF|OFF|OFF||ON|
_**Tab. 6-32:** Output signal output_
- This signal turns OFF during power failure or undervoltage.
- Output is shutoff under conditions such as a fault occurrence, MRS signal ON, and the safety stop operation.
## **NOTE**
The RUN signal (positive logic) is assigned to the terminal RUN in the initial setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 129
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **Alarm output signal (ALM)**
If the inverter comes to trip, the ALM signal is output. (Refer to section 7.1.)
**==> picture [318 x 178] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter alarm occurrence<br>(output shutoff)<br>Time<br>ON<br>ALM = !<br>RES e ON<br>Reset ON Reset processing<br>(about 1 s)<br>I001797E<br>Output<br>frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-60:** Alarm signals_
**NOTE** The ALM signal is assigned to the ABC contact in the default setting. By setting "99" (positive logic) or "199" (negative logic) in Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the ALM signal can be assigned to the other signal.
## **Fault output 3 (power-off signal) (Y91)**
The Y91 signal is output at occurrence of a fault attributable to the failure of the inverter circuit or a fault caused by a wiring mistake. When using the Y91 signal, set "91" (positive logic) or "191" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" to assign the function to the output terminal.
|**Operation Panel Indication**|**Operation Panel Indication**|**Name**|
|---|---|---|
||E.BE|Brake transistor alarm detection|
||E.GF|Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent|
||E.LF|Output phase loss|
||E.PE|Parameter storage device fault|
||E.PE2|Internal board fault|
||E. 6/<br>E. 7<br>E.CPU|CPU fault|
||E.IOH|Inrush current limit circuit fault|
_**Tab. 6-33:** Faults that lead to Y91 signal output_
**NOTE**
At occurrence of output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF), overcurrent trip during acceleration (E.OC1) may be displayed. At this time, the Y91 signal is output.
6 - 130
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
**6.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43)**
The inverter output frequency is detected and output to the output signal.
|**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>**41**<br>Up-to-frequency sensitivity<br>10%<br>0–100%<br>Set the level where the SU signal turns on.<br>190–192<br>Output terminal<br>function selection<br>6.10.5<br>**42**<br>Output frequency detection<br>6 Hz<br>0–400 Hz<br>Set the frequency where the FU signal turns on.<br>**43**<br>Output frequency detection for<br>reverse rotation<br>9999<br>0–400 Hz<br>Set the frequency where the FU signal turns on in<br>reverse rotation.<br>9999<br>Same as Pr. 42 setting<br>~~ee~~|
|---|
|The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.|
## **Up-to-frequency sensitivity (SU, Pr. 41)**
When the output frequency reaches the set frequency, the up-to-frequency signal (SU) is output. The Pr. 41 value can be adjusted within the range 0% to ±100% on the assumption that the set frequency is 100%.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency has been reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.
When using the SU signal, set "1 (positive logic) or 101 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" to assign function to the output terminal.
**==> picture [299 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-61:<br>Running frequency Output of the SU signal<br>Set Adjustment<br>frequency range<br>Pr. 41<br>SU<br>signal<br>Output<br>frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000020C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 131
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **Output frequency detection (FU, Pr. 42, Pr. 43)**
The output frequency detection signal (FU) is output when the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr. 42 setting. This function can be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.
When the detection frequency is set to Pr. 43, frequency detection for reverse operation use only can also be set. This function is effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation, etc. When Pr. 43 # 9999, the Pr. 42 setting is used for forward rotation and the Pr. 43 setting is used for reverse rotation.
**==> picture [304 x 113] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Forward<br>rotation<br>Time<br>ii<br>Reverse<br>rotation<br>FU ON ON<br>I001798E<br>Output<br>frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-62:** Frequency detection for forward and reverse rotation_
## **NOTES**
The FU signal is assigned to the terminal FU in the initial setting. The FU signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by setting "4 (positive logic) or 104 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192.
All signals are off during DC injection brake.
The output frequency to be compared with the set frequency is the output frequency before slip compensation is performed.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 132
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **6.10.7 Output current detection function (Y12, Y13, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153)**
The output power during inverter running can be detected and output to the output terminal.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**150**|Output current detection level|150%|0–200%|Set the output current detection level. 100% is the<br>rated inverter current.||190–192<br>Output terminal<br>function selection|6.10.5|
|**151**|Output current detection signal<br>delay time|0 s|0–10 s|Set the output current detection period. Set the time<br>from when the output current has risen above the<br>setting until the output current detection signal<br>(Y12) is output.||||
|**152**|Zero current detection level|5%|0–200%|Set the zero current detection level.<br>The rated inverter current is assumed to be 100%.||||
|**153**|Zero current detection time|0.5 s|0–1 s|Set this parameter to define the period from when<br>the output current drops below the Pr. 152 value<br>until the zero current detection signal (Y13) is<br>output.||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Output current detection (Y12, Pr. 150, Pr. 151, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)**
The output current detection function can be used for excessive torque detection, etc.
If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal. When the Y12 signal turns on, the ON state is held for approximately 100 ms.
For the Y12 signal, set "12 (positive logic) or 112 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" and assign functions to the output terminal.
**==> picture [365 x 101] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output current<br>Pr. 150<br>Pr. 151<br>Time<br>100 ms<br>Output current<br>detection signal Y12 ON<br>I001155E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-63:** Output current detection_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 133
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **Zero current detection (Y13, Pr. 152, Pr. 153)**
If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal. As soon as the signal is output to terminal Y13, it remains turned on for 100 ms.
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not be generated. This may cause a drop due to gravity when the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this, the output current zero signal (Y13) can be output from the inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output current has fallen to "zero".
Set "13" (source logic) or "113" (sink logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" to assign the function of the output power detection signal (Y13) to the output terminal.
**==> picture [352 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output current<br>Pr. 152<br>Pr. 152<br>Time<br>100 ms<br>Start signal ON<br>Zero current detection ON ON<br>signal Y13<br>Pr. 153 Pr. 153<br>I001156E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-64:** Zero current detection_
## **NOTES**
This function is also valid during execution of the online auto tuning.
The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1 s. Note that the response time changes according to the load condition.
When Pr. 152 = "0", detection is disabled.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
**==> picture [41 x 35] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**The zero current detection level setting should not be too high, and the zero current detection time setting not too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current.**_
_**To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake.**_
6 - 134
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
## **6.10.8 Remote output function (REM, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497)**
You can utilize the on/off of the inverter’s output signals instead of the remote output terminal of the programmable logic controller.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**495**|Remote output selection|0|0|Remote output data clear at<br>powering off|Remote output data clear<br>at inverter reset||190–192<br>Output terminal<br>function selection|6.10.5|
||||1|Remote output data retention<br>at powering off|||||
||||10|Remote output data clear at<br>powering off|Remote output data<br>retention at inverter reset||||
||||11|Remote output data retention<br>at powering off|||||
|**496**|Remote output data 1�|0|0–4095|Refer to 6-65|||||
|**497**|Remote output data 2�|0|0–4095||||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
The output terminal can be turned on/off depending on the Pr. 496 or Pr. 497 setting. The remote output selection can be controlled on/off by computer link communication from the PU connector or by communication from the communication option.
Set "96" (positive logic) or "196" (negative logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", and assign the remote output (REM) signal to the terminal used for remote output.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 135
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
When you refer to fig. 6-65 and set "1" to the terminal bit (terminal where the REM signal has been assigned) of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497, the output terminal turns on (off for sink logic). By setting "0", the output terminal turns off (on for sink logic).
> **Example** V When "96" (source logic) is set to Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection" and "1" (H01) is set to Pr. 496, the terminal RUN turns on.
**==> picture [300 x 121] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 496<br>bil b0<br>OC] OF ©} ©} CF] OY >lS]Te}]a OS} SO] OFS2<br>Pr. 497<br>b1l b0<br>a) ol 212] 2/e]alelalsfale<br>©! o| | ©] S|] S|] S] S] Ee] ©<br>I001799E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-65:** Remote output data_
As desired (always "0" when read).
Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E) is fitted. RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option (FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) is fitted.
6 - 136
Function assignment of external terminals
Parameter
When Pr. 495 = "0" or "10", performing a power supply reset (including a power failure) clears the REM signal output. (The ON/OFF states of the terminals are as set in Pr. 190 to Pr. 192.) The Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 settings are also "0".
When Pr. 495 = "1" or "11", the remote output data before power supply-off is stored into the E²PROM, so the signal output at power recovery is the same as before power supply-off. However, it is not stored when the inverter is reset (terminal reset, reset request through communication). (See the chart below).
When Pr. 495 = "10" or "11", signal before rest is saved even at inverter reset.
**==> picture [320 x 134] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 495 = 0, 10 Pr. 495 = 1, 11<br>Power<br>supply OFF OFF<br>Inverter reset time<br>(about 1 s)<br>REM OFF ON<br>REM signal clear REM signal held<br>I001158E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-66:** ON/OFF example for source logic_
**==> picture [324 x 106] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 495 = 0, 1 Pr. 495 = 10, 11<br>Reset ON Reset ON<br>REM ON OFF REM ON<br>�<br>I002128E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-67:** Signal condition during a reset_
- When Pr. 495 = "1," the signal condition saved in EEPROM (condition of the last power OFF) is applied.
- **NOTES** The output terminal where the REM signal is not assigned using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 does not turn on/off if 0/1 is set to the terminal bit of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497. (It turns on/off with the assigned function.)
When the inverter is reset (terminal reset, reset request through communication), Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 values turn to "0". When Pr. 495 = "1" or "11", however, they are the settings at power off. (The settings are stored at power off.) When Pr. 495 = "10" or "11", they are the same as before an inverter reset is made.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 137
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **6.11 Monitor display and monitor output signals**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Display motor speed<br>Set speed|Speed display and speed setting|Pr. 37|6.11.1|
|Change PU monitor display data|DU/PU main display data selection<br>Cumulative monitor clear|Pr. 52, Pr. 54,<br>Pr. 170, Pr. 171,<br>Pr. 268, Pr. 563,<br>Pr. 564|6.11.2|
|Change of the monitor output from<br>terminal AM|Terminal AM function selection|Pr. 158|6.11.3|
|Set the reference of the monitor<br>output from terminal AM|Terminal AM standard setting|Pr. 55, Pr. 56|6.11.3|
|Adjust terminal AM outputs|Terminal AM calibration|Pr. 645, Pr. 900|6.11.4|
## **6.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37)**
You can output RPM rates, speeds and throughput volumes based on the output frequency to the displays of the operation panels, FR-PU04 and FR-PU07 parameter units or to the AM output.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Setting**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**37**|Speed display|0|0<br>0.01–9998|Frequency display, setting<br>Set the machine speed at 60Hz.||1<br>52|Maximum<br>frequency<br>DU/PU main display|6.4.1<br>6.11.2|
||||||||data selection||
|||||||800|Control method|6.3.2|
||||||||selection||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" (Parameter 18 "High speed maximum frequency") and it can be calculated from the following formula:
Maximum setting value of Pr. 37 < ----------------------------------------------16777.215 -------------------------------------60 [Hz] Setting value of Pr. 1 (Pr. 18) [Hz]
Note that the maximum setting value of Pr. 37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.
To display the machine speed set Pr. 37 to the reference value for the speed to be shown at 60 Hz. For example, if the speed is 55 m/min at 60 Hz set Pr. 37 to "55". The display will then show "55" when the motor frequency is 60 Hz.
6 - 138
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
|**Pr. 37**|**Output Frequency Monitor**|**Set Frequency Monitor**|**Frequency Setting**<br>**Parameter Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0<br>(initial value)|Hz|Hz|Hz|
|0.01–9998|Machine speed�|Machine speed�||
_**Tab. 6-34:** Setting range of parameter 37_
- Machine speed conversion formula: Pr. 37 × frequency/60 Hz
- Hz is displayed in 0.01 Hz increments and machine speed is in 0.001.
## **NOTES**
Under V/F control, the output frequency of the inverter is displayed in terms of synchronous speed, and therefore, displayed value = actual speed + motor slip. The display changes to the actual speed (estimated value calculated based on the motor slip) when advanced magnetic flux vector control was selected or slip compensation was made valid.
Refer to Pr. 52 when you want to change the PU main monitor (PU main display).
Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed "----".
When the machine speed is displayed on the FR-PU04/FR-PU07, do not change the speed by using an up/down key in the state where the set speed exceeding 65535 is displayed. The set speed may become arbitrary value.
While the machine speed is displayed on the monitor, values of other parameters related to speed (Pr. 1, etc.) are in frequency increments. Set other parameters (Pr. 1, etc) related to speed in increments of frequency.
Due to the limitations on the resolution of the set frequency, the indication in the second decimal place may differ from the setting.
When frequency or set frequency is monitored from network option card except for FR-A7NC Ekit-SC-E, frequency is displayed for monitor description regardless of Pr. 37 setting.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Make sure that the running speed setting is correct. Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 139
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **6.11.2 Monitor display selection of DU/PU and terminal AM (Pr. 52, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564)**
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the control panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/ FR-PU07) can be selected.
In addition, signal to be output from the terminal AM (analog voltage output) can be selected.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**52**|DU/PU main display data<br>selection|0<br>(output<br>frequency)|0/5/7–12/<br>14/20/23–25/<br>52–57/61/62/<br>100|Select the monitor to be displayed on the operation<br>panel and parameter unit.<br>Refer to Tab. 6-35 for monitor description.|
|**158**|AM terminal function<br>selection|1<br>(output<br>frequency)|1–3/5/<br>7–12/14/21/<br>24/52/53/<br>61/62|Select the monitor output to terminal AM.|
|**170**|Watt-hour meter clear|9999|0|Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.|
||||10|Set the maximum value when monitoring from<br>communication to 0 to 9999 kWh.|
||||9999|Set the maximum value when monitoring from<br>communication to 0 to 65535 kWh.|
|**171**|Operation hour meter clear|9999|0/9999<br>ee|Set "0" in the parameter to clear the watt-hour<br>monitor.<br>Setting "9999" has no effect.<br>ee|
|**268**|Monitor decimal digits<br>selection|9999|0<br>ee<br>ee|Displays as integral value.<br>ee<br>ee|
||||1<br>ee<br>ee|Displayed in 0.1 increments.<br>ee<br>ee|
||||9999<br>ee|No function<br>ee|
|**563**|Energizing time carrying-over<br>times<br>a|0<br>ee|0–65535<br>(reading only)<br>ee|The numbers of cumulative energizing time monitor<br>exceeded 65535 h is displayed.<br>Reading only<br>ee|
|**564**|Operating time carrying-over<br>times<br>a|0<br>ee|0–65535<br>(reading only)<br>ee|The numbers of operation time monitor exceeded<br>65535 h is displayed.<br>Reading only<br>ee|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
6 - 140
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **Monitor description list (Pr. 52)**
- Set the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) in Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection".
- Set the monitor to be output to the terminal AM (analog output (0 to 10 V DC voltage output)) in Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection".
|**Types of Monitor**|**Unit**|**Pr. 52**|**Pr. 52**|**Pr. 158 (AM)**<br>**Setting**|**Terminal AM**<br>**Full Scale Value**|**Terminal AM**<br>**Full Scale Value**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Opera-**<br>**tion**<br>**Panel**<br>**LED**|**PU Main**<br>**Monitor**|||||
|Output frequency|0.01 Hz|0/100||1|Pr. 55||Displays the inverter output frequency.|
|Output current|0.01 A/0.1 A|0/100||2|Pr. 56||Displays the inverter output current<br>effective value.|
|Output voltage|0.1V|0/100||3|200 V class|400 V|Displays the inverter output voltage.|
||||||400 V class|800 V||
|Alarm display|—|0/100||—|—||Displays 8 past alarms individually.|
|Frequency setting|0.01 Hz|5|a|5|Pr. 55||Displays the set frequency.|
|Motor torque|0.1%|7|a|7|Rated torque of the<br>applied motor × 2||Displays the motor torque in % on the<br>assumption that the rated motor<br>torque is 100%.<br>(Displays 0% during V/F control)|
|Converter output voltage|0.1 V|8|a|8|200 V class|400 V|Displays the DC bus voltage value.|
||||||400 V class|800 V||
|Regenerative brake duty|0.1%|9|a|9|Pr. 70||Brake duty set in Pr. 30, Pr. 70|
|Electronic thermal relay<br>function load factor|0.1%|10|a|10|100%||Displays the motor thermal cumulative<br>value on the assumption that the ther-<br>mal operation level is 100%.�|
|Output current peak value|0.01 A|11|a|11|Pr. 56||Holds and displays the peak value of<br>the output power monitor.<br>(Cleared at every start)|
|Converter output voltage<br>peak value|0.1 V|12|a|12|200 V class|400 V|Holds and displays the peak value of<br>the DC bus voltage value.<br>(Cleared at every start)|
||||||400 V class|800 V||
|Output power|0.01 kW|14|a|14|Rated inverter<br>power × 2||Displays the power on the inverter out-<br>put side|
|Input terminal status|—|—|a|—|—||Displays the input terminal ON/OFF sta-<br>tus on the PU.<br>(Refer to page 6-145 for DU display.)|
|Output terminal status|—||a|—|—||Displays the output terminal ON/OFF<br>status on the PU.<br>(Refer to page 6-145 for DU display.)|
|Cumulative<br>energization time�|1 h|20||—|—||Adds up and displays the energization<br>time after inverter shipment.<br>You can check the numbers of the<br>monitor value exceeded 65535h with<br>Pr. 563.|
|Reference voltage output|—|—||21|—||Terminal AM: Output 10 V|
_**Tab. 6-35:** Monitor description list (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 141
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
|**Types of Monitor**|**Unit**|**Pr. 52**|**Pr. 52**|**Pr. 158 (AM)**<br>**Setting**|**Terminal AM**<br>**Full Scale**<br>**Value**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Opera-**<br>**tion**<br>**Panel**<br>**LED**|**PU Main**<br>**Monitor**||||
|Actual operation<br>time|1 h|23||—|—|Adds up and displays the inverter oper-<br>ation time.<br>You can check the numbers of the mon-<br>itor value exceeded 65535 h with<br>Pr. 564. Can be cleared by Pr. 171. (Refer<br>to page 6-146.)|
|Motor load factor|0.1%|24||24|200%|Displays the output current value on<br>the assumption that the inverter rated<br>current value is 100%.<br>Monitor value = output power monitor<br>value/rated inverter current 100 [%]|
|Cumulative power<br>po|0.01 kWh|25||—|—|Adds up and displays the power<br>amount based on the output power<br>monitor.<br>Can be cleared by Pr. 170.<br>(Refer to page 6-146.)|
|PID set point<br>po<br>po|0.1%|52||52|100%|Display the set point, measured value<br>and deviation during PID control.<br>(Refer to page 6-293 for details.)|
|PID measured value<br>po<br>po|0.1%|53||53|100%||
|PID deviation value<br>po|0.1%|54||—|—||
|Inverter I/O terminal<br>monitor|—|55|—|—|—|Displays the ON/OFF status of the<br>inverter input terminal and output ter-<br>minal on the operation panel<br>(Refer to page 6-145 for details.)|
|Option input terminal<br>status|—|56|—|—|—|Displays the input terminal ON/OFF sta-<br>tus of the digital input option<br>(FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E) on the operation<br>panel. (Refer to page 6-145 for details.)|
|Option output terminal<br>status|—|57|—|—|—|Displays the output terminal ON/OFF<br>status of the digital output option<br>(FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E) or relay output<br>option (FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) on the<br>operation panel<br>(Refer to page6-145for details.)|
|Motor thermal load factor|0.1%|61||61|Thermal re-<br>lay opera-<br>tion level<br>(100%)|Motor thermal heat cumulative value is<br>displayed.<br>(Motor overload trip (E.THM) at 100%)|
|Inverter thermal load<br>factor|0.1%|62||62|Thermal re-<br>lay opera-<br>tion level<br>(100%)|Transistor thermal heat cumulative<br>value is displayed.<br>(Inverter overload trip (E.THT) at 100%)|
## _**Tab. 6-35:** Monitor description list (2)_
Frequency setting to output terminal status on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530 h) on the assumption that 1 h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
Actual operation time is not accumulated when the cumulative operation time is less than 1h until turning off of the power supply.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed "----".
Larger thermal value between the motor thermal and transistor thermal is displayed. A value other than 0% is displayed if the ambient temperature (heatsink temperature) is high even when the inverter is at a stop.
6 - 142
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **NOTES**
By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of output speed to alarm display can be selected in sequence by the SET key.
When the operation panel is used, the displayed units are Hz and A only and the others are not displayed.
The monitor set in Pr. 52 is displayed in the third monitor position. However, change the output current monitor for the motor load factor.
The monitor displayed at powering on is the first monitor. Display the monitor to be displayed on the first monitor and press the SET key for 1 s. (To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down the SET key for 1 s after displaying the output frequency monitor.)
**==> picture [396 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor With Alarm monitor<br>fault<br>Output frequency Output current Output voltage<br>I001800E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-68:** Displaying various types of monitor_
**Example** � When Pr. 52 is set to "20" (cumulative energizing time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as described below.
**==> picture [395 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor Alarm monitor<br>With<br>fault<br>Output frequency Output current Cumulative energizing time<br>I001801C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-69:** Selection of the third monitor_
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 143
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **Display set frequency during stop (Pr. 52)**
When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the set frequency and output frequency are displayed during stop and operation respectively. (LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during operation.).
||**Parameter 52**<br>~~pT~~|**Parameter 52**<br>~~pT~~|**Parameter 52**<br>~~pT~~|
|---|---|---|---|
||**0**<br>a|**100**||
||**During Running/Stop**<br>a<br>~~po~~|**During Stop**<br>~~po~~|**During Running**<br>~~po~~|
|Output frequency<br>~~pT~~|Output frequency<br>~~pT~~|Set frequency<br>~~pT~~|Output frequency<br>~~pT~~|
|Output current<br>~~pT~~<br>~~Ge~~|Output current<br>~~pT~~<br>~~Ge~~|||
|Output voltage<br>~~pT~~|Output voltage<br>~~pT~~|||
|Alarm display<br>~~pT~~<br>Ge|Alarm display<br>~~pT~~<br>Ge|||
## _**Tab. 6-36:** Display during running and stop_
The set frequency displayed indicates the frequency to be output when the start command is on. Different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr. 52 = "5", the value based on maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jump is displayed.
**NOTES** During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
During MRS, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority.
6 - 144
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **Operation panel (FR-DU07) I/O terminal monitor**
When Pr. 52 is set to any of "55 to 57", the I/O terminal states can be monitored on the operation panel.
The I/O terminal monitor is displayed on the third monitor.
The LED is on when the terminal is on, and the LED is off when the terminal is off. The centre line of LED is always on.
|**Pr. 52**<br>**Monitor**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|55<br>Displays t|he I/O and output terminal ON/OFF states of the inverter unit.|
|56�<br>Displays t|he input terminal ON/OFF states of the digital input option (FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E).|
|57�<br>Displays t<br>or relay o|he output terminal ON/OFF states of the digital output option (FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E)<br>utput option (FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E).|
## _**Tab. 6-37:** I/O terminal monitor_
- You can set "56" or "57" even if the option is not fitted. When the option is not fitted, the monitor displays are all off.
On the unit I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal states and the lower the output terminal states.
**==> picture [160 x 89] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Display example:<br>When signals STF, RH and<br>RUN are on<br>Input<br>terminal<br>Centre line is<br>always on<br>Output<br>terminals<br>I001802E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-70:** Displaying the signal states of the I/O terminals_
On the option FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E monitor (Pr. 52 = 56), the decimal point LED of the first digit LED is on.
**==> picture [179 x 57] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Centre line is always on<br>Decimal point LED of first digit LED is always on<br>I001803E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-71:** Displaying the signal states when the option FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E is mounted_
On the option FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E or FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E monitor (Pr. 52 = "57"), the decimal point LED of the second digit LED is on.
**==> picture [219 x 76] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E<br>Centre line is always on<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E<br>Decimal point LED of second digit LED is always on<br>I001163E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-72:** Displaying the signal states when the option FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E or FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E is mounted_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 145
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **Cumulative energizing power monitor and clear (Pr. 170)**
On the cumulative power monitor (Pr. 52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 1h increments. The operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and communication (RS-485 communication, communication option) display increments and display ranges are as indicated below:
|**Operation Panel**<br>~~p~~|**Operation Panel**<br>~~p~~|**FR-PU04/FR-PU07**<br>~~po~~|**FR-PU04/FR-PU07**<br>~~po~~|**Communication**<br>~~o~~|**Communication**<br>~~o~~|**Communication**<br>~~o~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Range**|**Unit**|**Range**|**Unit**|**Range**<br>po||**Unit**|
|||||**Pr. 170 = 10**<br>po<br>ee|**Pr. 170 = 9999**<br>po<br>ee||
|0–99.99 kWh<br>a|0.01 kWh<br>ee|0–999.99 kWh<br>ee|0.01 kWh<br>ee|0–9999 kWh|0–65535 kWh<br>(initial value)|1 kWh|
|100–999.9 kWh<br>a <br>a|0.1 kWh<br> ee<br> ee|1000–9999.9 kWh<br>ee<br>ee|0.1 kWh<br>ee<br>ee||||
|1000–9999 kWh<br>a|1 kWh<br> ee|10000–99999 kWh<br>ee|1 kWh<br>ee||||
## _**Tab. 6-38:** Units and range of the cumulative energizing monitor_
Power is measured in the range 0 to 9999.99 kWh, and displayed in 4 digits. When the monitor value exceeds "99.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1 kWh increments.
Power is measured in the range 0 to 99999.99 kWh, and displayed in 5 digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "999.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1 kWh increments.
Writing "0" to Pr. 170 clears the cumulative energizing power monitor.
**NOTE** If "0" is written to Pr. 170 and Pr. 170 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.
## **Cumulative energizing time and actual operation time monitor (Pr. 171, Pr. 563, Pr. 564)**
Cumulative energization time monitor (Pr. 52 = "20") accumulates energization time from shipment of the inverter every one hour.
On the actual operation time monitor (Pr. 52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not added up during a stop.)
If the monitored value exceeds 65535, it is added up from 0. You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time monitor exceeded 65535 h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation time monitor exceeded 65535 h with Pr. 564.
Writing "0" to Pr. 171 clears the cumulative energization power monitor. (The cumulative time monitor can not be cleared.)
## **NOTES**
The actual operation time is not added up unless the inverter is operated one or more hours continuously.
If "0" is written to Pr. 171 and Pr. 171 is read again, "9999" is always displayed. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual operation time meter.
6 - 146
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **You can select the decimal digits of the monitor (Pr. 268)**
As the operation panel display is 4 digits long, the decimal places may vary at analog input, etc. The decimal places can be hidden by selecting the decimal digits. In such a case, the decimal digits can be selected by Pr. 268.
|**Pr. 268**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|9999 (initial value)|No function|
|0|For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) of the mon-<br>itor, numbers in the first decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral<br>value (1 increments).<br>The monitor value smaller than 0.99 is displayed as 0.|
|1|When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is<br>dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments).<br>The monitored digits in 1 increments are displayed as they are.|
_**Tab. 6-39:** Selection of decimal digits_
## **NOTE**
The number of display digits on the cumulative energization time (Pr. 52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr. 52 = "23") and cumulative power (Pr. 52 = "25") does not change.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 147
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **6.11.3 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)**
||Analog voltage output from the terminal AM is available. Set the reference of the signal output from|Analog voltage output from the terminal AM is available. Set the reference of the signal output from|Analog voltage output from the terminal AM is available. Set the reference of the signal output from|Analog voltage output from the terminal AM is available. Set the reference of the signal output from|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||terminal AM.||||
|**Pr. No.**<br>**55**<br>**56**|**Name**<br>Frequency monitoring<br>reference<br>Current monitoring<br>reference<br>re <br>a|**Initial Value**<br>**Setting Range**<br>50 Hz<br>0–400 Hz<br>Rated inverter<br>current<br>0–500 A<br> ee|**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>Full-scale value to output the output<br>frequency monitor value to terminal AM.<br>158<br>AM terminal function<br>selection<br>6.11.2<br>Full-scale value to output the output current<br>monitor value to terminal AM.<br> eeFt||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The above parameter allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
## **Frequency monitoring reference (Pr. 55)**
Set the full scale value when outputting the frequency monitor from terminal AM. Set the frequency to be referenced when the frequency monitor (output frequency/set frequency) is selected for the terminal AM display.
- Set the frequency (output frequency/set frequency) when the voltage output at terminal AM is 10 V DC. The analog voltage output and frequency at terminal AM are proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10 V DC.).
_**Fig. 6-73:** Frequency monitoring reference_
**==> picture [135 x 109] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 V DC<br>\ <a<br>aa<br>an<br>a<br>4 I<br>1Hz 50Hz<br>Initial value<br>ST UEEEEEE EIEN<br>Setting range of Pr. 55<br>Terminal AM<br>output voltage<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001164E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 148
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **Current monitoring reference (Pr. 56)**
Set the full scale value when outputting the current monitor from terminal AM. Set the current to be referenced when the current monitor (inverter output current, etc.) is selected for terminal AM display.
- Set the current value when the voltage output at terminal AM is 10 V DC. The analog voltage output and current value at terminal AM are proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10 V DC.)
**==> picture [171 x 154] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
10 V DC<br>Rated output current 500 A<br>(initial value)<br>Setting range of Pr. 56<br>Terminal AM<br>output voltage<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [117 x 22] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-74:<br>Current monitoring reference<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001165E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 149
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **6.11.4 Terminal AM calibration [calibration parameter Pr. 645, C1 (Pr. 901)]**
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal AM to full scale deflection.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**645**|AM 0 V adjustment|1000|970–1200|Calibrates the scale of the meter when analog output<br>is 0.|
|**C1**<br>**(901)**|AM terminal calibration|—|—|Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to<br>terminal AM.|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (FR-PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
## **Terminal AM bias calibration**
Use Pr. 645 AM "0 V adjustment" to calibrate the bias side output signal from terminal AM. If the meter needle does not point to 0 when the analog output from terminal AM is 0, add or decrease the Pr. 645 setting to adjust the meter needle points to 0. When changing ±1 in Pr. 645, the analog output changes about ±5 mV. (Analog output will not become lower than about 100 mV even when setting the Pr. 645 lower.)
**==> picture [382 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-75:<br>Terminal AM<br>output Terminal AM bias calibration<br>Output<br>signal<br>Bias calibration of output<br>signal (Pr. 645)<br>I001931E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTES**
Calibration bias and gain changes when changing the control circuit terminal block. Use Pr. 645 and C1 (Pr. 901) to calibrate again in that case.
If bias calibration (Pr. 645) is performed, make sure to perform gain calibration (C1 (Pr. 901)) too.
6 - 150
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **Terminal AM gain calibration [C1 (Pr. 901)]**
Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10 V DC output in the full-scale status of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration parameter C1 (Pr. 901) allows the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10 V DC, the maximum output current 1mA.
**==> picture [412 x 282] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-76:<br>Connecting an analog meter to the AM output<br>10 V DC<br>I001168C<br>Fig. 6-77:<br>Terminal AM Terminal AM gain calibration<br>output<br>Gain calibration of<br>output signal<br>(Pr. 901)<br>Output<br>signal<br>I001932E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Calibrate the terminal AM gain in the following procedure:
- Connect an 0–10 V DC voltmeter to inverter terminals AM and 5, taking care to correct with the correct polarity. AM is positive.
- Set Pr. 158 to select the monitor signal you want to output to analog output AM (refer to page 6-148). To display the output frequency or the output current set Pr. 55 or Pr. 56, respectively, to the maximum frequency or current value for which you want to output 10 V to the terminal.
- Start the frequency inverter in PU mode with the operation panel or the control terminals (external operation).
- Calibrate the full deflection of the meter by setting C1 (Pr. 901) and then operating the digital dial. Note that the value shown on the operating panel for the monitor signal associated with C1 does not change when you turn the digital dial, but the analog voltage output to AM will change as you turn the dial. Confirm the calibration value found by pressing the SET key (this assigns the maximum voltage output to the displayed value of the monitor signal.)
## **NOTE**
- If it is not possible output the signal to be measured for calibration at its maximum value you can set Pr. 158 to "21". This outputs a continuous signal of approx. 10 V to terminal AM, which makes it possible to calibrate the maximum value on the meter. When C1 is used to calibrate the full meter deflection in this mode a value of "1000" is displayed. Afterwards you can then reset Pr. 158 to the required monitor signal setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 151
Monitor display and monitor output signals
Parameter
## **How to calibrate the terminal AM when using the operation panel**
The following example shows how to calibrate the maximum value of the AM terminal to the 60 Hz output frequency. This operation is performed in PU mode.
**==> picture [385 x 455] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>(When Pr. 54 = 1)<br>Confirmation of the RUN indication and<br>operation mode indication<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>» 7<br>The parameter number read previously<br>appears.<br>,<br>Turn the digital dial until "C..." appears. C1 to C7 setting is enabled.<br>o - —_<br>Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "C---" appears.<br>°- =z<br>Turn the digital dial until "C 1" appears. a<br>oOo =<br>Press the SET key to enable setting. The monitor set to Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection" is<br>displayed.<br>© > Ei<br>If the inverter is at a stop, press the RUN key to start<br>the inverter.<br>(Motor needs not be connected.)<br>Wait until the output frequency of 50 Hz is reached. Gun)© - amaaa =<br>Turn the digital dial to adjust the indicator needle @<br>to the desired position. Analog indicator<br>(In contrast to the output analog current the value<br>shown for C1 does not change when turning the Ss<br>digital dial.)<br>Press the SET key to set. Setting is complete.<br>° ki az<br>KT<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to return to the "C---" indication (step 9 ).<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter (Pr.CL).<br>I001933E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-78:** AM terminal calibration_
## **NOTES**
Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in external operation mode, and make calibration in the above procedure.
Calibration can be made even during operation.
For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the parameter unit instruction manual.
6 - 152
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **6.12 Operation selection at power failure**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|At instantaneous power failure occur-<br>rence, restart inverter without stop-<br>ping motor.|Automatic restart operation after instanta-<br>neous power failure/flying start|Pr. 30, Pr. 57,<br>Pr. 58, Pr. Pr. 96,<br>Pr. 162, Pr. 165,<br>Pr. 298, Pr. 299,<br>Pr. 611|6.12.1|
|When under voltage or a power failure<br>occurs, the inverter can be decelerated<br>to a stop.|Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop<br>function|Pr. 261|6.12.2|
## **6.12.1 Automatic restart**
## **(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)**
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the following cases:
- When power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure
- When motor is coasting at start.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 153
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**30**|Regenerative function<br>selection|0|0/1|The motor starts at the starting frequency when<br>MRS (X10) turns on then off.|
||||2|Restart operation is performed when MRS (X10)<br>turns on then off|
|**57**|Restart coasting time<br>_|9999<br>|ee|0<br>ee|FR-E720S-080SC or less,<br>FR-E740-040SC or less....................................1 s<br>FR-E720S-110SC,<br>FR-E740-060SC to 170SC................................2 s<br>FR-E740-230SC and 300SC.............................3 s<br>ee|
||||0.1–5 s<br>ee|Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart<br>after an instantaneous power failure.<br>ee|
||||9999<br>ee|No restart<br>ee|
|**58**|Restart cushion time<br>_|1s<br> |ee|0–60 s<br>ee|Set a voltage starting time at restart.<br>ee|
|**96**|Auto tuning setting/status<br>al|0<br>al|0<br>|Offline auto tuning is not performed<br>|
||||1<br>|Advanced magnetic flux vector control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without motor<br>running (all motor constants) (Refer to section<br>6.3.2.)<br>|
||||11<br>|For general-purpose magnetic flux vector control<br>Offline auto tuning is performed without motor<br>running (motor constants (R1) only)<br>(Refer to section 6.3.3.)<br>|
||||21<br>|Offline auto tuning (tuning performed without<br>motor running) for V/F control and automatic<br>restart after instantaneous power failure (with<br>frequency search)<br>|
|**162**|Automatic restart after<br>instantaneous power failure<br>selection<br>al|0<br>al|0<br>|With frequency search<br>|
||||1<br>||No frequency search:<br>The output voltage is increased until the preset<br>frequency is reached, irrespective of the current<br>motor speed.<br>||
||||10|Frequency search at every start|
||||11<br>||On every start the output voltage is increased until<br>the preset frequency reached, irrespective of the<br>current motor speed.<br>||
|**165**|Stall prevention operation<br>level for restart|150%|0–200%|Consider the rated inverter current according to the<br>overload capacity as 100% and set the stall<br>prevention operation level during restart<br>operation.|
|**298**|Frequency search gain|9999|0–32767|When offline auto tuning is performed under V/F<br>control, frequency search gain necessary for<br>frequency search for automatic restart after<br>instantaneous power failure is set as well as the<br>motor constants (R1).|
||||9999<br>ee|Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,<br>SF-HRCA) constants<br>ee|
|**299**|Rotation direction detection<br>selection at restarting|9999|0<br>ee|Without rotation direction detection<br>ee|
||||1<br>ee|With rotation direction detection<br>ee|
||||9999<br>Pf|When Pr. 78 = "0", the rotation direction is<br>detected.<br>When Pr. 78 = "1","2", the rotation direction is not<br>detected.<br>Pf|
|**611**|Acceleration time at a restart|9999|0–3600 s|Acceleration time to reach the acceleration time<br>reference frequency at a restart.|
||||9999|Acceleration time for restart is the normal<br>acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7)|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
6 - 154
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation (Pr. 30, Pr. 162, Pr. 299)**
## ● Without frequency search
- When Pr. 162 = "1" (initial value) or "11", automatic restart operation is performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to an instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting speed of the motor.
**==> picture [412 x 227] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power failure Fig. 6-79:<br>Automatic restart without frequency search<br>Power (Pr. 162 = 1/11)<br>supply<br>(L1, L2, L3)<br>Motor<br>speed<br>[r/min]<br>Output a<br>frequency<br>[Hz]<br>Output<br>voltage<br>[V]<br>Coasting time<br>Pr. 57 Restart cushion<br>time Pr. 58<br>I001901E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
## **NOTE**
- This system stores the output frequency and rotation direction prior to an instantaneous power failure and restart using the stored value. Therefore, if the instantaneous power failure time exceeds 0.2 s and the stored value cannot be retained, the inverter starts at Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" (initial value = 0.5 Hz) in the starting direction upon power restoration.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 155
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
- With frequency search
- When "0 (initial value) or 10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter smoothly starts after detecting the motor speed upon power restoration. (The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.)
- When using the frequency search, perform offline autotuning. (Refer to page 6-90 for advanced magnetic flux vector, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control and page 6-160 for V/F control.)
- During reverse rotation, the inverter can be restarted smoothly as the direction of rotation is detected. You can select whether to make rotation direction detection or not with Pr. 299 "Rotation direction detection selection at restarting". When capacities of the motor and inverter differ, set "0" (without rotation direction detection) in Pr. 299.
|**Pr. 299 Setting**|**Pr. 78 Setting**|**Pr. 78 Setting**|**Pr. 78 Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|
||**0**|**1**|**2**|
|9999<br>(Initial value)|With rotation<br>direction detection|Without rotation<br>direction detection|Without rotation<br>direction detection|
|0|Without rotation<br>direction detection|Without rotation<br>direction detection|Without rotation<br>direction detection|
|1|With rotation<br>direction detection|With rotation<br>direction detection|With rotation<br>direction detection|
_**Tab. 6-40:** Rotation direction detection_
## _**Fig. 6-80:**_
**==> picture [396 x 177] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power failure Automatic restart with frequency search<br>Power<br>supply a (Pr. 162 = 0/10)<br>(L1, L2, L3) lO“=#$RRN BES aso<br>Motor<br>speed<br>[r/min]<br>Output<br>frequency a<br>[Hz]<br>Output<br>voltage<br>[V]<br>Restart cushion d<br>am. Coasting time + time Pr. 58<br>speed detection time<br>—_<br>Pr. 57 Acceleration time Pr. 611<br>I000722C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.
6 - 156
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **NOTES**
Speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the motor speed (maximum 100 ms).
Frequency search errors can occur if the output capacity of the frequency inverter is one or more classes higher than that of the motor or if the motor is a special model (e.g. with a frequency rating above 60 Hz). If this happens it is possible for overcurrent error messages (OCT) to be generated during motor acceleration. In such configurations flying restarts are not possible and the frequency search function should not be used.
At motor frequencies of 10 Hz or less the inverter accelerates from 0 Hz to the set frequency.
If more than one motor is connected to the inverter in parallel the frequency search on automatic restart does not work correctly and overcurrent error messages (OCT) are likely. In such configurations deactivate frequency search (set Pr. 162 to "1" or "11").
When reverse rotation is detected when Pr. 78 = "1" (reverse rotation disabled), the rotation direction is changed to forward rotation after decelerates in reverse rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter will not start when the start command is reverse rotation.
When automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure is activated while the motor is running at a low speed (less than 10 Hz), the motor restarts in the direction prior to instantaneous power failure without detecting the rotation direction (Pr. 299 "Rotation direction detection selection at restarting" = "1").
If the frequency search result exceeds the set frequency, the output frequency is limited at the set frequency.
When the wiring length exceeds 100 m, select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1" or "11").
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 157
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
- Restart operation at every start
- When Pr. 162 = "10" or "11", automatic restart operation is also performed every start, in addition to the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure. When Pr. 162 = "0", automatic restart operation is performed at the first start after power supply-on, but not performed at the second time or later.
- Automatic restart operation selection of MRS (X10) signal
Restart operation after turning MRS (X10) signal on then off using Pr. 30 can be selected as in the table below. When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC), normally set "2" in Pr. 30.
|**Pr. 30**|**Operation after Turning OFF, ON, then OFF the MRS and X10 Signals**|
|---|---|
|0/1|Start at the Pr. 13 "Starting frequency".|
|2|Restart (starts at the coasting speed)|
**==> picture [26 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
NOTE<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When output is shut off using terminal S1 and S2 in the safety stop function model, the inverter restarts in the same way as when output is shut off by MRS (X10) signal.
## **Restart coasting time (Pr. 57)**
Coasting time is the time from when the motor speed is detected until automatic restart control is started.
Set Pr. 57 to "0" to perform automatic restart operation. The coasting time is automatically set to the value below. Generally this setting will pose no problems. FR-E720S-080SC or less, FR-E740-040SC or less ....................................1 s FR-E720S-100SC, FR-E740-060SC to 170SC.............................................2 s FR-E740-230SC and 300SC............................................................................3 s
Operation may not be performed well depending on the magnitude of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or running frequency. Adjust the coasting time between 0.1 s and 5 s according to the load specifications.
6 - 158
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Restart cushion time (Pr. 58)**
Cushion time is the length of time when the voltage appropriate to the voltage at the detected motor speed (output frequency prior to instantaneous power failure when Pr. 162 = "1" or "11") from 0 V.
Normally the initial value need not be changed for operation, but adjust it according to the magnitude of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or torque.
**==> picture [412 x 149] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Voltage Fig. 6-81:<br>Voltage rise at automatic restart<br>Time<br>I001170E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **Automatic restart operation adjustment (Pr. 165, Pr. 611)**
Using Pr. 165, you can set the stall prevention operation level at a restart.
Using Pr. 611, you can set the acceleration time until the set frequency (Pr. 20) is reached after automatic restart operation is performed besides the normal acceleration time.
**NOTE**
If the setting of Pr. 21 "Acceleration/deceleration time increments" is changed, the setting increments of Pr. 611 does not change.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 159
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Frequency search gain (Pr. 298), offline auto tuning (Pr. 96)**
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation (with frequency search) is valid at V/F control, perform offline auto tuning. Perform offline auto tuning during V/F control in the following order to set Pr. 298 "Frequency search gain" automatically. (Refer to page 6-90 during advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.)
## **Before performing offline auto tuning**
Check the following before performing offline auto tuning:
- The inverter is under V/F control.
- A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
- The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity.
- A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned. (The maximum frequency is 120 Hz.)
- Even if tuning is performed without motor running (Pr. 96 "Auto tuning setting/status" = "21"), the motor may run slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in vertical lift applications). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
- Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FFR-DT) connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
## **Setting**
- Set "21" in Pr. 96 "Auto tuning setting/status". Tuning is performed without motor running. According to the motor type and the inverter capacity, it takes approximately 9 s until tuning is completed. (Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
- Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay". (Refer to section 6.8).
- Set Pr. 71 "Applied motor" according to the motor used.
|**Motor**|**Motor**|**Pr. 71**|
|---|---|---|
|Mitsubishi standard motor,<br>Mitsubishi high efficiency motor|SF-JR|3|
||SF-JR 4P-1.5 kW or less|23|
||SF-HR|43|
||Others|3|
|Mitsubishi constant-torque motor|SF-JRCA 4P|13|
||SF-HRCA|53|
||Others (SF-JRC, etc.)|13|
|Other manufacturer's standard motor|—|3|
|Other manufacturer's constant torque motor|—|13|
_**Tab. 6-41:** Motor selection_
Refer to section 6.8.2, for other settings of Pr. 71.
6 - 160
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Execution of tuning**
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) if the inverter is in the status for tuning. (Refer to Tab. 6-13).**_
When performing tuning or PU operation, press the RUN key of the operation panel.
For external operation, turn on the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
## **NOTES**
To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press the STOP key of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) off also ends tuning.)
During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value) – Input terminal <valid signal> MRS, RES, STF, STR – Output terminal RUN, AM, A, B, C
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output from AM when speed and output frequency are selected.
Since the RUN signal turns on when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching on the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) of the inverter.
Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto tuning. Auto tuning is not executed properly.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 161
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Monitor display during auto tuning**
Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below. The value displayed corresponds to the value of parameter 96.
||**Parameter Unit**<br>**(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) Display**|**Operation Panel Indication**|
|---|---|---|
|Parameter 96|21|21|
|Setting|READ:List<br>2<br>~~S~~TOP PU|~~Rs~~|
|Tuning in progress|Tm<br>STFFWD PU||
|Normal end|TMNT<br>COMPLETION<br>STF STOP<br>PU|Flickering<br>cd<br>cov~~e~~s<br>~~—~~<br>=|
|Error end (when inverter protective<br>function operation is activated)|STOP<br>PU<br>9<br>STF<br>TUNE<br>ERROR||
_**Tab. 6-42:** Monitor display_
|**Offline Auto Tuning Setting**|**Time**|
|---|---|
|Tune motor constants (R1) only (Pr. 96 = 21)|Approx. 9 s<br>(Tuning time differs according to the inverter capacity and<br>motor type.)|
_**Tab. 6-43:** Offline auto tuning time (when the initial value is set)_
## **Return to the normal operation mode**
When offline auto tuning ends, press the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel during PU operation. For external operation, turn off the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
## **NOTE**
Do not change the Pr. 96 setting after completion of tuning (23). If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning data is made invalid. If the Pr. 96 setting is changed, tuning must be performed again.
6 - 162
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
|**Error Display**|**Error cause**|**Remedy**|
|---|---|---|
|8|Force end|Set "21" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.|
|9|Inverter protective function operation|Make setting again.|
|91|Current limit (stall prevention) function was acti-<br>vated.|Set "1" in Pr. 156.|
|92|Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated<br>value.|Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.|
|93|– Calculation error<br>– A motor is not connected.|Check the motor wiring and make setting again.<br>Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.|
## _**Tab. 6-44:** Value of Parameter 96_
When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing the STOP-key or turning off the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline auto tuning does not end normally. (The motor constants have not been set.) Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
When using the motor corresponding to the following specifications and conditions, reset Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay as below after tuning is completed.
- When the rated power specifications of the motor is 200/220 V(400/440 V) 60 Hz, set 1.1 times rated motor current value in Pr. 9.
- When performing motor protection from overheat using a PTC thermistor or motor with temperature detector such as Klixon, set "0" (motor overheat protection by the inverter is invalid) in Pr. 9.
## **NOTES**
The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is on, the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if an error retry has been set, retry is ignored.
The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
The SU and FU signals are not output during a restart. They are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed.
Automatic restart operation will also be performed after a reset or when a retry is made by the retry function.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 163
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **CAUTION:**
_**Before activating the automatic restart after power failure function please make sure that this**_ **E** _**mode is supported for the drive and permitted for your configuration.**_
_**When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from the motor and machine. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, apply CAUTION stickers in easily visible places.**_
_**When the start signal is turned off or is pressed during the restart cushion time after instantaneous power failure, deceleration starts after Pr. 58 "Restart cushion time" has elapsed.**_
6 - 164
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **6.12.2 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261)**
When a power failure or under voltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and re-accelerated to the set frequency.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**261**|Power failure stop selection|0|0|Coasting to stop when under voltage or power failure<br>occurs, the inverter output is shut off.||57<br>190–192<br>Restart coasting time<br>Output terminal<br>function selection|6.12.1<br>6.10.5|
||||1|When under voltage or a power failure occurs, the<br>inverter can be decelerated to a stop.||||
||||2|When under voltage or a power failure occurs, the<br>inverter can be decelerated to a stop.<br>If power is restored during a power failure, the<br>inverter accelerates again.||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Parameter setting**
When Pr. 261 is set to "1" or "2", the inverter decelerates to a stop if an undervoltage or power failure occurs.
## **Operation outline of deceleration to stop at power failure**
When undervoltage or power failure has occurred, the output frequency is decreased and controlled so that the converter circuit (DC bus) voltage is constant and decreased to 0 Hz to stop.
**==> picture [343 x 116] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power ON OFF<br>Output frequency<br>Time<br>I001814E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-82:** Parameters for stop selection at power failure_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 165
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Power failure stop mode (Pr. 261 = 1)**
If power is restored during power failure deceleration, deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter remains stopped. To restart, turn off the start signal once, then turn it on again.
**==> picture [316 x 158] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power<br>supply |__]<br>During deceleration at<br>Output occurrence of power failure<br>frequency<br>During stop at<br>\f occurrence of /<br>power failure<br>Time<br>Y46<br>Turn off STF once to make acceleration again<br>I001815E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [123 x 10] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-83: Power restoration<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**NOTES** When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 9999), power failure stop function is made invalid and automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure is made valid. |
When the power failure deceleration stop function is active (Pr. 261 = "1"), the inverter will not start even if the power is turned ON with the start signal (STF/STR) ON. After switching on the power, turn off the start signal once and then on again to make a start.
**==> picture [378 x 91] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power supply a ON<br>Not started as inverter is Output<br>stopped due to power frequency<br>failure<br>Time<br>STF OFF ON<br>Y46 a ON<br>I001175E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-84:** Restart at power restoration_
6 - 166
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 261 = 2)**
When power is restored during deceleration after a power failure, acceleration is made again up to the set frequency.
**==> picture [310 x 190] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 261 = 2 When power is restored during deceleration<br>Power<br>supply<br>Output<br>frequency<br>During deceleration<br>at occurrence of<br>power failure Reacceleration [�]<br>Time<br>� Deceleration time depends on Pr. 7 (Pr. 44).<br>I001176E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-85:** Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure_
When this function is used in combination with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 57 � "9999"), deceleration can be made at a power failure and acceleration can be made again after power restoration.
**==> picture [381 x 201] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
When used with automatic restart after instantaneous<br>Pr. 261 = 2, Pr. 57 � 9999 power failure<br>Power<br>supply<br>During power failure<br>Output<br>frequency<br>During deceleration<br>at occurrence of<br>Automatic restart after<br>power failure<br>instantaneous power failure<br>Time<br>Reset time + Pr. 57<br>I001177E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-86:** Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure_
**NOTE** When operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function is used, keep the starting signal (STF/STR) on even during instantaneous power failure. If the starting signal turns off during instantaneous power failure, the inverter decelerates according to the deceleration time setting, causing the motor to coast if enough regenerative energy is not obtained.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 167
Operation selection at power failure
Parameter
## **Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal)**
The Y46 signal is on during deceleration at an instantaneous power failure or during a stop after deceleration at an instantaneous power failure.
After a power failure stop, the inverter can not start even if power is restored the start command is given. In this case, check the power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal) (at occurrence of input phase loss (E.ILF), etc.).
For the Y46 signal, set "46" (forward operation) or "146" (reverse operation) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" to assign the function.
## **NOTES**
During a stop or trip, the power failure stop selection is not performed.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**If power-failure deceleration operation is set, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast. The motor will coast if enough regenerative energy is given from the motor.**_
6 - 168
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
Parameter
## **6.13 Operation setting at alarm occurrence**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Recover by retry operation at alarm<br>occurrence|Retry operation|Pr. 65,<br>Pr. 67–Pr. 69|6.13.1|
|Do not output input/output phase<br>failure alarm|Input/output phase failure protection<br>selection|Pr. 251, Pr. 872|6.13.2|
|Detect an earth (ground) fault at start|Earth (ground) fault detection at start|Pr. 249|6.13.3|
## **6.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)**
If a fault occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. You can also select the fault for a retry.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57 "Restart coasting time" � "9999"), restart operation is performed at the retry operation time which is the same of that of a power failure. (Refer to section 6.12.1 for the restart function.)
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**65**|Retry selection|0|0–5|An alarm for retry can be selected.||57<br>Restart coasting time|6.12.1|
|**67**|Number of retries at alarm<br>occurrence|0|0|No retry function||||
||||1–10|Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence. An<br>alarm output is not provided during retry operation.||||
||||101–110|Set the number of retries at alarm occurrence.<br>(The setting value of minus 100 is the number of<br>retries.)<br>An alarm output is provided during retry operation.||||
|**68**|Retry waiting time|1 s|0.1–360 s|Set the waiting time from when an inverter alarm<br>occurs until a retry is made.||||
|**69**|Retry count display erase|0|0|Clear the number of restarts succeeded by retry.||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 169
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
Parameter
Retry operation automatically resets a fault and restarts the inverter at the starting frequency when the time set in Pr. 68 elapses after the inverter is tripped.
Retry operation is performed by setting Pr. 67 to any value other than "0". Set the number of retries at fault occurrence in Pr. 67. When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr. 67, a retry count excess fault (E.RET) occurs, resulting in inverter trip. (Refer to retry failure example in 6-88.)
Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the inverter trips until a retry is made in the range 0.1 to 360 s. (When the setting value is "0 s", the actual time is 0.1 s.)
Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retry. The cumulative count in Pr. 69 is increased by 1 when a retry is regarded as successful after normal operation continues without faults occurring for more than four times longer than the time set in Pr. 68 after a retry start. (When retry is successful, cumulative number of retry failure is cleared.) Writing "0" to Pr. 69 clears the cumulative count.
During a retry, the Y64 signal is on. For the Y64 signal, assign the function by setting "64" (positive operation) or "164" (negative operation) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
**==> picture [342 x 343] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Retry success<br>Output frequency | Pr. 68 5 x {<br>| Pr.68.<br>Time<br>Retry start Success count + 1<br>Alarm occurrence<br>Retry success count<br>Y64<br>I001178E<br>Retry success example<br>Output frequency<br>Pr.68. Pr.68. -Pr.68.<br>Time<br>First Second Third<br>; Pep tp ey<br>Alarm retry Alarm retry Alarm retry Retry failure E.RET<br>occurrence occurrence occurrence<br>Alarm signal<br>yoo ol ed ed<br>I001179E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-87:** Retry success example_
_**Fig. 6-88:** Retry failure example_
6 - 170
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
Parameter
Using Pr. 65 you can select the alarm that will cause a retry to be executed. No retry will be made for the alarm not indicated.
|**Alarm**<br>**Display**<br>**for Retry**|**Name**|**Parameter 65 Setting**|**Parameter 65 Setting**|**Parameter 65 Setting**|**Parameter 65 Setting**|**Parameter 65 Setting**|**Parameter 65 Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**0**|**1**|**2**|**3**|**4**|**5**|
|E.OC1|Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration|✔|✔|—|✔|✔|✔|
|E.OC2|Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed|✔|✔|—|✔|✔||
|E.OC3|Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop|✔|✔|—|✔|✔|✔|
|E.OV1|Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during acceleration|✔|—|✔|✔|✔|—|
|E.OV2|Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during constant speed|✔|—|✔|✔|✔|—|
|E.OV3|Regenerative overvoltage shut-off during deceleration or stop|✔|—|✔|✔|✔|—|
|E.THM|Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)|✔|—|—|—|—|—|
|E.THT|Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)|✔|—|—|—|—|—|
|E.BE|Brake transistor alarm detection/Internal circuit error|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.GF|Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent protection|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.USB|USB communication fault|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.OHT|External thermal relay operation|✔|—|—|—|—|—|
|E.OLT|Stall Prevention|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.OPT|Option fault|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.OP1|Communication option fault|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.PE|Parameter storage device alarm|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.MB4|Brake sequence fault|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.MB5||✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.MB6||✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.MB7||✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
|E.ILF|Input phase failure|✔|—|—|—|✔|—|
_**Tab. 6-45:** Faults selected for retry_
## **NOTES**
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, the other functions may be affected. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
For a retry error, only the description of the first alarm is stored.
When an inverter alarm is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal relay function, regeneration converter duty etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-on reset.)
Retry is not performed if E.PE (Parameter storage device fault) occurred at power on.
If a fault that is not selected for a retry occurs during retry operation (retry waiting time), the retry operation stops while the fault indication is still displayed.
**==> picture [41 x 35] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine unless required. They will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an alarm. When you have selected the retry function, apply CAUTION seals in easily visible places.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 171
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
Parameter
## **6.13.2 Input/output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872)**
You can disable the output phase failure function that stops the inverter output if one of the inverter output side (load side) three phases (U, V, W) opens.
Input phase loss protection is a function to stop the inverter output if one of the three phases (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on the inverter's input side is lost.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**<br>~~eee~~|**Initial Value**<br>~~eee~~|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>~~eee~~|**Description**<br>~~eee~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**251**|Output phase failure<br>protection selection<br>~~eee~~|1<br>~~eee~~|0<br>~~eee~~<br>ee|Without output phase failure protection<br>~~eee~~|
||||1<br>~~eee~~<br>ee|With output phase failure protection<br>~~eee~~|
|**872**|Input phase failure<br>protection selection<br>~~eee~~<br>o|1<br>~~eee~~<br> ||0<br>~~eee~~<br>ee<br>-_-——|Without input phase failure protection<br>~~eee~~<br>-_-——|
||||1<br> -_-——|With input phase failure protection<br>-_-——<br>—|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Available only for the three-phase power input specification model.
## **Output phase failure protection selection (Pr. 251)**
If phase loss occurs during inverter running (except for during DC brake operation, or output frequency is 1 Hz or less), output phase loss protection (E.LF) activates, and inverter trips.
When Pr. 251 is set to "0", output phase failure protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.
## **Input phase failure protection selection (Pr. 872)**
When Pr. 872 is set to "1", input phase failure protection (E.ILF) is provided if a phase failure of one phase among the three phases is detected for 1 s continuously.
## **NOTES**
If an input phase failure continues for a long time during inverter operation, the converter section and capacitor lives of the inverter will be shorter.
If the load is light or during a stop, lost phase cannot be detected because detection is performed based on the fluctuation of bus voltage. Also, if the power supply voltage is imbalanced, phase loss is less likely detected.
Phase loss can not be detected during regeneration load operation.
If parameter copy is performed from single-phase power input specification model to three-phase power input specification model, Pr. 872 setting may be changed. Check Pr. 872 setting after parameter copy.
6 - 172
Operation setting at alarm occurrence
Parameter
## **6.13.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)**
You can choose whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at start valid or invalid. Earth (Ground) fault detection is executed only right after the start signal is input to the inverter.
Protective function will not activate if an earth (ground) fault occurs during operation.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**249**|Earth (ground) fault detection at<br>start|0|0|Without earth (ground) fault detection||—||
||||1|With earth (ground) fault detection||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **NOTES**
As detection is executed at starting, output is delayed for approx. 20 ms every starting.
If an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is detected and the inverter trips. (Refer to page 7-13.)
If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity for the FR-E740-120SC or more, earth (ground) fault detection may not be provided.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 173
Parameter
Energy saving operation
## **6.14 Energy saving operation**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Energy saving operation|Energy saving operation and optimum<br>excitation control|Pr. 60|6.14.1|
## **6.14.1 Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)** a **V/F**
Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically performs energy saving operation. This inverter is optimum for fan and pump applications.
|**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**60**<br>Energy saving control<br>selection<br>0<br>~~ee~~<br>es|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>**Description**<br>0<br>Normal operation mode<br>9<br>Optimum excitation control mode<br>eee<br>esee|**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>57<br>Advanced magnetic<br>flux vector control<br>General-purpose<br>magnetic flux vector<br>control<br>Restart coasting time<br>6.3.2<br>6.3.3<br>6.12.1<br>~~=|~~|
|---|---|---|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.
When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the optimum excitation control mode.
The optimum excitation control mode is a control system which controls excitation current to improve the motor efficiency to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.
## **NOTES**
When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to the inverter, the energy saving effect is not expected.
When the optimum excitation control mode is selected, deceleration time may be longer than the setting value. Since overvoltage alarm tends to occur as compared to the constant torque load characteristics, set a longer deceleration time.
Optimum excitation control functions only under V/F control. Optimum excitation control does not function under advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Optimum excitation control will not be performed during an automatic restart after instantaneous power failure.
Since output voltage is controlled by optimum excitation control, output current may slightly increase.
6 - 174
Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
Parameter
## **6.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Reduction of the motor noise<br>Measures against EMI and leakage cur-<br>rents|Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM selection|Pr. 72, Pr. 240|6.15.1|
|Reduce mechanical resonance|Speed smoothing control|Pr. 653|6.15.2|
## **6.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240)**
You can change the motor sound.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**72**|PWM frequency<br>selection�|1|0–15<br>(integral value)|PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The<br>setting displayed is in [kHz]. The settings<br>indicate the following frequencies:<br>0 ....................0.7 kHz<br>Settings between 1–14 correspond directly to<br>the frequency values.<br>15..................14.5 kHz||156<br>Stall prevention<br>operation selection|6.3.5|
|||||||||
|**240**|Soft-PWM operation<br>selection�|1|0|Soft-PWM is invalid||||
||||1|When Pr. 72 = 0 to 5, Soft-PWM is valid.||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
## **PWM carrier frequency changing (Pr. 72)**
You can change the PWM carrier frequency of the inverter.
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or motor or on reducing noise or leakage current generated from the inverter.
## **Soft-PWM control (Pr. 240)**
Soft-PWM control is a control system that changes the motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.
## **NOTES**
Decreasing the PWM carrier frequency reduces inverter-generated noise and leakage current, but increases motor noise.
When PWM carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or less (Pr. 72 � 1), fast response current limit may function prior to stall prevention operation due to increase in ripple currents, resulting in insufficient torque. In such case, set fast-response current limit operation invalid using Pr. 156 "Stall prevention operation selection".
When setting 2 kHz or more in Pr. 72 to perform operation in the place where the ambient temperature exceeding 40 °C, caution should be taken as the rated inverter current should be reduced. (Refer to appendix A-1.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 175
Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
Parameter
## **6.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653)**
Vibration due to mechanical resonance influences the inverter control, causing the output current (torque) unstable. In this case, the output current (torque) fluctuation can be reduced to ease vibration by changing the output frequency.
**Pr. No. Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Refer to Section 653** Speed smoothing control 0 0–200% Increase or decrease the value using 100% as reference to check an effect. — ~~—~~ The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **Control block diagram**
**==> picture [388 x 119] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Acceleration/deceleration<br>processing<br>Speed<br>command Output frequency<br>V/F control Frequency output<br>Voltage output<br>Speed smoothing control<br>Pr. 653 Torque current<br>I001816E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-89:** Control block diagram of the speed smoothing control_
## **Setting method**
If vibration due to mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr. 653, run the inverter at the frequency which generates maximum vibration and check if the vibration will be reduced or not after several seconds.
If effect is not produced, gradually increase the Pr. 653 setting and check the effect repeatedly until the most effective value is set in Pr. 653.
If vibration becomes large by increasing the Pr. 653 setting, gradually decrease the Pr. 653 setting than 100% to check the effect in a similar manner.
**NOTE** Depending on the machine, vibration may not be reduced enough or an effect may not be | produced.
WT 6 - 176
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **6.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Selection of voltage/current input<br>(terminal 2, 4)<br>Perform forward/reverse rotation by<br>analog input.|Analog input selection|Pr. 73, Pr. 267|6.16.1|
|Adjustment (calibration) of analog<br>input frequency and voltage (current)|Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage<br>(current)|Pr. 125, Pr. 126,<br>Pr. 241, C2–C7<br>(Pr. 902–Pr. 905)|6.16.3|
## **6.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)**
You can select the function that switches between forward rotation and reverse rotation according to the analog input terminal specifications and input signal.
The following settings are possible:
- Select reference voltages and currents: 0–10 V, 0–5 V or 0/4–20 mA
- Suppress motor reversing
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**73**|Analog input<br>selection|1|0|Terminal 2: 0–10 V|Without reversible operation||125<br>126<br>C2<br>–<br>C7<br>Terminal 2 frequency<br>setting gain frequency<br>Terminal 4 frequency<br>setting gain frequency<br>Terminal 2 frequency<br>setting bias frequency<br>to<br>Terminal 4 frequency<br>setting gain|6.16.3<br>6.16.3<br>6.16.3<br>6.16.3|
||||1|Terminal 2: 0–5 V|||||
||||10|Terminal 2: 0–10 V|With reversible operation||||
||||11|Terminal 2: 0–5 V|||||
|**267**|Terminal 4 input<br>selection|0|0|**Voltage/Current Input Switch**|**Description**||||
||||||Terminal 4: 0/4–20 mA||||
||||1||Terminal 4: 0–5 V||||
||||2||Terminal 4: 0–10 V||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 177
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **Selection of analog input specifications**
For the terminal 2 for analog voltage input, 0 to 5 V (initial value) or 0 to 10 V can be selected. Either voltage input (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) or current input (4 to 20 mA initial value) can be selected for terminal 4 used for analog input. Change the input specifications by setting Pr. 73 and Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch.
**==> picture [395 x 176] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-90:<br>Voltage/current input switch<br>Sauce cucal~<br>[mh|<br>Current input<br>(initial setting)<br>a<br>Voltage input<br>I002131E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Rated specifications of terminal 4 change according to the voltage/current input switch setting:
> Voltage input: Input resistance 10 k Qt 1 k Q , maximum permissible input voltage 20 V DC
> Current input: Input resistance 233 5 , maximum permissible current 30 mA Qt Q
## **CAUTION:**
_**Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accord-**_ **E** _**ance with the setting. Incorrect setting as in the table below could cause component damage. Incorrect settings other than below can cause abnormal operation.**_
|**Setting Causing Component Damage**|**Setting Causing Component Damage**|**Operation**|
|---|---|---|
|**Switch Setting**|**Terminal Input**||
|I(current input)|Voltage input|This could cause component damage to the analog signal<br>output circuit of signal output devices.<br>(electrical load in the analog signal output circuit of signal<br>output devices increases)|
|V(voltage input)|Current input|This could cause component damage of the inverter sig-<br>nal input circuit.<br>(output power in the analog signal output circuit of signal<br>output devices increases)|
6 - 178
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
Refer to the following table and set Pr. 73 and Pr. 267. The half-tone screened areas indicate the main speed setting.
|**Pr. 73**|**Terminal 2**|**Terminal 4**|**Terminal 4**|**Polarity Reversible**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**AU Signal**|||
|0|0–10 V|OFF|—|No|
|1<br>(initial value)|0–5 V||||
|10|0–10 V|||Yes|
|11|0–5 V||||
|0|—|ON|According to Pr. 267:<br>0: 4–20 mA (initial value)<br>1: 0–5 V<br>2: 0–10 V|No|
|1<br>(initial value)|||||
|10|—|||Yes|
|11|||||
## _**Tab. 6-46:** Setting of parameter 73 and 267_
The terminal used for the AU signal input, set "4" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign functions.
## **NOTES**
Turn the AU signal on to make terminal 4 valid.
Make sure that the parameter and switch settings are the same. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
Use Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) "Frequency setting gain" to change the maximum output frequency at input of the maximum output frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 179
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **Perform operation by analog input voltage**
The frequency setting signal inputs 0 to 5 V DC (or 0 to 10 V DC) to across the terminals 2-5. The 5 V (10 V) input is the maximum output frequency.
The power supply 5 V can be input by either using the internal power supply or preparing an external power supply. Prepare an external power supply to input the power supply 10 V. For the built-in power supply, terminals 10-5 provide 5 V DC output.
**==> picture [406 x 351] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-91:<br>Frequency setting by voltage 0–5 V DC<br>STF<br>Forward rotation<br>PC<br>0–5 V DC<br>10<br>Frequency<br>setting 2<br>5<br>Connection diagram<br>using terminal 2 (0–5 V DC)<br>I001182E<br>Fig. 6-92:<br>Frequency setting by voltage 0–10 V DC<br>Forward rotation STF<br>PC<br>0–10 V DC<br>Frequency Voltage input 2<br>setting equipment<br>5<br>Connection diagram<br>using terminal 2 (0–10 V DC)<br>I001884E<br>Terminal Power Supply VoltageInverter Built-in Frequency SettingResolution Pr. 73 (Terminal 2 Input Voltage)<br>10 5 V DC 0.1 Hz/50 Hz 0–5 V DC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-47:** Built-in power supply voltage_
When inputting 10 V DC to the terminal 2, set "0" or "10" in Pr. 73. (The initial value is 0 to 5 V.)
Setting "1 (0 to 5 V DC)" or "2 (0 to 10 V DC)" in Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch in the OFF position changes the terminal 4 to the voltage input specification. When the AU signal turns on, the terminal 4 input becomes valid.
**NOTE** The wiring length of the terminal 10, 2, 5 should be 30 m maximum.
6 - 180
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **Perform operation by analog input current**
When the pressure or temperature is controlled constant by a fan, pump, etc., automatic operation can be performed by inputting the output signal 0/4 to 20 mA of the adjuster to across the terminals 4-5.
**==> picture [58 x 15] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
NOTE<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
The AU signal must be turned on to use the terminal 4. For the terminal used for AU signal input, set "4" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
**==> picture [404 x 143] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-93:<br>Frequency setting by the function "Current input<br>Forward rotation<br>0/4–20 mA" assigned to terminal 4<br>0/4–20 mA DC<br>Frequency Current<br>setting equipmeninputt<br>Connection diagram<br>using terminal 4 (0/4–20 mA DC)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001184E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **Perform forward/reverse rotation by analog input (polarity reversible operation)**
Setting "10" or "11" in Pr. 73 and adjusting Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) "Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency" (Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency) and C2 (Pr. 902) "Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency" to C7 (Pr. 905) "Terminal 4 frequency setting gain" makes reverse operation by terminal 2 (terminal 4) valid.
**Example** � When performing reversible operation by terminal 2 (0 to 5 V) input.
- Set "11" in Pr. 73 to make reversible operation valid. Set frequency at maximum analog input in Pr. 125 (Pr. 903).
- Set 1/2 of the value set in C4 (Pr. 903) in C3 (Pr. 902).
- Reversible operation is performed when 0 to 2.5 V DC is input and forward rotation when 2.5 to 5 V DC.
**==> picture [201 x 96] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Set frequency [Hz] Reverse Forward<br>rotation rotation<br>Reversible<br>Not reversible<br>Terminal 2 input [V]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [9 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
m<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**When reversible operation is set, be aware of reverse rotation operation when analog input**_ **P** _**stops (only the start signal is input).**_
**NOTE**
When reversible operation is valid, reversible operation (0 to 4 mA: reverse operation, 4 mA to 20 mA: forward operation) is performed by terminal 4 in the initial setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 181
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **6.16.2 Input filter time constant (Pr. 74)**
If the set point signal (terminal 2 or 4) is an unstable signal or contains noise you can filter out the instability or noise by increasing the setting value of Pr. 74.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**74**|Input filter time constant|1|0–8|Set the primary delay filter time constant for the<br>analog input.<br>A larger setting results in a larger filter.|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set between approximately 5 ms to 1 s with the setting of 0 to 8.)
6 - 182
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **6.16.3 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current) [Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)]**
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V or 0/4 to 20 mA DC).
These parameters can be used to configure the inverter precisely for set point signals that either exceed or do not quite reach 5 V or 10 V or 20 mA. These settings can also be used to configure inverse control (i.e. high output frequency at minimum set point signal, minimum output frequency at maximum set point signal).
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**125**|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>frequency|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain<br>(maximum).|||20<br>73<br>267<br>79<br>Acceleration/<br>deceleration reference<br>frequency<br>Analog input selection<br>Terminal 4 input<br>selection<br>Operation mode<br>selection|6.7.1<br>6.16.1<br>6.16.1<br>6.18.1|
|**126**|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>frequency|50 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain<br>(maximum).|||||
|**241**|Analog input display unit<br>switchover��|0|0|Displayed in %|Select the unit of<br>analog input display.||||
||||1|Displayed in V/mA|||||
|**C2**<br>**(902)**|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>frequency��|0 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency on the bias side of<br>terminal 2 input.|||||
|**C3**<br>**(902)**|Terminal 2 frequency setting<br>bias��|0%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the bias side voltage<br>(current) of terminal 2 input.|||||
|**C4**<br>**(903)**|Terminal 2 frequency setting<br>gain��|100%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the gain side voltage<br>of terminal 2 input.)|||||
|**C5**<br>**(904)**|Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>bias frequency��|0 Hz|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency on the bias side of<br>terminal 4 input.|||||
|**C6**<br>**(904)**|Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>bias��|20%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the bias side current<br>(voltage) of terminal 4 input.|||||
|**C7**<br>**(905)**|Terminal 4 frequency setting<br>gain��|100%|0–300%|Set the converted % of the gain side current<br>(voltage) of terminal 4 input.|||||
- The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
- The above parameter allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 183
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **Change the frequency at maximum analog input (Pr. 125, Pr. 126)**
Set a value to Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing only the frequency setting (gain) of the maximum analog input power (current). (C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) setting need not be changed.)
## **Analog input bias/gain calibration [C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)]**
The parameters for input bias and gain can be used to configure the inverter for set point signals that do not exactly match 5 V or 10 V or 20 mA. You can enter the exact output frequencies to be associated with the minimum and maximum signal values separately for terminals 2 and 4. This feature can also be used to configure an inverse control characteristic (i.e. high output frequency at minimum set point signal, minimum output frequency at maximum set point signal).
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using C2 (Pr. 902). (Factory-set to the frequency at 0 V.)
Parameter C3 (Pr. 902) is the frequency setting bias for the input signal at terminal 2, i.e. the minimum value of the analog signal. When signals are smaller than this value the frequency set point signal will be limited to the value set with C2.
Parameter 125 sets the gain for the terminal 2 output frequency. This is the frequency set point value that corresponds to the maximum analog signal defined with Pr. 73. (Pr. 125 is set to a default value of 50Hz at the factory.)
Parameter C4 (Pr. 903) sets the gain for the input signal on terminal 2, i.e. the maximum value of the analog signal connected to terminal 2. When signals exceed this value the frequency set point value is limited to the value stored in Pr. 125.
Parameter C5 (Pr. 904) sets the frequency set point bias frequency for terminal 4. This is the frequency corresponding to the minimum analog signal. (This parameter is set to a default value of 0 Hz at the factory.)
Parameter C6 (Pr. 904) sets the bias of the input signal on terminal 4, i.e. the minimum value of the analog signal connected to terminal 4. When the signal on this terminal is lower than this value the frequency set point value is limited to the value set with C5. (This parameter is set to a default value of 20% at the factory, which corresponds to approx. 4 mA.)
Parameter 126 sets the gain for the terminal 4 output frequency. This is the frequency set point value that corresponds to the maximum analog signal defined with Pr. 73. (Pr. 126 is set to a default value of 50 Hz at the factory.)
Parameter C7 (Pr. 905) sets the gain of the input signal on terminal 4, i.e. the maximum value of the analog signal connected to terminal 4. When the signal on this terminal is higher than this value the frequency set point value is limited to the value set with Pr. 126.
6 - 184
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
**==> picture [413 x 409] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Initial value<br>50 Hz<br>Gain Pr. 125<br>Bias<br>C2<br>(Pr. 902)<br>0 Frequency setting signal 100%<br>0 5 V<br>0 10 V<br>C3 (Pr. 902) C4 (Pr. 903)<br>I001191E<br> Fig. 6-94: Signal adjustment of terminal 2<br>Initial value<br>50 Hz<br>Gain Pr. 126<br>Bias<br>C5<br>(Pr. 904)<br>0 Frequency setting signal 100%<br>0 20 mA<br>C6 (Pr. 904) C7 (Pr. 905)<br>I001191E<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-94:** Signal adjustment of terminal 2_
_**Fig. 6-95:** Signal adjustment of terminal 4_
There are three methods to adjust the frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain:
- Method to adjust any point by application of voltage (current) to across the terminals 2-5 (4-5). (Refer to page 6-187.)
- Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5 (4-5). (Refer to page 6-188.)
- Adjusting only the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current). (Refer to page 6-189.)
**NOTE**
- When voltage/current input signal for terminal 4 was switched using Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch, perform calibration without fail.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 185
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)**
The level display for the analog signal connected to terminal 2 or terminal 4 can be switched between a % display and a display in V or mA.
Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr. 73 and Pr. 267, the display units of C3 (Pr. 902), C4 (Pr. 903), C6 (Pr. 904) and C7 (Pr. 905) change as shown below.
|**Analog Command (Terminal 2, 4)**<br>**(Depending on Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and**<br>**Voltage/Current Input Switch)**|**Pr. 241 = 0 (Initial Value)**|**Pr. 241 = 1**|
|---|---|---|
|0–5 V<br>pe|0 to 5 V<br>0 to 100% is displayed.<br>pe|0 to 5 V<br>0 to 5 V is displayed.<br>pe|
|0–10 V<br>pe<br>po|0 to 10 V<br>0 to 100% is displayed.<br>pe|0 to 10 V<br>0 to 10 V is displayed.<br>pe|
|0/4–20 mA<br>pe<br>po|0 to 20 mA<br>0 to 100% is displayed.<br>pe|0 to 20 mA<br>0 to 20 mA is displayed.<br>pe|
## _**Tab. 6-48:** Units when displaying the set value_
Note that the LED A also light up as an additional indicator when Pr. 241 is set to "1" and the display is set to the settings for C3/C4 or C6/C7.
6 - 186
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
## **Frequency setting signal (current) bias/gain adjustment method**
1. Method to adjust any point by application of voltage (current) to across the terminals 2-5 (4-5). The following example illustrating the procedure assumes that Pr. 241 is set to "0":
**==> picture [389 x 478] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Confirmation of the RUN indication and<br>operation mode indication.<br>The inverter must be at a stop.<br>The inverter must be in the PU operation<br>mode (using the PU/EXT key).<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>Press the MODE key to choose the<br>parameter setting mode. q , The parameter number read Zi<br>previously appears.<br>Turn the digital dial until "C..." appears.<br>@ =:<br>Press the SET key until "C---" appears. C1 to C7 setting is enabled.<br>mea ---|<br>Turn the digital dial until "C 4 (C 7)"<br>appears. Set to C4 "Terminal 2 frequency<br>setting gain". o Voltage input z= ma Current input<br>Press the SET key to display the analog Analog voltage (current) value (%) across<br>voltage (current) value (%). terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5)<br>© » Bay<br>Apply the maximum set value. (Turn the te. The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of the potentiometer.<br>external potentiometer to its maximum)<br>CAUTION: ~ _ Hiagl<br>After performing the operation in<br>step © do not touch the digital dial<br>until completion of calibration.<br>The value is nearly 100 (%) in<br>the maximum position of the<br>potentiometer. Voltage Current<br>input input<br>Press the SET key to set. O° i mm mam<br>KT<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>(Adjustment completed)<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to return to the "C---" indication (step ).<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter (Pr.CL).<br>I001886E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-96:** Bias and gain adjustment by application of an reference signal_
## **NOTES**
If the frequency meter (display meter) connected across the terminals AM-5 does not indicate just 50Hz, set the calibration parameter C1 "AM terminal calibration". (Refer to section 6.11.4).
Error code Er3 may be displayed when you save if the frequency values for gain and bias are less than approx. 5% apart. If this happens correct the frequency settings and save again.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 187
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
2. Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2-5 (4-5). (This example shows how to change from 4 V to 5 V, assuming that Pr. 241 is set to "1".)
**==> picture [400 x 448] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>° Confirmation of the RUN indication and<br>operation mode indication.<br>The inverter must be at a stop.<br>The inverter must be in the PU operation<br>mode (using the PU/EXT key).<br>PRM indication is lit.<br>° Press the MODE key to choose the<br>parameter setting mode. » i o m<br>The parameter number read<br>previously appears.<br>e Turn the digital dial until "C..." appears. @<br>C1 to C7 setting is enabled.<br>® Press the SET key until "C---" appears. (=) > zz<br>Turn the digital dial until "C 4 (C 7)"<br>8 appears. Set to C4 "Terminal 2 frequency \ @Y = Voltage input aa Current input<br>setting gain".<br>Analog voltage (current) value (%)<br>Press the SET key to display the analog across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5) and the "A" indication or no<br>voltage (current) value (%). indication is lit.<br>8 © »- ia<br>@ Turn the digital dial to set the gain of the<br>voltage signal value. If Pr. 241 is set to "1"<br>the value will be displayed directly. . The gain frequency is reached when a<br>voltage of 5.0 V is displayed.<br>CAUTION:<br>@ EEG<br>When you start turning the digital dial<br>the value that is currently stored<br>(in this example 4 V) will be displayed.<br>Voltage Current<br>Press the SET key to set. So - a z input maz input<br>KT<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>(Adjustment completed)<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to return to the "C---" indication (step ® ).<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter (Pr.CL).<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001887E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-97:** Bias and gain adjustment without application of an reference signal_
**NOTE**
By pressing the digital dial after step you can confirm the current frequency setting bias/gain setting. It cannot be confirmed after execution of step ® 4 .
6 - 188
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
Parameter
3. Method to adjust only the frequency without adjustment of a gain voltage (current). (The gain frequency is changed from 50 Hz to 40 Hz.)
**==> picture [400 x 281] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Turn the digital dial until P.125 (Pr. 125) or P.126 (Pr. 126) appears or<br>Voltage input Current input<br>� Press the SET key to show the currently<br>set value (50.00 Hz).<br>� Turn the digital dial to change it<br>to the setting value of "40.00" (40.00 Hz).<br>� Press the SET key to set. Voltage input Current input<br>Flicker ... Parameter setting complete!<br>� Press the MODE key twice to choose<br>monitor/frequency monitor.<br>� Apply the maximum signal value to the<br>terminals 2-5 (4-5) and turn the start<br>signal (STF or STR) on. The inverter will<br>accelerate the motor to 40 Hz.<br>I001820E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-98:** Adjusting only the frequency without adjustment of a voltage (current)_
## **NOTES**
Changing C4 (Pr. 903) or C7 (Pr. 905) (gain adjustment) value will not change the Pr. 20 value.
For the operation procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the FR-PU04/ FR-PU07 instruction manual.
When setting the value to 120 Hz or more, it is necessary to set Pr. 18 "High speed maximum frequency" to 120 Hz or more. (Refer to page 6-52.)
Make the bias frequency setting using calibration parameter C2 (Pr. 902) or C5 (Pr. 904). (Refer to page 6-184.)
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Take care when setting any value other than "0" as the bias speed at 0 V (0/4 mA). Even if a frequency command is not given, merely turning on the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 189
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **6.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Limit reset function<br>Make alarm stop when PU is discon-<br>nected<br>Stop from PU|Reset selection/<br>disconnected PU detection/<br>PU stop selection|Pr. 75|6.17.1|
|Prevention of parameter rewrite|Parameter write selection|Pr. 77|6.17.2|
|Prevention of reverse rotation of the<br>motor|Reverse rotation prevention selection|Pr. 78|6.17.3|
|Displays necessary parameters|Display of applied parameters and user<br>group function|Pr. 160,<br>Pr. 172–Pr. 174|6.17.4|
|Parameter restriction using password|Password function|Pr. 296<br>Pr. 297|6.17.5|
|Control of parameter write by<br>communication|E²PROM write selection|Pr. 342|6.19.3|
**6.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)**
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection function and PU stop function.
**Refer to Pr. No. Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Section 75** Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/ 14 0–3/14–17 For the initial value, reset always enabled, without disconnected PU detection, and with 250551 Stop selectionPU mode operation 6.9.36.18.3 command source PU stop selection PU stop function are set. selection ~~ee~~ The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0. This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection". Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
|**Pr. 75**|**Reset Selection**|**Disconnected PU Detection**|**PU Stop Selection**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0|Reset input always enabled.|If the PU is disconnected, oper-<br>ation will be continued.|Pressing the STOP key<br>decelerates the motor to<br>a stop only in the PU<br>operation mode.|
|1|Enabled only when the protective function<br>is activated|||
|2|Reset input always enabled.|When the PU is disconnected,<br>the inverter output is shut off.||
|3|Enabled only when the protective function<br>is activated|||
|14<br>(initial value)|Reset input always enabled.|If the PU is disconnected, oper-<br>ation will be continued.|Pressing the STOP key<br>decelerates the motor to<br>a stop in any of the PU,<br>external and communi-<br>cation operation modes.|
|15|Enabled only when the protective function<br>is activated|||
|16|Reset input always enabled.|When the PU is disconnected,<br>the inverter output is shut off.||
|17|Enabled only when the protective function<br>is activated|||
_**Tab. 6-49:** Setting of parameter 75_
6 - 190
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Reset selection**
You can select the enable condition of reset function (RES signal, reset command through communication) input.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "1, 3, 15, 17", a reset can be input only when the inverter is tripped.
**NOTES** When the reset signal (RES) is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output. Also, the cumulative value of the electronic thermal relay function and the regenerative brake duty are cleared.
The reset key of the PU is valid only when the protective function is activated, independently of the Pr. 75 setting.
## **Disconnected PU detection**
This function detects that the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for longer than 1s and causes the inverter to provide an alarm output (E.PUE) and come to an alarm stop.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15", operation is continued if the PU is disconnected.
**NOTES** When the PU has been disconnected since before power-on, it is not judged as an alarm.
To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter.
The motor decelerates to a stop when the PU is disconnected during PU jog operation with Pr. 75 set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15" (operation is continued if the PU is disconnected).
When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 191
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **PU stop selection**
In any of the PU operation, external operation and network operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing the STOP key of the PU.
When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function (refer to section 4.3 "Operation panel") in the external operation mode, "PS" is displayed but an alarm is not output. An alarm output is not provided.
After the motor is stopped from the PU, it is necessary to perform PU stop (PS) reset to restart. PS reset can be made from the unit from which PU stop is made (operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/ PU07, operation panel for FR-E500 (PA02)).
The motor can be restarted by making PS cancel using a power supply reset or RES signal.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0 to 3", PU stop (PS display) is invalid, deceleration to a stop by the STOP key is valid only in the PU operation mode.
**NOTE** During operation in the PU operation mode through USB communication or RS-485 communication from the PU connector, the motor decelerates to stop (PU stop) when STOP is entered from the operation panel.
6 - 192
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Restarting method when stop was made by pressing the STOP key from the PU during external operation ("PS" is displayed)**
## **Operation panel**
After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn off the STF or STR signal.
- Press the PU/EXT key to change to the PU operation mode. The PU indication is lit. The message "PS" is cancelled.
Press the PU/EXT key to change to the external operation mode. The EXT indication is lit.
Turn on the STF or STR signal.
**==> picture [376 x 148] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Speed<br>| Time<br>| PU key<br>Operation panel<br>STOP key<br>STF (EIN) |<br>STR (AUS)<br>I000027C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-99:** Stop during external operation_
## **Parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)**
After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch off the STF or STR signal.
Press the EXT key. The message "PS" is cancelled.
Switch on the STF or STR signal.
The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal.
## **NOTE**
If Pr. 250 "Stop selection" is set to other than "9999" to select coasting to a stop, the motor will not be coasted to a stop but decelerated to a stop by the PU stop function during external operation.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 193
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Restart (PS reset) method when PU stop (PS display) is made during PU operation**
PU stop (PS display) is made when the motor is stopped from the unit where control command source is not selected (operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07, operation panel for FR-E500 (PA02)) in the PU operation mode.
For example, when Pr. 551 "PU mode operation command source selection" = 9999 (initial value), the motor is stopped from the PU (PS display) if entered from the operation panel in PU operation mode with the parameter unit mounted.
## **When the motor is stopped from the PU when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is selected as control command source**
After the motor has decelerated to a stop, press the STOP/RESET key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Press the PU/EXT key to change to the external operation mode. The EXT indication is lit. The message "PS" is cancelled.
Press the PU key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to select the PU operation mode.
Press the FWD or the REV key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
## **NOTE**
## **P**
When Pr. 551 = "9999", the priorities of the PU control source is USB connector > parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) > operation panel.
## **CAUTION:**
_**Do not reset the inverter while the start signal is being input. Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to potentially hazardous conditions.**_
6 - 194
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **6.17.2 Parameter write selection (Pr. 77)**
You can select whether write to various parameters can be performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**77**|Parameter write selection|0|0|Write is enabled only during a stop.||79<br>Operation mode<br>selection|6.18.1|
||||1|Parameter write is not enabled.||||
||||2|Parameter write is enabled in any operation mode<br>regardless of operation status.||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Pr. 77 can be always set independently of the operation mode and operation status.
## **Write parameters only at a stop (Pr. 77 = 0)**
Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode.
The half-tone screened parameters in the parameter list (Tab. 6-1) can always be written, regardless of the operation mode and operation status. However, Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection", Pr. 240 "SoftPWM operation selection" and Pr. 275 "Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed multiplying factor" can be written during operation in the PU operation mode, but cannot be written in external operation mode.
## **Disable parameter write (Pr. 77 = 1)**
Parameter write is not enabled. (Reading is enabled.)
Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot be performed, either.
The parameters given below can be written if Pr. 77 = 1.
|**Parameter**|**Name**|
|---|---|
|22|Stall prevention operation level|
|75|Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection|
|77|Parameter write selection|
|79|Operation mode selection|
|160|User group read selection|
|296|Password lock level|
|297|Password lock/unlock|
_**Tab. 6-50:** Parameters that can be written even if Pr. 77 = 1_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 195
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Write parameters during operation (Pr. 77 = 2)**
Parameters can always be written. The following parameters cannot be written during operation if Pr. 77 = 2. Stop operation when changing their parameter settings.
|**Parameter**|**Name**|
|---|---|
|23|Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed|
|40|RUN key rotation direction selection|
|48|Second stall prevention operation current|
|60|Energy saving control selection|
|61|Reference current|
|66|Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency|
|71|Applied motor|
|79|Operation mode selection|
|80|Motor capacity (simple magnetic flux vector control)|
|81|Number of motor poles|
|82|Motor excitation current|
|83|Motor rated voltage|
|84|Rated motor frequency|
|90–94|Motor constants|
|96|Auto tuning setting/status|
|178–184|Input terminal function selection|
|190–192|Output terminal function selection|
|277|Stall prevention operation current switchover|
|292|Automatic acceleration/deceleration|
|293|Acceleration/deceleration separate selection|
|298|Frequency search gain|
|329|Digital input unit selection<br>(Parameter for the plug-in option FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)|
|450|Second applied motor|
|541|Frequency command sign selection (CC-Link)<br>(Parameter for the plug-in option FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E)|
|800|Control method selection|
|859|Torque current|
_**Tab. 6-51:** Parameters that cannot be written during operation_
6 - 196
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **6.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)**
In some applications (fans, pumps) it is necessary to ensure that the motor cannot be reversed. This can be achieved with Pr. 78.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**78**|Reverse rotation prevention<br>selection|0|0|Both forward and reverse rotations allowed||—||
||||1|Reverse rotation disabled||||
||||2|Forward rotation disallowed||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
Set this parameter when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and reverse rotation commands through communication.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 197
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **6.17.4 User groups (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)**
Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted. In the initial setting, only the simple mode parameters are displayed.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**<br>ee|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**160**<br>~~p~~|User group read selection<br>°<br>~~p~~o|0|9999<br>ee|Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.|
||||0<br>ee<br>ee|The simple mode and extended parameters can be<br>displayed.<br>ee|
||||1<br>ee|Only parameters registered in the user group can be<br>displayed.|
|**172**<br>~~p~~|User group registered display/batch<br>clear<br>~~p~~o|0<br>ee|(0–16)<br>ee|Displays the number of cases registered as a user<br>group (Read only)|
||||9999<br>ee<br>ee|Batch clear the user group registration<br>ee|
|**173**<br>~~p~~|User group registration<br>~~p~~o<br>~~e~~|9999<br>~~e~~<br>ee|0–999/<br>9999<br>ee<br>~~e~~e<br>ee|Set the parameter numbers to be<br>registered to the user group.<br>e<br>ee|
|**174**|User group clear<br>~~p~~|9999<br>ee<br>~~p~~ee|0–999/<br>9999<br>ee<br>ee|Set the parameter numbers to be cleared from the<br>user group.<br>ee<br>ee|
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The values read from Pr. 173 and Pr. 174 are always "9999".
This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
## **Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr. 160)**
When Pr. 160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). (Refer to the parameter list Tab. 6-1 for the simple mode parameters.)
Setting "0" to Pr. 160 enables the display of the simple mode parameters and extended parameters.
## **NOTES**
- | When a plug-in option is fitted to the inverter, the option parameters can also be read.
When reading the parameters using the communication option, all parameters (simple mode, extended mode, parameters for options) can be read regardless of the Pr. 160 setting.
When RS-485 communication is used to read the parameters, all parameters can be read, regardless of the Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection", Pr. 551 "PU mode operation command source selection", regardless of Pr. 160 setting.
|**Pr. 551**|**Pr. 550**|**Pr. 160 Valid/Invalid**|
|---|---|---|
|2 (PU)|—|Valid|
|3 (USB)<br>9999<br>(auto-detect)<br>(initial value)|0 (communication option)|Valid|
||2 (PU)|Invalid (all readable)|
||9999 (auto-detect)<br>(initial value)|With communication option: valid|
|||Without communication option: invalid<br>(all readable)|
Pr. 15 "Jog frequency", Pr. 16 "Jog acceleration/deceleration time", and Pr. 991 "PU contrast adjustment" are displayed as simple mode parameter when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted.
6 - 198
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **User group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)**
The user group function is designed to display only the parameters necessary for setting.
From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters can be registered to a user group. When Pr. 160 is set to "1", only the parameters registered to the user group can be accessed. (Reading of parameters other than the user group registration is disabled.)
To register a parameter to the user group, set its parameter number to Pr. 173. To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter number to Pr. 174. To batch-delete the registered parameters, set Pr. 172 to "9999".
## **Registration of parameter to user group (Pr. 173)**
**==> picture [397 x 270] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>� Confirmation of the RUN indication and<br>operation mode indication.<br>The inverter must be at a stop.<br>The inverter must be in the PU operation mode<br>(using the PU/EXT key).<br>Parameter setting mode<br>� Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode.<br>Pr. 173 "User group<br>registration" is displayed.<br>� Turn the digital dial until P.173 (Pr. 173) appears.<br>When Pr. 173 is read, "9999" is<br>� Press the SET key to display "9999". displayed.<br>Select the parameter number<br>� Turn the digital dial until "3" appears. to be registered.<br>� Press the SET key to set.<br>"P.173" and "3" are displayed alternately.<br>To continue parameter registration, repeat<br>steps � to �.<br>Flicker ... Registration of Pr. 3<br>to user group completed!<br>I001821E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-100:** When registering Pr. 3 to user group_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 199
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Deletion of parameter from user group (Pr. 174)**
**==> picture [386 x 263] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Confirmation of the RUN indication and<br>operation mode indication. Lie Bo<br>The inverter must be at a stop.<br>The inverter must be in the PU operation mode<br>(using the PU/EXT key).<br>Parameter setting mode<br>Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>> Sie<br>setting mode.<br>. Pr. 174 "User group clear" is displayed.<br>Turn the digital dial until P.174 (Pr. 174) appears.<br>@ ? Pay<br>When Pr. 174 is read, "9999" is<br>Press the SET key to display "9999". displayed.<br>c) 9° EEEE<br>Select the parameter number<br>Turn the digital dial until "3" appears. So C lin: to be deleted.<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>"P.174" and "3" are displayed alternately.<br>To continue parameter deletion, repeat - Tz ir<br>steps ® to © —<br>Flicker ... Deletion of Pr. 3<br>from user group completed!<br>I001822E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-101:** When deleting Pr. 3 from user group_
## **NOTES**
Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 can always be read, independently of the user group setting.
- Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 172 to Pr. 174 cannot be registered to the user group.
- When Pr. 174 is read, "9999" is always displayed. Although "9999" can be written, no function is available.
When any value other than "9999" is set to Pr. 172, no function is available.
6 - 200
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **6.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)**
Registering 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/writing.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**296**|Password lock level�|9999|0–6/99/<br>100–106/199|Select restriction level of parameter reading/writing<br>when a password is registered.||77<br>160<br>550<br>551<br>Parameter write selection<br>Extended function<br>display selection<br>NET mode operation<br>command source<br>selection<br>PU mode operation<br>command source<br>selection|6.17.2<br>6.17.4<br>6.18.3<br>6.18.3|
||||9999|No password lock||||
|**297**|Password lock/unlock�|9999|1000–9998|Register a 4-digit password||||
||||(0–5)�|Displays password unlock error count.<br>(Reading only)<br>(Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to "106")||||
||||(9999)�|No password lock||||
The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
- This parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = "0."
- If Pr. 296 = "9999" (no password lock), Pr. 297 can be set while Pr. 160 = "0." When the password lock is valid (Pr. 296 � 9999), Pr. 297 can be set regardless of the Pr. 160 setting.
- Pr. 297 can be written as "0 or 9999," but the Pr. 297 setting does not change.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 201
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr. 296)**
Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation command can be selected by Pr. 296.
|**Pr. 296 Setting**<br>||**PU Mode Operation Command**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~Ae~~|**PU Mode Operation Command**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~Ae~~|**NET Mode Operation Command**<br>~~eesee~~<br>~~Ae~~<br>~~ee~~|**NET Mode Operation Command**<br>~~eesee~~<br>~~Ae~~<br>~~ee~~|**NET Mode Operation Command**<br>~~eesee~~<br>~~Ae~~<br>~~ee~~|**NET Mode Operation Command**<br>~~eesee~~<br>~~Ae~~<br>~~ee~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**RS-485 Communication**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~Ae~~<br>~~ee~~||**Communication Option**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~||
||**Read**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~Ae~~|**Write**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~Ae~~|**Read**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~Ae~~|**Write**<br>~~ees~~<br>~~ee~~|**Read**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|**Write**<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|
|9999<br>|<br>~~ae~~|✔<br>~~ees~~<br>~~ae~~|✔<br>~~ees~~<br>~~ae~~|✔<br>~~ees~~|✔<br>~~ees~~|✔<br>~~ee~~|✔<br>~~ee~~|
|0/100<br>~~ae~~|—<br>~~ae~~|—<br>~~ae~~|—|—|—|—|
|1/101|✔|—|✔|—|✔|—|
|2/102|✔|—|✔|✔|✔|✔|
|3/103|✔|✔|✔|—|✔|—|
|4/104|—|—|—|—|✔|—|
|5/105|—|—|✔|✔|✔|✔|
|6/106|✔|✔|—|—|✔|—|
|99/199<br>a|Only parameters registered in the user group can be read/written.<br>(For the parameters not registered in the user group, same restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)||||||
_**Tab. 6-52:** Level of password lock and reading/writing restriction_
If the parameter reading is restricted by the Pr. 160 setting, those parameters are unavailable for reading even when "✔" is indicated.
If the parameter writing is restricted by the Pr. 77 setting, those parameters are unavailable for writing even when "✔" is indicated.
Parameter access from unit where parameter is written in PU operation mode (initially set to operation panel, parameter unit) is restricted. (Refer to section 6.18.3 for PU mode operation command source selection.)
This restricts parameter access from the command source that can write a parameter under Network operation mode (initially RS-485 communication from PU connector or a communication option).
Read/write is enabled only in the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = "9999". Pr. 296 and Pr. 297 are always read/write enabled whether registered to a user group or not.
If a communication option is installed, option fault (E.OPT) occurs, and inverter trips (refer to section 7.2).
6 - 202
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Password lock/unlock (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)**
- Lock
- Set parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr. 296 � 9999).
|**Pr. 296 Setting Value**|**Restriction of Password**<br>**Unlock Error**|**Pr. 297 Display**|
|---|---|---|
|0 to 6/99|No restriction|Always "0"|
|100 to 106/199|Restricted at fifth error|Displays error count (0 to 5)|
During Pr. 296 setting of any of "100 to 106 or 199", if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock the restriction. All parameter clear can unlock the restriction. (In this case, parameter settings are cleared.)
- Write a four-digit number (1000 to 9998) in Pr. 297 as a password. (When Pr. 296 = "9999", Pr. 297 cannot be written.)
- When password is registered, parameter reading/writing is restricted with the restriction level set in Pr. 296 until unlocking.
## **NOTES**
After registering a password, a read value of Pr. 297 is always one of "0" to "5".
When a password restricted parameter is read/written, "LOCd" is displayed.
Even if a password is registered, parameters which the inverter itself writes, such as inverter parts life, are overwritten as needed.
Even if a password is registered, Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment can be read/written when a parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 203
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## ● Unlock
There are two ways of unlocking the password.
- Enter a password in Pr. 297.
- Unlocked when a password is correct. If a password is incorrect, an error occurs. During Pr. 296 setting of any of "100 to 106 or 199", if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock the restriction. (During password lock)
- Perform all parameter clear.
Password lock is unlocked. However, other parameter settings are cleared also.
## **NOTES**
If the password has been forgotten, perform all parameter clear to unlock the parameter restriction. In that case, other parameters are also cleared.
Parameter all clear can not be performed during the operation.
Do not use the FR Configurator when parameter read is restricted (Pr. 296 setting is any of "0, 4, 5, 99, 100, 104, 105, 199"). FR Configurator may not function properly.
The password unlock method is different for operation panel/FR-PU07, RS-485 communication, and communication option.
||**Operation Panel/**<br>**FR-PU07**|**RS-485 Communication**|**Communication Option**|
|---|---|---|---|
|All parameter clear<br>(data format H9966, H55AA)|✔|✔|✔|
|Parameter clear<br>(data format H9696, H5A5A)|—|—|✔|
- ✔: Password can be unlocked
- —: Password cannot be unlocked
6 - 204
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Parameter
## **Parameter operation during password lock/unlock**
|**Parameter Operation**|**Parameter Operation**|**Unlocked**|**Unlocked**|**Password**<br>**Registered**|**Locked**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Pr. 296 = 9999**<br>**Pr. 297 = 9999**|**Pr. 296**�**9999**<br>**Pr. 297 = 9999**|**Pr. 296**�**9999**<br>**Pr. 297 = 0–4**<br>**(Read Value)**|**Pr. 296 = 100–106/199**<br>**Pr. 297 = 5**<br>**(Read Value)**|
|Pr. 296|Read|✔ �|✔|✔|✔|
||Write|✔ �|✔ �|—|—|
|Pr. 297|Read|✔ �|✔|✔|✔|
||Write|—|✔|✔|✔ �|
|Performing parameter<br>clear||✔|✔|—�|—�|
|Performing parameter all<br>clear||✔|✔|✔ �|✔ �|
|Performing parameter<br>copy||✔|✔|—|—|
_**Tab. 6-53:**_ Parameter operation during password lock/unlock
- Reading/writing is unavailable when there is restriction to reading by the Pr. 160 setting. (Reading is available in NET mode regardless of Pr. 160 setting.)
- Unavailable during the operation.
- Correct password will not unlock the restriction.
- Parameter clear is available only from the communication option.
## **NOTES**
- When Pr. 296 setting is any of "4, 5, 104, 105" (password lock), the setting screen for PU JOG frequency is not displayed in the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
During password lock, parameter copy of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) cannot be performed.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 205
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **6.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Operation mode selection|Operation mode selection|Pr. 79|6.18.1|
|Started in network operation mode|Operation mode at power on|Pr. 79, Pr. 340|6.18.2|
|Selection of control source|Selection of control source, speed com-<br>mand source and control location during<br>communication operation|Pr. 338, Pr. 339,<br>Pr. 550, Pr. 551|6.18.3|
## **6.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)**
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external command signals (external operation), operation from the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) (PU operation), combined operation of PU operation and external operation (external/PU combined operation), and network operation (when RS-485 communication or a communication option is used).
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**79**|Operation mode selection|0|0|External/PU switchover mode<br>External operation mode at power on|
||||1|Fixed to PU operation mode|
||||2|Fixed to external operation mode<br>Operation can be performed by switching between<br>external and NET operation mode|
||||3|Combined operation mode 1<br>Running frequency:<br>Operation panel, and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) setting<br>or external signal input [multi-speed setting, across<br>terminals 4-5 (valid when AU signal turns on)]<br>Start signal:<br>External signal input (terminal STF, STR)|
||||4|External/PU combined operation mode 2<br>Running frequency:<br>External signal input (terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed<br>setting, etc.)<br>Start signal:<br>Enter from the RUN key of the operation panel and<br>the FWD/REV keys of the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)|
||||6|Switchover mode<br>Switchover between PU operation, external<br>operation, and NET operation is available while<br>keeping the same operation status.|
||||7|External operation mode (PU operation interlock)<br>X12 signal ON:<br>Operation mode can be shifted to PU operation mode<br>(output stop during external operation)<br>X12 signal OFF:<br>Operation mode can not be switched to PU operation<br>mode.|
The above parameter can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
6 - 206
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Operation mode basics**
The operation mode is to specify the source of inputting the start command and set frequency of the inverter.
- Select the "external operation mode" when performing operation by basically using the control circuit terminals and providing potentiometers, switches, etc. externally.
- Select the "PU operation mode" when inputting the start command and frequency setting through communication from the operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) or PU connector.
- Select the "network operation mode (NET operation mode)" when the commands are applied from the RS-485 communication with the PU connector or the network to the communication option card.
The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.
**==> picture [400 x 236] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PU operation mode<br>Inverter<br>USB connector<br>PU operation<br>mode<br>PU operation mode<br>FR-PU07 Operation panel<br>PU connector<br>Communication<br>Network option<br>operation mode Potentiometer<br>Personal computer<br>5 Bi .<br>— GOT &<br>External terminals<br>External<br>Be) PLC |p operation &<br>mode<br>Switch<br>I001823E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-102:** Operation modes of the inverter_
## **NOTES**
Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined mode.
The stop function (PU stop selection) activated by pressing the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is valid even in other than the PU operation mode in the initial setting. (Refer to Pr. 75 "Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection" (section 6.17.1).)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 207
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
Switching the operation mode
**==> picture [390 x 131] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
External operation<br>Switching from the network Switching from the PU<br>Switch to the external Press<br>operation mode from the network. Press of the PU to light<br>Switch to the network operation<br>mode from the network. of the PU to light<br>= PU<br>Network operation PU operation<br>I001824_gbC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-103:** Switching the operation mode when Pr. 340 = 0 or 1_
**==> picture [384 x 69] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Press of the PU to light<br>Network operation PU operation<br>—____—<br>Press of the PU to light<br>=<br>I001893_gbC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-104:** Switching the operation mode when Pr. 340 = 10_
## **NOTE**
- For switching of operation by external terminals, refer to the following: e PU operation external interlock signal (X12 signal) (refer to page 6-214) e PU-external operation switch-over signal (X16) (refer to page 6-215) e PU-NET operation switchover signal (X65) (refer to page 6-216)
- External-NET operation switchover signal (X66) (refer to page 6-216)
- Pr. 340 "Communication start-up mode selection" (refer to page 6-218)
6 - 208
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Operation mode selection flow**
In the following flowchart, select the basic parameter setting and terminal connection related to the operation mode:
|||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**START**||||||||**Parameter Setting**|**Operation**|
|||||||||||
|Where is the start command source?||||||||||
|Fr<br>Fr<br>Fr|Fr|om||||||||
||||Where is the frequency set?|||||||
||Fr|||||||||
||||||||||Frequency setting signal ON<br>STF(STR) ON|
|||||||||Pr. 79 = 3<br>(External/PU combined<br>operation 1)<br>Pr. 338 = 1<br>Pr. 340 = 1<br>Pr. 338 = 1<br>Pr. 340 = 1<br>Pr. 79 = 4<br>(External/PU combined<br>operation 2)<br>Pr. 79 = 1<br>(Fixed to PU operation)<br>Pr. 339 = 1<br>Pr. 340 = 1<br>Pr. 340 = 1<br>Pr. 339 = 1<br>Pr. 340 = 1<br>Pr. 340 = 1<br>Disabled<br>Disabled||
|||||||||||
||||||||||Digital dial|
|||||||||||
||||PU connector or<br>communication option?|||||||
|||om|||||||Communication frequency setting<br>command sending<br>STF(STR) ON|
|||||||||||
||||||||||Communication frequency setting<br>command sending<br>STF(STR) ON|
||||Where is the frequency set?|||||||
||Fr|||||||||
|||om|||||||Frequency setting terminal ON<br>RUN/FWD/REV key ON|
|||||||||||
||||||||||Digital dial|
|||||||||||
||||PU connector or<br>communication option?|||||||
|||||||||||
|||||Where is|the frequency set?|||||
||||Com|||||||
|||||munication||||||
||||||||||Frequency setting terminal ON<br>Communication start command<br>sending|
|||||||||||
||||||From communication (PU connector)|||||
||||||||||Communication frequency setting<br>command sending<br>Communication start command<br>sending|
||||||option<br>the frequency set?<br>From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.)<br>Connection of communication option<br>(Refer to the corresponding commu-<br>nication option instruction manual)<br>Terminal 2, 4-5 (analog), RL, RM, RH,<br>JOG-PC, etc.<br>From the operation panel|||||
|||||Where is|the frequency set?|||||
|||||||||||
|||||||||||
||||||||||Frequency setting terminal ON<br>Communication start command<br>sending|
|||||||||||
||||||From communication|(communication option)<br>Connection of communication option<br>(Refer to the corresponding commu-<br>nication option instruction manual)||||
|||||||Connection of communication option<br>(Refer to the corresponding commu-<br>nication option instruction manual)||Pr. 340 = 1|Communication frequency setting<br>command sending<br>Communication start command<br>sending|
|||||||||||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 209
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **External operation mode (Pr. 79 = 0, 2)**
Select the external operation mode when performing operation by providing a frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc. externally and connecting them to the control circuit terminals of the inverter.
Basically, parameter changing is disabled in external operation mode. (Some parameters can be changed. Refer to Tab. 6-1 for the parameter list.)
When "0" or "2" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the external operation mode at power on. (When using the network operation mode, refer to section 6.18.2).
If you don’t need to change the parameter settings frequently you can set the unit to external mode permanently by setting Pr. 79 to "2". (If you need to change parameter settings frequently external mode should be activated by setting Pr. 79 to "0". Then the frequency inverter will switch to external mode automatically when the power is switched on but it can be switched to PU mode by pressing the PU/EXT key. You can then make the parameter changes in PU mode and switch back to external mode again afterwards by pressing PU/EXT again.)
The STF and STR signal are used as a start command, and the terminal 2, 4, multi-speed setting, JOG signal, etc. are used as frequency setting.
**==> picture [384 x 158] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-105:<br>is= Re External operation mode<br>Inverter<br>Forward rotation 6ne<br>start STF<br>Reverse rotation STR<br>©<br>start PC<br>10<br>Frequency setting<br>potentiometer 2<br>5<br>I002132E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 210
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **PU operation mode (Pr. 79 = 1)**
Select the PU operation mode when applying start and speed command by only the key operation of the operation panel (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Also select the PU operation mode when making communication using the PU connector.
When "1" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the PU operation mode at power on. You cannot change to the other operation mode.
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for setting like a volume. (Pr. 161 "Frequency setting/key lock operation selection", refer to section 6.22.3).
**==> picture [216 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-106:<br>Inverter<br>PU operation mode<br>Operation panel<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001825E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 211
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **PU/external combined operation mode 1 (Pr. 79 = 3)**
Select the PU/external combined operation mode 1 when applying frequency command from the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and inputting the start command with the external start switch.
Select "3" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other operation mode by using the PU/EXT-key.
When a frequency is input from the external signal by multi-speed setting, it has a higher priority than the frequency setting of the PU. When AU is on, the terminal 4 is used.
**==> picture [305 x 91] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Forward<br>Operation panel<br>rotation start STF<br>Reverse 0O STR Hea RUNPU MONE X T PRMNET<br>rotation start<br>J PC RUN | Sor<br>I002134E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-107:** Combined operation mode 1_
## **PU/external combined operation mode 2 (Pr. 79 = 4)**
Select the PU/external combined operation mode 2 when applying frequency command from the external potentiometer, multi-speed or JOG signal and inputting the start command by key operation of the operation panel (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Select "4" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other operation mode by using the PU/EXT-key.
**==> picture [289 x 93] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Operation panel<br>O 10<br>Frequency He RUN MON P R M<br>setting 2<br>c i PU EXT NET<br>potentiometer O 5 RUN ) S70F<br>e l gee<br>I002135E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-108:** Combined operation mode 2_
6 - 212
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Switch-over mode (Pr. 79 = 6)**
While continuing operation, you can switch between the PU operation, external operation and network operation (when RS-485 communication with the PU connector or communication option is used).
|**Operation Mode Switching**|**Switching Operation/Operating Status**|
|---|---|
|External operation�PU operation|Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.<br>Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.<br>The frequency set with the potentiometer (frequency command) or like is<br>used unchanged. (Note that the setting will disappear when power is<br>switched off or the inverter is reset.)|
|External operation�NET operation|Send the mode change command to the network operation mode through<br>communication.<br>Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.<br>The value set with the setting potentiometer (frequency command) or like<br>is used unchanged. (Note that the setting will disappear when power is<br>switched off or the inverter is reset.)|
|PU operation�external operation|Press the external operation key of the parameter unit.<br>The rotation direction is determined by the input signal of the external<br>operation.<br>The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command<br>signal.|
|PU operation�NET operation|Send the mode change command to the network operation mode through<br>communication.<br>Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation.|
|NET operation�external operation|Command to change to external mode is transmitted by communication.<br>Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal.<br>The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command<br>signal.|
|NET operation�PU operation|Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.<br>The rotation direction and frequency command in the network operation<br>mode are used unchanged.|
_**Tab. 6-54:** Operation states in the switch-over mode_
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
P<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **WARNING:**
_**When using switch-over mode please note that in some switch-over operations the rotation direction command and the frequency setting value are "transferred" to the "new" operating mode (refer to Tab. 6-54 for details). When this happens the drive will run in the new operating mode even though it has not (yet) received any control commands. It is extremely important to take this into account and take the necessary steps to ensure that performing these switch-over operations cannot cause hazardous conditions.**_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 213
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **PU operation interlock (Pr. 79 = 7)**
The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode to external operation mode when the PU operation interlock signal (X12) input turns off.
This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode.
Set "7" (PU operation interlock) in Pr. 79. For the terminal used for X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function. (Refer to section 6.10.1 for Pr. 178 to Pr. 184.) When the X12 signal has not been assigned, the function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to the PU operation interlock signal.
|**X12 (MRS) Signal**|**Function/Operation**|**Function/Operation**|
|---|---|---|
||**Operation Mode**|**Parameter Write**|
|ON|Operation mode (external, PU, NET)<br>switching enabled<br>Output stop during external operation|Parameter write enabled (depending on Pr. 77<br>"Parameter write selection" and each parameter<br>write condition<br>(Refer to Tab. 6-1 for the parameter list.)|
|OFF|Forcibly switched to external operation mode<br>External operation allowed.<br>Switching to PU or NET operation mode disabled|Parameter write disabled with exception of Pr. 79|
_**Tab. 6-55:** Function of the X12 signal_
## **Function/operation changed by switching on-off the X12 (MRS) signal**
|**Operation Condition**|**Operation Condition**|**X12 (MRS)**<br>**Signal**|**Operation**<br>**Mode**|**Operating Status**|**Switching to PU, NET**<br>**Operation Mode**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Operation**<br>**Mode**|**Status**|||||
|PU/NET|During<br>stop<br>pf|ON<br>OFF<br>pf|External<br>fe|If external operation frequency setting<br>and start signal are entered, operation is<br>performed in that status.|Disallowed<br>oe|
||Running<br>ES|ON<br>OFF<br>ES|||Disallowed<br>—_——|
|External|During<br>stop<br>eS|OFF<br>ON|External<br>;<br>a|Stop<br>a|Enabled<br>—_——|
|||ON<br>OFF<br>eS|||Disallowed<br>—_—|
||Running<br>eS|OFF<br>ON<br>eS||During operation<br>output stop<br>a|Disallowed<br>—_—|
|||ON<br>OFF<br>eS||Output stop<br>During operation<br>a|Disallowed|
_**Tab. 6-56:** Switching the X12 (MRS) signal_
The operation mode switches to external operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is on or off. Therefore, the motor is run in external operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is turned off with either of STF and STR on.
At alarm occurrence, pressing the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel resets the inverter.
## **NOTES**
If the X12 (MRS) signal is on, the operation mode cannot be switched to PU operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is on.
When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the MRS signal serves as the normal MRS function (output stop) by turning on the MRS signal and then changing the Pr. 79 value to other than "7" in the PU operation mode. Also as soon as "7" is set in Pr. 79, the signal acts as the PU interlock signal.
When the MRS signal is used as the PU operation interlock signal, the logic of the signal is as set in Pr. 17. When Pr. 17 = 2, read ON as OFF and OFF as ON in the above explanation.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 214
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Switching of operation mode by external terminal (X16)**
When external operation and operation from the operation panel are used together, use of the PU-external operation switching signal (X16) allows switching betwen the PU operation mode and external operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop, start command off).
When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 6, 7", the operation mode can be switched between the PU operation mode and external operation mode. (Pr. 79 = "6" switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
For the terminal used for X16 signal input, set "16" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the function.
||**Pr. 79**|**X16 Signal State Operation Mode**|**X16 Signal State Operation Mode**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**ON (external)**|**OFF (PU)**||
||0 (initial value)|External operation<br>mode|PU operation mode|Can be switched to external, PU or NET<br>operation mode|
||1|PU operation mode||Fixed to PU operation mode|
||2|External operation mode||Fixed to external operation mode (Can be<br>switched to NET operation mode.)|
||3 / 4|External/PU combined operation mode||External/PU combined mode fixed|
||6|External operation<br>mode|PU operation mode|Can be switched to external, PU or NET<br>operation mode with operation continued|
|7|X12 (MRS) ON|External operation<br>mode|PU operation mode|Can be switched to external, PU or NET<br>operation mode. (Output stop in external<br>operation mode.)|
||X12 (MRS) OFF|External operation mode||Fixed to external operation mode (Forcibly<br>switched to external operation mode.)|
_**Tab. 6-57:** Operation mode switching by signal X16_
## **NOTES**
The operation mode status changes depending on the setting of Pr. 340 "Communication start-up mode selection" and the ON/OFF states of the X65 and X66 signals. (For details, refer to page 6-216).
The priorities of Pr. 79, Pr. 340 and signals are: Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 215
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Switching of operation mode by external terminal (X65, X66)**
When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 2, 6", the operation mode switching signals (X65, X66) can be used to change the PU or external operation mode to network operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop or start command off). (Pr. 79 = "6" switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
When switching between the network operation mode and PU operation mode:
Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value) or "6".
Set "10" in Pr. 340 "Communication start-up mode selection".
Set "65" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 to assign the PU-NET operation switching signal (X65) to the external terminal.
The operation mode changes to PU operation mode when the X65 signal turns on, or to network operation mode when the X65 signal turns off.
**==> picture [410 x 167] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
X65 Signal State<br>Pr. 340 Pr. 79 Remarks<br>ON (PU) OFF (NET)<br>ee<br>ee 0 a PU operation NET operation<br>(initial setting) mode mode<br>a 1 ee PU operation mode ee Fixed to PU operation mode<br>a 2 NET operation mode Fixed to NET operation mode<br>a 3 / 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed<br>10<br>PU operation NET operation Operation mode can be switched with<br>6<br>mode mode operation continued<br>a Switching among the External and PU op- ee<br>X12 (MRS) ON Output stop in external operation mode<br>eration mode is enabled<br>7<br>Forcibly switched to external operation<br>X12 (MRS) OFF External operation mode<br>mode<br>—a — a—— — ——<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Tab. 6-58:** Operation mode switching by signal X65_
NET operation mode when the X66 signal is on.
PU operation mode is selected when the X16 signal is off. PU operation mode also when Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 0 (communication option control source) and the communication option is not fitted.
External operation mode when the X16 signal is on.
6 - 216
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **When switching between the network operation mode and external operation mode:**
- Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value), "2", "6" or "7". (At the Pr. 79 setting of "7", the operation mode can be switched when the X12 (MRS) signal turns on.)
- Set "0 (initial value) or 1" in Pr. 340 "Communication startup mode selection".
- Set "66" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 to assign the external-NET operation switching signal (X66) to the external terminal.
- The operation mode changes to network operation mode when the X66 signal turns on, or to external operation mode when the X66 signal turns off.
|**Pr. 340**||**Pr. 79**|**X66-Signal**|**X66-Signal**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**ON (PU)**|**OFF (NET)**||
|0<br>(initial<br>value)/<br>1||0 (initial value)|NET operation<br>mode�|External<br>operation mode�||
|||1|PU operation mode||Fixed to PU operation mode|
|||2|NET operation<br>mode�|External<br>operation mode|Cannot be switched to PU operation mode|
|||3 / 4|External/PU combined operation mode||External/PU combined mode fixed|
|||6|NET operation<br>mode�|External<br>operation mode�|Operation mode can be switched with<br>operation continued|
||7|X12 (MRS) ON|NET operation<br>mode�|External<br>operation mode�|Output stop in external operation mode|
|||X12 (MRS) OFF|External operation mode||Forcibly switched to external operation<br>mode|
_**Tab. 6-59:** Operation mode switching by signal X66_
- PU operation mode also when Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 1 (communication option control source) and the communication option is not fitted.
- PU operation mode when the X16 signal is off. When the X65 signal has been assigned, the operation mode changes with the ON/OFF state of the X65 signal.
## **NOTES**
The priorities of Pr. 79, Pr. 340 and signals are:
Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 217
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **6.18.2 Operation mode at power on (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)**
When power is switched on or when power comes back on after instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in network operation mode.
After the inverter has started up in the network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be performed from a program.
Set this mode for communication operation using the inverter RS-485 terminals or communication option.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**79**|Operation mode selection|0|0–4/6/7|Select the operation mode.<br>(Refer to page 6-209)|
|**340**|Communication start-up<br>mode selection|0|0|As set in Pr. 79.|
||||1|Started in network operation mode.|
||||10|Started in network operation mode. Operation mode<br>can be changed between the PU operation mode and<br>network operation mode from the operation panel.|
The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0. However, the parameters can be set whenever the communication option is connected. (Refer to section 6.17.4.)
6 - 218
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Specify operation mode at power on (Pr. 340)**
Depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings, the operation mode at power on (reset) changes as described below:
|**Pr. 340**|**Pr. 79**|**Operation Mode**<br>**at Power on, Power Restoration, Reset**|**Operation Mode Switching**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0<br>(initial<br>value)|0<br>(initial<br>value)|External operation mode|Can be switched to external, PU or NET opera-<br>tion mode�|
||1|PU operation mode|Fixed to PU operation mode|
||2|External operation mode|Can be switched to external or NET operation<br>mode<br>Switching to PU operation mode disabled|
||3 / 4|External/PU combined operation mode|Operation mode switching disabled|
||6|External operation mode|Can be switched to external, PU or NET opera-<br>tion mode with operation continued|
||7|X12 (MRS) signal ON: External operation mode|Can be switched to external, PU or NET opera-<br>tion mode�|
|||X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External operation<br>mode|Fixed to external operation mode (Forcibly<br>switched to external operation mode.)|
|1|0|NET operation mode|Same as when Pr. 340 = 0|
||1|PU operation mode||
||2|NET operation mode||
||3 / 4|External/PU combined operation mode||
||6|NET operation mode||
||7|X12 (MRS) signal ON: NET operation mode||
|||X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External operation<br>mode||
|10|0|NET operation mode|Can be switched to PU or NET operation<br>mode�|
||1|PU operation mode|Same as when Pr. 340 = 0|
||2|NET operation mode|Fixed to NET operation mode|
||3 / 4|External/PU combined operation mode|Same as when Pr. 340 = 0|
||6|NET operation mode|Can be switched to PU or NET operation mode<br>with operation continued�|
||7|External operation mode|Same as when Pr. 340 = 0|
_**Tab. 6-60:** Operation mode of the inverter at power on_
- The operation mode cannot be switched directly between the PU operation mode and network operation mode.
- Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and network operation mode with the PU/EXT key of the operation panel and X65 signal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 219
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **6.18.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551)**
When the RS-485 communication with the PU connector or communication option is used, the external start command and frequency command can be made valid. Command source in the PU operation mode can be selected.
From the communication device, parameter unit, etc. which have command source, parameter write or start command can be executed. Parameter read or monitoring can be executed in any operation mode.
For FR-A800-E: When the Ethernet connector is used, the command source in the network (NET) / PU operation mode can be selected.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**338**<br>**339**|Communication operation<br>command source<br>0<br>0<br>Start command source communication<br>1<br>Start command source external<br>Communication speed<br>command source<br>0<br>0<br>Frequency command source communication<br>1<br>Frequency command source external (Frequency<br>command from communication is invalid, frequency<br>command from terminal 2 is valid)<br>2<br>Frequency command source external (Frequency<br>command from communication is valid, frequency<br>command from terminal 2 is invalid)<br>~~e~~S eee<br>eeee<br>~~a~~a||||59<br>79<br>270<br>Remote function<br>selection<br>Operation mode selection<br>Stop-on contact control<br>selection|6.6.3<br>6.18.1<br>6.9.4|
|**550**|NET mode operation command<br>source selection<br>FR-E700 SC EC:<br>9999<br>FR-E700 SC ENE:<br>0<br>aa||0<br>2<br>9999|The communication option is the command source<br>when in the NET operation mode.<br>FR-E700 SC ENE: The Ethernet connector is the<br>command source when in the NET operation mode.<br>PU connector is the command source when NET<br>operation mode.<br>FR-E700 SC EC: Automatic communication option<br>recognition<br>Normally, PU connector is the command source.<br>When a communication option is mounted, the<br>communication option is the command source.|||
|**551**|PU mode operation command<br>source selection<br>9999<br>ai||2<br>3<br>4<br>9999|PU connector is the command source when PU<br>operation mode.<br>USB connector is the command source when PU<br>operation mode.<br>Operation panel is the command source when PU<br>operation mode.<br>USB automatic recognition<br>Normally, operation panel is the command source.<br>When the parameter unit is connected to the PU<br>connector, PU is the command source. When USB is<br>connected, USB connector is the command source.|||
||For the FR-E-700 SC EC the above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" =||For the FR-E-700 SC EC the above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" =||||
||0. However, the parameters can be set whenever the communication option is connected. (Refer to||||||
||section 6.17.4.)||||||
This parameter can be changed for the FR-E700 SC EC during a stop in any operation mode.
6 - 220
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Select the command source of the network operation (NET) mode (Pr. 550)**
For the FR-E700 SC EC either the RS-485 communication with the PU connector or communication option can be specified as the command source in the NET operation mode.
For the FR-E700 SC ENE either the Ethernet connector or the PU connector can be specified for the command source in the NET operation mode.
For example, set Pr. 550 to "2" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency command from the unit RS-485 terminals in the NET operation mode independently of whether the communication option is connected or not.
For example, set Pr. 550 = "0 (initial value)" to write parameters or input the start and frequency commands via the Ethernet connector in the NET operation mode for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
**NOTE**
Since Pr. 550 = "9999" (automatic communication option recognition) in the initial setting for the FR-E700 SC EC, parameter write, start command and frequency command cannot be executed by communication using the unit RS-485 terminals when the communication option is fitted.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 221
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Selects the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr. 551)**
Any of the operation panel, PU connector, Ethernet connector (only FR-E700 SC ENE), or USB connector can be specified as the command source in the PU operation mode.
In the PU operation mode, set Pr. 551 to "2" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency command during the RS-485 communication with PU communication.
- **NOTES** When performing the RS-485 communication with the PU connector when Pr. 551 = 9999, PU mode command source does not automatically change to the PU connector. Change to the network operation mode to change the command source.
When "2" (NET mode PU connector) is set in Pr. 550 and "2" (PU mode PU connector) is set in Pr. 551, PU operation mode has priority. When the communication option is not fitted for the FR-E700 SC EC, therefore, the operation mode cannot be switched to the network operation mode.
Changed setting value is made valid when powering on or resetting the inverter.
The Modbus®-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. Select network operation mode (NET mode command source).
All of the operation mode indicator ( ) of the operation panel turns OFF when thecommand source for the FR-E700 SC EC is not the operation panel.
|**Pr. 550**|**Pr. 551**<br>Ss|**Command Source**<br>~~pe~~|**Command Source**<br>~~pe~~|**Command Source**<br>~~pe~~|**Command Source**<br>~~pe~~|**Command Source**<br>~~pe~~|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Operation**<br>**Panel**|**USB**<br>**Connector**|**PU connector**||**Communica-**<br>**tion Option**<br>**(FR-E700 SC**<br>**EC)/**<br>**Ethernet**<br>**connector (FR-**<br>**E700 SC ENE)**||
|||||**Parameter**<br>**Unit**|**RS-485**<br>**Communication**|||
|0<br>(initial<br>value<br>for FR-<br>E700 SC<br>ENE)|2<br>Ss|—|—|PU|PU|NET||
||3<br>Ss<br>i<br>esa|—<br>a<br>a|PU<br>a|—|—|NET||
||4<br>i<br>esa<br>ppp|PU<br>a<br>a<br>ppp|—<br>a<br>pppet|—<br>etet|—<br>etop|NET<br>op||
||9999<br>(initial<br>value)<br>esa<br>ppp<br>ee|PU<br>a<br>ppp<br>ee|PU<br>pppet<br>ee|PU<br>etet|—<br>etop|NET<br>opet<br>ee|et<br>ee|
|2|2<br>ppp<br>ee|—<br>ppp<br>ee|—<br>ppp et<br>ee|PU<br>et et|PU<br>et op|—<br>op<br>ee|Switching to NET opera-<br>tion mode disabled<br><br>ee|
||3<br>ee<br>a<br>es|—<br>ee<br>|PU<br>ee<br>|—<br>|NET<br>|—<br>ee<br>|ee|
||4<br>esppt|PU<br>ppt|—<br>pptet|—<br>etet|NET<br>etoP|—<br>oP||
||9999<br>(initial<br>value)<br>esppt<br>es|PU<br>ppt|PU<br>pptet|PU<br>etet|NET<br>etoP|—<br>oP||
|9999<br>(initial<br>value<br>for FR-<br>E700 SC<br>EC))|2<br>ppt<br>es|—<br>ppt|—<br>ppt et|PU<br>etet|PU<br>et oP|NET<br>oP||
||3<br>es|—|PU|—|—|NET|Communication option<br>fitted|
|||||—|NET|—|Communication option<br>not fitted|
||4|PU<br>ee|—<br>ee|—|—|NET|Communication option<br>fitted|
|||||—|NET|—<br>ee|Communication option<br>not fitted<br>ee|
||9999<br>(initial<br>value)|PU<br>ee|PU<br>ee|PU<br>ee|—<br>ee|NET<br>ee<br>ee|Communication option<br>fitted<br>ee<br>ee|
|||||—|NET|—<br>ee|Communication option<br>not fitted<br>ee|
## _**Tab. 6-61:** Parameter 550 and 551 settings_
The Modbus®-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. When using the Modbus®-RTU protocol, set Pr. 550 to "2".
For FR-E700 SC EC: When the communication option is not fitted, the operation mode cannot be switched to the network operation mode.
When Pr. 551 = "9999", the priorities of the PU control source is USB connector > parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) > operation panel.
6 - 222
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Controllability through communication**
|**Oper-**<br>**ation**<br>**Loca-**<br>**tion**|**Condition**<br>**(Pr. 551)**|**Command**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**PU Operation**|**External**<br>**Operation**|**External/PU**<br>**Combined**<br>**Operation**<br>**Mode 1**<br>**(Pr. 79 = 3)**|**External/PU**<br>**Combined**<br>**Operation**<br>**Mode 2**<br>**(Pr. 79 = 4)**|**NET Operation**<br>**(When Using**<br>**PU**<br>**Connector)**��|**NET Operation**<br>**(FR-E700 SC EC:**<br>**When Commu-**<br>**nication Option**<br>**is used)**�**/**<br>**Ethernet con-**<br>**nector (FR-**<br>**E700 SC ENE)**�|
|Control by RS-485 communication from PU connector|2<br>(PU<br>connector)|Run command<br>(start)|✔|—|—|4|—||
|||Run command<br>(stop)|✔|� �|� �|4|� �||
|||Running frequency<br>setting|✔|—|4|—|—||
|||Parameter write|✔�|—�|✔�|✔�|—�||
|||Inverter reset|✔|✔|✔|✔|✔||
||Other than<br>the above|Run command<br>(start)|—|—|—|—|✔�|—|
|||Run command<br>(stop)|—|—|—|—|✔�|—|
|||Running frequency<br>setting|—|—|—|—|✔�|—|
|||Parameter write|—�|—�|—�|—�|✔�|—�|
|||Inverter reset|—|—|—|—|✔�|—|
|Operation from the USB connector|3<br>(USB<br>connector)<br>9999<br>(automatic<br>recognition)|Run command<br>(start, stop)|✔|—|—|4|—||
|||Running frequency<br>setting|✔|—|✔|—|—||
|||Parameter write|✔�|—�|—�|—�|—�||
|||Inverter reset|✔|✔|✔|✔|✔||
||Other than<br>the above|Run command<br>(start, stop)|—|—|—|—|—||
|||Running frequency<br>setting|—|—|—|—|—||
|||Parameter write|—�|—�|—�|—�|—�||
|||Inverter reset|✔|✔|✔|✔|✔�|—|
_**Tab. 6-62:** Functions in the single operation modes (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 223
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
|**Oper-**<br>**ation**<br>**Loca-**<br>**tion**|**Condition**<br>**(Pr. 551)**|**Command**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**PU Operation**|**External**<br>**Operation**|**External/PU**<br>**Combined**<br>**Operation**<br>**Mode 1**<br>**(Pr. 79 = 3)**|**External/PU**<br>**Combined**<br>**Operation**<br>**Mode 2**<br>**(Pr. 79 = 4)**|**NET Operation**<br>**(When Using**<br>**PU**<br>**Connector)**|**NET Operation**<br>**(FR-E700 SC EC:**<br>**When Commu-**<br>**nication Option**<br>**is used) /**<br>**Ethernet con-**<br>**nector (FR-**<br>**E700 SC ENE)**<br>iO)|
|Control by communication<br>from communication option (FR-E700 SC EC)/<br>Ethernet connector (FR-E700 SC ENE)|—|Run command<br>(start, stop)|—|—|—|—|—|✔|
|||Running frequency<br>setting<br>Pte|—<br>Ptepepe|—<br>pepe|—<br>pepepep|—<br>pep|—<br>pepete|✔<br>ete|
|||Parameter write<br>Pte|—<br>Ptepepe|—<br>pepe|—<br>pepepep|—<br>pep|—<br>pepete|✔<br>ete|
|||Inverter reset<br>Pte|—<br>Pte pepe|—<br>pepe|—<br>pepe pep|—<br>pep|—<br>pepete|✔<br>ete|
|Control circuit<br>external terminals|—|Inverter reset|✔|✔|✔|✔|✔||
|||Run command<br>(start, stop)<br>a|—<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>eee|✔<br>ee<br>eee|—<br>ee<br>eee|—<br>ee<br>eee||
|||Running frequency<br>setting<br>ee|—<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>eee|—<br>ee<br>eee|✔<br>ee<br>eee|—<br>ee<br>eee||
_**Tab. 6-62:** Functions in the single operation modes (2)_
- ✔: enabled
- —: not enabled
: some are enabled
As set in Pr. 338 "Communication operation command source" and Pr. 339 "Communication speed command source".
At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.
Enabled only when stopped by the PU. At a PU stop, "PS" is displayed on the operation panel. As set in Pr. 75 "Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection". (Refer to section 6.17.1.)
Some parameters may be write-disabled according to the Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection" setting and operating status. (Refer to section 6.17.2).
Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. When Pr. 77 = 2, write is enabled. (Refer to Tab. 6-1 for the parameter list.) Parameter clear is disabled.
FR-E700 SC EC: When Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 2 (PU connector valid) or Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 9999 and the communication option is not fitted.
FR-E700 SC ENE: When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = "2" (PU connector valid)
FR-E700 SC EC: When Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 0 (communication option valid) or Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 9999 and the communication option is fitted.
FR-E700 SC ENE: When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (Ethernet connector valid)
6 - 224
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Operation at alarm occurrence**
|**Alarm Definition**|**Condition**<br>**(Pr. 551)**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|**Operation Mode**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**PU Operation**|**External**<br>**Operation**|**External/PU**<br>**Combined**<br>**Operation**<br>**Mode 1**<br>**(Pr. 79 = 3)**|**External/PU**<br>**Combined**<br>**Operation**<br>**Mode 2**<br>**(Pr. 79 = 4)**|**NET Operation**<br>**(When Using**<br>**PU**<br>**Connector)**��|**NET Operation**<br>**(FR-E700 SC EC:**<br>**When Commu-**<br>**nication Option**<br>**is used)/Ether-**<br>**net connector**<br>**(FR-E700 SC**<br>**ENE)**��|
|Inverter fault|—|Stop||||||
|PU disconnection of the<br>PU connector|2<br>(PU<br>connector)<br>9999<br>(automatic<br>recognition)|Stop/continued��||||||
||Other than the<br>above|Stop/continued�||||||
|RS-485 communication<br>error of the PU connector|2<br>(PU<br>connector)|Stop/con-<br>tinued�|Continued||Stop/con-<br>tinued�|—|Continued|
||Other than the<br>above|Continued||||Stop/<br>continued�|Continued|
|Communication error of<br>USB connector|3<br>(USB<br>connector)<br>9999<br>(automatic<br>recognition)|Stop/<br>continued�|Continued||Stop/con-<br>tinued�|Continued||
||Other than the<br>above|Continued||||||
|Communication alarm of<br>communication option<br>(FR-E700 SC EC)|—|Continued||||Stop/<br>continued�|Continued|
|Communication error at<br>Ethernet connector<br>(FR-E700 SC ENE)|—|Continued|||||Stop/<br>continued�|
## _**Tab. 6-63:** Operation at alarm occurrence_
- Can be selected using Pr. 75 "Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection"
- Can be selected using Pr. 122 "PU communication check time interval" or Pr. 548 "USB communication check time interval".
- FR-E700 SC EC: As controlled by the communication option.
- FR-E700 SC ENE: Selectable with Pr. 502 "Stop mode selection at communication error" or Pr. 851 "Ethernet signal loss detection function selection".
- In the PU JOG operation mode, operation is always stopped when the PU is disconnected. Whether fault (E.PUE) occurrence is allowed or not is as set in Pr. 75 "Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection".
- FR-E700 SC EC: When Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = "2" (PU connector valid) or Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = "9999" and the communication option is not fitted.
- FR-E700 SC ENE: When Pr. 550" NET mode operation command source selection" = "2" (PU connector valid)
- FR-E700 SC EC: When Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = "0" (communication option valid) or Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = "9999" and the communication option is fitted.
- FR-E700 SC ENE: When Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = "0" (Ethernet connector valid)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 225
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Selection of control source in network operation mode (Pr. 338, Pr. 339)**
As control sources, there are the operation command source that controls the signals related to the inverter start command and function selection and the speed command source that controls the signals related to frequency setting.
In network operation mode, the commands from the external terminals and communication (PU connector or communication option) are as listed below.
|**Operation**<br>**Location**<br>**Selection**<br>~~ee~~|**Operation**<br>**Location**<br>**Selection**<br>~~ee~~|**Operation**<br>**Location**<br>**Selection**<br>~~ee~~|**Communication Operation Command**<br>**Source (Pr. 338)**|**Communication Operation Command**<br>**Source (Pr. 338)**|**0: NET**|**0: NET**|**0: NET**|**1: External**|**1: External**|**1: External**|**Remarks**<br>~~e~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Communication Speed Command**<br>**Source (Pr. 339)**<br>~~ee~~||**0: NET**<br>~~ee~~|**1:**<br>**External**<br>~~ee~~|**2:**<br>**External**<br>~~ee~~|**0: NET**<br>~~eee~~|**1:**<br>**External**<br>~~e~~|**2:**<br>**External**<br>~~e~~||
|Fixed function<br>(Terminal-<br>equivalent<br>function)<br>~~ee~~|||Running frequency from communication<br>~~ee~~||NET<br>~~ee~~|—<br>~~ee~~|NET<br>~~ee~~|NET<br>~~eee~~|—<br>~~e~~|NET<br>~~e~~|~~e~~|
||||Terminal 2<br>~~ee~~||—<br>~~ee~~|Exter-<br>nal<br>~~ee~~|—<br>~~ee~~|—<br>~~eee~~|Exter-<br>nal<br>~~e~~|—<br>~~e~~|~~e~~|
||||Terminal 4<br>~~ee~~||—<br>~~ee~~|External<br>~~ee~~||—<br>~~eee~~|External<br>~~e~~||~~e~~|
|Selective function<br>~~ee~~|Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 setting<br>~~ee~~|0<br>~~ee~~<br>o|RL<br>~~ee~~<br>o|Low speed operation command/<br>remote setting clear/stop-on<br>contact selection 0<br>~~ee~~<br>o|NET<br>~~ee~~<br>o|External<br>~~ee~~<br>o~~e~~||NET<br>~~eee~~<br>~~e~~|External<br>~~e~~<br>~~e~~||Pr. 59 = 0<br>(multi-speeds)<br>Pr. 59 = 1, 2 (remote)<br>Pr. 270 = 1<br>(stop-on-contact 0)<br>~~e~~<br>~~e~~|
|||1<br>o|RM<br>o|Middle-speed operation<br>command/remote setting<br>deceleration<br>o|NET<br>o|External<br>o~~e~~||NET<br>~~e~~|External<br>~~e~~|||
|||2<br>o|RH<br>o|High speed operation<br>command/remote setting<br>acceleration<br>o|NET<br>o|External<br>o~~e~~||NET<br>~~e~~|External<br>~~e~~|||
|||3|RT|Second function selection/stop-<br>on contact selection 1|NET|||External|||Pr. 270 = 1<br>(stop-on-contact 1)|
|||4<br>~~a~~|AU<br>~~a~~|Terminal 4 input selection<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|Combined<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~||—<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|Combined<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~||~~a~~<br>~~a~~|
|||5<br>a|JOG<br>a|Jog operation selection<br>a|—<br>a|||External<br>a|||a|
|||7<br>~~a~~|OH<br>~~a~~|External thermal relay input<br>~~a~~|External<br>~~a~~||||||~~a~~|
|||8<br>~~a~~|REX<br>~~a~~|Fifteen speed selection<br>~~a~~|NET<br>~~a~~|External<br>~~a~~||NET<br>~~a~~|External<br>~~a~~||Pr. 59 = 0<br>(multi-speeds)<br>~~a~~|
|||10<br>a|X10<br>a|Inverter operation enable signal<br>a<br>~~a~~|External<br>a<br>~~a~~||||||a<br>~~a~~|
|||12<br>a|X12<br>a|PU operation external interlock<br>a|External<br>a||||||a|
|||14<br>a|X14<br>a|PID control valid terminal<br>a<br>a|NET<br>a|External<br>a||NET<br>a|External<br>a||a|
|||15<br>cs|BRI<br>cs|Brake opening completion signal<br>csee|NET<br>ee|||NET<br>ee|||ee|
|||16<br>cs<br>ee|X16<br>cs<br>ee|PU-external operation<br>switchover<br>csee<br>ee|External<br>ee<br>ee||||||ee<br>ee|
|||18<br>ee|X18<br>ee|V/F switching<br>ee|NET<br>ee|||External<br>ee|||ee|
_**Tab. 6-64:** Writing operation and speed commands (1)_
6 - 226
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
|**Operation**<br>**Location**<br>**Selection**|**Operation**<br>**Location**<br>**Selection**|**Operation**<br>**Location**<br>**Selection**|**Communication Operation Command**<br>**Source (Pr. 338)**|**Communication Operation Command**<br>**Source (Pr. 338)**|**0: NET**|**0: NET**|**0: NET**|**1: External**|**1: External**|**1: External**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Communication Speed Command**<br>**Source (Pr. 339)**||**0: NET**|**1:**<br>**External**|**2:**<br>**External**|**0: NET**|**1:**<br>**External**|**2:**<br>**External**||
|Selective function|Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 setting|24|MRS|Output stop|Combined|||External|||Pr. 79�7|
|||||PU operation interlock|External||||||Pr. 79 = 7<br>(When X12 signal is<br>not assigned)|
|||25|STOP|Start self-holding selection|—|||External||||
|||60|STF|Forward rotation command|NET|||External||||
|||61|STR|Reverse rotation command|NET|||External||||
|||62|RES|Reset|External|||||||
|||65|X65|PU-NET operation switchover|External|||||||
|||66|X66|External-NET operation<br>switchover|External|||||||
|||67|X67|Command source switchover|External|||||||
_**Tab. 6-64:** Writing operation and speed commands (2)_
## Explanation of table:
External: Operation is valid only from external terminal signal. NET: Control only from communication is valid. Combined: Operation is valid from either of external terminal and communication. —: Operation is invalid from either of external terminal and communication.
## **NOTES**
The control source of communication is as set in Pr. 550 and Pr. 551.
The Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr. 77 = "2". Note that the setting change is reflected after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, communication operation command source and communication speed command source before the setting change are valid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 227
Selection of operation mode and operation location
Parameter
## **Switching of command source by external terminal (X67)**
In the network operation mode, the command source switching signal (X67) can be used to switch the start command source and speed command source.
Set "67" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign the X67 signal to the control terminal.
When the X67 signal is off, the start command source and speed command source are control terminal.
|**X67 Signal State**|**Operation Command Source**|**Speed Command Source**|
|---|---|---|
|No signal assignment|According to Pr. 338|According to Pr. 339|
|ON|||
|OFF|Operation is valid only from external terminal signal.||
_**Tab. 6-65:** Switching of command source by the signal X67_
## **NOTES**
The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is reflected only during a stop. It is reflected after a stop when the terminal is switched during operation.
When the X67 signal is off, a reset via communication is disabled.
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" may affect the other functions. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 228
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19 Communication operation and setting**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|To start operation via communication|Initial setting of operation via<br>communication|Pr. 342, Pr. 349,<br>Pr. 501, Pr. 502|6.19.2<br>6.19.3|
|Communication operation from<br>PU connector|Initial setting of computer link<br>communication (PU connector)|Pr. 117–Pr. 124|6.19.2|
||Modbus®-RTU communication<br>specification|Pr. 117, Pr. 118,<br>Pr. 120, Pr. 122,<br>Pr. 343, Pr. 502<br>Pr. 549|6.19.5|
|Restrictions on parameter write<br>through communication|Communication E²PROM write selection|Pr. 342|6.19.3|
|Communication using USB<br>(FR Configurator)|USB communication|Pr. 547, Pr. 548|6.19.8|
|To communicate via Ethernet<br>connector|Initial setting of Ethernet communication|Pr. 442–Pr. 445,<br>Pr. 805–Pr. 812,<br>Pr. 830–Pr. 835,<br>Pr. 837–Pr. 852|6.19.6|
||CC-Link IE Field Network Basic|Pr. 541, Pr. 544|6.24|
## **6.19.1 PU connector**
Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc. When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
**==> picture [111 x 102] intentionally omitted <==**
_**Fig. 6-109:** PU connector pin-outs_ 1) to 8) _I001935E_
|**Pin Numbe**|**r**<br>**Name**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|1)|SG|Earth (Ground) (connected to terminal 5)|
|2)|—|Operation panel power supply|
|3)|RDA|Inverter receive+|
|4)|SDB|Inverter send�|
|5)|SDA|Inverter send+|
|6)|RDB|Inverter receive�|
|7)|SG|Earth (Ground) (connected to terminal 5|
|8)|—|Operation panel power supply|
_**Tab. 6-66:** PU connector (terminal description)_
## **NOTES**
Pins No. 2) and 8) provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector. The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 229
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **PU connector communication system configuration and wiring**
- Connecting the PU to the inverter
**==> picture [176 x 118] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>PU<br>connector<br>FR-PU07<br>RJ-45-connector<br>= iD<br>\<br>FR-A5CBL<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-110:** Connecting the PU to the PU connector_
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001829E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Connecting a computer to a single inverter
**==> picture [46 x 11] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-111:<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [405 x 129] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PC Inverter Connecting the RS-485 interface of a PC to the PU<br>connector<br>Station 0<br>PU<br>connector<br>RS-485<br>interface<br>RJ-45-<br>connector<br>Cable as shown<br>in 6-114<br>I001211E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Pins No. 2) and 8) provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
**==> picture [388 x 132] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-112:<br>PC Inverter Connecting the RS-232C interface of a PC to the PU<br>Station 0 connector<br>RS-232C<br>connector PU<br>connector<br>RS-232C<br>cable max. 15 m<br>RS-232C/RS-485<br>converter<br>RJ-45<br>connector<br>SC-FR PC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001212E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 230
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
- Combination of computer and multiple inverters
**==> picture [385 x 487] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PC Station 0 Station 1 Station n<br>PU PU PU<br>connector connector connector<br>RS-485<br>interface<br>Distributor Distributor Distributor<br>Terminating<br>FR-A5CBL FR-A5CBL resistor [�]<br>BUS System Distributor FR-RJ45-HUB10<br>Inverter Inverter<br>7 8<br>RJ-45 RJ-45<br>Inverter 1<br>PU<br>connector Inverter Inverter<br>5 6<br>RJ-45 RJ-45<br>FR-A5CBL1<br>+5 V DC<br>Inverter Inverter<br>3 4<br>RJ-45 RJ-45<br>PC<br>RS-232C<br>connector<br>Inverter Inverter<br>1 2<br>RJ-45 RJ-45<br>RS-232C/RS-485<br>SC-FRPC converter<br>Bus In Bus Out<br>RJ45 RJ45<br>+5 V DC<br>converter<br>power supply<br>FR-RJ45TR<br>I001902E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-113:** Connection of a computer to several inverters_
- The inverters may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders communication, provide a terminating resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use a distributor since a terminating resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the terminating resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Terminating resistor: 100 � )
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 231
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Connection with RS-485 computer**
- Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
**==> picture [393 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>Cable connection and signal direction<br>Computer side terminals PU connector<br>PO Receive data | SDA<br>Receive data SDB<br>Send dataSend data ee RDA<br>0.2 mm² or more<br>Signal ground SG<br>I001938E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-114:** Connection to an inverter_
- Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
**==> picture [389 x 151] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PC<br>ReceiveSend <f 8 es oe Termin g<br>PS resistor<br>aortoc aortionoec ortod<br>2229 2235 PEG<br>a fan C<br>SG O Tate<br>re Station 0 Station 1 a Station n<br>I001939E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-115:** Connection to several inverter_
Make connection in accordance with the instruction manual of the computer to be used with. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they vary with the model.
The inverters may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders communication, provide a terminating resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use a distributor since a terminating resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the terminating resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Terminating resistor: 100 Q )
**NOTE** Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the FR-A5CBL cable. (Refer to page 6-229.)
6 - 232
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Two-wire type connection**
If the computer is 2-wire type, a connection from the inverter can be changed to 2-wire type by passing wires across reception terminals and transmission terminals of the PU connector pin.
**==> picture [315 x 89] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PC Inverter Fig. 6-116:<br>Two-wire type connection<br>Transmission<br>enable<br>Reception Pass a<br>enable wire<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001833E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**NOTES** A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.
The passed wiring length should be as short as possible.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 233
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19.2 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication (Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549)**
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer. Use PU connector of the inverter for communication.
- You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using Mitsubishi inverter protocol or Modbus®-RTU protocol.
- To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, initialization of the communication specifications must be made to the inverter. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error.
## **PU connector communication related parameter**
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**117**|PU communication station<br>number|0|0–31<br>(0–247)|Specify the inverter station number.<br>Set the inverter station numbers when two or<br>more inverters are connected to one personal<br>computer.||
|**118**|PU communication speed|192|48/96/<br>192/384|Set the communication speed.<br>The setting value × 100 equals the<br>communication speed.<br>For example, the communication speed is<br>19200bps when the setting value is "192".<br>a||
|**119**|PU communication stop bit<br>length|1|es|Stop bit length<br>es<br>a|Data length<br>es|
||||0<br>es<br>o|1 bit<br>es<br>a<br>o~~e~~|8 bits<br>es<br>~~e~~|
||||1<br>o<br>es|2 bits<br>o~~e~~<br>es||
||||10<br>f|1 bits<br>f~~r~~|7bits<br>~~r~~|
||||11<br>f<br>es|2 bits<br>f~~r~~<br>es||
|**120**|PU communication parity check<br>~~—~~———E|2<br>———E|0<br>a|Without parity check||
||||1<br>a|With odd parity check||
||||2<br>———E|With even parity check<br>———E||
|**123**|PU communication waiting time<br>setting<br>~~—~~———E|9999<br>———E|0–150 ms<br>a<br>———E|Set the waiting time between data<br>transmission to the inverter and response.<br>———E||
||||9999<br>———E|Set with communication data.<br>———E||
|**124**|PU communication<br>CR/LF presence/absence<br>selection<br>~~—~~———E<br>~~—~~———eEE|1<br>———E<br>———eEE|0<br>———E<br>a|Without CR/LF<br>———E||
||||1<br>a|With CR||
||||2<br>———eEE|With CR/LF<br>———eEE||
|**549**|Protocol selection<br>~~—~~———eEE|0<br>———eEE|0<br>a<br>———eEE|Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation)<br>protocol<br>———eEE||
||||1<br>———eEE|Modbus®-RTU protocol<br>———eEE||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- When "1" (Modbus®-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549, the setting range within parenthesis is applied.
**NOTE** Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After you have changed the communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
6 - 234
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, PR. 349, Pr. 501, Pr. 502)**
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**121**|Number of PU<br>communication<br>retries|1|0–10|Number of retries at data receive error occurrence<br>If the number of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the<br>inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).<br>Valid only Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol||7<br>8<br>79<br>190–192<br>340<br>Acceleration time<br>Deceleration time<br>Operation mode<br>selection<br>Output terminal<br>function selection<br>Communication startup<br>mode selection|6.7.1<br>6.7.1<br>6.18.1<br>6.10.5<br>6.18.2|
||||9999|If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to trip.||||
|**122**|PU communication<br>check time interval|0|0|RS-485 communication can be made. Note that a communication fault<br>(E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the operation mode<br>with command source.||||
||||0.1<br>–<br>999.8 s|Communication check (signal loss detection) time interval<br>If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time,<br>the inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).||||
||||9999|No communication check (signal loss detection)||||
|**349**|Communication<br>reset selection�|0|0|Enables the error reset function in any operation mode.||||
||||1|Enables the error reset function only in the Network operation mode.||||
|**501**|Communication<br>error occurrence<br>count display�|0|0|Displays the communication error occurrence count. Writing "0" in this<br>parameter clears the cumulative count.||||
|**502**|Stop mode<br>selection at<br>communication<br>error|0|0–3|Selects the inverter operation after occurrence of a communication fault.||||
The above parameters can be set for the FR-E700 SC EC when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0. However, it can be set any time when the communication option is connected. (Refer to section 6.17.4.)
> � This setting is only available for the FR-E700 SC ENE.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 235
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Retry count setting (Pr. 121)**
Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to page 6-252 for data receive error for retry.)
When data receive errors occur consecutively and exceed the permissible number of retries set, an inverter trips (E.PUE) and a motor stops (as set in Pr. 502).
When "9999" is set, an inverter fault is not provided even if data receive error occurs but an alarm signal (LF) is output.
For the terminal used for the LF signal output, assign the function by setting "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
**Example** PU connector communication at different settings of parameter 121
**==> picture [377 x 239] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = 1 (initial value)<br>Computer Fault E.PUE<br>Data flow<br>Wrong Wrong<br>Inverter J<br>Inverter<br>Data flow<br>Computer<br>Reception error Reception error<br>PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = 9999<br>Computer<br>Data flow Wrong Wrong Normal<br>Inverter<br>Inverter<br>Data flow<br>Computer<br>Reception error Reception error<br>OFF ON OFF ON OFF<br>LF<br>I001354E<br>ENQ ENQ<br>ACK NAK NAK<br>ENQ ENQ ENQ<br>ACK NAK NAK ACK<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-117:** Data transmission error_
**==> picture [26 x 8] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
NOTE<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Pr. 121 is valid only when Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol is selected. Pr. 121 is not valid when Modbus®-RTU communication protocol is selected.
6 - 236
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Signal loss detection (Pr. 122)**
If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and master as a result of a signal loss detection, a communication fault (E.PUE) occurs and the inverter trips (as set in Pr. 502).
When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
When the setting value is "0" (initial value), RS-485 communication can be made. However, a communication fault (E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the operation mode (network operation mode in the initial setting) with the control.
A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1 s to 999.8 s". To make a signal loss detection, it is necessary to send data (refer to Mitsubishi inverter protocol control code (page 6-250), Modbus®-RTU communication protocol (page 6-267)) from the computer within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master).
Communication check is made from the first communication in the operation mode with control source valid (network operation mode in the initial setting).
## **Example** �
PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = 0.1–999.8s
**==> picture [379 x 139] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation mode External PU<br>Computer<br>� Data flow<br>Inverter<br>Inverter<br>� Data flow<br>Computer<br>Alarm E.PUE<br>Check start<br>Pr. 122<br>Communication<br>check counter<br>Time<br>I001220E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-118:** Signal loss detection_
�
**NOTES** Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 237
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Stop operation selection at occurrence of communication fault (Pr. 502)**
## ● For FR-E700 SC EC
Stop operation when retry count excess (Mitsubishi inverter protocol only) or signal loss detection error occurs can be selected.
|**Pr. 502**|**Operation**|**Indication**|**Fault Output**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0 (initial value)|Coasts to stop.|E. PUE lit|Provided|
|1|Decelerates to stop|E. PUE lit after stop|Provided after stop|
|2|||Not provided|
|3|Same as the setting "0"|||
_**Tab. 6-67:** Operation at fault occurrence_
|**Pr. 502**|**Operation**|**Indication**|**Fault Output**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0 (initial value)|Kept stopped|E.PUE|Kept provided|
|1||||
|2|Automatic restart functions|Normal display|Not provided|
|3|Same as the setting "0"|||
_**Tab. 6-68:** Operation at fault removal_
## _**Fig. 6-119:**_
**==> picture [409 x 133] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fault Fault<br>occurrence removal<br>Communication Operation when Pr. 502 setting is "0 (initial value) or<br>fault OFF ON OFF 3"<br>Motor<br>coasting<br>Time<br>Fault display(E.PUE) Display<br>Fault output OFF ON<br>(ALM)<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001834E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [407 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fault Fault Fig. 6-120:<br>occurrence removal<br>Communication Operation when Pr. 502 setting is "1"<br>fault OFF ON OFF<br>Decelerates to<br>stop<br>Time<br>Fault display<br>(E.PUE) Display<br>Fault output OFF ON<br>(ALM)<br>I001835E<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 238
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **NOTES**
**==> picture [355 x 151] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fault Fault Fig. 6-121:<br>occurrence removal<br>Communication Operation when Pr. 502 setting is "2"<br>fault OFF ON OFF<br>Decelerates to<br>stop<br>Time<br>Fault display<br>(E.PUE) Display<br>Fault output OFF<br>(ALM)<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
The fault output indicates fault output signal (ALM signal) or alarm bit output.
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001836E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When the setting was made to provide a fault output, the fault description is stored into the faults history. (The fault description is written to the faults history when a fault output is provided.) When no fault output is provided, the fault definition overwrites the fault indication of the faults history temporarily, but is not stored. After the fault is removed, the fault indication returns to the ordinary monitor, and the faults history returns to the preceding fault indication.
When the Pr. 502 setting is "1" or "2", the deceleration time is the ordinary deceleration time setting (e.g. Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45). In addition, acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7, Pr. 44).
When "2" is set in Pr. 502, run command/speed command at restarting follows the command before an fault occurrence.
When "2" is set in Pr. 502 at occurrence of a communication error and the error is removed during deceleration, the inverter accelerates again at that point.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 239
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● For FR-E700 SC ENE
- The inverter operation after occurrence of a fault in the Ethernet communication line or an Ethernet board fault can be selected.
- The operation at a communication error can be selected with Pr. 502 when Pr. 851 "Ethernet signal loss detection function selection" = "3 (initial value)" or Pr. 852 "Ethernet communication check time interval" "9999" during Ethernet communication. x
- When an Ethernet communication error is detected while Pr. 851 "Ethernet signal loss detection function selection" = "2 or 3 (initial value)", the alarm (LF) signal is output via an output terminal of the inverter. For the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 ("Output terminal function selection") to assign the function to the output terminal.
|**Error definition**|**Pr. 502**|**Operation**|**Indication**|**Fault Output**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Ethernet<br>communication<br>line|0 (initial value)|Coasts to stop|E.OP1 lit|Provided|
||1|Decelerates to stop|E.OP1 lit after stop|Provided after stop|
||2|||Not provided|
||3|Continued|Normal indication||
|Ethernet board|0 (initial value), 3|Coasts to stop|E. 1 lit|Provided|
||1, 2|Decelerates to stop|E. 1 lit after stop|Provided after stop|
_**Tab. 6-69:** Operation at fault occurrence_
|**Error definition**|**Pr. 502**|**Operation**|**Indication**|**Fault Output**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Ethernet<br>communication<br>line|0 (initial value)|Kept stopped|E.OP1 lit continued|Kept provided|
||1||||
||2|Automatic restart<br>functions|Normal display|Not provided|
||3|Continued|||
|Ethernet board|0 (initial value), 3|Kept stopped|E. 1 lit continued|Kept provided|
||1, 2||||
_**Tab. 6-70:** Operation at fault removal_
6 - 240
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
**==> picture [438 x 353] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 502 = 0 (initial value) Pr. 502 = 1<br>Fault detected Fault cleared Fault detected Fault cleared<br>Communication Communication<br>fault OFF ON OFF fault OFF ON OFF<br>Motor coasting<br>Motor coasting<br>Time Time<br>Fault indication Fault indication<br>(E.OP1) Displayed (E.OP1) Displayed<br>Fault signal(ALM) OFF ON Fault signal(ALM) OFF ON<br>Alarm signal OFF ON OFF Alarm signal OFF ON OFF<br>(LF) (LF)<br>Pr. 502 = 2 Fault detected Fault cleared Pr. 502 = 3 Fault detected Fault cleared<br>Communication Communication<br>fault OFF ON OFF fault OFF ON OFF<br>Motor<br>decelerates<br>to stop<br>Time Time<br>Fault indication(E.OP1) Displayed Fault indication Not displayed<br>Fault signal(ALM) OFF Fault signal(ALM) OFF<br>Alarm signal(LF) OFF ON OFF Alarm signal(LF) OFF ON OFF<br>I004010E<br>Output frequency Output frequency<br>Output frequency Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-122:** Operations when a communication line fault occurs_
## **NOTES**
When the Pr. 851 setting is changed to a value other than "3 (initial value)" after the operation defined by the Pr. 502 settingstarts, the operation will be changed according to the Pr. 851 setting.
The LF signal is output when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 241
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
**==> picture [464 x 190] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 502 = 0 (initial value) or 3 Pr. 502 = 1 or 2<br>Fault detected Fault cleared Fault detected Fault cleared<br>y y<br>Fault OFF ON OFF Fault OFF ON OFF<br>Motor coasting<br>Motor decelerates to stop<br>Pe FX<br>Time Time<br>Fault indication Fault indication<br>(E. 1) Displayed (E. 1) Displayed<br>Fault signal Fault signal<br>(ALM) OFF ON (ALM) OFF ON<br>Alarm signal(LF) es OFF Alarm signal(LF) e OFF e<br>I004011E<br>Output frequency Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-123:** Operations when an Ethernet board fault occurs_
**NOTES** Ethernet communication fault "E.OP1 (fault data: HA1)" appears at error occurrences on the Ethernet communication line. Ethernet board fault "E.1 (fault data: HF1)" appears at error occurrences in the communication circuit inside the Ethernet board.
Fault output indicates the fault output signal (ALM signal) and fault bit output.
When the fault output setting is active, fault records are stored in the faults history. (A fault record is written to the faults history at fault output.) When the fault output setting is not active, fault record is overwritten to the faults history temporarily but not stored. After the error is removed, the fault indication is reset, changing the display back to normal, and the last fault is displayed in the faults history.
The LF signal turns OFF when the fault is removed.
When the Pr. 502 setting is "1" or "2", the deceleration time is the normal deceleration time setting (e.g. Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
The acceleration time at a restart is the normal acceleration time setting (e.g. Pr. 7, Pr. 44).
When the Pr. 502 setting is "2", the operation/speed command at a restart is the one given before the error occurrence.
When a communication line error occurs at the Pr. 502 setting of "2", removing the error during deceleration causes acceleration to restart at that point. (Acceleration does not restart at an Ethernet communication line error of the inverter.)
## **E**
## **CAUTION**
_**When a communication line error occurs while Pr. 502 = "3", the inverter continues operation. When setting "3" in Pr. 502, provide a safety stop countermeasure other than via communication. For example, input a signal (RES, MRS) through an external terminal or press the PU stop on the operation panel.**_
6 - 242
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Displaying and clearing the communication error count (Pr.501) (FR-E700 SC ENE)**
- The cumulative count of communication error occurrences can be displayed. Write "0" to clear this cumulative count.
- At the point of communication line error occurrence, Pr. 501 Communication error occurrence count display is incremented by 1.
- The cumulative count of communication error occurrences is counted from 0 to 65535. When the count exceeds 65535, the displayed value is cleared and the counting starts over from 0 again.
**==> picture [384 x 54] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Count timing depending on Normal Error Normal Error<br>communication line status<br>Incremented by 1 Incremented by 1<br>I002853E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-124:** Operation of the communication error occurrence counter_
## **NOTE**
Communication error count is temporarily stored in the RAM. The error count is stored in E²PROM only once per hour. If power reset or inverter reset is performed, Pr. 501 setting will be the one that is last stored to E²PROM depending on the reset timing.
## **Error reset operation selection at inverter fault (Pr. 349) (only FR-E700 SC ENE)**
In the External operation mode or the PU operation mode, use this parameter to disable an error reset command sent through the Ethernet network.
|**Pr. 349**|**Description**|
|---|---|
|0 (initial value)|Error reset is enabled independently of operation mode|
|1|Error reset is enabled only in the network operation mode|
_**Tab. 6-71:** Setting of Pr. 349_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 243
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Operation mode switching and communication startup mode (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) (FR-E700 SC ENE)**
Check the following before switching the operation mode.
- The inverter is at a stop.
- Both the STF and STR signals are off.
- The Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is correct. (Check the setting on the operation panel of the inverter (refer to page 6-206).)
- The operation mode at power ON and at restoration from instantaneous power failure can be selected. Set a value other than "0" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection to select the Network operation mode (refer to page 6-218).
- After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter write can be commanded via the network.
## **NOTES**
The changed value in Pr. 340 is applied after the next power-ON or inverter reset.
The Pr. 340 setting can be changed on the operation panel in any operation mode.
When setting a value other than "0" in Pr. 340, make sure that the communication settings of the inverter are correct.
6 - 244
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19.3 Communication E²PROM write selection (Pr. 342)**
When parameter write is performed from the inverter PU connector, USB communication, communication option or Ethernet communication (only FR-E700 SC ENE), parameters storage device can be changed from E²PROM + RAM to RAM only. Set when a frequent parameter change is necessary. When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write them to the RAM only. The life of the E²PROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial value)" (E²PROM write).
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**342**|Communication E²PROM write<br>selection|0|0|Parameter values written by communication are<br>written to the E²PROM and RAM.||—||
||||1|Parameter values written by communication are<br>written to the RAM.||||
The above parameter can be set with the FR-E700 SC EC when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0. However, the parameter can be set whenever the communication option is connected. (Refer to section 6.17.4).
- **NOTES** When "1" (write to RAM only) is set in Pr. 342, powering off the inverter will erase the changed parameter values. Therefore, the parameter values available when power is switched on again are the values stored in E²PROM previously.
The parameter setting written to RAM cannot be checked on the operation panel. (The values displayed on the operation panel are the ones stored in E²PROM.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 245
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19.4 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)**
You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. from the PU connector of the inverter using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication).
## **Communication specifications**
|**Item**|**Item**|**Description**|**Related**<br>**Parameters**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Communication protocol||Mitsubishi protocol (computer link)|Pr. 549|
|Conforming standard||EIA-485 (RS-485)|—|
|Number of inverters connected||1 : N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations|Pr. 117|
|Communication<br>speed|PU connector|Selected from among 4800/9600/19200 and 38400 bps|Pr. 118|
|Control protocol||Asynchronous system|—|
|Communication method||Half-duplex system|—|
|Communication<br>specifications|Character<br>system|ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected)|Pr. 119|
||Start bit|1 bit|—|
||Stop bit length|1 bit or 2 bits can be selected|Pr. 119|
||Parity check|Check (even, odd) or no check can be selected|Pr. 120|
||Error check|Sum code check|—|
||Terminator|CR/LF (presence or absence can be selected)|Pr. 124|
|Waiting time setting||Selectable between presence and absence|Pr. 123|
_**Tab. 6-72:** Communication specifications_
6 - 246
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Communication procedure**
Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in the following procedure:
**==> picture [364 x 105] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Computer When data is read<br>Data flow<br>Inverter<br>!<br>InverterData flow 1 oO<br>Computer<br>When data is written<br>I000030C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-125:** Schematic diagram of data exchange_
If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data " to the computer again. The inverter comes to an alarm stop if the number of consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
## **Communication operation presence/absence and data format types**
Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code). Data is automatically converted to ASCII format when it is exchanged between an external computer and the frequency inverter. In the following table the different data formats are referred to with the letters A–F. The corresponding formats are explained in the next section.
|**No.**<br>a|**Operation**<br>a|**Operation**<br>a|**Run**<br>**Command**|**Running**<br>**Frequency**|**Multi**<br>**Command**|**Parameter**<br>**Write**|**Inverter**<br>**Reset**|**Monitor**|**Parame-**<br>**ter Read**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|a|Communication request is sent to the<br>inverter in accordance with the user pro-<br>gram in the computer.<br>a||A1|A<br>A2|A3|A<br>A2|A|B|B|
|Ea|The inverter will not send data unless<br>requested.<br>Ea||Present<br>|Present<br>|Present<br>|Present<br>|Absent<br>|Present<br>|Present<br>|
||Reply data from<br>the inverter<br>(Data<br>) is<br>checked for error)<br>|No error<br>(Request accepted)<br>ee|C<br>ee|C<br>ee|C1<br>ee|C<br>ee|C<br>ee|E<br>E<br>E2<br>ee|E<br>E2<br>ee|
|||With error<br>(Request rejected)<br>a|D<br>a|D<br>a|D|D|D|D|D|
|a|Computer processing delay time<br>a||10ms or more|||||||
|,|Answer from<br>computer in<br>response to reply<br>data<br>(Data<br>) is<br>checked for error)<br>,|No error<br>(No inverter processing)<br>,|Absent<br>ae|Absent<br>ae|Absent<br>(C)<br>ae|Absent<br>ae|Absent<br>ae|Absent<br>(C)<br>ae|Absent<br>(C)<br>ae|
|||With error<br>(Inverter reoutputs<br>)<br>,|Absent|Absent|F|Absent|Absent|F|F|
_**Tab. 6-73:** Communication and data format_ O) In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 6-252.)
The inverter response to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 6-256, Tab. 6-78.)
When any of "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code HFF sets data format to A2 or E2. In addition, data format is always A2 and E2 for read or write of Pr. 37.
At mode error and data range error, C1 data contains an error code (refer to page 6-264). Except for those errors, the error is returned with data format D.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 247
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Data writing format
Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
|**Format**<br>**Number of Characters**<br>**1**<br>**2**<br>**3**<br>**4**<br>**5**<br>**6**<br>**7**<br>**8**<br>**9**<br>**10**<br>**11**<br>**12**<br>**13**<br>**14**<br>**15**<br>**16**<br>**17**<br>**18**<br>**19**<br>~~Ce~~<br>~~eee~~|
|---|
|A<br>ENQ<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>Instruction<br>code<br>Waiting<br>time<br>Data<br>Sum check<br>A1<br>ENQ<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>Instruction<br>code<br>Waiting<br>time<br>Data<br>Sum check<br>A2<br>ENQ<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>Instruction<br>code<br>Waiting<br>time<br>Data<br>Sum check<br>A3<br>ENQ<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>Instruction<br>code<br>Waiting<br>time<br>Send<br>data<br>type<br>Receive<br>data<br>type<br>Data 1<br>Data 2<br>Sum check<br>a<br>| [4 ef<br>To<br>|<br>Ce<br>a ee<br>piv<br>|<br>Jol]~~|e~~|
|Reply data from the inverter to the computer<br>(No data error detected)<br>C3]|
|**Format**<br>**Number of Characters**<br>**1**<br>**2**<br>**3**<br>**4**<br>**5**<br>**6**<br>**7**<br>**8**<br>**9**<br>**10**<br>**11**<br>**12**<br>**13**<br>**14**<br>**15**<br>**16**<br>**17**<br>**18**<br>**19**<br>C<br>ACK<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>C1<br>STX<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>Send<br>data<br>type<br>Receive<br>data<br>type<br>Error<br>code<br>1<br>Error<br>code<br>2<br>Data 1<br>Data 2<br>ETX<br>Sum check<br>~~Ce~~<br>~~Sec~~<br>eeecceeceecsee<br>| |ele<br>if et FT] tT UT<br>~~fe~~|
|Reply data from the inverter to the computer<br>(Data error detected)<br>C3]|
|**Format**<br>**Number of Characters**<br>**1**<br>**2**<br>**3**<br>**4**<br>**5**<br>P|
|D<br>NAK<br>Inverter station<br>number<br>Error<br>code<br>|1%<br>||e|
Indicate a control code (Refer to Tab. 6-74.)
Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal. When Pr. 123, Pr. 337 "Waiting time setting" 9999, create the communication request data # without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.) CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 "PU communication CR/LF selection".
6 - 248
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Data reading format
Communication request data from the computer to the inverter �
|**Format**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**1**|**2**|**3**|**4**|**5**|**6**|**7**|**8**|**9**|
|B|ENQ�|Inverter station<br>number�||Instruction<br>code||Waiting<br>time�|Sum check||�|
Reply data from the inverter to the computer � (No data error detected)
|**Format**||||**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**1**|**2**|**3**|**4**|**5**|**6**|**7**|**8**|**9**|**10**|**11**|**12**|**13**|
|E|STX�|Inverter station<br>number�||Read data||||ETX�|Sum check||�|||
|E1|STX�|Inverter station<br>number�||Read data||ETX�|Sum check||d|||||
|E2|STX�|Inverter station<br>number�||Read data||||||ETX�|Sum check||�|
|||||||||||||||
|**Format**||||**Number of Characters**||||||||||
||**1**|**2**|**3**|**4–23**||||||**24**|**25**|**26**|**27**|
|E3|STX�|Inverter station<br>number�||Read data (Inverter type information)||||||ETX�|Sum check||�|
Reply data from the inverter to the computer � (Data error detected)
|**Format**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**1**|**2**|**3**|**4**|**5**|
|D|NAK�|Inverter station<br>number�||Error<br>code|�|
Send data from the computer to the inverter �
|**Format**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|**Number of Characters**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**1**|**2**|**3**|**4**|
|C<br>(No data error detected)|ACK�|Inverter station<br>number�||�|
|F<br>(Data error detected)|NAK�|Inverter station<br>number�||�|
- Indicate a control code (Refer to Tab. 6-74.)
- Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
- When Pr. 123, Pr. 337 "Waiting time setting" � 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
- CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 "PU communication CR/LF selection".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 249
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Data definitions**
- Control codes
|**Signal Name**|**ASCII Code**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|STX|H02|Start Of Text (start of data)|
|ETX|H03|End Of Text (end of data)|
|ENQ|H05|Enquiry (communication request)|
|ACK|H06|Acknowledge (no data error detected)|
|LF|H0A|Line Feed|
|CR|H0D|Carriage Return|
|NAK|H15|Negative Acknowledge (data error detected)|
## _**Tab. 6-74:** Control codes_
- Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer. The inverter station numbers are specified between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
- Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to the appendix.)
- Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to the appendix.)
- Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150 ms in 10 ms increments (e.g. 1 = 10 ms, 2 = 20 ms).
**==> picture [372 x 106] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter data processing time<br>Computer = Waiting time + Data check time<br>(setting 10 ms) (About 10 to 30 ms which<br>Data flow<br>depends on the instruction<br>codes)<br>Inverter<br>Inverter<br>Data flow<br>Computer<br>I000038C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-126:** Specifying the waiting time_
- **NOTES** When Pr. 123 "Waiting time setting" 9999, create the communication request data without "wait| ing time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)[’]
| The data check time changes depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 6-253).
6 - 250
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from the checked ASCII data.
**==> picture [353 x 271] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Example 1 Binary<br>Station Instruction fe) Sum code<br>ENQ code Data check<br>number<br>Computer code<br> Inverter<br>E1|1/1/0 7 A D|F 4 J<br>ASCII Code<br>H H H H HH HHH<br>304 314+ 45+ 314+314+ 304+ 37+ 41+ 44<br>H<br>= F4<br>Example 2 Binary<br>Sum code<br>Station<br>STX Data read ETX check<br>number<br>Inverter code<br> Computer<br>ASCII-Code<br>|Ho2| H30 H31| H31_H37 H37 H30|Ho3| H33_H30<br>H H H H HH 4<br>30+ 31431437437+30<br>H<br>= 30<br>I000039C<br>Waiting time<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-127:** Sum check code (examples)_
When Pr. 123 "Waiting time setting" "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 251
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK code.
|**Error**<br>**Code**|**Error Item**|**Error Definition**|**Inverter**<br>**Operation**|
|---|---|---|---|
|H0|Computer NAK error|The number of errors consecutively detected in communi-<br>cation request data from the computer is greater than<br>allowed number of retries.|Brought to an alarm<br>stop if error occurs<br>continuously more<br>than the allowable<br>number of retries.<br>(E.PUE)|
|H1<br>a|Parity error<br>ee|The parity check result does not match the specified parity.<br>ee||
|H2<br>a|Sum check error<br>ee|The sum check code in the computer does not match that<br>of the data received by the inverter.<br>ee||
|H3<br>a|Protocol error<br>ee|The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mis-<br>take. Alternatively, data receive is not completed within the<br>predetermined time. CR or LF is not as set in the parameter.<br>ee||
|H4|Framing error|The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.||
|H5<br>ee|Overrun error<br>ee|New data has been sent by the computer before the<br>inverter completes receiving the preceding data.<br>ee||
|H6<br>ee|—<br>ee|—<br>ee|—|
|H7|Character error|The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F,<br>control code).|Does not accept<br>received data but is<br>not brought to<br>alarm stop.|
|H8<br>a|—<br>a|—<br>a|—<br>a|
|H9<br>a|—<br>a|—<br>a|—<br>a|
|HA|Mode error|Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer<br>link operation mode, when operation command source is<br>not selected or during inverter operation.|Does not accept<br>received data but is<br>not brought to<br>alarm stop.<br>~~a~~|
|HB|Instruction code error|The specified command does not exist.||
|HC<br>~~a~~|Data range error<br>~~a~~|Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, fre-<br>quency setting, etc.<br>~~a~~||
|HD<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~|
|HE<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~<br>a|—<br>~~a~~<br>a|—<br>~~a~~|
|HF<br>a|—<br>a|—|—|
_**Tab. 6-75:** Error codes_
6 - 252
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Response time
**==> picture [376 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Data sending time (Refer to the following formula)<br>Inverter data processing time = Waiting time + Data check time<br>(setting � 10ms) (Depends on the instruction code<br>Computer (refer to Tab. 6-77))<br>� Data flow<br>Inverter<br>Time<br>Inverter 10ms or more necessary<br>� Data flow<br>Data sending time (Refer to the following formula)<br>Computer<br>I001327E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-128:** Response time_
Formula for data sending time:
|Data<br>sending time [s]<br>=|1<br>´<br>Number of data<br>characters<br>(refer to page 6-247)<br>´<br>Communications specifications<br>(total number of bits)�<br>Communication<br>speed<br>(Baudrate)|
|---|---|
- The communication specifications are listed in the table below:
|**Name**||**Number of Bits**|
|---|---|---|
|Stop bit length||1 bit|
|||2 bits|
|Data length||7 bit|
|||8 bits|
|Parity check|Yes|1 bit|
||No|0 bits|
_**Tab. 6-76:** Communication specifications_
## **NOTES**
- In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.
Minimum number of total bits: 9 bits. Maximum number of total bits: 12 bits.
The data check time related to different functions is shown in the table below:
|**Function**|**Data Check Time**|
|---|---|
|Various monitors, run command, frequency setting (RAM)|< 12 ms|
|Parameter read/write, frequency setting (E²PROM)|< 30 ms|
|Parameter clear/all clear|< 5 s|
|Reset command|— (no answer)|
_**Tab. 6-77:** Data check time_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 253
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Instructions for the program**
When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always insert a retry program for data error.
All data communication, e.g. run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
## Program example
To change the operation mode to computer link operation
## **Programming example of Microsoft® Visual C++® (Ver.6.0)**
#include <stdio.h> #include <windows.h> void main(void){ HANDLE hCom; //Communication handle DCB hDcb; //Structure for communication setting COMMTIMEOUTS hTim; //Structure for time out setting char szTx[0x10]; //Send buffer char szRx[0x10]; //Receive buffer char szCommand[0x10]; //Command int nTx,nRx; //For buffer size storing int nSum; //For sum code calculation BOOL bRet; int nRet; int i; //**** Opens COM1 Port**** hCom = CreateFile ("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL); if (hCom != NULL) { //**** Makes a communication setting of COM1 port**** GetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); //Retrieves current communication information hDcb.DCBlength = sizeof(DCB); //Structure size setting hDcb.BaudRate = 19200; //Communication speed=19200bps hDcb.ByteSize = 8; //Data length=8bits hDcb.Parity = 2; //Even parity hDcb.StopBits = 2; //Stop bit=2bits bRet = SetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); //Sets the changed communication data if (bRet == TRUE) { //**** Makes a time out setting of COM1 port**** Get CommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim); /Obtains the current time out value hTim.WriteTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000; //Write time out 1 s hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000; //Read time out 1 s SetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim); //Changed time out value setting //**** Sets the command to switch the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to the network operation mode **** sprintf(szCommand,"01FB10000"); //Send data (NET operation write) nTx = strlen(szCommand); //Send data size //**** Generates sum code**** nSum = 0; //Initialization of sum data for (i = 0;i < nTx;i++) { nSum += szCommand[i]; //Calculates sum code nSum &= (0xff); //Masks data } //**** Generates send data**** memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx)); //Initialization of send buffer memset(szRx,0,sizeof(szRx)); //Initialization of receive buffer sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum); //ENQ code+send data+sum code nTx = 1 + nTx + 2; //Number of ENQ code+number of send data+number of sum code nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL); //**** Sending **** if(nRet != 0) { nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL); //**** Receiving **** if(nRet != 0) { //**** Displays the receive data **** for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) { printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);//Consol output of receive data //Displays ASCII coder in hexadecimal. Displays 30 when "0" } printf("\n\r"); } } } CloseHandle(hCom); //Close communication port } }
_**Fig. 6-129:** Programming example_
6 - 254
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
**==> picture [140 x 263] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Port open<br>Communication setting<br>Time out setting<br>Send data processing<br>� Data setting<br>� Sum code calculation<br>� Data transmission<br>Receive data waiting<br>Receive data<br>processing<br>� Data retrieval<br>� Screen display<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-130:** General flowchart_
## **NOTES**
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to an alarm stop (E.PUE). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching on its RES signal or by switching power off.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This should be fully noted.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 255
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Setting items and set data**
After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data then start communication from the computer to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
|**No.**|**Item**|**Item**|**Read/Write**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Data Description**|**Number**<br>**of Data**<br>**Digits**<br>**(Format)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|1|Operation Mode||Read<br>PL|H7B<br>PL|H0000: Network operation<br>H0001: External operation<br>H0002: PU operation|4<br>(B, E/D)<br>||
||||Write<br>PL<br>PL|HFB<br>PL<br>PL||4<br>(A, C/D)<br>|<br>||
|2|Monitor|Output frequency/<br>speed|Read|H6F|H0000 to HFFFF:<br>Output frequency in 0.01 Hz increments<br>Speed increments 1/0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01<br>to 9998)<br>When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in<br>instruction code HFF, the increments change to<br>0.001 and the data format is E2.<br>When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the monitor value is<br>different depending on whether the inverter is<br>at a stop or running. (Refer to section 6.11.2.)|4<br>6<br>(B, E,<br>E2/D)|
|||Output current|Read|H70|H0000 to HFFFF:<br>Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01 A incre-<br>ments|4<br>(B, E/D)|
|||Output voltage|Read|H71|H0000 to HFFFF:<br>Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1 V<br>increments|4<br>(B, E/D)|
|||Special monitor|Read|H72|H0000 to HFFFF:<br>Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3|4<br>(B, E/D)<br>6<br>(B, E2/D)|
|||Special monitor selec-<br>tion No.|Read<br>PL|H73<br>PL|H01 to H3F:<br>Monitor selection data<br>(Refer to Tab. 6-81 on page 6-260.)|2<br>(B, E1/D)<br>||
||||Write<br>FL|HF3<br>FL||2<br>(A1, C/D)<br>||
|||Fault definition|Read|H74 to H77|H0000 to HFFFF:<br>(Refer to Tab. 6-82 on page 6-261.)<br>Latest alarm<br>Second fault in past<br>Fourth fault in past<br>Sixth fault in past<br>Eighth fault in past<br>Third fault in past<br>Fifth fault in past<br>Seventhfaultin past<br>b15<br>b8 b7<br>bO0|4<br>(B, E/D)|
|3|Run command (extended)<br>a<br>ee||Write<br>ee|HF9<br>ee|You can set the control input commands such<br>as the forward rotation signal (STF) and reverse<br>rotation signal (STR).<br>(Refer to page 6-262 for details.)<br>ee|4<br>(A, C/D)<br>|<br>_|
||Run command<br>ee<br>ee||Write<br>ee<br>eee|HFA<br>ee<br>eee||2<br>(A1, C/D)<br>_<br>||
|4|Inverter status monitor<br>(extended)<br>ee <br>ee||Read<br> ee<br>eee|H79<br>ee<br>eee|You can monitor the states of the output sig-<br>nals such as forward rotation, reverse rotation<br>and inverter running (RUN).<br>(Refer to page 6-262 for details.)<br>ee<br>~~a~~|4<br>(B, E/D)<br>_<br>||
||Inverter status monitor<br>ee <br>~~a~~||Read<br> eee <br>~~a~~|H7A<br> eee<br>~~a~~||2<br>(B, E1/D)<br>|<br>~~a|~~|
_**Tab. 6-78:** Setting of the instruction codes and data (1)_
6 - 256
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
|**No.**|**Item**|**Read/**<br>**write**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Data Description**|**Number**<br>**of Data**<br>**Digits**<br>**(Format)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|5|Set frequency (RAM)|Read|H6D|Read set frequency/speed from RAM or<br>E²PROM.<br>H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01 Hz incre-<br>ments<br>Speed increments 1/0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01<br>to 9998)<br>When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in<br>instruction code HFF, the increments change to<br>0.001 and the data format is E2.|4<br>(B, E/D)<br>6<br>(B, E2/D)|
||Set frequency (E²PROM)||H6E|||
||Set frequency (RAM)|Write|HED|Write set frequency/speed to RAM or E²PROM.<br>H0000 to H9C40 (0 to 400.00 Hz):<br>Frequency increments 0.01 Hz<br>Speed increments 1/0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01<br>to 9998)<br>When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in<br>instruction code HFF, the increments change to<br>0.001 and the data format is A2.<br>To change the set frequency consecutively,<br>write data to the inverter RAM. (instruction<br>code: HED)|4<br>(A, C/D)<br>6<br>(A2, C/D)|
||Set frequency<br>(RAM, E²PROM)||HEE|||
|6|Inverter reset|Write|HFD|H9696: Resets the inverter.<br>As the inverter is reset at start of communica-<br>tion by the computer, the inverter cannot send<br>reply data back to the computer.|4<br>(A, C/D)|
|||||H9966: Resets the inverter.<br>When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to<br>the computer and then the inverter is reset.|4<br>(A, D)|
|7|Alarm definition all clear|Write|HF4|H9696: Alarm history batch clear|4<br>(A, C/D)|
|8|All parameter clear|Write|HFC|All parameters return to the initial values.<br>Whether to clear communication parameters<br>or not can be selected according to data.<br>(✔: Clear, —: Not clear) Refer to Tab. 6-1 for<br>parameter clear, all clear, and communication<br>parameters.<br>When all parameter clear is executed for H9696<br>or H9966, communication-related parameter<br>settings also return to the initial values. When<br>resuming operation, set these parameters<br>again.<br>Executing clear will clear the instruction code<br>HEC, HF3, and HFF settings. In the password<br>locked status only H9966 and H55AA (all<br>parameter clear) are valid.<br>**Clear Type**<br>**Data**<br>**Communication Parameter**<br>Parameter clear<br>H9696<br>✔<br>H5A5A<br>—<br>All parameter<br>clear<br>H9966<br>✔<br>H55AA<br>—|4<br>(A, C/D)|
_**Tab. 6-78:** Setting of the instruction codes and data (2)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 257
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
|**No.**|**Item**|**Item**|**Read/**<br>**write**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Data Description**|**Number**<br>**of Data**<br>**Digits**<br>**(Format)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|9|Parameters||Read|H00 to H63|Refer to the instruction code of the parameter<br>list (appendix) and write and/or read parame-<br>ter values as required.<br>When setting Pr. 100 and later, link parameter<br>extended setting must be set.<br>Data format of Pr. 37 read and write is E2 and<br>A2.|4<br>(B, E/D)<br>6<br>(B, E2/D)|
|10|||Write|H80 to HE3||4<br>(A, C/D)<br>6<br>(A2, C/D)|
|11|Link parameter extended<br>setting<br>|||Read|H7F|Parameter description is changed according to<br>the H00 to H09 setting.<br>For details of the settings, refer to the instruc-<br>tion code of the parameter list (appendix).<br>a|2<br>(B, E1/D)|
||||Write<br>|||HFF<br>|||2<br>(A1, C/D)<br>a|
|12|Second parameter<br>changing<br>(instruction code<br>HFF = 1, 9)<br>|||Read<br>|||H6C<br>||Setting calibration parameter<br>H00: Frequency<br>H01: Parameter-set analog value<br>H02: Analog value input from terminal<br>Refer to the list of calibration parameters<br>on page 6-259.<br>The gain frequency can also be written<br>using Pr. 125 (instruction code: H99) or<br>Pr. 126 (instruction code: H9A).<br>a<br>2)<br>0)<br>@|2<br>(B, E1/D)<br>a|
||||Write<br>| ||HEC<br>|||2<br>(A1, C/D)<br>a|
|13|Multi command||Write/<br>Read|HF0|Available for writing 2 commands, and moni-<br>toring 2 items for reading data|10<br>(A3, C1/D)|
|14|Inverter type monitor|Inverter type|Read|H7C|Reading inverter type in ASCII code. "H20"<br>(blank code) is set for blank area<br>Example of FR-E740SC<br>H46, H52, H2D, H45, H37, H34, H30, H20...H20|20<br>(B, E3/D)|
|||Capacity|Write|H7D|Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.<br>Data is read in increments of 0.1 kW, and<br>rounds down to 0.01 kW increments.<br>"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area.<br>Examples:<br>0.4K . . . . . "-----4"<br>(H20, H20, H20, H20, H20,<br>H34)<br>0.75K . . . . "-----7"<br>(H20, H20, H20, H20, H20,<br>H37)|6<br>(B, E2/D)|
_**Tab. 6-78:** Setting of the instruction codes and data (3)_
**NOTES** Refer to page 6-247 for data formats A, A1, A2, A3, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3 and F.
Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all clear is performed.
6 - 258
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Example** �
When reading the C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) settings from the inverter of station No. 0.
||**Computer Send Data**|**Inverter Send Data**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
|�|ENQ 00 FF 0 01 82|ACK 00|Set "H01" to the extended link parameter.|
|�|ENQ 00 EC 0 01 7E|ACK 00|Set "H01" to second parameter changing.|
|�|ENQ 00 5E 0 0F|STX 00 0000 ETX 25|C3 (Pr. 902) is read. 0% is read.|
|�|ENQ 00 60 0 FB|STX 00 0000 ETX 25|C6 (Pr. 904) is read. 0% is read.|
## _**Tab. 6-79:** Example for data transmission_
To read/write C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from step � again.
�
## ● List of calibration parameters
|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Pr.**|**Name**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**|
|C2<br>(902)|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>frequency|5E|DE|1|C5<br>(905)|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>frequency|60|E0|1|
|C3<br>(902)|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias|5E|DE|1|C6<br>(904)|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias|60|E0|1|
|125<br>(903)|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>frequency|5F|DF|1|126<br>(905)|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>frequency|61|E1|1|
|C4<br>(903)|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain|5F|DF|1|C7<br>(905)|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain|61|E1|1|
_**Tab. 6-80:** Calibration parameters_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 259
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Special monitor selection numbers.
Refer to section 6.11.2 for details of the monitor description.
|**Data**<br>~~a~~|**Description**<br>~~a~~|**Unit**<br>~~a~~<br>ee~~ee~~|**Data**<br>~~a~~<br>~~ee~~|**Description**<br>~~a~~<br>~~ee~~|**Unit**<br>~~a~~<br>~~ee~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H01<br>~~ee~~|Output frequency/speed<br>~~ee~~|0.01 Hz<br>0.001<br>~~ee~~<br>ee~~ee~~|H14<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|Cumulative energization time<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|1 h<br>~~ee~~<br>~~ee~~|
|H02<br>~~a~~|Output current<br>~~a~~|0.01 A<br>ee~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|H17<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|Actual operation time<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|1 h<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|
|H03<br>~~a~~|Output voltage<br>~~a~~|0.1 V<br>~~a~~|H18<br>~~a~~|Motor load factor<br>~~a~~|0.1%<br>~~a~~|
|H05<br>pp|Frequency setting/speed setting<br>pp|0.01 Hz<br>0.001<br>pp|H19<br>pp|Cumulative power<br>pp|1 kWh<br>pp|
|H07<br>a|Motor torque<br>a|0.1%<br>a|H34<br>a|PID set point<br>a|0.1%<br>a|
|H08<br>a<br>a|Converter output voltage<br>a<br>a|0.1 V<br>a<br>a|H35<br>a<br>a|PID measured value<br>a<br>a|0.1%<br>a<br>a|
|H09<br>a|Regenerative brake duty<br>a|0.1%<br>a|H36<br>a|PID deviation<br>a|0.1%<br>a<br>ee|
|H0A<br>a|Electronic thermal relay function load<br>factor<br>a<br>ee|0.1%<br>a<br>ee|H3A<br>a<br>ee|Option input terminal status 1<br>a<br>ee|—<br>a<br>ee<br>ee|
|H0B<br>a|Output current peak value<br>a|0.01 A<br>a|H3B<br>a|Option input terminal status 2<br>a|—<br>ee<br>a|
|H0C<br>a|Converter output voltage peak value<br>a|0.1 V<br>a|H3C<br>a|Option output terminal status<br>a|—<br>a|
|H0E<br>a<br>a|Output power<br>a<br>a|0.01 kW<br>a<br>a|H3D<br>a<br>a|Motor thermal load factor<br>a<br>a|0.1%<br>a<br>a|
|H0F<br>a|Input terminal status<br>a|—<br>a|H3E<br>a|Inverter thermal load factor<br>a|0.1%<br>a|
|H10<br>a|Output terminal status<br>a|—<br>a|H3F<br>a|Cumulative power 2<br>a|0.01 kWh<br>a|
_**Tab. 6-81:** Special monitor selection numbers_
When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code HFF, the data format is 6 digits (E2).
|2)||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.<br>2)||||||||
|Output terminal monitor details<br>b15<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>RES<br>—<br>MRS<br>—<br>i<br>®|RH|RM|RL|—|—|STR|b0<br>STF|
|Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>b15<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>ABC<br>FU<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>a<br>®|||||||b0<br>RUN|
|(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)||||||||
|Details of option input terminal monitor 2 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>b15<br>X15<br>X14<br>X13<br>X12<br>X11<br>X10<br>X9<br>X8<br>X7<br>X6<br>X5<br>X4<br>X3<br>X2<br>X1<br>i©|||||||b0<br>X0|
|(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)||||||||
|b15<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>—<br>i|—|—|—|—|—|—|b0<br>DY|
© Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E/ FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E)
(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)
b15 b0 — — — — — — RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0 a
6 - 260
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Fault data
Refer to section 7.1 for details of alarm description.
|**Data**|**Description**|**Data**|**Description**|**Data**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H00|No fault present|H70|E.BE|HC7|E.AIE|
|H10|E.OC1|H80|E.GF|HC8|E.USB|
|H11|E.OC2|H81|E.LF|HC9|E.SAF|
|H12|E.OC3|H90|E.OHT|HD8|E.MB4|
|H20|E.OV1|HA0|E.OPT|HD9|E.MB5|
|H21|E.OV2|HA1|E.OP1|HDA|E.MB6|
|H22|E.OV3|HB0|E.PE|HDB|E.MB7|
|H30|E.THT|HB1|E.PUE|HF1|E.1|
|H31|E.THM|HB2|E.RET|HF5|E.5|
|H40|E.FIN|HB3|E.PE2|HF6|E.6|
|H52|E.ILF|HC0|E.CPU|HF7|E.7|
|H60|E.OLT|HC5|E.IOH|HFD|E.13|
_**Tab. 6-82:** Fault data_
**Example** � Fault description display example (instruction code: H74)
**==> picture [387 x 72] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
For read data = H30A1<br>previous fault..................THT<br>latest fault......................... OP1<br>Previous fault Latest fault<br>(H30) (HA1)<br>I002068E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-131:** Fault example_
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 261
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Run command
|**Item**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Bits**|**Description**|**Example**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Run<br>command|HFA|8|b0:<br>AU (current input<br>selection)<br>b1:<br>Forward rotation start<br>b2:<br>Reverse rotation start<br>b3:<br>RL (low speed)<br>b4:<br>RM (middle speed)<br>b5:<br>RH (high speed)<br>b6:<br>RT (second function<br>selection)<br>b7:<br>MRS (output stop)<br>©)<br>O®<br>O®<br>O®<br>6<br>O®|Example 1: H02 (Forward rotation)<br>Example 2: H00 (Stop)<br>b7<br>bO<br>~~Lo[o[ofofofo]i~~<br>~~fo]~~<br>~~b7~~<br>~~b0~~<br>~~Lofofofofofofojo|~~|
|Run<br>command<br>(extended)|HF9|16|b0:<br>AU (current input<br>selection)<br>b1:<br>Forward rotation start<br>b2:<br>Reverse rotation start<br>b3:<br>RL (low speed)<br>b4:<br>RM (middle speed)<br>b5:<br>RH (high speed)<br>b6:<br>RT (second function<br>selection)<br>b7:<br>MRS (output stop)<br>b8:<br>—<br>b9:<br>—<br>b10: —<br>b11: RES (reset)<br>b12: —<br>b13: —<br>b14: —<br>b15: —<br>©)<br>O®<br>O®<br>O®<br>®<br>o@ |<br>XO)|Example 1: H0002 (Forward rotation)<br>Example 2: H0800 low speed operation<br>(When Pr. 184 "RES terminal function selection" is set to "0")<br>b15<br>b0<br>| Welelelololofofofofofofofofo]i{o]<br>b15<br>b0<br>[oJofojolifofofofofofofofofofofo||
_**Tab. 6-83:** Run commands_
The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection". (Refer to section 6.10.1.)
The signal within parentheses is the default setting. Reset cannot be controlled by the network, bit 11 is invalid in the initial status. When using bit 11, change the signal with Pr. 184 "RES terminal function selection" (section 6.10.1) (Reset can be executed with the instruction code HFD.)
When Pr. 551 = 2 (PU Mode control source is PU connector), only forward rotation and reverse rotation can be used.
6 - 262
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Inverter status monitor
|**Item**|**Instruction**<br>**Code**|**Bits**|**Description**|**Example**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Inverter<br>status<br>monitor|H7A|8|b0:<br>RUN (inverter running)�<br>b1:<br>Forward rotation<br>b2:<br>Reverse rotation<br>b3:<br>SU (up to frequency)<br>b4:<br>OL (overload)<br>b5:<br>—<br>b6:<br>FU (frequency<br>detection)�<br>b7:<br>ABC (alarm)�|Example 1: H02 (During forward rotation)<br>Example 2: H80 (Stop at alarm occurrence)|
|Inverter<br>status<br>monitor<br>(extended)|H79|16|b0:<br>RUN (inverter running)�<br>b1:<br>Forward rotation<br>b2:<br>Reverse rotation<br>b3:<br>SU (up to frequency)<br>b4:<br>OL (overload)<br>b5:<br>—<br>b6:<br>FU (frequency<br>detection)�<br>b7:<br>ABC (alarm)�<br>b8:<br>—<br>b9:<br>—<br>b10: —<br>b11: —<br>b12: —<br>b13: —<br>b14: —<br>b15: Alarm occurrence|Example 1: H0002 (During forward rotation)<br>Example 2: H8080 (Stop at alarm occurrence)|
_**Tab. 6-84:** Monitoring the inverter status_
- The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection". (Refer to section 6.10.5.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 263
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Multi command HF0
Sending data format from computer to inverter
|Reply data from the inverter to the computer (no data error detected)<br>**Format**<br>**Number of Characters**<br>**1**<br>**2**<br>**3**<br>**4**<br>**5**<br>**6**<br>**7**<br>**8**<br>**9**<br>**10**<br>**11**<br>**12**<br>**13**<br>**14**<br>**15**<br>**16**<br>**17**<br>**18**<br>**19**<br>A3<br>ENQ<br>Inverter sta-<br>tion number<br>Instruction<br>code<br>(HF0)<br>Wait-<br>ing<br>time<br>Send<br>data<br>type<br>Receive<br>data<br>type<br>Data 1<br>Data 2<br>Sum check<br>CR/LF<br>~~pe~~<br>eer<br>ee<br>ptt~~TU~~<br>Pe<br>2)|
|---|
|Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter).<br>**Format**<br>**Number of Characters**<br>**1**<br>**2**<br>**3**<br>**4**<br>**5**<br>**6**<br>**7**<br>**8**<br>**9**<br>**10**<br>**11**<br>**12**<br>**13**<br>**14**<br>**15**<br>**16**<br>**17**<br>**18**<br>**19**<br>C1<br>STX<br>Inverter sta-<br>tion number<br>Send<br>data<br>type<br>Receive<br>data<br>type<br>Error<br>code 1<br>Error<br>code 2<br>Data 1<br>Data 2<br>ETX<br>Sum check<br>CR/LF<br>pe<br>cece eeeen ene ee<br>Pott<br>Gdedefe<br>osFoeTEL<br>a|o|]®|®<br>0)|
Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter). Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer). Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending.
|**Data Type**|**Data 1**|**Data 2**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0|Run command<br>(expansion)|Set frequency<br>(RAM)|Run command (expansion) is same as instruction code HF9 (refer to page 6-262).<br>The unit of set frequency is always by four digits, even when "0.01 to 9998" is set in<br>Pr. 37 and "01" is set in instruction code HFF.|
|1|Run command<br>(expansion)|Set frequency<br>(RAM, E²PROM)||
_**Tab. 6-85:** Data type of sending data_
Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply
|**Data Type**|**Data 1**|**Data 2**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0|Inverter status monitor<br>(expansion)|Output frequency<br>(speed)|Inverter status monitor (expansion) is same as instruction code H79 .<br>(Refer to page 6-262)<br>The unit of speed monitor is always by four digits (rounds down after the decimal<br>point), even when "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" is set in instruction code HFF.<br>Replies the monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 for special monitor.(<br>Refer to page 6-260)|
|1|Inverter status monitor<br>(expansion)|Special monitor||
## _**Tab. 6-86:** Data type of reply data_
Error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2. Mode error (HA), instruction code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is replied.
6 - 264
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19.5 Modbus®-RTU communication**
## **(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 549)**
Using the Modbus® RTU communication protocol, communication operation or parameter setting can be performed from the PU connector of the inverter.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**117**|PU communication<br>station number|0|0|No reply to the master�|||||—||
||||1–247|Inverter station number specification<br>Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are connected<br>to one personal computer.|||||||
|**118**|PU communication<br>speed|96|48/96/<br>192/384|Communication speed<br>The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.<br>(Example: 9600bps if 96)|||||||
|**120**|PU communication<br>parity check|2|0|Without parity check<br>Stop bit length 2bit|||||||
||||1|With odd parity check<br>Stop bit length 1bit|||||||
||||2|With even parity check<br>Stop bit length 1bit|||||||
|**122**|PU communication<br>check time interval|0|0|RS-485 communication can be made. Note that a communication fault<br>(E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the operation mode<br>with command source.|||||||
||||0.1<br>–<br>999.8 s|Communication check (signal loss detection) time interval<br>If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time,<br>the inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).|||||||
||||9999|No communication check (signal loss detection)|||||||
|**343**|Communication error<br>count|0|—|Displays the number of communication errors during Modbus®-RTU<br>communication (reading only)|||||||
|**502**|Stop mode selection at<br>communication error|0|0/3|**At Fault**<br>**Occurrence**|**Indication**|**Fault Output**|**At Fault**<br>**Removal**||||
|||||Coasts to stop|E.PUE|Output|Stop<br>(E.PUE)||||
||||1|Decelerates to<br>stop|After stop E.PUE|Output after<br>stop|Stop<br>(E.PUE)||||
||||2|Decelerates to<br>stop|After stop E.PUE|Without output|Automatic<br>restart<br>functions||||
|**549**|Protocol selection|0|0|Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol|||||||
||||1|Modbus®-RTU protocol|||||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- When Modbus®-RTU communication is performed from the master with address 0 (station number 0) set, broadcast communication is selected and the inverter does not send a response message. When response from the inverter is necessary, set a value other than "0" (initial value is 0) in Pr. 117 "PU communication station number". Some functions are invalid for broadcast communication. (Refer to page 6-268.)
## **NOTES**
- When "1" (Modbus®-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549 and "384" (38400 bps) in Pr. 118, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is disabled. When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), change parameter using the operation panel.
When using the Modbus®-RTU protocol, set Pr. 549 "Protocol selection" to "1".
When PU connector is selected as NET mode operation source (when Pr. 550 "NET mode operation command source selection" = 2 or 9999 (initial value) without communication option), Modbus® RTU communication operation can be performed. (Refer to section 6.19.2).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 265
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Communication specifications**
|**Item**|**Item**|**Description**|**Related**<br>**Parameters**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Communication protocol<br>Re<br>a||Modbus®-RTU protocol<br>Re|Pr. 549<br>Re|
|Conforming standard<br>Re<br>a<br>LR||EIA-485 (RS-485)<br>Re<br>|—<br>Re<br>|
|Number of inverters connected<br>a<br>LR||1 : N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations<br>|Pr. 117<br>|
|Communication speed<br>LRRe<br>a||Can be selected from 4800/9600/19200 and 38400 bps<br>Re<br>|Pr. 118<br>Re<br>|
|Control protocol<br>Re<br>aa||Asynchronous system<br>Re<br>a|—<br>Re<br>a|
|Communication method<br>aa||Half-duplex system<br>a|—<br>a|
|Communication<br>specifications<br>a<br>a|Character system<br>a<br>~~a~~|Binary (fixed to 8 bits)<br>a<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|—<br>a<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|
||Start bit<br>~~a~~|1bit<br>~~a~~|—<br>~~a~~|
||Stop bit length<br>~~c~~|Select from the following three types<br>No parity, stop bit length: 2 bits<br>Odd parity, stop bit length: 1 bit<br>Even parity, stop bit length: 1 bit<br>~~c~~p|Pr. 120<br>p|
||Parity check<br>~~c~~|||
||Error check<br>a|CRC code check|—|
||Terminator<br>a|—|—|
|Waiting time setting<br>a<br>a||—|—|
_**Tab. 6-87:** Communication specifications_
6 - 266
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Outline**
The Modbus® protocol is the communication protocol developed by Modicon for PLC. The Modbus® protocol performs serial communication between the master and slave using the dedicated message frame. The dedicated message frame has the functions that can perform data read and write. Using the functions, you can read and write the parameter values from the inverter, write the input command of the inverter, and check the operating status. In this product, the inverter data are classified in the holding register area (register addresses 40001 to 49999). By accessing the assigned holding register address, the master can communicate with the inverter which is a slave.
**NOTE** There are two different serial transmission modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode. This product supports only the RTU mode in which two hexadecimal coded characters are transmitted in one byte (8 bits) data. Only the communication protocol is defined by the Modbus® protocol, and the physical layer is not stipulated.
**==> picture [386 x 130] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter response time<br>Query communication (Refer to the following table for the data check<br>time)<br>PLC (Master) Query Message<br>Inverter<br>(slave) Response Message<br>Data absence time<br>(3.5 bytes or more)<br>Broadcast communication<br>Query Message<br>PLC (Master)<br>Inverter No Response<br>(slave)<br>I001227E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-132:** Message format_
The data check time related to different functions is shown in the table below:
|**Item**|**Check Time**|
|---|---|
|Various monitors, operation command, frequency setting (RAM)|< 20 ms|
|Parameter read/write, frequency setting (E²PROM)|< 50 ms|
|Parameter clear/all clear|< 5 s|
|Reset command|—|
## _**Tab. 6-88:** Data check time_
- Query
The master sends a message to the slave (= inverter) at the specified address.
- Normal Response
Response after receiving the query from the master, the slave executes the requested function and returns the corresponding normal response to the master.
- Error Response
If an invalid function code, address or data is received, the slave returns it to the master.
When a response description is returned, the error code indicating that the request from the master cannot be executed is added.
No response is returned for the hardware-detected error, frame error and CRC check error.
- Broadcast
By specifying address 0, the master can send a message to all slaves. All slaves that received the message from the master execute the requested function. In this communication, the slaves do not return a response to the master.
**NOTE**
The inverter executes the function independently of the inverter station number setting (Pr. 117) during broadcast communication.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 267
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Message frame (protocol)**
## Communication method
Basically, the master sends a query message (question) and the slave returns a response message (response). When communication is normal, Device Address and Function Code are copied as they are, and when communication is abnormal (function code or data code is illegal), bit 7 (= 80h) of Function Code is turned on and the error code is set to Data Bytes.
**==> picture [342 x 122] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Query message from Master<br>Device Address Device Address<br>Function Code Function Code<br>cS<br>Eight-Bit Eight-Bit<br>Data Bytes i Data Bytes<br>Error Check Error Check<br>Response message from slave<br>I001228E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-133:** Data transmission_
The message frame consists of the four message fields as shown above. By adding the no-data time (T1: Start, End) of 3.5 characters to the beginning and end of the message data, the slave recognizes it as one message.
## Protocol details
|**Message Field**<br>ee|**Message Field**<br>ee|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|ee|Address field<br>ee|The address code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 0 to 247 can be set. Set "0" to send a broadcast<br>message (all-address instruction) or any of 1 to 247 to send a message to each slave. When the slave<br>responds, it returns the address set from the master. The value set to Pr. 117 "PU communication sta-<br>tion number" is the slave address.|
||Function field|The function code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and can be set to any of 1 to 255. The master sets the func-<br>tion that it wants to request from the slave, and the slave performs the requested operation. The fol-<br>lowing table gives the supported function codes. An error response is returned if the set function<br>code is other than those in the following table. When the slave returns a normal response, it returns<br>the function code set by the master. When the slave returns an error response, it returns H80 + func-<br>tion code.<br>**Code**<br>**Function Name**<br>**Outline**<br>**Broadcast**<br>**Communica-**<br>**tion**<br>H03<br>Read Holding Register<br>Reads the holding register data.<br>Disallowed<br>H06<br>Preset Single Register<br>Writes data to the holding register.<br>Allowed<br>H08<br>Diagnostics<br>Function diagnosis.<br>(communication check only)<br>Disallowed<br>H10<br>Preset Multiple Registers<br>Writes data to multiple consecutive<br>holding registers.<br>Allowed<br>H46<br>Read Holding Register Access<br>Log<br>Reads the number of registers that<br>succeeded in communication last<br>time.<br>Disallowed|
|lt|Data field<br>lt|The format changes depending on the function code (refer to page 6-269). Data includes the byte<br>count, number of bytes, description of access to the holding register, etc.<br>lt~~.~~|
|lt|CRC check<br>field<br>lt|The received message frame is checked for error. CRC check is performed, and 2 byte long data is<br>added to the end of the message. When CRC is added to the message, the low-order byte is added<br>first and is followed by the high-order byte. The CRC value is calculated by the sending side that adds<br>CRC to the message. The receiving side recalculates CRC during message receiving, and compares<br>the result of that calculation and the actual value received in the CRC check field. If these two values<br>do not match, the result is defined as error.<br>lt~~.~~|
_**Tab. 6-89:** Protocol details_
6 - 268
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Message format types**
The message formats corresponding to the function codes in Tab. 6-89 will be explained.
- Read holding register data (H03 or 03)
Can read the description of system environment variables, real-time monitor, alarm history, and inverter parameters assigned to the holding register area. (Refer to the register list on page 6-277.)
## Query Message
|�**Slave**<br>**Address**|�**Function**|�**Starting Address**|�**Starting Address**|�**No. of Points**|�**No. of Points**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|(8 bits)|H03<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|
Response message
|�**Slave**<br>**Address**|�**Function**|�**Byte**<br>**Count**|�**Data**|�**Data**|�**Data**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|(8 bits)|H03<br>(8 bits)|(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|...<br>n�16 bits|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|
|**Message**|**Message**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|�|Slave Address|Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast communication<br>cannot be made (0 is invalid)|
|�|Function|Set H03.|
|�|Starting Address|Set the address at which holding register data read will be started.<br>Starting address = starting register address (decimal) + 40001<br>For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding<br>register 40002.|
|�|No. of Points|Set the number of holding registers from which data will be read. The number<br>of registers from which data can be read is a maximum of 125.|
_**Tab. 6-90:** Description of the query message_
|**Message**|**Message**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|�|Byte Count|The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).<br>Twice greater than the No. of Points specified at�is set.|
|�|Data|The number of data specified at�is set. Data are read in order of Hi byte and<br>Lo byte, and set in order of starting address data, starting address + 1 data,<br>starting address + 2 data, ...|
_**Tab. 6-91:** Description of normal response_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 269
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
**Example** To read the register values of 41004 (Pr. 4) to 41006 (Pr. 6) from the slave address 17 (H11).
Query message
||**Slave Address**|**Function**|**Starting Address**|**Starting Address**|**Starting Address**||**No. of Points**|**No. of Points**|**No. of Points**||||**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||H11|H03|H03|HEB|||H00||H03||||H77|||H2B|
||(8 bits)|(8 bits)|(8 bits)|(8 bits)|||(8 bits)||(8 bits)|(8 bits)|||(8 bits)||(8 bits)||
|Normal response (Response message)|||||||||||||||||
||**Slave Address**|**Function**|**Byte Count**||||**Data**|||||||**CRC Check**|||
||H11|H03|H06|H17|H70||H0B||HB8||H03||HE8|H2C||HE6|
||(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)||(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)|||(8 Bits)||(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)||(8 Bits)|
Read value:
Register 41004 (Pr. 4): H1770 (60.00 Hz) Register 41005 (Pr. 5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz) Register 41006 (Pr. 6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz)
6 - 270
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
- Write multiple holding register data (H06 or 06)
You can write the description of system environment variables and inverter parameters assigned to the holding register area. (Refer to the register list on page 6-277).
## Query message
|�**Slave**<br>**Address**|�**Function**|�**Register Address**|�**Register Address**|�**Preset Data**|�**Preset Data**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|(8 bits)|H06<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|
|Normal response (Response message)||||||||
|�**Slave**<br>**Address**|�**Function**|�**Register Address**||�**Preset Data**||**CRC Check**||
|(8 bits)|H06<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|
|**Message**|**Message**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|�|Slave Address|Set the address to which the message will be sent. Setting of address 0 enables<br>broadcast communication.|
|�|Function|Set H06.|
|�|Register Address|Set the address of the holding register to which data will be written.<br>Register address = holding register address (decimal) + 40001<br>For example, setting of register address 0001 writes data to the holding register<br>address 40002.|
|�|Preset Data|Set the data that will be written to the holding register. The written data is fixed<br>to 2 bytes.|
_**Tab. 6-92:** Description of the query message_
The normal response data � to � (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message. No response is made for broadcast communication.
**Example** � To write 60Hz (H1770) to 40014 (running frequency RAM) at slave address 5 (H05).
Query message
|**Slave**<br>**Address**|**Function**|**Register Address**|**Register Address**|**Preset Data**|**Preset Data**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H05<br>(8 bits)|H06<br>(8 bits)|H00<br>(8 bits)|H0D<br>(8 bits)|H17<br>(8 bits)|H70<br>(8 bits)|H17<br>(8 bits)|H99<br>(8 bits)|
Normal Response (Response message): Same data as the query message.
�
## **NOTE**
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 271
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Function diagnosis (H08 or 08)
A communication check can be made since the query message sent is returned unchanged as a response message (function of subfunction code H00). Subfunction code H00 (Return Query Data).
**==> picture [413 x 230] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Query message<br> Slave<br> Function Subfunction Data CRC Check<br>Address<br>e je [[ef] H08 H00 H00 H L L H<br>(8 bits)<br>a ee (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) oe (8 bits) fo (8 bits) (8 bits)<br>Normal response (Response message)<br> Slave<br> Function Subfunction Data CRC Check<br>Address<br>e je H08 fe H00 H00 foe H L fT L H<br>(8 bits)<br>a (8 bits) a (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)<br>Message Description<br>a<br>Slave Address Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast communication<br>cannot be made (0 is invalid)<br>Function Set H08.<br>)<br>Subfunction Set H0000.<br>Data Any data can be set if it is 2 bytes long.<br>a The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-93:** Description of the query message_
> The normal response data 4) to (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
6 - 272
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
- Write multiple holding register data (H10 or 16) You can write data to multiple holding registers.
## Query message
|�**Slave**<br>**Address**|�**Func-**<br>**tion**|�**Starting**<br>**Address**|�**Starting**<br>**Address**|�**No. of**<br>**Registers**|�**No. of**<br>**Registers**|�**Byte**<br>**Count**|�**Data**|�**Data**|�**Data**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|(8 Bits)|H10<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|...<br>n�2�8 Bits|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|
## Normal response (Response message)
|�**Slave**<br>**Address**|�**Function**|�**Starting Address**|�**Starting Address**|�**No. of Registers**|�**No. of Registers**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|(8 bits)|H10<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|
|**Message**|**Message**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|�|Slave Address|Set the address to which the message will be sent. Setting of address 0 enables<br>broadcast communication.|
|�|Function|Set H10.|
|�|Starting Address|Set the address where holding register data write will be started.<br>Starting address = starting register address (decimal) + 40001<br>For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding<br>register 40002.|
|�|No. of Points|Set the number of holding registers where data will be written. The number of<br>registers where data can be written is a maximum of 125.|
|�|Byte Count|The setting range is H02 to HFA (0 to 250).<br>Set twice greater than the value specified at�.|
|�|Data|Set the data specified by the number specified at�. The written data are set in<br>order of Hi byte and Lo byte, and arranged in order of the starting address data,<br>starting address + 1 data, starting address + 2 data ...|
_**Tab. 6-94:** Description of the query message_
The normal response data � to � (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
**Example** � To write 0.5 s (H05) to 41007 (Pr. 7) at the slave address 25 (H19) and 1s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr. 8).
Query message
|**Slave**<br>**Address**|**Function**|**Starting**<br>**Address**|**Starting**<br>**Address**|**No. of**<br>**Registers**|**No. of**<br>**Registers**|**Byte**<br>**Count**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H19<br>(8 bits)|H10<br>(8 bits)|H03<br>(8 bits)|HEE<br>(8 bits)|H00<br>(8 bits)|H02<br>(8 bits)|H04<br>(8 bits)|H00<br>(8 bits)|H05<br>(8 bits)|H00<br>(8 bits)|H0A<br>(8 bits)|H86<br>(8 bits)|H3D<br>(8 bits)|
Normal response (Response message)
|**Slave**<br>**Address**|**Function**|**Starting**<br>**Address**|**No. of**<br>**Registers**|**No. of**<br>**Registers**|**Byte**<br>**Count**|**CRC**|**Check**|**Check**||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H19|H10|H03<br>HEE|H00|H02|H04|H22||H61||
|(8 bits)|(8 bits)|(8 bits)<br>(8 bits)|(8 bits)|(8 bits)|(8 bits)|(8 bits)||(8 bits)||
||||||||||�|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 273
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
- Read holding register access log (H46 or 70)
- A response can be made to a query made by the function code H03 or H10.
- The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access during previous communication and the number of successful registers are returned.
- In response to the query for other than the above function code, 0 is returned for the address and number of registers.
## Query message
**Slave Function CRC Check Address** H46 L H (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) a eeee Normal response (Response message) **Slave Address Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check** & je H46 fe H L |ef H L L H (8 bits) aa (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
|**Message**<br>a|**Message**<br>a|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
||Slave Address|Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast communication<br>cannot be made (0 is invalid)|
||Function|Set H46.|
_**Tab. 6-95:** Description of the query message_
|**Message**|**Message**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|~~a~~|Starting Address<br>~~a~~|The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access is<br>returned.<br>Starting address = starting register address (decimal) + 40001<br>For example, when the starting address 0001 is returned, the address of the<br>holding register that succeeded in access is 40002.|
|a|No. of Points<br>a|The number of holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.|
_**Tab. 6-96:** Description of normal response_
**Example** To read the successful register starting address and successful count from the slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
|**Slave**<br>**Address**|**Function**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|
|H19<br>(8 bits)|H46<br>(8 bits)|H8B<br>(8 bits)|HD2<br>(8 bits)|
Normal response (Response message)
|**Slave**<br>**Address**|**Function**|**Starting Address**|**Starting Address**|**No. of Points**|**No. of Points**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H19<br>(8 bits)|H10<br>(8 bits)|H03<br>(8 bits)|HEE<br>(8 bits)|H00<br>(8 bits)|H02<br>(8 bits)|H22<br>(8 bits)|H61<br>(8 bits)|
Success of two registers at starting address 41007 (Pr. 7) is returned.
6 - 274
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Error response
An error response is returned if the query message received from the master has an illegal function, address or data. No response is returned for a parity, CRC, overrun, framing or busy error.
## **NOTE**
No response message is sent in the case of broadcast communication also.
## Error response (Response message)
|�**Slave Address**|�**Slave Address**|�**Function**|�**Function**|�**Exception Code**|**CRC Check**|**CRC Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|(8 bits)||H80 + Function<br>(8 bits)||(8 bits)|L<br>(8 bits)|H<br>(8 bits)|
||||||||
|**Message**|||**Description**||||
|�|Slave address||Set the address received from the master.||||
|�|Function||The master-requested function code + H80 is set.||||
|�|Exception code||The code in the following table is set.||||
## _**Tab. 6-97:** Description of response data_
|**Code**|**Error Item**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|01|ILLEGAL FUNCTION<br>(Function code illegal)|The set function code in the query message from the master cannot be handled<br>by the slave.|
|02|ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS�<br>(Address illegal)|The set register address in the query message from the master cannot be han-<br>dled by the inverter.<br>(No parameter, parameter read disabled, parameter write disabled)|
|03|ILLEGAL DATA VALUE<br>(Data illegal)|The set data in the query message from the master cannot be handled by the<br>inverter.<br>(Out of parameter write range, mode specified, other error)|
## _**Tab. 6-98:** Error code list_
- An error will not occur in the following cases:
- Function code H03 (Read Holding Register Data )
- When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is one or more holding registers from which data can be read.
- Function code H10 (Write Multiple Holding Register Data)
- When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is 1 or more holding registers to which data can be written.
Namely, when the function code H03 or H10 is used to access multiple holding registers, an error will not occur if a non-existing holding register or read disabled or write disabled holding register is accessed.
## **NOTES**
An error will occur if all accessed holding registers do not exist.
Data read from a non-existing holding register is 0, and data written there is invalid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 275
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
To detect the mistakes of message data from the master, they are checked for the following errors. If an error is detected, an alarm stop will not occur.
|**Error Item**|**Error Definition**|**Inverter Side Operation**|
|---|---|---|
|Parity error|The data received by the inverter differs from<br>the specified parity (Pr. 120 setting).|Pr. 343 is increased by 1 at error<br>occurrence.<br>The terminal LF is output at error<br>occurrence.|
|Framing error|The data received by the inverter differs from<br>the specified stop bit length (Pr. 120).||
|Overrun error|The following data was sent from the master<br>before the inverter completes data receiving.||
|Message frame error|The message frame data length is checked, and<br>the received data length of less than 4 bytes is<br>regarded as an error.||
|CRC check error|A mismatch found by CRC check between the<br>message frame data and calculation result is<br>regarded as an error.||
_**Tab. 6-99:** Error check item_
6 - 276
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Modbus® registers**
- System environment variable
|**Register**|**Definition**|**Read/Write**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|40002|Inverter reset|Write|Any value can be written|
|40003|Parameter clear|Write|Set H965A as a written value.|
|40004|All parameter clear|Write|Set H99AA as a written value.|
|40006|Parameter clear�|Write|Set H5A96 as a written value.|
|40007|All parameter clear�|Write|Set HAA99 as a written value.|
|40009|Inverter status/control input instruction�|Read/write|Refer to Tab. 6-101|
|40010|Operation mode/inverter setting�|Read/write|Refer to Tab. 6-102|
|40014|Running frequency (RAM value)|Read/write|According to the Pr. 37 setting,<br>the frequency and selectable<br>speed are in 1 r/min increments.|
|40015|Running frequency (E²PROM value)|Write||
## _**Tab. 6-100:** System environment variable_
- The communication parameter values are not cleared.
- For write, set the data as a control input instruction. For read, data is read as an inverter operating status.
- For write, set data as the operation mode setting. For read, data is read as the operation mode status.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 277
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
**==> picture [411 x 284] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Bit pe Definition<br>Control Input Instruction Inverter Status<br>0 Stop command RUN (inverter running)<br>OR a<br>1 Forward rotation command Forward rotation<br>FR<br>2 Reverse rotation command Reverse rotation<br>FD<br>3 RH (high speed operation command) SU (up to frequency)<br>OR<br>4 RM (middle speed operation command) OL (overload)<br>LG<br>5 RL (low speed operation command) 0<br>pp<br>OG 6 0 FU (frequency detection)<br>7 RT (second function selection) ABC (Alarm)<br>FR 8 DG AU (current input selection) 0<br>ORa 9 0 0<br>10 MRS (output stop) 0<br>a<br>11 0 0<br>FR<br>12 RES (reset) 0<br>a<br>13 0 0<br>OR<br>14 0 0<br>OD<br>15 0 Alarm<br>Fs<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-101:** Inverter status/control input instruction_
The signal within parentheses is the default setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection". (Refer to section 6.10.1.) Each assigned signal is valid or invalid depending on NET. (Refer to section 6.18.3.)
The signal within parentheses is the default setting. Definitions change according to the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection". (Refer to section 6.10.5.)
|**Operation Mode**|**Read Value**|**Written Value**|
|---|---|---|
|EXT|H0000|H0010|
|PU|H0001|—|
|EXT JOG|H0002|—|
|PU JOG|H0003|—|
|NET|H0004|H0014|
|PU + EXT|H0005|—|
## _**Tab. 6-102:** Operation mode/inverter setting_
The restrictions depending on the operation mode changes according to the computer link specifications.
6 - 278
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Real-time monitor
Refer to section 6.11.2 for details of the monitor description.
|**Register**|**Description**|**Unit**|**Register**|**Description**|**Unit**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|40201|Output frequency/<br>speed�|0.01 Hz/1|40220|Cumulative<br>energizing time|1 h|
|40202|Output current|0.01 A|40223|Actual operation time|1 h|
|40203|Output voltage|0.1 V|40224|Motor load factor|0.1%|
|40205|Frequency setting/<br>speed setting�|0.01 Hz/1|40225|Cumulative power|1 kWh|
|40207|Motor torque|0.1%|40252|PID set point|0.1%|
|40208|Converter output<br>voltage|0.1 V|40253|PID measurement value|0.1%|
|40209|Regenerative brake duty|0.1%|40254|PID deviation value|0.1%|
|40210|Electronic thermal relay<br>function load factor|0.1%|40258|Option input terminal<br>status 1 d|—|
|40211|Output current peak<br>value|0.01 A|40259|Option input terminal<br>status 2�|—|
|40212|Converter output<br>voltage peak value|0.1 V|40260|Option output terminal<br>status�|—|
|40214|Output power|0.01 kW|40261|Motor thermal load factor|0.1%|
|40215|Input terminal status�|—|40262|Inverter thermal load<br>factor|0.1%|
|40216|Output terminal status�|—|40263|Cumulative power 2|0.01 kWh|
## _**Tab. 6-103:** Real-time monitor_
- When Pr. 37 = "0.01 to 9998", displayed in integral number.
- Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.
|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|�Input terminal monitor details – MRS is OFF.|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|b15<br>b0||||||||||||||||
|—|—|—|—|—|RES|—|MRS|—|RH|RM|RL|—|—|STR|STF|
|�Output terminal monitor details<br>b15<br>b0||||||||||||||||
|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|ABC|FU|—|—|—|RUN|
- Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)
|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option input terminal monitor 1 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|b15|||||||||||||||b0|
|X15|X14|X13|X12|X11|X10|X9|X8|X7|X6|X5|X4|X3|X2|X1|X0|
|�Details of option input terminal monitor 2 (input terminal status of FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>(All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)<br>b15|||||||||||||||b0|
|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|—|DY|
- Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/ FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)
|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)|�Details of option output terminal monitor (output terminal status of FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E/<br>FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E) (All terminals are off when an option is not fitted.)||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|b15|||||||||||||||b0|
|—|—|—|—|—|—|RA3|RA2|RA1|Y6|Y5|Y4|Y3|Y2|Y1|Y0|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 279
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Parameter
|**Parameters**|**Register**|**Parameter Name**|**Read/Write**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|0–999|41000<br>–<br>41999|Refer to the parameter list<br>(Tab. 6-1) for the parameter names.|Read/write|The parameter number + 41000<br>is the register number.|
|C2 (902)|41902|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C3 (902)|42092|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>(analog value)|Read/write|The analog value (%) set to C3<br>(902) is read.|
||43902|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|The analog value (%) of the volt-<br>age (current) applied to the ter-<br>minal 2 is read.|
|125 (903)|41903|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C4 (903)|42093|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>(analog value)|Read/write|The analog value (%) set to C4<br>(903) is read.|
||43903|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|The analog value (%) of the volt-<br>age (current) applied to the ter-<br>minal 2 is read.|
|C5 (904)|41904|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C6 (904)|42094|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>(analog value)|Read/write|The analog value (%) set to C6<br>(904) is read.|
||43904|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|The analog value (%) of the cur-<br>rent (voltage) applied to the ter-<br>minal 4 is read.|
|126 (905)|41905|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C7 (905)|42095|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>(analog value)|Read/write|The analog value (%) set to C7<br>(905) is read.|
||43905|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|The analog value (%) of the cur-<br>rent (voltage) applied to the ter-<br>minal 4 is read.|
_**Tab. 6-104:** Parameter_
6 - 280
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## ● Fault history
|**Register**|**Definition**|**Read/Write**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|40501|Fault history 1|Read/write|Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as "H00��".<br>The error code can be referred to in the low-order 1 byte.<br>Performing write using the register 40501 batch-clears<br>the alarm history. Set any value as data.|
|40502|Fault history 2|Read||
|40503|Fault history 3|Read||
|40504|Fault history 4|Read||
|40505|Fault history 5|Read||
|40506|Fault history 6|Read||
|40507|Fault history 7|Read||
|40508|Fault history 8|Read||
_**Tab. 6-105:** Fault history_
|**Data**|**Description**|**Data**|**Description**|**Data**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H00|No fault present|H70|E.BE|HC7|E.AIE|
|H10|E.OC1|H80|E.GF|HC8|E.USB|
|H11|E.OC2|H81|E.LF|HC9|E.SAF|
|H12|E.OC3|H90|E.OHT|HD8|E.MB4|
|H20|E.OV1|HA0|E.OPT|HD9|E.MB5|
|H21|E.OV2|HA1|E.OP1|HDA|E.MB6|
|H22|E.OV3|HB0|E.PE|HDB|E.MB7|
|H30|E.THT|HB1|E.PUE|HF1|E.1|
|H31|E.THM|HB2|E.RET|HF5|E.5|
|H40|E.FIN|HB3|E.PE2|HF6|E.6|
|H52|E.ILF|HC0|E.CPU|HF7|E.7|
|H60|E.OLT|HC5|E.IOH|HFD|E.13|
_**Tab. 6-106:** Fault code list_
## **NOTE**
Refer to section 7.1 for details of fault definition.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 281
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Communication error count (Pr. 343)**
You can check the cumulative number of communication errors.
|**Parameters**|**Setting Range**|**Minimum Setting Range**|**Initial Value**|
|---|---|---|---|
|343|(Read only)|1|0|
_**Tab. 6-107:** Number of communication errors_
## **NOTE**
The number of communication errors is temporarily stored into the RAM. As it is not stored into the E²PROM, performing a power supply reset or inverter reset clears the value to 0.
## **Output terminal LF "alarm output (communication error warnings)"**
During a communication error, the alarm signal (LF signal) is output by open collector output. Assign the used terminal using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
**==> picture [379 x 123] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Master Po Alarm data Alarm data Normal data PT Alarm data Normal data<br>Slave Reply data Reply data<br>Communication<br>Error count<br>(Pr. 343)<br>Signal LF OFF ON OFF ON OFF<br>Po Turns off when normal data is received<br>Communication error count is increased in Alarm data: Data resulting in<br>synchronization with leading edge of LF signal communication error.<br>I001229E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-134:** Output of the LF signal_
## **NOTE**
The LF signal can be assigned to the output terminal using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192. Changing the terminal assignment may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
6 - 282
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19.6 Initial settings and specifications of Ethernet communication (FR-E700 SC ENE)**
Use the following parameters to perform required settings for Ethernet communication between the inverter and other devices.
To make communication between other devices and the inverter, perform the initial settings of the inverter parameters to match the communication specifications of the devices. Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or if there is any setting error.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**442**|Default gateway address 1�|0|0–255|Enter the IP address of the default gateway, which<br>is a device connecting the different networks, to<br>establish a communication between the inverter<br>and the devices outside the inverter network.||—||
|**443**|Default gateway address 2�|0|0–255|||||
|**444**|Default gateway address 3�|0|0–255|||||
|**445**|Default gateway address 4�|0|0–255|||||
|**805**|Ethernet IP address 1�|192|0–255|Enter the IP address of the inverter to be connected<br>to Ethernet.||||
|**806**|Ethernet IP address 2�|168|0–255|||||
|**807**|Ethernet IP address 3�|50|0–255|||||
|**808**|Ethernet IP address 4�|1|0–255|||||
|**809**|Subnet mask 1�|255|0–255|Enter the subnet mask of the network to which the<br>inverter belongs.||||
|**810**|Subnet mask 2�|255|0–255|||||
|**811**|Subnet mask 3�|255|0–255|||||
|**812**|Subnet mask 4�|0|0–255|||||
|**830**|Ethernet communication<br>network number�|1|1–239|Enter the network number.||||
|**831**|Ethernet communication<br>station number�|1|1–120|Enter the station number.||||
|**832**|Link speed and duplex mode<br>selection�|0|0–4|Set the communication speed and the<br>communication mode (full-duplex/half-duplex).||||
|**833**|Ethernet function selection 1 �|31|0, 10, 20, 30, 31,<br>36, 38, 9999|Set the application, protocol, etc.||||
|**834**|Ethernet function selection 2�|20||||||
|**835**|Ethernet function selection 3�|9999||||||
|**837**|Ethernet IP filter address 1�|0|0–255|Set the range of connectable IP addresses for the<br>network devices.<br>(When Pr. 837 to Pr. 840 = "0 (initial value)", the<br>function is invalid.)||||
|**838**|Ethernet IP filter address 2�|0|0–255|||||
|**839**|Ethernet IP filter address 3�|0|0–255|||||
|**840**|Ethernet IP filter address 4�|0|0–255|||||
|**841**|Ethernet IP filter address 2<br>range specification�|9999|0–255, 9999|||||
|**842**|Ethernet IP filter address 3<br>range specification�|9999|0–255, 9999|||||
|**843**|Ethernet IP filter address 4<br>range specification�|9999|0–255, 9999|||||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 283
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
|**Pr. No.**<br>~~p~~|**Name**<br>~~p~~e||**Initial Value**<br>||**Setting Range**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**844**<br>~~p~~|Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 1<br>~~p~~e|<br>||0<br>|<br>||0–255|To limit the network devices that send the<br>operation or speed command through the Ethernet<br>network (MODBUS®/TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network<br>Basic), set the range of IP addresses of the devices.<br>When Pr. 844 to Pr. 847 = "0 (initial value)", no IP<br>address is specified for sending commands through<br>the Ethernet network. In this case, operation<br>through the Ethernet network (MODBUS®/TCP or<br>CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) is not available.<br>When four or more clients attempt a connection to<br>the inverter during MODBUS®/TCP communication,<br>the connection attempted from outside of the IP<br>address range set for Ethernet command source<br>selection may be forcibly closed.||
|**845**<br>~~p~~|Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 2<br>~~p~~e|<br>pe<br>|<br>||0<br>|<br>pe<br>|<br>||0–255<br>pe|||
|**846**|Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 3<br>pe<br>|<br>pe<br>|<br>||0<br>pe<br>|<br>pe<br>|<br>||0–255<br>pe<br>pe|||
|**847**|Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 4<br>pe<br>|<br>pe<br>|<br>||0<br>pe<br>|<br>pe<br>|<br>|||0–255<br>pe<br>pe<br>||||
|**848**|Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 3 range<br>specification<br>|<br>Po<br>|<br>||9999<br>|<br>Po<br>||<br>|<br>ft|0–255, 9999<br>Po<br>|<br>ft|||
|**849**|Ethernet command source<br>selection IP address 4 range<br>specification<br>|<br>Po<br>||9999<br>| |<br>Po<br>|<br>ft|0–255, 9999<br>|<br>Po<br>ft|||
|**850**|Ethernet TCP disconnection<br>time coefficient<br>Po<br>||3600<br>Po<br>|<br>ft|1–7200<br>Po<br>ft|When the inverter does not receive a packet within<br>the time calculated by multiplying the Pr. 850<br>setting by 8 in seconds from the devices with the<br>TCP connection established, the connection will be<br>forcibly closed.||
|**851**|Ethernet signal loss detection<br>function selection|3|0|Signal loss detection<br>disabled|Set the availability of<br>the signal loss detection<br>and select the action<br>when Ethernet<br>communication is<br>interrupted by physical<br>factors.|
||||2|The alarm (LF) signal is<br>output for a signal loss.||
||||3|A protective function<br>(E.OP1) is activated for a<br>signal loss.||
|**852**|Ethernet communication<br>check time interval|1.5 s|0|Ethernet communication is available, but the<br>inverter output is shut off in the NET operation<br>mode.||
||||0.1–999.8 s|Set the interval of the communication check (signal<br>loss detection) time for all devices with IP addresses<br>in the range specified for Ethernet command source<br>selection (Pr. 844 to Pr. 849). If a no-<br>communication state persists for the permissible<br>time or longer, the inverter output is shut off||
||||9999|No communication check (signal loss detection)||
The setting is applied after an inverter reset or power-ON.
**NOTE** The monitored items and parameter settings can be read during communication with the Pr. 852 Ethernet communication check time interval = "0" setting, but an inverter fault occurs instantly when the operation mode is switched to the NET operation mode. When the NET operation mode is selected as the start-up operation mode, communication is performed once, then the Ethernet communication fault (E.OP1) is activated.
To perform operation or parameter writing via communication, set Pr. 852 to "9999" or a value larger than the communication cycle or retry time setting (refer to page 6-290).
6 - 284
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Ethernet function selection (Pr. 833 to Pr. 835)**
Refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethernet, and set Pr. 833 to Pr. 835 Ethernet function selection1 to 3 according to the application and protocol.
A communication socket is provided only for the selected application.
|**Pr.833 to Pr.835 setting**|**Port**<br>**number**|**Application**�|**Protocol**�|**Number of con-**<br>**nectable clients**|**Refer to**<br>**page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|0|502|MODBUS®/TCP|TCP/IP|3|6-333|
|10|61450|CC-Link IE Field Network Basic|UDP/IP|No limit|6-349|
|20 (Pr. 834 initial value)�|45237|iQSS (supported by FR Configurator2)|UDP/IP|No limit|—|
|30|5000|MELSOFT / FA product connection|UDP/IP|No limit|6-291|
|31 (Pr. 833 initial value)�|5001||UDP/IP|No limit||
|36|5006||UDP/IP|No limit||
|38|5008||UDP/IP|No limit||
|9999 (Pr. 835 initial value)|Unselected||||—|
## _**Tab. 6-108:** Settings for the Ethernet function selection_
- If both application and protocol settings are identical in Pr.833 to Pr.835, the priority of the setting is defined as follows: Pr. 833 > Pr. 834 > Pr. 835. (Example) When Pr. 833 = "31", Pr. 834 = "36", Pr. 835 = "20", "20" and "31" are valid.
- To establish the Ethernet communication between the inverter and FR Configurator2, set "20" and "31" in any two of Pr. 833 to Pr. 835.
## **Communication speed and full-duplex/half-duplex selection (Pr.832)**
Set the communication speed and the communication mode (full-duplex/half-duplex) in Pr. 832 Link speed and duplex mode selection. If the operation is not performed properly in the initial setting (Pr. 832 = "0"), set Pr. 832 according to the specifications of the connected hub.
|**Pr. 832**|**Communication**<br>**speed**|**Full-duplex/**<br>**halfduplex system**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0 (initial value)|Automatic negotiation|Automatic negotiation|The communication speed and the communication<br>mode (half-duplex/full-duplex) are automatically<br>negotiated to ensure the optimum setting.|
|1|100 Mbps|Full-duplex|—|
|2|100 Mbps|Half-duplex|—|
|3|10 Mbps|Full-duplex|—|
|4|10 Mbps|Half-duplex|—|
_**Tab. 6-109:** Setting of Pr. 832_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 285
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **IP address (Pr. 805 to Pr. 808)**
Enter the IP address of the inverter to be connected to Ethernet in Pr. 805 to Pr. 808.
(Enter the IP address assigned by the network administrator.)
Set the value in the first octet in Pr. 805. Set the value in the second octet in Pr. 806. Set the value in the third octet in Pr. 807. Set the value in the fourth octet in Pr. 808. *** * * . * * * . * * * . * * *** _I003108E_ ~~a~~
_**Fig. 6-135:** Setting of the IP address_ **Subnet mask (Pr. 809 to Pr. 812)** Enter the subnet mask of the network to which the inverter belongs in Pr. 809 to Pr. 812.
Set the value in the first octet in Pr. 809. Set the value in the second octet in Pr. 810. Set the value in the third octet in Pr. 811. Set the value in the fourth octet in Pr. 812. *** * * . * * * . * * * . * * *** _I003108E_ ~~a~~ _**Fig. 6-136:** Setting of the subnet mask_
## **Default gateway address (Pr. 442 to Pr. 445)**
Set the IP address of the default gateway, which is a device connecting the networks, in Pr. 442 to Pr. 445 to establish a communication between the inverter and the devices outside the inverter network. Set the value in the first octet in Pr. 442. Set the value in the second octet in Pr. 443. Set the value in the third octet in Pr. 444. Set the value in the fourth octet in Pr. 445. *** * * . * * * . * * * . * * *** _I003108E_ ~~a~~
_**Fig. 6-137:** Setting of the default gateway address_
## **Ethernet TCP disconnection time coefficient (Pr. 850)**
When the inverter does not receive a packet within the time calculated by multiplying the Pr. 850 setting by 8 in seconds from the devices with the TCP connection established, the connection will be forcibly closed.
**==> picture [236 x 81] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter Connected device<br>Normal communication<br>Pr. 850 setting × 8<br>(seconds)<br>fo Timeout<br>(connection close)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-138:** Setting of the Ethernet TCP disconnection time coefficient_
Time
_I004012E_
6 - 286
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Ethernet IP filtering function (Pr. 837 to Pr. 843)**
Set the IP address range for connectable network devices (Pr. 837 to Pr 843) to limit the connectable devices. The IP address setting range depends on the settings in Pr. 838 and Pr. 841, Pr. 839 and Pr. 842, and Pr. 840 and Pr. 843. (Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr. 838 and Pr. 841, Pr. 839 and Pr. 842, and Pr. 840 and Pr. 843.)
## **Example** �
## Setting example 1:
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".
**==> picture [393 x 115] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 837 Pr. 838 Pr. 839 Pr. 840<br>Ethernet IP address for<br>filtering 192 168 1 100<br>The range is between the The range is between<br>values set in both the values set in both<br>parameters. parameters.<br>Pr. 841 Pr. 842 Pr. 843<br>Filtering range setting for � 9999 3 150<br>the Ethernet IP address<br>I003110A<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-139:** Setting example 1 for Ethernet IP filtering function_
�
**Example** � Setting example 2:
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".
**==> picture [292 x 88] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 837 Pr. 838 Pr. 839 Pr. 840<br>Ethernet IP address for 192 168 2 100<br>filtering<br>The range is between the<br> values set in both<br>parameters<br>Pr. 841 Pr. 842 Pr. 843<br>Filtering range setting forthe Ethernet IP address � 9999 9999 50<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I003111A<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-140:** Setting example 2 for Ethernet IP filtering function_
�
- When Pr. 837 to Pr. 840 = "0 (initial value)", the function is invalid.
- When Pr. 841 to Pr. 843 = "9999 (initial value)", the range is invalid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 287
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **CAUTION**
_**The Ethernet IP filtering function (Pr. 837 to Pr. 843) is provided as a means to prevent unau-**_ **E** _**thorized access (with intentions such as to corrupt programs or data) by external systems, but the function does not prevent it completely. In order to protect the inverter and the system against unauthorized access by external systems, take additional security measures. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation will not take any responsibility for any problems in the inverter and the system incurred by unauthorized access.**_
_**The following are examples of measures to prevent unauthorized access.**_
- _**Install a firewall.**_
● _**Install a personal computer as a relay station, and control the relaying of transmission data using an application program.**_ ● _**Install an external device as a relay station to control access rights. (For the details of external devices used to control access rights, contact the distributors of the external devices.)**_
6 - 288
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Ethernet IP address for command source selection (Pr. 844 to Pr. 849)**
- To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network (MODBUS®/TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic), set the range of IP addresses of the devices.
- When Pr. 844 to Pr. 847 = "0 (initial value)", no IP address is specified for sending commands through the Ethernet network. In this case, operation through the Ethernet network (MODBUS®/ TCP or CC-Link IE Field Network Basic) is not available.
- When four or more clients attempt a connection to the inverter during MODBUS®/TCP communication, the connection attempted from outside of the IP address range set for Ethernet command source selection may be forced to be closed.
- The setting range for command source selection depends on the settings in Pr. 846 and Pr. 848, and Pr. 847 and Pr. 849.
(Either of the settings can be larger than the other in Pr. 846 and Pr. 848, and Pr. 847 and Pr. 849.)
## **Example** �
## Setting example 1:
In this case, the IP address range for command source selection via Ethernet communication is "192.168.x (1 to 3).xxx (100 to 150)".
**==> picture [391 x 115] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 844 Pr. 845 Pr. 846 Pr. 847<br>Ethernet IP address for<br>command source<br>192 168 1 100<br>selection<br>The range is between The range is between<br>the values set in both the values set in both<br>parameters. parameters.<br>Command source selec- Pr. 848 Pr. 849<br>tion range setting for the � � 3 150<br>Ethernet IP address<br>I003112A<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-141:** Setting example 1 for the Ethernet IP address for command source selection_
�
## **Example** �
## Setting example 2:
In this case, the IP address range in which Ethernet communication is permitted is "192.168.2.xxx (50 to 100)".
**==> picture [391 x 115] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 844 Pr. 845 Pr. 846 Pr. 847<br>Ethernet IP address for<br>command source 192 168 2 100<br>selection<br>The range is between<br>the values set in both<br>parameters.<br>Pr. 848 Pr. 849<br>Command source selec-<br>tion range setting for the � � 9999 50<br>Ethernet IP address<br>I003113A<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Abb. 6-142:** Einstellbeispiel 2 zum IP-Adressbereich für Betriebsanweisungen_
�
- When "9999 (initial value)" is set in Pr. 848 and Pr. 849, the range is invalid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 289
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Ethernet signal loss detection function selection (Pr. 851)**
- Use Pr. 851 to set the operation when the Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors including disconnection of the Ethernet cable or damages on the Ethernet cable.
- When an Ethernet communication error is detected while Pr. 851 = "2 or 3 (initial value)", the alarm (LF) signal is output via an output terminal of the inverter. For the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
|**Pr. 851**|**Description**|**Operation panel display/**<br>**indicator**|**LF signal output**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0|Detection disabled|—|No|
|2|Alarm output|—|Yes|
|3 (initial value)|Protective function (E.OP1)|E.OP1|Yes|
_**Tab. 6-110:** Settings of Pr. 851_
## **Ethernet communication check time interval (Pr. 852)**
- Set the communication check (signal loss detection) interval in Pr. 852 (initial value: 1.5 seconds) for the inverter and all other devices with IP addresses in the range specified for Ethernet command source selection (Pr. 844 to Pr. 849). If a nocommunication state persists for the permissible time or longer, the Ethernet communication fault (E.OP1) is activated and the inverter output is shut off.
- When "9999" is set in Pr. 852, the communication check (signal loss detection) will not be performed.
- The monitored items and parameter settings can be read via Ethernet when "0" is set in Pr. 852, but the Ethernet communication fault (E.OP1) is activated instantly when the operation mode is switched to the Network operation.
- A signal loss detection is made when any of 0.1 s to 999.8 s is set in Pr. 852. In order to enable the signal loss detection, data must be sent by connected devices at an interval equal to or less than the time set for the communication check. (The inverter makes a communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master.)
- Communication check is started at the first communication when the inverter operates in the Network operation mode and the command source is specified as communication via the Ethernet connector.
## **Example**
When Pr. 852 = 0.1 to 999.8 s
**==> picture [398 x 143] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation mode External Network<br>Connected device<br>|<br>:<br>Inverter<br>Inverter<br>Connected device<br>Check starts Fault (E.OP1)<br>Pr. 852<br>Communication<br>check counter Time<br>E.OP1 OFF ON<br>a<br>I004013E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-143:** Timing of the Ethernet communication check_
6 - 290
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **Ethernet communication network number (Pr. 830), Ethernet communication station number (Pr. 831)**
When the MELSOFT / FA product connection or iQSS is selected for Ethernet communication, enter the Ethernet communication network number in Pr. 830 and the Ethernet communication station number in Pr. 831.
## **6.19.7 MELSOFT / FA product connection (FR-E700 SC ENE)**
FR Configurator2 can be connected via Ethernet.
## **Initial setting**
- Set any value from "30, 31, 36, 38" in any of Pr. 833 to Pr. 835 Ethernet function selection 1 to 3 to select the MELSOFT / FA product connection for the application. (Refer to page 6-285.) (For how to set the application value, refer to the Instruction Manual of the device connected via Ethernet.)
- Enter the Ethernet communication network number in Pr. 830 and the Ethernet communication station number in Pr. 831. (Refer to page 6-291.)
## **System configuration**
**==> picture [392 x 100] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Direct connection with<br>FR Configrator2<br>Ethernet cable<br>Personal computer<br>(FR Configurator2) Inverter<br>I004014E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-144:** System configuration of the MELSOFT / FA product connection_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 291
Communication operation and setting
Parameter
## **6.19.8 USB communication (Pr. 547, Pr. 548)**
Inverter setup can be easily performed using the FR Configurator by connecting the inverter and personal computer with a USB cable. A personal computer and inverter can be easily connected with one USB cable.
**==> picture [478 x 480] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Refer to|
|Pr. No.|Name|Initial Value|Setting Range|Description|Parameters referred to|Section|
|USB communication station|551|PU mode operation|6.18.3|
|547|number|0|0–31|Inverter station number specification|command source selection|
|a|ee ee|USB communication is possible|—_—|a|
|0|
|Trips in the PU operation mode (E.USB)|
|Sets the interval of communication check time. If a|
|USB communication check|
|548|time interval|9999|0.1–999.8 s|no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible time, the inverter will come to trip|
|(E.USB).|
|9999|No communication check|
|aa|
|0)|Changed setting value is made valid when powering on or resetting the inverter.|
|Specification|Description|
|Interface|Conforms to USB1.1|
|Transmission speed|12 Mbps|
|Wiring Length|5 m|
|Connector|USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)|
|Power supply|Self-power supply|
|Tab. 6-111:|USB communication specifications|
|USB cable|USB connector|
|so|
|T|t|al|4|————E_—e|e|
|ee|r|S|F|O|m|a|
|BS|tj|A|ipa]|a|z||I|i|ne|
|_|i|“|CNC’|a|N|8|
|How to open the USB connector cover|
|Pull the cover in the direction of arrow.|Then turn it upward.|
|I001921E|
**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-145:** Connection to the USB connector_
You can perform parameter setting and monitoring with the FR Configurator. Refer to the instruction manual of the FR Configurator for details.
6 - 292
Special operation
Parameter
## **6.20 Special operation**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Perform process control such as pump<br>and air volume.|PID control|Pr. 127–Pr. 134|6.20.1|
|Dancer control|PID control (dancer control setting)|Pr. 44, Pr. 45,<br>Pr. 128–Pr. 134|6.20.2|
|Frequency control appropriate for<br>load torque|Droop control|Pr. 286, Pr. 287|6.20.3|
|Avoid overvoltage alarm due to regen-<br>eration by automatic adjustment of<br>output frequency|Regeneration avoidance function|Pr. 882–Pr. 886|6.20.4|
## **6.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134)**
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure.
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 293
Special operation
Parameter
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**127**|PID control<br>automatic<br>switchover<br>frequency|9999|0–400 Hz|Set the frequency at which the control is automatically changed to PID<br>control.|||
||||9999|Without PID automatic switchover function|||
|**128**|PID action<br>selection<br>||0<br>|[Ep|0<br>|PID action is not performed<br>|||
||||20<br>|PID reverse<br>action<br>|Measured value (terminal 4)<br>Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)<br>||
||||21<br>|PID forward<br>action<br>|||
||||40<br>|PID reverse<br>action<br>|Addition method:<br>fixed<br>|For dancer control set point<br>(Pr. 133), measured value<br>(terminal 4) main speed<br>(frequency command of the<br>operation mode)<br>|
||||41<br>|PID forward<br>action<br>|||
||||42<br>|PID reverse<br>action<br>|Addition method:<br>ratio<br>||
||||43<br>|PID forward<br>action<br>|||
||||50<br>|PID reverse<br>action<br>|Deviation value signal input<br>(LONWORKS, CC-Link communication)<br>||
||||51<br>|PID forward<br>action<br>|||
||||60<br>|PID reverse<br>action<br>|Measured value, set point input<br>(LONWORKS, CC-Link communication)<br>||
||||61<br>[Ep|PID forward<br>action<br>[Ep|||
|**129**|PID proportional<br>band<br>e<br>pf<br>||100%<br>e[Ep<br>pfEp<br>||0.1<br>–<br>1000%<br>[Ep|If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the<br>manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the<br>measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the<br>response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, e.g.<br>hunting occurs. Gain Kp= 1/proportional band<br>[Ep|||
||||9999<br>[Epfo<br>Ep<br>|No proportional control<br>[Epfo<br>Ep<br>|||
|**130**|PID integral time<br><br>pf<br>|<br>||1s<br>[Ep<br>pfEp<br>|_p<br>||0.1<br>–<br>3600 s<br>[Epfo<br>Ep<br>|For deviation step input, time (Ti) required for only the integral (I)<br>action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the<br>proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is<br>reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.<br>[Epfo<br>Ep<br>|||
||||9999<br>fo<br>Ep<br>_p<br>|No integral control.<br>fo<br>Ep<br>_p<br>|||
|**131**|PID upper limit<br><br>pf<br>|<br>||9999<br><br>pfEp<br>|_p<br>||0–100%<br>fo<br>Ep<br>_p<br>|Maximum value<br>If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. The<br>maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value (terminal 4)<br>is equivalent to 100%.<br>fo<br>Ep<br>_p<br>|||
||||9999<br>Ep<br>_p<br>_p|No function<br>Ep<br>_p<br>_p|||
|**132**|PID lower limit<br><br>||9999<br>_p<br>||0–100%<br>_p<br>_p|Minimum frequency<br>If the process value falls below the setting range, the FDN signal is<br>output. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value<br>(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.<br>_p<br>_p|||
||||9999<br>_p<br> _p|No function<br>_p<br>_p|||
|**133**|PID action set<br>point<br><br>° <br>ree|9999<br> <br> ao<br>ree|0–100%<br> _p<br>ao|Used to set the set point for PID control.<br>_p<br>pO|||
||||9999<br>ao<br>ree|Terminal 2 input is the set point.<br>pO<br>ree|||
|**134**|PID differential<br>time<br>ree|9999<br>ree|0.01<br>–<br>10.00 s<br>ree|For deviation ramp input, time (Td) required for providing only the<br>manipulated variable for the proportional (P) action. As the differential<br>time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change.<br>ree|||
||||9999<br>ree|No differential control.<br>ree|||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
6 - 294
Special operation
Parameter
## **PID control basic configuration**
**==> picture [378 x 119] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Inverter<br>terminal 2Pr. 133 or \ ~ULe p 1 1 Td S |:| Manipulatedvariable Motor<br>Opn Ti S |<br>Set point ' |<br>(0–10 V DC)0–5 V DC \a Terminal 4 PID operation y<br>Feedback signal (measured value),<br>4–20 mA DC (0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC)<br>Kp: Proportionality constant; Ti: Integral time; S: Operator; Td: Differential time<br>I001231E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-146:** System configuration when Pr. 128 = 20 or 21 (set/feedback value at the inverter)_
## **PI action**
A combination of P action (P) and I action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation and changes with time.
## _**Fig. 6-147:**_
**==> picture [162 x 203] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Deviation Set point<br>Measured<br>value<br>i)<br>a'<br>1'<br>1 [1]<br>a'<br>i<br>i<br>P action 1<br>1a'1<br>41 [1] 1<br>1 [1]<br>I action 44 i<br>4 1<br>7<br>i1<br>a [1]<br>i1<br>a [1]<br>1 [1]<br>1 [1]<br>1<br>i<br>i)<br>1<br>PI action<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_Operation example for stepped changes of measured value_
_I000045C_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 295
Special operation
Parameter
## **PD action**
A combination of P action (P) and differential control action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic.
**==> picture [393 x 207] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-148:<br>Set point<br>Operation example for proportional changes of<br>measured value<br>Deviation<br>Measured<br>P action value<br>ae<br>D action<br>PD action<br>I000046C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **PID action**
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both actions for control.
**==> picture [390 x 206] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Set point Fig. 6-149:<br>Operation example for proportional changes of<br>Deviation measured value<br>Measured<br>value<br>P action<br>aan<br>I action<br>D action<br>PID action<br>I001233E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 296
Special operation
Parameter
## **Reverse action**
Increases the manipulated variable fi (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point measured value) is positive, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
**==> picture [386 x 140] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Deviation Set point<br>Xs0 Lr yp hl<br>Cold fi increased<br>Set point<br>Hot fi decreased<br>Measured value<br>oan<br>Feedback signal<br>(measured value)<br>I000047C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-150:** Heater_
## **Forward action**
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point measured value) is negative, and decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
**==> picture [368 x 100] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Measured value<br>Set point<br>Too Cold fi decrease<br>Set point Hot fi increase<br>Deviation<br>Feedback signal<br>(measured value)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000048C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-151:** Cooling_
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency).
**==> picture [410 x 93] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Deviation<br>Positive Negative<br>i<br>Reverse action<br>ee esee<br>Forward action<br>ee ee eee<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-112:** Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 297
Special operation
Parameter
## **Connection diagram**
The following graphic shows a typical application:
**==> picture [394 x 370] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 128 = 20<br>Pr. 182 = 14<br>Pr. 190 = 15<br>Pr. 191 = 14<br>Pr. 192 = 16 [fT] _ _<br>Cor ><br>| Pump<br>—— Cu UO<br>Power<br>supply<br>— > bis ‘ =o ;<br>ee a de _ oa VW<br>Forward rotation OO stF® oo<br>Reverse rotation {) stR®@<br>PID control © RH (X14) @<br>2 wire type<br>selection Upper limit<br>Setting Lower limit<br>Potentiometer<br>1 k 1–2 W<br>(Set point<br>setting)<br>Power supply for OC outputs<br>fe |<br>Measured value 4–20 mA<br>[*)<br>1 phase, 3<br>e. g. 230 V, 50 Hz<br>I002137C<br>Detector<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-152:** Connection diagram in source logic_
The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used.
The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal selection" setting.
The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal selection" setting.
The AU signal need not be input.
6 - 298
Special operation
Parameter
## **I/O signals and parameter setting**
- Set "20, 21, 50, 51, 60 or 61" in Pr. 128 to perform PID operation.
- Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign PID control selection signal (X14) to turn the X14 signal on.
- When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes PID control valid.
- Enter the set point using the inverter terminal 2 or Pr. 133 and enter the measured value to terminal 4.
## **NOTES**
- When Pr. 128 = "0" or X14 signal is off, normal inverter operation is performed without PID action.
- Turning ON/OFF of bit of the terminal, to which X14 signal is assigned through network as RS-485 communication, enables PID control.
||**Signal**|**Terminal**<br>**Used**|**Function**|**Description**|**Parameter Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input|X14|Depending<br>on<br>Pr. 178–184|PID control<br>selection|Turn on X14 to perform PID<br>control.�|Set "14" to any of<br>Pr. 178 to Pr. 184.|
||2|2|Set point input|Enter the set point for PID control.|Pr. 128 = 20, 21; Pr. 133 = 9999<br>Pr. 73 = 1�, 11<br>Pr. 73 = 0, 10|
|||||0–5 V ...............0–100%|Pr. 73 = 1�, 11|
|||||0–10 V.............0–100%|Pr. 73 = 0, 10|
||PU|—|Set point input|Set the set value (Pr. 133) from the<br>operation panel.|Pr. 128 = 20, 21;<br>Pr. 133 = 0–100%�|
||4|4|Measured value<br>input|Input the signal from the detector<br>(measured value signal).|Pr. 128 = 20, 21<br>Pr. 267 = 0�<br>Pr. 267 = 1<br>Pr. 267 = 2|
|||||4–20 mA ........0–100%|Pr. 267 = 0�|
|||||0–5 V ...............0–100%|Pr. 267 = 1|
|||||0–10 V.............0–100%|Pr. 267 = 2|
||Commu-<br>nication<br>�|—|Deviation value<br>input|Input the deviation value from<br>LONWORKS , CC-Link communica-<br>tion.|Pr. 128 = 50, 51|
||||Set value,<br>measured value<br>input|Input the set value and measured<br>value from LONWORKS, CC-Link com-<br>munication|Pr. 128 = 60, 61|
_**Tab. 6-113:** I/O signals and parameter settings (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 299
Special operation
Parameter
|**Signal**|**Signal**|**Terminal**<br>**Used**|**Function**|**Description**|**Parameter Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Output|FUP|Depending<br>on<br>Pr. 190–192|Upper limit out-<br>put|Output to indicate that the measured<br>value signal exceeded the upper limit<br>value (Pr. 131).|Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 60, 61<br>Pr. 131 9999<br>Set "15" or "115" to any of<br>Pr. 190–Pr. 192.<br>oa<br>®|
||FDN||Lower limit out-<br>put|Output when the measured value<br>signal falls below the lower limit (Pr.<br>132).|Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 60, 61<br>Pr. 132 9999<br>Set "14" or "114" to any of<br>Pr. 190–Pr. 192.<br>oa<br>®|
||RL||Forward<br>(reverse) rota-<br>tion direction<br>output|"Hi" is output to indicate that the out-<br>put indication of the parameter unit<br>is forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to<br>indicate that it is reverse rotation<br>(REV) or stop (STOP).|Set "16" or "116" to any of<br>Pr. 190–Pr. 192.|
||PID||During PID con-<br>trol<br>activated|Turns on during PID control.|Set "47" or "147" to any of<br>Pr. 190–Pr. 192.|
||SE|SE|Output<br>terminal<br>common|Common terminal for open collector<br>output terminal.||
_**Tab. 6-113:** I/O signals and parameter settings (2)_
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes PID control valid.
The half-tone screened areas indicate the parameter initial values.
Refer to the CC-Link communication option (FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E) instruction manual for the setting method from CC-Link communication.
Refer to the LONWORKS communication option (FR-A7NL-Ekit-SC-E) instruction manual for the setting method from LONWORKS communication.
- When "100" or larger value is set to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to section 6.10.5 for details.)
If Pr. 133 is used for the set point signal (setting 9999) any additional set point signal applied to # terminals 2-5 will be ignored.
## **NOTES**
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 6-178 for setting.)
6 - 300
Special operation
Parameter
## **PID control automatic switchover control (Pr. 127)**
For a fast system start-up at an operation start, the system can be started up in normal operation mode only at a start.
When the frequency is set to Pr. 127 "PID control automatic switchover frequency" within the range 0 to 400 Hz, the system starts up in normal operation mode from a start until Pr. 127 is reached, and then it shifts to PID control operation mode. Once the system has entered PID control operation, it continues PID control if the output frequency falls to or below Pr. 127.
**==> picture [372 x 147] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency<br>Normal PID control<br>operation<br>Time<br>I001234E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-153:** Automatic switchover to PID control_
## **PID monitor function**
The PID control set point, measured value and deviation value can be displayed on the operation panel and output from terminal AM.
Integral value indicating a negative % can be displayed on the deviation monitor. 0% is displayed as 1000. (The deviation monitor cannot be output from the terminal AM.)
For each monitor, set the following value in Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" and Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection".
|**Setting**|**Monitor Description**|**Minimum**<br>**Increment**|**Terminal AM**<br>**Full Scale**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|52|PID set point|0.1%|100%|—|
|53|PID measurement<br>value|0.1%|100%||
|54|PID deviation value|0.1%|—|Value cannot be output from the terminal AM.<br>The PID deviation value of 0% is displayed as<br>1000.|
_**Tab. 6-114:** PID monitor function_
## **Adjustment procedure**
**==> picture [301 x 167] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Adjust the PID control Fig. 6-154:<br>Parameter setting parameters Pr. 127 to Adjustment procedure<br>Pr. 134.<br>Set the I/O terminals for PID<br>Terminal setting control. (Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 and<br>Pr. 190 to Pr. 192.)<br>When X14 signal is not<br>Turn on the assigned, setting a value other<br>X14 signal than "0" in Pr. 128 activates PID<br>operation.<br>Operation<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 301
Special operation
Parameter
## **Calibration example**
## **Example**
**==> picture [432 x 659] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
| A detector of 4 mA at 0 °C and 20 mA at 50 °C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25 °C<br>under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0 to 5 V).<br>Start<br>=<br>Determination of set point Set the room temperature to 25 °C<br>Set Pr. 128 to "20" or "21", to enable PID control.<br>Determine the set point of what is<br>desired to be adjusted.<br>—<br>Conversion of set point into % Detector specifications<br>When 0 °C 4 mA and 50 °C 20 mA are used, the set point<br>Calculate the ratio of the set point to 25 °C is 50% on the assumption that 4 mA is 0% and 20 mA is<br>the detector output. 100%.<br>Make calibration. Make the calibration as described in the following section when<br>the target setting input (0 to 5 V) and detector output (4 to<br>20 mA) must be calibrated.<br>=<br>Setting of set point When the set point is 50%<br>As the terminal 2 specifications are 0% V and 100% V, input<br>Input a voltage across terminals 2-5 2.5 V to the terminal 2 for the set point of 50%.<br>according to the set value %.<br>Operation When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr.<br>129) to a slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a<br>—= slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999"<br>Set the proportional band (Pr. 129) to (no function), and while looking at the system operation, de-<br>a slightly larger value, the integral time crease the proportional band (Pr. 129) and increase the integral<br>(Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and time (Pr. 130).<br>the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999"<br>(no function), and turn on the start<br>signal.<br>=<br>Yes<br>Is the set point stable?<br>No<br>S T<br>Parameter adjustment Parameter optimization<br>To stabilize the measured value, change While the measured value is stable<br>the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a larg- throughout the operation status, the pro-<br>er value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a portional band (Pr. 129) an the integral<br>slightly longer time. time (Pr. 130) may be decreased.<br>Adjustment end<br>tt<br>I001237E<br> Fig. 6-155: Calibration example<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
A detector of 4 mA at 0 °C and 20 mA at 50 °C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25 °C under PID control. The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0 to 5 V).
6 - 302
Special operation
Parameter
## **Set point input calibration**
Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0 V) across terminals 2-5.
Enter in C2 (Pr. 902) the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0 Hz).
In C3 (Pr. 902), set the voltage value at 0%.
Apply the voltage of 100% set point (e.g. 5 V) to across terminals 2-5.
Enter in Pr. 125 the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 50 Hz).
In C4 (Pr. 903), set the voltage value at 100%.
## **Process value input calibration**
Apply the input current of 0% detector setting (e.g. 4 mA) across terminals 4-5.
Make calibration of the process value bias (%) using C6 (Pr. 904).
Apply the input current of 100% detector setting (e.g. 20 mA) across terminals 4-5.
Make calibration of the process value gain (%) using C7 (Pr. 905).
## **NOTE** | The frequency set in C5 (Pr. 904) and Pr. 126 should be the same as set in C2 (Pr. 902) and Pr. 125.
**==> picture [341 x 110] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Manipulated variable (Hz)<br>%<br>|-----—-—-—~- 100 |--—-—-——-—--— a<br>||<br>|| |<br>|<br>5|(V) Oa 20| (mA) °o 100 =<br>Deviation<br>Set point setting Process value Manipulated variable<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I000050C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-156:** Input calibration_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 303
Special operation
Parameter
## **NOTES**
If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL signal) or jog operation (jog signal) is entered with the X14 signal on, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or jog operation is started.
If the setting is as follows, PID control becomes invalid. Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" = "6" (switchover mode). When the inverter is at a stop with Pr. 261 "Power failure stop selection" selected.
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 903. (Pr. 1" Maximum frequency" and Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency" settings are also valid.)
The remote operation function is invalid during PID operation.
When the control is switched to PID control during normal operation, the frequency command value calculated by PID operation using 0 Hz as standard is used without the frequency during the operation.
**==> picture [210 x 142] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PID set point<br>Frequency<br>command<br>----- RT Frequency command<br>during normal operation<br>1 i<br>PID action<br>ON<br>Normal PID Normal<br>operation operation operation<br>Operation when control is switched to<br>PID control during normal operation<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
6 - 304
Special operation
Parameter
## **6.20.2 Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)**
Performs PID control by feedbacking the position detection of the dancer roller, controlling the dancer roller is in the specified position.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**44**|Second<br>acceleration/<br>deceleration time|FR-E720S-110SC or<br>less<br>FR-E740-095SC<br>or less|5 s|0–3600/<br>360 s|This parameter is the acceleration time of the main speed during<br>dancer control. It will not function as second acceleration/<br>deceleration time.||||59<br>73<br>79<br>178–184<br>190–192<br>C2 (Pr. 902)<br>–<br>C7 (Pr. 905)<br>Remote function<br>selection<br>Analog input<br>selection<br>Operation mode<br>selection<br>Input terminal<br>function selection<br>Output terminal<br>function selection)<br>Frequency setting<br>voltage (current)<br>bias/gain|6.6.3<br>6.16.1<br>6.18.1<br>6.10.1<br>6.10.5<br>6.16.3|
|||<br>FR-E740-120SC<br>and 170SC|10 s||||||||
|||FR-E740-230SC<br>and 300SC|15 s||||||||
|**45**|Second<br>deceleration time|<br>9999||0–3600/<br>360 s|This parameter is the deceleration time of the main speed during<br>dancer control. It will not function as second deceleration time.||||||
|||||9999|||||||
|**128**|PID action<br>selection|0||0|PID action is not performed||||||
|||||20|PID reverse action|Measured value (terminal 4)<br>Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)|||||
|||||21|PID forward action||||||
|||||40|PID reverse action|Addition<br>method:<br>fixed|For dancer control set<br>point (Pr. 133),<br>measured value<br>(terminal 4)<br>main speed (speed<br>command of the operation<br>mode)||||
|||||41|PID forward action||||||
|||||42|PID reverse action|Addition<br>method:<br>ratio|||||
|||||43|PID forward action||||||
|||||50|PID reverse action|Deviation value signal input<br>(LONWORKS, CC-Link communication)|||||
|||||51|PID forward action||||||
|||||60|PID reverse action|Set point and measured value input<br>(LONWORKS, CC-Link communication)|||||
|||||61|PID forward action||||||
|**129**|PID proportional<br>band�|100%||0.1<br>–<br>1000%|If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the<br>manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the<br>measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the<br>response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates,<br>e.g. hunting occurs.<br>Gain Kp = 1/proportional band||||||
|||||9999|No proportional control||||||
|**130**|PID integral time<br>�|1 s||0.1<br>–<br>3600 s|For deviation step input, time (Ti) required for only the integral (I)<br>action to provide the same manipulated variable as that for the<br>proportional (P) action. As the integral time decreases, the set<br>point is reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.||||||
|||||9999|No integral control.||||||
|**131**|PID upper limit|9999||0–100%|Maximum value<br>If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output.<br>The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value<br>(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.||||||
|||||9999|No function||||||
|**132**|PID lower limit|9999||0–100%|Minimum value<br>If the process value falls below the setting range, the FDN signal is<br>output. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured<br>value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.||||||
|||||9999|No function||||||
|**133**|PID action set<br>point�|9999||0–100%|Used to set the set point for PID control.||||||
|||||9999|Always 50%||||||
|**134**|PID differential<br>time�|9999||0.01<br>–<br>10.00 s|For deviation ramp input, time (Td) required for providing only the<br>manipulated variable for the proportional (P) action. As the<br>differential time increases, greater response is made to a deviation<br>change.||||||
|||||9999|No differential control.||||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
- This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 305
Special operation
Parameter
## **Dancer control block diagram**
**==> picture [377 x 225] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Acceleration/deceleration<br>of main speed<br>Main speed<br>command Target frequency<br>PID<br>op deviation Limit Acceleration/deceleration<br>PID control<br>Dancer roll<br>setting point P r. 128 = 42, 43 x4 a +<br>Pr. 133<br>M<br>PID set point PID feedback<br>3~<br>Convert to<br>0 to 100%<br>Potentiometer<br>Terminal 4 f_» ¥<br>Dancer roll position detection<br>I001840E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-157:** Dancer control block diagram_
The main speed can be selected from all operation mode such as external (analog voltage input, multi-speed), PU (digital frequency setting), communication (RS-485, CC-Link).
**Set point and measured value of PID control**
## **NOTES**
||**Input**|**Input Signal**|**Pr. 267**<br>**Current/Voltage Input**<br>**Switch**|**Current/Voltage Input**<br>**Switch**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Set point|Pr. 133|0–100%|—<br>—|—|
|Measured<br>value|When measured value is<br>input as current (4 to<br>20 mA).<br>a|4 mA ... 0%, 20 mA ... 100%<br>eee|0<br>eee||
||When measured value is<br>input as voltage (0 to ±5 V<br>or 0 to ±10 V).<br>a|0 V ... 0%, 5 V ... 100%<br>eee|1<br>2<br>eee||
|||0 V ... 0%, 10 V ... 100%<br>eee|||
_**Tab. 6-115:** Set point and measured value of PID control_
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 6-178 for setting.)
6 - 306
Special operation
Parameter
## **Dancer control overview**
Performs dancer control by setting 40 to 43 in Pr. 128 "PID action selection". The main speed command is the speed command of each operation mode (external, PU, Network). Performs PID control by the position detection signal of the dancer roller, then the result is added to the main speed command. For acceleration/deceleration of the main speed, set the acceleration time in Pr. 44 "Second acceleration/deceleration time" and the deceleration time in Pr. 45 "Second deceleration time".
Set 0s normally to Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" and Pr. 8 "Deceleration time". When the Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 setting is large, response of dancer control during acceleration/deceleration is slow.
**==> picture [337 x 152] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PID adding value<br>Main speed<br>Output frequency<br>Tme<br>ON<br>STF _ J<br>I001841E<br>Output frequency<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-158:** Signal overlay during dancer control_
## **Connection diagram**
The following figure shows a typical application example:
**==> picture [397 x 229] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Pr. 128 = 41<br>Pr. 182 = 14 L{}<br>Pr. 190 = 15 Cor<br>Pr. 191 = 14 |<br>Pr. 192 = 16<br>Power<br>supply<br>— OL3 w 9<br>Forward rotation © STF<br>Reverse rotation C) STR<br>PID control selection © RH (x14) @<br>Upper limit (FUP)<br>es ae<br>Potentiometer O10 © (FpN) FUO Lower limit (FDN)<br>1 k 1–2 W<br>2 LE<br>(Main spe<br>command) abs: SEQ<br>Feedback value of<br>dancer roll position Output signal common<br>———~T<br>I002140C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-159:** Example in source logic_
The main speed command differs according to each operation mode (external, PU, communication).
The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal selection" setting.
The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal selection" setting.
The AU signal need not be input.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 307
Special operation
Parameter
## **I/O signals and parameter setting**
Set "40 to 43" in Pr. 128 to perform dancer control.
Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" to assign PID control selection signal (X14) to turn the X14 signal on.
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes dancer control valid.
Input the set point using Pr. 133, then input the measured value signal (dancer roller position detection signal) across terminal 4 and 5 of the inverter.
## **NOTES**
When Pr. 128 = "0" or X14 signal is off, normal inverter operation is performed without dancer control.
Turning ON/OFF of bit of the terminal, to which X14 signal is assigned through network as RS-485 communication, enables dancer control.
|**Signal**|**Signal**|**Terminal**<br>**Used**|**Function**|**Description**|**Parameter Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input|X14|Depending<br>on<br>Pr. 178–184|PID control selec-<br>tion|Turn on X14 signal to perform<br>dancer control.|Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184.|
||4|4|Measured value<br>input|Input the signal from the dancer<br>roller detector (measured value sig-<br>nal).|Pr. 128 = 40, 41, 42, 43<br>Pr. 267 = 0<br>Pr. 267 = 1<br>Pr. 267 = 2|
|||||4–20 mA ........0–100%|Pr. 267 = 0|
|||||0–5 V ...............0–100%|Pr. 267 = 1|
|||||0–10 V.............0–100%|Pr. 267 = 2|
|Output|FUP|Depending<br>on<br>Pr. 190–192|Upper limit out-<br>put|Output to indicate that the meas-<br>ured value signal exceeded the<br>maximum value (Pr. 131).|Pr. 128 = 40, 41, 42, 43<br>Pr. 131 9999<br>Set "15" or "115" in any of Pr. 190<br>to Pr. 192.<br>x<br>®|
||FDN||Lower limit out-<br>put|Output when the measured value<br>signal falls below the minimum<br>value (Pr. 132).|Pr. 128 = 40, 41, 42, 43<br>Pr. 132 9999<br>Set "14" or "114" in any of Pr. 190<br>to Pr. 192.<br>x<br>®|
||RL||Forward (reverse)<br>rotation direction<br>output|Output is "ON" when the output<br>indication of the parameter unit is<br>forward rotation (FWD) and "OFF"<br>when reverse rotation (REV) or stop<br>(STOP).|Set "16" or "116" in any of Pr. 190<br>to Pr. 192.|
||PID<br>ee||During PID con-<br>trol activated|Turns on during PID control.|Set "47" or "147" in any of Pr. 190<br>to Pr. 192.|
||SE|SE|Output terminal<br>common|Common terminal for open collec-<br>tor output terminal.||
## _**Tab. 6-116:** I/O signals and parameter setting_
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes dancer control valid. The half-tone screened areas indicate the parameter initial values.
When 100 or larger value is set in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the terminal output has negative logic. (For details, refer to section 6.10.5.)
## **NOTES**
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 6-178 for setting.)
6 - 308
Special operation
Parameter
## **Parameter details**
When ratio (Pr. 128 = 42, 43) is selected for addition method, PID control × (ratio of main speed) is added to the main speed. The ratio is determined by the Pr. 125 "Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency" and C2 (Pr. 902) "Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency". The frequency setting signal is set to 0 to 50 Hz in the range between 0 to 100% in the initial setting. The ratio is (× 100%) when the main speed is 50 Hz and (× 50%) when 25 Hz.
**==> picture [353 x 129] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Initial value<br>50 Hz<br>Gain Pr. 125<br>Bias<br>C2<br>(Pr. 902) 0 Frequency setting signals 100%<br>I001894E<br>Output frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-160:** Signal calibration at terminal 2_
**NOTES** Even when C4 (Pr. 903) is set to other than 100%, the frequency setting signal is considered as 100%.
Even when C3 (Pr. 903) is set to other than 0%, the frequency setting signal is considered as 0%.
When C2 (Pr .902) is set to other than 0 Hz, the frequency setting signal is 0% when C2 (Pr. 902) is less than the set frequency.
Turning X14 signal on/off during operation by assigning X14 signal results in the following operation.
When X14 signal is on: Uses output frequency unchanged as the main speed command and continues operation by dancer control.
When X14 signal is off: Ends dancer control and continues operation at the set frequency made valid.
|**Pr. 128**|**PID Action**|**Addition**<br>**Method**|**Set Point**|**Measured Value**|**Main Speed Command**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|40|Reverse action|Fixed|Pr. 133|Terminal 4|Speed command for each<br>operation mode|
|41|Forward action|||||
|42|Reverse action|Ratio||||
|43|Forward action|||||
## _**Tab. 6-117:** PID control in dependence of parameter 128_
Action of Pr. 129 "PID proportional band", Pr. 130 "PID integral time", Pr. 131 "PID upper limit", Pr. 132 "PID lower limit", Pr. 134 "PID differential time is the same as PID control. For the relationship of controlled variable (%) of PID control and frequency, 0% is equivalent to the set frequency of Pr. 902 and 100% to Pr. 903.
For the Pr. 133 "PID action set point" setting, set frequency of Pr. 902 is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 to 100%. When 9999 is set in Pr. 133, 50% is the set point.
**NOTE**
Pr. 127 "PID control automatic switchover frequency" is invalid.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 309
Special operation
Parameter
## **Output signal**
Output terminal assignment during dancer control (PID control) operation PID signal turns on during dancer control (PID control) or at a stop by PID control (in the status PID operation being performed inside) (The signal is off during normal operation.)
For the terminal used for PID signal output, assign the function by setting "47 (positive logic) or 147 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
**NOTE**
Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184, Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 may affect the other functions. Make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
## **PID monitor function**
The PID control set point and measured value can be output to the operation panel monitor display and terminal AM.
For each monitor, set the following value in Pr. 52 "DU/PU main display data selection" and Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection".
|**Setting**|**Monitor**<br>**Description**|**Minimum**<br>**Increments**|**Terminal AM**<br>**Full Scale**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|52|PID set point|0.1%|100%|—|
|53|PID measured<br>value|0.1%|100%||
|54|PID deviation value|0.1%|—|Value cannot be output from the terminal AM.<br>The PID deviation value of 0% is displayed as<br>1000.|
_**Tab. 6-118:** PID monitor function_
## **Priorities of main speed command**
The priorities of the main speed speed command source when the speed command source is external are as follows.
JOG signal > multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > 16 bit digital input (option) > terminal 2
The priorities of the main speed speed command source when "3" is set in Pr. 79. Multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > set frequency (digital setting by PU, operation panel)
Terminal 4 can not be selected as the main speed speed command even when AU terminal is turned on.
Even when a remote operation function is selected by setting a value other than "0" in Pr. 59, compensation of the remote setting frequency to the main speed is ignored (changes to 0).
6 - 310
Special operation
Parameter
## **Dancer roller position detection signal adjustment**
When terminal 4 input is voltage input, 0 V is minimum position and 5 V (10 V) is maximum position. When current is input, 4 mA is minimum position and 20 mA is maximum position (initial value). When 0 to 7 V is output from the potentiometer, it is necessary to calibrate C7 (Pr. 905) at 7 V.
**==> picture [296 x 124] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Upper limit<br>position<br>Lower limit Potentiometer, etc.<br>position<br>Feedback value<br>I001843E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-161:** Dancer roller position detection signal adjustment_
**Example** � Control at a dancer center position using a 0 to 7 V potentiometer
- After changing the current/voltage input switch to "V", set "2" in Pr. 267 to change terminal 4 input to voltage input.
- Input 0 V to across terminal 4 and 5 to calibrate C6 (Pr. 904). (% display displayed at analog calibration is irrelevant to % of the feed back value.)
- By inputting 7 V to across terminal 4 to 5, calibrate C7 (Pr. 905). (% display displayed at analog calibration is irrelevant to % of the feed back value.)
- Set 50% in Pr. 133.
**NOTE** When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 6-178 for setting.)
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 311
Special operation
Parameter
## **NOTES**
In normal PID control, PID control is stopped when multi-speed operation signal (RH, RM, RL, REX signal) or JOG signal is input. In dancer control, however, PID control continues handling the signals as the main speed.
During dancer control, Second acceleration/deceleration time of Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are the parameters for acceleration/deceleration time setting to the main speed command source. They do not function as the second function.
When switchover mode is set with "6" in Pr. 79 , dancer control (PID control) is invalid.
Speed command of terminal 4 input from terminal AU is invalid when dancer control is selected.
Acceleration/deceleration of the main speed command is the same operation as when frequency command is increased/decreased by analog input.
- Therefore, SU signal remains on even if the starting signal is turned on/off (always in the constant speed state).
- The DC brake operation starting frequency when turning off the starting signal is not Pr. 10 but a smaller value of either Pr. 13 or 0.5 Hz.
The set frequency monitor is always variable as "main speed command+PID control".
The main speed setting frequency accelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 and the output frequency accelerates/decelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8. Therefore, when the set time of Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 is longer than Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, the output frequency accelerates/decelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
For the integral term limit, a smaller value of either the PID manipulated variable (%) value converted from the linear, interpolated Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" with Pr. 902 and Pr. 903, or 100% is used for limit. Although the output frequency is limited by the minimum frequency, operation limit of the integral term is not performed.
6 - 312
Special operation
Parameter
## **6.20.3 Droop control (Pr. 286 to Pr. 287) AD MFVC**
This function is designed to balance the load in proportion to the load torque to provide the speed drooping characteristic under advanced magnetic flux vector control. This function is effective for balancing the load when using multiple inverters.
**Refer to Pr. No. Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Section** 0 Droop control is invalid 1 Maximum frequency 6.4.1 (Normal operation) PID control 6.20.1 **286** Droop gain 0% Droop control is valid 0.1–100% Drooping amount at the rated torque as a percentage with respect to the rated motor frequency. **287** Droop filter time constant 0.3 s 0–1 s Time constant of the filter applied on the torque current. ~~ee~~ The output frequency is changed according to the magnitude of torque current under advanced magnetic flux vector control. The drooping amount at the rated torque is set by the droop gain as a percentage using the rated frequency as a reference. The maximum droop compensation frequency is 120 Hz. Frequency command Droop compensation frequency Droop gain Torque 100% 0 100% _I001627E_ ~~=~~ _**Fig. 6-162:** Droop control_ Droop compensation frequency = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Torque current after filtering **-** ---------------------------------------------------------------Rated motor frequency -----------------------------Droop gain **-** Rated value of base frequency 100 **NOTES** Set the droop gain to about the rated slip of the motor. – Rated slip = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Synchronous speed at base frequency Rated speed **-** 100 [%] Synchronous speed at base frequency Droop control is invalid during PID control operation. The maximum value of frequency after droop compensation is either 120 Hz or Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency", whichever is smaller.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 313
Special operation
Parameter
## **6.20.4 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886)**
This function detects a regeneration status and increases the frequency to avoid the regeneration status.
Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the frequency and continue operation if the fan happens to rotate faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**882**|Regeneration avoidance<br>operation selection|0||0|Regeneration avoidance function invalid|
|||||1|Regeneration avoidance function is always valid|
|||||2|Regeneration avoidance function is valid only<br>during a constant speed operation|
|**883**|Regeneration avoidance<br>operation level|200 V<br>class|400 V|300–800 V|Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration<br>avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level is<br>set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to<br>occur. However, the actual deceleration time<br>increases. The set value ust be higher than the<br>power supply voltage x 2.|
|||400 V<br>class|780 V|||
|**885**|Regeneration avoidance<br>compensation frequency<br>limit value|6 Hz||0–10 Hz|Set the limit value of frequency which rises at<br>activation of regeneration avoidance function.|
|||||9999|Frequency limit invalid|
|**886**|Regeneration avoidance<br>voltage gain|100%||0–200%|Responsiveness at activation of regeneration<br>avoidance. A larger setting will improve<br>responsiveness to the bus voltage change.<br>However, the output frequency could become<br>unstable. When vibration is not suppressed by<br>decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value<br>in Pr. 665.|
|**665**|Regeneration avoidance<br>frequency gain|100%||0–200%||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
6 - 314
Special operation
Parameter
## **What is regeneration avoidance function? (Pr. 882, Pr. 883)**
When the regeneration status is serious, the DC bus voltage rises and an overvoltage alarm (E.OV�) may occur. When this bus voltage rise is detected and the bus voltage level reaches or exceeds Pr. 883, increasing the frequency avoids the regeneration status.
The regeneration avoidance function is always on when "1" is set in Pr. 882 and activated only during a constant speed when "2" is set in Pr. 882.
**==> picture [395 x 123] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Regeneration avoidance operation Regeneration avoidance operation Regeneration avoidance operation<br>example for acceleration example for constant speed example for deceleration<br>Pr. 883 Pr. 883 Pr. 883<br>Time Time<br>Time<br>During regeneration avoidance<br>function operation During regeneration avoidance<br>During regeneration avoidance function function operation<br>operation<br>I001257E<br>[V DC] [V DC] [V DC]<br>Bus voltage Bus voltage Bus voltage<br>Output Output Output<br>frequency [Hz] frequency [Hz] frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-163:** Regeneration avoidance function_
**NOTES** The inclination of the frequency increased or decreased by the regeneration avoidance function changes depending on the regeneration status.
The DC bus voltage of the inverter is normally about �2 times greater than the input voltage (when the input voltage is 220 V, the bus voltage is about 311 V DC and when the input voltage is 440 V AC, the bus voltage is about 622 V DC). However, it varies with the input power supply waveform.
The Pr. 883 setting should be kept higher than the DC bus voltage level. Otherwise, the regeneration avoidance function is always on.
While overvoltage stall (oL) stops the output frequency during deceleration, the regeneration avoidance function is always on and increases the frequency according to the regeneration amount.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 315
Special operation
Parameter
## **Limit regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr. 885)**
You can limit the output frequency compensated for (increased) by the regeneration avoidance function.
The frequency is limited to the output frequency (frequency prior to regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr. 885 "Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value" during acceleration or constant speed. If the regeneration avoidance frequency exceeds the limit value during deceleration, the limit value is held until the output frequency falls to 1/2 of Pr. 885.
When the regeneration avoidance frequency has reached Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency", it is limited to the maximum frequency.
When Pr. 885 is set to "9999", the frequency setting is invalid.
**==> picture [315 x 87] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 6-164:<br>Restriction level Limit the output frequency<br>Output frequency<br>Pr. 885<br>JS Pr. 885/2<br>Time<br>Output<br>frequency [Hz]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001260E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **Regeneration avoidance function adjustment (Pr. 665, Pr. 886)**
If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886 "Regeneration avoidance voltage gain". Reversely, if sudden regeneration causes an overvoltage alarm, increase the setting.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665 "Regeneration avoidance frequency gain".
## **NOTES**
- When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, "oL" (overvoltage stall) is displayed and the OL signal is output. Set the operation pattern at an OL signal output using Pr. 156 "Stall prevention operation selection". Set the output timing of the OL signal using Pr. 157 "OL signal output timer".
When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, stall prevention is also activated at the same time.
The regeneration avoidance function cannot shorten the actual deceleration time taken to stop the motor. The actual deceleration time depends on the regeneration energy consumption capability. When shortening the deceleration time, consider using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, FRCV, FR-HC) and brake resistor (FR-ABR etc.) to consume regeneration energy at constant speed.
When using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, FR-CV, FR-HC) and brake resistor (FR-ABR etc.), set Pr. 882 to "0" (initial value) (regeneration avoidance function invalid). When using the regeneration unit, etc. to consume regeneration energy at deceleration, set Pr. 882 to "2" (regeneration avoidance function valid only at a constant speed).
6 - 316
Useful functions
Parameter
## **6.21 Useful functions**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|To determine the maintenance time of<br>parts.|Cooling fan operation selection|Pr. 244|6.21.1|
||Inverter part life display|Pr. 255–Pr. 259|6.21.2|
||Maintenance output function|Pr. 503–Pr. 504|6.21.3|
|Freely available parameter|Current average value monitor signal|Pr. 555–Pr. 557|6.21.4|
|Increase cooling fan life|Free parameter|Pr. 888–Pr. 889|6.21.5|
## **6.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)**
You can control the operation of the cooling fan (FR-E720S-050SC or more, FR-E740-040SC or more) built in the inverter.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**244**|Cooling fan operation<br>selection|1|0|Operates at power on<br>Cooling fan on/off control invalid (The cooling fan<br>is always on at power on)||190–192<br>Output terminal<br>function selection|6.10.5|
||||1<br>|Cooling fan on/off control valid<br>The fan is always on while the inverter is running.<br>During a stop, the inverter status is monitored<br>and the fan switches on-off according to the<br>temperature of the heatsink.||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, "FN" is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault "FAN" and alarm "LF" signals are output.
Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power on.
Pr. 244 = "1"
When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the inverter is running.
For the terminal used for FAN signal output, set "25" (source logic) or "125" (sink logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", and for the LF signal, set "98" (source logic) or "198" (sink logic).
**NOTE** When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 317
Useful functions
Parameter
## **6.21.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)**
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit and can be diagnosed by monitor.
When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault. (Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life except the main circuit capacitor is calculated theoretically.) For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method shown on page 6-321 is not performed.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**255**|Life alarm status display|0|(0–15)|Display whether the control circuit capacitor,<br>main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts<br>of the inrush current limit circuit has reached the<br>life alarm output level or not.<br>Reading only|
|**256**|Inrush current limit circuit<br>life display|100%|(0–100%)|Display the deterioration degree of the inrush<br>current limit circuit. Reading only|
|**257**|Control circuit capacitor life<br>display|100%|(0–100%)|Display the deterioration degree of the control<br>circuit capacitor. Reading only|
|**258**|Main circuit capacitor life<br>display|100%|(0–100%)|Display the deterioration degree of the main<br>circuit capacitor. Reading only<br>The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.|
|**259**|Main circuit capacitor life<br>measuring|0|0/1<br>(2/3/8/9)|Setting "1" and switching the power supply off<br>starts the measurement of the main circuit<br>capacitor life (refer to the following pages).<br>When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after powering on<br>again, the measuring is completed. Read the<br>deterioration degree in Pr. 258.|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **NOTE**
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided.
6 - 318
Useful functions
Parameter
## **Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr. 255)**
Whether any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit has reached the life alarm output level or not can be checked by Pr. 255 "Life alarm status display" and life alarm signal (Y90).
- Read the setting of parameter 255.
**==> picture [413 x 207] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Call up Pr. 255 Read the setting of Pr. 255<br>The bit image is displayed in<br>decimal.<br>I001262E<br> Fig. 6-165: Read parameter 255<br>� When the life alarm output level is reached, the bits are set as follows.<br>Control circuit capacitor life<br>Main circuit capacitor life<br>Cooling fan life<br>Inrush current limit circuit life<br>I001261E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-165:** Read parameter 255_
_**Fig. 6-166:** Bits of parameter 255_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 319
Useful functions
Parameter
|**Pr. 255**<br>**(Decimal)**|**Bits**<br>**(Binary)**|**Inrush Current**<br>**Limit Circuit Life**|**Cooling Fan Life**|**Main Circuit**<br>**Capacitor Life**|**Control Circuit**<br>**Capacitor Life**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|15|1111|✔|✔|✔|✔|
|14|1110|✔|✔|✔|—|
|13|1101|✔|✔|—|✔|
|12|1100|✔|✔|—|—|
|11|1011|✔|—|✔|✔|
|10|1010|✔|—|✔|—|
|9|1001|✔|—|—|✔|
|8|1000|✔|—|—|—|
|7|0111|—|✔|✔|✔|
|6|0110|—|✔|✔|—|
|5|0101|—|✔|—|✔|
|4|0100|—|✔|—|—|
|3|0011|—|—|✔|✔|
|2|0010|—|—|✔|—|
|1|0001|—|—|—|✔|
|0|0000|—|—|—|—|
_**Tab. 6-119:** Displaying the end of service life by bits_
- ✔: End of the service life is reached
- —: End of the service life is not reached
The life alarm signal (Y90) turns on when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (source logic) or "190" (sink logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
## **NOTE**
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
## **Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr. 256)**
The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr. 259.
The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 times) every 1%/10,000 times. As soon as 10% (900,000 times) is reached, Pr. 255 bit 3 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
## **Control circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 257)**
The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 257 as a life.
In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energizing time and temperature of the inverter’s heatsink, and is counted down from 100%. As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10%, Pr. 255 bit 0 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
6 - 320
Useful functions
Parameter
## **Main circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 258, Pr. 259)**
The deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 258 as a life.
On the assumption that the main circuit capacitor capacitance at factory shipment is 100%, the capacitor life is displayed in Pr. 258 every time measurement is made. When the measured value falls to or below 85%, Pr. 255 bit 1 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the capacitor capacity.
- Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
- Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259.
- Switch power off. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is off.
- After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is off, power on again.
- Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, read Pr 258, and check the deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor.
|**Pr. 259**|**Description**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|
|0|No measurement|Initial value|
|1|Measurement start|Measurement starts when the power supply is<br>switched off.|
|2|During measurement|Only displayed and cannot be set|
|3|Measurement complete||
|8|Forced end<br>(see�,�,�,�below)||
|9|Measurement error<br>(see�,�,�below)||
## _**Tab. 6-120:** Parameter 259_
When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error" (Pr. 259 = "9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1"). Therefore, do not measure in such case. In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is confirmed under the following conditions, normal measurement can not be done.
- FR-HC or FR-CV is connected.
- DC power supply is connected to the terminal P/+ and N/ � .
- The power supply switched on during measurement.
- The motor is not connected to the inverter.
- The motor is running. (The motor is coasting.)
- The motor capacity is two ranks (or more) smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
- The inverter is at an alarm stop or an alarm occurred while power is off.
- The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
- The start command is given while measuring.
- The parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected.
- Use terminal PC as power supply.
- I/O terminal of the control terminal block and plug-in option is on (continuity).
- Plug-in option is fitted. (FR-E720S-050SC or less, FR-E740-026SC or less)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 321
Useful functions
Parameter
Turning the power on during measuring before LED of the operation panel turns off, it may remain in "measuring" (Pr. 259 = "2") status. In such case, carry out operation from step 2) .
## **NOTE**
**==> picture [41 x 35] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
P<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3 hrs passed since the turn off of the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.
## **WARNING:**
_**When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 "Main circuit capacitor life measuring" = 1), the DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1 s at powering off. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering off to prevent an electric shock.**_
## **Cooling fan life display**
The cooling fan speed of 40% or less is detected and "FN" is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). As an alarm display, Pr. 255 bit 2 is turned on and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
## **NOTE**
When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50% or less.
6 - 322
Useful functions
Parameter
## **6.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)**
When the cumulative energizing time of the inverter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer output signal (Y95) is output. "MT" is displayed on the operation panel. This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**503**|Maintenance timer|0|0 (1–9998)|Display the cumulative energizing time of the<br>inverter in 100h increments.<br>Reading only<br>Writing the setting of "0" clears the cumulative<br>energizing time.||190–192<br>Output terminal<br>function selection|6.10.5|
|**504**|Maintenance timer alarm<br>output set time|9999|0–9998|Set the time taken until when the maintenance<br>timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.||||
||||9999|No function||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
**==> picture [369 x 133] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
First power ON<br>99998<br>(999800 h)<br>Maintenance timer Set "0" in Pr. 503<br>(Pr. 503)<br>Pr. 504<br>Y95 signal Time<br>("MT" display) OFF ON OFF ON<br>I001263E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-167:** Maintenance timer_
The cumulative energizing time of the inverter is stored into the E²PROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 503 "Maintenance timer" in 100 h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800 h).
When the Pr. 503 value reaches the time set to Pr. 504 "Maintenance timer alarm output set time" (100 h increments), the maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95" (source logic) or "195" (sink logic) to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection".
## **NOTES**
The cumulative energizing time is counted every hour. The energizing time of less than 1h is not counted.
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 323
Useful functions
Parameter
## **6.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)**
The average value of the output current during constant speed operation and the maintenance timer value are output as a pulse to the current average value monitor signal (Y93). The pulse width output to the I/O module of the PLC or the like can be used as a guideline due to abrasion of machines and elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of devices to know the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as pulse for 20 s as 1 cycle and repeatedly output during constant speed operation.
**==> picture [323 x 172] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
PLC<br>Output unit Input unit Inverter<br>Maintenance<br>time<br>> LBL<br>JUL<br>Parts have<br>reached their life!<br>C2<br>I001940E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-168:** Monitoring the maintenance timer and current average value_
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**555**|Current average time|1 s|0.1–1.0 s|Set the time taken to average the current during<br>start bit output (1 s).|
|**556**|Data output mask time|0s|0.0–20.0 s|Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient<br>state data.|
|**557**|Current average value<br>monitor signal output<br>reference current|Rated inverter<br>current|0–500 A|Set the reference (100%) for outputting the<br>signal of the current average value.|
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
BF 6 - 324
Useful functions
Parameter
The pulse output of the current average value monitor signal (Y93) is shown below.
**==> picture [334 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency From acceleration to constant speed operation<br>Time<br>1 cycle (20 s) Next cycle<br>Y93<br>Data output mask time End pulse<br>When the speed has changed to constant from accel- output as low pulse shape for<br>eration/deceleration, Y93 signal is not output for Pr. 1 to 16.5 s<br>556 time.<br>Maintenance timer pulse<br>Start pulse The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output as Hi<br>Output as Hi pulse shape for 1 s (fixed) output pulse shape for 2 to 9 s (16000 h to 72000 h).<br>Time and output current set in Pr. 555 are averaged Signal output time = Pr. 503----------------------------------------- � 1000 h - � 5s<br>40000 h<br>Output current average value pulse<br>The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for 0.5 to 9 s<br>(10 to 180%) during start bit output.<br>Signal output time = Output current average value [A]--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- - � 5s<br>Pr. 557 [A]<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001265E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-169:** Output of the pulse signal Y93_
For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93" (positive logic) or "193" (negative logic) to Pr. 190 "RUN terminal function selection". The function can not be assigned to Pr. 192 "ABC terminal function selection".
Setting of Pr. 556 "Data output mask time"
The output current is unstable (transient state) right after the operation is changed from the acceleration/deceleration state to the constant speed operation. Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data in Pr. 556.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 325
Useful functions
Parameter
Setting of the Pr. 555 "Current average time"
The average output current is calculated during Hi output of start bit (1 s). Set the time taken to average the current during start bit output in Pr. 555.
Setting of Pr. 557 "Current average value monitor signal output reference current"
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value. Obtain the time of the low pulse after a fixed start pulse of 1 s from the following calculation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Output current average value **-** x 5 s (output current average value 100%/5 s) Pr. 557
Note that the output time range is 0.5 to 9 s, and it is 0.5 s when the output current average value is less than 10% of the setting value of Pr. 557 and 9s when it exceeds 180%.
## _**Fig. 6-170:**_
**==> picture [397 x 77] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(s) Signal output time for the current average value<br>-) eee<br>os |<br>10 180 (%)<br>I001266E<br>Output current average value<br>time<br>Signal output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
> **Example** V When Pr. 557 = 10 A and the average value of output current is 15 A, the current average value monitor signal is output as low pulse shape for 7.5 s.
Signal output time = 15 A---------- **-** x 5s = 7.5 s 10 A
Output of Pr. 503 "Maintenance timer"
After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape, the maintenance timer value is output as high pulse shape. The output time of the maintenance timer value is obtained from the following calculation.
Pr. 503-----------------x ----------100 x 5s (Maintenance timer value 100%/5 s) 40000 h
_**Fig. 6-171:**_
**==> picture [385 x 78] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(s) Signal output time for the maintenance output<br>value<br>re<br>16000 72000 (h)<br>Maintenance timer value<br>time<br>Signal output<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001267E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
Note that the output time range is 2 to 9 s, and it is 2 s when Pr. 503 is less than16000 h and 9 s when it exceeds 72000 h.
6 - 326
Useful functions
Parameter
## **NOTES**
Mask of data output and sampling of output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration.
When the speed is changed to acceleration/deceleration from constant speed during start bit output, the data is judged as invalid, the start bit is output as high pulse shape for 3.5 s, and the end signal is output as low pulse shape for 16.5 s. The signal is output for at least 1 cycle even when acceleration/deceleration state continues after the start bit output is completed.
**==> picture [277 x 126] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Output frequency The speed is changed to deceleration from the<br>constant speed during start bit output<br>Time<br>Previous cycle Invalid cycle (20s) Next cycle<br>Y93<br>Start bit End signal<br>Output as high pulse shape Output as low pulse shape for<br>for 3.5 s 16.5 s<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
When the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0 A on completion of the 1 cycle signal output, the signal is not output until the speed becomes constant next time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as low pulse shape for 20 s (without data output) under the following condition:
- When the motor is in the acceleration/deceleration state on completion of the 1 cycle signal output.
- When 1-cycle signal output was ended during restart operation with the setting of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57 � 9999).
- When automatic restart operation was being performed with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selected (Pr. 57 � 9999) on completion of the data output mask.
When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection", the other functions may be affected. Please make setting after confirming the function of each terminal.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 327
Useful functions
Parameter
## **6.21.5 Free parameters (Pr. 888, Pr. 889)**
Parameters you can use for your own purposes. You can input any number within the setting range "0" to "9999".
For example, the number can be used:
- As a unit number when multiple units are used.
- As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
- As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**888**|Free parameter 1|9999|0–9999|Any values can be set. Data is held even if the||—||
|**889**|Free parameter 2|9999|0–9999|inverter power is turned off.||||
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
**NOTE** Pr. 888 and Pr. 889 do not influence the inverter operation.
6 - 328
Setting for the parameter unit, operation panel
Parameter
## **6.22 Setting for the parameter unit, operation panel**
|**Purpose**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Parameters that must be set**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Selection of rotation direction by the<br>RUN key of the operation panel|RUN key rotation direction selection|Pr. 40|6.22.1|
|Switch the display language of the<br>parameter unit|PU display language selection|Pr. 145|6.22.2|
|Use the setting dial of the operation<br>panel like a volume for frequency set-<br>ting.<br>Key lock of operation panel|Operation panel operation selection|Pr. 161|6.22.3|
|Change the magnitude of change of<br>frequency setting by the setting dial of<br>the operation panel|Magnitude of frequency change setting|Pr. 295|6.22.4|
|Control of the parameter unit buzzer|PU buzzer control|Pr. 990|6.22.5|
|Adjust LCD contrast of the parameter<br>unit|PU contrast adjustment|Pr. 991|6.22.6|
## **6.22.1 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40)**
Used to choose the direction of rotation by operating the RUN key of the operation panel.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**40**|RUN key rotation direction<br>selection|0|0|Forward rotation||—||
||||1|Reverse rotation||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
## **6.22.2 PU display language selection (Pr. 145)**
By using parameter 145 you can select the display language for the parameter unit FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**145**|PU display language<br>selection|1|0|Japanese||—||
||||1|English||||
||||2|German||||
||||3|French||||
||||4|Spanish||||
||||5|Italian||||
||||6|Swedish||||
||||7|Finnish||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 329
Setting for the parameter unit, operation panel
Parameter
## **6.22.3 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation selection (Pr. 161)**
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used like a potentiometer to perform operation. The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Description**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**161**|Frequency setting/key lock<br>operation selection|0|0|Setting dial<br>frequency setting<br>mode|Key lock mode invalid|
||||1|Setting dial<br>potentiometer<br>mode||
||||10|Setting dial<br>frequency setting<br>mode|Key lock mode valid<br>These setting must be<br>confirmed by pressing the<br>MODE key for about 2s.|
||||11|Setting dial<br>potentiometer<br>mode||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
**NOTES** You can find a detailed description of the operation panel with examples in section 4.3 "Operation Panel".
When the setting dial and key operation is made invalid, "HOLD" appears on the operation panel while pressing a key.
The STOP/RESET key is valid even in the operation lock status.
6 - 330
Setting for the parameter unit, operation panel
Parameter
## **6.22.4 Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)**
When setting the set frequency with the setting dial, frequency changes in 0.01 Hz increments in the initial status. Setting this parameter increases the magnitude of frequency which changes according to the rotated amount of the setting dial, improving operability.
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**<br>**I**|**nitial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**|**Parameters referred to**<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**<br>—<br>e|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**295**|Magnitude of frequency<br>change setting|0|0|Function invalid|||
||||0.01|The minimum varying width when the set<br>frequency is changed by the setting dial can b<br>set.|||
||||0.10||||
||||1.00||||
||||10.00||||
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0.
The above parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
**Example** � When "1.00 Hz" is set in Pr. 295, one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in increments of 1.00 Hz -> 2.00 Hz -> 3.00 Hz.
**==> picture [383 x 72] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1 click 2 clicks 3 clicks<br>One rotation of the setting dial equals to 24 clicks (24 dial gauges).<br>I001844E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-172:** Magnitude when parameter 295 is set to "1.00"_
�
**NOTES** When machine speed display is selected with Pr. 37, the minimum increments of the magnitude of change is determined by Pr. 295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ as speed setting changes the set machine speed and converts it to the speed display again.
When the set frequency (speed) is 100 or more, frequency is displayed in 0.1 increments. Therefore, the minimum varying width is 0.1 even when Pr. 295 < 0.1.
When the machine speed setting is 1000 or more, frequency is displayed in 1 increments. Therefore, the minimum varying width is 1 even when Pr. 295 < 1.
For Pr. 295, unit is not displayed.
This parameter is valid only in the set frequency mode. When other frequency-related parameters are set, it is not activated.
When 10 is set, frequency setting changes in 10 Hz increments. Note the excess speed (in potentiometer mode).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 331
Setting for the parameter unit, operation panel
Parameter
**6.22.5 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)**
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press the key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
**Refer to Pr. No. Name Initial Value Setting Range Description Parameters referred to Section** 0 Without buzzer — **990** PU buzzer control 1 1 With buzzer ~~a~~ The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 "User group read selection" = 0. The above parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
## **6.22.6 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991)**
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be performed. Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light. You should press the WRITE key to store the PU contrast setting.
|The above parameter is displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit FR-PU04/<br>**Pr. No.**<br>**Name**<br>**Initial Value**<br>**Setting Range**<br>**Description**<br>**Parameters referred to**<br>**991**<br>PU contrast adjustment<br>58<br>0–63<br>Light<br>63: Dark<br>—<br>a:|The above parameter is displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit FR-PU04/<br>**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|
The above parameter is displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit FR-PU04/ FR-PU07 is connected.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
6 - 332
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **6.23 MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)**
The MODBUS®/TCP protocol allows transmission of MODBUS messages via Ethernet communication.
## **Communication specifications**
- The communication specifications are given below.
|**Item**|**Item**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|Communication protocol||MODBUS®/TCP protocol|
|Conforming standard||Open MODBUS®/TCP specification|
|Waiting time setting||Not used|
|Maximum number of connections||3|
|Slave function (server)|Number of simultaneously<br>acceptable request messages|1|
_**Tab. 6-121:** MODBUS®/TCP communication specifications_
## **Initial setting**
- To select MODBUS®/TCP for the application, set "0" in any of Pr. 833 to Pr. 835 "Ethernet function selection 1 to 3". (Refer to page 6-285.)
- To limit the network devices that send the operation or speed command through the Ethernet network (MODBUS®/TCP), set the range of IP addresses (Pr. 844 to Pr. 849). (Refer to page 6-289.)
- Set the interval of the communication check (signal loss detection) time in Pr. 852 "Ethernet communication check time interval" for all devices with IP addresses in the range specified for "Ethernet command source selection" (Pr.844 to Pr.849). (Refer to page 6-290.)
## **Message format**
- Query
A message is sent to the slave (the inverter) having the address specified by the master.
- Normal response
After the query from the master is received, the slave executes the request function, and returns the corresponding normal response to the master.
- Error response
- When an invalid function code, address or data is received by the slave, the error response is returned to the master.
- This response is appended with an error code that indicates the reason why the request from the master could not be executed.
- This response cannot be returned for errors, detected by the hardware, frame error and header check error.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 333
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Message frame (protocol)**
- Communication method
Basically, the master sends a query message (inquiry), and slaves return a response message (response). At normal communication, the transaction identifier, protocol identifier, unit identifier, and function code are copied as they are, and at erroneous communication (illegal function code or data code), bit 7 (H80) of the function code is turned ON, and the error code is set at data bytes.
**==> picture [347 x 149] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Query messages from master<br>Transaction identifier Transaction identifier<br>Protocol identifier Protocol identifier<br>Length field Length field<br>Unit identifier Unit identifier<br>Function code Function code<br>i<br>Eight-bit Eight-bit<br>Data bytes Data bytes<br>Response message from slave<br>I001228E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 6-173:** Data interchange_
Message frames comprise the six message fields shown in the figures above.
- Details of protocol
The following table explains the six message fields.
|**Nachrichtenfeld**|**Beschreibung**|
|---|---|
|Transaction identifier|The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.<br>The same data is returned in the response from the slave.|
|Protocol identifie|Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response message.)<br>0 is returned in the response from the slave.|
|Length field|The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.|
|Unit identifier|Fixed to 255|
|Function code|1 to 255 can be set in single byte length (8 bits) for the function code. The master sets the func-<br>tion to be sent to the slave as the request, and the slave performs the requested operation.<br>"Function code list" summarizes the supported function codes. An error response is generated<br>when a function code other than "Function code list" is set.<br>At a response from the slave, the function code set by the master is returned in the case of a<br>normal response. At an error response, H80 and the function code are returned.|
|Data|The format changes according the function code. (Refer to page 6-336.) The data, for example,<br>includes the byte count, number of bytes, and accessing content of holding registers.|
_**Tab. 6-122:** Structure of the protocol_
6 - 334
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Function code list**
|**Function name**|**Read/**<br>**write**|**Code**|**Outline**|**Message**<br>**format**<br>**Refer to**<br>**page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Read holding<br>register|Read|H03|The data of the holding registers is read.<br>The various data of the inverter can be read from MODBUS®<br>registers.<br>System environmental variable (Refer to page 6-345.)<br>Real time monitor (Refer to page 6-140.)<br>Faults history (Refer to page 6-348.)<br>Inverter parameters (Refer to page 6-347.)|6-336|
|Preset single<br>register|Write|H06|Data is written to a holding register.<br>Data can be written to MODBUS® registers to output instructions<br>to the inverter or set parameters.<br>System environmental variable (Refer to page 6-345.)<br>Inverter parameters (Refer to page 6-347.)|6-338|
|Diagnostics|Read|H08|Functions are diagnosed. (communication check only)<br>A communication check can be made since the query message is<br>sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return mes-<br>sage (subfunction code H00 function).<br>Subfunction code H00 (Return query data)|6-339|
|Preset multiple<br>registers|Write|H10|Data is written to multiple consecutive holding registers.<br>Data can be written to consecutive multiple MODBUS® registers to<br>output instructions to the inverter or set parameters.<br>System environmental variable (Refer to page 6-345.)<br>Inverter parameters (Refer to page 6-347.)|6-340|
|Read holding<br>register access log|Read|H46|The number of registers that were successfully accessed by the<br>previous communication is read.<br>Queries by function codes H03 and H10 are supported.<br>The number and start address of holding registers successfully<br>accessed by the previous communication are returned.<br>"0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries<br>other than function code H03 and H10.<br>When the connection is closed, the data in the log is cleared.|6-342|
_**Tab. 6-123:** Function codes_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 335
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Read holding register (reading data of holding registers) (H03 or 03)**
● Query message
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>**Length field**<br>**Unit**<br>**identifier**<br>**Function**<br>**Starting**<br>**address**<br>**No. of points**<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits)<br>H03<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>oe j*<br>f<br>(|? Je<br>|?<br>fe |<br>a aee|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>**Length field**<br>**Unit**<br>**identifier**<br>**Function**<br>**Starting**<br>**address**<br>**No. of points**<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits)<br>H03<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>oe j*<br>f<br>(|? Je<br>|?<br>fe |<br>a aee|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>**Length field**<br>**Unit**<br>**identifier**<br>**Function**<br>**Starting**<br>**address**<br>**No. of points**<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits)<br>H03<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>oe j*<br>f<br>(|? Je<br>|?<br>fe |<br>a aee|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>**Length field**<br>**Unit**<br>**identifier**<br>**Function**<br>**Starting**<br>**address**<br>**No. of points**<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits)<br>H03<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>oe j*<br>f<br>(|? Je<br>|?<br>fe |<br>a aee|
|---|---|---|---|
|●Normal response (Response message)||||
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>**Length field**<br>**Unit**<br>**identifier**<br>a||**Function**|**Byte**<br>**count**<br>**Data**|
|H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits)||H03<br>(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)<br>H<br>(8 Bits)<br>L<br>(8 Bits)<br>...<br>(n × 16<br>Bits)|
● Query message setting
|**Message**<br>ee|**Message**<br>ee|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|ee<br>Ca|Transaction identifier<br>ee<br>Ca|The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.<br>The same data is returned in the response from the slave.|
|Ca|Protocol Identifier<br>Ca|Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response<br>message.)<br>0 is returned in the response from the slave.|
|a|Length field<br>a|The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.|
|a<br>nd|Unit identifier<br>a<br>nd|Fixed to 255|
|a<br>nd|Function<br>a<br>nd|Set H03.|
|nd|Starting address<br>nd|Set the holding register address from which to start reading the data.<br>Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001<br>For example, when start register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register address<br>40002 is read.|
|nd<br>CD|No. of points<br>nd<br>CD|Set the number of holding registers for reading data. Data can be read from up to 125<br>registers.<br>CD|
_**Tab. 6-124:** Explanation of the query message_
● Content of normal response
|**Message**<br>ee|**Message**<br>ee|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|ee|Byte count<br>ee|The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).<br>Twice the number of reads specified by<br>is set.|
|Ce|Data<br>Ce|The amount of data specified by<br>is set. Read data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo<br>bytes, and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start<br>address+2, and so forth.|
_**Tab. 6-125:** Explanation of the normal response_
6 - 336
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Example** �
Read the register values of 41004 (Pr. 4) to 41006 (Pr. 6) from the inverter.
## Query message
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Length field**|**Length field**|**Unit identifier**|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Starting address**|**Starting address**|**No. of points**|**No. of points**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|�|�|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H06<br>(8 Bits)|HFF<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|HEB<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|
> � A given value is set.
Normal response (Response message)
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Length field**|**Length field**|**Unit**<br>**identi-**<br>**fier**|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Byte**<br>**count**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|�|�|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H09<br>(8 Bits)|HFF<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|H06<br>(8 Bits)|H17<br>(8 Bits)|H70<br>(8 Bits)|H0B<br>(8 Bits)|HB8<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|HE8<br>(8 Bits)|
> � The values are the same as those in the query message.
## Read value
Register 41004 (Pr. 4): H1770 (60.00 Hz) Register 41005 (Pr. 5): H0BB8 (30.00 Hz) Register 41006 (Pr. 6): H03E8 (10.00 Hz)
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 337
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Preset single register (writing data to holding registers) (H06 or 06)**
- The content of the system environmental variables and inverter parameters (refer to MODBUS® register on page 6-345) assigned to the holding register area can be written.
- Query message
**==> picture [411 x 312] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
identifierTransaction identifierProtocol Length field identifierUnit Function addressRegister Preset data<br>e H L je H L fe H L [* Je H06 {* H L je H | L<br>(8 Bits)<br>ee (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits)<br>● Normal response (Response message)<br>identifierTransaction identifierProtocol Length field identifierUnit Function addressRegister Preset data<br>e H L fe H L fe H L [e* fe H06 fe H L fe H L |<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits)<br>ee ee<br>● Query message setting<br>a Message Description<br>The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.<br>Transaction identifier<br>Ca The same data is returned in the response from the slave.<br>Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response<br>Protocol Identifier message.)<br>0 is returned in the response from the slave.<br>CSa Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.<br>Unit identifier Fixed to 255<br>a<br>Function Set H06.<br>Set the holding register address to write data to.<br>Register address = holding register address (decimal) - 40001<br>Register address<br>For example, when register address 0001 is set, data is written to holding register address<br>40002.<br>ee<br>a Preset data Set the data to write to the holding register. Write data is fixed at 2 bytes.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-126:** Explanation of the query message_
- Content of normal response
- With a normal response, the contents in the response are the same as those in 0 to 0 of the query message.
> **Example** V Write 60 Hz (H1770) to register 40014 (running frequency RAM) in the inverter.
Query message
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>pete}|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>pete}|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>pete}<br>|Tt|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>pete}<br>|Tt|**Length field**<br>Tttt|**Length field**<br>Tttt|**Unit identifier**<br>tt|**Func-**<br>**tion**<br>tttt|**Register address**<br>ttty|**Register address**<br>ttty|**Preset data**<br>ty|**Preset data**<br>ty|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|pete}|pete}|H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>pete}<br>||H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>Tt|H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>Tt|H06<br>(8 Bits)<br>Tttt|HEF<br>(8 Bits)<br>tt|H06<br>(8 Bits)<br>tttt|H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>tt|H0D<br>(8 Bits)<br>ttty|H17<br>(8 Bits)<br>ty|H70<br>(8 Bits)<br>ty|
Normal response (Response message) The same data as those in the query message
6 - 338
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Diagnostics (diagnosis of functions) (H08 or 08)**
- A communication check can be made since the query message is sent and the query message is returned as it is as the return message (subfunction code H00 function). Subfunction code H00 (Return query data)
- Query message
|�**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|�**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|�**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|�**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|�**Length field**|�**Length field**|�**Unit**<br>**identifier**|�**Function**|�**Subfunction**|�**Subfunction**|�**Data**|�**Data**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)|H08<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|
- Normal response (Response message)
|�**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|�**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|�**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|�**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|�**Length field**|�**Length field**|�**Unit**<br>**identifier**|�**Function**|�**Subfunction**|�**Subfunction**|�**Data**|�**Data**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|(8 Bits)|H08<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H<br>(8 Bits)|L<br>(8 Bits)|
- Query message setting
|**Message**|**Message**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|�|Transaction identifier|The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.<br>The same data is returned in the response from the slave.|
|�|Protocol Identifier|Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response<br>message.)<br>0 is returned in the response from the slave.|
|�|Length field|The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.|
|�|Unit identifier|Fixed to 255|
|�|Function|Set H08.|
|�|Subfunction|Set H0000.|
|�|Data|Any data 2 bytes long can be set. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF.|
_**Tab. 6-127:** Explanation of the query message_
- Content of normal response
- With a normal response, the contents in the response are the same as those in � to � of the query message.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 339
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Preset multiple registers (writing data to multiple holding registers) (H10 or 16)**
- Data can be written to multiple holding registers.
- Query message
**==> picture [410 x 70] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Unit<br>Transaction identifier identifierProtocol Length field identifier Func-tion Starting address No. of Points countByte Data<br>PPP teie Pete te ...<br>H L H L H L H10 H L H L H L (n × 2<br>(8 Bits)<br>(8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) [(8 Bits)] (8 Bits) (8 Bits) × 8<br>Bits)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Normal response (Response message)
**==> picture [411 x 306] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Transaction identifier identifierProtocol- Length field identifierUnit Func-tion Starting address No. of Points<br>Peete<br>H L H L H L H10 H L H L<br>(8 Bits)<br>a (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) ty (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) fe (8 Bits) (8 Bits)<br>● Query message setting<br>a Message Description<br>The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.<br>Transaction identifier<br>a The same data is returned in the response from the slave.<br>Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response<br>Protocol Identifier message.)<br>Ce 0 is returned in the response from the slave.<br>Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.<br>C2)<br>Unit identifier Fixed to 255<br>Op<br>Function Set H10.<br>Set the holding register address from which to start writing the data.<br>Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001<br>Starting address<br>For example, when start register address 0001 is set, the data of holding register address<br>40002 is read.<br>mo<br>Set the number of holding registers for writing data. Data can be read from up to 125<br>No. of points<br>i registers.<br>The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).<br>a Byte count Set the value set in multiplied by 2.<br>The amount of data specified by is set. Write data is output Hi bytes first followed by Lo<br>Data bytes, and is arranged as follows: data of start address, data of start address+1, data of start<br>Ca address+2, and so forth.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-128:** Explanation of the query message_
- Content of normal response
- With a normal response, the contents in the response are the same as those in 0 to @ of the query message.
6 - 340
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Example** �
Write 0.5 s (H05) to register 41007 (Pr. 7) and 1 s (H0A) to register 41008 (Pr. 8) in the inverter.
## Query message
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Length field**|**Length field**|**Unit**<br>**iden-**<br>**tifier**|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Starting**<br>**address**|**Starting**<br>**address**|**No. of points**|**No. of points**|**Byte**<br>**count**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|**Data**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|�|�|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H0B<br>(8 Bits)|HFF<br>(8 Bits)|H10<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|HEE<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H02<br>(8 Bits)|H04<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H05<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H0A<br>(8 Bits)|
|Normal response (Response message)<br>�A given value is set.<br>**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>**Lengthfield**<br>**Unit**<br>**iden-**<br>**tifier**<br>**Func-**<br>**tion**<br>**Starting**<br>**address**<br>**No. of points**<br>�<br>�<br>H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>H06<br>(8 Bits)<br>HFF<br>(8 Bits)<br>H10<br>(8 Bits)<br>H03<br>(8 Bits)<br>HEE<br>(8 Bits)<br>H00<br>(8 Bits)<br>H02<br>(8 Bits)|||||||||||||||||
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**||**Protocol**<br>**identifier**||**Lengthfield**||**Unit**<br>**iden-**<br>**tifier**|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Starting**<br>**address**||**No. of points**|||||||
|�|�|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H06<br>(8 Bits)|HFF<br>(8 Bits)|H10<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|HEE<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H02<br>(8 Bits)||||||
- The values are the same as those in the query message.
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 341
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Read holding register access log (H46 or 70)**
- Queries by function codes H03 and H10 are supported.
- The number and start address of holding registers successfully accessed by the previous communication are returned.
- "0" is returned for both the number and start address for queries other than the function codes above.
- Query message
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>ej*|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**<br>ej*|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>j*<br>fe|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**<br>j*<br>fe|**Length field**<br>fe<br>(|?|**Length field**<br>fe<br>(|?|**Unit**<br>**identifier**<br>(|?Je|**Function**<br>Je|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H<br>(8 Bits)<br>e <br>ee|L<br>(8 Bits)<br> j*<br>ee|H<br>(8 Bits)<br>j*|L<br>(8 Bits)<br>fe|H<br>(8 Bits)<br>fe|L<br>(8 Bits)<br>(|?|(8 Bits)<br>(|? Je|H46<br>(8 Bits)<br>Je|
- Normal response (Response message)
**identifierTransaction identifierProtocol Length field identifierUnit Function address Starting No. of points** ee H L H L le H L fe H46 H L H L (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) ee eee
● Query message setting
|**Message**<br>ee|**Message**<br>ee|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|ee<br>CR|Transaction identifier<br>ee<br>CR|The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control.<br>The same data is returned in the response from the slave.|
|Cs|Protocol Identifier<br>Cs|Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response<br>message.)<br>0 is returned in the response from the slave.|
|a|Length field<br>a|The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte.|
||Unit identifier|Fixed to 255|
|eo|Function<br>eo|Set H46.<br>eo|
_**Tab. 6-129:** Explanation of the query message_
● Content of normal response
|**Message**<br>ee~~re~~|**Message**<br>ee~~re~~|**Description**<br>~~re~~|
|---|---|---|
|ee~~re~~|Starting address<br>ee~~re~~|The start address of the holding register that was successfully accessed is returned.<br>Starting address = start register address (decimal) - 40001<br>For example, when start address 0001 is returned, the holding register address that was suc-<br>cessfully accessed is 40002.<br>~~re~~|
|~~re~~|No. of points<br>~~re~~|The number of holding registers that were successfully accessed is returned.<br>~~re~~|
## _**Tab. 6-130:** Explanation of the normal response_
6 - 342
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Example** �
Read the successful register start address and the number of successful accesses from the inverter.
## Query message
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Length field**|**Length field**|**Unit**<br>**identi-**<br>**fier**|**Func-**<br>**tion**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|�|�|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H02<br>(8 Bits)|HFF<br>(8 Bits)|H46<br>(8 Bits)|
- A given value is set.
Normal response (Response message)
|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Transaction**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Protocol**<br>**identifier**|**Length field**|**Length field**|**Unit**<br>**identi-**<br>**fier**|**Func-**<br>**tion**|**Starting address**|**Starting address**|**No. of points**|**No. of points**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|�|�|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H06<br>(8 Bits)|HFF<br>(8 Bits)|H10<br>(8 Bits)|H03<br>(8 Bits)|HEE<br>(8 Bits)|H00<br>(8 Bits)|H02<br>(8 Bits)|
- The values are the same as those in the query message.
Two successful reads of start address 41007 (Pr. 7) are returned.
�
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 343
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **Error response**
- An error response is returned if the query message received from the master contains an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for parity, overrun, framing, and busy errors.
- Error response (Response message)l
**Transaction Protocol identifier identifier Length field Unit identifier Function Exception code** eT H L Pe H L Pepe H L H80 + Function ete (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) (8 Bits) a ee eee ~~eT~~ **Message Description** The master adds the data for the purpose of transaction control. Transaction identifier ~~Ce~~ The same data is returned in the response from the slave. Fixed to 0. (When the slave receives data other than 0, it does not send the response Protocol identifier message.) Ca 0 is returned in the response from the slave. ~~a~~ Length field The data length from the unit identifier to the data is stored in byte. a Unit identifier Fixed to 255 a Function The function code requested by the master + H80 is set. a Exception code The codes in the following table are set.
_**Tab. 6-131:** Explanation of the Response message_
● Error code list
|**Code**<br>~~|~~|**Error item**<br>~~|~~|**Error description**<br>~~|~~|
|---|---|---|
|01<br>rr|ILLEGAL FUNCTION<br>rr|The query message from the master has a function code that cannot be han-<br>dled by the slave.<br>eee|
|02<br>rr|ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS<br>rr|The query message from the master has a register address that cannot be han-<br>dled by the slave.<br>(No parameter, parameter cannot be read, parameter cannot be written)<br>eee|
|03<br>rr|ILLEGAL DATA VALUE<br>rr|The query message from the master has data that cannot be handled by the<br>slave.<br>(Out of parameter write range, a mode is specified, other error)<br> eee|
|06<br>a|SLAVE DEVICE BUSY|The request message cannot be processed because the slave is executing<br>another operation.|
_**Tab. 6-132:** Explanation of the error codes_
An error response is not returned in the following cases:
- Function code H03 (reading data of holding registers)
- When the number of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers from which data can be read.
- Function code H10 (writing data to multiple holding registers)
- When the number of registers is specified as one or more and there are one or more holding registers to which data can be written.
In other words, when function code H03 or H10 is used and multiple holding registers are accessed, an error response is not returned even if a nonexistent holding register or holding register that cannot be read or written from/to is accessed.
## **NOTE**
An error response is returned if none of the accessed holding registers exist. When an accessed holding register does not exist, the read value is 0 and the written data is invalid.
6 - 344
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## **MODBUS® register**
- The following shows the MODBUS® registers for system environment variables (read/write), real time monitor items (read), parameters (read/write), faults history data (read/write), and model information monitor items (read).
- System environment variables
|**Register**|**Beschreibung**|**Lesen/Schreiben**|**Bemerkung**|
|---|---|---|---|
|40002|Inverter reset|Write|Any value|
|40003|Parameter clear|Write|Set H965A.|
|40004|All parameter clear|Write|Set H99AA.|
|40006|Parameter clear�|Write|Set H5A96.|
|40007|All parameter clear�|Write|Set HAA99.|
|40009|Inverter status / control input command�|Read/Write|Refer to Tab. 6-134|
|40010|Operation mode / inverter setting�|Read/Write|Refer to Tab. 6-135|
|40014|Running frequency (RAM value)|Read/Write|The frequency indication can be changed to<br>the machine speed indication using Pr. 37.<br>(Refer to page 6-138)|
|40015|Running frequency (E²PROM value)|Write||
_**Tab. 6-133:** System environment variables_
- Settings in the communication parameters are not cleared.
- The data is written as a control input command for writing. The data is read as the inverter status for reading.
- The data is written as an operation mode setting for writing. The data is read as the operation mode status for reading.
|**Bit**|**Definition**|**Definition**|
|---|---|---|
||**Control input command**|**Inverter status**|
|0|Stop command|RUN (Inverter running)�|
|1|Forward rotation command|During forward rotation|
|2|Reverse rotation command|During reverse rotation|
|3|RH (High-speed command)�|SU (Up to frequency)|
|4|RM (Middle-speed operation command)�|OL (Overload)|
|5|RL (Low-speed operation command)�|0|
|6|0|FU (Frequency detection)�|
|7|RT (Second function selection)|ABC (Fault)�|
|8|AU (Current input selection)|0|
|9|0|Safety monitor output|
|10|MRS (Output stop)�|0|
|11|0|0|
|12|RES (Inverter reset)�|0|
|13|0|0|
|14|0|0|
|15|0|Fault occurrence|
## _**Tab. 6-134:** Inverter status / control input command_
- The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The input signal function can be changed using Pr. 180 to Pr. 184 (Input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 6-116)
- The signal within parentheses ( ) is the initial status. The output signal function can be changed using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 6-126)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 345
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
|**Mode**<br>~~=~~<br>ee|**Read value**<br>~~=~~|**Write value**<br>~~=~~|
|---|---|---|
|EXT<br>~~=~~<br>ee|H0000<br>~~=~~|H0010<br>~~=~~|
|PU<br>ee<br>~~a~~|H0001<br>~~a~~|H0011<br>~~a~~|
|EXT JOG<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|H0002<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|~~a~~<br>~~a~~|
|PU JOG<br>~~a~~|H0003<br>~~a~~|~~a~~|
|NET<br>~~a~~|H0004<br>~~a~~|H0014<br>~~a~~|
|PU+EXT<br>a|H0005<br>a|a|
_**Tab. 6-135:** Operation mode / inverter setting_
Writing is available depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings (refer to page Seite 6-218). The restrictions depending on the operation mode changes according to the computer link specifications.
## ● Real time monitor
For the details of the monitor items, refer to the description of Pr. 52 on page 6-140.
|**Register**<br>LRae|**Monitor item**<br>ae|**Increment**<br>ae~~0~~<br>ee|**Register**<br>es|**Monitor item**|**Increment**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|40201<br>LRae<br>~~a~~|Output frequency / machine<br>speed<br>ae<br>~~a~~|0.01 Hz/1<br>ae~~0~~<br>~~a~~<br>ee|40216<br>es|Output terminal status|—|
|40202<br>pe|Output current<br>pe|0.01 A<br>ee <br>pe|40220<br> es|Cumulative energization time|1 h|
|40203<br>ee|Output voltage<br>ee|0.1 V<br>ee||40223<br>||Actual operation time|1 h|
|40205<br>ee<br>|Frequency setting value /<br>machine speed setting value<br>ee<br>|0.01 Hz/1<br>ee|<br>~~|~~|40224<br>|<br>~~|~~|Motor load factor|0.1 %|
|40207<br>ee<br>aa<br>|Motor torque<br>ee<br>a<br>|0.1 %<br>ee|<br>a~~|~~<br>~~|~~|40225<br>|<br>~~|~~<br>~~|~~|Cumulative power||
|40208<br><br>a|Converter output voltage<br><br>a|0.1 V<br>~~|~~<br>a~~|~~|40252<br>~~|~~<br>~~|~~|PID set point|0.1 %|
|40209<br>|Regenerative brake duty<br>|0.1 %<br>~~|~~|40253<br>~~|~~|PID measured value|0.1 %|
|40210<br>a|Electronic thermal relay<br>function load factor<br>a<br>~~|~~|0.1 %<br>a<br>~~|~~|40254<br>~~|~~|PID deviation|0.1 %|
|40211|Output current peak value|0.01 A|40258 –<br>40260|For manufacturer check. Do not set.||
|40212<br><br>PR|Converter output voltage peak<br>value<br><br>|0.1 V<br>~~|~~<br>|40261<br>~~|~~|Motor thermal load factor|0.1 %|
|40214<br>a<br>PR|Output power<br>a<br>|0.01kW<br>a~~|~~<br>|40262<br>~~|~~|Inverter thermal load factor|0.1 %|
|40215<br><br>PRa|Input terminal status<br><br>a|—<br>~~|~~<br>a|40263<br>~~|~~|Cumulative power 2|0.01 kWh|
## _**Tab. 6-136:** Real time monitor items_
When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments).
Input terminal monitor details ("1" denotes terminal ON, "0" denotes terminal OFF, and "—" denotes undetermined value.)
b15 b0 — — — — — RES — 0 — RH RM RL — — STR STF [ [ [| [| | | J fT [ [— T fT ft | T ~~y~~ ©) Output terminal monitor details ("1" denotes terminal ON, "0" denotes terminal OFF, and "—" denotes undetermined value.)
b15 b0 — — — — — — — — — — ABC FU — — — RUN [ [ [| | | | | fT [ T— [TT [| | | 7 ft ~~]~~ 2) The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs. Resetting will clear the retained values.
6 - 346
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
## ● Parameters
|**Pr.**|**Register**|**Parameter name**|**Read/write**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|0 to 999|41000 to<br>41999|Refer to page 6-1 for parameter<br>names.|Read/write|The parameter number +41000 is the register<br>number.|
|C2 (902)|41902|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C3 (902)|42092|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>(analog value)|Read/write|Analog value [%] set to C3 (902)|
||43902|Terminal 2 frequency setting bias<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|Analog value [%] of the voltage (current) applied<br>to terminal 2|
|125 (903)|41903|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C4 (903)|42093|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>(analog value)|Read/write|Analog value [%] set to C4 (903)|
||43903|Terminal 2 frequency setting gain<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|Analog value [%] of the voltage (current) applied<br>to terminal 2|
|C5 (904)|41904|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C6 (904)|42094|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>(analog value)|Read/write|Analog value [%] set to C6 (904)|
||43904|Terminal 4 frequency setting bias<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|Analog value [%] of the current (voltage) applied<br>to terminal 4|
|126 (905)|41905|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>(frequency)|Read/write||
|C7 (905)|42095|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>(analog value)|Read/write|Analog value [%] set to C7 (905)|
||43905|Terminal 4 frequency setting gain<br>(terminal analog value)|Read|Analog value [%] of the current (voltage) applied<br>to terminal 4|
_**Tab. 6-137:** Parameters_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 347
MODBUS®/TCP (FR-E700 SC ENE)
Parameter
● Faults history
|**Register**<br>a|**Definition**|**Read/write**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|
|40501<br>a<br>a|Faults history 1<br>|Read/write<br>|Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as "H00<br>".<br>Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code. (Refer to the<br>following table for the error codes.)<br>Performing write using the register 40501 batch-clears<br>the faults history.<br>Set any value as data.|
|40502<br>pO<br>a|Faults history 2<br>pO<br>ee|Read<br>pO||
|40503<br>a|Faults history 3<br>ee|Read||
|40504<br>a<br>pO|Faults history 4<br>ee<br>pO|Read<br>pO||
|40505<br>pO<br>a|Faults history 5<br>pO<br>ee|Read<br>pO||
|40506<br>a|Faults history 6<br>ee|Read||
|40507<br>a<br>pO|Faults history 7<br>ee<br>pO|Read<br>pO||
|40508<br>a|Faults history 8|Read||
_**Tab. 6-138:** Faults history_
|**Daten**|**Beschreibung**||**Daten**|**Beschreibung**||**Daten**|**Beschreibung**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|H00|No fault present||H70|E.BE||HC7|E.AIE|
|H10|E.OC1||H80|E.GF||HC8|E.USB|
|H11|E.OC2||H81|E.LF||HC9|E.SAF|
|H12|E.OC3||H90|E.OHT||HD8|E.MB4|
|H20|E.OV1||HA0|E.OPT||HD9|E.MB5|
|H21|E.OV2||HA1|E.OP1||HDA|E.MB6|
|H22|E.OV3||HB0|E.PE||HDB|E.MB7|
|H30|E.THT||HB1|E.PUE||HF1|E.1|
|H31|E.THM||HB2|E.RET||HF5|E.5|
|H40|E.FIN||HB3|E.PE2||HF6|E.6|
|H52|E.ILF||HC0|E.CPU||HF7|E.7|
|H60|E.OLT||HC5|E.IOH||HFD|E.13|
_**Tab. 6-139:** Error code list_
> **NOTES** | For the details of the faults, refer to section 7.1. When a 32-bit parameter setting or monitor item is read and the value to be read exceeds HFFFF, HFFFF is returned.
6 - 348
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **6.24 CC-Link IE Field Network Basic**
The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic enables CC-Link IE communication using the general-purpose Ethernet-based technology. The CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is suited to small-scale equipment for which high-speed control is not necessary, and can coexist with the standard Ethernet TCP/IP (HTTP, FTP, etc.).
|**Pr. No.**|**Name**|**Initial Value**|**Setting Range**|**Description**||**Parameters referred to**|**Refer to**<br>**Section**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|**541**|Frequency command sign<br>selection|0|0|Frequency command without sign||—||
||||1|Frequency command with sign||||
|**544**|CC-Link extended setting�|0|0/1/12/14/18|The function of the remote registers can be<br>extended when the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic<br>is used.||||
- The setting is applied after an inverter reset or power-ON.
## **Communication specifications**
|**Item**||**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|Transmission speed||100 Mbps|
|Communication method||UDP/IP|
|Connectable units||Master: 1<br>Slave: up to 64|
|Topology||Star|
|Number of occupied stations||1|
|Maximum number of links per station|RX|64 (8 bytes)|
||RY|64 (8 bytes)|
||RWr|32 (64 bytes)|
||RWw|32 (64 bytes)|
|Reference response time�||Within 15 ms|
_**Tab. 6-140:** Specifications of the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic communication_
- The reference response time is the communication time from when the inverter receives a command from the master until the inverter returns the response to the master
## **Initial setting**
- To select the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic for the application, set "10" in any of Pr. 833 to Pr. 835 "Ethernet function selection 1 to 3". (Refer to page 6-285.)
- To limit the network devices that send the command through the Ethernet network (CC-Link IE Field Network Basic), set the range of IP addresses (Pr. 844 to Pr. 849). (Refer to page 6-289.)
- Use Pr. 852 "Ethernet communication check time interval" to set the interval of the check time (for signal loss detection) for all devices with IP addresses in the range specified for "Ethernet command source selection" (Pr.844 to Pr.849). (Refer to page 6-290.)
- **NOTE** When Pr. 852 "Ethernet communication check time interval" � 9999 and the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, the Ethernet communication fault (E.OP1) is activated in the following cases: the data addressed to the own station is not received for the predetermined timeout period or longer, or the status bit of the cyclic transmission addressed to the own station turns OFF (when the master inverter gives a command to stop the cyclic transmission). (For the details of the timeout period, status bit of the cyclic transmission, and command to stop the cyclic transmission, refer to the Instruction Manual of the master controller which supports the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 349
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **CC-Link extended setting (Pr. 544)**
Use this parameter to select the function of the remote registers for the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
|**Pr. 544**|**Description**|**Refer to page**|
|---|---|---|
|0 (initial setting)|Compatible with CC-Link Ver.1|6-351|
|1|Compatible with CC-Link Ver.1|6-352|
|12|Compatible with the double setting of CC-Link Ver.2|6-353|
|14|Compatible with the quadruple setting of CC-Link Ver.2|6-354|
|18|Compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2|6-355|
_**Tab. 6-141:** Settings of Pr. 544_
## **Frequency command with sign (Pr. 541)**
- The start command (forward/reverse rotation) can be inverted by adding a plus or minus sign to the value of the frequency command sent through the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
- The Pr. 541 "Frequency command sign selection setting" is applied to the frequency command from RWw1. (Refer to page 6-358.)
|**Pr. 541**|**Sign**|**Setting range**|**Actual frequency command**|
|---|---|---|---|
|0|Not used|0 to 40000|0 to 400.00 Hz|
|1|With|–32768 to 32767 (two's complement)|-327.68 to 327.67 Hz|
## _**Tab. 6-142:** Function of the sign selection with Pr. 541_
- Relationship between the start command and sign (Pr. 541="1")
|**Start command**|**Sign of the frequency command**|**Actual run command**|
|---|---|---|
|Forward rotation|+|Forward rotation|
||–|Reverse rotation|
|Reverse rotation|+|Reverse rotation|
||–|Forward rotation|
_**Tab. 6-143:** Influence of the sign on the rotation direction_
## **NOTES**
When Pr. 541 = 1 (with sign)
- When E²PROM write is specified with the RYE, write mode error (error code H01) will occur.
- When concurrent execution of both RYD and RYE is enabled (when a value other than 0 is set in Pr. 544) and both RYD and RYE are turned on, RYD has precedence.
- When power is turned on (inverter reset), the initial setting status of the sign bit is "positive" and the set frequency is "0 Hz". (The motor does not operate at the frequency set before turning OFF the power (inverter reset).)
- When set frequency is written with the instruction code of HED and HEE, the sign of the frequency command is not changed.
6 - 350
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **I/O signal list**
- When Pr. 544 = "0" (compatible with CC-Link Ver.1)
- Remote I/O (32 points)
|**Device**<br>**No.**�|**Signal**|**Refer to**<br>**page**||**Device**<br>**No.**�|**Signal**|**Refer to**<br>**page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|RYn0|Forward rotation command�|6-356||RXn0|Forward running|6-357|
|RYn1|Reverse rotation command�|6-356||RXn1|Reverse running|6-357|
|RYn2|High-speed operation command<br>(terminal RH function)�|6-356||RXn2|Inverter running (terminal RUN function)�|6-357|
|||||RXn3|Up to frequency (SU signal)�|6-357|
|RYn3|Middle-speed operation command<br>(terminal RM function)�|6-356|||||
|||||RXn4|Overload alarm (OL signal)�|6-357|
|||||RXn5|Not used|—|
|RYn4|Low-speed operation command<br>(terminal RL function)�|6-356|||||
|||||RXn6|Frequency detection (terminal FU function)�|6-357|
|RYn5|Not used|—||RXn7|Fault (terminal ABC function)�|6-357|
|RYn6|Second function selection (RT signal)�|6-356||RXn8|Not used|—|
|RYn7|Terminal 4 input selection (AU signal)�|6-356||RXn9|Pr. 313 assignment function (DO0)�|6-357|
|RYn8|Not used|—||RXnA|Pr. 314 assignment function (DO1)�|6-357|
|RYn9|Output stop (terminal MRS function)�|6-356||RXnB|Pr. 315 assignment function (DO2)�|6-357|
|RYnA|Not used|—||RXnC|Monitoring|6-357|
|RYnB|Reset (terminal RES function)�|6-356||RXnD|Frequency setting completion (RAM)|6-357|
|RYnC|Monitor command|6-356||RXnE|Frequency setting completion (RAM, E²PROM)|6-357|
|RYnD|Frequency setting command (RAM)|6-356||RXnF|Instruction code execution completion|6-357|
|RYnE|Frequency setting command (RAM, E²PROM)|6-356||RX(n+1)0<br>to<br>RX(n+1)7|Reserved|—|
|RYnF|Instruction code execution request|6-356|||||
|RY(n+1)0<br>to<br>RY(n+1)7|Reserved|—||RX(n+1)8|Not used (initial data process request flag)|6-357|
|||||RX(n+1)9|Not used (initial data process completion flag)|6-357|
|RY(n+1)8|Not used (initial data process completion flag)|6-356||RX(n+1)A|Error status flag|6-357|
|RY(n+1)9|Not used (initial data process request flag)|6-356||RX(n+1)B|Remote station ready|6-357|
|RY(n+1)A|Error reset request flag|6-356||RX(n+1)C<br>to<br>RX(n+1)F|Reserved|—|
|RY(n+1)B<br>to<br>RY(n+1)F|Reserved|—|||||
|||||**_Tab. 6-145:_**<br>_Remote inputs_|||
## _**Tab. 6-144:** Remote outputs_
- These signals are set in the initial status. Using Pr. 180 to Pr. 184, you can change input signal functions. For the details of Pr. 180 to Pr. 184, refer to page 6-116.
- The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
- These signals are set in the initial status. Using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, you can change output signal functions. For the details of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 refer to page 6-126.
- Functions assigned to Pr. 313 to Pr. 315 are activated. For the assignable functions, refer to the description of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 on page 6-126.
- "n" indicates a value determined according to the station number setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 351
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
– Remote register
|**Address**<br>**Description**<br>**Refer to**<br>**page**<br>**Upper 8 bits**<br>**Lower 8 bits**<br>RWwn<br>Monitor code 2<br>Monitor code 1<br>6-358<br>**Address**<br>**Description**<br>**Refer to**<br>**page**<br>**Upper 8 bits**<br>**Lower 8 bits**<br>RWrn<br>First monitor value<br>6-359<br>~~Cd~~<br>~~Ld~~<br>re<br>~~es~~<br>~~a~~|
|---|
|RWwn+1<br>Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)<br>6-358<br>RWwn+2<br>H00 (arbitrary)<br>Instruction code<br>6-358<br>RWwn+3<br>Write data<br>6-358<br>RWrn+1<br>Second monitor value<br>6-359<br>RWrn+2<br>Reply code<br>6-359<br>RWrn+3<br>Read data<br>6-359<br>~~FE~~<br>PT~~Feo~~<br>Aa|
|**_Tab. 6-146:_**<br>_Remote write register_<br>**_Tab. 6-147:_**<br>_Remote read register_|
The above 8 bit is always H00 even if a value other than H00 is set. When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments). "n" indicates a value determined according to the station number setting.
- When Pr. 544 = "1" (compatible with CC-Link Ver.1)
- Remote I/O (32 points)
- Same as when Pr. 544 = 0 (Refer to page 6-351.)
- Remote register
|**Address**<br>**Description**<br>**Refer to**<br>**page**<br>**Upper 8 bits**<br>**Lower 8 bits**<br>RWwn<br>Monitor code 2<br>Monitor code 1<br>6-358<br>RWwn+1<br>Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)<br>6-358<br>RWwn+2<br>Link parameter<br>extended setting<br>Instruction code<br>6-358<br>RWwn+3<br>Write data<br>6-358<br>**_Tab. 6-148:_**<br>_Remote write register_<br>Ld<br>es<br>e~~e~~<br>~~a~~<br>a<br>oo) <br>Pf <br>oF}|<br> <br>|**Address**<br>**Description**<br>**Refer to**<br>**page**<br>**Upper 8 bits**<br>**Lower 8 bits**<br>RWrn<br>First monitor value<br>6-359<br>RWrn+1<br>Second monitor value<br>6-359<br>RWrn+2<br>Reply code 2<br>Reply code 1<br>6-359<br>RWrn+3<br>Read data<br>6-359<br>**_Tab. 6-149:_**<br>_Remote read register_<br>Ld<br>~~ee~~<br>a<br> FE<br> RR<br>1—_}4<br> WE<br>1|
|---|---|---|
When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments). "n" indicates a value determined according to the station number setting.
6 - 352
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
- When Pr. 544 = "12" (compatible with the double setting of CC-Link Ver.2)
- Remote I/O (32 points)
Same as when Pr. 544 = 0 (Refer to page 6-351.)
- Remote register
|**Address**�|**Description**|**Description**|**Refer to**<br>**page**||**Address**�|**Description**|**Description**|**Refer to**<br>**page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Upper 8 bits**|**Lower 8 bits**||||**Upper 8 bits**|**Lower 8 bits**||
|RWwn|Monitor code 2|Monitor code 1|6-358||RWrn|First monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+1|Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)�||6-358||RWrn+1|Second monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+2|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||RWrn+2|Reply code 2|Reply code 1|6-359|
||||||RWrn+3|Read data||6-359|
|RWwn+3|Write data||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+4|Third monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+4|Monitor code 3||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+5|Fourth monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+5|Monitor code 4||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+6|Fifth monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+6|Monitor code 5||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+7|Sixth monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+7|Monitor code 6||6-358||||||
|||||||<br>|||
_**Tab. 6-151:** Remote read register_
_**Tab. 6-150:** Remote write register_
- When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments).
- "n" indicates a value determined according to the station number setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 353
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
- When Pr. 544 = "14" (compatible with the quadruple setting of CC-Link Ver.2)
- Remote I/O (32 points (64 points occupied)) Same as when Pr.544 = 0 (Refer to page 6-351.)
- Remote register
**==> picture [538 x 260] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Description Refer to Description Refer to<br>Address Address<br>Ld Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page es Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits page<br>RWwn Monitor code 2 Monitor code 1 6-358 RWrn First monitor value 6-359<br>a a es e e ee<br>a RWwn+1 Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments) 6-358 RWrn+1 Second monitor value 6-359<br>RWwn+2 Link parameter Instruction code 6-358 RWrn+2 Reply code 2 Reply code 1 6-359<br>extended setting<br>RWrn+3 Read data 6-359<br>Ee<br>RWwn+3 Write data 6-358<br>a RWrn+4 OO Third monitor value 6-359<br>RWwn+4 Monitor code 3 6-358<br>a ee RWrn+5 Fourth monitor value 6-359<br>RWwn+5 Monitor code 4 6-358<br>a eea a RWrn+6 Fifth monitor value 6-359<br>RWwn+6 Monitor code 5 6-358<br>a aa es RWrn+7 Sixth monitor value 6-359<br>Oe RWwn+7 Monitor code 6 a 6-358 RWrn+8 Faults history No. Fault data 6-359<br>pf RWwn+8 Faults history No. H00 6-358 RWrn+9 Fault record (output frequency) 6-359<br>pf RWwn+9 PID set point (0.01 % increments) 6-358 RWrn+A Fault record (output current) 6-359<br>RWwn+A PID measured value (0.01 % increments) 6-358<br>pf RWrn+B Fault record (output voltage) 6-359<br>RWwn+B PID deviation (0.01 % increments) 6-358<br>a ae RWrn+C Fault record (energization time) 6-359<br>RWwn+C<br>a a ee RWrn+D ee<br>— RWwn+D H00 (Free) — Ty RWrn+E H00 (Free) —<br>RWwn+E<br>— RWrn+F<br>|<br>RWwn+F<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. 6-153:** Remote read register_
_**Tab. 6-152:**_
_Remote write register_
~~®~~ Valid when Pr. 128="50, 51, 60, or 61".
- @ When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments). ® "n" indicates a value determined according to the station number setting.
6 - 354
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
- When Pr. 544 = "18" (compatible with the octuple setting of CC-Link Ver.2)
- Remote I/O (32 points (128 points occupied)) Same as when Pr. 544 = 0 (Refer to page 6-351.)
- Remote register
|**Address**�|**Description**|**Description**|**Refer to**<br>**page**||**Address**�|**Description**|**Description**|**Refer to**<br>**page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||**Upper 8 bits**|**Lower 8 bits**||||**Upper 8 bits**|**Lower 8 bits**||
|RWwn|Monitor code 2|Monitor code 1|6-358||RWrn|First monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+1|Set frequency (0.01 Hz increments)�||6-358||RWrn+1|Second monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+2|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||RWrn+2|Reply code 2|Reply code 1|6-359|
||||||RWrn+3|Read data||6-359|
|RWwn+3|Write data||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+4|Third monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+4|Monitor code 3||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+5|Fourth monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+5|Monitor code 4||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+6|Fifth monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+6|Monitor code 5||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+7|Sixth monitor value||6-359|
|RWwn+7|Monitor code 6||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+8|Faults history No.|Fault data|6-359|
|RWwn+8|Faults history No.|H00|6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+9|Fault record (output frequency)||6-359|
|RWwn+9|PID set point (0.01 % increments)�||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+A|Fault record (output current)||6-359|
|RWwn+A|PID measured value (0.01 % increments)�||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+B|Fault record (output voltage)||6-359|
|RWwn+B|PID deviation (0.01 % increments)�||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+C|Fault record (energization time)||6-359|
|RWwn+C|H00 (Free)||—||||||
||||||RWrn+D|H00 (Free)||—|
|RWwn+D|||||||||
||||||RWrn+E||||
|RWwn+E|||||||||
||||||RWrn+F||||
|RWwn+F|||||||||
||||||RWrn+10|Reply code||6-359|
|RWwn+10|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+11|Read data||6-359|
||||||RWrn+12|Reply code||6-359|
|RWwn+11|Write data||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+13|Read data||6-359|
|RWwn+12|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+14|Reply code||6-359|
|RWwn+13|Write data||6-358||RWrn+15|Read data||6-359|
|RWwn+14|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||RWrn+16|Reply code||6-359|
||||||RWrn+17|Read data||6-359|
|RWwn+15|Write data||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+18|Reply code||6-359|
|RWwn+16|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+19|Read data||6-359|
|RWwn+17|Write data||6-358||RWrn+1A|H00 (Free)||—|
|RWwn+18|Link parameter<br>extended setting|Instruction code|6-358||RWrn+1B||||
||||||RWrn+1C||||
|RWwn+19|Write data||6-358||||||
||||||RWrn+1D||||
|RWwn+1A|H00 (Free)||—||||||
||||||RWrn+1E||||
|RWwn+1B|||||||||
||||||RWrn+1F||||
|RWwn+1C|||||||||
||||||**_Tab. 6-155:_**<br>_Remote read register_||||
|RWwn+1D|||||||||
|RWwn+1E|||||||||
|RWwn+1F|||||||||
_**Tab. 6-154:** Remote write register_
- Valid when Pr. 128 = "50, 51, 60, or 61".
- When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments).
- "n" indicates a value determined according to the station number setting.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 355
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## ● Details of input and output signals
The following device No. are those for station 1. For stations 2 and later, the device No. are different. (Refer to the master module manual for correspondence between the device No. and station number)
– Output signals (master module to inverter)
|**Device No.**<br>~~I~~<br>a|**Signal**<br>~~I~~<br>eeee<br>|**Description**<br>~~I~~<br>ee<br>|**Description**<br>~~I~~<br>ee<br>|
|---|---|---|---|
|RY0<br>~~I~~<br>~~a~~<br>a|Forward rotation command<br>~~I~~<br>~~a~~<br>eeee<br>|0: Stop command<br>1: Forward rotation start<br>~~I~~<br>~~a~~<br>ee<br>|When "1" is set, a start command is input to the inverter.<br>When "1" is set in RY0 and RY1, a stop command is<br>input.<br>~~I~~<br>~~a~~|
|RY1<br>a~~ee~~|Reverse rotation command<br>eeee<br>~~ee~~|0: Stop command<br>1: Reverse rotation start<br>ee<br>~~ee~~||
|RY2<br>~~a~~|High-speed operation command<br>(terminal RH function)<br>~~a~~|Functions assigned to terminals RH, RM and RL are activated.<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~||
|RY3<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|Middle-speed operation command<br>(terminal RM function)<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|||
|RY4<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|Low-speed operation command<br>(terminal RL function)<br>~~a~~<br>~~a~~|||
|RY6<br>~~a~~|Second function selection (RT signal)<br>~~a~~|ON: Second function is selected<br>~~a~~||
|RY7<br>~~a~~|Terminal 4 input selection (AU signal)<br>~~a~~|ON: Terminal 4 input is the main speed setting<br>~~a~~||
|RY9<br>~~a~~|Output stop (terminal MRS function)<br>~~a~~|Function assigned to terminal MRS is activated.<br>~~a~~||
|RYB|Reset (terminal RES function)|Function assigned to terminal RES is activated.||
|RYC<br>~~a~~<br>re|Monitor command<br>~~a~~<br>re|When "1" is set in the monitor command (RYC), the monitored value is set in the<br>remote register RWr0, 1, 4 to 7, and "1" is set in the monitoring (RXC). While "1" is set in<br>the monitor command (RYC), the monitored data is always updated.<br>~~a~~<br>ee||
|RYD<br>re|Frequency setting command (RAM)<br>re|When "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RYD), the set frequency (RWw1) is<br>written to RAM of the inverter. While "1" is set in the frequency setting command<br>(RYD), the set frequency (RWw1) is always applied.<br>After the writing completes, "1" is set in the frequency setting completion (RXD).<br>ee||
|RYE<br>re<br>a|Frequency setting command<br>(RAM, E²PROM)<br>re<br>a|When "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RYE), the set frequency (RWw1) is<br>written to RAM and E²PROM of the inverter. After the writing completes, "1" is set in<br>the frequency setting completion (RXE) .<br>To change the frequency consecutively, be sure to write data to the inverter RAM.<br>ee||
|RYF<br>ep|Instruction code execution request<br>ep|When "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RYF), processes corre-<br>sponding to the instruction codes set to RWw2, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 18 are executed.<br>"1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RXF) after completion of instruc-<br>tion codes<br>.<br>When an instruction code execution error occurs, a value other than "0" is set in the<br>reply code (RWr2, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18).||
|RY1A|Error reset request flag|When "1" is set in the error reset request flag (RY1A) at an inverter fault, the inverter is<br>reset, then "0" is set in the error status flag (RX1A). Refer to page 6-243 for operation<br>conditions of inverter reset.||
_**Tab. 6-156:** The output signals from the master module are indicated. (Input signals to inverter)_
Signal names are initial values. Using Pr. 180 to Pr. 184, you can change input signal functions. Note that some of signals do not accept a command from the network according to the Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings. For example, the RES signal (the function assigned to terminal RES) in RYB cannot be controlled via network.
The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.
When "1" is set in the RYE or RYF, a communication cannot be established through the applications other than the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. When it is found that "1" is set in RXE or RXF, change the setting "1" of RYE or RYF to "0".
If "1" is set in these registers at the same time while Pr. 544 = "0," only one of these is executed.
6 - 356
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
- Input signals (inverter to master module)
|**Device No.**|**Signal**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|RX0|Forward running|0: Other than forward running (during stop or reverse rotation)<br>1: Forward running|
|RX1|Reverse running|0: Other than reverse running (during stop or forward rotation)<br>1: Reverse running|
|RX2|Inverter running (terminal RUN function)|�A function assigned to terminal RUN is activated.<br>�Signal names are initial values. Using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, you can change output<br>signal functions.|
|RX3|Up to frequency (SU signal)|�1: Output frequency has reached the set frequency<br>�The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.|
|RX4|Overload alarm (OL signal)|�1: Overload alarm occurrence<br>�The signals are fixed. They cannot be changed using parameters.|
|RX6|Frequency detection<br>(terminal FU function)|�Functions assigned to terminals FU and ABC activate.<br>�Signal names are initial values. Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, you can change output signal<br>functions.|
|RX7|Fault (terminal ABC function)||
|RX9|Pr. 313 assignment function<br>(DO0 function)|�Functions assigned to Pr.313 to Pr.315 are activated.<br>�Using Pr.190 to Pr.192, you can change output signal functions.|
|RXA|Pr. 314 assignment function<br>(DO1 function)||
|RXB|Pr. 315 assignment function<br>(DO2 function)||
|RXC|Monitoring|After "1" is set in the monitor command (RYC), and the monitored value is set in the<br>remote register Rwr0, 1, 4 to 7, "1" is set in this signal. When "0" is set in the monitor<br>command (RYC), "0" is set in this signal.|
|RXD|Frequency setting completion (RAM)|After "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RYD) and the frequency setting<br>command is written to the inverter RAM, "1" is set in this signal.<br>When "0" is set in the frequency setting command (RYD), "0" is set in this signal.|
|RXE|Frequency setting completion<br>(RAM, E²PROM)|After "1" is set in the frequency setting command (RYE) and the frequency setting<br>command is written to the inverter RAM and EEPROM, "1" is set in this signal.<br>When "0" is set in the frequency setting command (RYE), "0" is set in this signal.|
|RXF|Instruction code execution completion|After "1" is set in the instruction code execution request (RYF) and the processes cor-<br>responding to the instruction codes (RWw2, 10, 12, 14, 16 and 18) are executed, "1" is<br>set in this signal.<br>When "0" is set in the instruction code execution request (RYF), "0" is set in this signal.|
|RX1A|Error status flag|When an inverter error occurs (protective function is activated), "1" is set in this signal.|
|RX1B|Remote station ready|When the inverter goes into the ready status upon completion of initial setting after<br>power-ON or hardware reset, "1" is set in this signal. When an inverter error occurs<br>(protective function is activated), "0" is set in this signal.<br>The signal is used as an interlock signal during the write to/read from the master<br>module.|
_**Tab. 6-157:** The input signals to the master module are indicated. (Output signals from inverter)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 357
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Details of remote register**
● Remote register (master module to inverter)
|**Device No.**<br>ee~~ee~~|**Signal**<br>~~ee~~|**Description**<br>~~ee~~|**Description**<br>~~ee~~|
|---|---|---|---|
|RWw0<br>ee~~ee~~|Monitor code1/2<br>~~ee~~|Set the monitor code to be monitored. (Refer to page 6-363.)<br>By setting "1" in RYC after setting, the specified monitored data is stored in RWr0/<br>RWr1.<br>~~ee~~||
|RWw1<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|Set frequency<br>~~ee~~<br>~~a~~|Specify the set frequency or machine speed. At this time, whether to write to RAM<br>or E²PROM is decided with the RYD and RYE settings. After setting the set frequency<br>in this register, set "1" in RYD or RYE to write the frequency. After writing of<br>frequency is completed, "1" is set in RXD or RXE in response to the input command.<br>The setting range is 0 to 400.00 Hz (0.01 Hz increments). Write "40000" when<br>setting 400.00 Hz.<br>~~ee~~||
|RWw2|Link parameter extended setting/<br>Instruction code|Set the instruction code for execution of operation mode rewrite, parameter read/<br>write, error reference, error clear, etc. (Refer to page 6-361.)<br>Set "1" in RYF to execute the corresponding instruction after completing the register<br>setting. "1" is set in RXF after completing the execution of the instruction.<br>When a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 544 "CC-Link extended setting", upper eight<br>bits are link parameter extended setting.<br>Example: When reading Pr.160, instruction code is H0200.||
|RWw3<br>a|Write data<br>eeee|Set the data specified by the RWw2 instruction code. (When required)<br>Set "1" in RYF after setting RWw2 and this register.<br>Set zero when the write code is not required.||
|RWw4<br>ee<br>a|Monitor code 3<br>ee<br>eeee<br>ee|Set the monitor code to be monitored. By setting "1" in RYC after setting, the specified<br>monitored data is stored in RWr<br>.<br>(<br>indicates a register number. (RWr4 to 7))<br>Refer to page 6-363 for monitor code details.<br>e<br>ee||
|RWw5<br>a<br>ee|Monitor code 4<br>eeee<br>ee<br>ee**e**<br>e|||
|RWw6<br>ee|Monitor code 5<br>ee<br>ee**e**<br>eee<br>ee<br>ee|||
|RWw7<br>ee<br>ee|Monitor code 6<br>ee**e**<br>e<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|||
|RWw8|Faults history No.<br>ee<br>ee|Set the individual fault number of the faults history that you want to read. Up to the<br>8th previous fault can be read.<br>Upper digits: H00 (the latest fault) to H07 (8th oldest fault) / lower digits: H00<br>When any of H08 to HFF is set to the upper digits, the fault record becomes an unde-<br>termined value.<br>ee||
|RWw9<br>ee|PID set point<br>ee|Set the PID set point<br>Setting range : "0 to 100.00 %"<br>ee|Input a value 100 times greater than the<br>value to be set.<br>For example, input "10000" when setting<br>100.00 %.<br>Refer to page 6-293 for details of PID<br>control.|
|RWwA<br>ee|PID measured value<br>ee|Set the PID measured value<br>Setting range : "0 to 100.00 %"<br>ee<br>ee||
|RWwB<br>aee|PID deviation<br>ee|Set the PID deviation.<br>Setting range : "–100.00 % to 100.00 %"<br>ee<br>ee||
|RWw10,<br>RWw12,<br>RWw14,<br>RWw16,<br>RWw18|Link parameter extended setting/<br>Instruction code|Set the instruction code (refer to page 6-361) for execution of operation mode rewrite,<br>parameter read/write, error reference, error clear, etc. The instructions are executed in<br>the following order by setting "1" in RYF after completing the register setting: RWw2,<br>10, 12, 14, 16, then 18. After completing the execution up to RWw18, "1" is set in RXF.<br>Set HFFFF to disable an instruction by RWw10 to 18. (RWw2 is always executed.)<br>The first 8 bits are link parameter extended setting.<br>Example: When reading Pr. 160, instruction code is H0200.<br>ee||
|RWw11,<br>RWw13,<br>RWw15,<br>RWw17,<br>RWw19|Write data|Set the data specified by the instruction code of RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18. (when<br>required)<br>RWw10 and 11, 12 and 13, 14 and 15, 16 and 17, and 18 and 19 correspond each<br>other.<br>Set "1" in RYF after setting the instruction codes (RWw10, 12, 14, 16, and 18) and the<br>corresponding register.<br>Set "0" when the write code is not required.||
## _**Tab. 6-158:** Remote register definition (master module_ > _inverter)_
When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments). When Pr. 541 "Frequency command sign selection (CC-Link)" = "1", the setting value has either + or –. When the setting value is negative, the command is inverted from the starting command. Setting range: –327.68 Hz to 327.67 Hz (–327.68 to 327.67) 0.01 Hz increments. For details, refer to page 6-350.
Write data is hexadecimal and only lower two digits are valid. (Upper 2 digits are ignored.)
When Pr. 128 = "50, 51, 60, 61", they are valid. If the data outside the range is set, the previous setting is retained. For details, refer to page 6-293.
6 - 358
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## ● Remote register (inverter to master module)
– Remote register definition
|**Device No.**|**Signal**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|
|RWr0|First monitor value|When "1" is set in RYC, the specified monitored data is set to the lower 8 bits of the<br>monitor code (RWw0). When Pr. 37 "Speed display"�0 and output frequency or set<br>frequency monitor is set for monitor code (RWw0), machine speed setting (1 unit) is<br>monitored.|
|RWr1|Second monitor value<br>(Output frequency)|When "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the monitor code (RWw0), the current output fre-<br>quency is always set. When a value other than "0" is set to the upper 8 bits of the mon-<br>itor code (RWw0) while "1" is set in RYC, the monitor data specified by the upper 8 bits<br>of the monitor code (RWw0) is set. When Pr. 37 "Speed display"�0 and output fre-<br>quency or set frequency monitor is set for monitor code (RWw0), machine speed set-<br>ting (1 unit) is monitored.|
|RWr2|Reply code (when Pr. 544 = 0)|When "1" is set in RYD or RYE, the reply code for the frequency setting command is<br>set. When "1" is set in RYF, the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2<br>is set. The value "0" is set for a normal reply and any digit other than "0" is set for data<br>fault, mode error, etc. (Refer to page 6-360.)|
||Reply code 1 (when Pr. 544�0)|Lower 8 bits of RWr2<br>When "1" is set in RYD or RYE, the reply code for the frequency setting command is<br>set. (Refer to page 6-360.)|
||Reply code 2 (when Pr. 544�0)|Upper 8 bits of RWr2<br>When "1" is set in RYF, the reply code corresponding to the instruction code RWw2 is<br>set. (Refer to page 6-360.)|
|RWr3|Read data|For a normal reply, the reply data to the instruction specified by the instruction code<br>is set.|
|RWr4|Third monitor value|When "1" is set in RYC, the monitored data specified by the monitor code (RWw�) is<br>saved.<br>(�indicates a register number (RWw4 to 7)<br>When Pr. 37 "Speed display"�0 and output frequency or set frequency monitor is set<br>for monitor code (RWw0), machine speed setting (1 unit) is monitored.|
|RWr5|Fourth monitor value||
|RWr6|Fifth monitor value||
|RWr7|Sixth monitor value||
|RWr8|Fault record (fault data)|The fault data of faults history No. specified by RWw8 is stored in the lower 8 bits.<br>Upper 8 bits of RWw8 will be reverted back to the upper 8 bits.|
|RWr9|Fault record (output frequency)|Output frequency of the faults history No. specified in RWw8 is stored.|
|RWrA|Fault record (output current)|Output current of the faults history No. specified in RWw8 is stored.|
|RWrB|Fault record (output voltage)|Output voltage of the faults history No. specified in RWw8 is stored.|
|RWrC|Fault record (energization time)|Energization time of the faults history No. specified in RWw8 is stored.|
|RWr10 to<br>RWr19|Reply code|When "1" is set in RYF, the reply codes corresponding to the instruction code RWw10,<br>12, 14, 16, and 18 are set. The value "0" is set for a normal reply and other than "0" is<br>set for data fault, mode error, etc. (Refer to page 6-360.)|
||Read data|For a normal reply, the reply data to the instruction specified by the instruction code<br>is set.|
_**Tab. 6-159:** Remote register definition (inverter_ � _master module)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 359
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
- Reply code definition
The reply to the instruction execution is set to RWr2, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18.
When executing the frequency setting (RYD, RYE) or instruction code execution (RYF), check the reply code (RWr2) in the remote register after execution.
||**Data**|**Item**|**Alarm definition**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Reply code|H0000|Normal|No error (normal completion of instruc-<br>tion code execution)|Reply code to RWr2<br>when Pr. 544 = 0<br>Reply code to RWw10,<br>12, 14, 16, and 18 when<br>Pr. 544 = 18|
||H0001|Write mode error|Parameter write was attempted during<br>operation other than a stop in the net-<br>work operation mode.||
||H0002|Parameter selection<br>error|Unregistered code number was set.||
||H0003|Setting range error|Set data is outside the permissible data<br>range.||
|Reply code 1<br>=|H00<br>=|Normal<br>=|No error (normal completion of instruc-<br>tion code execution)<br>=~~=~~|Reply code to RWr2 when<br>Pr. 544 0<br>~~=~~|
||H01<br>=|Write mode error<br>=|Parameter write was attempted during<br>operation other than a stop in the net-<br>work operation mode.<br>=~~=~~||
||H03<br>=|Frequency command<br>setting range error<br>=|The value outside the range is set.<br>=~~=~~||
|Reply code 2<br>=|H00<br>=|Normal<br>=|No error (normal completion of instruc-<br>tion code execution)<br>=~~=~~||
||H01<br>=|Write mode error<br>=|Parameter write was attempted during<br>operation other than a stop in the net-<br>work operation mode.<br>=~~=~~||
||H02<br>=|Parameter selection<br>error<br>=|Unregistered code number was set.<br>=~~=~~||
||H03<br>=|Setting range error<br>=|Set data is outside the permissible data<br>range.<br>=~~=~~||
6 - 360
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Instruction codes**
Set the instruction code using a remote register (RWw) (Refer to page 6-358.) The definition read by the instruction code is stored in the remote register (RWr). (Refer to page 6-359.)
|**Item**|**Item**|**Read/**<br>**write**|**Instruc-**<br>**tion code**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Operation mode||Read|H7B|H0000:<br>Network operation mode<br>H0001:<br>External operation mode, External JOG operation mode<br>H0002:<br>PU operation mode, External/PU combined operation mode 1 and 2,<br>PUJOG operation mode|
|||Write|HFB|H0000:<br>Network operation mode<br>H0001:<br>External operation mode<br>H0002:<br>PU operation mode (Pr. 79 = "6")|
|Monitor|Output fre-<br>quency/<br>speed�|Read|H6F|H0000 to HFFFF<br>Output frequency: Increments 0.01 Hz<br>Machine speed: Increments 1 (When Pr. 37�"0")|
||Output<br>current|Read|H70|H0000 to HFFFF<br>Output current (hexadecimal): Increments 0.01 A|
||Output<br>voltage|Read|H71|H0000 to HFFFF<br>Output voltage (hexadecimal): Increments 0.1 V|
||Special<br>monitor|Read|H72|H0000 to HFFFF<br>Check the data of the monitor selected by the instruction code HF3.|
||Special<br>monitor<br>selection No.|Read|H73|H01 to HFF<br>Monitor selection data<br>(Refer to monitor code on page 6-363.)|
|||Write|HF3�||
||Faults<br>history|Read|H74 to<br>H77|H0000 to HFFFF: Last two fault records<br>For the data codes or details of fault records, refer to page 7-2.<br>b15<br>b8 b7<br>b0<br>H74<br>H75<br>H76<br>H77<br>Second fault in past<br>Latest fault<br>Fourth fault in past<br>Third fault in past<br>Sixth fault in past<br>Fifth fault in past<br>Eighth fault in past<br>Seventh fault in past<br>0<br>b15<br>(HA0)<br>(H30)<br>0 1 1 0 0 0 0<br>b8<br>1<br>b7<br>0 1 0 0 0 0 0<br>b0<br>Monitor example for faults history (instruction code H74)<br>Read data: H30A0<br>Second fault in past: THT<br>Latest fault: OPT<br>Second fault in past<br>Latest fault|
|Set frequency<br>(RAM)||Read|H6D|Read the set frequency/machine speed from the RAM or E²PROM.<br>H0000 to HFFFF:<br>Set frequency: 0.01Hz increments<br>Machine speed: 1 increments (When Pr. 37�"0")|
|Set frequency<br>(E²PROM)|||H6E||
|Set frequency<br>(RAM)�||Write|HED|Write the set frequency/machine speed into the RAM or E²PROM.<br>�H0000 to H9C40 (0 to 400.00Hz):<br>Frequency: 0.01Hz increments<br>�H0000 to H270E (0 to 9998):<br>Machine speed: 1 increments (When Pr. 37�"0")<br>�To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the inverter RAM.<br>(Instruction code: HED)|
|Set frequency<br>(RAM and<br>E²PROM)�||Write|HEE||
|Parameter||Read|H00 to<br>H63|�Refer to the instruction code in the appendix (page A-16) to read and write<br>as required.<br>Write to Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 is disabled.<br>When setting Pr.100 and later, set link parameter extended setting.<br>�Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".<br>�When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write<br>them to the RAM. (Refer to page 6-245)|
|||Write|H80 to<br>HE3||
_**Tab. 6-161:** Setting of the instruction codes and data (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 361
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
|**Item**|**Read/**<br>**write**|**Instruc-**<br>**tion code**|**Description**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Faults history<br>batch clear|Write|HF4|H9696: Clears the faults history as a batch.|
|Parameter clear<br>All parameter<br>clear|Write|HFC|All parameters return to the initial values.<br>Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be selected according<br>to data.<br>Parameter clear<br>H9696: Communication parameters are cleared<br>H5A5A: Communication parameters are not cleared<br>All parameter clear<br>H9966: Communication parameters are cleared<br>H55AA: Communication parameters are not cleared<br>For more information about parameter clear, all clear, and communication<br>parameters refer to page A-16.<br>When clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communication-related parame-<br>ter settings also return to the initial values. When resuming operation, set the<br>parameters again. Executing clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3,<br>and HFF settings.<br>®<br>®|
|Inverter reset<br>ss|Write<br>ss|HFD|H9696: Resets the inverter.|
|Link parameter<br>extended<br>setting<br>ss<br>o||Read<br>ss<br>ee<br>|<br>||H7F<br>ee<br>||H00 to H0D: Parameter description is changed according to the instruction<br>code (extended) setting.<br>For more information about the instruction codes refer to the parameter list<br>on page A-16.|
||Write<br>|<br>||HFF<br>|||
|Second parame-<br>ter changing<br>o ||Read<br>|<br>| <br>ee|H6C<br> |<br>ee|Read or write of bias and gain parameters (instruction codes H5E to H61 and<br>HDE to HE1 with the link parameter extended setting = "1", H11 to H23 and<br>H91 to HA3 with the link parameter extended setting = "9").<br>H00: Frequency<br>H01: Analog value set in parameters<br>H02: Analog value input from the terminal|
||Write|HEC||
## _**Tab. 6-161:** Setting of the instruction codes and data (2)_
When "100" is set in Pr. 52 Operation panel main monitor selection, frequency setting is monitored during a stop and output frequency is monitored during running.
Write data is in hexadecimal, and only last two digits are valid. (The upper two digits are ignored.)
Setting from the remote register (RWw1) is also available.
Turning OFF the power supply while clearing parameters with H5A5A or H55AA sets back the communication parameter settings to the initial settings.
Setting is valid only when Pr. 544 = "0". When Pr. 544 "0", set using RWw2 or RWw10, 12, 14, 16, # or 18. (Refer to page 6-358)
Reading or writing is available when the link parameter extended setting = "1 or 9".
Gain frequencies can be written using Pr. 125 (instruction code H99) and Pr. 126 (instruction code H9A) also.
## **NOTE**
When the 32-bit parameter setting or monitor description are read and the read value exceeds HFFFF, the reply data will be HFFFF.
6 - 362
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Monitor codes**
Information about the inverter can be monitored by setting the special monitor selection No. of the instruction code and monitor code using the remote registers, RWw0 and RWw4 to 7.
- For the monitor code (RWw0), select the first monitor description (RWr0) from the lower 8 bits and the second monitor description (RWr1) from the upper 8 bits. Example:
- When output current is selected for the first monitor (RWr0) and output voltage is selected for the second monitor (RWr1), the monitor code (RWw0) is H0302.
- When Pr. 544 = "12, 14, or 18", descriptions of monitor codes 3 (RWw4) to 6 (RWw7) can be selected.
|**Monitor code**|**Second monitor**<br>**description (the first 8 bits)**|**First, third to sixth monitor**<br>**description (the last 8 bits)**|**Increments**|
|---|---|---|---|
|H00|Output frequency/machine<br>speed�|No monitoring<br>(monitor value is 0)|0.01 Hz/1|
|H01|Output frequency/machine speed�||0.01 Hz/1|
|H02|Output current||0.01 A|
|H03|Output voltage||0.1 V|
|H05|Frequency setting value/machine speed setting�||0.01 Hz/1|
|…|…||…|
_**Tab. 6-162:** Monitor codes for selecting different information about the inverter_
- When Pr. 37 is not equal to "0", this will be machine speed display (1 increments).
**NOTE** The monitor codes from H01 and up and their contents are the same as those of the RS-485 communication dedicated monitor. For the details of the monitor codes or monitor items, refer to page 6-140.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 363
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **6.24.1 Programming examples**
This section provides programming examples which control the inverter with sequence programs.
|**Item**|**Program example**|**Refer to**<br>**page**|
|---|---|---|
|Reading the inverter status|Reading the inverter status from the buffer memory of the master station|6-366|
|Setting the operation mode|Selecting the network operation mode|6-367|
|Setting the operation commands|Commanding the forward rotation and middle speed signals|6-368|
|Setting the monitoring function|Monitoring the output frequency|6-368|
|Reading a parameter value|Reading the value of Pr. 7 "Acceleration time"|6-369|
|Writing a parameter value|Setting "3.0 s" in Pr. 7 "Acceleration time"|6-370|
|Setting the running frequency<br>(running speed)|Setting to 50.00 Hz|6-371|
|Reading the fault records|Reading the inverter faults|6-372|
|Inverter reset|Perform inverter reset at an inverter alarm occurrence|6-372|
- System configuration example (when the MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controller is used)
**==> picture [341 x 128] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Programmable Power supply CPU Input moduleRX40C7 Output moduleRY40PT5P<br>controller R61P R04CPU<br>(X20 to X2F) (Y30 to Y3F)<br>Hub<br>Inverter Inverter<br>Pr. 544 = 0 Pr. 544 = 0<br>(Station No. 1) (Station No. 2)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I003125E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-174:** CC-Link IE Field Network Basic with programmable controller and two inverters_
- Network parameter setting of the master station
|**Item**|**Setting conditions**|
|---|---|
|Start I/O No.|0000|
|Type|Master|
|All connect count|2|
|Remote input (RX)|X1000|
|Remote output (RY)|Y1000|
|Remote register (RWr)|W0|
|Remote register (RWw)|W100|
|Retry count|3|
_**Tab. 6-163:** Network parameter of the master station_
6 - 364
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
- The relation between the device of the programmable controller CPU and remote I/O (RX, RY) of the remote device station is as follows: The devices used actually are indicated in shaded regions.
**==> picture [261 x 254] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Programmable Remote device Fig. 6-175:<br>controller CPU station (station 1) Remote I/Os<br>X100F to X1000 RX0F to RX00<br>X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10<br>X102F to X1020<br>X103F to X1030<br>RY0F to RY00<br>X104F to X1040<br>RY1F to RY10<br>X105F to X1050<br>Remote device<br>Y100F to Y1000 station (station 2)<br>Y101F to Y1010<br>Y102F to Y1020 RX0F to RX00<br>Y103F to Y1030 RX1F to RX10<br>Y104F to Y1040<br>Y105F to Y1050<br>RY0F to RY00<br>RY1F to RY10<br>I003126E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- The relation between the device of the programmable controller CPU and remote register (RWw, RWr) of the remote device station is as follows: The devices used actually are indicated in shaded regions.
**==> picture [280 x 277] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Programmable Fig. 6-176:<br>controller CPU Remote device Remote Registers<br>For writing station (station 1)<br>W100<br>W101 RWw0<br>W102 RWw1<br>W103 RWw2<br>W104 RWw3<br>W105<br>W106 RWr0<br>W107 RWr1<br>W108 RWr2<br>W109 RWr3<br>W10A<br>W10B<br>For reading<br>Remote device<br>W000 station (station 2)<br>W001<br>W002<br>W003 RWw0<br>W004 RWw1<br>W005 RWw2<br>W006 RWw3<br>W007<br>W008 RWr0<br>W009 RWr1<br>W00A RWr2<br>W00B RWr3<br>I003127E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 365
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Reading the inverter status**
The following program turns on Y00 of the output unit when station 1 inverter is running.
**==> picture [471 x 257] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0<br>(0) K— Check the data link status of the station 1<br>M0 X1002 Y30<br>(4) -— Turn on the output unit (Y00)<br>(7) END<br>Remote input X100F X1000<br>b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0<br>Station 1 RXF to RX0<br>( RX1F to RX10 —COO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0<br>TEE nnn A<br>[Inverter status]<br>Inverter status<br>b0: During forward rotation<br>b1: Reverse running<br>b2: Inverter running (Terminal RUN) (0)<br>b3: Up to frequency (SU signal)<br>b4: Overload alarm (OL signal)<br>b5: —<br>b6: Frequency detection U signal) (0)<br>b7: Fault (Terminal ABC)<br>b8: —<br>b16: — (DO0) (0)<br>b17: — (DO1) (0)<br>b18: — (DO2) (0)<br>I003128E, I003129E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-177:** Program example 1_
These signals are initial values. You can change output signals using Pr. 190 to Pr. 192, Pr. 313 to Pr. 315 "Output terminal function selection".
6 - 366
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Setting the operation mode**
The following explains a program to write various data to the inverter.
The following explains a program to change the operation mode of station 1 inverter to network operation.
- Operation mode write code: HFB (hexadecimal)
- Network operation set data: H0000 (hexadecimal) (Refer to page 6-361)
- The reply code (RWr2) at the time of instruction code execution is set to D2. (For information about the reply code (RWr2) refer to page 6-360.)
**==> picture [484 x 222] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(0) SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>M0 X20<br>(4) PLS M300<br>M300<br>(8) SET M301<br>M301 X100F<br>10) MOV H0FB W102 Write operation mode write code (HFB) to<br>MOV H0 W103 RWw2 and set data (H0000) to RWw3.<br>SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request<br>(RY0F)<br>RST M301<br>SET M302<br>M302 X100F Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the instruction<br>19) MOV W2 D2 code execution completion (RX0F) turns on.<br>RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request<br>(RY0F)<br>RST M302<br>25) END<br>I003130E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Abb. 6-178:** Program example 2_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 367
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Setting the operation commands**
The following program gives a forward command and middle speed command to station 1 inverter.
**==> picture [476 x 218] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(0) SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>Hi + [J<br>(4) M0 X20 Y1000 Forward rotation command (RY00)<br>By<br>Y1003 Middle speed operation command (RY03)<br>(8) END<br>[4<br>Y100F Y1000<br>b15 b7 b0<br>RY0F to RY00<br>0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Station 1<br>RY1F to RY10<br>COPEL rr)——- }-----4]<br>[Run command]<br>1: ON<br>Middle speed Forward rotation 0: OFF<br>Run command<br>b0: Forward rotation command b6: Second function selection (RT signal)<br>b1: Reverse rotation command b7: Terminal 4 input selection (AU signal)<br>b2: High-speed operation command (terminal RH) b8: —<br>b3: Middle-speed operation command (terminal RM b9: Output stop (terminal MRS)<br>b4: Low-speed operation command (terminal RL) b10: —<br>b5: — b11: Inverter reset(terminal RES)<br>I003131E, I003132E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-179:** Program example 3_
These signals are initial values. You can change input signals using Pr. 180 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection". Note that some of the signals do not receive a command from the programmable controller depending on the setting.
## **Monitoring the output frequency**
The following explains a program to read monitor functions of the inverter.
- The following program reads the output frequency of station 1 inverter to D1.
- Output frequency read code: H0001 (hexadecimal)
Refer to page 6-363 for the monitor codes.
For example the output frequency of 60Hz is indicated as H1770 (6000).
**==> picture [479 x 124] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(0) SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>Hi -— [6<br>(4) M0 X20 MOV H1 W100 Set monitor code (H01) of output frequency to RWw0.<br>Hi — a<br>Y100C<br>Turn on the monitor command (RY0C)<br>e<br>| L, X100C [i MOV W0 D1 Read output frequency (RWr0) to D1 when the monitoring (RX0C) turns on.<br>M0 X20 Y1000<br>(12)<br>Rs<br>p+] Y1003<br>(16) END<br>[J<br>4 I003133E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-180:** Program example 4_
6 - 368
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Parameter reading**
The following program reads Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" of station 1 inverter to D1.
- Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" reading instruction code: H07 (hexadecimal)
- For information about the instruction codes refer to the parameter list on page A-16.
- The reply code at the time of instruction code execution is set to D2. (For information about the reply code (RWr2) refer to page 6-360.)
**==> picture [484 x 219] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(0) SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>M0 X20<br>(4) PLS M300<br>M300<br>(8) SET M301<br>(10) M301 X100F MOV H7 W102 Write Pr. 7 read code (H07) to RWw2.<br>SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request<br>(RY0F)<br>RST M301<br>SET M302<br>M302 X100F<br>(17) MOV W3 D1 Read acceleration time (RWr3) and reply code<br>(RWr2) to D1 and D2 when the instruction code<br>MOV W2 D2 execution completion (RX0F) turns on.<br>RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request<br>(RY0F)<br>RST M302<br>(25) END<br>I003134E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-181:** Program example 5_
**NOTE** For parameters having numbers 100 and later, change their link parameter extended settings (set them to other than H00). Refer to page A-16 for details.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 369
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Parameter writing**
The following program changes the setting of Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" of station 1 inverter to 3.0 s.
- Acceleration time writing instruction code: H87 (hexadecimal)
- Acceleration time set data: K30 (decimal)
For information about the instruction codes refer to the parameter list on page A-16.
The reply code at the time of instruction code execution is set to D2. (For information about the reply code (RWr2) refer to page 6-360.)
**==> picture [480 x 203] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(0) SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>Hi —[4<br>M0 X20<br>(4) PLS M300<br>Hi —[J<br>M300<br>(8) SET M301<br>ee<br>M301 X100F<br>(10) MOV H87 W102 Write Pr.7 write (H87) to RWw2 and acceleration<br>time setting data (K30) to RWw3.<br>MOV K30 W103<br>— ——EEEEe—<br>SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request<br>P(e (RY0F)<br>RST M301<br>EE SET M302<br>a=<br>M302 X100F Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the instruction<br>(19) Po MOV W2 D2 code execution completion (RX0F) turns on.<br>RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request<br>(RY0F)<br>| TO RST M302<br>——EE=<br>(25) END<br>J<br>I003135E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-182:** Program example 6_
**NOTES** For parameters having numbers 100 and later, change their link parameter extended settings (set them to other than H00). Refer to page A-16 for details.
- | For other functions, refer to the instruction codes on page 6-361.
6 - 370
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Setting the running frequency**
The following program example changes the running frequency of station 1 inverter to 50.00 Hz.
- Set frequency: K5000 decimal
The reply code at the time of instruction code execution is set to D2. (For information about the reply code (RWr2) refer to page 6-360.)
**==> picture [484 x 201] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
(0) SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>M0 X20<br>(4) PLS M300<br>M300<br>(8) SET M301<br>M301 X100D<br>(10) MOV K5000 W101 Write set frequency to RWw1.<br>SET Y100D Turn off the frequency setting command RAM (RY0D)<br>RST M301<br>SET M302<br>M302 X100D Read reply code (RWr2) to D2 when the frequency<br>(17) MOV W2 D2 setting completion (RX0D) turns on.<br>RST Y100D Turn off the frequency setting command RAM<br>(RY0D)<br>RST M302<br>(23) END<br>I003136E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-183:** Program example 7_
**NOTES** To continuously change the running frequency from the programmable controller When the frequency (speed) setting completion (example: X100D) switches on, make sure that the reply code in the remote register is 0000H and change the set data (example: W101) continuously.
**==> picture [205 x 36] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Program example for writing data to E²PROM<br>Modify the program in fig. 6-183 as follows:<br>● Frequency setting command Y100D � Y100E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [398 x 147] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
● Frequency setting completion X100D � X100E<br>Timing chart when writing to RAM Timing chart when writing to E²PROM<br>Y100D Y100E<br>�<br>W101 W101<br>�<br>Inverter running Inverter running<br>frequency frequency<br>Reflect to the inverter when Y100E turns on<br>� For E²PROM, write is made only once when Y100E is switched on.<br>� If the set data is changed with Y100E on, it is not reflected on the inverter.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 371
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **Fault record reading**
The following program reads fault records of station 1 inverter to D1.
- Faults history No. 1, No. 2 reading instruction code: H74 (hexadecimal)
For the error codes, refer to page 7-2.
The reply code at the time of instruction code execution is set to D2. (For information about the reply code (RWr2) refer to page 6-360.)
**==> picture [471 x 197] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0<br>(0) Check the data link status of the station 1<br>Hi — [Wt<br>M0 X20<br>(4) PLS M300<br>Ht<br>M300<br>(8) SET M301<br>LK $s SS<br>(10) M301 X100F MOV H74 W102 Write error history No.1 and No.2 read code (H74) to RWw2.<br>iELEnnL 42|<br>SET Y100F Turn on the instruction code execution request (RY0F)<br>RST M301<br>SET M302<br>| )@<br>M302 X100F<br>(17) MOV W3 D1 Read alarm data (RWr3) and reply code (RWr2)<br>RLS to D1 and D2 when the instruction code<br>MOV W2 D2 execution completion (RX0F) turns on.<br>RST Y100F Turn off the instruction code execution request<br>(RY0F)<br>RST M302<br>| SEE<br>(25) END<br>[-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I003137E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-184:** Program example 8_
## **Resetting the inverter at inverter error**
The following is a program example for resetting station 1 inverter.
**==> picture [481 x 59] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
SM1536 SD1536.0 SD1540.0 M0 Check the data link status of the station 1<br>(0)<br>HH — [J<br>M0 X101A X20 Y101A Turn on the error reset request flag (RY1A)<br>(4) Turn off the error reset request flag (RY1A)<br>Hi—SUE<br>when the error status flag (RX1A) is off.<br>(8) END<br>—Y<br>I003138E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-185:** Program example 9_
**NOTES** The above inverter reset using RY1A may be made only when an inverter error occurs.
When Pr. 349 "Communication reset selection" = "0", inverter reset is available independently of the operation mode.
When using the instruction code execution request (RYF) with the instruction code (HFD) and data (H9696) to reset the inverter, set a value other than "0" in Pr. 340 "Communication startup mode selection" or change the operation mode to the network operation mode. (For the program example, refer to page 6-367.)
Refer to page 6-243 for operation conditions of inverter reset.
6 - 372
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
## **6.24.2 Instructions**
## **Programming instructions**
Create a sequence program which always verifies that the data is written correctly after sending the execution command.
**==> picture [377 x 57] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Correct! Incorrect!<br>Execution command Execution command<br>Write completion Write completion<br>I003095E, I003096E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 6-186:** Verifying the data transfer_
## **Operating and handling instructions**
- The inverter only accepts the commands from the programmable controller during operation using the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
- The run command from external and parameter unit is ignored.
- If multiple inverters have the same station number, the communication cannot be performed properly.
- The inverter protective function (E.OP1) is activated if data communication stops for more than the time set in Pr. 852 "Ethernet communication check time interval" due to a fault such as a programmable controller fault or a break in the Ethernet cable, during operation through the CCLink IE Field Network Basic.
- If the programmable controller (master station) is reset during operation through the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic or if the programmable controller is powered off, data communication stops and the inverter protective function (E.OP1) is activated.
To reset the programmable controller (master station), switch the operation mode to the external operation once, then reset the programmable controller.
- When Pr. 340 = "0 (initial value)", any inverter whose main power is restored is reset to return to the external operation mode. To resume the network operation, therefore, set the operation mode to the network operation using the programmable controller program.
Set a value other than "0" in Pr. 340 to start in the network operation mode after inverter reset. (For the details of Pr. 340, refer to page 6-218.)
## **Troubleshooting**
|**Description**|**Check point**|
|---|---|
|Operation mode does not switch to<br>the network operation mode|Check that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.<br>(Check for a fault such as a contact fault or break in the cable.)<br>Check that the inverter is in the External operation mode.<br>Check that the operation mode switching program is running.<br>Check that the operation mode switching program has been written correctly.|
|Inverter does not start in the<br>Network operation mode|Check that the inverter starting program is running.<br>Check that the inverter starting program has been written correctly.<br>Check that Pr. 338 "Communication operation command source" is not set to<br>external.|
_**Tab. 6-164:** Error occurrences and their removal_
|**Parameters referred to**||||
|---|---|---|---|
|Pr. 37|Speed display|=>|Page 6-138|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
6 - 373
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Parameter
6 - 374
Troubleshooting
## **7 Troubleshooting**
Frequency inverter FR-E700SC EC/ENE has a multitude of protective functions which protect the drive and the inverter from damage in case of a fault. When an alarm occurs in the inverter, the protective function is activated bringing the inverter to an alarm stop and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following error (alarm) indications. If your fault does not correspond to any of the following errors or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales representative.
- Retention of fault output signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is opened at the activation of the protective function, the inverter’s control power will be lost and the alarm output will not be held.
- Fault or alarm display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the protective function is activated, the operation panel display automatically switches to the above indication.
- Resetting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When a protective function of the inverter is activated, the power output of the inverter is blocked (motor is coasting). The inverter cannot start up again unless an automatic restart has been configured or the inverter is reset. Please observe carefully the warnings contained below in the configuration of an automatic restart or the execution of a reset.
- If protective functions were activated (i. e. the inverter switched off with an error message) follow the instructions for error correction provided in the manual for the inverter. Especially in the case of short circuits or earth contacts in the inverter output and mains over voltages the cause of the fault must be determined prior to switching on again as a recurrence of such faults at short intervals can lead to premature aging of components or even the complete breakdown of the device. After the cause of the fault has been found and corrected the inverter can be reset and operations continue.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 1
List of alarm display
Troubleshooting
## **7.1 List of alarm display**
|**Operation Panel Indication**|**Operation Panel Indication**|**Operation Panel Indication**|**Name**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Error message||E---|Faults history|7-21|
|||HOLD|Operation panel lock|7-4|
|||LOCd|Password locked|7-4|
||to|Er1 to Er4|Parameter write error|7-4|
|||Err.|Inverter reset|7-5|
|Warning||OL|Stall Prevention (overcurrent)|7-6|
|||oL|Stall prevention (overvoltage)|7-6|
|||RB|Regenerative brake prealarm|7-7|
|||TH|Electronic thermal relay function prealarm|7-7|
|||PS|PU Stop|7-7|
|||MT|Maintenance signal output|7-7|
|||UV|Undervoltage|7-8|
|||SA|Safety Stop|7-8|
|Alarm||FN|Fan fault|7-8|
|Fault<br>~~|~~|~~|~~|E.OC1<br>~~|~~|Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration<br>~~|~~|7-9<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.OC2<br>~~|~~|Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed<br>~~|~~|7-9<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.OC3<br>~~|~~|Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop<br>~~|~~|7-9<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.OV1<br>~~|~~|Regenerative over voltage cut-off during<br>acceleration<br>~~|~~|7-10<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.OV2<br>~~|~~|Overcurrent cut-off during constant speed<br>~~|~~|7-10<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.OV3<br>~~|~~|Regenerative over voltage shut-off during<br>deceleration or stop<br>~~|~~|7-10<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.THT<br>~~|~~|Inverter overload shut-off<br>(electronic thermal relay function)<br>~~|~~|7-11<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.THM<br>~~|~~|Motor overload shut-off<br>(electronic thermal relay function)<br>~~|~~|7-11<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.FIN<br>~~|~~|Heatsink overheat<br>~~|~~|7-12<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.ILF<br>,<br>~~|~~|Input phase failure<br>~~|~~<br>~~=~~|7-12<br>~~|~~<br>~~=~~|
||~~|~~|E.OLT<br>~~|~~|Stall prevention<br>~~|~~|7-12<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.BE<br>~~|~~|Brake transistor alarm detection<br>~~|~~|7-13<br>~~|~~|
||~~|~~|E.GF<br>~~|~~|Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent<br>protection<br>~~|~~|7-13<br>~~|~~|
7 - 2
List of alarm display
Troubleshooting
|**Operation Panel Indication**|**Operation Panel Indication**||**Name**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Fault||E.LF|Output phase failure protection|7-13|
|||E.OHT|External thermal relay operation|7-13|
|||E.OPT|Option fault|7-14|
|||E.OP1<br>(FR-E700 SC EC)|Fault of the internal (extension slot) installed option<br>(e.g. communication fault)|7-14|
|||E.OP1<br>(FR-E700 SC ENE)|Ethernet communication fault|7-15|
|||E. 1<br>(FR-E700 SC EC)|Fault of the internal (extension slot) installed option<br>(e.g. connection or contact fault respectively)|7-15|
|||E. 1<br>(FR-E700 SC ENE)|Ethernet board fault<br>(e.g. connection or contact fault respectively)|7-16|
|||E.PE|Parameter storage device alarm|7-16|
|||E.PE2�|Internal board fault|7-16|
|||E.PUE|PU disconnection|7-16|
|||E.RET|Retry count excess|7-17|
|||E. 5<br>E. 6<br>E. 7<br>E.CPU|CPU fault|7-17|
|||E.IOH�|Inrush resistor overheat|7-17|
|||E.AIE�|Analog input fault|7-17|
|||E.USB�|USB communication fault|7-18|
||to|E.MB4 to E.MB7|Brake sequence fault|7-18|
|||E.SAF�|Safety circuit fault|7-18|
|||E.13|Internal circuit fault|7-18|
Tab. 7-1: List of alarm display (2)
- If when employing the operation unit FR-PU04 one of the errors "E.ILF, E.PE2, E.IOH, E.AIE, E.USB or E.SAF" occurs, then "Fault 14" will be displayed.
- Available for the three-phase power input models.
## **NOTE**
If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 3
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
## **7.2 Causes and corrective actions**
## **Error message**
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shutoff.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**HOLD**||
|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Operation panel lock||
|**Description**|Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than STOP/RESET is made invalid. (Refer to section<br>4.3.4.)||
|**Check point**|—||
|**Corrective action**|Press the MODE key for 2s to release lock.|Press the MODE key for 2s to release lock.|
||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**LOCd**||
|**Name**|Password locked||
|**Description**|Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.||
|**Check point**|—||
|**Corrective action**|Enter the password in Pr. 297 "Password lock/unlock" to unlock the password function before<br>operating. (Refer to section 6.17.5.)||
||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**Er1**||
|**Name**|Write disable error||
||1) You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set||
|**Description**|to disable parameter write.<br>2) Frequency jump setting range overlapped.||
||3) The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.||
||1) Check the setting of Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection". (Refer to section 6.17.2.)||
|**Check point**|2) Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to section. 6.4.2.)||
||3) Check the connection of the PU and inverter.||
||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**Er2**||
|**Name**|Write error during operation||
||When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is||
|**Description**|enabled independently of operation status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF||
||(STR) is on.||
|**Check point**|1) Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to section 6.17.2.)<br>2) Check that the inverter is not operating.||
|**Corrective action**|1) Set "2" in Pr. 77.<br>2) After stopping operation, make parameter setting.||
7 - 4
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**Er3**||
|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Calibration error||
|**Description**|Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.||
|**Corrective action**|Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to section 6.16.3.)||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**Er4**||
|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Mode designation error||
|**Description**|1)You attempted to make parameter setting in the External or NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is<br>not "2".<br>2) You attempted to make parameter setting when the command source is not at the operation<br>panel.||
|**Check point**|1) Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".<br>2) Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to section 6.17.2.)<br>3) Check if FR Configurator (USB connector) or a parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected<br>when Pr. 551 = "9999 (initial setting)."<br>4) Check the Pr. 551 setting.||
|**Corrective action**|1) After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer<br>to section 6.17.2.)<br>2) After setting "2" in Pr. 72, make parameter setting.<br>3 Disconnect FR Configurator (USB connector) or the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), and<br>make parameter setting.<br>4) After setting Pr. 551 = "4", make parameter setting.||
||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**Err.**||
|**Name**|Inverter reset||
|**Description**|1) Executing reset using RES signal, or reset command from communication or PU.<br>2) Displays at powering off.||
|**Corrective action**|1) Turn off the RES signal.||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 5
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
## **Warnings**
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**OL**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**OL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Stall prevention (overcurrent)||||
|**Description**|During<br>acceleration|When the output current (output torque when Pr. 277 "Stall prevention current<br>switchover" = 1) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.<br>22 "Stall prevention operation level", etc.), this function stops the increase in<br>frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from<br>resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has reduced below<br>stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency again.|||
||During<br>constant-speed<br>operation|When the output current (output torque when Pr. 277 "Stall prevention current<br>switchover" = 1) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.<br>22 "Stall prevention operation level", etc.), this function reduces frequency until<br>the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in over-<br>current trip. When the overload current has reduced below stall prevention<br>operation level, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.|||
||During<br>deceleration|When the output current (output torque when Pr. 277 "Stall prevention current<br>switchover" = 1) of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.<br>22 "Stall prevention operation level", etc.), this function stops the decrease in<br>frequency until the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from<br>resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has decreased below<br>stall prevention operation level, this function decreases the frequency again.|||
|**Check point**|1) Check that the Pr. 0 "Torque boost" setting is not too large.<br>2) Check that the Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" and Pr. 8 "Deceleration time" settings are not too small.<br>3) Check that the load is not too heavy.<br>4) Are there any failure in peripheral devices?<br>5) Check that the Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" is not too large.<br>6) Check that the Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level" is appropriate.||||
|**Corrective action**|1) Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 "Torque boost setting" 1% by 1% and check the motor status.<br>(Refer to section 6.3.1.)<br>2) Set a larger value in Pr. 7 "Acceleration time" and Pr. 8 "Deceleration time". (Refer to section<br>6.7.1.)<br>3) Reduce the load weight.<br>4) Try advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.<br>5) Change the Pr. 14 "Load pattern selection" setting.<br>6) Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level". (The initial<br>value is 150%.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention<br>operation level with Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level", or disable stall prevention with Pr.<br>156 "Stall prevention operation selection". (Operation at OL occurrence can be selected using<br>Pr. 156.)||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**oL**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**oL**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Stall prevention (overcurrent)||||
|**Description**|During<br>deceleration|If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds<br>the regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the<br>decrease in frequency to prevent over voltage shut-off. As soon as the<br>regenerative energy has decreased, deceleration resumes.<br>If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when<br>regeneration avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function<br>increases the speed to prevent over voltage shut-off. (Refer to<br>section 6.20.4).|||
|**Check point**|Check for sudden speed reduction.<br>Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used. (Refer to<br>section 6.20.4.)||||
|**Corrective action**|The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 "Deceleration time".||||
7 - 6
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**PS**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**PS**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|PU Stop||||
|**Description**|Stop with the STOP/RESET key of the PU is set in Pr. 75 "Reset selection/disconnected PU detec-<br>tion/PU stop selection". (For Pr. 75, refer to section 6.17.1.)||||
|**Check point**|Check for a stop made by pressing the STOP/RESET key of the operation panel.||||
|**Corrective action**|Turn the start signal off and release with PU/EXT key.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**RB**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**RB**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Regenerative brake prealarm||||
|**Description**|Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 "Special regenerative<br>brake duty" value. When the setting of Pr. 70 "Special regenerative brake duty" is the initial value<br>(Pr. 70 = 0), this warning does not occur.<br>If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV�) occurs.<br>The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the<br>RBP signal output, assign the function by setting "7 (positive logic) or 107 (negative logic)" in any<br>of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection". (Refer to section 6.10.5.)||||
|**Check point**|�Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.<br>�Check that the Pr. 30 "Regenerative function selection" and Pr. 70 "Special regenerative brake<br>duty" values are correct.||||
|**Corrective action**|�Increase the deceleration time (Pr. 8).<br>�Check the Pr. 30 "Regenerative function selection" and Pr. 70 "Special regenerative brake<br>duty" values.||||
||||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**TH**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**TH**|
|**Name**|Electronic thermal relay function prealarm||||
|**Description**|Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" reaches or exceeds 85%<br>of the preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" setting, a motor<br>overload trip (E. THM) occurs. The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display.<br>For the terminal used for THP signal output, assign the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or<br>108 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection"). (Refer to<br>section 6.10.5.)||||
|**Check point**|1)Check for large load or sudden acceleration.<br>2) Is the Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" setting is appropriate? (Refer to section 6.8.1.)||||
|**Corrective action**|1) Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.<br>2) Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay". (Refer to section 6.8.1.)||||
||||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**MT**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**—**|
|**Name**|Maintenance signal output||||
|**Description**|Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.<br>When the setting of Pr. 504 "Maintenance timer alarm output" set time is the initial value (Pr. 504<br>= 9999), this warning does not occur.||||
|**Check point**|The Pr. 503 "Maintenance timer" setting is larger than the Pr. 504 "Maintenance timer alarm out-<br>put set time" setting. (Refer to section 6.21.3.)||||
|**Corrective action**|Setting "0" in Pr. 503 "Maintenance timer" erases the signal.||||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 7
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**UV**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**—**|
|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Undervoltage||
||If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal||
|**Description**|functions. In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase.<br>To prevent this, if the power supply voltage decreases below about 230 V AC, this function stops||
||the inverter output and displays. An alarm is reset when the voltage returns to normal.||
|**Check point**|Check that the power supply voltage is normal.||
|**Corrective action**|Check that the power supply voltage is normal.||
||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**SA**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**—**|
|**Name**|Safety stop||
|**Description**|Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).||
|**Check point**|Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when not<br>using the safety stop function.||
||When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and P and across S2 and||
||SC with shorting wire for the inverter to run.||
|**Corrective action**|If SA is indicated when across S1 and SC and across S2 and PC are both shorted while using<br>the safety stop function (drive enabled), internal failure might be the cause.||
||Check the wiring of terminals S1, S2 and SC and contact your sales representative if the||
||wiring has no fault.||
## **Alarm**
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection". Refer to section 6.10.5).
|tion 6.10.5).|||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**FN**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**FN**|
|**Name**|Fan fault||||
|**Description**|For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, "FN" appears on the operation panel when the cool-<br>ing fan stops due to an alarm or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 "Cooling fan oper-<br>ation selection".||||
|**Check point**|Check the cooling fan for an alarm.||||
|**Corrective action**|Replace the cooling fan.||||
7 - 8
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
## **Fault**
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OC1**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**OC During Acc**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Overcurrent shut-off during acceleration||||
|**Description**|When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 230% of the rated current<br>during acceleration, the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.||||
|**Check point**|1) Check for sudden acceleration.<br>2) Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.<br>3) Check for output short circuit/ground fault.<br>4) Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.<br>Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.<br>5) Check that regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes<br>larger than the V/F reference value at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to the high<br>voltage.)||||
|**Corrective action**|1) Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift appli-<br>cation.)<br>2) When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter. If<br>"E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.<br>3) Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.<br>4) Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level (Refer to section 6.3.5).<br>Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to section 6.3.5).<br>5) Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 "Base frequency voltage". (Refer to<br>section 6.5.1.)||||
||||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OC2**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**OC During Dec**|
|**Name**|Overcurrent shut-off during constant speed||||
|**Description**|When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 230% of the rated current<br>during constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.||||
|**Check point**|1) Check for sudden load change.<br>2) Check for output short circuit/ground fault.<br>3) Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.<br>Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.||||
|**Corrective action**|1) Keep load stable.<br>2) Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.<br>3) Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level (Refer to section 6.3.5).<br>Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to section 6.3.5).||||
||||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OC3**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**OC During Dec**|
|**Name**|Overcurrent shut-off during deceleration or stop||||
|**Description**|When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 230% of the rated inverter<br>current during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is<br>activated and the inverter trips.||||
|**Check point**|1) Check for sudden speed reduction.<br>2) Check for output short circuit/ground fault.<br>3) Check for too fast operation of the motor’s mechanical brake.<br>4) Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.<br>Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.||||
|**Corrective action**|1) Increase the deceleration time.<br>2) Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.<br>3) Check the mechanical brake operation.<br>4) Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level (Refer to section 6.3.5).<br>Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to section 6.3.5).||||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 9
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OV1**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**OV During Acc**|
|---|---|
|**Name**|Regenerative over voltage shutoff during acceleration|
||If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed|
|**Description**|the specified value, the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips. The circuit may also|
||be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.|
|**Check point**|1) Check for too slow acceleration (e.g. during downward acceleration in vertical lift load).<br>2) Check that the Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level" is not too low.|
||1)<br>Decrease the acceleration time.|
|**Corrective action**|Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used.<br>(Refer to section 6.20.4)|
||2) Set a correct value in Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level".|
|||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OV2**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**U>>N = konst**|
|**Name**|Regenerative over voltage shut-off during constant speed|
||If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed|
|**Description**|the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may|
||also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.|
|**Check point**|1) Check for sudden load change.<br>2) Check that the Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level" is not too low.|
||1)<br>Keep load stable.|
||Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used.|
|**Corrective action**|(Refer to section 6.20.4)<br>Use the brake resistor, brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)|
||as required.|
||2) Set a correct value in Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level".|
|||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OV3**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**OV During Dec**|
|**Name**|Regenerative over voltage shut-off during deceleration or stop|
||If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed|
|**Description**|the specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may|
||also be activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.|
|**Check point**|Check for sudden speed reduction.|
||Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the inertia|
||moment of the load)|
|**Corrective action**|Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886). (Refer to section|
||6.20.4.)|
||Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.|
7 - 10
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.THT**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Inv. Overload**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Inverter overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)�||||
|**Description**|If the temperature of the output transistor element exceeds the protection level under the condi-<br>tion that a current not less than the rated inverter current flows and overcurrent trip does not<br>occur (230% or less), the electronic thermal relay activates to stop the inverter output. (Overload<br>capacity 150% for 60 s, 200% for 3s)||||
|**Check point**|�Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.<br>�Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small).<br>�Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using<br>machine.<br>�Check the motor for use under overload.<br>�Check for too high ambient temperature.||||
|**Corrective action**|�Increase acceleration/deceleration time.<br>�Adjust the torque boost setting.<br>�Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine.<br>�Reduce the load weight.<br>�Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.||||
- Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.THM**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Motor Overload**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Motor overload shut-off (electronic thermal relay function)�||||
|**Description**|The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or<br>reduced cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output<br>when the I²t value reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 "Electronic thermal O/L relay" setting and the protec-<br>tion circuit is activated to stop the inverter output when the I²t value reaches the specified value.<br>When running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal<br>relay on the inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic ther-<br>mal relay function.||||
|**Check point**|1) Check the motor for use under overload.<br>2) Check that the setting of Pr. 71 "Applied motor" for motor selection is correct.<br>(Refer to section 6.8.2.)<br>3) Check that the setting of Pr. 71 "Applied motor" for motor selection is correct.<br>(Refer to section 6.3.5.)||||
|**Corrective action**|1) Reduce the load weight.<br>2) For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 "Applied motor".<br>3) Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to section 6.3.5.)||||
- Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 11
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.FIN**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**H/Sink O/Temp**|
|---|---|
|**Name**|Fin overheat|
||If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.|
||The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink|
|**Description**|overheat protection operation temperature. For the terminal used for the FIN signal output,|
||assign the function by setting "26" (source logic) or "126" (sink logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192|
||"Output terminal function selection". (Refer to section 6.10.5).|
||1) Check for too high ambient temperature.|
|**Check point**|2) Check for heatsink clogging.<br>3) Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that "FN" is not displayed on the operation|
||panel.)|
||1) Set the ambient temperature to within the specifications.|
|**Corrective action**|2) Clean the heatsink.|
||3) Replace the cooling fan.|
|||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.ILF**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**Fault 14**|
||**FR-PU07**<br>**Input phase loss**|
|**Name**|Input phase failure|
||Inverter trips when function valid setting (=1) is selected in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection|
|**Description**|selection and one phase of the three phase power input is lost. (Refer to section 6.13.2).<br>It may function if phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input becomes largely|
||unbalanced.|
||Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.|
|**Check point**|Check that phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input is not largely|
||unbalanced.|
||Wire the cables properly.|
||Repair a break portion in the cable.|
|**Corrective action**|Check the Pr. 872 "Input phase failure protection selection" setting.|
||Set Pr. 872 = "0" (without input phase loss protection) when three-phase input voltage is|
||largely unbalanced.|
Available only for three-phase power input specification model.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OLT**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Stall Prev STP ( OL shown during**<br>**stall prevention operation)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Stall prevention||||
|**Description**|If the output frequency has fallen to 1 Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3 s, a fault<br>(E.OLT) appears and trips the inverter. "OL" appears while stall prevention is being activated.<br>E.OLT may not occur if stall prevention (OL) is activated during output phase loss.||||
|**Check point**|Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to section 6.3.5).||||
|**Corrective action**|Reduce the load weight.<br>Check the Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level" setting.||||
7 - 12
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.BE**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Br. Cct. Fault**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Brake transistor alarm detection/internal circuit error||||
|**Description**|When a brake transistor alarm has occurred due to the large regenerative energy from the motor<br>etc., the brake transistor alarm is detected and the inverter trips.<br>In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.||||
|**Check point**|�Reduce the load inertia.<br>�heck that the frequency of using the brake is proper.||||
|**Corrective action**|Replace the inverter.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.GF**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Ground Fault**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Output phase failure protection||||
|**Description**|The inverter trips if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows at start due to an earth (ground)<br>fault that occurred on the inverter's output side (load side). Whether this protective function is<br>used or not is set with Pr. 249 "Earth (ground) fault detection at start".||||
|**Check point**|Check for an earth fault in the motor and connection cable.||||
|**Corrective action**|Remedy the earth fault portion.||||
||||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.LF**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**E.LF**|
|**Name**|Output phase loss||||
|**Description**|If one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost during inverter<br>operation (except during DC injection brake operation and when output frequency is under<br>1 Hz), inverter stops the output.<br>Whether the protective function is used or not is set with Pr. 251 "Output phase loss protection<br>selection".||||
|**Check point**|�Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)<br>�Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.||||
|**Corrective action**|�Wire the cables properly.<br>�Check the Pr. 251 "Output phase failure protection selection" setting.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OHT**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**OH Fault**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|External thermal relay operation�||||
|**Description**|If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted<br>temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches on (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.<br>Functions when "7" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function<br>selection".<br>This protective function does not function in the initial status (OH signal is not assigned).||||
|**Check point**|�Check for motor overheating.<br>�Check that the value of "7" (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input<br>terminal function selection".||||
|**Corrective action**|�Reduce the load and frequency of operation.<br>�Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.||||
� Functions only when any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection" is set to OH.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 13
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OPT**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**Option Fault**|
|---|---|
|**Name**|Option fault|
|**Description**|Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr. 296 = "0 or 100."|
|**Check point**|Check if password lock is activated by setting Pr. 296 = "0, 100"|
||To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr. 296 not equal to|
|**Corrective action**|"0,100".|
||If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales|
||representative.|
|||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**<br>a|**E.OP1**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**Option slot alarm 1**|
|**Name**|Communication option fault|
|**Description**|Stops the inverter output when a communication line fault occurs in the communication option.|
||Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.|
|**Check point**|Check that the plug-in option unit is plugged into the connector securely.<br>Check for a break in the communication cable.|
||Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.|
||Check the option function setting, etc.|
|**Corrective action**|Connect the plug-in option securely.|
||Check the connection of communication cable.|
||Connect the terminating resistor correctly.|
This fault is only available for the frequency inverter FR-E700 SC EC.
7 - 14
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.OP1**�||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Option slot alarm 1**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Ethernet communication fault||||
|**Description**|�Appears when Ethernet communication is interrupted by physical factors while Pr. 851<br>“Ethernet signal loss detection function selection” = “3” (initial value).<br>�The inverter output is shut off when Ethernet communication is cut off for the time set in<br>Pr. 852 “Ethernet communication check time interval” or longer between the inverter and all<br>devices with the IP addresses in the range specified for the Ethernet command source<br>selection (Pr. 844 to Pr. 849).<br>�Stops the inverter output when excessive noise occurs around the inverter.<br>�When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, the inverter output is shut off when the<br>data addressed to the own station is not received for the predetermined timeout period or<br>longer, or when the status bit of the cyclic transmission addressed to the own station turns<br>OFF (when the master controller gives a command to stop the cyclic transmission). (For the<br>details of the timeout period, status bit of the cyclic transmission, and command to stop the<br>cyclic transmission, refer to the Instruction Manual of the master controller which supports<br>the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.)||||
|**Check point**|�Check for a break in the Ethernet cable.<br>�Check that the Pr. 852 setting is not too short.<br>�Check for excessive noise around the inverter.<br>�When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, check that the timeout period set in the<br>master is not shorter than the period during which the inverter does not receive the data<br>addressed to the own station.<br>�When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, check that the status bit of the cyclic<br>transmission addressed to the own station is not OFF.||||
|**Corrective action**|�Check that the Ethernet cable is correctly connected to the Ethernet connector. Check that<br>the Ethernet cable is not broken.<br>�Set a larger value in Pr. 852.<br>�When excessive noise occurs around the inverter, change the communication setting of the<br>master. (The noise may be reduced by setting a shorter timeout period or increasing the<br>number of retries in the communication setting of the master.)<br>�When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, set a timeout period longer than the period<br>during which the inverter does not receive the data addressed to the own station.<br>�When the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is used, turn ON the status bit of the cyclic<br>transmission addressed to the own station.||||
> � This fault is only available for the frequency inverter FR-E700 SC ENE.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.1**�||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Fault 1**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Option fault||||
|**Description**|�Stops the inverter output if a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter<br>and communication option occurs.<br>�Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.||||
|**Check point**|�Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.<br>�Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.<br>�Check the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option.||||
|**Corrective action**|�Connect the plug-in option securely.<br>�Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around<br>the inverter.<br>If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales<br>representative or distributor.<br>�Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial<br>status. (Refer to the instruction manual of each option)||||
> � This fault is only available for the frequency inverter FR-E700 SC EC.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 15
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.1**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Fault 1**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Ethernet board fault||||
|**Description**|The inverter output is shut off when a contact fault occurs between the inverter and the Ethernet<br>board. The indication also appears when the initial position of the manufacturer setting switch<br>on the Ethernet board is changed.||||
|**Check point**|Check that the Ethernet board is installed onto the connector securely.<br>Check for excessive noise around the inverter.<br>Check that the initial position of the manufacturer setting switch on the Ethernet board was<br>not changed.||||
|**Corrective action**|Connect the Ethernet board securely.<br>Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excessive electrical noises<br>around the inverter. If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, contact your<br>sales representative.<br>Set the manufacturer setting switch on the Ethernet board back to the initial position.||||
This fault is only available for the frequency inverter FR-E700 SC ENE.
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.PE**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Corrupt Memry**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Parameter storage device alarm (control circuit board)||||
|**Description**|Stops the inverter output if fault occurred in the parameter stored. (E²PROM fault)||||
|**Check point**|Check for too many number of parameter write times.||||
|**Corrective action**|Please contact your sales representative.<br>When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to<br>enable RAM write. Note that powering off returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.PE2**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Fault 14**<br>**PR storage alarm**|
|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Internal board fault||
|**Description**|When a combination of control board and main circuit board is wrong, the inverter is tripped.||
|**Check point**|—||
|**Corrective action**|Please contact your sales representative.||
||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.PUE**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**PU Leave Out**|
|**Name**|PU disconnection||
||This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is sus-||
||pended, e.g. the parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 "Reset||
||selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection". This function stops the inverter output||
||when communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible number of retries||
|**Description**|when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 "Number of PU communication retries" during the||
||RS-485 communication with the PU connector (use Pr. 502 "Stop mode selection at communica-||
||tion error" to change). This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken||
||within the period of time set in Pr. 122 "PU communication check time interval" during the RS-|within the period of time set in Pr. 122 "PU communication check time interval" during the RS-|
||485 communication with the PU connector.||
|**Check point**|Check that the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.||
||Check the Pr. 75 setting.||
|**Corrective action**|Connect the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.||
7 - 16
Troubleshooting
Causes and corrective actions
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.RET**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Retry No Over**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|**Name**|Retry count excess||||
|**Description**|If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the<br>inverter. Functions only when Pr. 67 "Number of retries at fault occurrence" is set. When the initial<br>value (Pr. 67 = 0) is set, this protective function does not function.||||
|**Check point**|Find the cause of fault occurrence.||||
|**Corrective action**|Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E. 5**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Fault 5**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
||**E. 6**|||**Fault 6**|
||**E. 7**|||**Fault 7**|
||**E.CPU**|||**CPU Fault**|
|**Name**|CPU fault||||
|**Description**|Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.||||
|**Check point**|�Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.<br>�Check if the terminal PC is shorted with the terminal SD. (E. 6/E. 7)||||
|**Corrective action**|�Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around<br>the inverter.<br>�Check the connection between the terminals PC and SD. (E. 6/E. 7).<br>�Please contact your sales representative.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.IOH**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Fault 14**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**Inrush overheat**|
|**Name**|Inrush current limit circuit fault||||
|**Description**|Stops the inverter output when the resistor of inrush curre<br>current limit circuit fault.|||nt limit circuit overheated. The inrush|
|**Check point**|Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.||||
|**Corrective action**|Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated. If the problem still persists<br>after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.||||
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.AIE**||**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**|**Fault 14**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**Analog in error**|
|**Name**|Analog input fault||||
|**Description**|Appears if voltage (current) is input to terminal 4 when the setting in Pr. 267 "Terminal 4 input<br>selection" and the setting of voltage/current input switch are different.||||
|**Check point**|Check the setting of Pr. 267 "Terminal 4 input selection" and voltage/current input switch.||||
|**Corrective action**|Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection, and<br>voltage/current input switch to voltage input. (Refer to section 6.16.1.)||||
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 17
Causes and corrective actions
Troubleshooting
||**Operation panel**<br>**indication**<br>**E.USB**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**Fault 14**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**USB comm error**<br>**Name**<br>USB communication fault<br>ess<br>es<br>ee<br>a|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**<br>**E.USB**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**Fault 14**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**USB comm error**<br>**Name**<br>USB communication fault<br>ess<br>es<br>ee<br>a|
|---|---|---|
||**Description**|When communication has broken during the time set in Pr. 548 "USB communication check time<br>interval", this function stops the inverter output.|
||**Check point**|Check the USB communication cable.|
|||Check the Pr. 548 "USB communication check time interval" setting.|
|||Check the USB communication cable.|
||**Corrective action**|Increase the Pr. 548 "USB communication check time interval" setting. Or, change the setting|
|||to 9999. (Refer to section 6.19.8.)|
||||
|||**FR-PU04**|
||**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.MB4 to**<br>**E.MB7**<br>to<br>**E.MB4 Fault to E.MB7 Fault**<br>**FR-PU07**|
||**Name**<br>a|Brake sequence fault|
|||The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence|
||**Description**|function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 283). This protective function does not function in the initial status. (Refer|
|||to section 6.9.5.)|
||**Check point**<br>a|Find the cause of alarm occurrence.|
||**Corrective action**<br>a|Check the set parameters and perform wiring properly.|
|**Operation panel**<br>**indication**<br>**Name**<br>YY <br>a||**E.SAF**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**Fault 14**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**Fault E.SAF**<br>Safety circuit fault<br> ~~——~~—<br>es<br>ee|
||**Description**|Appears when safety circuit is malfunctioning.<br>Appears when one of the lines between S1 and PC, or between S2 and PC is opened.|
|||Check if the shorting wire between S1 and PC or between S2 and PC is disconnected when|
||**Check point**|not using the safety stop function.<br>Check that the safety relay module or the connection has no fault when using the safety stop|
|||function.|
|||When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC and across S2 and|
|||PC with shorting wire. (Refer to section 3.4.3).|
||**Corrective action**|When using the safety stop function, check that wiring of terminal S1, S2 and PC is correct|
|||and the safety stop input signal source such as safety relay module is operating properly.|
|||Refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-004) for causes and|
|||countermeasures.|
||||
||**Operation panel**<br>**indication**|**E.13**<br>**FR-PU04**<br>**FR-PU07**<br>**Fault 13**|
||**Name**<br>a|Internal circuit fault|
||**Description**<br>a|Stop the inverter output when an internal circuit fault occurred.|
||**Corrective action**<br>a|Please contact your sales representative.|
**NOTES** If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PE2, E.IOH, E.AIE, E.USB or E.SAF are activated when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
| If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
7 - 18
Reset method of protective function
Troubleshooting
## **7.3 Reset method of protective function**
Eliminate the cause of the error before you reset the inverter. Note that the internal thermal integrated value of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter. It takes about 1s for reset.
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations:
- Using the operation panel, press the STOP/RESET key to reset the inverter. (Enabled only when the inverter protective function is activated (major fault). (Refer to page 7-9 for major fault.))
_**Fig. 7-1:**_
_Resetting the inverter by using the operation panel_
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001859E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Turn on the reset signal RES for more than 0.1s. (Connect the terminals RES and PC as shown in fig. 7-2 when using source logic or terminals RES and SD when using sink logic). (If the RES signal is kept on, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in the reset status.)
**==> picture [279 x 93] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 7-2:<br>Inverter<br>Resetting the inverter by turning on the RES signal<br>I000249C<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
- Switch OFF the power once, then switch it ON again after the indicator of the operation panel turns OFF.
_**Fig. 7-3:**_
_Resetting the inverter by switching the power supply off an on_
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001297E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 19
LED display
Troubleshooting
## **7.4 LED display**
In contrast to the LC display on the (optional) parameter unit FR-PU04/FR-PU07, alphanumeric characters are displayed on the LED display of the control panel in a somewhat simplified form. There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on the operation panel.
**==> picture [471 x 271] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
s 0 0 A 2 M<br>s 1 0 B s N<br>s 2 O C s O<br>O 3 0 D O o<br>0 4 0 E 0 P<br>0 5 0 F 0 S<br>0 6 0 G O T<br>0 7 0 H 0 U<br>0 8 = I s V<br>s 9 :0 J r<br>. L O} - UJ<br>I002141E<br> Fig. 7-4: Correspondences between digital and actual characters (operation panel)<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
7 - 20
Check and clear of the fault history
Troubleshooting
## **7.5 Check and clear of the fault history**
**==> picture [116 x 11] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Check for the fault history<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [400 x 483] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Monitor/frequency setting Parameter setting<br>Operation panel is used for<br>operation Parameter setting change<br>_— Lite<br>Faults history Procedure for displaying the faults history and the status values for the time of the fault<br>Eight past faults can be displayed with the digital dial.<br>(The last fault in the list is identified by a dot after the E: "E.")<br>o e Bess<br>When no alarm exists is displayed.<br>a_<br>Output frequency Output current<br>Flickering Flickering<br>Jaaa - J .<br>4<br>c Flickering oy<br>Energizing time Output voltage<br>2 ; a<br>Flickering Flickering<br>J I aa - JY. - EA<br>Fault history number<br>(The number of past faults is displayed.)<br>Press<br>the digital dial.<br>Flickering ao<br>Press<br>the digital dial.<br>7<br>°<br>@!'e 5 s<br>ry<br>Flickering<br>Press<br>the digital dial.<br>n nS S —-<br>I001857E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 7-5:** Displaying the fault list and the status values for the time of the fault_
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530 h) in the indication of 1 h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 21
Check and clear of the fault history
Troubleshooting
## **Clearing procedure**
The fault history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL "Faults history clear". (The fault history is not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".)
**==> picture [417 x 294] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Operation Display<br>Screen at powering on<br>The monitor display appears.<br>; Locos<br>° Press the MODE key to choose the parameter<br>setting mode. The parameter number<br>read previously appears.<br>@ Turn the digital dial until Er.CL appears. @ ° am<br>° Press the SET key to show the currently set value.<br>The initial value "0" appears. o<br>a<br>) Turn the digital dial to change it to the set value "1". o =<br>Press the SET key to set.<br>° © »- i am<br>Flicker ... Fault history clear complete!<br>By turning the digital dial, you can read another parameter.<br>Press the SET key to show the setting again.<br>Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001858E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 7-6:** Clearing the fault history_
7 - 22
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
## **7.6 Check first when you have troubles**
## **7.6.1 Motor does not start**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Main circuit|Appropriate power supply voltage is not<br>applied.<br>(Operation panel display is not provided.)|Power ON a moulded case circuit breaker<br>(MCCB), an earth leakage circuit breaker<br>(ELB), or a magnetic contactor (MC).|—|
|||Check for the decreased input voltage, input<br>phase loss, and wiring.||
||Motor is not connected properly.|Check the wiring between the inverter and<br>the motor.|3-7|
||The jumper across P/+ and P1 is<br>disconnected.|Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1.<br>When using a DC reactor (FFR-HEL-(H)-E),<br>remove the jumper across P/+ and P1, and<br>then connect the DC reactor.|3-47|
|Input signal|Start signal is not input.|Check the start command source, and input a<br>start signal.<br>PU operation mode: RUN key<br>External operation mode: STF/STR signal|6-209|
||Both the forward and reverse rotation start<br>signals (STF, STR) are input simultaneously.|Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse<br>rotation start signals (STF or STR).<br>When the STF and STR signals are turned ON<br>simultaneously, a stop command is given.|3-15|
||Frequency command is zero.<br>(RUN LED of the operation panel flickers.)|Check the frequency command source and<br>enter a frequency command.|6-209|
||AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used<br>for frequency setting.<br>(RUN LED of the operation panel flickers.)|Turn ON the AU signal.<br>Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4<br>input.|3-15|
||Output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES)<br>is ON.<br>(RUN LED on the operation panel flickers<br>while MRS signal is ON.)|Turn MRS or RES signal OFF.<br>Inverter starts the operation with a given<br>start command and a frequency command<br>after turning OFF MRS or RES signal. Before<br>turning OFF, ensure the safety.|6-119,<br>7-19|
||Jumper connector of sink - source is wrongly<br>selected.<br>(RUN LED of the operation panel flickers.)|Check that the control logic switchover<br>jumper connector is correctly installed.<br>If it is not installed correctly, input signal is<br>not recognized.|3-27|
||Shorting wires between S1 and PC, S2 and PC<br>are disconnected.|Short between S1 and PC, S2 and PC with<br>shorting wires.|3-24|
||Voltage/current input switch is not correctly<br>set for analog input signal (0 to 5 V/0 to 10 V,<br>4 to 20 mA).<br>(RUN LED of the operation panel flickers.)|Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input<br>switch correctly, then input an analog signal<br>in accordance with the setting.|3-15|
||The STOP/RESET key was pressed<br>(Operation panel indication is "PS".)|During the External operation mode, check<br>the method of restarting from a STOP/RESET<br>key input stop from PU.|7-7|
||Two-wire or three-wire type connection is<br>wrong.|Check the connection.<br>Connect STOP signal when three-wire type is<br>used.|6-122|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 23
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Parameter<br>setting|Pr. 0 "Torque boost" setting is improper when<br>V/F control is used.|Increase Pr. 0 setting by 0.5% increments<br>while observing the rotation of a motor.<br>If that makes no difference, decrease the set-<br>ting.|6-35|
||Pr. 78 "Reverse rotation prevention selection"<br>is set.|Check the Pr. 78 setting.<br>Set Pr. 78 when you want to limit the motor<br>rotation to only one direction.|6-197|
||Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection" setting is<br>wrong.|Select the operation mode which corre-<br>sponds with input methods of start com-<br>mand and frequency command.|6-209|
||Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to<br>C7) settings are improper.|Check the bias and gain (calibration parame-<br>ter C2 to C7) settings.|6-183|
||Pr. 13 "Starting frequency" setting is greater<br>than the running frequency.|Set running frequency higher than Pr. 13. The<br>inverter does not start if the frequency set-<br>ting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13.|6-75|
||Frequency settings of various running fre-<br>quency (such as multi-speed operation) are<br>zero.<br>Especially, Pr. 1 "Maximum frequency" is zero.|Set the frequency command according to the<br>application. Set Pr. 1 higher than the actual<br>frequency used.|6-52|
||Pr. 15 "Jog frequency" setting is lower than Pr.<br>13 "Starting frequency".|Set Pr. 15 "Jog frequency" higher than Pr. 13<br>"Starting frequency".|6-63|
||Operation mode and a writing device do not<br>match.|Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551,<br>and select an operation mode suitable for<br>the purpose.|6-206,<br>6-220|
||Start signal operation selection is set by the<br>Pr. 250 "Stop selection".|Check Pr. 250 setting and connection of STF<br>and STR signals.|6-122|
||Inverter decelerated to a stop when power<br>failure deceleration stop function is selected.|When power is restored, ensure the safety,<br>and turn OFF the start signal once, then turn<br>ON again to restart.<br>Inverter restarts when Pr. 261="2".|6-165|
||Performing auto tuning.|When offline auto tuning ends, press the<br>STOP/RESET key of the operation panel for<br>the PU operation.<br>For the External operation, turn OFF the start<br>signal (STF or STR).<br>This operation resets the offline auto tuning,<br>and the PU's monitor display returns to the<br>normal indication.<br>(Without this operation, next operation can-<br>not be started.)|6-90|
||Automatic restart after instantaneous power<br>failure function or power failure stop func-<br>tion is activated.<br>(Performing overload operation with single-<br>phase power input specification model may<br>cause voltage insufficiency, and results in a<br>detection of power failure.)|Disable the automatic restart after<br>instantaneous power failure function<br>and power failure stop function.<br>Reduce the load.<br>Increase the acceleration time if the<br>automatic restart after instantaneous<br>power failure function or power failure<br>stop function occurred during<br>acceleration.|6-153,<br>6-165|
|Load|Load is too heavy.|Reduce the load.|—|
||Shaft is locked.|Inspect the machine (motor).|—|
|Others|Operation panel display shows an error (e.g.<br>E.OC1).|When any fault occurs, take an appropriate<br>corrective action, then reset the inverter, and<br>resume the operation.|7-2|
7 - 24
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
## **7.6.2 Motor or machine generates abnormal noise**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input signal|Disturbance due to EMI when frequency<br>command is given from analog input (termi-<br>nal 2, 4).|Take countermeasures against EMI.|3-48|
|Parameter<br>setting||Increase the Pr. 74 "Input filter time constant"<br>if steady operation cannot be performed due<br>to EMI.|6-182|
|Parameter<br>setting|No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises)<br>are generated.|In the initial setting, Pr. 240 "Soft-PWM opera-<br>tion selection" is enabled to change motor<br>noise to an unoffending complex tone.<br>Therefore, no carrier frequency noises (metal-<br>lic noises) are generated.<br>Set Pr. 240 = "0" to disable this function.|6-175|
||Resonance occurs (output frequency)|Set Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 "Frequency jump".<br>When it is desired to avoid resonance attrib-<br>utable to the natural frequency of a mechani-<br>cal system, these parameters allow resonant<br>frequencies to be jumped.|6-54|
||Resonance occurs (carrier frequency)|Change Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"<br>setting.<br>Changing the PWM carrier frequency pro-<br>duces an effect on avoiding the resonance<br>frequency of a mechanical system or a motor.|6-175|
||Auto tuning is not performed under<br>Advanced magnetic flux vector control or<br>General-purpose magnetic flux vector con-<br>trol.|Perform offline auto tuning.|6-90|
||Gain adjustment during PID control is insuffi-<br>cient.|To stabilize the measured value, change the<br>proportional band (Pr. 129) to a larger value,<br>the integral time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer<br>time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to a<br>slightly shorter time.<br>Check the calibration of set point and meas-<br>ured value.|6-293|
|Others|Mechanical looseness|Adjust machine/equipment so that there is<br>no mechanical looseness.|—|
|Motor|Operating with output phase loss|Check the motor wiring.|—|
||Contact the motor manufacturer.|||
## **7.6.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Fan|Fan cover was not correctly installed when a<br>cooling fan was replaced.|Install a fan cover correctly.|8-6|
## **7.6.4 Motor generates heat abnormally**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Motor|Motor fan is not working<br>(Dust is accumulated.)|Clean the motor fan.<br>Improve the environment.|—|
||Phase to phase insulation of the motor is<br>insufficient.|Check the insulation of the motor.|—|
|Main circuit|The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are<br>unbalanced.|Check the output voltage of the inverter.<br>Check the insulation of the motor.|8-2|
|Parameter<br>setting|The Pr. 71 "Applied motor" setting is wrong.|Check the Pr. 71 "Applied motor" setting.|6-87|
|—|Motor current is large.|Refer to "7.6.11 Motor current is too large"|7-28|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 25
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
## **7.6.5 Motor rotates in opposite direction**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Main circuit|Phase sequence of output terminals U, V and<br>W is incorrect.|Connect phase sequence of the output<br>cables (terminal U, V, W) to the motor cor-<br>rectly|3-7|
|Input signal|The start signals (forward rotation, reverse<br>rotation) are connected improperly.|Check the wiring. (STF: forward rotation, STR:<br>reverse rotation)|3-15|
||Adjustment by the output frequency is<br>improper during the reversible operation<br>with Pr. 73 "Analog input selection" setting.|Check the setting of Pr. 125, Pr. 126, C2 to C7.|6-87|
|Parameter<br>setting|Pr. 40 "RUN key rotation direction selection"<br>setting is incorrect.|Check the Pr. 40 setting.|6-329|
## **7.6.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Input signal<br>Frequency setting signal is incorrectly input.<br>The input signal lines are affected by external<br>EMI.<br>see||Measure the input signal level.<br>Take countermeasures against EMI such as<br>using shielded wires for input signal lines.<br>Check the settings of Pr. 1 "Maximum fre-<br> ee|—<br>3-52||
|Parameter<br>setting|Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to<br>C7 settings are improper.|quency", Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency", Pr. 18<br>"High speed maximum frequency".<br>Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 set-<br>tings.|6-52<br>6-183||
||Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 "Frequency jump" settings are<br>improper.|Narrow down the range of frequency jump.|6-54||
|Load<br>Stall prevention is activated due to a heavy<br>load.<br>Reduce the load weight.<br>—<br>Parameter<br>setting<br>Set Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level<br>"higher according to the load. (Setting Pr. 22<br>too large may result in frequent overcurrent<br>trip (E.OC<br>).)<br>6-44<br>Motor<br>Check the capacities of the inverter and the<br>motor.<br>—<br>~~i~~|||||
|**Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth**|**Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth**||||
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**||
||Acceleration/deceleration time is too short.|Increase acceleration/deceleration time.|6-71||
||Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper<br>under V/F control, so the stall prevention<br>function is activated.<br>Increase/decrease Pr. 0 "Torque boost" set-<br>ting value by 0.5% increments to the setting.<br>6-35<br>The base frequency does not match the<br>motor characteristics.<br>For V/F control, set Pr. 3 "Base frequency" and<br>Pr. 47 "Second V/F (base frequency)".<br>6-56<br>For Advanced magnetic flux vector control or<br>~~a~~<br>ee||||
|||General-purpose magnetic flux vector con-|6-90||
|||trol, set Pr. 84 "Rated motor frequency".|||
|Parameter<br>setting|Stall prevention function is activated due to a<br>heavy load.<br>i|Reduce the load weight.<br>—<br>Set Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level<br>"higher according to the load. (Setting Pr. 22<br>too large may result in frequent overcurrent<br>trip (E.OC<br>).)<br>6-44<br>Check the capacities of the inverter and the<br>motor.<br>—<br> pn|||
|||If the frequency becomes unstable during|||
||Regeneration avoidance operation is per-<br>formed|regeneration avoidance operation, decrease<br>the setting of Pr. 886 "Regeneration avoid-|6-314||
|||ance voltage gain".|||
## **7.6.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth**
7 - 26
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
## **7.6.8 Speed varies during operation**
When Advanced magnetic flux vector control or the slip compensation is selected, the output frequency varies between 0 and 2Hz as load fluctuates. This is a normal operation and not a fault.
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input signal|Multi-speed command signal is chattering.|Take countermeasures to suppress chatter-<br>ing.|—|
|Load|Load varies during an operation.|Select Advanced magnetic flux vector con-<br>trol or General-purpose magnetic flux vector<br>control.|6-41|
|Input signal|Frequency setting signal is varying.|Check the frequency reference signal.|—|
||The frequency setting signal is affected by<br>EMI.|Set filter to the analog input terminal using<br>Pr. 74 "Input filter time constant".|6-182|
|||Take countermeasures against EMI, such as<br>using shielded wires for input signal lines.|3-52|
||Malfunction is occurring due to the undesira-<br>ble current generated when the transistor<br>output unit is connected.|Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source<br>logic) as a common terminal to prevent a<br>malfunction caused by undesirable current.|3-27|
|Parameter<br>setting|Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and Pr. 81 "Number of<br>motor poles" setting is improper for the<br>capacities of the inverter and the motor for<br>Advanced magnetic flux vector control or<br>General-purpose magnetic flux vector con-<br>trol.|Check the Pr. 80 "Motor capacity" and Pr. 81<br>"Number of motor poles" setting.|6-41|
||Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too<br>large.|Change the Pr. 19 "Base frequency voltage"<br>setting (about 3%) under V/F control.|6-56|
||Hunting occurs by the generated vibration,<br>for example, when structural rigidity at load<br>side is insufficient.|Disable automatic control functions, such as<br>energy saving operation, fast-response cur-<br>rent limit function, regeneration avoidance<br>function, Advanced magnetic flux vector<br>control, General-purpose magnetic flux vec-<br>tor control, and stall prevention.<br>During the PID control, set smaller values to<br>Pr. 129 "PID proportional band" and Pr. 130<br>"PID integral time".<br>Lower the control gain, and adjust to<br>increase the stability.|—|
|||Change Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection"<br>setting.|6-175|
|Others|Wiring length exceeds 30 m when Advanced<br>magnetic flux vector control or General-pur-<br>pose magnetic flux vector control is per-<br>formed.|Perform offline auto tuning.|6-90|
||Wiring length is too long for V/F control, and<br>a voltage drop occurs.|Adjust Pr. 0 Torque boost by increasing with<br>0.5% increments for low-speed operation.|6-35|
|||Change to Advanced magnetic flux vector<br>control or General-purpose magnetic flux<br>vector control.|6-41|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 27
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
## **7.6.9 Operation mode is not changed properly**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input signal|Start signal (STF or STR) is ON.|Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.<br>When either is ON, the operation mode can-<br>not be changed.|6-206|
|Parameter<br>setting|Pr. 79 setting is improper.|When the Pr. 79 "Operation mode selection"<br>setting is "0" (initial value), the inverter is<br>placed in the external operation mode at<br>input power-on. At this time, press the PU/<br>EXT key on the operation panel (press the PU<br>key when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-<br>PU07) is used) to switch to the PU operation<br>mode. For other values (1 to 4, 6, 7), the oper-<br>ation mode is limited accordingly.|6-206|
||Operation mode and a writing device do not<br>correspond.|Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551,<br>and select an operation mode suitable for<br>the purpose.|6-206,<br>6-220|
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Main circuit|Wiring or installation is improper.|Check for the wiring and the installation.|3-4|
|||Make sure that the connector is fitted<br>securely across terminal P/+ and P1.||
|Control circuit|Power is not input.|Input the power.|3-4|
|Parameter<br>setting|Command sources at the PU operation mode<br>is not be the operation panel.<br>(None of the operation mode displays<br>(<br>) is lit.)|Check the setting of Pr. 551 "PU mode opera-<br>tion command source selection". (If parame-<br>ter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected<br>while Pr. 551 = "9999" (initial setting), all the<br>operation mode displays (<br>)<br>turn OFF.)|6-220|
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Parameter<br>setting|Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper<br>under V/F control, so the stall prevention<br>function is activated.|Increase/decrease Pr. 0 "Torque boost" set-<br>ting value by 0.5% increments to the setting.|6-35|
||V/F pattern is improper when V/F control is<br>performed. (Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)|Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3<br>"Base frequency". Use Pr. 19 "Base frequency<br>voltage" to set the base voltage (e.g. rated<br>motor voltage).|6-56|
|||Change Pr. 14 "Load pattern selection"<br>according to the load characteristic.|6-58|
||Stall prevention function is activated due to a<br>heavy load.|Reduce the load weight.|—|
|||Set Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level"<br>higher according to the load. (Setting Pr. 22<br>too large may result in frequent overcurrent<br>trip (E.OC<br>).)|6-44|
|||Check the capacities of the inverter and the<br>motor.|—|
||Auto tuning is not performed under<br>Advanced magnetic flux vector control or<br>General-purpose magnetic flux vector<br>control.|Perform offline auto tuning.|6-90|
7 - 28
Check first when you have troubles
Troubleshooting
## **7.6.12 Speed does not accelerate**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input signal|Start command and frequency command are<br>chattering.|Check if the start command and the fre-<br>quency command are correct.|—|
||The wiring length used for analog frequency<br>command is too long, and it is causing a volt-<br>age (current) drop.|Perform analog input bias/gain calibration.|6-183|
||Input signal lines are affected by external<br>EMI.|Take countermeasures against EMI, such as<br>using shielded wires for input signal lines.|3-52|
|Parameter<br>setting|Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to<br>C7 settings are improper.|Check the settings of Pr. 1 "Maximum fre-<br>quency" and Pr. 2 "Minimum frequency". If<br>you want to run the motor at 120Hz or<br>higher, set Pr. 18 "High speed maximum fre-<br>quency".|6-52|
|||Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 set-<br>tings.|6-183|
||Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper<br>under V/F control, so the stall prevention<br>function is activated.|Increase/decrease Pr. 0 "Torque boost" set-<br>ting value by 0.5% increments so that stall<br>prevention does not occur.|6-35|
||V/F pattern is improper when V/F control is<br>performed. (Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)|Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3<br>"Base frequency". Use Pr. 19 "Base frequency<br>voltage" to set the base voltage (e.g. rated<br>motor voltage).|6-56|
|||Change Pr. 14 "Load pattern selection"<br>according to the load characteristic.|6-58|
||Stall prevention is activated due to a heavy<br>load.|Reduce the load weight.|—|
|||Set Pr. 22 "Stall prevention operation level"<br>higher according to the load. (Setting Pr. 22<br>too large may result in frequent overcurrent<br>trip (E.OC�).)|6-44|
|||Check the capacities of the inverter and the<br>motor.|—|
||Auto tuning is not performed under<br>Advanced magnetic flux vector control or<br>General-purpose magnetic flux vector con-<br>trol.|Perform offline auto tuning.|6-90|
||During PID control, output frequency is automatically controlled to make measured value =<br>set point.||6-293|
|Main circuit|Brake resistor is connected between terminal<br>P/+ and P1 or between terminal P1 and PR by<br>mistake.|Connect an optional brake transistor (MRS<br>type, FR-ABR) between terminal P/+ and PR.|3-39|
## **7.6.13 Unable to write parameter setting**
|**Check Points**|**Possible Cause**|**Countermeasures**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Input signal|Operation is being performed (signal STF or<br>STR is ON).|Stop the operation.<br>When Pr. 77 = "0" (initial value), write is ena-<br>bled only during a stop.|6-195|
|Parameter<br>setting|You are attempting to set the parameter in<br>the External operation mode.|Choose the PU operation mode.<br>Or, set Pr. 77 = "2" to enable parameter write<br>regardless of the operation mode.|6-195|
||Parameter is disabled by the Pr. 77 "Parame-<br>ter write selection" setting.|Check Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection" set-<br>ting.|6-195|
||Key lock is activated by the Pr. 161 "Fre-<br>quency setting/key lock operation selection"<br>setting.|Check Pr. 161 "Frequency setting/key lock<br>operation selection" setting.|6-330|
||Operation mode and a writing device do not<br>correspond.|Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551,<br>and select an operation mode suitable for<br>the purpose.|6-206,<br>6-220|
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 29
Meters and measuring methods
Troubleshooting
## **7.7 Meters and measuring methods**
**NOTE**
For further information about measurements at the inverter refer to section 8.2.
Since voltages and currents in the primary and secondary side of the inverter include harmonics, different meters indicate different measured values.
When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400 V class, large-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating.
When measuring and indicating the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to utilize the AM-5 terminal output function of the inverter.
When using measuring instruments for the normal frequency range, carry out the measurements as described below.
**==> picture [384 x 272] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Input voltage Output voltage<br>Input current Output current<br>Inverter<br>(ar) > O RIL1 U O—{Au) ><br>3-phase<br>power supply To the motor<br>sa ear<br>® =)<br>pie NE i. Moving-iron type<br>Electro dynamometer type<br>t t t *“t> ft tf t = ( al : Moving-coil type<br>Instrument types a Hl > 8 pw, Rectifier type<br>I001313E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 7-7:** Measurements at the main circuit_
7 - 30
Troubleshooting
Meters and measuring methods
## **7.7.1 Measurement of powers**
Use digital power meters (for inverter) or an electro-dynamometer type meter, measure the power in both the input and output sides of the inverter using the two- or three-wattmeter method. As the current is liable to be imbalanced especially in the input side, it is recommended to use the three-wattmeter method.
Examples of measured value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below. An error will be produced by difference between measuring instruments, e.g. power calculation type and two- or three-wattmeter type three-phase wattmeter. When a CT is used in the current measuring side or when the meter contains a PT on the voltage measurement side, an error will also be produced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT.
**==> picture [363 x 242] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Measurement conditions: Measurement conditions:<br>Constant-torque (100%) load, Constant-torque (100%) load,<br>constant-output at 60 Hz or more. 3.7 kW, 4-pole motor, constant-output at 60 Hz or more. 3.7 kW, 4-pole motor,<br>value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100% value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%<br>3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type) 3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)<br>2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type) 2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)<br>Clip AC power meter Clip AC power meter<br>(For balanced 3-phase load) (For balanced 3-phase load)<br>Clamp-on wattmeter Clamp-on wattmeter<br>(Hall device power arithmetic type) (Hall device power arithmetic type)<br>Example of measuring inverter input power Example of measuring inverter input power<br>I001301E, I001302E,<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 7-8:** Differences when measuring power with different instruments_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 31
Meters and measuring methods
Troubleshooting
## **7.7.2 Measurement of voltages and use of PT**
## **Inverter input side**
As the input side voltage has a sine wave and it is extremely small in distortion, accurate measurement can be made with an ordinary AC meter.
## **Inverter output side**
Since the output side voltage has a PWM-controlled rectangular wave, always use a rectifier type voltmeter. A needle type tester can not be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value. A moving-iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the fundamental wave. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter-controlled voltage itself. Hence, that value is accurate and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation panel.
## **PT**
No PT can be used in the output side of the inverter. Use a direct-reading meter. (A PT can be used in the input side of the inverter.)
## **7.7.3 Measurement of currents**
Use a moving-iron type meter on both the input and output sides of the inverter. However, if the carrier frequency exceeds 5 kHz, do not use that meter since an overcurrent losses produced in the internal metal parts of the meter will increase and the meter may burn out. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
Since current on the inverter input side tends to be unbalanced, measurement of three phases is recommended. Correct value can not be obtained by measuring only one or two phases. On the other hand, the unbalanced ratio of each phase of the output side current should be within 10%. When a clamp ammeter is used, always use an effective value detection type. A mean value detection type produces a large error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value. The value monitored on the operation panel is accurateif the output frequency varies, and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation panel.
Examples of process value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below.
**==> picture [363 x 186] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Measurement conditions: Measurement conditions:<br>Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%. Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.<br>% Clip AC power %<br>meter<br>120 120 Clip AC power<br>meter<br>Moving-iron Moving-iron<br>type type en<br>——-— 100}— - ft<br>100}— - NN.<br>80 80 :<br>Clamp meter<br>Clamp-on wattmeter<br>current measurement<br>60 60<br>Clamp-on wattmeter<br>Clamp meter current measurement<br>a=<br>0 20 40 60Hz 0 20 40 60Hz<br>Example of measuring Inverter Input Current Example of measuring Inverter Output Current<br>I001303E, I001304E,<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 7-9:** Differences when measuring currents with different instruments_
7 - 32
Troubleshooting
Meters and measuring methods
## **7.7.4**
## **Use of CT and transducer**
A CT may be used in both the input and output sides of the inverter, but the one used should have the largest possible VA ability because an error will increase if the frequency gets lower. When using a transducer, use the effective value calculation type which is immune to harmonics.
## **7.7.5 Measurement of inverter input power factor**
Use the effective power and apparent power to calculate the inverter input power factor. A powerfactor meter cannot indicate an exact value.
= ----------------------------------------Effective power **-** Total power factor of the inverter Apparent power = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-phase input power found by 3-wattmeter method **-** 3 � V (power supply voltage) � I (input current effective value)
## **7.7.6 Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ and N/–)**
The output voltage of the converter is developed across terminals P/+ and N/– and can be measured with a moving-coil type meter (tester). Although the voltage varies according to the power supply voltage, approximately 270 V DC to 300 V DC (540 V DC to 600 V DC for the 400 V class) is output when no load is connected and voltage decreases during driving load operation.
When energy is regenerated from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage rises to nearly 400 V DC to 450 V DC (800 V DC to 900 V DC for the 400 V class) maximum. When this value is reached the alarm message E.OV� is displayed and the inverter output is shut off.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
7 - 33
Meters and measuring methods
Troubleshooting
7 - 34
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **8 Maintenance and inspection**
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
**==> picture [41 x 35] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
P<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **WARNING:**
_**Wait for a period of well over 10 minutes after disconnecting from the power supply before performing any service work on the frequency inverter. This is necessary so that the capacitors can discharge down to a safe level (< 25 V) after disconnection of the mains power. Check the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/– (+ and – respectively) of the inverter using a tester.**_
## **8.1 Inspection**
## **8.1.1 Daily inspection**
Basically, check for the following faults during operation:
- Motor operation fault
- Improper installation environment
- Cooling system fault
- Unusual vibration and noise
- Unusual overheat and discoloration
## **8.1.2 Periodic inspection**
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection. Consult your sales representative for periodic inspection.
- Check for cooling system fault . . . . . . . . . .Clean the air filter, etc.
- Tightening check and retightening . . . . .The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 3-10.)
- Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
- Measure insulation resistance.
- Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
When using the safety stop function, periodic inspection is required to confirm that safety function of the safety system operates correctly.
For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-004). (Please contact your sales representative for the manual.)
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 1
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **8.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection**
|**Area of Inspection**<br>rt|**Inspection**<br>**Item**<br>rt|**Inspection**<br>**Item**<br>rt|**Description**<br>rt|**Interval**<br>—|**Interval**<br>—|**Corrective Action**<br>**at Alarm Occurrence**|**Custom-**<br>**er’s Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||||**Daily**<br>i<br>rt|**Periodic**<br>i<br>rt|||
|General<br>rt|Surrounding<br>environment<br>rt||Check the ambient temperature, humidity, dirt,<br>corrosive gas, oil mist , etc.<br>rt|✔<br>rt|rt|Improve environment||
||Overall unit<br>rt||Check for unusual vibration and noise.<br>rt|✔<br>rt|rt|Check alarm location and retighten||
||Power supply<br>voltage<br>rt<br>a||Check that the main circuit voltages are normal.<br>rt<br>ee|✔<br>rt<br>ee|rt<br>ee|Inspect the power supply<br>ee|ee|
|Main circuit<br>rt|General<br>rt<br>a||1) Check with megger (across main circuit<br>terminals and earth (ground) terminal).<br>2) Check for loose screws and bolts.<br>3) Check for overheat traces on the parts.<br>4) Check for stain<br>rt<br>ee|rt<br>ee|✔<br>✔<br>✔<br>✔<br>rt<br>ee|Contact the manufacturer<br>Retighten<br>Contact the manufacturer<br>Clean<br>ee|ee|
||Conductors,<br>cables||1) Check conductors for distortion.<br>2) Check cable sheaths for breakage||✔<br>✔|Contact the manufacturer<br>—_——||
|||||||Contact the manufacturer<br>OO||
||Transformer/<br>reactor||Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in<br>whining sound.|✔||Stop the device and contact the<br>manufacturer.<br>OO||
||Terminal block||Check for damage.||✔|Stop the device and contact the<br>manufacturer.||
||Smoothing<br>aluminium<br>electrolytic<br>capacitor||1) Check for liquid leakage.<br>2) Check for safety valve projection and bulge.<br>3) Visual check and judge by the life check of the main<br>circuit capacitor (Refer to section 8.1.4.)||✔<br>✔<br>✔|Contact the manufacturer<br>Contact the manufacturer||
||Relay/<br>contactor||Check that the operation is normal and no chatter is<br>heard.||✔|Contact the manufacturer||
|Control circuit/Protective circuit|Operation<br>check||1) Check that the output voltages across phases with<br>the inverter operated alone is balanced.<br>2) Check that no fault is found in protective and dis-<br>play circuits in a sequence protective operation test.||✔<br>✔|Contact the manufacturer<br>Contact the manufacturer||
|||||||||
||Parts check|Overall|1) Check for unusual odor and discoloration.<br>2) Check for serious rust development.||✔<br>✔|Stop the device and contact the<br>manufacturer<br>Contact the manufacturer||
|||||||||
|||Alumin-<br>ium elec-<br>trolytic<br>capacitor|1) Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and deforma-<br>tion trance<br>2) Visual check and judge by the life check of the con-<br>trol circuit capacitor. (Refer to section 8.1.4.)||✔<br>✔|Contact the manufacturer||
|||||||||
|Cooling system|Cooling fan<br>ee||1) Check for unusual vibration and noise.<br>2) Check for loose screws and bolts.<br>3) Check for stain.<br>ee|✔|✔<br>✔<br>eee|Replace the fan<br>Fix with the fan cover fixing screws<br>Clean<br>eee|—|
||||||||—|
||||||||—<br>I|
||Heatsink<br>ee||1) Check for clogging.<br>2) Check for stain.<br>ee||✔<br>✔<br>eee|Clean<br>Clean<br>eee|I|
||||||||I|
8 - 2
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
|**Area of Inspection**|**Inspection**<br>**Item**|**Description**|**Interval**|**Interval**|**Corrective Action**<br>**at Alarm Occurrence**|**Custom-**<br>**er’s Check**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||**Daily**|**Periodic**�|||
|Display|Indication|1) Check that display is normal.<br>2) Check for stain.|✔||Contact the manufacturer<br>Clean||
|||||✔|||
||Meter|Check that reading is normal.|✔||Stop the device and contact the<br>manufacturer.||
|Load motor|Operation<br>check|Check for vibration and abnormal increase in opera-<br>tion noise.|✔||Stop the device and contact the<br>manufacturer.||
_**Tab. 8-1:** Daily and periodic inspection (2)_
- It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
- One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment. For a periodic inspection, contact your sales representative.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 3
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **8.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts**
The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and each parts of the inrush current limit circuit is near to give an indication of replacement time.
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method using Parameter 259 is not performed. (Refer to the description below.)
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement:
|**Parts**|**Judgement Level**|
|---|---|
|Main circuit capacitor|85% of the initial capacity|
|Control circuit capacitor|Estimated 10% life remaining|
|Inrush current limit circuit|Estimated 10% life remaining (Power on: 100,000 times left)|
|Cooling fan|Less than 50% of the predetermined speed|
_**Tab. 8-2:** Guideline for the alarm signal output_
**NOTE**
Refer to section 6.21.2 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.
8 - 4
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **8.1.5 Checking the inverter and converter modules**
Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W). Prepare a tester. (Use 100 � range.)
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+ and N/ � , and check for continuity.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
## _**Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.**_
At the time of discontinuity, the measured value is almost �. When there is an instantaneous continuity, due to the smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate �. At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to several ten’s-of ohms depending on the module type, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost the same, the modules are without fault.
**==> picture [388 x 154] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 8-1:<br>Converter module Inverter module<br>P/+ Module device numbers and terminals to be<br>checked<br>N/-<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_I002039E_
|||**Tester Polarity**|**Tester Polarity**|**Measured Value**||**Tester Polarity**|**Tester Polarity**|**Measured Value**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
||||||||||
|Converter<br>module|D1|R/L1|P/+|Discontinuity|D4|R/L1|N/–|Continuity|
|||P/+|R/L1|Continuity||N/–|R/L1|Discontinuity|
||D2|S/L2|P/+|Discontinuity|D5|S/L2|N/–|Continuity|
|||P/+|S/L2|Continuity||N/–|S/L2|Discontinuity|
||D3�|T/L3�|P/+|Discontinuity|D6�|T/L3�|N/–|Continuity|
|||P/+|T/L3�|Continuity||N/–|T/L3�|Discontinuity|
|Inverter<br>module|TR1|U|P/+|Discontinuity|TR4|U|N/–|Continuity|
|||P/+|U|Continuity||N/–|U|Discontinuity|
||TR3|V|P/+|Discontinuity|TR6|V|N/–|Continuity|
|||P/+|V|Continuity||N/–|V|Discontinuity|
||TR5|W|P/+|Discontinuity|TR2|W|N/–|Continuity|
|||P/+|W|Continuity||N/–|W|Discontinuity|
_**Tab. 8-3:** Continuity check of the modules_
> � T/L3, D3 and D6 are only for the three-phase power input specification models.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 5
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **8.1.6 Cleaning**
Always run the inverter in a clean status. When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.**_
_**The display, etc. of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.**_
## **8.1.7 Replacement of parts**
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
|**Part Name**<br>~~pO~~|**Standard Replacement Interval**<br>~~pO~~|**Description**<br>~~pO~~|
|---|---|---|
|Cooling fan<br>~~pO~~|10 years<br>~~pO~~|Replace (as required)<br>~~pO~~|
|Main circuit smoothing capacitor<br>a|10 years|Replace (as required)|
|On-board smoothing capacitor<br>a|10 years|Replace the board (as required)|
|Relays|—|As required|
_**Tab. 8-4:** Wearing parts_
Replacement years for when the yearly average ambient temperature is 40 °C (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Output current: 80% of the inverter rated current
## **NOTE**
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Centre.
## **Cooling fan**
The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor is greatly affected by the ambient temperature. When unusual noise and/ or vibration is noticed during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
## **NOTE**
The FR-E720S-030SC or less and the FR-E740-026SC or less are not provided with a cooling fan.
8 - 6
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
P<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **WARNING:**
_**Switch the power off before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power off, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.**_
- Removal of the fan
- Push the hooks of the fan cover from above. Remove the fan cover.
**==> picture [351 x 114] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC, FR-E740-120SC or more<br>FR-E740-095SC or less<br>I001860E, I001861E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-2:** Removal of the fan cover_
- Disconnect the fan connector.
- Remove the fan.
**==> picture [377 x 198] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC, FR-E740-120SC or more<br>FR-E740-095SC or less<br>Fan cover<br>Fan cover<br>Fan connector<br>Fan<br>Fan<br>Fan connector<br>I001941E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-3:** Removal of the fan_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 7
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## ● Reinstallation of the fan
After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.
**==> picture [219 x 93] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Fig. 8-4:<br>Orientation of the fan<br>AIR FLOW<br>Fan side face<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001864E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **NOTE** | Installing the fan in the opposite air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
- Reconnect the fan connectors. When wiring, use care to avoid the cables being caught by the fan.
**==> picture [312 x 15] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC, FR-E740-120SC or more<br>FR-E740-095SC or less<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [47 x 6] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I001865E, I001866E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-5:** Connection of the fan_
> Reinstall the fan cover. Insert hooks into the holes rs) . Insert hooks e until you hear a click sound.
**==> picture [361 x 157] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
FR-E720S-050SC to 110SC,<br>FR-E740-095SC or less FR-E740-120SC or more<br>° (1) e<br>[I] [E] LT Ee<br><4 ¥i a [L] [E][E]<br>Ann. e M fe T E Anas a y<br>I001942E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-6:** Reinstall the fan cover_
a 8 - 8
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **Smoothing capacitors**
A large-capacity aluminium electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminium electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the ambient temperature and operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years
Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
When a certain period of time has elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every year (less than six months if the life will be expired soon).
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
- Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
- Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
- Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc.
## **Relays**
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times (switching life).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 9
Maintenance and inspection
Inspection
## **8.1.8 Inverter replacement**
The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring cover of the inverter.
## **P**
## **WARNING:**
- _**Do not replace the control terminal of the standard control circuit terminal model (inverter type without "SC") with the control terminal of the safety stop function model (inverter type "SC"), or vice versa. If replaced by mistake, the inverter does not operate properly.**_
- _**Before starting inverter replacement, switch power off, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester and such to ensure safety.**_
Remove the installation screw of the control circuit terminal block. Pull the control circuit terminal downward.
**==> picture [240 x 120] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Installation screw<br>I002142E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## _**Fig. 8-7:** Removal of the terminal block_
Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter’s control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block and fix it with the installation screw.
**==> picture [49 x 135] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Installation<br>screw<br>I002143E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-8:** Reinstallation of the terminal block_
## **NOTE**
- Calibration bias and gain changes when changing the control circuit terminal block. Use Pr. 645 and C1 (Pr. 901) to calibrate again in that case.
8 - 10
Maintenance and inspection
Measurements on the main circuit
## **8.2 Measurements on the main circuit**
This section describes the measurement of the main circuit voltages, currents, powers and insulation resistance.
Please follow as well the instructions for measuring instruments and measuring methods in section 7.7.
## **8.2.1 Insulation resistance test using megger**
For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test on the control circuit. (Use a 500 V DC megger.)
**==> picture [312 x 146] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Power supply<br>500 V DC megger<br>Earth<br>I001872E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-9:** Insulation resistance test_
**==> picture [41 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
## **CAUTION:**
_**Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.**_
## **NOTE**
For the electric continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.
## **8.2.2 Pressure test**
Do not conduct a pressure test. Deterioration may occur.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 11
Measurements on the main circuit
Maintenance and inspection
## **8.2.3 Measurement of voltages and currents**
Since voltages and currents in the primary and secondary side of the inverter include harmonics, different meters indicate different measured values.
When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400 V class, large-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating.
When measuring and indicating the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to utilize the AM-5 terminal output function of the inverter.
When using measuring instruments for the normal frequency range, carry out the measurements as described below.
**==> picture [364 x 414] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
1-phase, 230 V<br>Input Output<br>voltage voltage<br>Input<br>current Output<br>current<br>3-phase, 400 V<br>Inverter<br>(Ar) > O RL! U O—(Au) ><br>To the motor<br>Power supply (as)hee SiL2 ‘eae<br>go) 2)<br>= Moving-iron type<br>Electrodynamometer type<br>t ft t “t> ft t t f al : Moving-coil type<br>Instrument types Rectifier type<br>* At, As, Vt, Vs, W12, W13 are only for the three-phase power input<br>specification models.<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I002040E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. 8-10:** Examples of measuring points and instruments_
8 - 12
Maintenance and inspection
Measurements on the main circuit
## **Measuring Points and Instruments**
|**Item**|**Measuring Point**|**Measuring**<br>**Instrument**|**Remarks (Reference Measurement Value)**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Power supply<br>voltage V1|Across<br>R/L1-S/L2,<br>S/L2-T/L3,<br>T/L3-R/L1�|Moving-iron type AC<br>voltmeter�|Commercial power supply<br>Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation<br>(Refer to appendix A)|
|Power supply<br>side current I1|R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3<br>line currents�|Moving-iron type AC<br>ammeter�|—|
|Power supply<br>side power P1|R/L1, S/L2, T/L3<br>and R/L1-S/L2,<br>S/L2-T/L3,<br>T/L3-R/L1�|Digital power meter<br>(designed for<br>inverter) or electro-<br>dynamic type sin-<br>gle-phase<br>wattmeter|P1 = W11 + W12 + W13 (3-wattmeter method)|
|Power supply<br>side power<br>factor Pf1|Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side<br>power.<br>Single-phase power supply<br>Three-phase power supply<br>Pf1<br>P1<br>V1<br>I1<br>�<br>------------------<br>100 %<br>�<br>=<br>Pf1<br>P1<br>3<br>V1<br>I1<br>�<br>�<br>-------------------------------**-**<br>100 %<br>�<br>=|||
|Output side<br>voltage V2|Across U-V, V-W<br>and W-U|Rectifier type AC<br>voltage meter��<br>(Moving-iron type<br>cannot measure)|Difference between the phases is within ±1% of the<br>maximum output voltage|
|Output side cur-<br>rent I2|U, V and W line<br>currents|Moving-iron type AC<br>ammeter��|Difference between the phases is 10% or lower of the<br>rated inverter current.|
|Output side<br>power P2|U, V, W and U-V,<br>V-W|Digital power meter<br>(designed for<br>inverter) or electro-<br>dynamic type sin-<br>gle-phase<br>wattmeter|P2 = W21 + W22<br>2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)|
|Output side<br>power factor<br>Pf2|Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.<br>Pf2<br>P2<br>3<br>V2<br>I2<br>�<br>�<br>-------------------------------**-**<br>100%<br>�<br>=|||
|Converter<br>output|Across P/+ and N/�|Moving-coil type<br>(such as tester)|Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35�V1|
## _**Tab. 8-5:** Measuring points and instruments of the main circuit_
- Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. An FA tester or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately.
- When the carrier frequency exceeds 5 kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy-current losses produced in metal parts inside the instrument, leading to burnout. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
- T/L3 is only for the three-phase power input specification models.
- A digital power meter (designed for inverter) can also be used to measure.
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
8 - 13
Measurements on the main circuit
Maintenance and inspection
|**Item**|**Measuring Point**|**Measuring**<br>**Instrument**|**Remarks (Reference Measurement Value)**|**Remarks (Reference Measurement Value)**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|Frequency<br>setting signal|Across 2 (positive)<br>and 5|Moving-coil type<br>(Tester and such<br>may be used)<br>(Internal resistance:<br>50k or larger)|0 to 10 V DC, 4 to 20 mA|"5" is<br>common|
||Across 4 (positive)<br>and 5||||
|Frequency<br>setting power<br>supply|Across 10 (positive)<br>and 5||5.2 V DC||
|Frequency<br>meter signal|Across AM (positive)<br>and 5||Approximately 10 V DC at maximum<br>frequency (without frequency meter)||
|Start signal<br>Select signal|Across STF, STR, RH,<br>RM, RL and PC (posi-<br>tive)||When open: 20 to 30 V DC<br>ON voltage: 1 V or less|"PC" is<br>common|
|Reset|Across RES and PC<br>(positive)||||
|Fault signal|Across A-C<br>and B-C|Moving-coil type<br>(such as tester)|Electric Continuity check<br>**Normal**<br>**Fault**<br>Across A-C<br>Discontinuity<br>Continuity<br>Across B-C<br>Continuity<br>Discontinuity||
_**Tab. 8-6:** Measuring points and instruments of the control circuit_
When the setting of Pr. 192 "ABC terminal function selection" is positive logic.
8 - 14
Specifications
Appendix
## **A Appendix**
## **A.1 Specifications**
## **A.1.1 1-phase, 200 V class**
|**Model FR-E720S-**���**SC EC/ENE**|**Model FR-E720S-**���**SC EC/ENE**|**008**|**015**|**030**|**050**|**080**|**110**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|Rated motor capacity [kW]�||0.1|0.2|0.4|0.75|1.5|2.2|
|Output|Rated capacity [kVA]�|0.3|0.6|1.2|2.0|3.2|4.4|
||Rated current [A]�|0.8<br>(0.8)|1.5<br>(1.4)|3.0<br>(2.5)|5.0<br>(4.1)|8.0<br>(7.0)|11.0<br>(10.0)|
||Overload current rating�|200% of rated motor capacity for 3 s; 150% for 60 s||||||
||Voltage�|3-phase AC, 0 V to power supply voltage||||||
||Regenerative braking torque�|150%||100%||50%|20%|
|Power supply|Power supply voltage|1-phase, 200–240 V AC, –15%/+10%||||||
||Voltage range|170–264 V AC at 50/60 Hz||||||
||Power supply frequency|50/60 Hz ± 5%||||||
||Rated input capacity [kVA]�|0.5|0.9|1.5|2.5|4.0|5.2|
|Protective structure||IP20||||||
|Cooling system||Self cooling|||Forced air cooling|||
|Weight [kg]||0.6|0.6|0.9|1.4|1.5|2.0|
_**Tab. A-1:** Specifications_
- The applied motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
- The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230 V.
- Setting 2 kHz or more in Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" to perform low acoustic noise operation with the ambient temperature exceeding 40 °C, the rated output current is the value in parentheses.
- The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter’s rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
- If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 57) or power failure stop function (Pr. 261) is set and power supply voltage is low while load becomes bigger, the bus voltage decreases to power failure detection level and load of 100% or more may not be available.
- The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about �2 that of the power supply.
- The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60 Hz in the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used. Option brake resistor cannot be used for FR-E720S-008SC and 015SC.
- The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 1
Specifications
Appendix
## **A.1.2 3-phase, 400 V class**
**==> picture [483 x 205] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Model FR-E740- SC EC/ENE 016 026 040 060 095 120 170 230 300<br>po<br>Rated motor capacity [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15<br>Ds GO<br>Rated capacity [kVA] 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.6 7.2 9.1 13.0 17.5 23.0<br>pe<br>1.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 9.5<br>Rated current [A] (1.4) (2.2) (3.8) (5.4) (8.7) 12.0 17.0 23.0 30.0<br>ee<br>Overload current rating 200% of rated motor capacity for 3 s; 150% for 60 s<br>eo<br>Voltage 3-phase AC, 0 V to power supply voltage<br>CC<br>Regenerative braking torque 100% 50% 20%<br>Pe<br>Ge Power supply voltage 3-phase, 380–480 V AC, 15%/+10%<br>ee Voltage range 325–528 V AC at 50/60 Hz<br>ee Power supply frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%<br>SSS Rated input capacity [kVA] 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9.5 12.0 17.0 20.0 28.0<br>De Protective structure IP20<br>RG Cooling system Self cooling Forced air cooling<br>po Weight [kg] 1.4 1.4 1.9 1.9 1.9 3.2 3.2 6.0 6.0<br>Output<br>Power supply<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Tab. A-2:** Specifications_
The applied motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440 V.
Setting 2 kHz or more in Pr. 72 "PWM frequency selection" to perform low acoustic noise operation with the ambient temperature exceeding 40 °C, the rated output current is the value in parentheses.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter’s rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply. V
The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60 Hz in the shortest time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
A - 2
Common specifications
Appendix
## **A.2 Common specifications**
||**FR-E700SC**|**FR-E700SC**|**Specification**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Control specification|Control system||V/F control, optimum excitation control, general-purpose magnetic flux vector control or advanced magnetic flux vector<br>control can be selected|
||Modulation control||Sine evaluated PWM, Soft PWM|
||Output frequency range||0.2–400 Hz|
||Frequency setting<br>resolution|Analog input|0.06 Hz/0–5 0Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0–10 V/10 bits)<br>0.12 Hz/0–50 Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0–5 V/9 bits)<br>0.06 Hz/0–50 Hz (terminal 4: 0/4–20 mA/10 bits)|
|||Digital input|0.01 Hz|
||Frequency accuracy|Analog input|±0.5% of the maximum output frequency (temperature range 25 °C ±10 °C)|
|||Digital input|±0.01% of the set output frequency|
||Voltage/frequency characteristics||Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400 Hz<br>Constant torque/variable torque pattern can be selected|
||Starting torque||200% or more (at 0.5 Hz) ... when advanced magnetic flux vector control is set (3.7 K or less)|
||Torque boost||Manual torque boost|
||Acceleration/deceleration time||0.01 to 360 s; 0.1 to 3600 s (can be set individually)|
||Acceleration/deceleration characteristics||Linear or S-form course, user selectable|
||DC injection brake||Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s)<br>and operation voltage (0 to 30%) can be set individually.|
||Stall prevention||Responses threshold 0–200%, user adjustable|
|Control signals for operation|Frequency setting<br>values|Analog input|Terminal 2: 0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC<br>Terminal 4: 0–5 V DC, 0–10 V DC, 0/4–20 mA|
|||Digital input|Entered from operation panel or parameter unit<br>Frequency setting increment can be set.<br>4 digit BCD or 16bit binary data (when the option FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E is used)|
||Start signal||Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.|
||Input signals|Terminals|6|
|||Operating status|The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 "Input terminal function selection":<br>multi-speed selection, remote setting, stop-on contact selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG<br>operation selection, PID control valid terminal, brake opening completion signal, external thermal input, PU-External<br>operation switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation, reverse rotation command,<br>inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, External-NET operation switchover, command source switchover, inverter<br>operation enable signal, and PU operation external interlock.|
||Operational functions||Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic restart<br>after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, brake sequence, second<br>function, multi-speed operation, stop-on contact control, droop control, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation,<br>operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485)|
||Safety stop function||Safety shutoff signal can be input from terminals S1 and S2.<br>(compliant with EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 / PLd EN62061 / IEC61508 SIL2)|
||Output signals|Open collector outputs|2 points|
|||Relay outputs|1 point|
|||Operating status|The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 "Output terminal function selection":<br>inverter operation, up-to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic<br>thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit,<br>PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, brake opening request, fan alarm (FR-E720S-050SC or more,<br>FR-E740-040SC or more), heatsink overheat pre-alarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated,<br>safety monitor output, safety monitor output 2, during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor, remote output, alarm<br>output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm.|
|||Analog output|0–10 V DC: 1 point|
|||For meter|The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 158 "AM terminal function selection":<br>output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting, motor torque, converter output voltage,<br>regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage<br>peak value, reference voltage output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, output power 0 to 10 V DC.|
_**Tab. A-3:** Common specifications (1)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 3
Common specifications
Appendix
|**FR-E700SC**|**FR-E700SC**|**FR-E700SC**|**Specification**|
|---|---|---|---|
|Display|Operation panel<br>or<br>Parameter unit (FR-PU07)|Operating status|The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage, frequency setting,<br>cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty,<br>electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, motor load<br>factor, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, I/O terminal option monitor, output<br>power, cumulative power, motor thermal load factor, and inverter thermal load factor.|
|||Fault record|Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs.<br>Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.|
||Additional display by the<br>parameter unit<br>(FR-PU04/FRPU07) only|Operating status<br>a|Not used|
|||Fault record<br>a<br>a|Output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative energization time immediately before the fault occurs|
|||Interactive guidance<br>a|Operation guide/trouble shooting with a help function|
|Protection|Protective functions||Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage during<br>acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation,<br>motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, input phase failure<br>output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at<br>start, output phase failure, external thermal relay operation , option fault , parameter error, internal board fault, PU<br>disconnection, retry count excess , CPU fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush resistance overheat, communication error,<br>analog input error, USB communication error, brake sequence error 4 to 7 , safety circuit fault<br>@<br>®<br>@<br>@<br>®|
||Warning functions||Fan alarm (FR-E720S-050SC or more, FR-E740-040SC or more), overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU<br>stop, parameter write error, regenerative brake prealarm , electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance<br>output , undervoltage, operation panel lock, password locked, inverter reset, safety stop<br>@<br>®|
|Environment|Ambient temperature<br>ee||10 °C to +50 °C (non-freezing)<br>ee|
||Storage temperature<br>a||20 °C to +65 °C|
||Ambient humidity<br>a||Max. 90% (non-condensing)|
||Ambience conditions<br>a||For indoor use only, avoid environments containing corrosive gases, install in a dust-free location.<br> G|
||Altitude<br>a||Max. 1000 m above sea level|
||Vibration resistance<br>Ge||Max. 5.9 m/s² (JIS 60068-2-6) or less at 10 to 55 Hz (directions of X, Y and Z axes)<br>Ge|
## _**Tab. A-3:** Common specifications (2)_
This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
This protective function is available with the three-phase power input specification model only. This protective function does not function in the initial status.
When using the inverters at the ambient temperature of 40 °C or less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0 cm clearance).
The product may only be exposed to the full extremes of this temperature range for short periods (e.g. during transportation).
A - 4
Appendix
Outline dimension drawings
## **A.3 Outline dimension drawings**
## **A.3.1 FR-E720S-008SC-EC to 030SC-EC**
**==> picture [346 x 243] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
φ 5 When used with the plug-in option<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>5 4 4<br>56 D1 D1<br>68 D D2 �<br>� When the FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E is<br>mounted, a terminal block protrudes<br>making the depth approx. 2mm<br>greater.<br>All dimensions in mm<br>5<br>118 128<br>5<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
|**Inverter Type**|**D**|**D1**|**D2**||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|FR-E720S-008SC-EC, 015SC-EC|86.5|10|108.1||
|FR-E720S-030SC-EC|148.5|42|170.1||
|||||_I002144E_|
_**Fig. A-1:** Dimensions FR-E720S-008SC-EC to 030SC-EC_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 5
Outline dimension drawings
Appendix
## **A.3.2**
## **FR-E720S-050SC-EC and 080SC-EC**
**==> picture [409 x 384] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
When used with the plug-in<br>option<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>aealel<br>When the FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E is<br>mounted, a terminal block protrudes<br>making the depth approx. 2mm<br>greater.<br>All dimensions in mm<br>Inverter Type D D1 D2<br>FR-E720S-050SC-EC 141.5 163.1<br>60<br>FR-E720S-080SC-EC 167 188.6<br>pf<br>I002153E<br> Fig. A-2: Dimensions FR-E720S-050SC-EC and 080SC-EC<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
A - 6
Appendix
Outline dimension drawings
## **A.3.3**
## **FR-E720S-110SC-EC and FR-E740-016SC-EC to 095SC-EC**
**==> picture [208 x 251] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
When used with the plug-in<br>option<br>�<br>FR-E740-016SC-EC, 026SC-EC are not<br>provided with the cooling fan.<br>� When the FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E is<br>mounted, a terminal block protrudes<br>making the depth approx. 2 mm<br>greater.<br>All dimensions in mm<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [22 x 12] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Capacity<br>plate<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
|**Inverter Type**|**D**|**D1**|**D2**|
|---|---|---|---|
|FR-E720S-110SC-EC|161.5|60|183.1|
|FR-E740-016SC-EC, 026SC-EC|120|39|141.6|
|FR-E740-040SC-EC to 095SC-EC|141|60|162.6|
**==> picture [23 x 5] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
I002154E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-3:** Dimensions FR-E720S-110SC-EC and FR-E740-016SC-EC to 095SC-EC_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 7
Outline dimension drawings
Appendix
## **A.3.4 FR-E740-120SC-EC and 170SC-EC**
**==> picture [376 x 243] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
When used with the plug-in<br>option<br>2- φ 5<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>5 10 10<br>208 68 68<br>220 153 174,6<br>When the FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E is<br>mounted, a terminal block protrudes<br>making the depth approx. 2 mm<br>greater.<br>All dimensions in mm<br>I002145E<br>6<br>138 150<br>6<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-4:** Dimensions FR-E740-120SC-EC and 170SC-EC_
## **A.3.5 FR-E740-230SC-EC and 300SC-EC**
**==> picture [384 x 289] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
When used with the plug-in<br>2- φ 6 option<br>FAN FAN<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>6 10,5 10,5<br>NY 195 a 84,5 oe 84,5<br>220 196 217,6<br>When the FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E is<br>mounted, a terminal block protrudes<br>making the depth approx. 2 mm<br>greater.<br>=|<br>J.___. 211 All dimensions in mm<br>I002146E<br>8<br>244 260<br>8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-5:** Dimensions FR-E740-230SC-EC and 300SC-EC_
“A A - 8
Appendix
Outline dimension drawings
## **A.3.6**
## **FR-E720S-008SC-ENE to 030SC-ENE**
**==> picture [384 x 362] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Ø5 hole<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>5 4<br>D1<br>56 D<br>68<br>All dimensions in mm<br>Inverter Type D D1<br>FR-E720S-008SC-ENE, 015SC-ENE 108 10<br>FR-E720S-030SC-ENE 170 42<br>FR-E720SC-ENE Dimensions 008SC to 030SC<br>118 128<br>Ratingplate<br>5<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-6:** Dimensions FR-E720S-008SC-ENE to 030SC-ENE_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 9
Outline dimension drawings
Appendix
## **A.3.7**
## **FR-E720S-050SC-ENE, 080SC-ENE**
**==> picture [409 x 413] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-Ø5 hole<br>FAN<br>Rating<br>plate<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>5 5<br>96 D1<br>108 D<br>All dimensions in mm<br>Inverter Type D D1<br>FR-E720S-050SC-ENE 163.1<br>60<br>FR-E720S-080SC-ENE 188.5<br>————<br>FR-E720SC-ENE Dimensions 050SC_080SC<br> Fig. A-7: Dimensions FR-E720S-050SC-ENE and 080SC-ENE<br>5<br>118 128<br>5<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
A - 10
Appendix
Outline dimension drawings
## **A.3.8**
## **FR-E720S-110SC-ENE FR-E740-016SC-ENE to 095SC-ENE**
**==> picture [391 x 408] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-Ø5 hole<br>Rating<br>plate<br>Capacity<br>plate<br>5 5<br>128 D1<br>140 D<br>All dimensions in mm<br>Inverter Type D D1<br>FR-E720S-110SC-ENE 183 60<br>FR-E740-016SC-ENE, 026SC-ENE 141.5 39<br>FR-E740-040SC-ENE, 060SC-ENE,<br>162.5 60<br>095SC-ENE<br>I002154E<br>6<br>138 150<br>6<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-8:** Dimensions FR-E720S-110SC-ENE and FR-E740-016SC-ENE to 095SC-ENE_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 11
Outline dimension drawings
Appendix
## **A.3.9**
## **FR-E740-120SC-ENE, 170SC-ENE**
**==> picture [389 x 287] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-Ø5 hole<br>o mon & a<br>FAN<br>A Ss 5| | l |<br>Rating<br>plate<br>Er<br>Capacity<br>plate pe Reeeeeeeereeer es! l|ie | [l |eat -<br>5 10<br>208 68<br>220 174.5<br>fA<br>Pea<br>PeSee!<br>|= LL A ||<br>a All dimensions in mm<br>FR-E740SC-ENE Dimensions 120SC_170SC<br>6<br>138 150<br>6<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-9:** Dimensions FR-E740-120SC-ENE and 170SC-ENE_
A - 12
Appendix
Outline dimension drawings
## **A.3.10 FR-E740-230SC-ENE, 300SC-ENE**
**==> picture [336 x 334] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
2-Ø6 hole<br>FAN<br>Rating<br>plate<br>6 10.5<br>195 84.5<br>220 Capacity 217.5<br>plate<br>211 All dimensions in mm<br>FR-E740SC-ENE Dimensions 230SC_300SC<br>8<br>244 260<br>8<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-10:** Dimensions FR-E740-230SC-ENE and 300SC-ENE_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 13
Outline dimension drawings
Appendix
## **A.3.11 Parameter unit FR-PU07**
**==> picture [143 x 279] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Panel cut dimension drawing<br>oa,<br>--4- L— a 7<br>- | | |<br>a ae 4–Ø4<br>' 26 . 5 26 . 5 '<br>All dimensions in mm<br>I001638E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-11:** Parameter unit FR-PU07_
**NOTES** When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
The effective depth of the M3 installation screw hole is 5.0 mm.
A - 14
Appendix
Outline dimension drawings
## **A.3.12 Parameter unit FR-PA07**
**==> picture [128 x 88] intentionally omitted <==**
**==> picture [191 x 201] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
Panel cut dimension drawing<br>All dimensions in mm<br>I0001953E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-12:** Parameter unit FR-PA07_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 15
Parameter list with instruction codes
Appendix
## **A.4**
## **Parameter list with instruction codes**
In the initial setting status, simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed. Set Pr. 160 "User group read selection" as required. So check the setting of Pr. 160 if parameters are not shown or change the setting of Pr. 160 to lock parameters.
|**Parameter**|**Name**|**Initial**<br>**Value**|**Setting**<br>**Range**|**Remarks**|
|---|---|---|---|---|
|160|User group read<br>selection|0|9999|Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.|
||||0|Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be<br>displayed.|
||||1|Only parameters registered in the user group can be<br>displayed.|
_**Tab. A-4:** Settings of parameter 160_
## **NOTES**
The parameters marked are the simple mode parameters.
> The parameters marked with — in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 "Parameter write selection".
Parameters for the option are displayed only when the option unit is installed.
The instruction codes (hexadecimal) for "read" and "write" on the right of the parameter number are those used to set the parameter via communication. "Extended" indicates the setting of the extended link parameter. (Refer to section 6.19 for communication.) The data code is contained in the table columns to the right next to the parameter number.
The symbols in the table have the following meanings: ✔: Setting the parameter is possible for this operation mode.
- —: Setting the parameter is impossible for this operation mode.
|**Function**<br>pet|**Parame-**<br>**ter**<br>pet|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**<br>|**Name**<br>|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**<br>|**Customer**<br>**Setting**<br>|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**<br>pet<br>||**Write**<br>ft|**Extended**<br>ft|||**V/F control**<br>|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**<br>|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**<br>|||
|Basic functions<br>pet<br>pet<br>pet<br>je]<br>pet|**0**<br>pet|00<br>pet<br>||80<br>ft|0<br>ftp|**Torque boost**<br>p||✔<br>po|—<br>o|—<br>o|6-35<br>o|o|
||**1**<br>pet<br>—<br>pet|01<br>pet<br>|<br>ee<br>pet<br>||81<br>ft<br>ee<br>||0<br>ft<br>ee<br>p|**Maximum frequency**<br><br>ee<br>p||✔<br><br>ee<br>p~~o~~|✔<br><br>ee<br>~~o~~|✔<br><br>ee<br>~~o~~|6-52<br><br> ee<br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~|ee<br>~~o~~|
||**2**<br>—<br>pet<br>pet|02<br>ee<br>pet<br>|<br>pet<br>||82<br>ee<br>|<br>f|0<br>ee<br>p<br>f|**Minimum frequency**<br>ee<br>p<br>f||✔<br>ee<br>p~~o~~<br>f~~p~~|✔<br>ee<br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~|✔<br>ee <br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~||ee<br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~|
||**3**<br>pet<br>pet<br>je]<br>eo]|03<br>pet<br>|<br>pet<br>|<br>je]<br>|<br>eo]|83<br>|<br>f<br>||0<br>p<br>f|**Base frequency**<br>p<br>f<br>ee||✔<br>p~~o~~<br>f~~p~~<br>ee|—<br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~<br>ee|—<br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~<br>ee<br>ee|6-56<br>~~o~~<br>~~p~~<br>ee|~~o~~<br>~~p~~<br>ee|
||**4**<br>pet<br>je]<br>eo]<br>et|04<br>pet<br>|<br>je]<br>|<br>eo]<br>**|**<br>et|84<br>f<br>|<br>||0<br>f|**Multi-speed setting**<br>f<br>~~e~~e|**RH**<br>f<br>ee<br>rs|✔<br>f~~p~~<br>ee|✔<br>~~p~~<br>ee|✔<br>~~p~~<br>ee<br>ee|6-60<br>~~p~~<br> ee<br>ee<br>eee|~~p~~<br>ee|
||**5**<br>je]<br>eo]<br>et|05<br>je]<br>|<br>eo]<br>**|**<br>et|85<br>|<br>|<br>fl|0<br>fl||**RM**<br>ee<br>rs<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee||ee|
||**6**<br>eo]<br>et<br>~~e~~|06<br>eo]<br>**|**<br>et<br>~~e~~|86<br>|<br>fl<br>~~e~~|0<br>fl<br>~~e~~||**RL**<br>rs<br>ee<br>e|✔<br>ee<br>e|✔<br>ee<br>e|✔<br>ee <br>ee<br>ee<br>e||ee<br>eee|
||**7**<br>et<br>~~e~~<br>pet|07<br>**|**<br>et<br>~~e~~<br>pet<br>||87<br>|<br>fl<br>~~e~~<br>||0<br>fl<br>~~e~~<br>~~po~~|**Acceleration time**<br>rs<br>ee<br>~~e~~e<br>~~po~~||✔<br>ee<br>e<br>~~po~~|✔<br>ee<br>e<br>~~po~~|✔<br>ee<br>ee <br>e<br>~~po~~|6-71<br> ee<br>eee<br>~~po~~|eee<br>~~po~~|
||**8**<br>~~e~~<br>pet|08<br>~~e~~<br>pet<br>||88<br>~~e~~<br>||0<br>~~e~~<br>~~po~~|**Deceleration time**<br>~~e~~e<br>~~po~~||✔<br>e<br>~~po~~|✔<br>e<br>~~po~~|✔<br>e<br>~~po~~||eee<br>~~po~~|
||**9**<br>~~e~~<br>pet|09<br>~~e~~<br>pet<br>||89<br>~~e~~<br>||0<br>~~e~~<br>~~po~~|**Electronic thermal O/L relay**<br>~~e~~e<br>~~po~~||✔<br>e<br>~~po~~|✔<br>e<br>~~po~~|✔<br>e<br>~~po~~|6-82<br>eee<br>~~po~~|eee<br>~~po~~|
|DC injection brake<br>—<br>a|**10**|0A|8A|0|**DC injection brake operation**|**Fre-**<br>**quency**|✔|✔|✔|6-100<br>ee||
||**11**<br>—{||0B<br>{|<br>||8B<br>ft|0<br>ft||**Time**<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|||
||**12**<br>—{||0C<br>{|<br>||8C<br>ft|0<br>ft||**Voltage**<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|||
|—<br>—<br>a|**13**<br>— {||0D<br>{|<br>|<br>OB|8D<br>ft<br>OB|0<br>ft<br>OB|**Starting frequency**<br>ee||✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|6-75<br> ee||
A - 16
Appendix
Parameter list with instruction codes
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|**Customer**<br>**Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|—|**14**|0E|8E|0|**Load pattern selection**|✔|—|—|6-58||
|Jog operation|**15**|0F|8F|0|**Jog frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-63||
||**16**|10|90|0|**Jog acceleration/deceleration time**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**17**|11|91|0|**MRS input selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-119||
|—|**18**|12|92|0|**High speed maximum frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-52||
|—|**19**|13|93|0|**Base frequency voltage**|✔|—|—|6-56||
|Acceleration/<br>deceleration time|**20**|14|94|0|**Acceleration/deceleration**<br>**reference frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-71||
||**21**|15|95|0|**Acceleration/deceleration time**<br>**increments**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Stall prevention|**22**|16|96|0|**Stall prevention operation level**|✔|✔|✔|6-44||
||**23**|17|97|0|**Stall prevention operation level**<br>**compensation factor at double speed**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Multi-speed setting|**24**|18|98|0|**Multi-speed setting (speed 4)**|✔|✔|✔|6-60||
||**25**|19|99|0|**Multi-speed setting (speed 5)**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**26**|1A|9A|0|**Multi-speed setting (speed 6)**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**27**|1B|9B|0|**Multi-speed setting (speed 7)**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**29**|1D|9D|0|**Acceleration/deceleration**<br>**pattern selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-77||
|—|**30**|1E|9E|0|**Regenerative function selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-103||
|Frequency jump|**31**|1F|9F|0|**Frequency jump 1A**|✔|✔|✔|6-54||
||**32**|20|A0|0|**Frequency jump 1B**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**33**|21|A1|0|**Frequency jump 2A**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**34**|22|A2|0|**Frequency jump 2B**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**35**|23|A3|0|**Frequency jump 3A**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**36**|24|A4|0|**Frequency jump 3B**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**37**|25|A5|0|**Speed display**|✔|✔|✔|6-138||
|—|**40**|28|A8|0|**RUN key rotation direction selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-329||
|Frequency detection<br>(SU, FU)|**41**|29|A9|0|**Up-to-frequency sensitivity**|✔|✔|✔|6-131||
||**42**|2A|AA|0|**Output frequency detection**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**43**|2B|AB|0|**Output frequency detection for reverse**<br>**rotation**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Second functions|**44**|2C|AC|0|**Second acceleration/deceleration time**|✔|✔|✔|6-71||
||**45**|2D|AD|0|**Second deceleration time**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**46**|2E|AE|0|**Second torque boost**|✔|—|—|6-35||
||**47**|2F|AF|0|**Second V/F (base frequency)**|✔|—|—|6-56||
||**48**|30|B0|0|**Second stall prevention operation**<br>**current**|✔|✔|✔|6-44||
||**51**|33|B3|0|**Second electronic thermal O/L relay**|✔|✔|✔|6-82||
|Monitor functions|**52**|34|B4|0|**DU/PU main display data selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-140||
||**55**|37|B7|0|**Frequency monitoring reference**|✔|✔|✔|6-148||
||**56**|38|B8|0|**Current monitoring reference**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Automatic restart<br>functions|**57**|39|B9|0|**Restart coasting time**|✔|✔|✔|6-153||
||**58**|3A|BA|0|**Restart cushion time**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**59**|3B|BB|0|**Remote function selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-67||
|—|**60**|3C|BC|0|**Energy saving control selection**|✔|—|—|6-174||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (2)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 17
Parameter list with instruction codes
Appendix
|**Function**<br>~~Rina~~|**Parame-**<br>**ter**<br>~~Rina~~|**Instruction Code**<br>~~Rina~~|**Instruction Code**<br>~~Rina~~|**Instruction Code**<br>~~Rina~~|**Name**<br>~~Rina~~|**Name**<br>~~Rina~~|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**<br>~~Rina~~|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**<br>~~Rina~~|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**<br>~~Rina~~|**Refer to**<br>**Page**<br>~~Rina~~|**Customer**<br>**Setting**<br>~~Rina~~|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**<br>~~Rina~~|**Write**<br>~~Rina~~|**Extended**<br>~~Rina~~|||**V/F control**<br>~~Rina~~|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**<br>~~Rina~~|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**<br>~~Rina~~|||
|Automatic<br>acceleration/<br>deceleration<br>~~Rina~~|**61**<br>~~Rina~~|3D<br>~~Rina~~|BD<br>~~Rina~~|0<br>~~Rina~~|**Automatic acceleration/**<br>**deceleration**<br>~~Rina~~|**Refer-**<br>**ence**<br>**current**<br>~~Rina~~|✔<br>~~Rina~~|✔<br>~~Rina~~|✔<br>~~Rina~~|6-79<br>~~Rina~~|~~Rina~~|
||**62**|3E|BE|0||**Refer-**<br>**ence**<br>**value at**<br>**acceler-**<br>**ation**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**63**|3F|BF|0||**Refer-**<br>**ence**<br>**value at**<br>**decel-**<br>**eration**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Retry function at<br>alarm occurrence<br>~~Oe~~<br>ee|**65**<br>~~Oe~~<br>ee|41<br>~~Oe~~<br>|C1<br>~~Oe~~<br>|0<br>~~Oe~~<br>|**Retry selection**<br>~~Oe~~<br>||✔<br>~~Oe~~<br>|✔<br>~~Oe~~<br>|✔<br>~~Oe~~<br>|6-169<br>~~Oe~~|~~Oe~~|
|—<br>ee|**66**<br>ee|42<br>|C2<br>|0<br>|**Stall prevention operation reduction**<br>**starting frequency**<br>||✔<br>|✔<br>|✔<br>|6-44||
|Retry function at<br>alarm occurrence<br>ee<br>a|**67**<br>eese|43<br>se|C3<br>se|0<br>se|**Number of retries at alarm occurrence**<br>se||✔<br>se|✔<br>se|✔<br>se|6-169<br>~~s~~||
||**68**<br>a|44|C4|0|**Retry waiting time**||✔<br>ee|✔|✔<br>e~~s~~|||
||**69**<br>a|45<br>Be|C5<br>Be|0<br>Be|**Retry count display erase**<br>Be||✔<br>Be<br>ee|✔<br>Be|✔<br>Be<br>e~~s~~|||
|—<br>a|**70**<br>a|46<br>Be<br>a|C6<br>Be<br> a|0<br>Be|**Special regenerative brake duty**<br>Be||✔<br>Be<br>ee|✔<br>Be|✔<br>Be<br>e~~s~~|6-103<br>~~s~~||
|—<br>se<br>po|**71**<br>se|47<br> ee|C7<br>eeeG|0<br>eG|**Applied motor**<br>eG||✔|✔|✔|6-87||
|—<br>po<br>po|**72**|48|C8|0|**PWM frequency selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-175||
|—<br>po<br>po<br>po|**73**|49|C9|0|**Analog input selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-177||
|—<br>po<br>po|**74**|4A|CA|0|**Input filter time constant**||✔|✔|✔|6-182||
|—<br>po<br>a|**75**|4B|CB|0|**Reset selection/disconnected PU**<br>**detection/PU stop selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-190||
|—<br>a<br>a<br>po|**77**|4D|CD|0|**Parameter write selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-195||
|—<br>po|**78**|4E|CE|0|**Reverse rotation prevention selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-197||
|—<br>po<br>a|**79**<br>a|4F|CF<br>OD|0<br>OD|**Operation mode selection**<br>OD||✔|✔|✔|6-206||
|Vector control<br>**O**|**80**<br>~~p~~|50<br>~~p~~|D0<br>~~p~~|0<br>~~p~~|**Motor capacity**<br>~~p~~||—<br>~~pp~~|✔<br>~~p~~|✔<br>~~p~~|6-38<br>~~p~~|~~p~~|
||**81**<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>**O**g|51<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>OO|D1<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>OO|0<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>OO|**Number of motor poles**<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>OO||—<br>~~pp~~<br>OO<br>OO|✔<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>OO|✔<br>~~p~~<br>OO<br>OO||~~p~~|
||**82**<br>**O**g|52<br>OO|D2<br>OO|0<br>OO|**Motor excitation current**<br>OO||—<br>OO|✔<br>OO|✔<br>OO|6-90||
||**83**<br>**O**g|53<br>OO|D3<br>OO|0<br>OO|**Motor rated voltage**<br>OO<br>O||—<br>OO<br>O|✔<br>OO<br>O|✔<br>OO<br>O|||
||**84**|54|D4|0|**Rated motor frequency**||—|✔|✔|||
||**89**|59|D9|0|**Speed control gain**<br>**(advanced magnetic flux vector)**||—|✔|—|6-38||
||**90**<br>Pt|5A<br>Pt|DA|0|**Motor constants**|**R1**<br>es|—<br>es|✔<br>es|✔<br>es|||
||**91**<br>PT|5B<br>PT|DB|0||**R2**<br>a|—<br>a|✔<br>a|✔<br>a|||
||**92**<br>Pt|5C<br>Pt|DC|0||**L1**<br>ee|—<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|||
||**93**<br>PT|5D<br>PT|DD|0||**L2**<br>a|—<br>a|✔<br>a|✔<br>a|||
||**94**<br>Pt|5E<br>Pt|DE|0||**X**<br>es|—<br>es|✔<br>es|✔<br>es|||
||**96**<br>~~O~~|60<br>~~O~~|E0<br>~~O~~|0<br>~~O~~|**Auto tuning setting/status**<br>~~O~~O||✔<br>O|✔<br>O|✔<br>O|||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (3)_
Can be written by only communication from the PU connector.
A - 18
Appendix
Parameter list with instruction codes
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|**Customer**<br>**Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|PU connector<br>communication|**117**|11|91|1|**PU communication station number**|✔|✔|✔|6-234||
||**118**|12|92|1|**PU communication speed**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**119**|13|93|1|**PU communication stop bit length**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**120**|14|94|1|**PU communication parity check**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**121**|15|95|1|**Number of PU communication retries**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**122**|16|96|1|**PU communication check time interval**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**123**|17|97|1|**PU communication waiting time**<br>**setting**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**124**|18|98|1|**PU communication CR/LF selection**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|�**125**|19|99|1|**Terminal 2 frequency setting gain**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-183||
|—|�**126**|1A|9A|1|**Terminal 4 frequency setting gain**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|||
|PID control|**127**|1B|9B|1|**PID control automatic switchover**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-293||
||**128**|1C|9C|1|**PID action selection**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**129**|1D|9D|1|**PID proportional band**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**130**|1E|9E|1|**PID integral time**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**131**|1F|9F|1|**PID upper limit**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**132**|20|A0|1|**PID lower limit**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**133**|21|A1|1|**PID action set point**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**134**|22|A2|1|**PID differential time**|✔|✔|✔|||
|PU|**145**|2D|AD|1|**PU display language selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-329||
|—|**146**|Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.|||||||||
|—|**147**|2F|AF|1|**Acceleration/deceleration switching**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-71||
|Current detection|**150**|32|B2|1|**Output current detection level**|✔|✔|✔|6-133||
||**151**|33|B3|1|**Output current detection signal delay**<br>**time**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**152**|34|B4|1|**Zero current detection level**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**153**|35|B5|1|**Zero current detection time**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**156**|38|B8|1|**Stall prevention operation selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-44||
|—|**157**|39|B9|1|**OL signal output timer**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Display selection|**158**|3A|BA|1|**AM terminal function selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-140||
|—|�**160**|00|80|2|**User group read selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-198||
|—|**161**|01|81|2|**Frequency setting/key lock**<br>**operation selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-330||
|Automatic restart<br>functions|**162**|02|82|2|**Automatic restart after instantaneous**<br>**power failure selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-153||
||**165**|05|85|2|**Stall prevention operation level for**<br>**restart**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**168**|Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.|||||||||
|—|**169**||||||||||
|Cumulative<br>monitor clear|**170**|0A|8A|2|**Watt-hour meter clear**|✔|✔|✔|6-140||
||**171**|0B|8B|2|**Operation hour meter clear**|✔|✔|✔|||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (4)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 19
Parameter list with instruction codes
Appendix
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**|**Name**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|**Customer**<br>**Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**|||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|User group<br>RRR<br>|**172**<br>RRR|0C<br>RRR|8C<br>RRR|2<br>RRR|**User group registered display/**<br>**batch clear**||✔|✔|✔|6-198<br>||
||**173**<br>RRR|0D<br>RRR|8D<br>RRR|2<br>RRR|**User group registration**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**174**<br>RRR<br>a|0E<br>RRR<br>|8E<br>RRR<br>|2<br>RRR<br>|**User group clear**<br>||✔<br>|✔<br>|✔<br>|||
|Input terminal<br>function assignment<br>A|**178**<br>aA|12<br>A|92<br>A|2<br>A|**Function**<br>**selection**<br> EE|**STF ter-**<br>**minal**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~|6-116<br>~~R~~E|E|
||**179**<br>A|13<br>A|93<br>A|2<br>A||**STR ter-**<br>**minal**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~||E|
||**180**<br>A|14<br>A|94<br>A|2<br>A||**RL ter-**<br>**minal**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~||E|
||**181**<br>A|15<br>A|95<br>A|2<br>A||**RM ter-**<br>**minal**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~||E|
||**182**<br>A|16<br>A|96<br>A|2<br>A||**RH ter-**<br>**minal**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~||E|
||**183**<br>A|17<br>A|97<br>A|2<br>A||**MRS bit**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~||E|
||**184**<br>A|18<br>A|98<br>A|2<br>A||**RES ter-**<br>**minal**<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE|✔<br>EE~~R~~||E|
|Output terminal<br>function assignment|**190**|1E|9E|2|**Function**<br>**selection**<br>ee|**RUN**<br>**termi-**<br>**nal**|✔|✔|✔|6-126||
||**191**|1F|9F|2||**FU ter-**<br>**minal**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**192**<br>a|20<br>a|A0<br>ae|2<br>a||**A, B and**<br>**C termi-**<br>**nal**<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔||||
|Multi-speed<br>setting<br>a|**232**<br>a<br>a|28<br>a<br>a|A8<br>ae<br>ee|2<br>a<br>a|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 8)**<br>ee<br>ee||✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔|6-60<br><br>Ge||<br>||
||**233**<br>a<br>a<br>a|29<br>a <br>a<br>a|A9<br> ae <br>ee<br>ae|2<br> a<br>a<br>ee|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 9)**<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee||✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔|||<br>|<br>||
||**234**<br>a <br>a<br>a|2A<br> a <br>a<br>a|AA<br> ee <br>ae<br>ee|2<br> a<br>ee<br>a|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 10)**<br>ee <br>ee<br>ee||✔<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔|||<br>|<br>||
||**235**<br>a <br>a<br>a|2B<br> a <br>a<br>a|AB<br> ae <br>ee<br>ae|2<br> ee<br>a<br>ee|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 11)**<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee||✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔|||<br>|<br>||
||**236**<br>a <br>a<br>a|2C<br> a <br>a<br>a|AC<br> ee <br>ae<br>ee|2<br> a<br>ee<br>a|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 12)**<br>ee <br>ee<br>ee||✔<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔|||<br>|<br>||
||**237**<br>a <br>a<br>a|2D<br> a <br>a<br>a|AD<br> ae <br>ee<br>ae|2<br> ee<br>a<br>ee|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 13)**<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee||✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔|||<br>|<br>||
||**238**<br>a <br>a<br>a|2E<br> a <br>a<br>a|AE<br> ee <br>ae<br>eea|2<br> a<br>ee<br>a|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 14)**<br>ee <br>ee<br>ee||✔<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee|||<br>|<br>||
||**239**<br>a <br>a<br>ee|2F<br> a <br>a<br>ee|AF<br> ae <br>eea<br>ee|2<br> ee<br>a<br>ee|**Multi-speed setting (speeds 15)**<br>ee<br>ee<br>eses||✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>esGe|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>Ge|✔<br>ee<br>GnGe|||<br>||
|—<br>a<br>PEE|**240**<br>a <br>ee<br>PEE|30<br> a <br>ee<br>PEEEE|B0<br> eea<br>ee<br>EE|2<br>a <br>ee<br>EE|**Soft-PWM operation selection**<br> ee <br>eses||✔<br> ee <br>esGe|✔<br> ee <br>Ge|✔<br> ee <br>GnGe|6-175<br> <br>Ge|||
|—<br>PEE<br>a|**241**<br>ee <br>PEE<br>ee|31<br> ee <br>PEEEE<br>ee|B1<br> ee <br>EE<br>es|2<br> ee<br>EE<br>es|**Analog input display unit switch over**<br>eses<br>ts||✔<br>esGe<br>rereGs|✔<br>Ge<br>GsGe|✔<br>GnGe<br>Ge|6-183<br>Ge||
|—<br>PEE<br>a|**244**<br>PEE<br>ee<br>a|34<br>PEE EE<br>ee<br>a|B4<br>EE<br>es<br>ee|2<br>EE<br>es<br>ee|**Cooling fan operation selection**<br>ts<br>ee||✔<br>rereGs<br>es|✔<br>GsGe<br>ee|✔<br>Ge<br>ee|6-317<br>|||
|Slip compensation<br>a<br>a|**245**<br>ee <br>a|35<br> ee <br>a|B5<br> es <br>ee|2<br> es<br>ee|**Rated slip**<br>ts<br>ee||✔<br>rereGs<br>es|—<br>GsGe<br>ee|✔<br>Ge<br>ee|6-43<br> <br>Gs|||
||**246**<br>a|36<br> a|B6<br> ee|2<br> ee|**Slip compensation time constant**<br>ee||✔<br>es|—<br>ee|✔<br>ee||||
||**247**<br>ee|37<br>es|B7<br>es|2<br>ee|**Constant-output region slip**<br>**compensation selection**<br>errs||✔<br>rereGs|—<br>Gs|✔<br>I|||
|—<br>a|**249**<br>ee|39<br>es|B9<br>es|2<br>ee|**Earth (ground) fault detection at start**<br>errs||✔<br>rereGs|✔<br>Gs|✔<br>I|6-173<br>Gs||
|—<br>a|**250**<br>ee|3A<br> es|BA<br> es|2<br> ee|**Stop selection**<br>errs||✔<br> rereGs|✔<br>Gs|✔<br> I|6-105<br> Gs||
|—|**251**|3B|BB|2|**Output phase failure protection selec-**<br>**tion**||✔|✔|✔|6-172||
|Life check|**255**<br>a|3F<br>a|BF|2|**Life alarm status display**||✔|✔|✔|6-318<br>||
||**256**<br>a<br><br>a|40<br>a<br>a<br>|C0<br>ae<br>|2<br>ee<br>|**Inrush current suppression circuit life**<br>**display**<br>ee||✔<br>es|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee||||
||**257**<br>a<br>a<br>Ff|41<br>aa<br>ee<br>Ff|C1<br>ae<br>ee|2<br>ee<br>ee|**Control circuit capacitor life display**<br>ee<br>es||✔<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee|||<br>**|**|
||**258**<br><br>a <br>Ff|42<br>a <br> ee<br>Ff<br>||C2<br> ae <br>ee<br>ft|2<br> ee <br>ee<br>ftfr|**Main circuit capacitor life display**<br> ee <br>es<br>fr||✔<br> es <br>ee<br>fr|✔<br> ee <br>ee<br>fr|✔<br> ee <br>fr|||<br>**|**|
||**259**<br> <br>Ff|43<br> ee<br>Ff<br>||C3<br>ee<br>ft|2<br>ee<br>ftfr|**Main circuit capacitor life measuring**<br>es<br>fr||✔<br>ee<br>fr|✔<br>ee<br>fr|✔<br>fr||**|**|
A - 20
Appendix
Parameter list with instruction codes
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**|**Name**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|**Customer**<br>**Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**|||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|Power failure stop|**261**|45|C5|2|**Power failure stop selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-165||
|—|**267**|4B|CB|2|**Terminal 4 input selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-177||
|—|**268**|4C|CC|2|**Monitor decimal digits selection**||✔|✔|✔|6-140||
|—|**269**|Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.||||||||||
|Stop-on contact<br>control|**270**|4E|CE|2|**Stop-on contact control selection**||—|✔|✔|6-107||
||**275**|53|D3|2|**Stop-on contact excitation**<br>**current low-speed multiplying factor**||—|✔|✔|||
||**276**|54|D4|2|**PWM carrier frequency at stop-on**<br>**contact**||—|✔|✔|||
|—|**277**|55|D5|2|**Stall prevention operation current**<br>**switchover**||✔|✔|✔|6-44||
|Brake sequence<br>function|**278**|56|D6|2|**Brake opening frequency**||—|✔|✔|6-111||
||**279**|57|D7|2|**Brake opening current**||—|✔|✔|||
||**280**|58|D8|2|**Brake opening current detection time**||—|✔|✔|||
||**281**|59|D9|2|**Brake operation time at start**||—|✔|✔|||
||**282**|5A|DA|2|**Brake operation frequency**||—|✔|✔|||
||**283**|5B|DB|2|**Brake operation time at stop**||—|✔|✔|||
|Droop control|**286**|5E|DE|2|**Droop gain**||—|✔|—|6-313||
||**287**|5F|DE|2|**Droop filter time constant**||—|✔|—|||
|—|**292**|64|E4|2|**Automatic acceleration/deceleration**||✔|✔|✔|6-79||
|—|**293**|65|E5|2|**Acceleration/deceleration**<br>**separate selection**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**295**|67|E7|2|**Magnitude of frequency change**<br>**setting**||✔|✔|✔|6-331||
|Password function|**296**|68|E8|2|**Password lock level**||✔|—|✔|6-201||
||**297**|69|E9|2|**Password lock/unlock**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**298**|6A|EA|2|**Frequency search gain**||✔|✔|✔|6-153||
|—|**299**|6B|EB|2|**Rotation direction detection selection**<br>**at restarting**||✔|✔|✔|||
|Digital input<br>(FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)|**300**|00|80|3|**BCD input**|**Bias**|✔|✔|✔|—||
||**301**|01|81|3||**Gain**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**302**|02|82|3|**BIN input**|**Bias**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**303**|03|83|3||**Gain**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**304**|04|84|3|**Digital input and analog input**<br>**compensation enable/disable selection**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**305**|05|85|3|**Read timing operation selection**||✔|✔|✔|||
|Analog output<br>(FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E)|**306**|06|86|3|**Analog output signal selection**||✔|✔|✔|—||
||**307**|07|87|3|**Setting for zero analog output**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**308**|08|88|3|**Setting for maximum analog output**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**309**|09|89|3|**Analog output signal voltage/current**<br>**switch over**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**310**|0A|8A|3|**Analog meter voltage output selection**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**311**|0B|8B|3|**Setting for zero analog meter voltage**<br>**output**||✔|✔|✔|||
||**312**|0C|8C|3|**Setting for maximum analog meter**<br>**voltage output**||✔|✔|✔|||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (6)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 21
Parameter list with instruction codes
Appendix
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**<br>Ff|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**<br>a|**Name**<br>a|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**<br>ee<br>||**Customer**<br>**Setting**<br>||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**<br>Ffft|**Write**<br>ft|**Extended**<br>ft|||**V/F control**<br>ee|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**<br>ee|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**<br>ee|||
|Function assignment<br>of digital output<br>CC-Link<br>(FR-E700 SC ENE)<br>~~E~~|**313**<br>Ff<br>Ff|0D<br>Ffft<br>Ff<br>ft|8D<br>ft<br>ftct|3<br>ft<br>ct|**Function selection**<br>~~E~~E|**DO0**<br>a<br>a|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|6-126<br>ee<br>|<br> <br>~~E~~||<br>||
||**314**<br>Ff<br>Ff|0E<br>Ff ft<br>Ff<br>ft|8E<br>ft<br>ftct|3<br>ft<br>ct||**DO1**<br>a<br>a|✔<br>ee <br>ee|✔<br> ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|||<br>||
||**315**<br>Ff<br>~~E~~|0F<br>Ff<br>ft<br>~~E~~|8F<br>ft ct<br>~~E~~|3<br>ct<br>~~E~~||**DO2**<br>a<br>E|✔<br>ee <br>E|✔<br> ee<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>ee <br>~~E~~|||<br>~~E~~|
|Analog output<br>(FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E)<br>FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E<br>(CC-Link-<br>communication)<br>~~E~~|**313**<br>~~E~~|0D<br>~~E~~|8D<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~|**Function selection**<br>~~E~~E|**Y0 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~|—<br>~~E~~|~~E~~|
||**314**<br>~~E~~|0E<br>~~E~~|8E<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~||**Y1 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~||~~E~~|
||**315**<br>~~E~~|0F<br>~~E~~|8F<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~||**Y2 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~||~~E~~|
||**316**<br>~~E~~|10<br>~~E~~|90<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~||**Y3 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~||~~E~~|
||**317**<br>~~E~~|11<br>~~E~~|91<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~||**Y4 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~||~~E~~|
||**318**<br>~~E~~|12<br>~~E~~|92<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~||**Y5 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~||~~E~~|
||**319**<br>~~E~~|13<br>~~E~~|93<br>~~E~~|3<br>~~E~~||**Y6 ter-**<br>**minal**<br>E|✔<br>E|✔<br>E~~E~~|✔<br>~~E~~||~~E~~|
|Relay output<br>(FR-A7AR-Ekit-SC-E)|**320**|14|94|3|**Function selection**|**RA1 ter-**<br>**minal**|✔|✔|✔|—||
||**321**|15|95|3||**RA2 ter-**<br>**minal**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**322**|16|96|3||**RA3 ter-**<br>**minal**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Analog output<br>(FR-A7AY-Ekit-SC-E)<br>ee<br>~~E~~<br>||**323**<br>ee<br>|17<br>ee<br>|97<br>eeee<br>|3<br>ee<br>|**AM0 0 V adjustment**<br>ee<br>ooo<br>||✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE~~E~~<br>|—<br>~~E~~<br>~~E~~E<br>|E<br>|
||**324**<br>ee<br>~~E~~<br>|18<br>ee<br>~~E~~<br>|98<br>eeee<br>~~E~~<br>|3<br>ee<br>~~E~~<br>|**AM1 0 mA adjustment**<br>ee<br>~~EE~~<br>ooo<br>||✔<br>~~E~~<br>EE<br>|✔<br>~~E~~<br>EE<br>|✔<br>~~E~~<br>EE~~E~~<br>||~~E~~<br>E<br>|
|Digital input<br>(FR-A7AX-Ekit-SC-E)<br>~~E~~<br>||**329**<br>~~E~~<br>|1D<br>~~E~~<br>|9D<br>~~E~~<br>|3<br>~~E~~<br>|**Digital input unit selection**<br>~~EE~~<br>ooo<br>||✔<br>~~E~~<br>EE<br>|✔<br>~~E~~<br>EE<br>|✔<br>~~E~~<br>EE~~E~~<br>|—<br>~~E~~<br>~~E~~E<br>|~~E~~<br>E<br>|
|RS-485<br>communication<br>||**338**<br>|26<br>|A6<br>|3<br>|**Communication operation command**<br>**source**<br>ooo<br>||✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE~~E~~<br>|6-220<br>~~E~~E<br>|E<br>|
||**339**<br>|27<br>|A7<br>|3<br>|**Communication speed command**<br>**source**<br>ooo<br>||✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE~~E~~<br>||E<br>|
||**340**<br>|28<br>|A8<br>|3<br>|**Communication start-up mode**<br>**selection**<br>ooo<br>||✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE<br>|✔<br>EE~~E~~<br>|6-218<br>~~E~~E<br>|E<br>|
||**342**<br>R|2A<br>R|AA<br>R|3<br>R|**Communication E²PROM write**<br>**selection**<br>ooo<br>R||✔<br>EE<br>R~~=~~|✔<br>EE<br>~~=~~|✔<br>EE~~E~~<br>~~=~~|6-234<br>~~E~~E<br>~~=~~|E<br>~~=~~|
||**343**<br> R|2B<br>R|AB<br>R|3<br>R|**Communication error count**<br>ooo <br>R||✔<br> EE<br>R~~=~~|✔<br>EE<br>~~=~~|✔<br>EE ~~E~~<br>~~=~~||E<br>~~=~~|
|DeviceNet<br>communication<br>(FR-A7ND-Ekit-SC-E)<br>eee|**345**<br>eee<br>ee|2D<br>eee<br>ee|AD<br>eeeee<br>ee|3<br>ee<br>ae|**DeviceNet address**<br>ee<br>es||✔<br>ee|✔<br>es|✔<br>ee|—<br>en||
||**346**<br>eee<br>ee|2E<br>eee<br>ee|AE<br>eeeee<br>ee|3<br>ee<br>ae|**DeviceNet baud rate**<br>ee<br>es||✔<br>ee|✔<br>es|✔<br>ee|—<br>en||
|FR-E700 SC ENE|**349**<br>ee|31<br>ee|B1<br> ee|3<br> ae|**Communication reset selection**<br>es||✔<br>ee|✔<br>es|✔<br>ee|6-234<br>en||
|Parameter for option<br>FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E<br>FR-A7ND-Ekit-SC-E<br>FR-A7NL-Ekit-SC-E<br>FR-A7NP-Ekit-SC-E|**349**<br>a|31<br>ee|B1<br>ee|3<br>ee|**Communication reset selection**<br>ee||✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|—<br>||||
|LonWorks<br>communication<br>(FR-A7NL-Ekit-SC-E)|**387**<br>a<br>a|57<br>ee<br>aea|D7<br>ee<br>a|3<br>ee<br>a|**Initial communication delay time**<br>ee<br>es||✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>e~~e~~|—<br>|<br>~~e~~<br>|<br> <br>~~e~~<br>|<br>||<br>||
||**388**<br>a<br>a<br>a|58<br>ee <br>aea<br>ee|D8<br> ee <br>a<br>ee|3<br> ee<br>a<br>ee|**Send time interval at heart beat**<br>ee<br>es<br>ee||✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>e~~e~~<br>ee|||<br>|<br>||
||**389**<br>a<br>a<br>a|59<br>aea<br>ee<br>aea|D9<br>a <br>ee<br>a|3<br> a<br>ee<br>a|**Minimum sending time at heart beat**<br>es<br>ee<br>es||✔<br>ee <br>ee<br>ee|✔<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>ee<br>e~~e~~|||<br>|<br>||
||**390**<br>a<br>a<br>a|5A<br>ee <br>aea<br>ee|DA<br> ee <br>a<br>ee|3<br> ee<br>a<br>ee|**% setting reference frequency**<br>ee<br>es<br>ee||✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee <br>e~~e~~<br>ee|||<br>|<br>||
||**391**<br>a<br>a|5B<br>aea<br>ee|DB<br>a <br>ee|3<br> a<br>ee|**Receive time interval at heart beat**<br>es<br>ee||✔<br>ee <br>ee|✔<br> ee<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>ee|||<br>||
||**392**<br>a|5C<br>ee|DC<br> ee|3<br> ee|**Event driven detection width**<br>ee||✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee||||
|Second applied<br>motor|**450**|32|B2|3|**Second applied motor**||✔|✔|✔|6-87||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (7)_
A - 22
Appendix
Parameter list with instruction codes
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|**Customer**<br>**Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|Ethernet<br>communication<br>(FR-E700 SC ENE)|**442**|2A|AA|4|**Default gateway address 1**|✔|✔|✔|6-283||
||**443**|2B|AB|4|**Default gateway address 2**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**444**|2C|AC|4|**Default gateway address 3**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**445**|2D|AD|4|**Default gateway address 4**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Remote output|**495**|5F|DF|4|**Remote output selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-135||
||**496**|60|E0|4|**Remote output data 1**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**497**|61|E1|4|**Remote output data 2**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Parameter for option<br>FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E<br>FR-A7ND-Ekit-SC-E<br>FR-A7NL-Ekit-SC-E<br>FR-A7NP-Ekit-SC-E|**500**|00|80|5|**Communication error execution**<br>**waiting time**|✔|✔|✔|—||
||**501**|01|81|5|**Communication error occurrence count**<br>**display**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Communication<br>FR-E700 SC ENE|**501**|01|81|5|**Communication error occurrence count**<br>**display**|✔|✔|✔|6-234||
|—|**502**|02|82|5|**Stop mode selection at communication**<br>**error**|✔|✔|✔|—||
|Maintenance|**503**|03|83|5|**Maintenance timer**|✔|✔|✔|6-323||
||**504**|04|84|5|**Maintenance timer alarm output set**<br>**time**|✔|✔|✔|||
|CC-Link<br>communication<br>(FR-A7NC-Ekit-SC-E)|**541**|29|A9|5|**Frequency command sign selection**<br>**(CC-Link)**|✔|✔|✔|—||
||**542**|2A|AA|5|**Communication station number**<br>**(CC-Link)**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**543**|2B|AB|5|**Baud rate (CC-Link)**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**544**|2C|AC|5|**CC-Link extended setting**|✔|✔|✔|||
|CC-Link<br>communication<br>FR-E700 SC ENE|**541**|29|A9|5|**Frequency command sign selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-349||
||**544**|2C|AC|5|**CC-Link extended setting**|✔|✔|✔|||
|USB|**547**|2F|AD|5|**USB communication station number**|✔|✔|✔|6-292||
||**548**|30|B0|5|**USB communication check time**<br>**interval**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Communication|**549**|31|B1|5|**Protocol selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-234||
||**550**|32|B2|5|**NET mode operation command source**<br>**selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-220||
||**551**|33|B3|5|**PU mode operation command source**<br>**selection**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Current average<br>monitor|**555**|37|B7|5|**Current average time**|✔|✔|✔|6-324||
||**556**|38|B8|5|**Data output mask time**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**557**|39|B9|5|**Current average value monitor signal**<br>**output reference current**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**563**|3F|BF|5|**Energizing time carrying-over times**|✔|✔|✔|6-140||
|—|**564**|40|C0|5|**Operating time carrying-over times**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**571**|47|C7|5|**Holding time at a start**|✔|✔|✔|6-75||
|—|**611**|0B|8B|6|**Acceleration time at a restart**|✔|✔|✔|6-153||
|—|**645**|2D|AD|6|**AM 0 V adjustment**|✔|—|✔|6-150||
|Reduce mechanical<br>resonance|**653**|35|B5|6|**Speed smoothing control**|✔|✔|✔|6-176||
|—|**665**|41|C1|6|**Regeneration avoidance frequency**<br>**gain**|✔|✔|✔|6-314||
|—|**800**|00|80|8|**Control method selection**|—|✔|✔|6-38||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (8)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 23
Parameter list with instruction codes
Appendix
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**<br>P||**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**<br>fe|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**<br>||**Customer**<br>**Setting**<br>||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**<br>P|<br>||**Write**<br>ft|**Extended**<br>ftfe||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|Ethernet<br>communication<br>FR-E700 SC ENE<br>a|**805**<br>P|<br>ee|05<br>P|<br>|<br>ee|85<br>ft<br>ae|8<br>ftfe<br>ee|**Ethernet IP address 1**<br>fe<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>es|✔|6-283<br>|<br>~~e~~<br>|<br>~~e~~<br>|<br>~~e~~<br>|<br>~~e~~<br>**|**<br>|<br>~~e~~<br>|<br>**|**<br>~~e~~<br>|<br>**|**<br>~~e~~<br>|<br>ts||<br>|||
||**806**<br>P|<br>ee<br>a|06<br>P|<br>|<br>ee<br>ae|86<br>ft<br>ae<br>ae|8<br>ftfe<br>ee<br>ee|**Ethernet IP address 2**<br>fe<br>ee<br>es|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~|||<br>||<br>||
||**807**<br>ee<br>a<br>ee|07<br>ee <br>ae<br>ee|87<br> ae <br>ae<br>ae|8<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|**Ethernet IP address 3**<br>ee<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>es<br>ee<br>es|✔<br>e~~e~~||||<br>|<br>|||
||**808**<br>a<br>ee<br>a|08<br>ae <br>ee<br>ae|88<br> ae <br>ae<br>ae|8<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|**Ethernet IP address 4**<br>es<br>ee<br>es|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>e~~e~~|||<br>||<br>||
||**809**<br>ee<br>a<br>ee|09<br>ee <br>ae<br>ee|89<br> ae <br>ae<br>ae|8<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|**Subnet mask 1**<br>ee<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>es<br>ee<br>es|✔<br>e~~e~~||||<br>|<br>|||
||**810**<br>a<br>ee<br>a|0A<br>ae <br>ee<br>ae|8A<br> ae <br>ae<br>ae|8<br> ee<br>ee<br>ee|**Subnet mask 2**<br>es<br>ee<br>es|✔<br>ee<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>ee<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>e~~e~~|||<br>||<br>||
||**811**<br>ee<br>a|0B<br>ee <br>ae|8B<br> ae <br>ae|8<br> ee<br>ee|**Subnet mask 3**<br>ee<br>es|✔<br>ee<br>ee|✔<br>es<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~||||<br>||
||**812**<br>a<br>a|0C<br>ae <br>a|8C<br> ae <br>a|8<br> ee|**Subnet mask 4**<br>es|✔<br>ee|✔<br>ee|✔<br>e~~e~~||||
||**830**<br>a|1E<br>a|9F<br>a|8|**Ethernet communication network**<br>**number**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**831**<br>||1F<br>a|9F<br>ee|8<br>ee|**Ethernet communication station**<br>**number**<br>es|✔<br>ee|✔<br>es|✔<br>e~~e~~||**|**|
||**832**<br>a<br>||20<br>a<br>a<br>||A0<br>a<br>ee<br>||8<br>ee<br>fmm|**Link speed and duplex mode selection**<br>es<br>fmm|✔<br>ee<br>fmm|✔<br>es<br>fmm|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>fmm||**|**<br>||
||**833**<br>|<br>a|21<br>a <br>|<br>a|A1<br> ee <br>|<br>ee|8<br> ee<br>fmm<br>ee|**Ethernet function selection 1**<br>es <br>fmm<br>es|✔<br> ee <br>fmm<br>ee|✔<br> es <br>fmm<br>es|✔<br> e~~e~~<br>fmm<br>e~~e~~||**|**<br>|<br>||
||**834**<br>a<br>||22<br>|<br>a<br>||A2<br>| <br>ee<br>||8<br> fmm<br>ee<br>fmm|**Ethernet function selection 2**<br>fmm<br>es<br>fmm|✔<br>fmm<br>ee<br>fmm|✔<br>fmm<br>es<br>fmm|✔<br>fmm<br>e~~e~~<br>fmm|||<br>|<br>**|**|
||**835**<br>a<br>|<br>a|23<br>a <br>|<br>a|A3<br> ee <br>|<br>ee|8<br> ee<br>fmm<br>ee|**Ethernet function selection 3**<br>es<br>fmm<br>es|✔<br>ee<br>fmm<br>ee|✔<br>es<br>fmm<br>es|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>fmm<br>e~~e~~|||<br>**|**<br>||
||**837**<br>|<br>a<br>||25<br>|<br>a<br>||A5<br>| <br>ee<br>||8<br> fmm<br>ee<br>fmm|**Ethernet IP filter address 1**<br>fmm<br>es<br>fmm|✔<br>fmm<br>ee<br>fmm|✔<br>fmm<br>es<br>fmm|✔<br>fmm<br>e~~e~~<br>fmm||**|**<br>|<br>**|**|
||**838**<br>a<br>|<br>a|26<br>a <br>|<br>a|A6<br> ee <br>|<br>ee|8<br> ee<br>fmm<br>ee|**Ethernet IP filter address 2**<br>es<br>fmm<br>es|✔<br>ee<br>fmm<br>ee|✔<br>es<br>fmm<br>es|✔<br>e~~e~~<br>fmm<br>e~~e~~|||<br>**|**<br>||
||**839**<br>|<br>a|27<br>|<br>a|A7<br>| <br>ee|8<br> fmm<br>ee|**Ethernet IP filter address 3**<br>fmm<br>es|✔<br>fmm<br>ee|✔<br>fmm<br>es|✔<br>fmm<br>e~~e~~||**|**<br>||
||**840**<br>a|28<br>a|A8<br> ee|8<br> ee|**Ethernet IP filter address 4**<br>es|✔<br>ee|✔<br>es|✔<br>e~~e~~||||
||**841**|29|A9|8|**Ethernet IP filter address 2 range**<br>**specification**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**842**|2A|AA|8|**Ethernet IP filter address 3 range**<br>**specification**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**843**|2B|AB|8|**Ethernet IP filter address 4 range**<br>**specification**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**844**|2C|AC|8|**Ethernet command source selection IP**<br>**address 1**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**845**|2D|AD|8|**Ethernet command source selection IP**<br>**address 2**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**846**|2E|AE|8|**Ethernet command source selection IP**<br>**address 3**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**847**|2F|AF|8|**Ethernet command source selection IP**<br>**address 4**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**848**|30|B0|8|**Ethernet command source selection IP**<br>**address 3 range specification**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**849**|31|B1|8|**Ethernet command source selection IP**<br>**address 4 range specification**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**850**|32|B2|8|**Ethernet TCP disconnection time**<br>**coefficient**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**851**|33|B3|8|**Ethernet signal loss detection function**<br>**selection**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**852**<br>a|34<br>ee|B4<br>ee|8<br>ee|**Ethernet communication check time**<br>**interval**<br>rr|✔<br>Geers|✔<br>reer|✔<br>es|||
|—<br>a<br>ee|**859**<br>a<br>es|3B<br>ee<br>ee|BB<br>ee<br>ee|8<br>ee<br>ee|**Torque current**<br>rr<br>es|—<br>Geers<br>es|✔<br>reer<br>es|✔<br>es<br>nD|6-90<br>ts<br>I||
|Protective function<br>a<br>ee|**872**<br>a<br>es|48<br>ee <br>ee|C8<br> ee <br>ee|8<br> ee<br>ee|**Input phase loss protection selection**<br>rr <br>es|✔<br> Geers <br>es|✔<br> reer<br>es|✔<br>es <br>nD|6-172<br> ts<br>I||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (9)_
A - 24
Appendix
Parameter list with instruction codes
|**Function**|**Parame-**<br>**ter**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Instruction Code**|**Name**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Control Mode-based Correspondence Table**|**Refer to**<br>**Page**|**Customer**<br>**Setting**|
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|||**Read**|**Write**|**Extended**||**V/F control**|**General-pur-**<br>**pose magnetic**<br>**flux vector**<br>**control**|**Advanced**<br>**magnetic flux**<br>**vector control**|||
|Regeneration<br>avoidance function|**882**|52|D2|8|**Regeneration avoidance operation**<br>**selection**|✔|✔|✔|6-314||
||**883**|53|D3|8|**Regeneration avoidance operation**<br>**level**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**885**|55|D5|8|**Regeneration avoidance compensation**<br>**frequency limit value**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**886**|56|D6|8|**Regeneration avoidance voltage gain**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Free parameter|**888**|58|D8|8|**Free parameter 1**|✔|✔|✔|6-328||
||**889**|59|D9|8|**Free parameter 2**|✔|✔|✔|||
|Parameter for option<br>AY|**C0**<br>**(900)**|5C|DC|1|**FM terminal calibration**|✔|✔|✔|—||
|Calibration<br>parameters|**C1**<br>**(901)**|5D|DD|1|**AM terminal calibration**|✔|✔|✔|6-150||
||**C2**<br>**(902)**|5E|DE|1|**Terminal 2 frequency setting bias**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|6-183||
||**C3**<br>**(902)**|5E|DE|1|**Terminal 2 frequency setting bias**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**125 (903)**|5F|DF|1|**Terminal 2 frequency setting gain**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**C4**<br>**(903)**|5F|DF|1|**Terminal 2 frequency setting gain**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**C5**<br>**(904)**|60|E0|1|**Terminal 4 frequency setting bias**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**C6**<br>**(904)**|60|E0|1|**Terminal 4 frequency setting bias**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**126 (905)**|61|E1|1|**Terminal 4 frequency setting gain**<br>**frequency**|✔|✔|✔|||
||**C7**<br>**(905)**|61|E1|1|**Terminal 4 frequency setting gain**|✔|✔|✔|||
|—|**C22**<br>**–**<br>**C25**<br>**(922**<br>**–**<br>**923)**|Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.|||||||||
|PU|**990**|5A|DA|9|**PU buzzer control**|✔|✔|✔|6-332||
||**991**|5B|DB|9|**PU contrast adjustment**|✔|✔|✔|6-332||
|Clear parameters/<br>Initial value change<br>list|**PR.CL**|—|||**Parameter clear**|—|—|—|4-17||
||**ALLC**|—|||**All parameter clear**|—|—|—|4-17||
||**Er.CL**|—|||**Faults history clear**|—|—|—|7-21||
||**PR.CH**|—|||**Initial value change list**|—|—|—|4-18||
_**Tab. A-5:** Parameter list with instruction codes (10)_
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 25
Specification change
Appendix
## **A.5 Specification change**
## **A.5.1 SERIAL number check**
Check the SERIAL number indicated on the inverter rating plate or package (refer to section 1.2).
The SERIAL consists of:
- 1 version symbol
- 2 numeric characters or 1 numeric character and 1 alphabet letter indicating year and month Last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), and Z (December).
- 6 numeric characters indicating control number.
**==> picture [330 x 73] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
SERIAL (Serial No.)<br>Symbol Year Month Control number<br>oO fe) fe) OOOO0O0O |<br>TC O00 A O00 G OO | TC number<br>I002147E<br>**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
_**Fig. A-13:** Rating plate example_
A - 26
Appendix
Index
## **Index**
**A**
AC reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Acceleration Characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Acceleration and deceleration time Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Advanced magnetic flux vector control . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 Alarm output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Automatic restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-153 **B** Base frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Bias adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-183 Buzzer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-332 **C** Cables Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Calibration Terminal AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-150 Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Characteristic Acceleration/deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Load torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Combined operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-212 Communication Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-234 Mitsubishi inverter protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-246 Modbus-RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-265 PU connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-229 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-292 Contactors and breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Contrast Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-332 Control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-250 Control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Cooling fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-317 Reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Cumulative power meter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140 **D** Dancer control Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-305 DC injection brake Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 DC reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Digital dial Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-331 Dimensions Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Parameter unit FR-PA07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 Parameter unit FR-PU07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 Display I/0 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138 Droop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-313 **E** Earthing Leakage currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Enclosure Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Energy saving operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-174 Environment specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Error corrective action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 LED/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Ethernet board Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Ethernet communication Connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 LED indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 27
Index
Appendix
**==> picture [231 x 683] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
|||
|---|---|
|F|
|Fault history|
|clear|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21|
|read|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21|
|Frequency jump|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54|
|Frequency monitor|
|Reference|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-148|
|Frequency setting|
|Digital dial|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23|
|Front cover|
|Reinstallation|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1|
|Removal|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1|
|G|
|Gain|
|adjust|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-183|
|I|
|Input terminals|
|Function selection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116|
|Inspection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1|
|Installation|
|Enclosure|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6|
|Instruction codes|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-16|
|Insulation resistance test|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11|
|J|
|Jog operation|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63|
|L|
|Language|
|Selection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-329|
|Language selection|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-329|
|Leakage currents|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48|
|Life|
|Monitor|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-318|
|Load pattern|
|Selection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58|
|Logic|
|Sink logic|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27|
|Source logic|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27|
|M|
|Maintenance|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1|
|Maintenance timer|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-323|
|Mechanical brake|
|Control|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-111|
|Mitsubishi inverter protocol|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-246|
**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
**==> picture [230 x 686] intentionally omitted <==**
**----- Start of picture text -----**<br>
|||
|---|---|
|Motor|
|Selection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87|
|Motor protection|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82|
|Multi command|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-264|
|Multi-speed setting|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60|
|O|
|Operation hour meter|
|clear|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-140|
|Operation mode|
|at power on|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-218|
|combined|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-212|
|Communication|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-223|
|external operation|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-210|
|PU operation mode|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-211|
|Operation mode selection|
|Flow chart|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-209|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-206|
|Operation panel|
|Basic functions|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10|
|Functions|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8|
|Output|
|analog|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-148|
|Output current|
|Detection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-133|
|Output frequency|
|Detection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-132|
|Frequency jumps|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54|
|Jog frequency|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63|
|maximum|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52|
|minimum|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52|
|Multi-speed setting|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60|
|Starting frequency|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75|
|Output signals|
|Setting|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-131|
|Output terminals|
|Function selection|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-126|
|P|
|Parameter|
|clear|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17|
|free|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-328|
|Instruction codes|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-16|
|Overview|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1|
|set|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16|
|Simple mode parameters|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1|
|Parameter unit|
|Wiring|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30|
|Parameter write disable|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-195|
|PID control|
|Parameter|. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-293|
**----- End of picture text -----**<br>
A - 28
Appendix
Index
PLC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Power failure Automatic restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-153 Protective earth Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Protective functions Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 **R** Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Regeneration avoidance Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-314 Remote outputs Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-135 Remote setting function Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Resonance points Avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Restart at alarm occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-169 at power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-155 Reverse rotation prevention Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-197 **S** Safety stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Second functions Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121 Serial number Capacity plate/rating plate FR-E700 SC EC . . . . . 1-2 Capacity plate/rating plate FR-E700 SC ENE . . . . 1-3 Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-26 Set value adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-183 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-177 Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-187 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-182 Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-187 Shortest acceleration/deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Speed display Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-138 Stall prevention Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Stall prevention operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Start signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122 Starting frequency DC injection brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Starting the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Station number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-234 Stop-on contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107 Switch Voltage/current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178 **T** Terminal Control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Terminals Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Function assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116 Torque Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 **U** Up-to-frequency sensitivity Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131 USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-292 User groups Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198 Parameter deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200 **V** V/F control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 V/F pattern Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Vector control Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 **W** Wiring Control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 DC reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 external brake unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 High power factor converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Magnetic contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Parameter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Power regeneration common converter . . . . . . 3-46 Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 stand-alone option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Terminal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 **Z** Zero current Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-134
FR-E700 SC EC/ENE
A - 29
Index
Appendix
A - 30
## **HEADQUARTERS**
## **EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES**
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **EUROPE** GEVA **AUSTRIA** Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1 Wiener Straße 89 **D-40882 Ratingen A-2500 Baden** Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **CZECH REP.** OOO TECHNIKON **BELARUS** Pekařská 621/7 Prospect Nezavisimosti 177-9 **CZ-155 00 Praha 5 BY-220125 Minsk** Phone: +420 255 719 200 Phone: +375 (0)17 / 393 1177 Fax: +420 251 551 471 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 393 0081 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **FRANCE** INEA RBT d.o.o. **BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA** 25, Boulevard des Bouvets Stegne 11 **F-92741 Nanterre Cedex SI-1000 Ljubljana** Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Phone: +386 (0)1/ 513 8116 Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 Fax: +386 (0)1/ 513 8170 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **IRELAND** AKHNATON **BULGARIA** Westgate Business Park, Ballymount 4, Andrei Ljapchev Blvd., PO Box 21 **IRL-Dublin 24 BG-1756 Sofia** Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6000 Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **ITALY** INEA CR **CROATIA** Viale Colleoni 7 Palazzo Sirio Losinjska 4 a **I-20864 Agrate Brianza (MB) HR-10000 Zagreb** Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **NETHERLANDS** AutoCont C. S. S.R.O. **CZECH REPUBLIC** Nijverheidsweg 23C Kafkova 1853/3 **NL-3641RP Mijdrecht CZ-702 00 Ostrava 2** Phone: +31 (0) 297 250 350 Phone: +420 595 691 150 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **POLAND** ul. Krakowska 48 HANS FØLSGAARD A/S **DENMARK PL-32-083 Balice** Theilgaards Torv 1 Phone: +48 (0) 12 347 65 00 **DK-4600 Køge** Fax: +48 (0) 12 630 47 01 Phone: +45 4320 8600 Fax: +45 4396 8855 Mitsubishi Electric (Russia) LLC **RUSSIA** 2 bld. 1, Letnikovskaya st. Electrobit OÜ **ESTONIA RU-115114 Moscow** Pärnu mnt. 160i Phone: +7 495 / 721 2070 **EST-11317, Tallinn** Fax: +7 495 / 721 2071 Phone: +372 6518 140 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **SPAIN** UTU Automation Oy **FINLAND** Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Apdo. 420 Peltotie 37i **E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) FIN-28400 Ulvila** Phone: +34 (0) 93 / 5653131 Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 500 Fax: +34 (0) 93 / 5891579 Fax: +358 207 / 463 501 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. (Scandinavia) **SWEDEN** UTECO A.B.E.E. **GREECE** Hedvig Möllers gata 6, 5, Mavrogenous Str. **SE- 223 55 Lund GR-18542 Piraeus** Phone: +46 (0) 8 625 10 00 Phone: +30 (0)211 / 1206-900 Fax: +30 (0)211 / 1206-999 Mitsubishi Electric Turkey Elektrik Ürünleri A.Ş. **TURKEY** Fabrika Otomasyonu Merkezi MELTRADE Kft. **HUNGARY** Şerifali Mahallesi Kale Sokak No:41 Fertő utca 14. **TR-34775 Ümraniye-İSTANBUL HU-1107 Budapest** Phone: +90 (216) 969 25 00 Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Fax: +90 (216) / 661 44 47 Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. **UK** OAK Integrator Products SIA **LATVIA** Travellers Lane Ritausmas iela 23 **UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB LV-1058 Riga** Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 28 87 80 Phone: +371 67842280 Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Automatikos Centras, UAB **LITHUANIA** Mitsubishi Electric Corporation **JAPAN** Neries krantiné 14A-101 Tokyo Building 2-7-3 **LT-48397 Kaunas** Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku Phone: +370 37 262707 **Tokyo 100-8310** Fax: +370 37 455605 Phone: +81 (3) 3218-2111 Fax: +81 (3) 3218-2185 ALFATRADE Ltd. **MALTA** 99, Paola Hill Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. **USA Malta-Paola PLA 1702** 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 **Vernon Hills, IL 60061** Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Phone: +1 (847) 478-2100 Fax: +1 (847) 478-0328
## **EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES**
INTEHSIS SRL **MOLDOVA** bld. Traian 23/1 **MD-2060 Kishinev** Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280 Fonseca S.A. **PORTUGAL** R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89 **PT-3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira** Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910 SIRIUS TRADING & SERVICES SRL **ROMANIA** Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3 **RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6** Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02 INEA SR d.o.o. **SERBIA** Ul. Karadjordjeva 12/217 **SER-11300 Smederevo** Phone: +381 69 172 27 25 SIMAP SK (Západné Slovensko) **SLOVAKIA** Dolné Pažite 603/97 **SK-911 06 Trenčín** Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20 INEA RBT d.o.o. **SLOVENIA** Stegne 11 **SI-1000 Ljubljana** Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8116 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170 OMNI RAY AG **SWITZERLAND** Im Schörli 5 **CH-8600 Dübendorf** Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28 CSC- AUTOMATION Ltd. **UKRAINE** 4 B, Yevhenа Sverstyuka Str. **UA-02002 Kiev** Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 44 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
## **EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES**
TOO Kazpromavtomatika **KAZAKHSTAN** UL. ZHAMBYLA 28, **KAZ-100017 Karaganda** Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
## **MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE**
EIM Energy **EGYPT** 3 Roxy Square **ET-11341 Heliopolis, Cairo** Phone: +202 24552559 Fax: +202 245266116 SHERF Motion Techn. Ltd. **ISRAEL** Rehov Hamerkava 19 **IL-58851 Holon** Phone: +972 (0)3 / 559 54 62 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 556 01 82 CEG LIBAN **LEBANON** Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA **Lebanon-Beirut** Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 445 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 193
## **AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE**
ADROIT TECHNOLOGIES **SOUTH AFRICA** 20 Waterford Office Park 189 Witkoppen Road **ZA-Fourways** Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 658 8100 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 658 8101
**==> picture [78 x 34] intentionally omitted <==**
**Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.** / FA - European Business Group / Mitsubishi-Electric-Platz 1 / D-40882 Ratingen / Germany / Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 / Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 / info@mitsubishi-automation.com / https://eu3a.mitsubishielectric.com
Updated at March 31, 2026
About Novapart
Novapart is a B2B electronic component broker specialising in stock shortages and cost reduction. We source hard-to-find parts and identify compliant alternatives across a catalogue of 540,000+ components from 500+ manufacturers.
Learn more →Stock Shortage Specialist
When a component is unavailable, discontinued or has an unacceptable lead time, we tap into our network of vetted European and Asian distributors to source what you need — without compromising on quality or traceability.
Request a quote →Compliant Alternatives
We identify pin-to-pin, electrically equivalent substitutes that meet the same certifications (RoHS, AEC-Q100, REACH) as your original specification — validated against datasheets, not just part numbers. Often at a lower cost.
BOM Analysis service →